MODELING AND CONTROL OF HYBRID WIND/PHOTOVOLTAIC/FUEL CELL DISTRIBUTED

402
MODELING AND CONTROL OF HYBRID WIND/PHOTOVOLTAIC/FUEL CELL DISTRIBUTED GENERATION SYSTEMS by Caisheng Wang A dissertation submitted in partial fulfillment of the requirement for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in Engineering MONTANA STATE UNIVERSITY Bozeman, Montana July 2006

Transcript of MODELING AND CONTROL OF HYBRID WIND/PHOTOVOLTAIC/FUEL CELL DISTRIBUTED

MODELING AND CONTROL OF HYBRID

WINDPHOTOVOLTAICFUEL CELL DISTRIBUTED GENERATION SYSTEMS

by

Caisheng Wang

A dissertation submitted in partial fulfillment of the requirement for the degree

of

Doctor of Philosophy in

Engineering

MONTANA STATE UNIVERSITY Bozeman Montana

July 2006

copyCOPYRIGHT

by

Caisheng Wang

2006

All Rights Reserved

ii

APPROVAL

of a dissertation submitted by

Caisheng Wang

This dissertation has been read by each member of the thesis committee and has been found to be satisfactory regarding content English usage format citations bibliographic style and consistency and is ready for submission to the Division of Graduate Education

Dr M Hashem Nehrir

Approved for the Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering

Dr James N Peterson

Approved for the Division of Graduate Education

Dr Joseph J Fedock

iii

STATEMENT OF PERMISSION TO USE In presenting this dissertation in partial fulfillment of the requirements for a doctoral degree at Montana State University I agree that the Library shall make it available to borrowers under rules of the Library I further agree that copying of this dissertation is allowable only for scholarly purposes consistent with ldquofair userdquo as prescribed in the US Copyright Law Requests for extensive copying or reproduction of this dissertation should be referred to ProQuest Information and Learning 300 North Zeeb Road Ann Arbor Michigan 48106 to whom I have granted ldquothe exclusive right to reproduce and distribute my dissertation in and from microform along with the non-exclusive right to reproduce and distribute my abstract in any format in whole or in partrdquo

Caisheng Wang July 2006

iv

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

I am grateful to acknowledge and thank all of those who assisted me in my graduate

program at Montana State University First I would like to thank Dr Hashem Nehrir my

academic advisor here at MSU His guidance support patience and personal time

throughout my years as a graduate student have been truly appreciated Special thanks are

given to my other graduate committee members Dr Steven Shaw Dr Don Pierre Dr

Hongwei Gao Dr Robert Gunderson and Dr Gary Bogar Special thanks also go to Dr

Hong Mao for his time and clarifying conversations on design and control of power

electronic devices Mr Sreedhar Gudarsquos help in the model developing for wind energy

conversion systems and Mr Marc Kepplerrsquos help in setting up the experimental circuit

for PEM fuel cell model validation are acknowledged Most importantly I would like to

thank my family and friends for their support throughout all the years

v

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF FIGURES xii

LIST OF TABLES xi

Abstract xii

1 INTRODUCTION 1

World Energy Demands 1

World and US Electricity Demands amp Generation 2 Conventional Thermal Electric Power Generation 6 Coal 6 Natural Gas 6 Oil 7

Nuclear Power 9 Hydroelectric Power 9

Why AlternativeRenewable Energy 10

Recent Progress in AlternativeRenewable Energy Technologies 14 Wind Energy 14 Photovoltaic Energy 16 Fuel Cells 18 Other Renewable Energy Sources 20 Distributed Generation Applications 23

Need for the Research 26

Scope of the Study 28

Organization of the Dissertation 28

REFERENCES 30

2 FUNDAMENTALS OF ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SYSTEMS 33

Energy Forms 33 Definition of Energy 33 Mechanical Energy 34 Chemical Energy 35 Electrical and Electromagnetic Energy 35 Thermal Energy 36 Nuclear Energy 37

Fundamentals of Thermodynamics 37 The First Law of Thermodynamics 37 The Heat Engine and Carnot Cycle 39 The Second Law of Thermodynamics 41

vi

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

Heat Transfer 42 Heat Transfer by Conduction 42 Heat Transfer by Convection 42 Heat Transfer by Radiation 43

Fundamentals of Electrochemical Processes 43 The Gibbs Free Energy 43 Energy Balance in Chemical Reactions 44 The Nernst Equation 47

Fundamentals of Alternative Energy Systems 48 Wind Energy System 49 Energy in Wind 49 Power Extracted from Wind 49 Tip Speed Ratio 51 Wind Energy Conversion System 52 Constant Speed and Variable Speed Wind Energy Conversion Systems 53 Wind Turbine Output Power vs Wind Speed 54

Photovoltaic Energy System 57 Fuel Cells 59 PEMFC 61 SOFC 63 MCFC 65

Electrolyzer 66

Summary 69

REFERENCES 70

3 MULTI-SOURCE ALTERNATIVE ENERGY DISTRIBUTED GENERATION SYSTEM 72

Introduction 72

AC Coupling vs DC Coupling 75

Stand-alone vs Grid-connected Systems 79

The Proposed System Configuration 79

System Unit Sizing 80

REFERENCES 85

4 COMPONENT MODELING FOR THE HYBRID ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SYSTEM 89

Dynamic Models and Model Validation for PEMFC 89 Introduction 89 Dynamic Model Development 91

vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

Gas Diffusion in the Electrodes 92 Material Conservation Equations 96 Fuel Cell Output Voltage 97 Double-Layer Charging Effect 101 Energy Balance of the Thermodynamics 102

Dynamic Model Built in MatlabSimulink 104 Equivalent Electrical Model in Pspice 105 Internal Potential E 106 Circuit for Activation Loss 107 Circuits for Ohmic and Concentration Voltage Drops 108 Equivalent Capacitor of Double-layer Charging Effect 109 Thermodynamic Block 109

Model Validation110 Experimental Setup 111 Steady-State Characteristics 113 Temperature Response115 Transient Performance116

Dynamic Models for SOFC118 Introduction118 Dynamic Model Development 119 Effective Partial Pressures 120 Material Conservation Equations 124 Fuel Cell Output Voltage 126 Energy Balance of the Thermodynamics 131 Dynamic SOFC Model Implementation 135

Model Responses under Constant Fuel Flow Operation 137 Steady-State Characteristics 137 Dynamic Response 140

Constant Fuel Utilization Operation 144 Steady-state Characteristics 145 Dynamic Responses 147

Wind Energy Conversion System 150 Introduction 150 System Configuration 151

Dynamic Model for Variable Speed Wind Turbine 152 Wind Turbine Characteristics 152 Pitch Angle Controller 155 Variable-speed Wind Turbine Model 157

Dynamic Model for SEIG 157 Steady-state Model 157 Self-excitation Process 160 Dynamic Model of SEIG in dq Representations 161

viii

Responses of the Model for the Variable Speed WECS 165 Wind Turbine Output Power Characteristic 165 Process of Self-excitation in SEIG 166 Model Responses under Wind Speed Changes 169

Solar Energy Conversion System 172 Modeling for PV CellModule 172 Light Current 173 Saturation Current 174 Calculation of α 174 Series Resistance 175 Thermal Model of PV 175

PV Model Development in MATLABSimulink 176 Model Performance 177 Temperature Effect on the Model Performance 179

Maximum Power Point Tracking Control 180 Current-Based Maximum Power Point Tracking 180 Control Scheme 182 Simulation Results 183

Electrolyzer 185 U-I Characteristic 185 Hydrogen Production Rate 186 Thermal Model 187 Electrolyzer Model Implementation in MATLABSimulink 189 Electrolyzer Model Performance 191

Power Electronic Interfacing Circuits 193 ACDC Rectifiers 193 Simplified Model for Controllable Rectifiers 197

DCDC Converters 200 Circuit Topologies 200 State-space Models Based on the State-space Averaging Technique 202 Averaged Models for DCDC Converters 205

DCAC Inverters 208 Circuit Topology 208 State-Space Model 208 dq Representation of the State-Space Model 212 Ideal Model for Three-phase VSI 214

Battery Model 217

Models for Accessories 218 Gas Compressor 218 High Pressure H2 Storage Tank 219 Gas Pressure Regulator 220

Summary 223

ix

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

REFERENCES 224

5 CONTROL OF GRID-CONNECTED FUEL CELL POWER GENERATION SYSTEMS 231

Introduction 231

System Description 232

Controller Designs for Power Electronic Devices 238 Controller Design for the Boost DCDC Converter 238 Controller Design for the 3-Phase VSI 241 Current Control Loop 241 Voltage Control Loop 245 Control of Power Flow 247 Overall Power Control System for the Inverter 249

Simulation Results 250 Desired P and Q Delivered to the Grid Heavy Loading 251 PEMFC DG 251 SOFC DG 254

Desired P Delivered to the Grid Q Consumed from the Grid Light Loading 256 PEMFC DG 256 SOFC DG 258

Load-Following Analysis 260 Fixed Grid Power 260 Fixed FC Power 261

Fault Analysis 263

Summary 266

REFERENCES 268

6 CONTROL OF STAND-ALONE FUEL CELL POWER GENERATION SYSTEMS 271

Introduction 271

System Description and Control Strategy 272 Load Mitigation Control 272 Battery ChargingDischarging Controller 276 Filter Design 277

Simulation Results 279 Load Transients 279 DC Load Transients 280 AC Load Transients 280

Load mitigation 282

x

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

PEMFC System 282 SOFC System 286

Battery ChargingDischarging 289

Summary 292

REFERENCES 293

7 CONTROL SCHEMES AND SIMULATION RESULTS FOR THE PROPOSED HYBRID WINDPVFC SYSTEM 295

Introduction 295

System Control Strategy 295 Overall Power Management Strategy 296 AC Bus Voltage Regulator 299 Electrolyzer Controller 300

Simulation Results under Different Scenarios 301 Winter Scenario 303 Weather Data 303 Simulation Results 305

Summer Scenario 314 Weather Data 314 Simulation Results 316

Summary 330

REFERENCES 331

8 OPTIMAL PLACEMENT OF DISTRIBUTED GENERATION SOURCES IN POWER SYSTEMS 332

Introduction 332

Optimal Placement of DG on a Radial Feeder 333 Theoretical Analysis 334 Procedure to Find the Optimal Location of DG on a Radial Feeder 336 Case Studies with Time Invariant Loads and DGs 338 Case Study with Time Varying Load and DG 340

Optimal Placement of DG in Networked Systems 341

Simulation Results 345 Radial Feeder with Time Invariant Loads and DG 346 Radial Feeder with Time Varying Loads and DG 348 Networked Systems 351

Summary 358

xi

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

REFERENCES 359

9 CONCLUSIONS 361

APPENDICES 364

APPENDIX A abc-dq0 TRANSFORMATION 365 abc-dq0 Transformation 366 dq0-abc Transformation 367

APPENDIX B SIMULATION DIAGRAMS OF THE HYBRID ENERGY SYSTEM 368

APPENDIX C MATLAB PROGRAMS FOR DG OPTIMAL PLACEMENT 373 DG Optimal Program for the IEEE 6-Bus system 374 DG Optimal Program for the IEEE 30-Bus system 375

xii

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure Page

11 World Energy Consumption 1970-2025 2

12 World and US Electricity Demands 1980-2025 4

13 World Electricity Generating Capacity 1980-2025 5

14 The world and US net electricity generation by type in 2002 5

15 Fuel shares of world electricity generation 2002-2025 8

16 US electricity generation by fuel types 8

17 World crude oil prices1978-2006 13

18 The world and the US wind power cumulative capacity 16

19 Cumulative Installed PV capacity in IEA PVPS countries 18

110 Cumulative installed FC units world-wide 1990-2005 19

21 Block diagram of an ideal heat engine 39

22 Carnot cycle (a) P-V (pressure-volume) diagram 40

(b) T-S (temperature-entropy) diagram 40

23 Theoretical rotor efficiency vs v0v ratio 51

24 Block diagram of a typical wind energy conversion system 52

25 Constant and variable speed wind energy conversion systems 55

26 Typical curves for a constant speed stall controlled (dotted)

and variable speed pitch controlled (solid) wind turbine 56

27 Schematic block diagram of a PV cell 58

28 PV Cell module and array 59

29 Schematic diagram of a PEMFC 61

210 V-I characteristic of a 500W PEMFC stack 62

211 Schematic diagram of a SOFC 63

212 V-I characteristic of a 5kW SOFC stack 64

213 Schematic diagram of a MCFC 65

214 Progress in generic performance of MCFCs on reformate gas and air 66

215 Schematic diagram of an alkaline electrolyzer 68

31 Hybrid energy system integration DC coupling 75

xiii

Figure Page

32 Hybrid energy system integration (a) PFAC coupling (b) HFAC coupling 76

33 System configuration of the proposed multi-source alternative

hybrid energy system (coupling inductors are not shown in the figure) 81

34 Hourly average demand of a typical residence

in the Pacific Northwest area 82

41 Schematic diagram of a PEMFC and voltage drops across it 93

42 Equivalent circuit of the double-layer charging effect inside a PEMFC 101

43 Diagram of building a dynamic model of PEMFC in SIMULINK 105

44 Diagram of building an electrical model of PEMFC in Pspice 106

45 Electrical circuit for internal potential E 107

46 Electrical circuit for activation loss 107

47 Electrical circuit for ohmic voltage drop 108

48 Electrical circuit for concentration voltage drop 109

49 Equivalent circuit of thermodynamic property inside PEMFC 110

410 Experimental configuration on the SR-12 PEMFC stack 112

411 V-I characteristics of SR-12 and models114

412 P-I characteristics of SR-12 and models 114

413 Temperature responses of the SR 12 stack and models 115

414 Transient responses of the models in short time range 117

415 Transient responses of the models in long time range 117

416 Schematic diagram of a solid oxide fuel cell 121

417 Equivalent electrical circuit of the double-layer charging effect inside a SOFC 130

418 Heat transfer inside a tubular solid oxide fuel cell 132

419 Diagram of building a dynamic model of SOFC in SIMULINK 137

420 V-I characteristics of the SOFC model at different temperatures 138

421 Three voltage drops at different temperatures 139

422 P-I characteristics of the SOFC model at different temperatures 140

423 Model dynamic responses with different equivalent

capacitance values for double-layer charging effect in small time scale 141

xiv

Figure Page

424 Model dynamic responses under different

operating pressures in medium time scale 142

425 Model dynamic responses under different

inlet temperatures in large time scale 143

426 Model temperature responses 144

427 Constant utilization control 145

428 V-I and P-I characteristics of the SOFC model

under constant fuel utilization and constant fuel flow operating modes 146

429 H2 input for the constant utilization and constant flow operating modes 147

430 Model dynamic responses under different operating pressures

in medium time scale with constant utilization operating mode 149

431 System block diagram of the WECS 152

432 Cp-λ characteristics at different pitch angles (θ) 154

433 Variable speed pitch controlled wind turbine operation regions 155

434 Pitch angle controller 156

435 Simulation model of the variable speed pitch-regulated wind turbine 156

436 Equivalent T circuit of self-excited induction generator with R-L Load 159

437 Determination of stable operation of SEIG 161

438 dq representation of a SEIG (All values are referred to stator) 162

439 Wind turbine output power characteristic 166

440 A successful self excitation process 167

441 Voltage fails to build up 167

442 Variation of magnetizing current Im 168

443 Variation of magnetizing inductance Lm 168

444 Wind speed variations used for simulation study 169

445 Output power of the WECS model under wind speed changes 169

446 Wind turbine rotor speed 170

447 Pitch angle controller response to the wind changes 171

448 Variation of power coefficient Cp 171

xv

Figure Page

449 One-diode equivalent circuit model for a PV cell

(a) Five parameters model (b) Simplified four parameters model 172

450 Block diagram of the PV model built in MATLABSimulink 176

451 I-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different irradiances 178

452 P-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different irradiances 178

453 I-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different temperatures 179

454 P-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different temperatures 179

455 Linear relationship between Isc and Imp under different solar irradiances 181

456 Ump vs Uoc curve under different solar irradiances 181

457 CMPPT control scheme 182

458 Imp and Ipv curves under the CMPPT control 183

459 PV output power and the maximum power curves 184

460 Block diagram of the electrolyzer model built in MATLABSimulink 189

461 U-I characteristics of the electrolyzer model under different temperatures 191

462 Temperature response of the model 192

463 Three-phase full diode bridge rectifier 194

464 Three-phase 12-diode bridge rectifier with a Y-Y and a Y-∆ transformer 195

465 A 6-pulse thyristor rectifier 197

466 Block diagram of the simplified model for 3-phase controllable rectifiers 198

467 DC output voltages of the different rectifier models 199

468 AC side phase current of the different rectifier models 199

469 Boost DCDC converter 201

470 Buck DCDC converter 201

471 Averaged model for boost DCDC converters 205

472 Simulation result of the averaged model for boost DCDC converter 206

473 Simulation result of the detailed model for boost DCDC converter 206

474 Averaged model for buck DCDC converters 207

475 Simulation result of the averaged model for buck DCDC converter 207

476 Simulation result of the detailed model for buck DCDC converter 208

xvi

Figure Page

477 3-phase DCAC voltage source inverter 209

478 Ideal model for three-phase VSI 215

479 AC phase output voltages of the ideal VSI model and the switched VSI model216

480 Output power of the ideal VSI model and the switched VSI model 216

481 Equivalent circuit model for battery reported in [481] 217

482 Simplified circuit model for lead-acid batteries 218

483 Pressured H2 storage tank 219

484 Gas pressure regulator 221

485 Performance of the model for gas pressure regulators 222

51 Block diagram of a fuel cell distributed generation system 233

52 Block diagram of the control loop for the boost DCDC converter 239

53 Bode plot of the control loop of the boost DCDC converter 240

54 Block diagram of the current control loop of the inverter 242

55 Bode plot of the current control loop 244

56 Unit step response of the current control loop and its approximation 245

57 Block diagram of the voltage control loop of the inverter 245

58 Bode plot of the voltage control loop 247

59 Power flow between a voltage source and utility grid 247

510 Block diagram of the overall power control system of the inverter 249

511 PEMFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under heavy loading 252

512 PEMFC DG dq values of the inverter output voltage under heavy load 252

513 PEMFC DG Output voltage and current of

each fuel cell array under heavy load 253

514 PEMFC DG DC bus voltage waveform under heavy load 254

515 SOFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under heavy loading 254

516 SOFC DG Output voltage and current of each FC array under heavy load 255

517 SOFC DG DC bus voltage under heavy loading 255

518 PEMFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid light loading 257

519 PEMFC DG Output voltage and current of

xvii

Figure Page

each fuel cell array under light loading 257

520 SOFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under light loading 259

521 SOFC DG Output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under light load 259

522 System for the PEMFC DG load-following study 261

523 Power curves of the load-following study with fixed grid power 262

524 System for the PEMFC DG load-following study 262

525 Power curves of the load-following study with fixed FC power 263

526 Faulted fuel cell DG system 264

527 Faulted PEMFC DG Power flow of the transmission line 265

528 Faulted PEMFC DG Fuel cell output powers for the fault studies 266

61 Schematic diagram of a FC-battery hybrid system

with load transient mitigation control 274

62 Schematic diagram of the battery chargingdischarging controller 275

63 Example of the responses of different filters to a load transient 278

64 Load transient of starting a 25HP and a 5kW 220V DC motor 280

65 AC load transient used on PEMFC-battery system 282

66 Reference signal (Iref) for the current controller battery current (ib)

and converter output current (idd_out) under the load transient for

PEMFC shown in Figure 64 284

67 The PEMFC output current and voltage responses to the

DC load transient shown in Figure 64 284

68 PEMFC The control reference signal (Iref) and battery current (ib)

under the AC load transient shown in Figure 65 285

69 The PEMFC output current and voltage responses

to the AC load transient shown in Figure 65 286

610 Reference signal (Iref) for the current controller the battery current (ib)

and the converter output current (idd_out) under the load transient

for SOFC shown in Figure 64 287

611 SOFC output current and voltage responses

xviii

Figure Page

to the DC load transient shown in Figure 64 287

612 Control reference signal (Iref) and battery current (ib)

under the AC load transient 288

613 The SOFC output current and voltage responses to the AC load transient 288

614 Battery voltage and extra current reference (Iref2) curves

when the battery is being charged 290

615 The load transient the overall current control reference signal (Iref)

the low-pass filter output signal (Iref1) and the corresponding

converter output current (idd_out) when the battery is being charged 291

71 Simulation model for the proposed

hybrid alternative energy system in MATLABSimulink 297

72 Block diagram of the overall control scheme for

the proposed hybrid alternative energy system 298

73 Block diagram of the AC voltage regulator 299

74 Block diagram of the electrolyzer controller 300

75 Load demand profile over 24 hours for the system simulation study 302

76 Wind speed data for the winter scenario simulation study 303

77 Solar irradiance data for the winter scenario simulation study 304

78 Air temperature data for the winter scenario simulation study 304

79 Wind power of the winter scenario study 305

710 Pitch angle of the wind turbine of the winter scenario study 306

711 Rotor speed of the induction generator of the winter scenario study 306

712 PV power for the winter scenario 308

713 Current difference between the actual output current and

the reference current for the maximum power point of the winter scenario 308

714 The PV temperature response over the simulation period for

the winter scenario 309

715 Power available for H2 generation of the winter scenario 309

716 H2 generation rate of the winter scenario study 310

xix

Figure Page

717 Electrolyzer voltage and current for the winter scenario study 310

718 Power shortage over the simulation period of the winter scenario study 311

719 Power supplied by the FC of the winter scenario study 312

720 H2 consumption rate of the winter scenario study 312

721 The pressure tank over the 24 hour of the winter scenario study 313

722 The battery power over the simulation period for the winter scenario 314

723 Corrected wind speed data for the summer scenario simulation study 315

724 Irradiance data for the summer scenario simulation study 315

725 Air temperature data for the summer scenario simulation study 316

726 Wind power generated for the summer scenario study 317

727 Rotor speed of the induction generator for the summer scenario study 317

728 PV power generated for the winter scenario study 318

729 The PV and air temperature over the simulation period for

the winter scenario study 319

730 Power available for H2 generation for the summer scenario study 320

731 H2 generation rate for the summer scenario study 320

732 Electrolyzer voltage and current for the summer scenario study 321

733 Power shortage over the simulation period for the summer scenario study 322

734 Power supplied by the FC over the simulation period for

the summer scenario study 322

735 H2 consumption rate for the summer scenario study 323

736 The H2 tank pressure over the 24 hour for the summer scenario study 323

737 The battery power over the simulation period for the summer scenario 324

738 Wind speed data for the simulation study with continuous

weather data and load demand 325

739 Solar irradiance data for the simulation study with

continuous weather data and load demand 325

740 Air temperature for the simulation study with

continuous weather data and load demand 326

xx

Figure Page

741 Wind power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario 327

742 PV power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario 327

743 Power available for H2 generation for the

continuous weather data and load demand scenario 328

744 FC output power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario 328

745 Battery power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario 329

81 A feeder with distributed loads along the line 334

82 Procedure for finding optimal place for a DG source in a radial feeder 338

83 A networked power system 342

84 Flow chart of The theoretical procedure to find the

optimal bus to place DG in a networked system 346

85 A radial feeder with uniformly distributed loads 347

86 Annual daily average output power profile of a 1-MW wind-DG 349

87 Daily average demand of a typical house 350

88 Power losses of the radial feeder with the wind-DG at different buses 350

89 6-bus networked power system studied 351

810 Power losses of the system in Figure 89 with a 5MW DG 352

811 Values of the objective function of the system in Figure 89 353

812 IEEE 30-bus test system 354

813 Power losses of the IEEE 30-bus test system with a 15MW DG 354

814 Values of the objective function of the IEEE 30-bus system 355

815 Power losses of the subset system in Figure 812 with a 5MW DG 356

816 Values of the objective function of the subset system in Figure 812 356

B1 Simulink model for the wind energy conversion system 369

B2 Simulink model for the solar energy conversion system 370

B3 Simulink model for the fuel cell and the gas pressure regulation system 371

B4 Simulink model for the electrolyzer and the gas compression system 372

xi

LIST OF TABLES

Table Page 11 Current Status and the DOE Targets for

PEMFC Stack in Stationary Applications 21

12 Current status and the SECA targets for 3-10 kW

SOFC module in stationary applications 22

13 Technologies for Distributed Generation Systems 25

21 Standard thermodynamic properties (enthalpy entropy and Gibbs energy) 46

31 Comparison among Different Integration Schemes 78

32 Component Parameters of the Proposed Hybrid Energy System 84

41 Analogies between Thermodynamic and Electrical Quantities 110

42 Specifications of SR-12 111

43 Electrical Model Parameter Values for SR-12 Stack 112

44 Operating Conditions for the Model Dynamic Response Studies 141

45 Parameter values for C1-C5 153

46 SEIG Model Parameters 165

47 The PV Model Parameters 177

48 The Electrolyzer Model Parameters 190

49 Constants of Beattie-Bridgeman Equation of State for H2 220

51 Configuration Parameters of the Proposed System 236

52 System Parameters of the Boost DCDC Converter 240

53 Parameters of the Current Control Loop the Inverter 243

54 Parameters of the Voltage Control Loop the Inverter 246

61 Parameters of the DCDC Converter 275

62 Parameters of the Battery Model 276

71 Weather Station information at

Deer Lodge Montana AgriMet Station (DRLM) 302

81 Theoretical Analysis Results of Case Studies

with Time Invariant Loads and DGs 339

82 Parameters of the System in Figure 85 347

xii

83 Simulation Results of Case Studies with Time Invariant Loads and DG 348

84 Parameters of the System in Figure 89 352

85 Bus Data of the IEEE 30-Bus Test System 357

xii

Abstract

Due to ever increasing energy consumption rising public awareness of environmental protection and steady progress in power deregulation alternative (ie renewable and fuel cell based) distributed generation (DG) systems have attracted increased interest Wind and photovoltaic (PV) power generation are two of the most promising renewable energy technologies Fuel cell (FC) systems also show great potential in DG applications of the future due to their fast technology development and many merits they have such as high efficiency zero or low emission (of pollutant gases) and flexible modular structure

The modeling and control of a hybrid windPVFC DG system is addressed in this

dissertation Different energy sources in the system are integrated through an AC bus Dynamic models for the main system components namely wind energy conversion system (WECS) PV energy conversion system (PVECS) fuel cell electrolyzer power electronic interfacing circuits battery hydrogen storage tank gas compressor and gas pressure regulator are developed Two types of fuel cells have been modeled in this dissertation proton exchange membrane fuel cell (PEMFC) and solid oxide fuel cell (SOFC) Power control of a grid-connected FC system as well as load mitigation control of a stand-alone FC system are investigated The pitch angle control for WECS the maximum power point tracking (MPPT) control for PVECS and the control for electrolyzer and power electronic devices are also addressed in the dissertation

Based on the dynamic component models a simulation model for the proposed hybrid

energy system has been developed using MATLABSimulink The overall power management strategy for coordinating the power flows among the different energy sources is presented in the dissertation Simulation studies have been carried out to verify the system performance under different scenarios using a practical load profile and real weather data The results show that the overall power management strategy is effective and the power flows among the different energy sources and the load demand is balanced successfully

The DGrsquos impacts on the existing power system are also investigated in this

dissertation Analytical methods for finding optimal sites to deploy DG sources in power systems are presented and verified with simulation studies

1

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

Energy is essential to everyonersquos life no matter when and where they are This is

especially true in this new century where people keep pursuing higher quality of life

Among different types of energy electric energy is one of the most important that people

need everyday In this chapter an overview is given on the world energy demand

electricity consumption and their development trend in the near future The electric power

generation technologies based on different energy sources are also reviewed in the

chapter Finally the need for this research work is addressed and the scope of the research

is also defined

World Energy Demands

The world energy consumption is expected to grow about 57 in the next two

decades [11] Figure 11 shows the strong growth of the global energy demand in the

past three decades and its projection over the next two decades The world energy

consumption by fuel type in 2002 is also shown in the figure It is clear that a large part

of the total energy is provided by fossil fuels (about 86 in 2002) The future of the

global economy growth is highly dependent on whether the ever-increasing energy

demand can be met

Fossil fuels are not evenly distributed around the world and regional or global

conflicts may arise from energy crisis if our economy is still heavily dependent on them

Moreover during the process of generating and using electrical energy with todayrsquos

2

conventional technologies the global environment has already been significantly affected

and the environment of some regions has been damaged severely Therefore it is a big

challenge for the whole world to figure out how to generate the needed amount of energy

and the types of energy sources

207243

285310

348366

412

504

553

598

645

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2002 2010 2015 2020 2025

Quadrillion Btu

History Projections Nuclear

7

Other

8

Coal

24

Oil

38

Natural

Gas

23

Figure 11 World Energy Consumption 1970-2025 [11]-[13]

World and US Electricity Demands amp Generation

The world electric energy consumption is expected to increase by more than 50 by

2025 [11]-[13] shown in Figure 12 About 24 of the world total electricity demand in

2003 is consumed by US (Figure 12) and it is anticipated to grow 44 in the first

quarter of the new century [11]-[13] Moreover the electricity demand from emerging

economic regions such as China and India is increasing even faster

3

To meet the future global electricity demand an extensive expansion of installed

generating capacity is necessary Worldwide installed electricity generating capacity is

expected to increase from 3626 GW (gigawatts) in 2003 to 5495 GW in 2025 (Figure

13) at a 22-percent average annual growth rate [11]-[14]

The percentage of US electricity generating capacity over the total world generating

capacity is declining It drops from around 25 in 2003 to about 20 in 2025 (Figure 13)

according to the estimation of Energy Information Administration (EIA) Nevertheless

the electricity generation capacity of US is still expected to grow about 38 from 2000

to 2025 [11] By comparing the electricity consumption data in Figure 12 and the

generation capacity data in Figure 13 it is noted that the US electricity consumption is

growing faster than the generation capacity If this trend is not reversed it is expected

that the US would have to import more electric power in the near future Otherwise the

reserve margin of the whole power system in the US will shrink which will

compromise system stability and power delivery reliability

Electricity can be generated in many ways from various energy sources Electric

power can be generated by conventional thermal power plants (using fossil fuels or

nuclear energy) hydropower stations and other alternative power generating units (such

as wind turbine generators photovoltaic arrays fuel cells biomass power plants

geothermal power stations etc) Fossil fuels (including coal oil and natural gas) and

nuclear energy are not renewable and their resources are limited On the other hand

renewable energy resources (wind and solar energy for example) can self-renew and

sustain for future use Figure 14 shows the world and US net electricity generation by

type in 2002 It is clear from this figure that more than 80 of the world and US

4

electricity generation are still contributed by the conventional fossil-fuel thermal power

plants and nuclear power plants [11] [14] Except for the hydroelectric power the

portion of the electricity generated from other renewablealternative sources is very small

In the following of this section an overview will be given on the current status and the

future development trend of different types of electricity generation

0

5000

10000

15000

20000

25000

30000

1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2002 2003 2010 2015 2020 2025

World

US

Billion kWh

History Projections

Figure 12 World and US Electricity Demands 1980-2025 [11]-[13]

5

0

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2003 2010 2015 2020 2025

World

US

GW

History Projections

Figure 13 World Electricity Generating Capacity 1980-2025 [11] [14]

Nuclear

17

Hydroelectric

17 Conventional

Thermal

64

Hydroelectric

7

Nuclear

20

Conventional

Thermal

71

Figure 14 The world and US net electricity generation by type in 2002 [11] [14]

6

Conventional Thermal Electric Power Generation

Conventional thermal power plants generate electric power using fossil fuels namely

coal oil and natural gas In a fossil-fired thermal power plant water passes through a

boiler heated by burning fossil fuels to produce high temperature and high pressure

steam The steam then enters a multi-stage steam turbine which operates a generator to

produce electricity

Coal Due to its low price and relative abundant reserves coal is and should

continue to be the dominant fuel for electricity generation of the world and the US

shown in Figures 15 and 16 The United States and China currently are the leaders in

terms of installed coal-fired capacity Both countries have large amount of coal reserves

Even under the pressure of Kyoto Protocol for reducing greenhouse gas and other air

pollutant emissions coal-fired electricity generation capacity is still expected to grow by

15 percent per year and coal is expected to fuel 38 (Figure 15) of the electricity

generation of the entire world by 2025 [13] However this trend could be changed if

higher pressure is applied to implement environment protection policies such as the

Kyoto Protocol and the Clean Air Act in the US

Natural Gas Natural-gas-fired power generation technology is an attractive option

for new power plants because of its fuel efficiency operating flexibility rapid

deployment and lower installation costs compared to other conventional generation

technologies Regulatory policies to reduce carbon dioxide emissions could accelerate the

switch from coal to gas However the amount of natural gas reserve is not as plentiful as

7

coal In the US the amount of dry natural gas reverses was 192513 billion cubic feet in

2004 [14] In the same year the total natural gas consumption in the US was 224303

billion cubic feet And about a quarter of this consumption was for electricity generation

If dry natural gas was the only means of reserving and the amount of reserves would not

change then that amount could only supply the US natural gas needs for less than 10

years at the consumption rate of 2004 [14]

Oil On the world average oil is not and will not be a major source for electric

power The main reason is that the major petroleum products are produced for

transportation purposes such as automobile gasoline jet fuel etc but not for electricity

generation The first problem with oil is that the whole world is short of its reserves while

the demand for oil keeps increasing The oil demand is expected to grow at about 25

per year [15] The amount of proven crude oil reserves in the world in 2005 is 1277

billion barrels1 The world oil consumption in 2002 was 782 million barrels per day [15]

If we could keep this consuming rate unchanged then the whole world oil reserves could

only sustain for less than 45 years Even if the more optimistic data 2947 billion barrels

(including reserve growth and the estimated undiscovered oil reserves) of the oil reserves

are used the world will still run out of oil in about one hundred years and forty years

under the same consumption rate Greenhouse gas and air pollutant emission is another

big problem with using oil Moreover there are many other problems associated with oil

such as high oil price and the instability of some oil production regions

1 1 barrel = 42 US gallons

8

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

2002 2010 2015 2020 2025

HydroelectricOther

Nuclear

Natural Gas

Oil

Coal

Percentage

Figure 15 Fuel shares of world electricity generation 2002-2025 [11] [12]

0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

4500

5000

1990 2000 2010

HydroelectricOther

Nuclear

Natural Gas

Oil

Coal

Billion kWh

Figure 16 US electricity generation by fuel types [14]

9

Nuclear Power

Nuclear energy is an important source for electricity generation in many countries In

2003 19 countries depended on nuclear power for at least 20 percent of their electricity

generation [16] France is the country which has the highest portion (781) of the

electricity generated by nuclear power [16] Though the percentage of nuclear electric

power over the total national electricity generation is not very high (about 20) the US

is still the worlds largest producer of electric power using nuclear fuels Higher fossil

fuel prices and the entry into force of the Kyoto Protocol could result in more electricity

generated by nuclear power In the emerging economic regions such as China and India

nuclear power capacity is expected to grow [11] However nuclear power trends can be

difficult or even be reversed due to a variety of reasons The safety of a nuclear power

plant is still the biggest concern And how to deposit nuclear wastes can always be a

discussion topic for environmentalists Moreover the nuclear fuel (Uranium) is not

renewable The US Uranium reserves are 1414 million pounds at the end of 2003 [16]

This amount of reserve can supply the US for about 270 years at the Uranium annual

consumption rate of 24072 metric tons (2002 statistical data)

Hydroelectric Power

Today hydropower is still the largest renewable source for electricity generation in

the world In 2002 more than 18 of the world electricity was supplied by renewable

sources most of which comes from hydropower shown in Figure 15 [11] [12] The

world hydroelectric capacity is expected to grow slightly due to large hydroelectric

projects in the regions with emerging economies The Three Gorges hydropower project

10

in China is now the biggest hydropower project ever carried out in the world Upon the

completion of the Three Gorges project in 2009 it will have a generating capacity of 182

GW (26 units total and 700MW for each unit) [17]

Although the hydropower is clean and renewable there are still some problems

associated with it First the big dams and reservoirs cause a lot of environmental

concerns and social disputes Second the relocation of reservoir populations can be a big

problem For example over a million people will be relocated for the Three Gorges

project [18] Moreover hydropower is not as abundant as desired In the US for

example the available hydropower sources (except in Alaska) have almost been explored

All these factors determine that hydropower can not play a major role in the future new

electricity supply in the world

Why AlternativeRenewable Energy

The term ldquoalternative energyrdquo is referred to the energy produced in an

environmentally friendly way (different from conventional means ie through fossil-fuel

power plants nuclear power plants and hydropower plants) Alternative energy

considered in this dissertation is either renewable or with high energy conversion

efficiency There is a broad range of energy sources that can be classified as alternative

energy such as solar wind hydrogen (fuel cell) biomass and geothermal energy

Nevertheless as mentioned in the previous section at the present the majority of the

world electricity is still generated by fossil fuels nuclear power and hydropower

However due to the following problemsconcerns for conventional energy technologies

the renewablealternative energy sources will play important roles in electricity

11

generation And sooner or later todayrsquos alternatives will become tomorrowrsquos main

sources for electricity

1) Conventional energy sources are not renewable As discussed in the above

section both the fossil fuels (coal and oil and natural gas) and nuclear fuels are not

renewable The reserves of these fuels will run out some day in the future A long term

energy development strategy is therefore important for sustainable and continuous

economy growth

2) Conventional generation technologies are not environmentally friendly

Although there have been substantial improvements in the technologies (such as

desulfurization) for reducing emissions conventional thermal power plants still produce a

large amount of pollutant gases such as sulfur oxide and nitrogen oxide [19] The

radioactive waste of nuclear power plants is always a big concern to the environment

The dams and reservoirs of hydropower can change the ecological systems of the original

rivers and the regions of the reservoirs substantially [110]

3) The cost of using fossil and nuclear fuels will go higher and higher Since these

fuel sources are not renewable while the world energy demand is steadily increasing it is

obvious that the price of these fuels will go higher Taking world crude oil price for

example the price has been increased by 57 in the last year [111] Compared to natural

gas and petroleum coal is cheap for electricity generation However if the cost for

reducing emissions is taken into account the actual price of generating electricity from

coal would be much higher The growing cost of using conventional technologies will

make alternative power generation more competitive and will justify the switchover from

conventional to alternative ways for electric power generation

12

4) Hydropower sources are not enough and the sites are normally far away from

load centers Hydropower is good because it is clean and renewable However as

mentioned in the previous section the total amount of hydropower that can be explored is

not enough And in many developed countries the hydropower has been almost explored

fully Moreover hydroelectric sites normally are in remote areas Long transmission lines

add more difficulties and cost in exploring hydropower since the permission of the

right-of-way for transmission lines is much more difficult to obtain than before

5) Political and social concerns on safety are pushing nuclear power away In

general government energy strategy guides the development of nuclear power There are

almost no cases that corporations or utilities make the decisions to build nuclear power

plants based on their economic considerations Accidents at the Three Mile Island nuclear

power plant in the United States in 1979 and Chernobyl in the Soviet Union in 1986 fed

people full of fears No body wants to be a neighbor of a nuclear power plant or facility

This changes the government energy policy substantially In the US there is no new

order for nuclear units in the near future [16] In Europe several countries including

Italy Austria Belgium Germany and Sweden stepped out from nuclear power even

before the Chernobyl disaster [11]

On the other hand compared with conventional electricity generation technologies

alternativerenewable power have the following advantages

1) Renewable energy resources are not only renewable but also abundant For

example according to the data of 2000 the US wind resources can produce more

electricity than the entire nation would use [112] The total solar energy from sun in a

day at the earth surface is about 1000 times more than the all fossil fuels consumption

13

[19]

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

1978

1989

1990

1991

1992

1993

1994

1995

1996

1997

1998

1999

2000

2001

2002

2003

2004

2005

2006

US $ per barrel

Figure 17 World crude oil prices1978-2006 [111]

(Note The price is based on the first week data of January in each year)

2) Fuel cell systems have high energy efficiency The efficiency of low temperature

proton exchange membrane (PEM) fuel cells is around 35-45 [113] High temperature

solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC) can have efficiency as high as 65 [114] The overall

efficiency of an SOFC based combined-cycle system can even reach 70 [114]

3) Renewable energy and fuel cell systems are environmentally friendly From these

systems there is zero or low emission (of pollutant gases) that cause acid rain urban

smog and other health problems and therefore there is no environmental cleanup or

waste disposal cost associated with them [19]

4) Different renewable energy sources can complement each other Though renewable

14

energy resources are not evenly distributed throughout the world every region has some

kinds of renewable energy resources At least sunlight reaches every corner in the world

And different energy resources (such as solar and wind energy) can complement each

other This is important to improve energy security for a nation like the US which is

currently dependent on the foreign energy sources

5) These renewablealternative power generation systems normally have modular

structure and can be installed close to load centers as distributed generation sources

(except large wind and PV farms) Therefore no high voltage transmission lines are

needed for them to supply electricity

In general due to the ever increasing energy consumption the rising public

awareness for environmental protection the exhausting density of fossil-fuel and the

intensive political and social concerns upon the nuclear power safety alternative (ie

renewable and fuel cell based) power generation systems have attracted increased

interest

Recent Progress in AlternativeRenewable Energy Technologies

In the following section the recent progress in wind power solar power fuel cells

and other renewable energy technologies will be reviewed An overview on their

applications as distributed generation will also be given

Wind Energy

Wind energy is one of worlds fastest-growing energy technologies Both the global

and US wind energy experienced a record year in 2005 According to the figures

15

released by the Global Wind Energy Council (GWEC) in 2005 there was a 434

increase in annual additions to the global market and a 5642 increase in the annual

addition to the US wind power generation capacity Last year was just one of the record

years In the past 11 years the global wind energy capacity has increased more than 17

times mdash from 35 GW in 1994 to almost 60 GW by the end of 2005 (Figure 18) In the

United States wind power capacity has increased more than 3 times in only 5 years (from

2554 MW in 2000 to 9149 MW by the end of 2005) also shown in Figure 18 The future

prospects of the global wind industry are also very promising even based on a

conservative projection that the total global wind power installed could reach 160 GW by

2012 A spread of new countries across the world will participate in the global wind

energy market in the next ten years [115]

The phenomenal worldwide growth of the wind industry during the past decade can

be attributed to supportive government policies and the fast development in innovative

cost-reducing technologies In the US the work conducted under the Wind Energy

Programrsquos Next Generation Wind Turbine (1994 ndash 2003) and WindPACT (1999 ndash 2004)

projects under the Department of Energy (DOE) resulted in innovative designs high

power ratings and increased efficiencies [116] All these technological advances have

led to dramatic reductions in cost of electricity (COE) mdash from $08kWh in the

early1980s to about $004kWh today for utility-scale (normally gt= 750kW) turbines

[116] [19] Although this drop in COE has been impressive more research work is still

needed to make wind power more competitive Development in aerodynamic efficiency

structural strength of wind turbine blades larger turbine blades and higher towers

variable speed generators and power controllers will help to reduce the COE further The

16

DOE goal is to reduce the COE produced by land-based utility-scale turbines located in

Class 4 wind resource areas (areas with 58 ms wind speed at a10-m height) to

$003kWh by 2012 [116]

0

10000

20000

30000

40000

50000

60000

1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005

World

US

MW

Figure 18 The world and the US wind power cumulative capacity [115] [116]

Photovoltaic Energy

Solar energy basically is the ultimate source for all kinds of energy resources on the

earth with only a few exceptions such as geothermal energy There are normally two

ways to generate electricity from sunlight through photovoltaic (PV) and solar thermal

systems In this section and this dissertation only photovoltaic energy and system will be

discussed

Just like the growth of wind energy PV energy is another fast growing renewable

energy technology Though the absolute size of global solar power generation capacity is

17

much smaller than wind power it has been increased even faster than wind power during

the past dozen years (from 1992-2004) [117] In terms of the market for PV power

applications in the IEA-PVPS2 (International Energy Agency ndash Photovoltaic Power

Systems Programme) countries the total installed PV capacity has been increased more

than 23 times ndash from the 110 MW in 1992 to 2596 MW in 2004 (Figure 19) [117]

Due to improvements in semiconductor materials device designs and product quality

and the expansion of production capacity capital costs for PV panels have been

decreased significantly from more than $50W in the early of 1980s [19] to about 35$ to

45$ per watt in 2004 [117] The cost of electricity produced by PV systems continues to

drop It has declined from $090kWh in 1980 to about 020$kWh today [19] In the

US the DOE goal is to reduce the COE of PV to $006kWh by 2020 [119] However

PV energy is still usually more expensive than energy from the local utility Currently the

initial investment of a PV system is also higher than that of an engine generator

Nevertheless there are many applications for which a PV system is the most

cost-effective long-term option especially in remote areas such as power for remote

telecommunications remote lighting and signs remote homes and recreational vehicles

2 There are 19 countries participating in the IEA PVPS program They are Australia Austria Canada Denmark France Germany Israel Italy Japan Korea Mexico the Netherlands Norway Portugal Spain Sweden Switzerland UK and USA Over 90 of the world total PV capacity is installed in the IEA-PVPS countries The top three PV countries Japan Germany and the US are all the members of the organization

18

0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

1992 1994 1996 1998 2000 2002 2004

MW

Figure 19 Cumulative Installed PV capacity in IEA PVPS countries [117]

Fuel Cells

Fuel cells (FCs) are static energy conversion devices that convert the chemical energy

of fuel directly into DC electrical energy Fuel cells have a wide variety of potential

applications including micro-power auxiliary power transportation power stationary

power for buildings and other distributed generation applications and central power

Since entering the new century fuel cell technologies have experienced exponential

growth shown in Figure 110 [120] The total number of fuel cell applications reached

14500 in 2005 [120] Government policies public opinion and technology advance in

fuel cells all contributed to this phenomenal growth

19

Figure 110 Cumulative installed FC units world-wide 1990-2005 [120]

Among different types of fuel cells polymer electrolyte membrane fuel cells

(PEMFC) and solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC) both show great potentials in transportation

and DG applications3 [113] [120] Compared with conventional power plants these

fuel cell DG systems have many advantages such as high efficiency zero or low emission

(of pollutant gases) and flexible modular structure Fuel cell DGs can be strategically

placed at any site in a power system (normally at the distribution level) for grid

reinforcement deferring or eliminating the need for system upgrades and improving

system integrity reliability and efficiency Moreover as a byproduct high-temperature

fuel cells also generate heat that makes them suitable for residential commercial or

industrial applications where electricity and heat are needed simultaneously [113]

[121]

3 Vehicle application is still the main market for PEMFC though it also has high potential for stationary power generation For SOFCs stationary power generation is their main application But they do have a foothold in the transport market as well with new planar design

20

The DOE recently updated its ldquoHydrogen Fuel Cells and Infrastructure Technologies

Programrsquos Multi-Year Research Development and Demonstration Planrdquo written in 2003

[122] In the Plan it lays out industry targets for key fuel cell performance indices such

as cost durability and power density In 1999 the Solid State Energy Conversion

Alliance (SECA) was founded for bringing together government industry and the

scientific community to promote the development of SOFC Through these years

collaborative work among the government industry national labs and universities great

advances in fuel cell technologies have been achieved in many aspects These address

FCs a bright future although extensive work is still needed to be done before they can

really play main roles in energy market Table 11 gives the current status and the DOE

goals for PEMFC [122] [123] Table 12 summaries the current development stage of

SOFC and SECA targets [124]-[126] It is noted from the two tables that the possibility

of reaching the ultimate DOE and SECA goals is high

Other Renewable Energy Sources

In addition to PV and wind energy there are many other renewable energy resources

such as biomass geothermal energy solar thermal energy and tidal power These energy

resources can all be utilized to generate electricity Among them biomass and geothermal

energy technologies have the leading generation capacity in the US [19]

21

TABLE 11 CURRENT STATUS AND THE DOE TARGETS A FOR

PEMFC STACK B IN STATIONARY APPLICATIONS

Characteristics Units Current Status

2010 Goal

Stack power density WL 1330 2000

Stack specific power Wkg 1260 2000

Stack efficiency 25 of rated power 65 65

Stack efficiency rated power 55 55

Precious metal loading gkW 13 03

Cost $kWe 75 30

Durability with cycling hours 2200 C 5000

Transient response (time for 10 to 90 of rated power)

sec 1 1

Cold startup time to 90 of rated power ndash20 ordmC ambient temperature

sec 100 C 30

Survivability ordmC -40 -40

A Based on the technical targets reported in [122] for 80-kWe (net) transportation

fuel cell stacks operating on direct Hydrogen

B Excludes hydrogen storage and fuel cell ancillaries thermal water air

management systems

C Based on the performance data reported by Ballard in 2005 [123]

Biomass can be burned directly co-fired with coal or gasified first and then used to

generate electricity It can also be used to generate bio-fuels such as ethanol Most of

todayrsquos US biomass power plants use direct-combustion method In 2004 the total

22

generation capacity of biomass reached 9709 MW about 1 of the total US electric

capacity [127]

TABLE 12 CURRENT STATUS AND THE SECA TARGETS FOR

3-10 KW SOFC MODULE IN STATIONARY APPLICATIONS

Phase I A Current Status II

III (By 2010)

Cost 800$kW 724$kW B $400kW

Efficiency 35-55 41 b 40-60 40-60

Steady State

Test Hours 1500 1500 1500 1500

Availability 80 90 B 85 95

Power Degradation per 500 hours

le2 13 C le1 le01

Transient Test

Cycles 10 na 50 100

Power Degradation after Cycle Test

le1 na le05 le01

Power Density 03Wcm2 0575Wcm2 D 06Wcm2 06Wcm2

Operating Temperature

800 ordmC 700-750 ordmC C 700 ordmC 700 ordmC

Evaluate the potential to achieve $400kW [124]

A The goals of Phase I have been achieved GE is the first of six SECA industry

teams to complete phase I of the program [125]

B Based on the data reported by GE

C Based on the data reported by FuelCell Energy [126]

D Based on the data reported by Delphi [125]

23

Geothermal energy can be converted into electricity by three technologies dry steam

flush and binary cycle The most common type of geothermal plants is flush power plant

while the world largest geothermal plant is of the dry steam type [128] The dry stream

geothermal power plant at The Geysers in California is the largest geothermal power

plant in the world with a capacity of 2000 MW [19] However due to the limited

amount of available geothermal heat resources one will not expect to see any

considerable growth in this area Actually the geothermal generation capacity in the US

declined from 2793MW in 2000 to 2133 MW in 2004 [127] Nevertheless it can be an

important energy source in remote areas where geothermal resources are available and

abundant

Distributed Generation Applications

The ever-increasing need for electrical power generation steady progress in the

power deregulation and utility restructuring and tight constraints over the construction of

new transmission lines for long distance power transmission have created increased

interest in distributed power generation DG sources are normally placed close to

consumption centers and are added mostly at the distribution level They are relatively

small in size (relative to the power capacity of the system in which they are placed and

normally less than 10 MW) and modular in structure These DG devices can be

strategically placed in power systems for grid reinforcement reducing power losses and

on-peak operating costs improving voltage profiles and load factors deferring or

eliminating the need for system upgrades and improving system integrity reliability and

efficiency [133]

24

The technology advances in renewable energy sources fuel cells and small generation

techniques provide a diverse portfolio for DG applications Table 13 shows the candidate

technologies for DG systems The DOE proposed a strategic plan for distributed energy

sources in 2000 [129] The energy market with DG sources in 2020 was envisioned in

the plan as ldquoThe United States will have the cleanest and most efficient and reliable

energy system in the world by maximizing the use of affordable distributed energy

resourcesrdquo [129] To achieve this ultimate goal the DOE also set sub-goals for DG

development The long-term goal by 2020 is ldquoto make the nationrsquos energy generation and

delivery system the cleanest and most efficient reliable and affordable in the world by

maximizing the use of cost efficient distributed energy resourcesrdquo The mid-term by 2010

is to reduce costs to increase the efficiency and reliability of distributed generation

technologies and to add 20 of new electric capacity By the end of 1999 about 22GW

distributed energy systems with 18 GW backup units were installed across the US [131]

According to EIA US generation capacity history and forecast data 198 GW of new

capacity is needed during the period between 2000 and 2010 [14] Based on the

mid-term goal 20 (396 GW) of the new addition should come from DG systems This

means about 44 annual growth rate in DG capacity

25

TABLE 13 TECHNOLOGIES FOR DISTRIBUTED GENERATION SYSTEMS [130]

Technology Size Fuel Electrical Efficiency

( LHV)

Combustion Turbine Combined Cycle

50-500 MW Natural gas liquid

fuels 50-60

Industrial Combustion Turbine

1-50 MW Natural gas liquid

fuels 25-40

Internal Combustion Turbine(Reciprocating

Engine)

1kW ndash 10 MW

Natural gas diesel oil propane gasoline etc

25-38

Mircroturbine 27-400 kW Landfill gas

propane natural gas and other fuels

22-30

Stirling Engine 11-50kW Any 18-25

Fuel Cells 1kW Natural gas H2

other H2-rich fuels 35-60

Photovoltaic 1W ndash 10MW Renewable 5-15 A

Wind Turbine 02kW ndash 5MW

Renewable lt 40

Biomass B Several kW ndash 20 MW

Renewable ~ 20

A PV cell energy conversion efficiency

B Based on the data reported in [19]

26

Need for the Research

The ever increasing energy consumption rapid progress in wind PV and fuel cell

power generation technologies and the rising public awareness for environmental

protection have turned alternative energy and distributed generation as promising

research areas Due to natural intermittent properties of wind and solar irradiation

stand-alone windPV renewable energy systems normally require energy storage devices

or some other generation sources to form a hybrid system Because some of renewable

energy sources can complement each other (section 13) multi-source alternative energy

systems (with proper control) have great potential to provide higher quality and more

reliable power to customers than a system based on a single resource However the

issues on optimal system configuration proper power electronic interfaces and power

management among different energy sources are not resolved yet Therefore more

research work is needed on new alternative energy systems and their corresponding

control strategies

Fuel cells are good energy sources to provide reliable power at steady state but they

cannot respond to electrical load transients as fast as desired This problem is mainly due

to their slow internal electrochemical and thermodynamic responses [132] The transient

properties of fuel cells need to be studied and analyzed under different situations such as

electrical faults on the fuel cell terminals motor starting and electric vehicle starting and

acceleration Therefore dynamic fuel cell models are needed to study those transient

phenomena and to develop controllers to solve or mitigate the problem

27

Fuel cells normally work along with power electronic devices One problem is that

there is not adequate information exchange between fuel cell manufacturers and power

electronic interface designers Without adequate knowledge about the area of each other

the fuel cell manufacturers normally model the power electronic interface as an

equivalent impedance while the power electronic circuit designers take the fuel cell as a

constant voltage source with some series resistance These inaccurate approaches may

cause undesired results when fuel cells and their power electronic interfaces are

connected together It is important and necessary to get a better understanding of the

impact of power electronic interface on fuel cellrsquos performance and of the fuel cellrsquos

impact on power electronic interfacing circuits Dynamic model development for fuel

cells using electrical circuits can be a solution so that the researchers in both areas can

understand each other Moreover it will provide a more efficient way to integrate the fuel

cells and power electronic devices together

Distributed generation devices can pose both positive and negative impacts on the

existing power systems [133] These new issues have led DG operation to be an

important research area Research on optimal placement (including size) of DGs can help

obtain maximum potential benefits from DGs

28

Scope of the Study

Although there are many types of alternativerenewable resources the alternative

sources in this dissertation are confined to wind PV and fuel cells for the research on the

proposed hybrid alternative energy systems The main focus is given to modeling

validation and control for fuel cells and fuel cell based stand-alone and grid-connected

systems Two types of fuel cells will be modeled and used in the dissertation PEMFC

and SOFC The ultimate goal of this dissertation is to model a multi-source alternative

DG system consisting of wind turbine(s) PV arrays fuel cells and electrolyzers and to

manage the power flows among the different energy resources in the system The optimal

placement of DG sources in power systems is also investigated on system operation level

Organization of the Dissertation

After the introduction conducted and the reason for the research explained in this

chapter Chapter 2 reviews the fundamentals of electrochemistry thermodynamics power

electronics and the alternative energy technologies including wind PV and fuel cells

Chapter 3 introduces hybrid energy systems gives possible ways of system integration

and presents a proposed hybrid windPVFC energy system Chapter 4 describes the

models for the components in the proposed system discussed in Chapter 3 Power

electronic interfacing circuits with appropriate controllers are discussed in Chapter 4 as

well

29

Chapters 5 and 6 focus on control for fuel cell based systems Control for

grid-connected fuel cell systems is discussed in Chapter 5 In Chapter 6 load mitigation

control for stand-alone fuel cell systems is investigated

The overall control scheme development for the proposed multi-source alternative

system is given in Chapter 7 Simulation results under different scenarios are given and

discussed in the chapter The optimal placement of DG sources in power systems (both

radial feeders and networked systems) is investigated in Chapter 8

30

REFERENCES

[11] International Energy Outlook 2005 Energy Information Administration (EIA) httpwwweiadoegoviea

[12] International Energy Annual 2003 EIA httpwwweiadoegoviea

[13] System for the Analysis of Global Energy Markets 2005 EIA httpwwweiadoegoviea

[14] Annual Energy Outlook 2006 (Early Release) EIA httpwwweiadoegov

[15] World Oil Market International Energy outlook - International Petroleum (Oil) Reserves and Resources EIA httpwwweiadoegoviea

[16] US Nuclear Generation of Electricity EIA httpwwweiadoegoviea

[17] Online http www3ggovcn

[18] Million Relocates of Unprecedented Scale httpwww3ggovcnshuniuymgc200305170065htm

[19] SR Bull ldquoRenewable Energy Today and Tomorrowrdquo Proceedings of IEEE Vol 89 No 8 pp1216-1221 August 2001

[110] FA Farret and MG Simotildees Integration of Alternative Sources of Energy John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2006

[111] World Crude Oil Prices EIA httptontoeiadoegovdnavpetpet_pri_wco_k_whtm

[112] M R Patel Wind and Solar Power Systems CRC Press LLC 1999

[113] Fuel Cell Handbook (Sixth Edition) EGampG Services Inc Science Applications International Corporation DOE Office of Fossil Energy National Energy Technology Lab Nov 2002

[114] O Yamamoto ldquoSolid oxide fuel cells fundamental aspects and prospectsrdquo Electrochimica Acta Vol 45 No (15-16) pp 2423-2435 2000

[115] Global Power Source Global Wind Energy Council httpwwwgwecnet

[116] Wind Power Today ndash Federal Wind Program Highlights NREL DOEGO-102005-2115 April 2005

31

[117] Trends in photovoltaic applications Survey report of selected IEA countries between 1992 and 2004 International Energy Agency Photovoltaics Power Systems Programme (IEA PVPS) September 2005

[118] Online httpwwwnrelgovanalysisnewsletters2006_januaryhtml

[119] National Status Report 2004 ndashUSA IEA-PVPS httpwwwoja-servicesnliea-pvpsnsr04usa2htm

[120] Fuel Cell Today 2005 Worldwide Survey httpwwwfuelcelltodaycom

[121] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained 2nd Edition John Wiley amp Sons Ltd 2003

[122] The Hydrogen Fuel Cells amp Infrastructure Technologies Program Multi-Year Research Development and Demonstration Plan February 2005 Version

[123] Technology Road Map ndashBallard Power Systems Inc httpwwwballardcombe_informedfuel_cell_technologyroadmap

[124] SECA Program Plan DOE Office of Fossil Energy The DOE National Energy Technology Laboratory (NETL) and the Pacific Northwest National Laboratory Jan 2002

[125] Significant Milestone Achieved in SECA Fuel Cell Development Program httpwwwnetldoegovpublicationsTechNewstn_ge_secahtml Jan 2006

[126] Thermally Integrated High Power Density SOFC Generator FuelCell Energy Inc FY 2004 Progress Report

[127] Renewables and Alternate Fuels Energy Information Administration (EIA) httpwwweiadoegovfuelrenewablehtml

[128] Online httpwwweereenergygovgeothermalpowerplantshtmlflashsteam

[129] Strategic Plan for Distributed Energy Resources mdash Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy US Department of Energy September 2000

[130] DER Technologies Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) October 2002

[131] Establishing a Goal for Distributed Energy Resources Distributed Energy Resources The Power to Choose on November 28 2001 by Paul Lemar httpwwwdistributed-generationcomLibrarypaul_lemarpdf

[132] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion vol 20 no 2 pp442-451 June 2005

32

[133] C Wang and MH Nehrir ldquoAnalytical Approaches for Optimal Placement of Distributed Generation Sources in Power Systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Systems vol 19 no 4 pp 2068-2076 Nov 2004

33

CHAPTER 2

FUNDAMENTALS OF ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SYSTEMS

This chapter reviews the fundamental concepts and principles of energy systems and

energy conversion The overview of the fundamentals of electrochemistry

thermodynamics and alternative energy systems is a good introduction for understanding

and modeling of the proposed multi-source alternative energy system discussed in the

following chapters

Energy Forms

Definition of Energy

Energy is defined as the amount of work a physical system is capable of doing

Energy is a fundamental quantity that every physical system possesses In a broad sense

energy can neither be created nor consumed or destroyed However it may be converted

or transferred from one form to other Generally speaking there are two fundamental

types of energy transitional energy and stored energy [21] Transitional energy is energy

in motion also called kinetic energy such as mechanical kinetic energy Stored energy is

energy that exists as mass position in a force field (such as gravity and electromagnetic

fields) etc which is also called potential energy More specifically energy can exist in

the following five basic forms

(1) Mechanical energy

(2) Chemical energy

(3) Electrical and electromagnetic energy

34

(4) Thermal energy

(5) Nuclear energy

Mechanical Energy

Mechanical energy is the type of energy associated with moving objects or objects

that have potential to move themselves or others It can be defined as work used to raise a

weight [21] The mechanical kinetic energy of a translating object (Emt) with a mass m at

speed v is

2

2

1mvEmt = (21)

For a rotating body with moment of inertia (rotational inertia) I at angular speed ω its

kinetic mechanical energy (Emr) is defined as

2

2

1ωIEmr = (22)

Mechanical potential energy is the energy that a given system possesses as a result of

its status in a mechanical force field [21] For example in a gravity field g the potential

mechanical energy of a body with mass m at height h is given as

mghEmpg = (23)

As another example the potential energy of an elastic spring with the spring constant

k at the displacement x is

2

2

1kxEmps = (24)

35

Chemical Energy

Chemical energy is the energy held in the chemical bonds between atoms and

molecules [22] Every bond has a certain amount of energy Chemical energy exists as a

stored energy form which can be converted to other energy forms through reactions First

energy is required to break the bonds - called endothermic Then energy will be released

(called exothermic) when these broken bonds combine together to create more stable

molecules If the total energy released is more than the energy taken in then the whole

reaction is called exothermic Otherwise the reaction is called endothermic The burning

of fossil fuels (combustion) is one of the most important exothermic reactions for

producing energy Photosynthesis is a good example for endothermic reaction since

plants use energy from sun to make the reaction happen

Electrical and Electromagnetic Energy

Electrical and electromagnetic energy is the energy associated with electrical

magnetic andor electromagnetic fields It is normally expressed in terms of electrical

andor electromagnetic parameters For example the electro-static energy stored in a

capacitor is

C

qEC

2

2

1= (25)

where C is the capacitance of the capacitor and q is the total charge stored

The magnetic energy stored in an inductor with inductance L at current i is

2

2

1LiEm = (26)

36

Another expression used to represent magnetic energy is [23]

int=V

m dVHE 2

2

1micro (27)

where micro is the material permeability H is the magnetic field intensity and V is the object

volume under consideration This expression is especially useful in calculating hysteresis

losses inside power transformers

Radiation energy is one of the forms of electromagnetic energy The radiation energy

only exists in transitional form and it is given by [21]

fhER sdot= (28)

where h is the Planckrsquos constant (6626times10-34 Js) and f is the frequency of the radiation

Thermal Energy

From a macroscopic observation thermal energy or heat can be defined as energy

transferred between two systems due to temperature difference [24] From a micro-level

point of view thermal energy is associated with atomic and molecular vibration [21] All

other forms of energy can be converted into thermal energy while the opposite conversion

is limited by the second law of thermodynamics (which will be explained briefly in

section 22) Based on this fact thermal energy can be considered the most basic form of

energy [21]

37

Nuclear Energy

Nuclear energy is a topic irrelevant to this dissertation But for the completion of the

discussion on energy forms a very brief overview on nuclear energy is also included here

Similar to chemical energy nuclear energy is also a type of stored energy The energy

will be released as a result of nuclear reaction (normally fission reaction) to produce a

more stable configuration Take the uranium-235 nucleus as an example When it

captures a neutron it will split into two lighter atoms and throws off two or three new

neutrons The new atoms then emit gamma radiation as they settle into their new more

stable states An incredible amount of energy is released in the form of heat and gamma

radiation during the above process The mass of fission products and the neutrons

together is less than the original U-235 atom mass The mass defect is governed by the

famous Einsteinrsquos mass-energy equation [21]

E = mc2 (29)

where m is the material mass and c is the speed of light in vacuum (asymp2998times108 ms)

Fundamentals of Thermodynamics

Thermodynamic analysis of energy conversion processes is important for modeling

and control of hybrid energy systems Therefore in this section a brief overview of the

fundamental concepts and principles of thermodynamics is given

The First Law of Thermodynamics

According to the first law of thermodynamics the energy of a system is conserved

Energy here is in the form of either of heat or work This law describes that energy can

38

neither be created or destroyed but it can be converted from one type to another The

change in the system energy dE is contributed by the heat entering (dQ) the system and

the work done by the system (dW) to the outside [25] [26]

dWdQdE minus= (210)

Note that the work in the above equation is the work leaving the system The system

here is an idealized object which is used to limit our study scope A system can be

isolated from ldquoeverything elserdquo in the sense that changes in everything else need not

affect its state [25] The external ldquoeverything elserdquo is considered to be the environment

of the system Of particular interest is one type of system called a simple system that is

not affected by capillarity distortion of solid phase external force fields (electromagnetic

and gravitational) or internal adiabatic walls [25] For a simple system the total system

energy is equal to the total system internal energy denoted by symbol U [25] In this

dissertation we only consider simple systems

E = U (211)

For a control volume or open system (any prescribed and identifiable volume in

space) usually there is expansion when heat is absorbed by the system at constant

pressure Part of the heat goes into internal energy and causes temperature to rise And the

rest of the heat is used to expand against the pressure P A property of the system called

enthalpy (H) is used to represent the system state under certain condition

H = U +PV (212)

where V is the system volume Enthalpy is a state parameter which is independent of

which way the system reaches that condition Equation (211) now can be represented as

39

dWdQdH minus= (213)

The Heat Engine and Carnot Cycle

The heat engine is designed to convert heat to work Figure 21 shows the block

diagram of an idealized heat engine If we want the heat engine to work continuously

then the system (the working substance in the figure) is subjected to a cyclic process A

cyclic process is one in which the system returns to its original state after a cycle For a

practical heat engine there are many processes undergoing And it is also complicated

and difficult to analyze all of them In 1842 a French scientist named Sadi Carnot

presented a way to analyze cyclic thermal processes and discovered the maximum

possible heat efficiency of a heat engine

Figure 21 Block diagram of an ideal heat engine

The Carnot cycle is shown in Figure 22 The cycle consists of two isothermal

processes and two adiabatic processes Figure 22 (a) shows the P-V diagram of the

40

Carnot cycle [26] The heat Q1 enters the system at T1 and Q2 leaves system at T2 Since

this process is cyclic the system energy remains the same after any cycle According to

the First Law of Thermodynamics (Equation 210) it can be shown that

S∆

(a) (b)

Figure 22 Carnot cycle (a) P-V (pressure-volume) diagram (b) T-S (temperature-entropy) diagram

21 QQW minus= (214)

W is the work done by the system to the outside which can also be represented by the

area abcd in Figure 22 (a) For the Carnot cycle it has been proved that

2

2

1

1

T

Q

T

Q= (215)

The efficiency of the system then is

1

2

1

21

1

1T

T

Q

QQ

Q

Wc minus=

minus==η (216)

It is clear from (216) that in order to get a higher efficiency the temperature

difference should be larger

Another contribution from Carnot is that QT can be a state property of the system by

41

showing the equivalence of Q1T1 and Q2T2 [see (215)] Based on Carnotrsquos idea

Clausius developed the concept of entropy and presented the Second Law of

Thermodynamics

The Second Law of Thermodynamics

The concept is introduced to indicate to what extent of disorder a system is at If the

system is undergoing an infinitesimal reversible process with dQ heat entering the system

at temperature T then the infinitesimal change in its entropy is defined as [25]-[28]

revT

dQdS = (217)

A reversible process is a process that can be reversed without leaving any traces to its

environment If a cyclic process only consists of reversible processes then there is no

entropy change (∆S = 0) after a cycle On the other hand if the cycle contains an

irreversible process then a change of entropy will be generated Entropy is an important

system property It is also very useful in describing a thermodynamic process Figure 22

(b) shows the T-S diagram of a Carnot Cycle The area abcd also represents the work

done to the system environment

The Second Law of Thermodynamics is described by the Clausius inequality [25]

[28] For any cyclic process we have

int le 0T

dQ (218)

The equality sign only applies to a reversible cyclic process The above inequality can

be expressed in an infinitesimal form as

42

T

dQdS ge (219)

The equality sign applies to a reversible cyclic process and the inequality sign applies

to an irreversible process That is to say for any irreversible process it occurs in a

direction to which the change of entropy is greater than dQT This means that heat

cannot be transferred from a low temperature to a higher temperature without a need of

work from outside The Second Law also reveals that no real heat engine efficiency can

reach 100 due to the increase of entropy For an isolated system the change of entropy

will always be greater than or equal to zero

Heat Transfer

In this section the equations governing different ways of heat transfer are reviewed

Heat Transfer by Conduction For isotropic solids (whose properties and

constitution in the neighborhood of any two points are the same at any direction) heat

transfer by conduction is governed by Fourier heat-conduction equation [24]

d

TTkAQcond

12 minus= (220)

where Qcond is the heat transferred A is the face area of the element normal to the heat

flow k is the effective thermal conductivity d is the distance between the two points of

interest and (T2-T1) is the temperature difference

Heat Transfer by Convection Heat transfer by convection is the heat exchange

between a flowing fluid (natural or forced) and a solid surface The convective heat

transfer is given as [24]

43

)( sfconv TThAQ minus= (221)

where h is the effective convection heat transfer coefficient A is the solid area contacting

the fluid Tf is the bulk temperature of the fluid and Ts is the temperature of the solid This

equation is also called Newtonrsquos law of cooling

Heat Transfer by Radiation Based on (28) the radiation heat exchange rate

between two objects at different temperatures is [24]

)( 4

2

4

1 TTAQrad minus= εσamp (222)

where Qrad is the radiation heat (J) ε is the effective emissivity of the system σ is

Stefan-Boltzmann Constant (56703times10-8 Wmiddotm-2middotK-4)

Fundamentals of Electrochemical Processes

The Gibbs Free Energy

The Gibbs Free Energy also called the Gibbs Energy or ldquofree enthalpyrdquo is defined as

[25] [28]

G = H-TS = U + PV -TS (223)

Chemical reactions proceed towards the direction that minimizes the Gibbs Energy

Differentiating the above equation we can obtain

)()( SdTTdSVdPPdVdUSdTTdSdHdG +minus++=+minus= (224)

dG is negative as a chemical reaction approaches its equilibrium point and it will be

zero at the equilibrium point According to the First Law of Thermodynamics (210) for

a simple system the above equation can be rewritten as

)()( SdTTdSVdPPdVdWdQSdTTdSdHdG +minus++minus=+minus= (225)

44

If the system is restricted to performing only expansion-type of work (dW = PdV) and

the process is reversible (dQ = TdS) then four terms on the right side of (225) will be

cancelled out resulting in

SdTVdPdG minus= (226)

At a given temperature T Gibbs energy under any pressure can be calculated based

on the above equation for that given temperature

)ln()()(0

0

P

PnRTTGTG += (227)

where )(0 TG is the standard (P0 = 1 atm) Gibbs energy at temperature T

For an electrochemical reaction the maximum work (electricity) is determined by the

change in the Gibbs Energy as the reactants change to products It can be shown that the

maximum work is equal to the change in the Gibbs energy [28]

GWe ∆minus= (228)

Energy Balance in Chemical Reactions

In a chemical reaction the change in enthalpy due to the reaction is [28]

sumsum minus=minus=∆Rj

RjRj

Pi

PiPiRP HNHNHHH (229)

where HP is the total enthalpy of the products and HR is the total enthalpy of the reactants

NPi is the amount of moles of the ith species in the products and NRj is the amount of

moles of the jth species in the reactants Accordingly HPi (HRj) is the molar enthalpy of

the corresponding species which can be represented as

PifPi HHHH )( 00 minus+= (230)

45

where 0

fH is the standard molar enthalpy of formation (Jmol) and (H-H0) is the sensible

enthalpy due to the temperature difference

The change of entropy due to the reaction is [28]

sumsum minus=minus=∆Rj

RjRj

Pi

PiPiRP SNSNSSS (231)

where SP is the total entropy of the products and SR is the total entropy of the reactants

SPi (SRj) is the molar entropy of the corresponding species

The change of the Gibbs free energy due to the reaction then can be obtained from

(223) as

STHGGG RP ∆minus∆=∆minus∆=∆ (232)

Two example reactions [(233) and (234)] are given to show how to calculate the

change of Gibbs energy in a reaction The enthalpy and entropy values for water

hydrogen and oxygen are given in Table 21 The reactions are assumed to happen under

standard conditions (1 atm and 25 ˚C)

)(2

1222 gOHOH =+ (233)

)(2

1222 lOHOH =+ (234)

where subscript ldquogrdquo represents that the reaction product is in gas form and subscript

ldquolrdquo is used to indicate that the reaction product is in liquid form

46

TABLE 21 STANDARD THERMODYNAMIC PROPERTIES

(ENTHALPY ENTROPY AND GIBBS ENERGY) [29]

Name Hf (kJmol) S (JmolK)

H2O(g) -2418 1887

H2O(l) -2858 699

H2 0 1306

O2 0 205

For the reaction given in (233) we have

8241)008241( minus=minusminusminus=minus=∆ RP HHH (kJmol)

444)2055061307188( minus=timesminusminus=minus=∆ RP SSS (JmolK)

Therefore the change in the Gibbs energy of the reaction given in (233) is

=timesminustimesminusminus=∆minus∆=∆ minus )10444(2988241 3STHG -22857 kJmol

For the reaction given in (234) we have

8285)008285( minus=minusminusminus=minus=∆ RP HHH (kJmol)

2163)205506130969( minus=timesminusminus=minus=∆ RP SSS (JmolK)

Therefore the change in the Gibbs energy of the reaction given in (234) is

=timesminustimesminusminus=∆minus∆=∆ minus )102163(2988285 3STHG -23716 kJmol

From the above examples we can see that more work can be done if the product

(H2O) is in liquid form

47

The Nernst Equation

Consider an electrochemical reaction under constant temperature and pressure that the

reactants X and Y form products M and N given by (235)

dNcMbYaX +hArr+ (235)

where a b c and d are stoichiometric coefficients

According to (232) the change of the Gibbs energy of the reaction is [28]

YXNMRP bGaGdGcGGGG minusminus+=minus=∆

In terms of the change of the standard Gibbs energy G∆ can also be expressed as

[see (227)]

+∆=∆

b

Y

a

X

d

N

c

M

PP

PPRTGG ln0 (236)

where 00000

YXNM bGaGdGcGG minusminus+=∆

In an electrochemical reaction the work can be considered as the electrical energy

delivered by the reaction The electrochemical work is

FEnW ee = (237)

where ne is number of participating electrons F is Faraday constant (96487 Cmol) and E

is the voltage difference across the electrodes

According to (228) the change in Gibbs energy is the negative value of the work

done by the reaction

FEnWG ee minus=minus=∆ (238)

Under standard condition the above equation turns out to be

48

000 FEnWG ee minus=minus=∆ (239)

where E0 is the standard reference potential

From (238) we can calculate the electrode voltage E as

minus

∆minus=

∆minus=

b

Y

a

X

d

N

C

M

eee PP

PP

Fn

RT

Fn

G

Fn

GE ln

0

(240)

Writing the above in terms of standard reference potential E0 we get the well-known

electrochemical formula Nernst equation [28] [210]

+=

minus=

d

N

C

M

b

Y

a

X

e

b

Y

a

X

d

N

C

M

e PP

PP

Fn

RTE

PP

PP

Fn

RTEE lnln 00

(241)

For a fuel cell with an overall reaction as given by (233) then the voltage across the

fuel cell electrodes (or the internal potential of the fuel cell) is

+=

OH

OH

P

PP

F

RTEE

2

50

220 ln2

(242)

If the product (H2O) is in liquid form given by (234) then the fuel cell internal

potential is

( )5022

0 ln2

OH PPF

RTEE += (243)

Fundamentals of Alternative Energy Systems

In this section the fundamentals of wind energy generation system PV cells fuel

cells and electrolyzers are reviewed

49

Wind Energy System

Energy in Wind Wind energy systems harness the kinetic energy of wind and

convert it into electrical energy or use it to do other work such as pump water grind

grains etc The kinetic energy of air of mass m moving at speed v can be expressed as

[211]

2

2

1mvEk = (244)

During a time period t the mass (m) of air passing through a given area A at speed v

is

Avtm ρ= (245)

where ρ is the density of air (kgm3)

Based on the above two equations the wind power is

3

2

1AvP ρ= (246)

The specific power or power density of a wind site is given as

3

2

1v

A

PPden ρ== (247)

It is noted that the specific power of a wind site is proportional to the cube of the

wind speed

Power Extracted from Wind The actual power extracted by the rotor blades from

wind is the difference between the upstream and the down stream wind powers

)(2

1 2

0

2 vvkP m minus= (248)

50

where v is the upstream wind velocity at the entrance of the rotor blades v0 is the

downstream wind velocity at the exit of the rotor blades km is the mass flow rate which

can be expressed as

2

0vvAkm

+= ρ (249)

where A is the area swept by the rotor blades

From (248) and (249) the mechanical power extracted by the rotor is given by

)(22

1 2

0

20 vvvv

AP minus

+= ρ (250)

Let

minusminus

+=

2

00 1112

1

v

v

v

vC p and rearrange the terms in (250) we have

pCAvP 3

2

1ρ= (251)

Cp is called the power coefficient of the rotor or the rotor efficiency It is the fraction

of the upstream wind power which is captured by the rotor blades and has a theoretical

maximum value of 059 shown in Figure 23 In practical designs maximum achievable

Cp is between 04 and 05 for high-speed two-blade turbines and between 02 and 04 for

low-speed turbines with more blades [211]

It is noted from (251) that the output power of a turbine is determined by the

effective area of the rotor blades (A) wind speed (v) and wind flow conditions at the

rotor (Cp) Thus the output power of the turbine can be varied by changing the effective

area andor by changing the flow conditions at the rotor system Control of these

quantities forms the basis of control of wind energy systems

51

0 02 04 06 08 10

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

v0 v

Cp

Figure 23 Theoretical rotor efficiency vs v0v ratio

Tip Speed Ratio The tip speed ratio λ (TSR) defined as the ratio of the linear speed

at the tip of the blade to the free stream wind speed is given as follows [211]

v

Rωλ = (252)

where R is the rotor blade radius and ω is the rotor angular speed

TSR is related to the wind turbine operating point for extracting maximum power

The maximum rotor efficiency Cp is achieved at a particular TSR which is specific to the

aerodynamic design of a given wind turbine For variable TSR turbines the rotor speed

will change as wind speed changes to keep TSR at some optimum level Variable TSR

turbines can produce more power than fixed TSR turbines [212]

52

Wind Energy Conversion System The block diagram of a typical wind energy

conversion system is shown in Figure 24

Figure 24 Block diagram of a typical wind energy conversion system

The principle components of a modern wind turbine are the tower the yaw the rotor

and the nacelle which accommodates the gear box and the generator The tower holds the

53

main part of the wind turbine and keeps the rotating blades at a height to capture

sufficient wind power The yaw mechanism is used to turn the wind turbine rotor blades

against the wind Wind turbine captures the windrsquos kinetic energy in the rotor consisting

of two or more blades The gearbox transforms the slower rotational speeds of the wind

turbine to higher rotational speeds on the electrical generator side Electrical generator

will generate electricity when its shaft is driven by the wind turbine whose output is

maintained as per specifications by employing suitable control and supervising

techniques In addition to monitoring the output these control systems also include

protection equipment to protect the overall system [211]

Two distinctly different design configurations are available for a wind turbine the

horizontal axis configuration and the vertical axis configuration The vertical axis

machine has the shape like an egg beater (also called the Darrieus rotor after its inventor)

However most modern turbines use horizontal axis design [211]

Constant Speed and Variable Speed Wind Energy Conversion Systems (WECS)

Generally there are two types of wind energy conversion systems constant speed and

variable speed systems shown in Figure 25 [212] In Figure 25 (a) the generator

normally is a squirrel cage induction generator which is connected to a utility grid or load

directly Since the generator is directly coupled the wind turbine rotates at a constant

speed governed by the frequency of the utility grid (50 or 60 Hz) and the number of poles

of the generator The other two wind power generation systems shown in Figure 25 (b)

and (c) are variable speed systems In Figure 25 (b) the generator is a doubly-fed

induction generator (wound rotor) The rotor of the generator is fed by a back-to-back

54

converter voltage source converter The stator of the generator is directly connected to

load or grid Through proper control on the converter for the rotor the mechanical speed

of the rotor can be variable while the frequency of output AC from the stator can be kept

constant Figure 25 (c) shows a variable speed system which is completely decoupled

from load or grid through a power electronic interfacing circuit The generator can either

be a synchronous generator (with excitation winding or permanent magnet) or an

induction generator In this dissertation a variable speed WECS similar to the one shown

in Figure 25 (c) is used for the hybrid energy system study The generator used in the

study is a self-excited induction generator

Wind Turbine Output Power vs Wind Speed A typical power vs wind speed curve

is shown in Figure 26 [212] [215] When the wind speed is less than the cut-in speed

(normally 3-5 ms) [212] there is no power output Between the cut-in speed and the

rated or nominal wind speed (normally 11-16 ms) [212] the wind turbine output power

is directly related to the cubic of wind speed as given in (251) When the wind speed is

over the nominal value the output power needs to be limited to a certain value so that the

generator and the corresponding power electronic devices (if any) will not be damaged

In other words when the wind speed is greater than the rated value the power coefficient

Cp needs to be reduced [see (251)] When the wind speed is higher than the cut-out speed

(normally 17-30 ms) [212] the system will be taken out of operation for protection of

its components

55

Figure 25 Constant and variable speed wind energy conversion systems [212]

56

Figure 26 Typical curves for a constant speed stall controlled (dotted) and variable speed pitch controlled (solid) wind turbine [212] [215]

There are several ways to control the wind turbine output power The two common

ways to achieve this goal are stall control and pitch control [211]-[215]

For a stall controlled wind turbine there is no active control applied to it The output

power is regulated through a specifically designed rotor blades The design ensures that

when the wind speed is too high it creates turbulences on the side of the rotor blades The

turbulences will decrease the aerodynamic efficiency of the wind turbine as a result

Pitch control is an active method which is used to reduce the aerodynamic efficiency

by changing pitch angle (turning the rotor blades out of wind) of the rotor blades It

should be noted that the pitch angle can change at a finite rate which may be quite low

due to the size of the rotor blades The maximum rate of change of the pitch angle is in

the order of 3 to 10 degreessecond [215]

It is noted from Figure 26 that a variable speed system normally has lower cut-in

speed The rated speed is also normally lower than a constant speed system For wind

57

speeds between the cut-in and the nominal speed there will be 20-30 increase in the

energy capture with variable speed compared to the fixed-speed operation[211]-[215]

shown in Figure 26 For a pitch controlled wind system the power for wind speeds over

the nominal value can be held constant precisely On the other hand for a stall controlled

constant speed system the output power will reach its peak value somewhat higher than

its rated value and then decreases as wind speed grows

Photovoltaic Energy System

Terminology

Solar radiation Also called insolation consists of the radiation that comes directly

from the sun (beam radiation) as well as the radiation that comes indirectly (diffusion and

albedo radiation) [216]

Solar constant The solar radiation that falls on a unit area above the atmosphere at a

vertical angle is called solar constant It has a value of 1367 Wmsup2 [216]

Air mass A convenient lumped parameter used for the amount of sunlight absorbed in

the atmosphere The amount of beam solar radiation absorbed in the atmosphere in a

direct vertical path to sea level is designated as one air mass (AM1) In general air mass

is proportional to the secant of the zenith angle [216]

Irradiance A measure of power density of sunlight it has a unit of Wm2

Irradiation A measure of energy density (Jm2) it is the integral of irradiance over

time

Photovoltaic effect is a basic physical process through which solar energy is

converted into electrical energy directly The physics of a PV cell or solar cell is similar

58

to the classical p-n junction diode shown in Figure 27 [211] At night a PV cell can

basically be considered as a diode When the cell is illuminated the energy of photons is

transferred to the semiconductor material resulting in the creation of electron-hole pairs

The electric field created by the p-n junction causes the photon-generated electron-hole

pairs to separate The electrons are accelerated to n-region (N-type material) and the

holes are dragged into p-region (P-type material) shown in Figure 27 The electrons

from n-region flow through the external circuit and provide the electrical power to the

load at the same time

Figure 27 Schematic block diagram of a PV cell

The PV cell shown in Figure 27 is the basic component of a PV energy system Since

a typical PV cell produces less than 2 W at approximately 05 V DC it is necessary to

connect PV cells in series-parallel configurations to produce desired power and voltage

ratings Figure 28 shows how single PV cells are grouped to form modules and how

modules are connected to build arrays There is no fixed definition on the size of a

module and neither for an array A module may have a power output from a few watts to

59

hundreds of watts And the power rating of an array can vary from hundreds of watts to

megawatts [211] [216]

Figure 28 PV Cell module and array

Fuel Cells

Fuel cells (FCs) are static energy conversion devices that convert the chemical energy

of fuel directly into DC electrical energy [217]-[218] The basic physical structure of a

fuel cell consists of two porous electrodes (anode and cathode) and an electrolyte layer in

the middle Figure 29 shows a schematic diagram of a polymer electrolyte membrane

fuel cell (PEMFC) The electrolyte layer is a good conductor for ions (positive or

negative charged) but not for electrons The electrolyte can either be solid such as

PEMFC and solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC) or liquid such as molten carbonate fuel cells

(MCFC) The type and chemical properties of the electrolyte used in fuel cells are very

60

important to their operating characteristics such as their operating temperatures

The polarity of an ion and its transport direction can differ for different fuel cells

determining the site of water production and removal If the working ion is positive like

in a PEMFC shown in Figure 29 then water is produced at the cathode On the other

hand if the working ion is negative like SOFC and MCFC shown in Figures 211 and

213 water is formed at the anode In both cases electrons have to pass through an

external circuit and produce electric current

In a typical fuel cell fuel is fed continuously to the anode and oxidant is fed

continuously to the cathode The electrochemical reactions take place at the electrodes to

convert chemical energy into electricity Note that anode is the electrode from which

electrons leave (negative) and cathode is the electrode to which the electrons are coming

(positive) The most common used fuel for fuel cells is hydrogen and the oxidant is

usually oxygen or air Nevertheless theoretically any substance capable of chemical

oxidation that can be supplied continuously (as a fluid) can be used as fuel at the anode of

a fuel cell Similarly the oxidant can be any fluid that can be reduced at a sufficient rate

[219]

Among different types of fuel cells SOFC PEMFC and MCFC are most likely to be

used for distributed generation (DG) applications [217]-[218] [220]-[224] Compared

with conventional power plants these FCDG systems have many advantages such as high

efficiency zero or low emission (of pollutant gases) and flexible modular structure In the

following an overview is given on the operating principles of the above three types of

fuel cells Though MCFC is out of the scope of this dissertation it is also included here

as a potential candidate for fuel cell DG applications

61

PEMFC PEMFC has a sandwich like structure as shown in Figure 29 [217]

[218] [220] Between two porous electrodes is a Teflon-like membrane which is an

excellent conductor of protons and an insulator of electrons [217] [218] The hydrogen

molecules are broken into electrons and hydrogen protons at the anode with the help of

platinum catalyst The hydrogen protons pass through the membrane (electrolyte) reach

the cathode surface and combine with the electrons which travel from anode to cathode

through the external load to produce water The reactions at the anode and cathode side

and the overall reaction are given in Figure 29

Gas

Flow

Channel Anode

Electron

Flow

Cathode

Membrane

Catalyst

Layers

H2

H2O

O24H+

Load

4e- 4e-

Gas

Flow

Channel

2H2+ O

2 = 2H

2O

Current

Flow

Figure 29 Schematic diagram of a PEMFC

One of the advantages of the PEMFC is its high power density and high efficiency

(40-45) This makes the technology competitive in transportation and stationary

applications Another benefit is its lower operating temperature (between 60degC and 80degC)

62

and because of this the PEMFC has a quick start which is beneficial in automotive

applications where quick start is necessary

5 10 15 20 2522

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

Load Current (A)

PEMFC Output Voltage (V)

ActivationRegion

Ohmic Region

Concentration Region

Figure 210 V-I characteristic of a 500W PEMFC stack [220]

Figure 210 shows the output voltage vs load current (V-I) characteristic curve of a

500W PEMFC stack [220] This characteristic curve which is typical of other fuel cells

can be divided into three regions The voltage drop across the fuel cell associated with

low currents is due to the activation loss inside the fuel cell the voltage drop in the

middle of the curve (which is approximately linear) is due to the ohmic loss in the fuel

cell stack and as a result of the concentration loss the output voltage at the end of the

curve will drop sharply as the load current increases [217] [218]

63

SOFC SOFC is a high temperature fuel cell technology with a promising future

Based on a negative-ion conductive electrolyte SOFCs operate between 600 C and 1000

C and convert chemical energy into electricity at high efficiency which can reach up to

65 [221] The overall efficiency of an integrated SOFC-combustion turbine system can

even reach 70 [221] Despite slow start-up and more thermal stresses due to the high

operating temperature SOFC allows for internal reforming of gaseous fuel inside the fuel

cell which gives multi-fuel capability to SOFCs [217] [218] Moreover their solid

nature simplifies system designs where the corrosion and management problems related

to liquid electrolyte are eliminated [217] These merits give SOFC a bright future to be

used in stationary applications Figure 211 shows a block diagram of a SOFC The

reactions at the anode and cathode are also given in the figure

Figure 211 Schematic diagram of a SOFC

64

The steady-state terminal V-I curves of a 5kW SOFC model (which will be discussed

in detail in Chapter 4) at different temperatures which are typical of SOFCs are shown

in Figure 212 [223] The activation voltage drop dominates the voltage drop in the

low-current region As load current increases the ohmic voltage drop increases fast and

becomes the main contribution to the SOFC voltage drop When load current exceeds a

certain value fuel cell output voltage will drop sharply due to the concentration voltage

drop inside SOFC Figure 212 also shows the effect of temperature on SOFC V-I

characteristic curve SOFC output voltage is higher at lower temperature in the low

current zone while the voltage is higher at higher temperature in the high current region

0 50 100 1500

20

40

60

80

100

120

Load current (A)

SOFC output voltage (V)

1073K

1173K

1273K

Figure 212 V-I characteristic of a 5kW SOFC stack [223]

65

MCFC MCFCs use a molten mixture of alkali metal carbonate as their electrolyte

[217] [218] At high temperatures (600oC ndash 700 oC) the salt mixture is in liquid phase

and is an excellent conductor of minus23CO ions At the cathode the oxygen and carbon oxide

combine with the electrons flowing through the external circuit to produce carbonate ions

( minus23CO ) At the anode minus2

3CO ions are deoxidized by hydrogen and electrons are released

at the same time These electrons will have to go through the external circuit and then

reach the cathode surface Figure 213 shows the schematic diagram of a MCFC The

reactions at the anode and cathode side are given in the figure -

2 3

-

22

2CO

4e

2CO

O

=+

+

-

2

-2 3

24e

2CO

2CO

2H+

=+

Figure 213 Schematic diagram of a MCFC

Figure 214 shows the V-I performance progress for MCFCs from 1967 to 2002

[217] During the 1980s the performance of MCFC stacks made dramatic

improvements It is noted from this figure that MCFCs normally operate in the range of

100-200 mAcm2 at 750-850 mV for a single cell [217] MCFs have achieved

66

efficiencies in the range of 50-60 before heat recovery and with heat recovery their

efficiency could exceed 70 [224]

Figure 214 Progress in generic performance of MCFCs on reformate gas and air

Electrolyzer

An electrolyzer is a device that produces hydrogen and oxygen from water Water

electrolysis can be considered a reverse process of a hydrogen fueled fuel cell Opposite

to the electrochemical reaction occurring in fuel cell an electrolyzer converts the DC

electrical energy into chemical energy stored in hydrogen

Water electrolysis is a long-established process which started in the early part of

nineteen century [225] Nicholson and Carlisle English chemists first discovered the

phenomenon of electrolytic decomposition in acid water in 1800 However alkaline

medium is preferred in todayrsquos industrial electrolysis plants Currently there are three

principal types of electrolyzer available in the market alkaline PEM and solid oxide

67

The alkaline and PEM electrolyzers are well established devices with thousands of units

in operation while the solid-oxide electrolyzer is as yet unproven [226] Alkaline water

electrolysis is the dominating technology today In this section the principle of alkaline

water electrolysis is reviewed

An alkaline electrolyzer uses potassium hydroxide (KOH) as electrolyte solution for

transferring hydroxyl ions Figure 215 shows the schematic diagram of an alkaline

electrolyzer At the cathode two water molecules are reduced electrochemically (by the

two electrons from the cathode) to one molecule of H2 and two hydroxyl ions (OH-) The

reaction at the cathode can be expressed as

minusminus +uarrrarr+ OHHeOH 222 22 (253)

Under the external electric field the hydroxyl ions are forced to move towards the

anode through the porous diaphragm At the anode the two molecule hydroxyl ions

losing two electrons to the anode are discharged into 12 molecule of O2 and one

molecule of water The chemical reaction at the cathode is

minusminus ++uarrrarr eOHOOH 22

12 22 (254)

By combining the above two equations the overall chemical reaction inside an

electrolyzer is

uarr+uarrrarr 2222

1OHOH (255)

68

Figure 215 Schematic diagram of an alkaline electrolyzer

The current density of alkaline electrolyzers is normally less than 04 Acm2 The

energy conversion efficiencies can range from 60-90 Without auxiliary purification

equipment purities of 998 for H2 can be achieved Alkaline electrolysis technology

can be implemented at a variety of scales from less than 1 kW to large industrial

electrolyzer plant over 100 MW as long as there is a proper DC electricity supply [227]

69

Summary

In this chapter the fundamental concepts and principles of energy systems and energy

conversion are reviewed The chapter begins with the introduction of the basic energy

forms and then reviews the fundamentals of thermodynamics and electrochemistry The

First and Second Law of Thermodynamics the maximum conversion efficiency of a

conventional heat engine heat transfer the concepts of enthalpy entropy and the Gibbs

energy and the well-known Nernst equation are briefly explained The fundamentals of

wind energy conversion systems photovoltaic systems fuel cells and electrolyzers are

also reviewed The principles reviewed in this chapter are the fundamentals needed for

modeling the proposed multi-source alternative energy system discussed in the following

chapters

70

REFERENCES

[21] Archie W Culp Jr Principles of Energy Conversion McGraw-Hill Book Company 1979

[22] Steven S Zumdahl Chemical Principles 2nd Edition DC Heath and Company Toronto 1995

[23] FT Ulaby Fundamentals of Applied Electromagnetics Prentice-Hall Inc 1999

[24] ERG Eckert and R M Drake Jr Analysis of Heat and Mass Transfer McGraw-Hill Book Company 1972

[25] George N Hatsopoulos and Joseph H Keenan Principles of General

Thermodynamics John Wiley amp Sons Inc 1965

[26] E L Harder Fundamentals of Energy Production John Wiley amp Sons 1982

[27] FA Farret and MG Simotildees Integration of Alternative Sources of Energy John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2006

[28] G Hoogers Fuel Cell Technology Handbook CRC Press LLC 2003

[29] JANAF Thermochemical Tables 2nd Edition NSRDS-NBS 37 1971

[210] G Kortum Treatise on Electrochemistry (2nd Edition) Elsevier Publishing Company 1965

[211] M R Patel Wind and Solar Power Systems CRC Press LLC 1999

[212] JG Slootweg ldquoWind power modeling and impact on power system dynamicsrdquo PhD dissertation Dept Elect Eng Delft University of Technology Delft Netherlands 2003

[213] JF Manwell JG McGowan and AL Rogers Wind energy Explained ndash Theory

Design and Application John Wileyamp Sons 2002

[214] Tony Burton David sharpe Nick Jenkins and Ervin Bossanyi Wind Energy

Handbook John Wileyamp Sons 2001

[215] SR Guda ldquoModeling and power management of a hybrid wind-microturbine power generation systemrdquo MS thesis Montana State University 2005

71

[216] R Messenger and J Ventre Photovoltaic Systems Engineering CRC Press LLC 2000

[217] Fuel Cell Handbook (Sixth Edition) EGampG Services Inc Science Applications International Corporation DOE Office of Fossil Energy National Energy Technology Lab Nov 2002

[218] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained 2nd Edition John Wiley amp Sons Ltd 2003

[219] AJ Appleby FR Foulkes Fuel Cell Handbook Van Nostrand Reinhold New York NY 1989

[220] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 20 No 2 pp442-451 June 2005

[221] O Yamamoto ldquoSolid oxide fuel cells fundamental aspects and prospectsrdquo Electrochimica Acta Vol 45 No (15-16) pp 2423-2435 2000

[222] J Padulleacutes GW Ault and J R McDonald ldquoAn integrated SOFC plant dynamic model for power system simulationrdquo J Power Sources pp495ndash500 2000

[223] C Wang and MH Nehrir ldquoA Dynamic SOFC Model for Distributed Power Generation Applicationsrdquo Proceedings 2005 Fuel Cell Seminar Palm Springs CA Nov 14-18 2005

[224] MD Lukas KY Lee H Ghezel-Ayagh ldquoAn Explicit Dynamic Model for Direct Reforming Carbonate Fuel Cell Stackrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 16 No 3 pp 289-295 Sept 2000

[225] W Kreuter and H Hofmann ldquoElectrolysis The Important Energy Transformer in a World of Sustainable Energyrdquo Int J Hydrogen Energy Vol 23 No8 pp 661-666 1998

[226] M Newborough ldquoA Report on Electrolysers Future Markets and the Prospects for ITM Power Ltdrsquos Electrolyser Technologyrdquo Online http wwwh2fccomNewsletter

[227] AFG Smith and M Newborough ldquoLow-Cost Polymer Electrolysers and Electrolyser Implementation Scenarios for Carbon Abatementrdquo Report to the Carbon Trust and ITM-Power PLC Nov 2004

72

CHAPTER 3

MULTI-SOURCE ALTERNATIVE ENERGY

DISTRIBUTED GENERATION SYSTEM

Introduction

The ever increasing energy consumption the soaring cost and the exhaustible nature

of fossil fuel and the worsening global environment have created booming interest in

green (renewable energy source or fuel cell based) power generation systems Compared

to the conventional centralized power plants these systems are sustainable smaller in

size and (some) can be installed closer to load centers The power is delivered to

customers by many distributed generation (DG) systems other than the conventional way

that power is transmitted from centralized power plants to load centers over transmission

lines and then through distribution systems Due to steady progress in power deregulation

and utility restructuring and tight constraints imposed on the construction of new

transmission lines for long distance power transmission DG applications are expected to

increase in the future

Wind and solar power generation are two of the most promising renewable power

generation technologies The growth of wind and photovoltaic (PV) power generation

systems has exceeded the most optimistic estimation Fuel cells also show great potential

to be green power sources of the future because of many merits they have (such as high

efficiency zero or low emission of pollutant gases and flexible modular structure) and

73

the rapid progress in fuel cell technologies However none of these technologies is

perfect now Wind and solar power are highly dependent on climate while fuel cells need

hydrogen-rich fuel and the cost for fuel cells is still very high at current stage

Nevertheless because different renewable energy sources can complement each other

multi-source hybrid alternative energy systems (with proper control) have great potential

to provide higher quality and more reliable power to customers than a system based on a

single resource And because of this hybrid energy systems have caught worldwide

research attention [31]-[334]

There are many combinations of different alternative energy sources and storage

devices to build a hybrid system The following lists some of the stand-alone or

grid-connected hybrid systems that have been reported in the literature

1) WindPVFCelectrolyzerbattery system [31]-[33]

2) Micro-turbineFC system [34]-[35]

3) Microturbinewind system [36]

4) Gas-turbineFC system [37]-[39]

5) DieselFC system [310]-[311]

6) PVbattery [312]

7) PVFCelectrolyzer [313]-[315]

8) PVFCelectrolyzerbattery system [316]-[318]

9) FCbattery or super-capacitor system [319]-[320]

10) WindFC system [321]

11) Winddiesel system [322]

12) WindPVbattery system [323]-[325]

74

13) PVdiesel system [326]

14) DieselwindPV system [327]

15) PVFC Super-conducting Magnetic Energy Storage (SMES) system [328]

From the above listed hybrid energy systems it is noted that the main renewable

energy sources are wind and photovoltaic power Due to natural intermittent properties of

wind and photovoltaic power stand-alone wind andor PV renewable energy systems

normally require energy storage devices or some other generation sources to form a

hybrid system The storage device can be a battery bank super-capacitor bank SMES or

a FC-electrolyzer system

In this study a multi-source hybrid alternative distributed generation system

consisting of wind PV fuel cell electrolyzer and battery is proposed Wind and

photovoltaic are the primary power sources of the system to take full advantage of

renewable energy around us The FCelectrolyzer combination is used as a backup and

long term storage system For a stand-alone application a battery is also used in the

system as short term energy storage to supply fast transient and ripple power In the

proposed system the different energy sources are integrated through an AC link bus

(discussed later in this chapter) An overall power management controller is designed for

the system to coordinate the power flows among the different energy sources The details

of the system configuration are discussed in this chapter The system component

modeling will be discussed in Chapter 4 The system control scheme and simulation

results under different scenarios will be given in Chapter 7

75

Figure 31 Hybrid energy system integration DC coupling

AC Coupling vs DC Coupling

There are several ways to integrate different alternative energy sources to form a

hybrid system The methods can be generally classified into two categories DC coupling

and AC coupling AC coupling can be classified further into power frequency AC (PFAC)

coupling and high frequency AC (HFAC) coupling In a DC coupling configuration

shown in Figure 31 different alternative energy sources are connected to a DC bus

through appropriate power electronic interfacing circuits Then the DC energy is

converted into 60 Hz (or 50 Hz) AC through a DCAC converter (inverter) which can be

bi-directional

76

(a)

(b) Figure 32 Hybrid energy system integration (a) PFAC coupling (b) HFAC coupling

77

In a PFAC coupling scheme shown in Figure 32 (a) different energy sources are

integrated through proper power electronic interfacing circuits to a power frequency AC

bus Coupling inductors may also be needed to achieve desired power flow management

In a HFAC link scheme shown in Figure 32 (b) different alternative energy sources are

coupled to a HFAC bus HFAC loads are connected directly to the HFAC bus The HFAC

can also be converted into PFAC through an ACAC converter so that regular AC loads

can be connected to the PFAC bus HFAC link is originally developed for supplying

power to HFAC loads This configuration has been used mostly in applications with

HFAC (eg 400 Hz) loads such as airplanes vessels submarines and space station

applications [329]

Different coupling schemes find their own appropriate applications DC coupling is

the simplest and the oldest type of integration PFAC link is more modular than DC

scheme and is ready for grid connection HFAC coupling is more complicated and is

more suitable for the applications with HFAC loads Table 31 summaries the advantages

and disadvantages of each coupling scheme

78

TABLE 31 COMPARISON AMONG DIFFERENT INTEGRATION SCHEMES

Coupling Scheme

Advantage Disadvantage

DC [31]-[32] [312]

[329]-[330]

1 Synchronism not needed 2 Suitable for long distance

transmission it has less transmission losses

3 Single-wired connection

1 Concerns on the voltage compatibility

2 Corrosion concerns with the DC electrodes

3 Non-standard connection requires high costs in installing and maintenance

4 If the DCAC inverter is out of service the whole system fails to supply AC power

PFAC [329]

[331]-[332]

1 High reliability If one of the energy sources is out of service it can be isolated from the system easily

2 Ready for grid connection 3 Standard interfacing and

modular structure 3 Easy multi-voltage and

multi-terminal matching 4 Well established scale economy

1 Synchronism required 2 The need for power factor and harmonic distortion correction

3 Not suitable for long distance transmission

HFAC [329]

[333]-[334]

1 Higher order harmonics can be easily filtered out

2 Suitable for applications with HFAC loads with improved efficiency

3 Size of high frequency transformers harmonic filters and other passive components are smaller

1 Complex control 2 Higher component and maintenance costs due to high frequency

3 The dependence on future advances of power electronics

4 Concerns about electromagnetic compatibility

5 Extremely limited capability of long distance transmission

79

Stand-alone vs Grid-connected Systems

A hybrid alternative energy system can either be stand-alone or grid-connected if

utility grid is available For a stand-alone application the system needs to have sufficient

storage capacity to handle the power variations from the alternative energy sources

involved A system of this type can be considered as a micro-grid which has its own

generation sources and loads [335] For a grid-connected application the alternative

energy sources in the micro-grid can supply power both to the local loads and the utility

grid In addition to real power these DG sources can also be used to give reactive power

and voltage support to the utility grid The capacity of the storage device for these

systems can be smaller if they are grid-connected since the grid can be used as system

backup However when connected to a utility grid important operation and performance

requirements such as voltage frequency and harmonic regulations are imposed on the

system [336] Both grid-connected and stand-alone applications will be discussed in the

later chapters The optimal placement of DG sources in power systems will also be

discussed in Chapter 8

The Proposed System Configuration

Figure 33 shows the system configuration for the proposed hybrid alternative energy

system In the system the renewable wind and solar power are taken as the primary

source while fuel cellelectrolyzer combination is used as a backup and storage system

This system can be considered as a complete ldquogreenrdquo power generation system because

the main energy sources and storage system are all environmentally friendly and it can be

80

stand-alone or grid-connected When there is excess wind andor solar generation

available the electrolyzer turns on to begin producing hydrogen which is delivered to the

hydrogen storage tanks If the H2 storage tanks become full the excess power will be

diverted to other dump loads which are not shown in Figure 33 When there is a deficit

in power generation the fuel cell stack will begin to produce energy using hydrogen from

the reservoir tanks or in case they are empty from the backup H2 tanks A battery bank is

used to supply transient power to fast load transients ripples and spikes in stand-alone

applications For grid-connected applications the battery bank can be taken out from the

system the utility grid will take care of transient power Different energy sources are

connected to a 60 Hz AC bus through appropriate power electronic interfacing circuits

The system can be easily expended ie other energy sources can be integrated into the

system when they are available as shown in Figure 33 The main system components

and their sizes are discussed in the following section

System Unit Sizing

The unit sizing procedure discussed in this section is assumed for a stand-alone

hybrid system with the proposed structure (Figure 33) for residential electricity supply in

southwestern part of Montana The hybrid system is designed to supply power for five

homes A typical load demand for each home reported in [337] in the Pacific Northwest

regions is used in this simulation study The total load demand of the five homes is shown

in Figure 34 A 50 kW wind turbine is assumed to be available already for the hybrid

system The following unit sizing procedure is used to determine the size of PV arrays

fuel cells the electrolyzer and the battery

81

Figure 33 System configuration of the proposed multi-source alternative hybrid energy system (coupling inductors are not shown in the figure)

82

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

Time (Hour of Day)

Demand (kW)

Figure 34 Hourly average demand of a typical residence in the Pacific Northwest area

Before the discussion of unit sizing the following concept is applied for indicating

the overall efficiency and availability of a renewable energy source

Capacity factor of a renewable energy kcf is defined as

Actual average output power over a period of time T kcf =

Nominal power rating of the renewable energy source (31)

For the wind and solar data reported in [33] [324] the capacity factor of the wind

turbine (kcf_wtg) and the PV (kcf_pv) array used in the proposed hybrid system for the

southwestern part of Montana are taken as 13 and 10 respectively

The purpose of unit sizing is to minimize the difference between the generated power

( genP ) from the renewable energy source and the demand (demP ) over a period of time T T

is taken as one year in this study

83

demratedpvpveffratedwtgwtgeffdemgen PPkPkPPP minustimes+times=minus=∆ __ (32)

where Pwtgrated is the power rating of the wind turbine generator and Pwtgpv is the power

rating the PV array

To balance the generation and the demand the rated power for the PV arrays is

( )pveffratedwtgwtgeffdemratedpv kPkPP __ timesminus= (33)

From Figure 34 the average load demand is 976 kW Then according to (33) the

size of the PV array is calculated to be 326 kW

The FCelectrolyzer combination is taken as the storage for the system The fuel cell

needs to supply the peak load demand when there is no wind and solar power Therefore

the size of fuel cell is 146 kW (Figure 34) To leave some safe margin an 18 kW fuel

cell stack array is used

The electrolyzer should be able to handle the excess power from the wind and solar

power source The maximum possible excess power is

(Pgen - Pdem)max = 766 kW (34)

However the possibility that both the wind and solar power reach their maximum

points while the load demand is at its lowest value is very small According to the data

reported in [330] the excess available power normally is less than half of the maximum

possible value And electrolyzer is also very expensive Therefore a 50 kW electrolyzer

[over 60 of the maximum available given in (34)] is used in this study

Battery capacity can be determined based on the transient power at the load site In

this study a 10 kWh battery bank is used

The details of the system component parameters are listed in Table 32

84

TABLE 32 COMPONENT PARAMETERS OF THE PROPOSED HYBRID ENERGY SYSTEM

Wind turbine

Rated power 50 kW

Cut in speed (Cut out speed) 3 ms (25 ms)

Rated speed 14 ms

Blade diameter 15 m

Gear box ratio 75

Induction generator

Rated power 50 kW

Rated voltage 670 V

Rated frequency 60 Hz

PV array

Module unit 153 cells 173 W 1 kWm2 25 ˚C

Module number 16times12 = 192

Power rating 192times173 asymp 33 kW

Fuel cell array

PEMFC stack 500 W

PEMFC array 6times6 = 36

PEMFC array power rating 36times05 = 18 kW

Or SOFC stack 5 kW

SOFC array 2times2 = 4

SOFC array power rating 4times5 kW = 20 kW

Electrolyzer

Rated power 50 kW

Number of cells 40 (in series)

Operating voltage 60 - 80 V

Battery

Capacity 10 kWh

Rated voltage 400 V

85

REFERENCES

[31] K Agbossou M Kolhe J Hamelin and TK Bose ldquoPerformance of a stand-alone renewable energy system based on energy storage as hydrogenrdquo IEEE

Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 3 pp 633 ndash 640 Sept 2004

[32] K Agbossou R Chahine J Hamelin FLaurencelle A Anourar J-M St-Arnaud and TK Bose ldquoRenewable energy systems based on hydrogen for remote applicationsrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 96 pp168-172 2001

[33] DB Nelson MH Nehrir and C Wang ldquoUnit Sizing and Cost Analysis of Stand-Alone Hybrid WinPVFuel Cell Systemsrdquo Renewable Energy (accepted)

[34] R Lasseter ldquoDynamic models for micro-turbines and fuel cellsrdquo Proceedings 2001 PES Summer Meeting Vol 2 pp 761-766 2001

[35] Y Zhu and K Tomsovic ldquoDevelopment of models for analyzing the load-following performance of microturbines and fuel cellsrdquo Journal of Electric Power Systems Research pp 1-11 Vol 62 2002

[36] SR Guda C Wang and MH Nehrir ldquoModeling of Microturbine Power Generation Systemsrdquo Journal of Power Components amp Systems (accepted)

[37] K Sedghisigarchi and A Feliachi ldquoDynamic and Transient Analysis of Power Distribution Systems with Fuel CellsmdashPart I Fuel-Cell Dynamic Modelrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 2 pp423-428 June 2004

[38] K Sedghisigarchi and A Feliachi ldquoDynamic and Transient Analysis of Power Distribution Systems with Fuel CellsmdashPart II Control and Stability Enhancementrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 2 pp429-434 June 2004

[39] SH Chan HK Ho and Y Tian ldquoMulti-level modeling of SOFC-gas turbine hybrid systemrdquo International Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 28 No 8 pp 889-900 Aug 2003

[310] Z Miao M A Choudhry R L Klein and L Fan ldquoStudy of A Fuel Cell Power Plant in Power Distribution System ndash Part I Dynamic Modelrdquo Proceedings IEEE PES General Meeting June 2004 Denver CO

[311] Z Miao M A Choudhry R L Klein and L Fan ldquoStudy of A Fuel Cell Power Plant in Power Distribution System ndash Part II Stability Controlrdquo Proceedings IEEE PES General Meeting June 2004 Denver CO

86

[312] H Dehbonei ldquoPower conditioning for distributed renewable energy generationrdquo PhD Dissertation Curtin University of Technology Perth Western Australia 2003

[313] P A Lehman CE Chamberlin G Pauletto MA Rocheleau ldquoOperating Experience with a photovoltaic-hydrogen energy systemrdquo Proceedings

Hydrogenrsquo94 The 10th World Hydrogen Energy Conference Cocoa Beach FL June 1994

[314] A Arkin and J J Duffy ldquoModeling of PV Electrolyzer and Gas Storage in a Stand-Alone Solar-Fuel Cell Systemrdquo Proceedings the 2001 National Solar Energy Conference Annual Meeting American Solar Energy Society 2001

[315] L A Torres F J Rodriguez and PJ Sebastian ldquoSimulation of a solar-hydrogen-fuel cell system results for different locations in Mexicordquo International Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 23 No 11 pp 1005-1010 Nov 1998

[316] S R Vosen and JO Keller ldquoHybrid energy storage systems for stand-alone electric power systems optimization of system performance and cost through control strategiesrdquo International Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 24 No 12 pp 1139-56 Dec 1999

[317] Th F El-Shatter M N Eskandar and MT El-Hagry ldquoHybrid PVfuel cell system design and simulationrdquo Renewable Energy Vol 27 No 3 pp479-485 Nov 2002

[318] Oslash Ulleberg and S O MOslashRNER ldquoTRNSYS simulation models for solar-hydrogen systems rdquo Solar Energy Vol 59 No 4-6 pp 271-279 1997

[319] J C Amphlett EH de Oliveira RF Mann PR Roberge and Aida Rodrigues ldquoDynamic Interaction of a Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cell and a Lead-acid Batteryrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 65 pp 173-178 1997

[320] D Candusso L Valero and A Walter ldquoModelling control and simulation of a fuel cell based power supply system with energy managementrdquo Proceedings 28th Annual Conference of the IEEE Industrial Electronics Society (IECON 2002) Vol 2 pp1294-1299 2002

[321] M T Iqbal ldquoModeling and control of a wind fuel cell hybrid energy systemrdquo Renewable Energy Vol 28 No 2 pp 223-237 Feb 2003

[322] H Sharma S Islam and T Pryor ldquoDynamic modeling and simulation of a hybrid wind diesel remote area power systemrdquo International Journal of Renewable Energy Engineering Vol 2 No1 April 2000

87

[323] R Chedid H Akiki and S Rahman ldquoA decision support technique for the design of hybrid solar-wind power systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 13 No 1 pp 76-83 March 1998

[324] W D Kellogg M H Nehrir G Venkataramanan and V Gerez ldquoGeneration unit sizing and cost analysis for stand-alone wind photovoltaic and hybrid windPV systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 13 No 1 pp 70-75 March 1998

[325] F Giraud and Z M Salameh ldquoSteady-state performance of a grid-connected rooftop hybrid wind-photovoltaic power system with battery storagerdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 16 No 1 pp 1 ndash 7 March 2001

[326] E S Abdin A M Osheiba and MM Khater ldquoModeling and optimal controllers design for a stand-alone photovoltaic-diesel generating unitrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 14 No 3 pp 560-565 Sept 1999

[327] F Bonanno A Consoli A Raciti B Morgana and U Nocera ldquoTransient analysis of integrated diesel-wind-photovoltaic generation systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 14 No 2 pp 232-238 June 1999

[328] T Monai I Takano H Nishikawa and Sawada ldquoResponse characteristics and operating methods of new type dispersed power supply system using photovoltaic fuel cell and SMESrdquo 2002 IEEE PES Summer Meeting Vol 2 pp 874-879 2002

[329] F A Farret and M G Simotildees Integration of Alternative Sources of Energy John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2006

[330] Oslashystein Ulleberg ldquoStand-Alone Power Systems for the Future Optimal Design Operation amp Control of Solar-Hydrogen Energy Systemsrdquo PhD Dissertation Norwegian University of Science and Technology Trondheim 1998

[331] P Strauss A Engler ldquoAC coupled PV hybrid systems and microgrids-state of the art and future trendsrdquo Proceedings 3rd World Conference on Photovoltaic Energy Conversion Vol 3 No 12-16 pp 2129 ndash 2134 May 2003

[332] G Hegde P Pullammanappallil C Nayar ldquoModular AC coupled hybrid power systems for the emerging GHG mitigation products marketrdquo Proceedings Conference on Convergent Technologies for Asia-Pacific Region Vol 3 No15-17 pp 971 ndash 975 Oct 2003

[333] SK Sul I Alan and TA Lipo ldquoPerformance testing of a high frequency link converter for space station power distribution systemrdquo Proceedings the 24th Intersociety Energy Conversion Engineering Conference (IECEC-89) Vol 1 No 6-11 pp 617 ndash 623 Aug 1989

88

[334] H J Cha and P N Enjeti ldquoA three-phase ACAC high-frequency link matrix converter for VSCF applicationsrdquo Proceedings IEEE 34th Annual Power Electronics Specialist Conference 2003 (PESC 03) Vol 4 No 15-19 pp 1971 ndash 1976 June 2003

[335] R H Lasseter ldquoMicroGridsrdquo Proceedings 2002 IEEE PES Winter Meeting Vol 1 pp 305-308 2002

[336] IEEE Std 1547 IEEE Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Resources with Electric Power Systems 2003

[337] J Cahill K Ritland W Kelly ldquoDescription of Electric Energy Use in Single Family Residences in the Pacific Northwest 1986-1992rdquo Office of Energy Resources Bonneville Power Administration December 1992 Portland OR

89

CHAPTER 4

COMPONENT MODELING FOR THE HYBRID

ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SYSTEM

In this chapter the models for the main components of the proposed hybrid

alternative energy system given in Chapter 3 are developed Namely they are fuel cells

wind energy conversion system PV energy conversion system electrolyzer battery

power electronic interfacing circuits and accessory devices

Two types of fuel cells are modeled and their applications are discussed in this

dissertation They are low temperature proton exchange membrane fuel cell (PEMFC)

and high temperature solid oxide fuel cell (SOFC)

Dynamic Models and Model Validation for PEMFC

Introduction

PEMFCs show great promise for use as distributed generation (DG) sources

Compared with other DG technologies such as wind and photovoltaic (PV) generation

PEMFCs have the advantage that they can be placed at any site in a distribution system

without geographic limitations to achieve optimal performance Electric vehicles are

another major application of PEMFCs The increased desire for vehicles with less

emission has made PEMFCs attractive for vehicular applications since they emit

essentially no pollutants and have high power density and quick start

PEMFCs are good energy sources to provide reliable power at steady state but they

90

cannot respond to electrical load transients as fast as desired This is mainly due to their

slow internal electrochemical and thermodynamic responses The transient properties of

PEMFCs need to be studied and analyzed under different situations such as electrical

faults on the fuel cell terminals motor starting and electric vehicle starting and

acceleration

Some work has been reported in the literature on steady state fuel cell modeling eg

[41]ndash[47] as well as dynamic modeling [48]ndash[411] These studies are mostly based on

empirical equations andor electrochemical reactions inside the fuel cell In recent years

attempts have been made to study dynamic modeling of fuel cells with emphasis on the

electrical terminal characteristics eg [412]ndash[416] A detailed explanation of the

electrochemical properties of fuel cells and a simple equivalent electrical circuit

including a capacitor due to the double-layer charging effect inside fuel cells are reported

in [417]

In this dissertation dynamic models are presented for PEMFCs using electrical

circuits First through mechanistic analysis the equivalent internal voltage source and

equivalent resistors for activation loss ohmic voltage drop and concentration voltage

drop are given Then the double-layer charging effect is considered by adding an

equivalent capacitor to the circuit The thermodynamic characteristic inside the fuel cell

is also integrated into the model according to the energy balance equation A dynamic

model is built in MATLABSIMULINKreg and an electrical model is developed in Pspicereg

using equivalent electrical components from an electrical engineerrsquos point of view

Simulation results are given and validated with experimental data both for steady-state

and transient responses of PEMFCs The models show great potential to be useful in

91

other related studies such as real-time control of fuel cells and hybrid alternative energy

systems

Dynamic Model Development

In this section a mathematical approach is presented for building a dynamic model for

a PEMFC stack To simplify the analysis the following assumptions are made [41]

[45] [48] [417] [418]

(1) One-dimensional treatment

(2) Ideal and uniformly distributed gases

(3) Constant pressures in the fuel cell gas flow channels

(4) The fuel is humidified H2 and the oxidant is humidified air Assume the effective

anode water vapor pressure is 50 of the saturated vapor pressure while the

effective cathode water pressure is 100

(5) The fuel cell works under 100 ˚C and the reaction product is in liquid phase

(6) Thermodynamic properties are evaluated at the average stack temperature

temperature variations across the stack are neglected and the overall specific heat

capacity of the stack is assumed to be a constant

(7) Parameters for individual cells can be lumped together to represent a fuel cell

stack

A schematic diagram of a PEMFC and its internal voltage drops are shown in Figure

41

92

Gas Diffusion in the Electrodes In order to calculate the fuel cell output voltage

the effective partial pressures of H2 and O2 need to be determined In a gas mixture

consisting of N species the diffusion of component i through the porous electrodes can

be described by the Stefan-Maxwell formulation [41] [45]

sum=

minus=nabla

N

j ji

ijji

iD

NxNx

P

RTx

1

(41)

where xi (xj) = Mole fractions of species i (j)

Dij = effective binary diffusivity of i-j pair (m2s)

Ni(Nj) = Superficial gas flux of species i (j) [mol(m2middots)]

R = gas constant 83143 J(molmiddotK)

T = gas temperature (K)

P = overall pressure of the gas mixture (Pa)

93

Gas

Flow

Channel

Anode

Electrode

Cathode

Electrode

Membrane

Catalyst

Layers

H2O

H2

H2O

O2

N2

CO2

H+

0x

Vout

E

aohmV

membraneohmV

actV

concV

cohmV

Load

e- e-

Gas

Flow

Channel

Figure 41 Schematic diagram of a PEMFC and voltage drops across it

In the anode channel the gas stream is a mixture of H2 and H2O(g) The molar flux of

water (in gas phase) normal to anode surface OHN 2 can be set to zero according to

assumptions (1) ndash (3)

In the one-dimensional transport process along the x axis shown in Figure 41 the

diffusion of water can be simplified as

=

minus=

22

22

22

22222

HOH

HOH

aHOH

OHHHOH

a

OH

D

Nx

P

RT

D

NxNx

P

RT

dx

dx (42)

where Pa = overall gas pressure at the anode (Pa)

The molar flux of H2 can be determined by Faradayrsquos Law [41] [420]

94

F

IN den

H2

2 = (43)

where Iden = current density (Am2)

F = Faraday constant (96487 Cmol)

By combining (42) and (43) and integrating the expression with respect to x from the

anode channel to the catalyst surface it gives

=

22

2

22

expHOHa

adench

OHOHDFP

lRTIxx (44)

where la = distance from anode surface to the reaction site (m)

Superscript denotes the effective value

Superscript ldquochrdquo denotes the conditions at the anode or cathode channel

Since 1

2

2 =+ HOH xx the effective partial pressure of H2 is

)1(

2

2

2

2 OH

OH

OHH x

x

pp minus= (45)

According to assumption (4)

2OHp at the anode is sat

OHp 250 Therefore

2Hp is

given as [41]

minus

= 1

2exp

150

22

2

2

2

HOHa

adench

OH

sat

OHH

DFP

lRTIx

pp (46)

Superscript ldquosatrdquo denotes the condition of saturation

The gases flowing in the cathode channel are O2 N2 H2O(g) and CO2 Using (41) the

diffusion of H2O(g) at the cathode side can be obtained from

95

minus=

minus=

22

22

22

22222

OOH

OOH

cOOH

OOHOHO

c

OH

D

Nx

P

RT

D

NxNx

P

RT

dx

dx (47)

where Pc = overall gas pressure at the cathode (Pa)

Similar to the analysis for anode the effective molar fraction of water at the cathode

catalyst interface can be found as

=

22

2

24

expOOHc

cdench

OHOHDFP

lRTIxx (48)

where lc = distance from cathode surface to the reaction site (m)

Through similar analytical procedures [equations (47)-(48)] the effective molar

fraction of N2 and CO2 can also be determined

=

22

2

24

expONc

cdench

NNDFP

lRTIxx (49)

=

22

2

24

expOCOc

cdench

COCODFP

lRTIxx (410)

The effective molar fraction of O2 is

2

2

2

2 1 CONOHO xxxx minusminusminus= (411)

And the corresponding effective partial pressure of O2 is

)1(

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2 CONOH

OH

OH

O

OH

OH

O xxxx

px

x

pp minusminusminus== (412)

According to assumption (4)

2OHp at the cathode equals sat

OHp 2 and the above

equation can be rewritten as

minus

minusminus= 1

1

2

2

22

2

OH

CONsat

OHOx

xxpp (413)

96

2Hp and

2Op calculated from (46) and (413) will be used in the Nernst equation to

find the fuel cell output voltage In the following subsection material balance equations

will be developed which will also be used to determine the fuel cell output voltage

Material Conservation Equations The instantaneous change in the effective partial

pressures of hydrogen and oxygen can be determined through the ideal gas equations as

follows [422]

F

iM

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

VnetHoutHinH

Ha

22222

2 minus=minusminus= (414)

where Va = volume of anode channel (m3)

MH2 = H2 mole flow rate (mols)

i = fuel cell current (A)

Subscripts ldquoinrdquo ldquooutrdquo and ldquonetrdquo denote the values related to input output and

net

F

iM

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

VnetOoutOinO

Oc

44222

2 minus=minusminus= (415)

where Vc = volume of cathode channel (m3)

MO2 = O2 mole flow rate (mols)

At steady-state all partial pressures are considered to be kept constant ie

0

2

2 ==dt

dp

dt

dp OH (416)

Therefore the net mole flow rates of H2 and O2 at steady-state are

F

IMM netOnetH

22 22 == (417)

Under transient state there are delays between the change in the load current and the

97

flow of fuel and oxidant The following relationships are used to represent these delay

effects

netO

netO

c

netH

netH

a

MF

i

dt

dM

MF

i

dt

dM

2

2

2

2

4

2

minus=

minus=

τ

τ (418)

where τa = fuel flow delay (s)

τc = oxidant flow delay (s)

Fuel Cell Output Voltage The overall reaction in a PEMFC can be simply written

as

)(2222

1lOHOH =+ (419)

According to assumption (5) the corresponding Nernst equation used to calculate the

reversible potential is [420]

[ ]50

2

20 )(ln2

OHcellcell ppF

RTEE sdot+= (420)

where Ecell = reversible potential of each cell (V)

E0cell is the reference potential which is a function of temperature and can be

expressed as follows [41]

)298(00 minusminus= TkEE E

o

cellcell (421)

where o

cellE 0= standard reference potential at standard state 298 K and 1atm pressure

To simplify the analysis a voltage Edcell is considered to be subtracted from the right

side of (420) for the overall effect of the fuel and oxidant delay The steady-state value

of Edcell is zero but it will show the influence of the fuel and oxidant delays on the fuel

98

cell output voltage during load transients It can be written as

[ ])exp()()( eecelld ttitiE τλ minusotimesminus= (422)

where λe = constant factor in calculating Ed (Ω)

τe = overall flow delay (s)

where ldquootimesrdquo is the convolution operator Converting (422) to the Laplace domain we get

1)()( +

=s

ssIsE

e

eecelld τ

τλ (423)

Equation (423) is used for developing models both in SIMULINK and Pspice The

internal potential Ecell in (420) now becomes

[ ] celldOHcellcell EppF

RTEE

50

2

20 )(ln2

minussdot+= (424)

Ecell calculated from (424) is actually the open-circuit voltage of the fuel cell

However under normal operating conditions the fuel cell output voltage is less than Ecell

Activation loss ohmic resistance voltage drop and concentration overpotential are

voltage drops across the fuel cell as shown in Figure 41 [418] Therefore

cellconccellohmcellactcellcell VVVEV minusminusminus= (425)

where Vcell = output voltage of a single cell (V)

Vactcell = activation voltage drop of a single cell (V)

Vohmcell = ohmic voltage drop of a single cell (V)

Vconccell = concentration voltage drop of a single cell (V)

Applying assumption 7) the output voltage of the fuel cell stack can be obtained as

concohmactcellcellout VVVEVNV minusminusminus== (426)

where Vout = output voltage of the fuel cell stack (V)

99

Ncell = number of cells in the stack (V)

Vact = overall activation voltage drop (V)

Vohm = overall ohmic voltage drop (V)

Vconc = overall concentration voltage drop (V)

To calculate the fuel cell output voltage the following estimations are used

1) Activation Voltage Drop Tafel equation given below is used to calculate the

activation voltage drop in a fuel cell [418]

[ ])ln()ln(0

IbaTI

I

zF

RTVact +sdot==

α (427)

On the other hand an empirical equation for Vact is given in [41] where a constant

(η0) is added to (427) as follows

210 )ln()298( actactact VVIbTaTV +=sdot+sdotminus+=η (428)

where η0 a b = empirical constants terms

Vact1=(η0+(T-298)middota) is the voltage drop affected only by the fuel cell internal

temperature while Vact2=(Tmiddotbmiddotln(I)) is both current and temperature dependent

The equivalent resistance of activation corresponding to Vact2 is defined as

I

IbT

I

VR actact

)ln(2 sdot== (429)

2) Ohmic Voltage Drop The ohmic resistance of a PEMFC consists of the resistance

of polymer membrane the conducting resistance between the membrane and electrodes

and the resistances of electrodes The overall ohmic voltage drop can be expressed as

ohmcohmmembraneohmaohmohm IRVVVV =++= (430)

ohmR is also a function of current and temperature [41]

100

TkIkRR RTRIohmohm minus+= 0 (431)

where Rohm0 = constant part of the Rohm

kRI = empirical constant in calculating Rohmic (ΩA)

kRT = empirical constant in calculating Rohmic (ΩK)

The values of kRI and kRT used in the simulation study are given in Table 43

3) Concentration Voltage Drop During the reaction process concentration gradients

can be formed due to mass diffusions from the flow channels to the reaction sites

(catalyst surfaces) At high current densities slow transportation of reactants (products)

to (from) the reaction sites is the main reason for the concentration voltage drop [418]

Any water film covering the catalyst surfaces at the anode and cathode can be another

contributor to this voltage drop [41] The concentration overpotential in the fuel cell is

defined as [418]

B

Sconc

C

C

zF

RTV lnminus= (432)

where CS is the surface concentration and CB is the bulk concentration

According to Fickrsquos first law and Faradayrsquos law [420] the above equation can be

rewritten as

)1ln(limit

concI

I

zF

RTV minusminus= (433)

where Ilimi = limitation current (A)

z = number of electrons participating

The equivalent resistance for the concentration loss is

101

)1ln(limit

concconc

I

I

zFI

RT

I

VR minusminus== (434)

Double-Layer Charging Effect In a PEMFC the two electrodes are separated by a

solid membrane (Figure 41) which only allows the H+ ions to pass but blocks the

electron flow [417] [418] The electrons will flow from the anode through the external

load and gather at the surface of the cathode to which the protons of hydrogen will be

attracted at the same time Thus two charged layers of opposite polarity are formed

across the boundary between the porous cathode and the membrane [417] [421] The

layers known as electrochemical double-layer can store electrical energy and behave

like a super-capacitor The equivalent circuit of fuel cell considering this effect is given

in Figure 42 which is similar to the circuit reported in [417] But the values of Ract [see

(429)] and the voltage source are different from what are defined in [417] Ract in [417]

is defined as VactI and the value of voltage source used in [417] is E

Figure 42 Equivalent circuit of the double-layer charging effect inside a PEMFC

In the above circuit C is the equivalent capacitor due to double-layer charging effect

Since the electrodes of a PEMFC are porous the capacitance C is very large and can be

in the order of several Farads [417] [426] Ract and Rconc are equivalent resistances of

102

activation and concentration voltage drops which can be calculated according to (429)

and (434) The voltage across C is

))(( concactC

C RRdt

dVCIV +minus= (435)

The double-layer charging effect is integrated into the modeling by using VC instead

of Vact2 and Vconc to calculate Vout The fuel cell output voltage now turns out to be

ohmCactout VVVEV minusminusminus= 1 (436)

Energy Balance of the Thermodynamics The net heat generated by the chemical

reaction inside the fuel cell which causes its temperature to rise or fall can be written as

losslatentsenselecchemnet qqqqq ampampampampamp minusminusminus= + (437)

where qnet = net heat energy (J)

qchem = Chemical or heat energy (J)

qelec = Electrical energy (J)

qloss = Heat loss (J)

The available power released due to chemical reaction is calculated by

Hnq consumedHchem ∆sdot= 2ampamp (438)

where ∆H = the enthalpy change of the chemical reaction inside the fuel cell

consumedHn 2

amp = H2 consumption rate (mols)

The maximum available amount of electrical energy is [418] [420]

[ ]50

2

20 )(ln OH ppRTGSTHG sdotminus∆=∆minus∆=∆ (439)

where ∆G = Gibbs free energy (Jmol)

103

∆G0 = Gibbs free energy at standard condition4 (Jmol)

∆S = entropy change (JmolmiddotK-1)

The electrical output power is computed as

IVq outelec sdot=amp (440)

The sensible and latent heat absorbed during the process can be estimated by the

following equation [48] [422]

( )( )

VgeneratedOH

lOHroomgeneratedOH

OroominOoutO

HroominHoutHlatentsens

Hn

CTTn

CTnTn

CTnTnq

sdot+

sdotminussdot+

sdotsdotminussdot+

sdotsdotminussdot=+

2

22

222

222

)(

amp

amp

ampamp

ampampamp

(441)

where qsens+latent = sensible and latent heat (J)

inamp = flow rate of species i (mols)

Ci = specific heat capacity of species i [J(molmiddotK)]

HV = Vaporization heat of water (Jmol)

Troom = room temperature (K)

The heat loss which is mainly transferred by air convection can be estimated by the

following formula [422]

cellcellroomcellloss ANTThq )( minus=amp (442)

where hcell = convective heat transfer coefficient [W(m2middotK)] It can be obtained through

experiments [48]

At steady state netqamp = 0 and the fuel cell operates at a constant temperature During

transitions the temperature of fuel cell will rise or drop according to the following

4 1atm 298K

104

equation [422]

netFCFC qdt

dTCM amp= (443)

where MFC is the total mass of the fuel cell stack and CFC is the overall specific heat

capacity of the stack

Dynamic Model Built in MatlabSimulink

A dynamic model for the PEMFC has been developed in MATLABSIMULINK

based on the electrochemical and thermodynamic characteristics of the fuel cell discussed

in the previous section The fuel cell output voltage which is a function of temperature

and load current can be obtained from the model Figure 43 shows the block diagram

based on which the MATLABSIMULINK model has been developed In this figure the

input quantities are anode and cathode pressures initial temperature of the fuel cell and

room temperature At any given load current and time the internal temperature T is

determined and both the load current and temperature are fed back to different blocks

which take part in the calculation of the fuel cell output voltage

105

Mass DiffusionEquations

Thermodynamic Equations

Nernst EquationActivation

Loss CalculationOhmic VoltageDrop Calculation

ConcentrationLoss Calculation

Double-layer Charging Effect

x

Vout

Pa

PcTroom

I

T

Load

Input Output Feedback

- -

+Tinitial

Material Conservation(Fuel amp Oxdiant Delay)

x+-

Figure 43 Diagram of building a dynamic model of PEMFC in SIMULINK

In this block diagram mass diffusion equations (41)-(413) are used to calculate the

effective partial pressures of H2 and O2 Then the Nernst equation (420) and the overall

fuel and oxidant delay effect given by (422) are employed to determine the internal

potential (E) of the fuel cell The ohmic voltage drop equations (430)-(431) activation

voltage drop equations (427)-(429) and concentration voltage drop equations

(433)-(434) together with the double-layer charging effect equation (435) are applied to

determine the terminal (output) voltage of the fuel cell Thermodynamic effects are also

considered via energy balance equations (437)-(443)

Equivalent Electrical Model in Pspice

In practice fuel cells normally work together with other electrical devices such as

power electronic converters Pspice is a valuable simulation tool used to model and

investigate the behavior of electrical devices and circuits An electrical equivalent model

of fuel cell built in Pspice can be used with electrical models of other components to

106

study the performance characteristics of the fuel cell power generation unit A block

diagram to build such model for PEMFC is given in Figure 44 which is also based on

the characteristics discussed previously The development of electrical circuit model for

different blocks in Figure 44 is discussed below

Internal Potential E According to (420)-(426) the internal potential E is a

function of load current and temperature An electrical circuit for the internal potential

block is given in Figure 45 The current and temperature controlled voltage source f1(IT)

in the figure represents the current and temperature dependent part of (420) Note that

the effective partial pressures (

2Hp and

2Op ) given in (420) are current dependent The

current controlled voltage source f2(I) stands for Edcell in (422)

[ ] )298()(ln2

)( 50

2

21 minus+sdotminus= TkNppF

RTNTIf EcellOH

cell (444)

celldcellENIf 2 )( = (445)

C

I

InternalPotential E

Activation Concentration

ThermodynamicBlockTroom

Tinitial

T

TT

Ohmic

T

T

Vout

Figure 44 Diagram of building an electrical model of PEMFC in Pspice

107

f1(IT)

oE0

f2(I)

E

I

Figure 45 Electrical circuit for internal potential E

Circuit for Activation Loss From (428) the activation voltage drop can be divided

into two parts Vact1 and Vact2 Vact1 can be modeled by a constant voltage source in series

with a temperature controlled voltage source Vact2 can be represented by a temperature

and current dependent resistor Ract This resistor is assumed to be composed of a

constant-value resistor (Ract0) a current-dependent resistor (Ract1) and a

temperature-dependent resistor (Ract2) A current-dependent resistor can be easily built in

Pspice by using the polynomial current controlled voltage source model ldquoHPOLYrdquo A

temperature-dependent resistor can be built by Analog Behavioral Models (ABMs) in

Pspice [424] The electrical circuit for activation voltage drop is given in Figure 46 In

this figure with reference to (428) we can write

Ract0

f3(T)

Ract1

Ract2

I

Vact1

Vact2

Vact

Figure 46 Electrical circuit for activation loss

108

aTTf sdotminus= )298()(3 (446)

210 actactactact RRRR ++= (447)

Circuits for Ohmic and Concentration Voltage Drops According to (431) and

(434) both Rohm and Rconc are current and temperature dependent resistors Therefore

they can be modeled in Pspice the same way Ract is modeled Figure 47 shows the

equivalent circuit for ohmic voltage drop

210 ohmohmohmohm RRRR ++= (448)

Rohm0 is the constant part of Rohm With reference to (431) Rohm1=kRImiddotI is the

current-dependent part of Rohm and Rohm2 =-kRTmiddotT is its temperature-dependent part

Rohm0

Rohm1

Rohm2 I

Vohm

Figure 47 Electrical circuit for ohmic voltage drop

The electrical circuit model for concentration voltage drop is shown in Figure 48

210 concconcconcconc RRRR ++= (449)

where Rconc0 is the constant part of Rconc and Rconc1 Rconc2 are its current-dependent

and temperature-dependent parts

109

Rconc0

Rconc1

Rconc2 I

Vconc

Figure 48 Electrical circuit for concentration voltage drop

Equivalent Capacitor of Double-layer Charging Effect In Figure 44 C is the

equivalent capacitance of double-layer charging effect discussed in the previous section

This capacitance can be estimated through the measurement of the dynamic response of a

real fuel cell stack [417] Figure 42 shows how this capacitance is added into the circuit

Thermodynamic Block The analogies between the thermodynamic and electrical

quantities given in Table 41 are employed to develop the electrical circuit model for the

thermodynamic block shown in Figure 44 [423] The thermodynamic property inside the

fuel cell (437)-(443) can therefore be simulated by the circuit shown in Figure 49 The

power consumed by activation ohmic and concentration losses is considered as the heat

source which causes the fuel cell temperature to rise

IVEq outin sdotminus= )(amp (450)

The thermal resistance due to air convection is

)(1 cellcellcellT ANhR sdotsdot= (451)

In Figure 49 the constant voltage source ET represents the environmental

temperature and the voltage across the capacitance (Ch) is the overall temperature of the

fuel cell stack T

110

Environmental

Temperature

RT = Thermal Resistance

Ch = Heat Capacity

RT2 R

T2

Ch

inqamp

T

ET

Figure 49 Equivalent circuit of thermodynamic property inside PEMFC

TABLE 41 ANALOGIES BETWEEN THERMODYNAMIC AND ELECTRICAL QUANTITIES

Electrical Potential U (V) Temperature T(K)

Electrical Current I (A) Heat Flow Rate Ph (W)

Electrical Resistance R (Ohm) Thermal Resistance θ (KW)

Electrical Capacitance C (F) Heat Capacity Ch (JK)

URI = TθPh =

dt

dUCI =

dt

dTCP hh =

Model Validation

By applying the equations and the equivalent electrical circuits discussed in the

previous sections dynamic models for an Avista Labs (Relion now) SR-12 PEMFC stack

were built both in MATLABSIMULINK and Pspice environments The specifications of

SR-12 fuel cell stack are given in Table 42 [425] The electrical model parameter values

used in the simulation studies are listed in Table 43

111

TABLE 42 SPECIFICATIONS OF SR-12

Description Value

Capacity 500W

Number of cells 48

Operating environmental temperature 5degC to 35degC

Operating pressures PH2 asymp 15atm

Pcathode asymp 10atm

Unit Dimensions (WtimesDtimesH) 565times615times345 cm

Weight 44kg

The 9995 pure hydrogen flows at manifold pressure of about 7psi The

environmental air is driven by the SR-12rsquos internal fan to pass through the cathode to

provide oxygen

Experimental Setup To validate the models built in SIMULINK and Pspice real

input and output data were measured on the 500W SR-12 Avista Labs (Relion now)

PEMFC The block diagram of the experimental setup is shown in Figure 410 The

Chroma 63112 programmable electronic load was used as a current load Current signals

were measured by LEM LA100-P current transducers the output voltage was measured

by a LEM LV25-P voltage transducer and the temperature was measured by a k-type

thermocouple together with an analog connector The current voltage and temperature

data were all acquired by a 12-bit Advantech data acquisition card in a PC

112

TABLE 43 ELECTRICAL MODEL PARAMETER VALUES FOR SR-12 STACK

oE0 (V) 589 Ch (F) 22000

kE (VK) 000085 RT (Ω) 00347

τe (s) 800 C (F) 01F (48F for each cell)

λe (Ω) 000333 Rohm0 (Ω) 02793

η0 (V) 20145 Rohm1 (Ω) 0001872timesI

a (VK) -01373 Rohm2 (Ω) -00023712times(T-298)

Ract0 (Ω) 12581 Rconc0 (Ω) 0080312

Ract2 (Ω) 000112times(T-298) Rconc2 (Ω) 00002747times (T-298)

Ract1 (Ω) III

II

311600454501043

10223211067771

233

4456

minus+timesminus

times+timesminusminus

minusminus

Rconc1 (Ω) III

III

010542000555400100890

106437810457831022115

23

455668

minus+minus

times+timesminustimes minusminusminus

Chroma 63112

Programmable

Electronic Load

LEM LV25-P

Voltage

Transducer

LEM LA100-P

Current Transducer

Omega SMCJ

Thermocouple-to-

Analog Connector

PC with an Advantech PCI-1710

12-Bit Data Acquisition Card

K-Type

Thermocouple

SR-12

Internal

Circuit

SR-12

PEMFC

Stack

Istack

Iterminal

Figure 410 Experimental configuration on the SR-12 PEMFC stack

113

Steady-State Characteristics The steady state characteristics of SR-12 were

obtained by increasing the load current from 11A to 205A in steps of 02A every 40

seconds Both the stack current and terminal current (Figure 410) were measured but

only the stack current is used to validate the models since it is the current directly from

the fuel cell stack The experimental average value of V-I curve of the fuel cell is shown

in Figure 411 The steady-state responses of the models in SIMULINK and Pspice are

also given in Figure 411 in order to compare them with the experimental data Both the

SIMULINK and Pspice model responses agree very well with the real data from the fuel

cell stack The voltage drop at the beginning and end of the curves shown in Figure 411

are due to activation and concentration losses respectively The voltage drop in the

middle of the curves (which is approximately linear) is due to the ohmic loss in the fuel

cell stack [418]

Figure 412 shows the power vs current (P-I) curves of the PEMFC stack obtained

from the experimental data and the models The model responses also match well with

experimental data in this case Note that peak output power occurs near the fuel cell rated

output beyond which the fuel cell goes into the concentration zone In this region the

fuel cell output power will decrease with increasing load current due to a sharp decrease

in its terminal voltage

114

5 10 15 20 2522

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

Load Current (A)

PEMFC Output Voltage (V)

Average Value of the Measured DataResponse of the Model in SIMULINKResponse of the Model in Pspice

Upper range of the measured data

Lower range of the measured data

Figure 411 V-I characteristics of SR-12 and models

0 5 10 15 20 250

100

200

300

400

500

600

Load Current (A)

PEMFC Output Power (W)

Average Value of Measured DataModel in SIMULINKModel in Pspice

Lower range of the measured data

Upper range of the measured data

Figure 412 P-I characteristics of SR-12 and models

115

Temperature Response The temperature response of the PEMFC stack shown in

Figure 413 was measured under the same ramp load current as given in the previous

sub-section The temperature was measured as the current increased from 11A to 205A

with a slew rate of 5mAs The temperature response of the SIMULINK and Pspice

models are also given in Figure 413 for comparison with the measured values Although

there are some differences between the model responses and the measured data the

models can predict the temperature response of the fuel cell stack within 35K in the

worst case

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000306

308

310

312

314

316

318

320

Time (s)

Temperature Responses (K)

Measured Data

Model in SIMULINK

Model in Pspice

Figure 413 Temperature responses of the SR 12 stack and models

116

Transient Performance The dynamic property of PEMFC depends mainly on the

following three aspects double-layer charging effects fuel and oxidant flow delays and

thermodynamic characteristics inside the fuel cells Although the capacitance (C) due to

the double-layer charging effect is large (in the order of several Farads for each cell) the

time constant τ=(Ract+Rconc)middotC is normally small (less than 1 second) because (Ract+Rconc)

is small (less than 005Ω for the single cell used in this study) when the fuel cell works in

the linear zone Therefore capacitor C will affect the transient response of PEMFC in the

short time range The transient responses of the models to a fast step load change are

given in Figure 414 It is noted that when the load current steps up the voltage drops

simultaneously to some value due to the voltage drop across Rohm and then it decays

exponentially to its steady-state value due to the capacitance (C)

On the other hand the fuel and oxidant flows cannot follow the load current changes

instantaneously The delays can be in the range from several tens of seconds to several

hundreds of seconds Also the temperature of fuel cell stack cannot change

instantaneously The thermodynamic time constant of a PEMFC can be in the order of

minutes Thus the fuel and oxidant flow delays and the thermodynamic characteristics

will normally dominate the transient responses in the long time operation The

corresponding SIMULINK and Pspice model responses are given in Figure 415 From

this figure it is noticed that the voltage drops below its steady-state value when the load

steps up and then recovers back to its steady-state value in a relatively long time range (in

the order of about hundred seconds to several minutes) As shown in Figures 414 and

415 simulation results agree well with the measured data

117

209 2095 210 2105 211 2115 212 212526

28

30

32

34

36

38

Time (s)

Dynamic Responses in Short Time Range (V)

Measured DataModel in SIMULINKModel in Pspice

Model in Simulink

Model in Pspice

Measured Data

Figure 414 Transient responses of the models in short time range

400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 200026

28

30

32

34

36

38

Time (s)

PEMFC Dynamic Response (V)

Measured DataModel in SIMULINK

Model in Pspice

Measured Data Model in Pspice

Model in SIMULINK

Figure 415 Transient responses of the models in long time range

118

Dynamic Models for SOFC

Introduction

Solid oxide fuel cells are advanced electrochemical energy conversion devices

operating at a high temperature converting the chemical energy of fuel into electric

energy at high efficiency They have many advantages over conventional power plants

and show great promise in stationary power generation applications [427] [428] The

energy conversion efficiency of a SOFC stack can reach up to 65 and its overall

efficiency when used in combined heat and power (CHP) applications ie as an

integrated SOFC-combustion turbine system can even reach 70 [429] Despite slow

start-up and thermal stresses due to the high operating temperature SOFC allows for

internal reforming of gaseous fuel inside the fuel cell which gives its multi-fuel

capability [418] [430]

SOFC modeling is of interest for its performance prediction and controller design

Many SOFC models have been developed some are highly theoretical and are based on

empirical equations eg [431]-[433] and some are more application oriented

[434]-[437] Increased interest in SOFC power plant design and control has led to a

need for appropriate application oriented SOFC models An integrated SOFC plant

dynamic model for power system simulation (PSS) software was presented in [434]

Three operation limits of SOFC power plants were addressed in that paper in order to

achieve a safe and durable cell operation However the thermodynamic properties of

SOFCs were not discussed in the paper A transient model of a tubular SOFC consisting

of an electrochemical model and a thermal model was given in [435] However the

119

dynamic response of the model due to load variations was only investigated in large

(minute) time scale

In this section a dynamic model of a tubular SOFC stack is presented based on its

thermodynamic and electrochemical properties and on the mass and energy conservation

laws with emphasis on the fuel cell electrical (terminal) characteristics The SOFC model

implemented in MATLABSimulinkreg mainly consists of an electrochemical sub-model

and a thermodynamic sub-model The double-layer charging effect [439] is also taken

into account in the model The model responses are studied under both constant fuel flow

and constant fuel utilization operating modes The effect of temperature on the

steady-state V-I (output voltage vs current) and P-I (output power vs current)

characteristics are also studied The dynamic responses of the model are given and

discussed in different time scales ie from small time scale (10-3-10

-1 s) to large time

scale (102-10

3s) The temperature response of the model is given as well The SOFC

model has been used to study the SOFC overloading capability and to investigate the

performance of a SOFC distributed generation system which is reported in Chapters 5

and 6 The model shows the potential to be useful in SOFC related studies such as

real-time control of SOFC and its distributed generation applications

Dynamic Model Development

In this section a mathematical approach is presented for building a dynamic model for

a tubular SOFC fuel cell stack To simplify the analysis the following assumptions are

made

(1) One-dimensional treatment

120

(2) O= conducting electrolytes and ideal gases

(3) H2 fuel and large stoichiometric quantity of O2 at cathode

(4) H2 and O2 partial pressure are uniformly decreased along the anode channel while

the water vapor partial pressure is uniformly increased for normal operations

(5) Lumped thermal capacitance is used in the thermodynamic analysis and the

effective temperature of flowing gases in gas channels (anode and cathode

channels) is represented by its arithmetical mean value ( ) 2out

gas

in

gas

ch

gas TTT +=

(6) The combustion zone is not modeled in this SOFC thermal model The fuel and

air are assumed to be pre-heated

(7) Parameters for individual cells can be lumped together to represent a fuel cell

stack

A schematic diagram of a SOFC is shown in Figure 416 Two porous electrodes

(anode and cathode) are separated by a solid ceramic electrolyte This electrolyte material

(normally dense yttria-stabilized zirconia) is an excellent conductor for negatively

charged ions (such as O=) at high temperatures [418] At the cathode oxygen molecules

accept electrons from the external circuit and change to oxygen ions These negative ions

pass across the electrolyte and combine with hydrogen at the anode to produce water

For the details of principle of operation of SOFC the reader is referred to [418]

[427]-[429]

Effective Partial Pressures In this part expressions for H2 O2 and H2O partial

pressures at anode and cathode channels and their effective values at actual reaction sites

are derived in terms of the fuel cell operating parameters (eg fuel cell temperature fuel

121

and oxidant flow rates and anode and cathode inlet pressures) and the physical and

electrochemical parameters of the fuel cell These partial pressure values will be used to

calculate the fuel cell output voltage

Figure 416 Schematic diagram of a solid oxide fuel cell

As shown in Figure 416 when load current is being drawn H2 and O2 will diffuse

through the porous electrodes to reach the reaction sites and the reactant H2O will diffuse

from the reaction sites to the anode channel As a result H2 H2O and O2 partial pressure

gradients will be formed along the anode and cathode channels when the fuel cell is

under load Assuming uniform variation of gas partial pressures [assumption (4)] the

arithmetic mean values are used to present the overall effective gas partial pressures in

the channels

2

22

2

out

H

in

Hch

H

ppp

+= (452a)

122

2

22

2

out

OH

in

OHch

OH

ppp

+= (452b)

2

22

2

out

O

in

Och

O

ppp

+= (453)

The effective partial pressures of H2 and O2 at the actual reaction sites will be less

than those in the gas flow channels due to mass diffusion In contrast the vapor partial

pressure at reaction sites is higher than that in the anode flow channel In order to

calculate the fuel cell output voltage the effective partial pressures of H2 H2O and O2 at

the reaction sites need to be determined In a gas mixture consisting of N species the

diffusion of component i through the porous electrodes can be described by the

Stefan-Maxwell formulation [41]

sum=

minus=nabla

N

j ji

ijji

iD

NxNx

P

RTx

1

(454)

where xi (xj) = Mole fractions of species i (j)

Dij = effective binary diffusivity of i-j pair (m2s)

Ni(Nj) = Superficial gas flux of species i (j) [mol(m2middots)]

R = gas constant 83143 J(molmiddotK)

T = gas temperature (K)

P = overall pressure of the gas mixture (Pa)

In the anode channel the gas stream is a mixture of H2 and H2O In the

one-dimensional transport process along the x axis shown in Figure 416 the diffusion of

H2 can be simplified as

123

minus=

OHH

HOHOHH

ch

a

H

D

NxNx

P

RT

dx

dx

22

22222

(455)

The molar flux of H2 and H2O can be determined by Faradayrsquos Law [420]

F

iNN den

OHH222

=minus= (456)

Note that 122=+ OHH xx then (455) can be written as

F

i

D

RT

dx

dpden

OHH

H

222

2

minus= (457)

Similarly we can get the one-dimensional Stefan-Maxwell diffusion equation for

H2O

F

i

D

RT

dx

dpden

OHH

OH

222

2

= (458)

Integrating equations (457) and (458) with respect to x from the anode channel

surface to the actual reaction site will yield

den

OHH

ach

HH iFD

RTlpp

22

22

2minus= (459)

den

OHH

ach

OHOH iFD

RTlpp

22

22

2+= (460)

In the cathode channel the oxidant is air that mainly consists of O2 and N2 that is

122asymp+ NO xx Applying the same procedure as above the one-dimensional

Stefan-Maxwell diffusion equation for O2 can be expressed as

minus=

22

22222

NO

ONNO

ch

c

O

D

NxNx

P

RT

dx

dx (461)

124

Since nitrogen does not take part in the chemical reaction the net nitrogen molar flux

normal to the cathode surface can be set to zero

02=NN (462)

The molar flux of O2 is determined by Faradayrsquos Law

F

iN den

O42

= (463)

Equation (461) can now be rewritten as

)1(4 2

22

2

minus= O

NO

ch

c

denOx

DFP

RTi

dx

dx (464)

Similar to the analysis for the anode the effective partial pressure of oxygen at the

reaction site can be found as

( )

minusminus=

22

22

4exp

NO

ch

c

cdench

O

ch

c

ch

cODFP

lRTipPPp (465)

2Hp

2OHp and

2Op calculated from (459) (460) and (465) will be used in the

Nernst equation to find the fuel cell output voltage In the following subsection material

balance equations which will be also used to determine the fuel cell output voltage will

be developed

Material Conservation Equations The instantaneous change of the effective partial

pressures of hydrogen and water vapor in the anode gas flow channel can be determined

through the ideal gas equations as follows [422]

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

V out

H

in

H

ch

Ha

222

2 minusminus= (466a)

125

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

V out

OH

in

OH

ch

OHa

222

2 +minus= (466b)

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

V out

O

in

O

ch

Oc

422

2 minusminus= (467)

Based on assumption (3) mass flow rate for H2 H2O and O2 at the inlet and outlet of

the flow channels can be expressed as

sdot=sdot=

sdot=sdot=

ch

a

out

H

a

out

Ha

out

H

ch

a

in

H

a

in

Ha

in

H

P

pMxMM

P

pMxMM

2

22

2

22

(468a)

sdot=sdot=

sdot=sdot=

ch

a

out

OH

a

out

OHa

out

OH

ch

a

in

OH

a

in

OHa

in

OH

P

pMxMM

P

pMxMM

2

22

2

22

(468b)

sdot=sdot=

sdot=sdot=

ch

c

out

O

c

out

Oc

out

O

ch

c

in

O

c

in

Oc

in

O

P

pMxMM

P

pMxMM

2

22

2

22

(469)

Rewriting (466) and (467) will give

iFV

RTp

PV

RTMp

PV

RTM

dt

dp

a

ch

Hch

aa

ain

Hch

aa

a

ch

H

2

2222

2 minusminus= (470a)

iFV

RTp

PV

RTMp

PV

RTM

dt

dp

a

ch

OHch

aa

ain

OHch

aa

a

ch

OH

2

2222

2 +minus= (470b)

iFV

RTp

PV

RTMp

PV

RTM

dt

dp

c

ch

Och

cc

cin

Och

cc

c

ch

O

4

2222

2 minusminus= (471)

Putting the above equations into Laplacersquos form we obtain

126

minus+

+= )(

4)0()(

)1(

1)(

222sI

FM

PPsP

ssP

a

ch

ach

Ha

in

H

a

ch

H ττ

(472a)

++

+= )(

4)0()(

)1(

1)(

222sI

FM

PPsP

ssP

a

ch

ach

OHa

in

OH

a

ch

OH ττ

(472b)

minus+

+= )(

8)0()(

)1(

1)(

222sI

FM

PPsP

ssP

ch

cch

Oc

in

O

c

ch

O ττ

(473)

where the time constant RTM

PV

a

ch

aaa

2=τ and

RTM

PV

c

ch

ccc

2=τ

The physical meaning of the time constant τa is that it will take τa seconds to fill a

tank of volume Va2 at pressure ch

aP if the mass flow rate is Ma Similar physical

meaning holds for τc

Fuel Cell Output Voltage The overall reaction in a solid oxide fuel cell is [418]

)(222 22 gOHOH =+ (474)

where subscript ldquogrdquo indicates the product H2O is in gas form The corresponding Nernst

equation used to calculate the reversible potential is [418] [420]

sdot+=

2

2

0)(

)(ln

42

22

ch

OH

ch

O

ch

H

cellcellp

pp

F

RTEE (475)

E0cell is a function of temperature and can be expressed as [418]

)298(00 minusminus= TkEE E

o

cellcell (476)

where o

cellE 0 is the standard reference potential at standard state 298 K and 1atm

pressure

Ecell calculated from (475) is actually the open-circuit voltage of the fuel cell

127

However when the fuel cell is under load its output voltage is less than Ecell due to

activation loss ohmic resistance voltage drop and concentration overpotential [418]

[431] The output voltage of a cell can therefore be written as

cellconccellohmcellactcellcell VVVEV minusminusminus= (477)

Applying assumption (7) the output voltage of the fuel cell stack can be obtained as

concohmactcellcellout VVVEVNV minusminusminus== (478)

To calculate the fuel cell output voltage the above three voltage drops will be

calculated first

1) Activation Voltage Drop Action voltage loss is caused by an activation energy

barrier that must be overcome before the chemical reaction occurs The Butler-Volmer

equation is normally used to calculate the activation voltage drop [431]

minusminusminus

=RT

zFV

RT

zFVii actact )1(expexp0 ββ (479)

where i0 = apparent exchange current (A)

β = electron transfer coefficient

i0 is the apparent exchange current which is mainly a function of temperature [438]

[439]

)exp( 210 TkTki aa minussdotsdot= (480)

where ka1 ka2 are empirical constants

Under high activation condition the first term in (479) is much higher than the

second term and the well-known Tafel equation can be obtained from (479) by

neglecting its second term [418] thus

128

=

0

lni

i

Fz

RTV cellact β

(481)

Equation (481) will yield an unreasonable value for Vact when i = 0 According to

[438] the value of β is about 05 for fuel cell applications and (479) can be written as

= minus

0

1

2

sinh2

i

i

zF

RTV cellact (482)

The equivalent activation resistance can then be defined as

== minus

0

1

2

sinh2

i

i

zFi

RT

i

VR

cellact

cellact (483)

According to (482) the activation voltage drop will be zero when load current is

zero The ohmic and concentration voltage drops (discussed in the next two sub-sections)

are also zero when the fuel cell is not loaded (i=0) However even the open-circuit

voltage of a SOFC is known to be less than the theoretical value given by (75) [417]

Similar to the computation of activation voltage of a proton exchange membrane fuel cell

[41] a constant and a temperature-dependent term can also be added to (482) for

activation voltage drop computation of SOFC as follows

cellactcellactcellactcellact VViRTV 1010 +=++= ξξ (484)

where ξ0 = constant term of activation voltage drop (V)

ξ1 = temperature coefficient of second term in activation voltage drop (VK)

TV cellact 100 ξξ += is the part of activation drop affected only by the fuel cell internal

temperature while cellactcellact iRV 1 = is both current and temperature dependent

2) Ohmic Voltage Drop The ohmic resistance of a SOFC consists mainly of the

resistance of the electrolyte electrodes and interconnection between fuel cells In this

129

model only ohmic losses of electrolyte and interconnection are included while the

resistance of electrodes is neglected The overall ohmic voltage drop can be expressed as

cellohmintercohmelecytohmcellohm iRVVV =+= (485)

cellohmR normally decrease as temperature increases it can be expressed as [438]

interc

cell

intercintercelecyt

cell

elecytelecyt

cellohmA

Tba

A

TbaR δδ

)exp()exp( += (486)

3) Concentration Voltage Drop During the reaction process concentration gradients

can be formed due to mass diffusion from the flow channels to the reaction sites (catalyst

surfaces) The effective partial pressures of hydrogen and oxygen at the reaction site are

less than those in the electrode channels while the effective partial pressure of water at

the reaction site is higher than that in the anode channel At high current densities slow

transportation of reactants (products) to (from) the reaction site is the main reason for the

concentration voltage drop [417] [418] The concentration overpotential in the fuel cell

can be obtained as

cconcaconc

OH

OH

ch

OH

ch

O

ch

H

cellconc

VV

p

pp

p

pp

F

RTV

2

2

2

2

)(

)(ln

)(

)(ln

42

22

2

22

+=

sdotminus

sdot=

(487)

minus

+=

)2()(1

)2()(1ln

2222

222

ch

HHOHdena

ch

OHHOHdena

aconcpFDiRTl

pFDiRTl

F

RTV (488)

minusminusminus=

22

2

2

4

exp)(1

ln4 NO

ch

c

cdench

O

ch

c

ch

cch

O

cconcDFp

lRTippp

pF

RTV (489)

The equivalent resistance for the concentration voltage drop can be calculated as

130

i

VR

cellconc

cellconc

= (490)

4) Double-layer charging effect In a SOFC the two electrodes are separated by the

electrolyte (Figure 416) and two boundary layers are formed eg anode-electrolyte layer

and electrolyte-cathode layer These layers can be charged by polarization effect known

as electrochemical double-layer charging effect [417] during normal fuel cell operation

The layers can store electrical energy and behave like a super-capacitor The model for

SOFC considering this effect can be described by the equivalent circuit shown in Figure

417 [417] [444]

Figure 417 Equivalent electrical circuit of the double-layer charging effect inside a

SOFC

In the above circuit Rohmcell Ractcell and Rconccell are equivalent resistances of ohmic

voltage drop activation and concentration voltage drops which can be calculated

according to (486) (483) and (490) respectively C is the equivalent capacitance of the

double-layer charging effect Since the electrodes of a SOFC are porous the value of C is

large and can be in the order of several Farads [417] The voltage across C is

))((

cellconccellact

cellC

cellC RRdt

dVCiV +minus= (491)

131

The double-layer charging effect is integrated into the modeling by using VCcell

instead of Vact1cell and Vconccell to calculate Vcell The fuel cell output voltage now turns

out to be

cellohmcellactcellCcellcell VVVEV 0 minusminusminus= (492)

Then (492) and (478) can be used to calculate the output voltage Vout of a SOFC

stack

Energy Balance of the Thermodynamics The cross section profile and heat transfer

inside a tubular SOFC are shown in Figure 418 [418] [440] One advantage of this

tubular structure is that it eliminates the seal problems between cells since the support

tube of each cell is closed at one end [418] The air is fed through a central air supply

tube (AST) and forced to flow back past the interior of the cell (cathode surface) to the

open end The fuel gas flows past the exterior of the cell (anode surface) and in parallel

direction to the air [418]

The thermal analysis for fuel reformer and combustor are not included in this model

Heat exchanges between cells are also not considered in this model by assuming that

temperature differences between adjacent cells can be neglected Heat transport inside the

fuel cell occurs mainly by means of radiation convection and mass flow

The heat generated by the chemical reaction inside the fuel cell can be written as

elecchemgen qqq ampampamp minus= (493)

The available power released due to chemical reaction is calculated by

Hnq consumedHchem ∆sdot= 2ampamp (494)

where ∆H is the enthalpy change of the chemical reaction inside the fuel cell

132

The real electrical output power is

iVq outelec sdot=amp (495)

Air Air Supply Tube

Fuel Cell

Fuel Cell

Fuel

Fuel

qgen

qconvinner

qconvann

qflowairAST

qflowairann q

rad

qfuel conv q

fuel flow

qconvouter

Figure 418 Heat transfer inside a tubular solid oxide fuel cell

The thermodynamic and energy balance analysis for different parts inside the cell are

discussed below [422] [440]

1) Cell Tube

elecchemgencellin qqqq ampampampamp minus== (496a)

fuelflowfuelconvannairflowannconvradcellout qqqqqq ampampampampampamp ++++= (496b)

dt

dTCmqqq cell

cellcellcelloutcellincellnet =minus= ampampamp (496c)

)( 44

ASTcellouterASTASTrad TTAq minus= σεamp (496d)

)( annaircellinnercellcellannconv TTAhq minus=amp (496e)

( )annairoutannairinairairmwairannairflow TTCMMq minus=amp (496f)

133

)( fuelcelloutercellcellfuelconv TTAhq minus=amp (496g)

OHflowHflowfuelflow qqq22

ampampamp += (496h)

22222 ))(( HmwH

in

fuel

out

fuel

out

H

in

HHflow MCTTMMq minus+=amp (496i)

OHmwOH

in

fuel

out

fuel

out

OH

in

OHOHflow MCTTMMq22222 ))(( minus+=amp (496j)

2) Fuel

fuelflowfuelconvfuelin qqq ampampamp += (497a)

fuelflowfuelout qq ampamp = (497b)

dt

dTCmqqq

fuel

fuelfuelfueloutfuelinfuelnet =minus= ampampamp (497c)

3) Air between Cell and Air Supply Tube (AST)

annairflowanncellconvannairin qqq ampampamp += (498a)

annairflowannairout qq ampamp = (498b)

dt

dTCmqqq

annair

airannairannairoutannairinannairnet

=minus= ampampamp (498c)

4) Air Supply Tube

outerASTconvradASTin qqq ampampamp += (499a)

ASTairflowinnerASTconvASTout qqq ampampamp += (499b)

dt

dTmCqqq AST

ASTASTASToutASTinASTnet =minus= ampampamp (499c)

)( ASTcellairouterASTouterASTouterASTconv TTAhq minus=amp (499d)

134

)( ASTairASTinnerASTinnerASTinnerASTconv TTAhq minus=amp (499e)

( )ASTairoutASTairinairairASTflowair TTCMq minus=amp (499f)

5) Air in AST

ASTairflowinnerASTconvASToutASTairin qqqq ampampampamp +== (4100a)

ASTairflowASTairout qq ampamp = (4100b)

dt

dTmCqqq

ASTair

ASTairairASTairoutASTairinASTairnet

=minus= ampampamp (4100c)

The symbols in the above equations (493-4100) are defined as

m = mass (kg)

Ci = specific heat capacity of species i [J(molmiddotK) or J(kgmiddotK)]

h = heat transfer coefficient [W(m2middotK)]

A = area (m2)

Mi = mole flow rate of species i (mols)

Mmw i = molecular weight of species i (kgmol)

ε = emissivity

σ = Stefan-Boltzmann constant 56696times10-8 Wm-2K-4

The superscripts and subscripts in the above equations are defined as

air Conditions for air

ann Annulus of cell

AST Air supply tube

cell Conditions for a single cell

135

ch Conditions at the anode or cathode channel

chem Chemical

conv Convective

conc Concentration

consumed Material consumed in chemical reaction

gen Material (energy) generated in chemical reaction

flow Flow heat exchange

Fuel Conditions for fuel

H2 Hydrogen

H2O Water

in Conditions of inputinlet

innerouter Innerouter conditions

mw Molecular weight (kgmol)

net Net values

O2 Oxygen

out Output

rad Radiation

Effective value

The thermal model of SOFC will be developed according to (493)-(4100)

Dynamic SOFC Model Implementation A dynamic model for a 5kW SOFC has

been developed in MATLABSimulink based on the electrochemical and thermodynamic

136

characteristics of the fuel cell discussed in the previous section The output voltage of the

fuel cell depends on conditions including fuel composition fuel flow oxidant flow

anode and cathode pressures cell temperature load current and the electrical and thermal

properties of the cell materials Figure 419 shows the block diagram based on which the

model has been developed In this figure the input quantities are anode and cathode

pressures (Pa and Pc) H2 flow rate (MH2) H2O flow rate (MH2O) air flow rate (Mair)

and initial temperature of the fuel cell and air (Tfuelinlet and Tairinlet) At any given load

current and time the cell temperature Tcell is determined and both the load current and

temperature are fed back to different blocks which take part in the calculation of the fuel

cell output voltage

In this block diagram material conservation equations (466)-(473) are used to

calculate the partial pressures of H2 H2O and O2 in flow channels Then the Nernst

equation (475) is employed to determine the internal potential (E) of the fuel cell

Diffusion equations (454)-(465) and the material conservation equations will give the

concentration loss of the cell The ohmic voltage drop is determined by (485) and

activation voltage is computed from (484) Eventually the terminal (output) voltage of

the fuel cell is determined by (478) and (492) and the double-layer charging effect

(491) The thermal model is developed via energy balance equations (493)-(4100)

137

Model Responses under Constant Fuel Flow Operation

Both the steady-state and dynamic responses of the SOFC model under constant flow

operating mode are given in this section The thermodynamic response of the model and

the impact of the operating temperature are also given The dynamic responses of the

model are investigated in different time scales

ch

gasP

gasP

Figure 419 Diagram of building a dynamic model of SOFC in SIMULINK

Steady-State Characteristics The steady-state terminal voltage vs current (V-I)

curves of the SOFC model at different temperatures are shown in Figure 420 These

curves are similar to the real test data reported in [418] [442] The activation voltage

drop dominates the voltage drop in the low-current region As load current increases the

ohmic voltage drop increases fast and becomes the main contribution to the SOFC

voltage drop When the load current exceeds a certain value (140A for this SOFC model)

the fuel cell output voltage will drop sharply due to large ohmic and concentration

voltage drops inside SOFC The variations of the above three voltage drops vs load

138

current at three different temperatures are shown in Figure 421

Figure 420 shows the effect of temperature on the SOFC V-I characteristic curve

The SOFC output voltage is higher at lower temperature in the low current zone while the

voltage is higher at higher temperature in the high current region These simulation

results showing the effect of temperature on SOFC performance are also similar to the

test data given in [418] and [442] The negative temperature coefficient of the

open-circuit internal potential E0cell defined by (476) and the temperature-dependent

activation voltage drop and ohmic voltage drop (shown in Figure 421) are the main

reasons for this kind of temperature dependent performance of the SOFC model As

shown in Figure 421 both the activation and ohmic voltage drops decrease as the fuel

cell temperature increases

0 50 100 1500

20

40

60

80

100

120

Load current (A)

SOFC output voltage (V)

1073K

1173K

1273K

Figure 420 V-I characteristics of the SOFC model at different temperatures

The corresponding output power vs current (P-I) curves of the model at different

139

temperatures are shown in Figure 422 At higher load currents (I gt 40 A) higher output

power can be achieved at higher operating temperatures Under each operating

temperature there is a critical load current point (Icrit) where the model output power

reaches its maximum value For example Icrit is 95 A at 1073 K 110 A at 1173 K and

120 A at 1273 K Beyond these points an increase in the load current will reduce the

output power due to large ohmic and concentration voltage drops

0 50 100 1500

10

20

30

40

50

Load current (A)

Voltage drops (V)

Figure 421 Three voltage drops at different temperatures

140

0 50 100 1500

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Load current (A)

SOFC output power (kW)

Pa = 3atm Pc = 3atm Fuel 90H

2+10H

2O

Constant Flow (0096mols) Oxidant Air(6 Stoichs O

2)

1073K

1173K

1273K

Figure 422 P-I characteristics of the SOFC model at different temperatures

Dynamic Response The dynamic response of the SOFC model is mainly dominated

by the double-layer charging effect the time constants τa and τc [defined in (472) and

(473)] and the thermodynamic property of the fuel cell Although the capacitance (C) of

the double-layer charging effect is large (in the order of several Farads) the time constant

τdlc=(Ractcell+Rconccell)C is normally small (in the order of around 10-2 s) because

(Ractcell+Rconccell) is small (less than 20 mΩ for a single cell used in this study) when the

fuel cell works in the linear zone Therefore capacitor C will only affect the model

dynamic response in small time scale ie 10-3-10

-1 s The operating conditions of the

SOFC model for this simulation study are listed in Table 44 Figure 423 shows the

model dynamic responses in this small time scale under step current changes The load

current steps up from 0 A to 80 A at 01s and then steps down to 30 A at 02 s The lower

part of the figure shows the corresponding SOFC output voltage responses with different

141

capacitance values for the double-layer charging effect When the load current steps up

(down) the fuel cell output voltage drops down (rises up) immediately due to the ohmic

voltage drop Then the voltage drops (rises) ldquosmoothlyrdquo to its final value It is noted that

the larger is the capacitance C the slower the output voltage reaches its final value

because the larger is the effective time constant τdlc

0 005 01 015 02 025 030

50

100

Load current (A)

0 005 01 015 02 025 0360

70

80

90

100

110

Time (s)

SOFC output voltage (V)

C=4F

C=15F

C=04F

Fuel 90 H2 + 10 H

2O

Constant flow 0096 molsOxidant Air (6 Stoichs O

2)

Figure 423 Model dynamic responses with different equivalent capacitance values for

double-layer charging effect in small time scale

TABLE 44 OPERATING CONDITIONS FOR THE MODEL DYNAMIC RESPONSE STUDIES

Temperature (K) 1173

Anode input pressure (atm) 3

Cathode input pressure (atm) 3

Anode H2 flow rate (mols) 00864

Anode H2O flow rate (mols) 00096

Oxidant Air (6 stoichs O2)

142

Time constants τa and τc are in the order of 10-1-10

0 s for the model parameters used

in this dissertation They mainly affect the model dynamic responses in the time scale

10-1 to 10

1 s Figure 424 shows the model dynamic responses in this medium time scale

under the same type of step current changes as shown in Figure 423 The load current

steps up from 0 A to 80 A at 1s and then steps down to 30 A at 11s The operating

conditions of the model are the same as given in Table 44 except for the operating

pressures Figure 424 shows the SOFC output voltage responses under different

operating pressures (Pa = Pc = P) Higher operating pressure gives higher output voltage

and also increases time constants τa and τc [see (472) and (473)] shown in the figure

0 5 10 15 200

50

100

Load current (A)

0 5 10 15 2060

70

80

90

100

110

Time (s)

SOFC output voltage (V)

P=1atm

P=3atmP=9atm

Fuel 90 H2 + 10 H

2O

Constant flow 0096 molsOxidant Air (6 Stoichs O

2)

Figure 424 Model dynamic responses under different operating pressures in medium

time scale

The equivalent thermodynamic time constant of a SOFC can be in the order of tens of

minutes [440] [443] Thus for large time scale (102-10

3 s) the thermodynamic

characteristic will dominate the model dynamic responses Figure 425 shows the

143

transient response of the SOFC model under load changes The model was subjected to a

step change in the load current from zero to 100 A at 10 min and then the current drops

back to 30 A at 120 min The operating conditions are also the same as given in Table 44

except for the varying fuel cell operating temperatures The fuel and air inlet

temperatures are given in the figure When the load current steps up the SOFC output

voltage drops sharply and then rises to its final value When the load current steps down

the output voltage jumps up and then drops slowly towards its final value as shown in

Figure 425

0 50 100 150 200 2500

50

100

Load current (A)

0 50 100 150 200 25020

40

60

80

100

120

SOFC output voltage (V)

Time (Minute)

Figure 425 Model dynamic responses under different inlet temperatures in large time

scale

The corresponding temperature responses of the SOFC model are shown in Figure

426 From this figure the equivalent overall thermodynamic time constant of the model

is around 15 minutes

144

0 50 100 150 200 250950

1000

1050

1100

1150

1200

1250

1300

Time (Minute)

SOFC temperature (K)

Tinlet = 1073K

Tinlet = 1173K

Tinlet = 973K

Figure 426 Model temperature responses

Constant Fuel Utilization Operation

In the previous sections only constant flow operation for the SOFC model was

discussed The fuel cell can also be operated in constant fuel utilization mode in which

the utilization factor will be kept constant The utilization factor is defined as [418]

inHinH

consumedH

M

Fi

M

Mu

22

2 2== (4101)

The direct way to achieve constant utilization operation is to feed back the load

current with a proportional gain )2(1 uF times as shown in Figure 427 to control fuel flow

to the fuel processor As a result the input H2 will change as load varies to keep the fuel

utilization constant As shown in Figure 427 the fuel processor is modeled by a simple

delay transfer function )1(1 +sfτ τf is set to 5s in this dissertation

145

)(1 sf +τ

)2(1 uF times

Figure 427 Constant utilization control

In this section the fuel cellrsquos steady state characteristics and dynamic responses under

constant fuel utilization mode will be discussed The results will also be compared with

those obtained under constant flow operating mode The utilization factor is set for 085

(85 fuel utilization) for this study and other operating conditions are the same as listed

in Table 44 except the fuel and water flow rates that will change as the load current

changes

Steady-state Characteristics Figure 428 shows a comparison between the V-I

characteristic of the SOFC model with constant fuel utilization and constant fuel flow

operating modes The operating conditions for the constant flow operating mode are

listed in Table 44 For this specific study the output voltage under constant flow

operating mode is higher than that under constant utilization mode at the same load

current The voltage difference between the two operating modes keeps getting smaller as

the load current increases The reason for this is that the utilization factor of the constant

flow operation will be getting closer to the utilization factor (085) of the constant

utilization operation as load current increases The corresponding P-I curves also given

in Figure 428 show that the SOFC can provide more power under constant flow

146

operation

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 1600

20

40

60

80

100

120SOFC output voltage (V)

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 1600

1

2

3

4

5

6

Load current (A)

SOFC output power (kW)

Constant Flow

Constant Utilization

Pa = 3atm Pc = 3atmFuel 90H

2+10H

2O

T = 1173K

Figure 428 V-I and P-I characteristics of the SOFC model under constant fuel utilization

and constant fuel flow operating modes

Figure 429 shows the curves of input fuel versus load current for both operation

modes It shows that the constant flow operation mode requires more fuel input

especially at light loading But the unused H2 is not just wasted it can be used for other

purposes [440] or recycled to use again

147

20 40 60 80 100 120 1400

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

Load current (A)

Input H2 flow rate (mols)

Constant Flow

Constant Utilization

Figure 429 H2 input for the constant utilization and constant flow operating modes

Dynamic Responses Dynamic response of the SOFC model in small time scale is

dominated by the double-layer charging effect and in large time scale is mainly

determined by the thermodynamic properties of the fuel cell Both the double-layer

charging effect and the thermodynamic characteristics of the fuel cell are determined by

the fuel cellrsquos physical and electrochemical properties These properties are normally not

affected by whether the SOFC is operating under constant fuel flow mode or constant

fuel utilization mode However the dynamic response in medium time scale will be

affected by the operating mode since the fuel flow rate will change as load varies under

constant utilization operating mode This load-dependent fuel flow rate will give a

load-dependent time constant τa as well Therefore only the dynamic response in this

time scale will be discussed for the constant utilization operating mode

148

Figure 430 shows the model dynamic responses in the medium time scale under

similar step current changes used in the constant fuel flow operating mode The load

current steps up from 0 A to 80 A at 1s and then steps down to 30 A at 31 s The lower

part of Figure 430 shows the corresponding SOFC output voltage responses under

different operating pressures Similar to what is shown in Figure 424 for constant fuel

flow operating mode a higher operating pressure results in a higher output voltage and

larger time constants τa and τc [see (472) and (473)] In this case the dynamic responses

are not determined only by τa and τc but also by the dynamics of the fuel processor The

output voltage curves (Figure 430) show the typical characteristic of a second order

system while the dynamic responses in medium time scale for the constant flow operating

mode (Figure 424) exhibit the characteristic of a first order system Figure 230 shows

that the SOFC output voltage drops as the load current steps up undershoots and then

rises back to its final value While the load current steps down the voltage rises up

overshoots and then drops back to its final value We note that the fuel cell fails to start

up at 1 atm operating pressure due to the delay in the fuel processor which causes

insufficient fuel supply

The selection of a SOFC operating mode depends on the actual desired performance

requirements and is beyond the scope of this dissertation Only the constant fuel flow

operating mode will be studied in the following chapters

149

0 10 20 30 40 50 600

50

100

Load current (A)

0 10 20 30 40 50 6020

40

60

80

100

120

Time (s)

SOFC output voltage (V)

1atm

3atm

9atm

Fuel 90 H2 + 10 H

2O

T = 1173 KConstant utilizationOxidant Air (6 Stoichs O

2)

Starting failure at 1atm

Figure 430 Model dynamic responses under different operating pressures in medium

time scale with constant utilization operating mode

150

Wind Energy Conversion System

Introduction

Among the renewable energy technologies for electricity production wind energy

technology is the most mature and promising one The use of wind energy conversion

systems (WECS) is increasing world-wide (see Chapter 1) Moreover the economic

aspects of wind energy technology are promising enough to justify their use in stand

alone applications as well as grid connected operations

As wind velocity in an area changes continuously the energy available from it varies

continuously This necessitates a need for dynamic models of all systems involved which

are responsive to the changes in the wind to have a better understanding of the overall

system

Induction machines (usually squirrel cage rotor type) are often used for wind power

generation because of their ruggedness and low cost [445] However they are used

mostly in grid-connected operation because of their excitation requirement Induction

machines can be used in stand-alone applications provided that enough reactive

excitation is provided to them for self-excitation [446] [447] Induction generators can

cope with a small increase in the speed from rated value because due to saturation the

rate of increase of generated voltage is not linear with speed Furthermore self excited

induction generator (SEIG) has a self-protection mechanism because its output voltage

collapses when overloaded [448]-[451]

In this section modeling of variable speed wind energy conversion systems is

discussed A description of the proposed wind energy conversion system is presented and

151

dynamic models for both the SEIG and wind turbine are developed In addition the

effects of saturation characteristic on the SEIG are presented The developed models are

simulated in MATLABSimulink [457] Different wind and load conditions are applied

to the WECS model for validation purposes

System Configuration The configuration of the WECS system (Figure 431)

studied in this dissertation is similar to the system shown in Figure 25 (c) A SEIG

driven by a pitch controlled variable speed wind turbine acting as the prime mover is

used to generate electricity The output AC voltage (with variable frequency) of the SEIG

is rectified into DC and then a DCAC inverter is used to convert the DC into 60 Hz AC

For stand-alone operation an excitation compensating capacitor bank is necessary to start

the induction generator For grid-connected application the compensating capacitor bank

can be eliminated from the system However for a weak-grid the reactive power

consumed by the induction generator will deteriorate the situation It is better to have a

generation system with self starting capability Therefore for the wind energy system

studied in this dissertation an excitation capacitor bank is always added regardless of the

system being stand-alone or grid-connected

In this section only the modeling of the components inside the rectangle in Figure 4

31 is discussed The design and modeling of power electronic circuits are discussed later

in this chapter It is noted from the figure that there are two main components inside the

rectangle the wind turbine together with the gear box and the SEIG

152

Figure 431 System block diagram of the WECS

Dynamic Model for Variable Speed Wind Turbine

The following sections explain the modeling and the control principles of the variable

speed pitch controlled wind turbine

Wind Turbine Characteristics The power Pwind (in watts) extracted from the wind is

given in equation 251 It is rewritten here as

)(2

1 3 θλρ pwind CAvP = (4102)

where ρ is the air density in kgm3 A is the area swept by the rotor blades in m

2 v is

the wind velocity in ms Cp is called the power coefficient or the rotor efficiency and is

function of tip speed ratio (TSR or λ see equation 252) and pitch angle (θ) [464]

The maximum rotor efficiency Cp is achieved at a particular TSR which is specific to

the aerodynamic design of a given turbine The rotor must turn at high speed at high

wind and at low speed at low wind to keep TSR constant at the optimum level at all

153

times For operation over a wide range of wind speeds wind turbines with high tip speed

ratios are preferred [453]

In the case of the variable speed pitch-regulated wind turbines considered in this

dissertation the pitch angle controller plays an important role Groups of λCpminus curves

with pitch angle as the parameter obtained by measurement or by computation can be

represented as a nonlinear function [455] [456] [466] The following function is used

( ) )exp( 54321 CCCCCC p minusminusminus= θ (4103)

where θ is the pitch angle

Proper adjustment of the coefficients C1-C5 would result in a close simulation of a

specific turbine under consideration The values for C1-C5 used in this study are listed in

Table 45 The Cp-λ characteristic curves at different pitch angles are plotted in Figure

432 From the set of curves in Figure 432 we can observe that when pitch angle is equal

to 2 degrees the tip speed ratio has a wide range and a maximum Cp value of 035

suitable for wind turbines designed to operate over a wide range of wind speeds With an

increase in the pitch angle the range of TSR and the maximum value of power coefficient

decrease considerably

TABLE 45 PARAMETER VALUES FOR C1-C5

C1 05

C2 116kθ

C3 04

C4 5

C5 21kθ

154

kθ in Table 45 used to calculate C2 and C5 is determined by λ and θ as [455] [456]

[466]

1

3 1

0350

080

1minus

+

minus+

=θθλθk (4104)

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 200

005

01

015

02

025

03

035

04

045

05

TSR λ

Cp

0 deg

1 deg

2 deg

3 deg

4 deg5 deg

10 deg

15 deg

20 deg

30 deg

Figure 432 Cp-λ characteristics at different pitch angles (θ)

For variable speed pitch-regulated wind turbines two variables have direct effect on

their operation namely rotor speed and blade pitch angle [452]-[454] Power

optimization strategy is employed when wind speed is below the turbine rated wind

speed to optimize the energy capture by maintaining the optimum TSR Power limitation

strategy is used above the rated wind speed of the turbine to limit the output power to the

rated power This is achieved by employing a pitch angle controller which changes the

blade pitch to reduce the aerodynamic efficiency thereby reducing the wind turbine

power to acceptable levels as discussed in Chapter 2 The different regions of the

155

above-mentioned control strategies of a variable speed wind turbine system are as shown

in the Figure 433

Figure 433 Variable speed pitch controlled wind turbine operation regions

Pitch Angle Controller The pitch angle controller used in this study employs PI

controllers as shown in Figure 434 [452] [456] [466] These controllers control the

wind flow around the wind turbine blade thereby controlling the toque exerted on the

turbine shaft If the wind speed is less than the rated wind speed the pitch angle is kept

constant at an optimum value If the wind speed exceeds the rated wind speed the

controller calculates the power error (between the reference power and the output power

of the wind turbine) and the frequency error (between the measured stator electrical

frequency of the SEIG and the rated frequency) The output of the controllers gives the

required pitch angle (Figure 434) In this figure the Pitch Angle Rate Limiter block

limits the rate of change of pitch angle as most modern wind turbines consist of huge

rotor blades The maximum rate of change of the pitch angle is usually in the order of 3o

to 10osecond

156

Figure 434 Pitch angle controller

turbineω

λminuspC

genω

ratedω

Figure 435 Simulation model of the variable speed pitch-regulated wind turbine

157

Variable-speed Wind Turbine Model The dynamic model of the variable speed

wind turbine are developed in MATLABSimulink Figure 435 shows the block diagram

of the wind turbine model

The inputs for the wind turbine model are wind speed air density radius of the wind

turbine mechanical speed of the rotor referred to the wind turbine side and power

reference for the pitch angle controller The output is the drive torque Tdrive which drives

the electrical generator The wind turbine calculates the tip speed ratio from the input

values and estimates the value of the power coefficient from the performance curves The

pitch angle controller maintains the value of the blade pitch at optimum value until the

power output of the wind turbine exceeds the reference power input

Dynamic Model for SEIG

There are two fundamental circuit models employed for examining the characteristics

of a SEIG One is the per-phase equivalent circuit which includes the loop-impedance

method adapted by Murthy et al [459] and Malik and Al-Bahrani [460] and the nodal

admittance method proposed by Ouazene and Mcpherson [449] and Chan [461] These

methods are suitable for studying the machinersquos steady-state characteristics Another

method is the dq-axis model based on the generalized machine theory proposed by Elder

et al [448] and Grantham et al [450] and is employed to analyze both the machinersquos

transient as well as steady-state

Steady-state Model Steady-state analysis of induction generators is of interest both

from the design and operational points of view By knowing the parameters of the

158

machine it is possible to determine its performance at a given speed capacitance and

load conditions

Loop impedance and nodal admittance methods used for the analysis of SEIG are

both based on per-phase steady-state equivalent circuit of the induction machine (Figure

436) modified for the self-excitation case They make use of the principle of

conservation of active and reactive powers by writing proper loop equations [459]

[460] [465] or nodal equations [449] [461] for the equivalent circuit These methods

are very effective in calculating the minimum value of capacitance needed for

guaranteeing self-excitation of the induction generator For stable operation excitation

capacitance must be slightly higher than the minimum value Also there is a speed

threshold the cutoff speed of the machine below which no excitation is possible In the

following paragraph a brief description of the loop impedance method is given for better

understanding

The per-unit (pu) per-phase steady-state circuit of a self-excited induction generator

under lagging (RL) load is shown in Figure 436 [459] [449] In the analysis of SEIG

the following assumptions were made [459]

1 Only the magnetizing reactance Xm is assumed to be affected by magnetic

saturation and all other parameters of the equivalent circuit are assumed to be constant

Self-excitation results in the saturation of the main flux and the value of Xm reflects the

magnitude of the main flux Leakage flux passes mainly in the air and thus these fluxes

are not affected to any large extent by saturation of the main flux

159

2 Per unit values of the stator and rotor leakage reactance (referred to stator side)

are assumed to be equal (Xls = Xlr = Xl) This assumption is normally valid in induction

machine analysis

3 Core loss in the machine is neglected

Figure 436 Equivalent T circuit of self-excited induction generator with R-L Load

In the figure the symbols are

Rs Rr R pu per-phase stator rotor (referred to stator) and load resistance

respectively

Xl X Xm pu per-phase statorrotor leakage load and magnetizing reactances (at

base frequency) respectively

Xc pu per-phase capacitive reactance (at base frequency) of the terminal excitation

capacitor

f v pu frequency and speed respectively

Vg V0 pu per-phase air gap and output voltages respectively

For the circuit shown in Figure 436 the loop equation for the current can be written

as

160

I Z = 0 (4105)

where Z is the net loop impedance given by

+

minus+++

+

minus= jX

f

R

f

jXjX

f

RjXjX

vf

RZ c

l

s

ml

r

2 (4106)

For equation (4105) to hold true for any current I the loop impedance (Z) should be

zero This implies that both the real and imaginary parts of Z are zero These two

equations can be solved simultaneously for any two unknowns such as f and Xc

Self-excitation Process The process of self-excitation in induction machines has

been known for several decades [446] [447] When capacitors are connected across the

stator terminals of an induction machine driven by an external prime mover voltage will

be induced at its terminals The induced electromotive force (EMF) and current in the

stator windings will continue to rise until the steady state condition influenced by the

magnetic saturation of the machine is reached At this operating point the voltage will be

stabilized at a given value and frequency In order for self-excitation to occur for a

particular capacitance value there is a corresponding minimum speed [447] [458]

Therefore in stand-alone mode of operation it is necessary for the induction generator to

be operated in the saturation region This guarantees one and only one intersection

between the magnetization curve and the capacitor reactance line as well as output

voltage stability under load as seen in Figure 437 [445] [455]

Under no load the capacitor current cgc XVI = must be equal to the magnetizing

current mgm XVI = when the stator impedance (Rs + jXl) is neglected and the rotor

circuit can be considered as open circuit as shown in Figure 437 The stator phase

161

voltage Vg (Vg = V0 in this case) is a function of magnetizing current Im linearly rising

until the saturation point of the magnetic core is reached With the value of self exciting

capacitance equal to C the output frequency of the self-excited generator is

)π(21 mCXf =

ω

minus

C

1tan 1

Figure 437 Determination of stable operation of SEIG

Dynamic Model of SEIG in dq Representations The process of self-excitation is a

transient phenomenon and is better understood if analyzed using a transient model To

arrive at a transient model of an induction generator an abc-dq0 transformation is used

The dq axis model based on the generalized machine theory proposed by Elder

[448] Salama [458] and Grantham [450] is employed to analyze the machinersquos

transient state as well as steady state To arrive at a transient model of an induction

generator abc-dq0 transformation [462] has been used in this analysis

Figure 438 shows the dq axis equivalent circuit of a self excited induction generator

shown in Figure 436 in stationary reference frame [451] [458] [462]

162

drrλω

+

qsVmL

sr lrL + minus

qrrλωminus

+

minus

dsV mL

srlsL lrL

+ minus

minus

rr

rr

lsL

cqVLZ

cdVLZdsλ

drλ

qrλqsλ

+

minus

minus

+

Figure 438 dq representation of a SEIG (All values are referred to stator)

In the figure rω is the electrical angular velocity of the rotor s(r) subscript denotes

parameters and variables associated with stator (rotor) respectively Vcq (Vqs) and Vcd

(Vds) are q and d axis voltages respectively and iqs (ids) is the q (d) axis component of

stator current Iqr (idr) is the q (d) axis component of rotor current Lls Llr and Lm are stator

leakage rotor leakage and magnetizing inductances of the stator qsλ and dsλ are q and

d axis components of stator flux linkages qrλ and drλ are q and d axis components of

rotor flux linkages

From Figure 438 the equation for no-load operation of SEIG can be written as

shown below

163

+

+

minus+minus

++

++

=

d

q

cdo

cqo

dr

qr

ds

qs

rrrrmmr

rrrrmrm

mss

mss

K

K

V

V

i

i

i

i

pLrLωpLLω

LωpLrLωpL

pL0pC1pLr0

0pL0pC1pLr

0

0

0

0

(4107)

where p = ddt Kd (Kq) is a constant representing initial induced voltage along the d (q)

axis due to the remaining magnetic flux in the core Vcqo and Vcdo are initial q and d

component voltages across the capacitor and Ls=Lls+Lm Lr=Llr+Lm

Equation (4107) can be modified to obtain four first order differential equations as

BAIpI += (4108)

The mechanical system is described by

generdrive TpωP

2JT minus+

= (4109)

where

minusminusminus

minus

minus

minusminusminus

=

rsrrssmmrs

rrsrsmrssm

rmrrmssr

2

m

rrmrmr

2

msr

rLLωLrLLωL

LωLrLLωLrL

rLLωLrLωL

LωLrLωLrL

L

1A

minus

minus

minus

minus

=

dscdm

qscqm

cdrdm

cqrqm

KLVL

KLVL

VLKL

VLKL

L

1B

=

dr

qr

ds

qs

i

i

i

i

I 2

mrs LLLL minus= 0

0

1cq

t

qscq VdtiC

V += int and 0

0

1cd

t

dscd VdtiC

V += int

J - Inertia of the rotor in (Kgm2)

Tdrive ndash wind turbine torque in (Nm)

Te_gen ndash electromagnetic torque by the generator in (Nm)

P ndash number of poles

164

The simulation of the SEIG can be carried out by solving (4108) Since the

magnetization inductance Lm is nonlinear in nature an internal iteration has to be done at

each integration step Given the initial condition from the previous step the

magnetization current can be calculated as shown below [450]

22 )()( qrqsdrdsm iiiiI +++= (4110)

The variation of magnetizing inductance as a function of magnetizing current used in

this study is given by

Lm = 05times[0025+02974timesexp(-004878timesIm)] (4111)

Any combination of R L and C can be added in parallel with the self-excitation

capacitance to act as load For example if resistance R is added in parallel with the

self-excitation capacitance then the term 1pC in the matrix (see 4107) becomes

R(1+RpC) The load can be connected across the capacitors once the voltage reaches a

steady-state value [450] [451] If there is an inductive load connected across the

excitation capacitor it influences the effective value of excitation capacitance such that it

results in an increase in the slope of the straight line of the capacitive reactance (Figure

437) reducing the terminal voltage This phenomenon is more pronounced when the

load inductance gets higher in value A capacitor for individual compensation can be

connected across the terminal of the load in such a way that it follows the load

conditions [463]

Ratings of the induction machine simulated are given in Table 32 (Chapter 3) The

detailed parameters used in modeling the SEIG are given in Table 46 The parameters

are obtained from [462] based on the same pu values of a 500 hp 2300 V induction

165

machine

TABLE 46 SEIG MODEL PARAMETERS

rs 0164 Ω

rr 0117 Ω

Xls 0754 Ω

Xlr 0754 Ω

Lm See (4111)

J 1106 kgm2

C 240 microF

P (Number of poles) 4

All reactances are based on 60 Hz

Responses of the Model for the Variable Speed WECS

The model of a 50 kW variable speed wind energy conversion system consisting of a

pitch-regulated wind turbine and self excited induction generator is developed in

MATLABSimulink environment using SimPowersystems block-set In this sub-section

the model responses under different scenarios are discussed

Wind Turbine Output Power Characteristic Figure 439 shows the wind turbine

output power of the simulated model for different wind velocities It can be observed that

the output power is kept constant at higher wind velocities even though the wind turbine

has the potential to produce more power This is done to protect the electrical system and

to prevent the over speeding of the rotor

166

0 5 10 15 20 250

10

20

30

40

50

Wind Speed (ms)

Output Power (kW)

Figure 439 Wind turbine output power characteristic

Process of Self-excitation in SEIG The process of self-excitation can occur only if

there is some residual magnetism For numerical method of integration residual

magnetism cannot be zero at the beginning of the simulation Therefore non-zero initial

values are set for Kq [andor Kd see equation (4107)] and the rotor speed

The process of voltage build up continues starting with the help of the residual

magnetism until the iron circuit saturates and therefore the voltage stabilizes In other

terms the effect of this saturation is to modify the magnetization inductance Lm such that

it reaches a saturated value the transient then neither increases nor decreases and

becomes a steady state quantity giving continuous self-excitation The energy for the

above process is provided by the kinetic energy of the wind turbine rotor [450] Figure

440 shows the process of a successful self excitation in an induction machine under no

load condition with wind speed at 10ms The value of the excitation capacitor is given in

the figure An unsuccessful self excitation process under the same condition (except a

167

smaller capacitor bank) is shown in Figure 441

0 05 1 15 2 25 3-600

-400

-200

0

200

400

600

Time (s)

Terminal Voltage (V)

C = 240 microF

Figure 440 A successful self excitation process

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

Time (s)

Terminal Voltage (V)

C = 10 microF

Figure 441 Voltage fails to build up

168

Figures 442 and 443 show the variations in magnetizing current and magnetizing

inductance vs time for successful voltage build up of the SEIG From Figures 440 442

and 443 it can be observed that the phase voltage slowly starts building up and reaches a

steady state value as the magnetization current starts from zero and reaches a steady state

value Also we see that the self excitation follows the process of magnetic saturation of

the core and the stable output value is reached only when the machine core is saturated

0 05 1 15 2 25 30

10

20

30

40

50

Time (s)

Magnetizing Current Im (A)

Figure 442 Variation of magnetizing current Im

0 05 1 15 2 25 30

005

01

015

02

Time (s)

Magnetizing Inductance Lm (H)

Figure 443 Variation of magnetizing inductance Lm

169

Model Responses under Wind Speed Changes In this section the responses of the

model for the variable speed WECS to wind speed variations are given and discussed

The wind speed changes are shown in Figure 444 The wind speed used in simulation

steps up from 10 ms to 16 ms at t = 30 s and changes from 16 ms to 8 ms at 60 s

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

Time (s)

Wind Speed (ms)

Figure 444 Wind speed variations used for simulation study

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 800

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Wind Power (kW)

Wind speed 10 ms

Wind speed 16 ms

Wind speed 8 ms

Figure 445 Output power of the WECS model under wind speed changes

170

Figure 445 shows the output power of the WECS The WECS starts to supply power

at 3 s It is noted from the figure that the output power is 162 kW at 10 ms wind speed

50 kW at 16 ms and 486 kW at 8 ms respectively This matches the system output

power characteristic shown in Figure 439

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 801200

1400

1600

1800

2000

2200

2400

2600

Time (s)

Rotor Speed (rpm)

Wind speed 10 ms

Wind speed 16 ms

Wind speed 8 ms

Figure 446 Wind turbine rotor speed

Figure 446 shows the wind turbine rotor speed under the wind speed changes The

rotor speed is a slightly under 1800 rpm (rated speed) when there is no load When the

load is connected at 3 s the speed drops to about 1430 rpm When the wind speed is

increased to 16 ms at 30 s there is a fast increase in rotor speed as shown in Figure

446 Then the pitch controller starts operating to bring the rotor speed down to 1890 rpm

which is the upper limit (+5) of the frequency regulation band in the pitch controller

(see Figure 434) The rotor speed drops to 1257 rpm as the wind speed drops to 8 ms at

60 s

171

Figure 447 shows how the pitch angle changes during the wind speed variation Note

that the pitch angle keeps at the optimum value (2˚ in this study) when the wind speed is

below the nominal value (14 ms) When the wind speed exceeds 14 ms (at 30 s) the

pitch controller begins to work and increases the pitch angle to about 615˚ to keep the

output power constant (at 50 kW) The corresponding Cp is shown in Figure 448

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 802

3

4

5

6

7

Time (s)

Pitch Angle (Degree)

Figure 447 Pitch angle controller response to the wind changes

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 800

01

02

03

04

Time (s)

Cp

Figure 448 Variation of power coefficient Cp

172

Solar Energy Conversion System

The principle of operation of a PV cell is discussed in Chapter 2 In this section

model development of a PV module is given in details The PV model developed for this

study is based on the research work reported in [467]-[470]

Modeling for PV CellModule

The most commonly used model for a PV cell is the one-diode equivalent circuit as

shown in Figure 449 [467]-[470] Since the shunt resistance Rsh is large it normally can

be neglected The five parameters model shown in Figure 449 (a) can therefore be

simplified into that shown in Figure 449 (b) This simplified equivalent circuit model is

used in this study

Figure 449 One-diode equivalent circuit model for a PV cell (a) Five parameters

model (b) Simplified four parameters model

The relationship between the output voltage V and the load current I can be expressed

as

minus

+minus=minus= 1exp0 α

s

LDL

IRUIIIII (4112)

173

where IL = light current (A)

I0 = saturation current (A)

I = load current (A)

U = output voltage (V)

Rs = series resistance (Ω)

α = thermal voltage timing completion factor (V)

There are four parameters (IL I0 Rs and α) that need to be determined before the I-U

relationship can be obtained That is why the model is called a four-parameter model

Both the equivalent circuit shown in Figure 449 (b) and the equation (4112) look simple

However the actual model is more complicated than it looks because the above four

parameters are functions of temperature load current andor solar irradiance In the

remainder of this section procedures are given for determining the four parameters

Light Current IL According to [468] and [469] IL can be calculated as

( )[ ]refccSCIrefL

ref

L TTIΦ

ΦI minus+= micro (4113)

where Φ = irradiance (Wm2)

Φref = reference irradiance (1000 Wm2 is used in this study)

ILref = light current at the reference condition (1000Wm2 and 25 ˚C)

Tc = PV cell temperature (˚C)

Tcref = reference temperature (25 ˚C is used in this study)

microISC = temperature coefficient of the short-circuit current (A˚C)

Both ILref and microISC can be obtained from manufacturer data sheet [469]

174

Saturation Current I0 The saturation current can be expressed in terms of its value

at the reference condition as [468]-[469]

+

+minus

+

+=

273

2731exp

273

273

3

00

c

refc

ref

sgap

c

refc

refT

T

q

Ne

T

TII

α (4114)

where I0ref = saturation current at the reference condition (A)

egap = band gap of the material (117 eV for Si materials)

Ns = number of cells in series of a PV module

q = charge of an electron (160217733times10-19 C)

αref = the value of α at the reference condition

I0ref can be calculated as

minus=

ref

refoc

refLref

UII

α

0 exp (4115)

where Uocref = the open circuit voltage of the PV module at reference condition (V)

The value of Uocref is provided by manufacturers The value calculation for α is

discussed in the next section

Calculation of α According to [469] the value of αref can be calculated as

minus+

minus

minus=

refsc

refmp

refmprefsc

refsc

refocrefmp

ref

I

I

II

I

UU

1ln

2α (4116)

where Umpref = maximum power point voltage at the reference condition (V)

Impref = maximum power point current at the reference condition (A)

Iscref = short circuit current at the reference condition (A)

175

α is a function of temperature which as expressed as

ref

refc

c

T

Tαα

273

273

+

+= (4117)

Series Resistance Rs Some manufacturers provide the value of Rs If not provided

the following equation can be used to estimate its value [469]

refmp

refmprefoc

refsc

refmp

ref

sI

UUI

I

R

1ln minus+

minus

=

α

(4118)

Rs is taken as a constant in the model of this study

Thermal Model of PV From equations (4113) to (4118) it can be noted that the

temperature plays an important role in the PV performance Therefore it is necessary to

have a thermal model for a PV cellmodule In this study a lumped thermal model is

developed for the PV module based on [468] The temperature of the PV module varies

with surrounding temperature irradiance and its output current and voltage and can be

written as

( )aclossPVin

c

PV TTkA

IUΦk

dt

dTC minusminus

timesminus= (4119)

where CPV = the overall heat capacity per unit area of the PV cellmodule [J(˚Cmiddotm2)]

kinPV = transmittance-absorption product of PV cells

kloss = overall heat loss coefficient [W(˚Cmiddotm2)]

Ta = ambient temperature (˚C)

A = effective area of the PV cellmodule (m2)

176

PV Model Development in MATLABSimulink

Based on the mathematical equations discussed before a dynamic model for a PV

module consisting of 153 cells in series has been developed using MATLABSimulink

Figure 450 shows the block diagram of the PV model The input quantities (solar

irradiance Φ and the ambient temperature Ta) together with manufacturer data are used to

calculate the four parameters (4113 -4118) Then based on equation 4112 the output

voltage is obtained numerically The thermal model is used to estimate the PV cell

temperature The two output quantities (PV output voltage U and the PV cell temperature

Tc) and the load current I are fed back to participate in the calculations The model

parameters used in the simulation are given in Table 47 which is based on the values

reported in [468]-[469]

Φ

Figure 450 Block diagram of the PV model built in MATLABSimulink

177

TABLE 47 THE PV MODEL PARAMETERS

ILref (ISCref) 2664 A

αref 5472 V

Rs 1324 Ω

Uocref 8772 V

Umpref 70731 V

Impref 2448 A

Φref 1000 Wm2

Tcref 25 ˚C

CPV 5times104 J(˚Cmiddotm

2)

A 15 m2

kinPV 09

kloss 30 W(˚Cmiddotm2)

Model Performance The model I-U characteristic curves under different irradiances

are given in Figure 451 at 25 ˚C It is noted from the figure that the higher is the

irradiance the larger are the short-circuit current (Isc) and the open-circuit voltage (Uoc)

And obviously the larger will be the maximum power (Pmp) shown in Figure 452 The

maximum power point short-circuit current and open-circuit voltage are also illustrated

in the figures

178

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1000

05

1

15

2

25

3

Output Voltage (V)

Current (A)

Tc = 25 degC 1000 Wm2

800 Wm2

600 Wm2

400 Wm2

200 Wm2

Uoc

Isc

Figure 451 I-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different irradiances

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 900

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

Output Voltage

Output Power (W)

1000 Wm2

800 Wm2

600 Wm2

400 Wm2

200 Wm2

Tc = 25 degC

Pmp

Ump

MaximumPowerPoint

Figure 452 P-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different irradiances

179

Temperature Effect on the Model Performance The effect of the temperature on the

PV model performance is illustrated in Figures 453 and 454 From these two figures it

is noted that the lower the temperature the higher is the maximum power and the larger

the open circuit voltage On the other hand a lower temperature gives a slightly lower

short circuit current

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1000

05

1

15

2

25

3

Output Voltage (V)

Current (A)

Tc = 50 degC

Φ = 1000 Wm20 degC

25 degC

Figure 453 I-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different temperatures

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1000

50

100

150

200

Output Voltage

Output Power (W)

Φ = 1000 Wm2

Tc = 50 degC

0 degC

25 degC

Figure 454 P-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different temperatures

180

Maximum Power Point Tracking Control

Though the capital cost for installing a PV array is decreasing due to recent

technology development (see Chapter 1) the initial investment on a PV system is still

very high compared to conventional electricity generation techniques Therefore it is

very natural to desire to draw as much power as possible from a PV array which has

already been installed Maximum power point tracking (MPPT) is one of the techniques

to obtain maximum power from a PV system

Several different MPPT techniques have been proposed in the literature The

techniques summarized in [472] can be classified as (1) Look-up table methods (2)

Perturbation and observation methods and (3) Model-based computational methods Two

major techniques in the ldquoModel-based computational methodsrdquo category are

voltage-based MPPT (VMPPT) and current-based MPPT (CMPPT) techniques Both the

CMPPT and VMPPT methods have been investigated in [472] for matching resistive

loads and DC motor loads A CMPPT method was reported in [473] for matching a DC

motor load In this study a CMPPT method is proposed to obtain maximum power for the

PV array proposed in the AC-coupled hybrid system (see Figure 33 in Chapter 3)

Current-Based Maximum Power Point Tracking The main idea behind the

current-based MPPT is that the current at the maximum power point Imp has a strong

linear relationship with the short circuit current Isc Isc can either be measured on line

under different operation conditions or computed from a validated model Figure 455

shows the curve of Imp vs Isc It can be noted that Imp has a very good linear dependence

on Isc which can be expressed as

181

Imp = kcmppttimesIsc (4120)

where kcmppt is the current factor CMPPT control

0 05 1 15 2 25 3 35 40

05

1

15

2

25

3

35

Short Circuit Current Isc (A)

Imp (A)

Model response

Curve fitting

y = 09245x

Tc = 25 degC

Figure 455 Linear relationship between Isc and Imp under different solar irradiances

75 80 85 9060

62

64

66

68

70

72

Open Circuit Voltage Uoc (V)

Ump (V)

Model response

Curve fittingTc = 25 degC

y = 06659x+ 119

Figure 456 Ump vs Uoc curve under different solar irradiances

182

The VMPPT control is based on the similar idea Figure 456 shows the relationship

between the voltage at the maximum power point Ump and the open circuit voltage Uoc

By comparing Figure 455 and Figure 456 we can see that Figure 455 shows a stronger

linear relationship This is why the CMPPT is used in this study

Control Scheme The control scheme of the CMPPT for the PV system in the

proposed hybrid system is shown Figure 457 The value of Imp calculated form (4120) is

used as the reference signal to control the buck DCDC converter so that the output

current of the PV system matches Imp This reference value is also used to control the

inverter so that the maximum available of power is delivered to the AC bus shown in

Figure 457

Figure 457 CMPPT control scheme

The details on how to control the power electronic devices will be discussed later in

this chapter

183

Simulation Results Simulation studies have been carried out to verify the proposed

CMPPT method For the purpose of simulation the solar irradiance is kept constant at a

value at 600Wm2 for t lt 40 s At t = 40 s the irradiance changes from 600 Wm

2 to 1000

Wm2 shown in Figure 458 This figure also shows the PV output current Ipv and the

reference Imp which is calculated based on (4120) The error between these two currents

is also illustrated in the figure Note that the proposed CMPPT controller works well to

match the PV output current with Imp The corresponding PV output power and the

calculated maximum power curves of the PV system are shown in Figure 459 The figure

also shows that the maximum power point is tracked well with the proposed CMPPT

method

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 800

05

1

15

2

25

Time (s)

Current (A)

Ta = 25 degC

Φ = 600 Wm2

Φ = 1000 Wm2

PV output current Ipv

The error between Ipv and Imp

Imp

Figure 458 Imp and Ipv curves under the CMPPT control

184

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 8060

80

100

120

140

160

180

Time (s)

Power (W)

Ta = 25 degC

Φ = 600 Wm2

Φ = 1000 Wm2

Output Power

Maximum power

Figure 459 PV output power and the maximum power curves

185

Electrolyzer

The fundamentals of operation of electrolyzer have been discussed in Chapter 2

From electrical circuit aspect an electrolyzer can be considered as a voltage-sensitive

nonlinear DC load For a given electrolyzer within its rating range the higher DC

voltage applied the larger is the load current That is by applying a higher DC voltage

we can get more H2 generated Of course more electrical power is consumed at the same

time The model for an electrolyzer stack developed in this study is based on the

empirical I-U equations reported in [468] and [475] described below

U-I Characteristic

The U-I characteristic of an electrolyzer cell can be expressed as [468] [475]

+

+++

++= 1

ln

2

32121

IA

TkTkkkI

A

TrrUU TTT

elecrevcellelec (4121)

where Ueleccell = is the cell terminal voltage (V)

Urev = reversible cell voltage (V)

r1 r2 = parameters for ohmic resistance (Ωmiddotm2 Ωmiddotm

2˚C)

kelec kT1 kT2 kT3 = parameters for overvoltage (V m2A m

2middot˚CA m

2middot˚C

2A)

A = area of cell electrode (m2)

I = electrolyzer current (A)

T = cell temperature (˚C)

The reversible voltage Urev is determined by the Gibbs free energy change of the

electrochemical process as

186

F

GU rev

2

∆minus= (4122)

It is a function of temperature which can be expressed by an empirical equation as

)25(0 minusminus= TkUU revrevrev (4123)

where 0

revU = reversible cell voltage at standard condition (V)

krev = empirical temperature coefficient of reversible voltage (V˚C)

For an electrolyzer stack consisting of nc cells in series the terminal voltage of the

stack can be expressed as

celleleccelec UnU = (4124)

where nc = number of cells in series

Hydrogen Production Rate

According to Faradayrsquo Law [417] [420] the ideal hydrogen production rate of an

electrolyzer stack is given by

F

Inn cH

22 =amp (4125)

where 2Hnamp = hydrogen production rate (mols)

However the actual hydrogen rate is always lower than the above theoretical

maximum value due to parasitic current losses The actual hydrogen production rate can

be obtained as

F

Inn c

FH2

2 η=amp (4126)

where ηF = current efficiency or Faraday efficiency

The current efficiency (ηF) will increase as the current density grows because the

187

percentage of the parasitic current over the total current decreases A higher temperature

will result in a lower resistance value which leads to higher parasitic current and a lower

current efficiency [475] However in high current density regions the effect of

temperature upon current efficiency is small and can be neglected [468] Hence in this

study ηF is considered as function of current density only An empirical formula for ηF is

given in [475] as

( )( ) 22

1

2

f

f

F kAIk

AI

+=η (4127)

where kf1 kf2 = parameters in current efficiency calculation

Thermal Model

The operating temperature of an electrolyzer stack affects its performance

significantly [see (4121)] Therefore it is necessary to have a thermal model for an

electrolyzer stack In this study a lumped thermal model is developed based on the

findings reported in [468] and [475]

coollossgenelec QQQdt

dTC ampampamp minusminus= (4128)

where T = overall electrolyzer temperature (˚C)

Celec = overall heat capacity of the electrolyzer stack (J˚C)

genQamp is the heat power generated inside the electrolyzer stack It can be written as

( )IUUnQ thcelleleccgen minus= amp (4129)

where Uth is the thermal voltage which is expressed as

188

F

STU

F

STG

F

HU revth

222

∆minus=

∆+∆minus=

∆minus= (4130)

lossQamp is the heat power loss It can be determined by

elecT

a

lossR

TTQ

minus=amp (4131)

where Ta = ambient temperature (˚C)

RTelec = equivalent thermal resistance (˚CW)

coolQamp the heat power loss due to cooling can be written as

( )icmocmcmcool TTCQ minus=amp (4132)

where Ccm = overall heat capacity of the flowing cooling medium per second (W˚C)

Tcmo Tcmi = outlet and inlet temperature of the cooling medium (˚C)

Water is used as the cooling medium for the eletrolyzer stack used in this study Tcmo

can be estimated as [468]

minusminusminus+=

cm

HX

icmicmocmC

kTTTT exp1)( (4133)

where kHX = effective heat exchange coefficient for the cooling process It can be

obtained by the following empirical equation [468] [475]

Ihhk convcondHX sdot+= (4134)

where hcond = coefficient related to conductive heat exchange (W˚C)

hconv = coefficient related to convective heat exchange [W(˚CmiddotA)]

189

Electrolyzer Model Implementation in MATLABSimulink

Based on the mathematical equations discussed previously a dynamic model for an

electrolyzer stack consisting of 40 cells in series (50 kW stack) has been developed in

MATLABSimulink Figure 460 shows the block diagram of the electrolyzer model The

input quantities are the applied DC voltage Uelec ambient temperature Ta inlet

temperature of the cooling water Tcm i and the cooling water flow rate ncm The two

output quantities are the hydrogen production rate 2Hnamp and the stack temperature T The

U-I characteristic block [(4121) - (4124)] calculates the electrolyzer current and the

electrolyzer temperature is estimated by the thermal model block (4128-4134) Based on

the calculated electrolyzer current I the current efficiency block (4126-4127) gives the

hydrogen production rate The model parameters are given in Table 48 which is based

on the values reported in [468] and [475]

2Hnamp

Figure 460 Block diagram of the electrolyzer model built in MATLABSimulink

190

TABLE 48 THE ELECTROLYZER MODEL PARAMETERS

r1 805times10-5 Ωmiddotm

2

r2 -25times10-7 Ωmiddotm

2˚C

kelec 0185 V

t1 -1002 m2A

t2 8424 m2middot˚CA

nc 40

krev 193times10-3 V˚C

Celec 6252times105 J˚C

RTelec 0167 ˚CW

A 025 m2

kf1 25times104 Am

2

kf2 096

hcond 70 W˚C

hconv 002 W(˚CmiddotA)

ncm 600 kgh

Ccm (Based on the value of ncm) 69767 W˚C

191

Electrolyzer Model Performance

The U-I characteristics of the electrolyzer model under different cell temperatures are

given in Figure 461 At the same current the higher the operating temperature the lower

the terminal voltage is needed Figure 462 shows the model temperature responses The

ambient temperature and the inlet temperature of the cooling water are set to 25 ˚C for the

simulation study The applied DC voltage starts at 70 V and steps up to 80 V at hour 5

The stack temperature increases from 25 ˚C to 2537 ˚C and stays at that temperature as

long as the applied voltage is 70 V The temperature increases slowly (in approximately 5

hours) to about 302 ˚C when the output voltage jumps to 80 V

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 50060

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

Current (A)

Voltage (V)

T = 25 degC

T = 50 degC

T = 80 degC

Figure 461 U-I characteristics of the electrolyzer model under different temperatures

192

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1065

70

75

80

85

Time (hour)

Voltage (V)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1025

30

35

Stack Temperature (degC)

Voltage

Temperature

Ta = Tcmi = 25 degC

Figure 462 Temperature response of the model

193

Power Electronic Interfacing Circuits

Power electronic (PE) interfacing circuits also called power conditioning circuits are

necessary for a hybrid energy system like the one proposed in Chapter 3 (see Figure 33)

In this section the electrical circuit diagrams state-space models and effective

average-models (for long-time simulation studies) for the main PE interfacing circuits in

the proposed hybrid energy system are discussed They are ACDC rectifiers DCDC

converters DCAC inverters

A detailed model for a PE device together with the control switching signals will

dramatically decrease the simulation speed using MATLABSimulink The detailed

models for PE devices such as those given in the SimPowerSystems block-set are not

suitable for long time simulation studies Effective average-models for PE devices will be

developed in this section which help improve the simulation speed significantly and at

the same time keep the desirable accuracy

ACDC Rectifiers

Circuit Topologies Basically there are two types of ACDC rectifiers

controllableuncontrollable rectifiers Uncontrollable rectifiers are normally referred to

diode (or diode bridge) rectifiers Figure 463 shows a typical three-phase full diode

bridge rectifier [441]

194

Figure 463 Three-phase full diode bridge rectifier

If Ls = 0 in the above figure the average value of the output DC voltage Vdc is given

as [441]

LLdc VV 23

π= (4135)

where VLL is the AC source line-line RMS voltage

The quality of the output DC voltage is fairly good The voltage ripple is within plusmn 5

However the input AC current ia for example is distorted The AC side inductor Ls can

be increased to reduce the current distortion But this will cause extra voltage drop across

the inductor Another way is to use a Y-Y and a Y-∆ connection transformer to form a

12-diode bridge rectifier as shown in Figure 464 There is a 30˚ phase shift between the

two transformer outputs which reduces the transition period from 60˚ to 30˚ in one (360˚)

period The average value of the DC output voltage now is

195

LLdc VV 26

π= (4136)

where VLL is the line-line RMS voltage of the transformersrsquo output

The output DC voltage ripple now is reduced to within plusmn 115 and the harmonics of

the AC side current are much reduced The total harmonic distortion (THD) of a 12-pulse

rectifier is typically 12 with the 11th and 13th harmonics dominant while the THD of a

6-pulse rectifier is about 30 with the 5th and 7th harmonics dominant [441] [476]

Figure 464 Three-phase 12-diode bridge rectifier with a Y-Y and a Y-∆ transformer

Based on the same principle a 24-diode rectifier can be built using zig-zag

transformer group [476] But it is not used commonly in low power rating applications

Controllable rectifiers are normally firing angle controlled thyristor rectifiers and

pulse width modulated (PWM) rectifiers A PWM rectifier has the same circuit topology

as a PWM inverter which will be discussed later in this section It is just the same circuit

196

working at a different operation modes inverter mode vs rectifier mode Therefore only

the thyristor rectifier is discussed here

A thyristor can work just like a diode with the exception that it starts to conduct

when it is not only forward biased but also its gate receives a positive current pulse and

it continues to be conducting as long as it is still forward biased Thyristors can be used in

Figure 463 and 474 to replace the diodes Figure 465 shows a 6-pulse thyristor rectifier

The output DC voltage can be regulated by controlling the firing angles of thyristors The

firing angle α shown in Figure 465 is the angular delay between the time when a

thyristor is forward biased and the time when a positive current pulse is applied to its gate

For a 6-pulse thyristor rectifier the output DC voltage is [441]

)cos(23

απ LLdc VV = (4137)

where α = firing angle

If cos(α) is taken as the control variable it is noted from the above equation that the

output voltage of a thyristor rectifier is proportional to the control input

197

α

Figure 465 A 6-pulse thyristor rectifier

Simplified Model for Controllable Rectifiers Figure 466 shows the block diagram

of the simplified ideal model for controllable three phase rectifiers This model is

developed for long time simulation studies The ldquoline-line voltage peak valuerdquo block

calculates the peak value of the AC line-line voltage LLV2 The input quantity g which

can be considered as cos(α) is the control variable to regulate the output DC voltage The

output DC voltage is calculated based on (4137) For 6-pulse rectifiers gain kdc is 3π

Then the signal Edc is fed to control a controlled voltage source which actually is the DC

output of the model The series resistor Rs is used to model the power and voltage losses

within a real rectifier The ldquoP Q Calculationrdquo block calculates the amount of the real and

reactive power consumed at the AC side based on the DC side real power and the input

198

quantity power angle θ shown in Figure 466 The ldquodynamic loadrdquo block is a built-in

model in Simulink which consumes the real and reactive power assigned by its P amp Q

inputs

Figure 466 Block diagram of the simplified model for 3-phase controllable rectifiers

Figures 467 and 468 compare the voltage and current responses of the simplified

ideal rectifier model with the detailed rectifier models a 6-pulse model and a 12-pulse

model with the same AC source and the same DC load Figure 467 shows that the

average output DC voltage of the ideal model is slightly higher than those of the detailed

rectifier models Figure 468 shows the AC side phase current of the different models It

is noted that the AC current is distorted for the 6-pulse rectifier model However the

harmonic is much reduced for the 12-pulse rectifier model and the response of this

rectifier model is very close to that of the ideal rectifier model The simplified ideal

199

controllable rectifier model shown in Figure 466 is used in the proposed hybrid energy

system It can improve the simulation speed and at the same time keep the desired

accuracy

032 033 034 035 036265

270

275

Time (s)

Output DC Voltage (V) Ideal rectifier model

6-pulse thyristorrectifier model

12-pulse thyristorrectifier model

Figure 467 DC output voltages of the different rectifier models

032 033 034 035 036

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

30

Time (s)

AC side phase current (A)

Idealrectifiermodel

6-pulsethyristorrectifiermodel

12-pulsethyristorrectifiermodel

Figure 468 AC side phase current of the different rectifier models

200

DCDC Converters

There are many types of DCDC converters In this section only typical boost

converters and buck converters are discussed

Circuit Topologies Figure 469 shows the circuit diagram of a boost DCDC

converter (inside the rectangle) The output voltage regulation feedback is also given in

the figure At steady-state the average value of the output voltage is given as

)1(

_

_d

VV

indd

outdd minus= (4138)

where d is the duty ratio of the switching pulse

Since 10 ltle d the output voltage is always higher than the input voltage5 That is

why the circuit (in Figure 469) is called a boost DCDC converter The controller for the

converter is to regulate the DC bus voltage within a desirable range The output voltage is

measured and compared with the reference value The error signal is processed through

the PWM controller which can be a simple PI controller The output of the controller is

used to generate a PWM pulse with the right duty ratio so that the output voltage follows

the reference value

5 When d=1 the input is short circuited and the circuit will not work This situation should be avoided d

normally is less than 085 [476]

201

Figure 469 Boost DCDC converter

Figure 470 Buck DCDC converter

A buck DCDC converter is shown in Figure 470 At steady-state the average value

of the output voltage is given as

202

inddoutdd dVV __ = (4139)

Since 10 lele d the output voltage of a buck converter is always lower than its input

voltage In contrast to a boost converter a buck converter is a step-down DCDC

converter Its output voltage can also be regulated by controlling the duty ratio (d) of the

switching signals The voltage regulation feedback loop is also shown in Figure 470

State-space Models Based on the State-space Averaging Technique In order to

apply classical control analysis and design methods (such as Nyquist criterion Bode plots

and root loci analysis) in converter controls state-space small-signal models for the

above boost and buck converters are needed and are discussed in this section These

models are based on the state-space averaging technique developed by Middlebrook Cuacutek

and their colleagues [477]

1) State-space model for boost DCDC converters

In Figure 469 take ddLix =1 and Cddvx =2 as state variables Let xXx ~+=

dDd~

+= inddinddindd vVv ___~+= and outddoutddoutdd vVv ___

~+= ldquo~rdquo here is used to

denote small perturbation signals and state variable X denotes the system operating point

When the switch Sdd is on and diode Ddd is off the state-space representation of the

main circuit can be written as

xCv

vBxAx

T

outdd

indd

1_

_11

=

+=amp (4140)

where

minus=

ddRC

A 10

00

1

=

0

11

ddLB and ]10[1 =TC

203

When switch Sdd is off and diode Ddd is on the state-space equation of the circuit

turns out to be

xCv

vBxAx

T

outdd

indd

2_

_22

=

+=amp (4141)

where

minus

minus

=

dddd

dd

RCC

LA

11

10

2

=

0

12

ddLB and ]10[2 =TC

Therefore the average state-space model of the main circuit at the operating point is

xCv

BvAxx

T

outdd

indd

=

+=

_

_amp

(4142)

where

minusminus

minusminus

=

dddd

dd

RCC

d

L

d

A11

)1(0

===

0

121

LBBB and ]10[21 === TTT CCC

Then the small signal model for the boost DCDC converter can be obtained as

xCv

vBdBxAx

T

outdd

inddvdd

~~

~~~~

_

_

=

++=amp (4143)

where

minusminus

minusminus

=

dddd

ddd

RCC

D

L

D

A11

)1(0

minus=

dd

dd

dCX

LXB

1

2

=

0

1 dd

v

LB X1 and X2 are the steady

state values of x1 and x2 respectively

Using Eq (4143) and only considering the perturbation of duty ratio d~ ( inddv _~ =0)

204

the transfer function )(

~)(~

)(_

sd

svsT

outdd

vd = is obtained as

[ ]

minus+minus

minus++

=minus= minus

dddddd

dddddd

dd

T

vdCL

XD

C

sX

CL

D

RCss

BASICsT 21

2

1 )1(

)1()

1(

1)( (4144)

2) State-Space model for buck DCDC converters

Similar to the procedure discussed in the previous part a small-signal state-space

model of a buck converter can be obtained which has been reported in [441] and [476]

as

xCv

dBxAx

T

boutdd

bb

=

+=

_

amp

(4145)

where

=

Cdd

ddL

v

ix

minus

minus=

dddd

ddb

RCC

LA

11

10

=

0

_

dd

indd

b L

V

B ]10[=T

bC

The small signal model can be obtained as

xCv

dBxAx

T

boutdd

bb

~~

~~~~

_ =

+=amp (4146)

where

=

Cdd

ddL

v

ix ~

~~ and

=

0

~ _ ddindd

b

LVB

Similarly the transfer function for the output voltage over duty ratio can be obtained

++

==

dddddd

dddd

inddoutdd

p

CLRC

ssCL

V

sd

svsT

1)(~

)(~

)(2

__ (4147)

205

Averaged Models for DCDC Converters Averaged models for boost and buck

DCDC converters suitable for long time simulation studies are given in this part These

models simulate the DCDC converter transient behavior in large scale rather than the

detailed cycle-to-cycle variations of values of voltages and currents The models

discussed here are based on the models reported in [476]

1) Averaged model for boost DCDC converters

Lddid times

outddVd _times

Figure 471 Averaged model for boost DCDC converters

Comparing the circuit diagram of boost converter in Figure 469 and its averaged

model shown in Figure 471 we can see that the power electronic switch and diode are

replaced by the combination of controlled current and voltage sources in the averaged

model This gives the same performance as the detailed circuit model at large time scale

Figures 472 and 473 show the simulation results of the averaged model and the detailed

circuit model under a load change It is noted from these two figures that the averaged

model can simulate the converter behavior precisely at large time scale with reasonable

accuracy

206

008 009 01 011 012 013 014 015 016120

140

160

180

200

220

240Output Voltage (V)

008 009 01 011 012 013 014 015 016150

200

250

300

350

400

450

Time (s)

Inductor Current (A)

Output Voltage

Inductor Current

Figure 472 Simulation result of the averaged model for boost DCDC converter

008 009 01 011 012 013 014 015 016120

140

160

180

200

220

240

Output Voltage (V)

008 009 01 011 012 013 014 015 016150

200

250

300

350

400

450

Time (s)

Inductor Current (A)

Inductor Current

Output Voltage

Figure 473 Simulation result of the detailed model for boost DCDC converter

207

2) Averaged model for buck DCDC converters

Lddid times

inddVd _times

Figure 474 Averaged model for buck DCDC converters

Figure 474 shows the averaged model for buck converters Simulation results shown

in Figures 475 and 476 illustrate the effectiveness of the averaged model for buck

DCDC converters

008 009 01 011 012 013 01430

40

50

60

Output Voltage (V)

008 009 01 011 012 013 0140

40

80

120

Time (s)

Inductor Current (A)

Inductor Current

Output Voltage

Figure 475 Simulation result of the averaged model for buck DCDC converter

208

008 009 01 011 012 013 01430

40

50

60Output Voltage (V)

008 009 01 011 012 013 0140

40

80

120

Time (s)

Inductor Current (A)

Output Voltage

Inductor Current

Figure 476 Simulation result of the detailed model for buck DCDC converter

DCAC Inverters

Circuit Topology A 3-phase 6-switch DCAC PWM voltage source inverter is used

to convert the power from DC to AC Figure 477 shows the main circuit of a 3-phase

voltage source inverter (VSI) which is connected to the AC bus or utility grid through

LC filters and coupling inductors

State-Space Model For deducing convenience the neutral point N of the AC

system is chosen as the common potential reference point For the purpose of simplicity

only the inverter under balanced loads and without a neutral line (used in this dissertation)

is discussed Define the following switching functions

209

minus=

minus

+

OFFS

ONSd

a

a

1

1

1

minus=

minus

+

OFFS

ONSd

b

b

1

1

2 (4148)

minus=

minus

+

OFFS

ONSd

c

c

1

1

3

Figure 477 3-phase DCAC voltage source inverter

van vbn and vcn (the inverter output voltages between each phase and its imaginary

neutral point n) can be expressed as

=

=

=

dccn

dcbn

dcan

Vd

v

Vd

v

Vd

v

2

2

2

3

2

1

(4149)

where Vdc is the DC bus voltage

The output phase potentials of the inverter va vb and vc can be obtained as

210

+=

+=

+=

ncnc

nbnb

nana

vvv

vvv

vvv

(4150)

where vn is the voltage between the point n and the common reference neutral point N

Since 0=++ fcfbfa iii and 0=++ CBA eee vn is obtained as [478]-[479]

sum=

minus=3

1

6 k

k

dc

n dV

v (4151)

For the circuit shown in Figure 477 the following dynamic equations can be

obtained

++=

++=

++=

scfcf

fc

fc

sbfbf

fb

fb

safaf

fa

fa

viRdt

diLv

viRdt

diLv

viRdt

diLv

(4152)

minus+

minus+=

minus+

minus+=

minus+

minus+=

dt

vvdC

dt

vvdCii

dt

vvdC

dt

vvdCii

dt

vvdC

dt

vvdCii

sbscf

sascfscfc

scsbf

sasbfsbfb

scsaf

sbsafsafa

)()(

)()(

)()(

(4153)

minus=+

minus=+

minus=+

Cscsc

sscs

Bsbsb

ssbs

Asa

sa

ssas

evdt

diLiR

evdt

diLiR

evdt

diLiR

(4154)

Writing the above equations into the state-space form

abcabcabcabcabc UBXAX +=amp (4155)

211

where [ ]Tscsbsascsbsafcfbfaabc iiivvviiiX = [ ]TCBAdcabc eeeVU =

minus

minus

minus

minus

minus

minus

minusminus

minusminus

minusminus

=

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

ff

ff

ff

ff

f

ff

f

ff

f

abc

L

R

L

L

R

L

L

R

L

CC

CC

CC

LL

R

LL

R

LL

R

A

001

00000

0001

0000

00001

000

3

100000

3

100

03

100000

3

10

003

100000

3

1

0001

0000

00001

000

000001

00

and

minus

minus

minus

minus

minus

minus

=

sum

sum

sum

=

=

=

s

s

s

f

k

k

f

k

k

f

k

k

abc

L

L

L

Ldd

Ldd

Ldd

B

1000

01

00

001

0

0000

0000

0000

0006

1

2

0006

1

2

0006

1

2

3

1

3

3

1

2

3

1

1

212

dq Representation of the State-Space Model The dq transformation transfers a

stationary 3-coordinate (abc) system to a rotating 2-coordinate (dq) system The dq

signals can be used to achieve zero tracking error control [478] Due to this merit the dq

transformation has been widely used in PWM converter and rotating machine control

[462] [478] [480]

Using the dq transformation explained in [462] (see Appendix A) the system

state-space equation given in (4155) can be represented in the rotating dq frame as

dqdqdqdqdq UBXAX +=amp (4156)

where

[ ]Tsqsdsqsddqdddq iivviiX = [ ]Tqddcdq eeVU =

=

dc

db

da

dqabc

dq

dd

i

i

i

Ti

i

=

sc

sb

sa

dqabc

sq

sd

v

v

v

Tv

v and

=

C

B

A

dqabc

q

d

e

e

e

Te

e

minusminus

minus

minusminus

minus

minusminusminus

minusminus

=

s

s

s

s

s

s

ff

ff

ff

f

ff

f

dq

L

R

L

L

R

L

CC

CC

LL

R

LL

R

A

ω

ω

ω

ω

ω

ω

1000

01

00

3

100

3

10

03

100

3

1

001

0

0001

minus

minus

=

100

010

000

000

00)(

00)(

3

2

12

3

2

11

f

f

dq

L

dddtf

L

dddtf

B

f1 and f2 are obtained as

213

minus++

minusminus+

minus

=

sum

sumsum

=

==

3

1

3

3

1

2

3

1

1

3

2

11

3

1)

3

2sin(

3

1)

3

2sin(

3

1)sin(

3

1

)(

k

k

k

k

k

k

ddt

ddtddt

dddtf

πω

πωω

minus++

minusminus+

minus

=

sum

sumsum

=

==

3

1

3

3

1

2

3

1

1

3

2

12

3

1)

3

2cos(

3

1)

3

2cos(

3

1)cos(

3

1

)(

k

k

k

k

k

k

ddt

ddtddt

dddtf

πω

πωω

Tabcdq is the abcdq transformation matrix The methodology for developing the

abcdq transformation is explained in [462] (see Appendix A)

214

Ideal Model for Three-phase VSI Figure 478 shows the ideal model for a

three-phase VSI It is not a detailed model with all the power electronic switches and

switching signals it is an idealized model used for long time simulation studies The load

current of the input DC voltage source (Idc) is determined by the power consumed at the

AC side The other three input quantities are the desired output AC frequency f AC

voltage amplitude index (similar to the modulation index in a real VSI control) m and the

initial phase of the three-phase AC output voltages 0φ The ldquoabc signal formationrdquo block

gives the base signals for the three phases va(t) vb(t) and vc(t)

++=

++=

+=

)342sin()(

)322sin()(

)2sin()(

0

0

0

φππφππ

φπ

ftmtv

ftmtv

ftmtv

c

b

a

(4157)

The output voltage values Va(t) Vb(t) and Vc(t) are calculated by multiplying the

base signal values by the possible peak of the output AC which is 05Vdc For example

Va(t) = 05Vdctimesva(t) Then Va(t) Vb(t) and Vc(t) are used to control the three controlled

voltage sources which are the AC output voltages of the inverter model The AC power

is calculated through the ldquoPower Calculationrdquo block as

)()()()()()( tVtItVtItVtIP ccbbaaac times+times+times= (4158)

For the purpose of comparison a 208 V three-phase VSI is simulated to supply 100

kW to a load both by the ideal model shown in Figure 478 and the switched model given

in Figure 477 Figure 479 shows the output AC phase voltage of the two models It is

noted that though there are harmonics in voltage from the switched model its output

voltage waveform is very close to the output from the ideal model when a properly

215

designed filter is applied to the system Figure 480 shows the output power to the load

from the two models We can see that the ideal model output is ideal delivering a

constant power of 100 kW On the other hand a more practical and detailed output power

curve (with ripples) is obtained from the switched model Nevertheless the ideal model is

capable of simulating a VSI with good accuracy at large time scale

Figure 478 Ideal model for three-phase VSI

216

16 161 162 163 164

-150

-100

-50

0

50

100

150

Time (s)

AC phase voltage (V)

Figure 479 AC phase output voltages of the ideal VSI model and the switched VSI

model

16 162 164 166 168 170

50

100

150

200

Time (s)

Output Power (kW)

Switched Model

Ideal Model

Figure 480 Output power of the ideal VSI model and the switched VSI model

217

Battery Model

A validated electrical circuit model for lead-acid batteries shown in Figure 481 was

reported in [481] The diodes in the model are all ideal and just used to select different

resistances for charging and discharging states The model parameters (capacitances and

resistances) defined in Figure 481 are functions of battery current temperature and state

of charge (SOC) [481] [482] However within the voltage range (100plusmn5) there is not

a big difference between the charge and discharge resistances [481] For the purpose of

analysis these component values in the model are considered constant within the100plusmn5

voltage range in this study Then the model shown in Figure 481 can be simplified into

the circuit model given in Figure 482

Cb= battery capacitance Rp= self-discharge resistance or insulation resistance

R2c= internal resistance for charge R2d= internal resistance for discharge

R1c= overvoltage resistance for charge R1d= overvoltage resistance for discharge

C1= overvoltage capacitance

Figure 481 Equivalent circuit model for battery reported in [481]

218

Figure 482 Simplified circuit model for lead-acid batteries

Models for Accessories

Gas Compressor

A gas compressor can be modeled by considering the compression process as a

two-stage polytropic compression which can be described as [422]

CVP m

ii = (4159)

where Pi Vi = the pressure and voltage at stage i (1 2)

m = polytropic exponent

C = constant

Based on the above equation the power needed to compress a gas at pressure P1 to

pressure P2 with the flow rate gasnamp can be obtained as

comp

m

m

x

gascompP

P

m

mRTnP

η1

11

2

1

2

minus

minus=

minus

amp (4160)

where Pcomp = power consumed (W)

gasnamp = gas flow rate (mols)

219

R = gas constant 83144 J(molmiddotK)

T = gas temperature (K)

P2 = exit pressure (Pa)

21PPPx = intermediate pressure (Pa)

P1 = inlet pressure (Pa)

ηcomp = overall efficiency of the compressor

High Pressure H2 Storage Tank

For H2 in the high pressure storage tank shown in Figure 483 the ideal gas equation

does not accurately describe the relation between P V and T a modified equation of state

should be used The Beattie-Bridgeman equation has been successful in fitting the

measured values of pressure volume and temperature in a high-pressure gas storage tank

with good accuracy [422] This modified state equation can be written as

innamp outnamp

Figure 483 Pressured H2 storage tank

2

2

0

032

21

11V

nV

anA

V

bnB

n

V

VT

cn

V

RTnP

minusminus

minus+

minus= (4161)

where P = pressure of hydrogen in the tank (atm)

V = Volume of the tank (liter)

220

T = temperature of H2 (K)

n = number of moles of H2 in the tank

R = Gas constant 008206 atmmiddotliter(molmiddotK)

A0 B0 a b c are constants for certain type of gas Their values for H2 are given

in Table 49

The change of mole number of gas (H2) in the tank is governed by

outin nndt

dnampamp minus= (4162)

TABLE 49 CONSTANTS OF BEATTIE-BRIDGEMAN EQUATION OF STATE FOR H2 [422]

A0 01975 atmmiddotliter2mol

2

B0 002096 litermol

a -000506 litermol

b -004359 litermol

c 00504times104 litermiddotK3mol

Gas Pressure Regulator

Figure 484 shows a schematic diagram of a commonly used gas pressure regulator

[483] Its function is to keep the output pressure Po constant at a desired value (Pref)

under changes of the gas flow rates qo The pressure regulation is achieved by the

deformation of the diaphragm Suppose there is a reduction in Po which will reduce the

pressure against the bottom of the diaphragm This causes the spring force to push

downward to increase the valve opening in the direction axis x Therefore the valve flow

221

is increased and as a result the output pressure Po is raised back toward the reference

value The system can be modeled by the following equations [483]

( )( )oicxi PPkxkq minus+= (4163)

where qi = input flow rate (mols)

kx kc = constants used in calculating fluid resistanceadmittance [mol(Pamiddotsmiddotm)

mol(Pamiddots)]

Figure 484 Gas pressure regulator

The net flow entering the volume below the diaphragm is

( )( ) ooicxoinet qPPkxkqqq minusminus+=minus= (4164)

Normally the diaphragm deformation is small hence the volume V can be considered

constant The dynamic state equation can be written as

ognet PCq amp= (4165)

where Cg = VRT The output pressure Po can be expressed as

A

xkPP s

refo minus= (4166)

where ks = spring constant (Nm)

A = diaphragm area (m2)

Figure 485 shows the model performance under output flow variations and the

222

variations in reference pressure The model is adjusted to keep the output pressure at the

reference value at the flow rate of 01 mols The reference pressure steps up from 2 atm

to 3 atm at 10 s The figure shows that the output pressure follows the reference value

very well It is noted from the figure that the output pressure drops a little bit (from 2 atm

to about 198 atm) when the output flow rate jumps up to 02 mols at 2 s The output

pressure comes back to its preset value (2 atm) when the output flow rate drops back to

01 mols at 6 s

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 1615

2

25

3

35

Pressure (atm)

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 160

01

02

Time (s)

Flow rate (mols)

Output flow rate qo

Output pressure Po

Pref

Figure 485 Performance of the model for gas pressure regulators

223

Summary

In this chapter the model development for the components of the proposed hybrid

alternative energy system is discussed These components are fuel cells (PEMFCs and

SOFCs) variable speed wind energy conversion unit solar power generation unit

electrolyzers power electronic interfacing devices battery bank and accessories

including gas compressor high-pressure H2 storage tank and gas pressure regulator

Performance evaluation of these models is also discussed in this chapter The models will

be used in Chapters 5 and 6 to investigate grid-connected and stand-alone fuel cell power

generation systems and in Chapter 7 for the study of hybrid energy systems

224

REFERENCES

[41] J C Amphlett R M Baumert R F Mann B A Peppley and P R Roberge

ldquoPerformance Modeling of the Ballard Mark IV Solid Polymer Electrolyte Fuel

Cell I Mechanistic Model Developmentrdquo Journal of the Electrochemical Society

Vol 142 No 1 pp 1-8 Jan 1995

[42] J C Amphlett R M Baumert R F Mann B A Peppley and P R Roberge

ldquoPerformance Modeling of the Ballard Mark IV Solid Polymer Electrolyte Fuel

Cell II Empirical Model Developmentrdquo Journal of the Electrochemical Society

Vol 142 No 1 pp 9-15 Jan 1995

[43] R Cownden M Nahon M A Rosen ldquoModeling and Analysis of a Solid Polymer

Fuel Cell System for Transportation Applicationsrdquo International Journal of

Hydrogen Energy Vol 26 No 6 pp 615-623 June 2001

[44] Charles E Chamberlin ldquoModeling of Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cell

Performance with an Empirical Equationrdquo Journal of the Electrochemical Society

Vol 142 No 8 pp 2670-2674 August 1995

[45] Andrew Rowe Xianguo Li ldquoMathematical Modeling of Proton Exchange

Membrane Fuel Cellsrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 102 No 1-2 pp82-96

Dec 2001

[46] D Bevers M Woumlhr ldquoSimulation of a Polymer Electrolyte Fuel Cell Electroderdquo

Journal of Applied Electrochemistry Vol27 No 11 pp 1254-1264 Nov 1997

[47] G Maggio V Recupero L Pino ldquoModeling Polymer Electrolyte Fuel Cells An

Innovative Approachrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 101 No 2 pp275-286 Oct

2001

[48] J C Amphlett R F Mann B A Peppley P R Roberge and A Rodrigues ldquoA

Model Predicting Transient Responses of Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cellsrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 61 No 1-2 pp 183-188 July-Aug 1996

[49] J Hamelin K Agbossou A Laperriegravere F Laurencelle and T K Bose ldquoDynamic

Behavior of a PEM Fuel Cell Stack for Stationary Applicationsrdquo International

Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 26 No 6 pp 625-629 June 2001

[410] M Woumlhr K Bolwin W Schnurnberger M Fischer W Neubrand and G

Eigenberger ldquoDynamic Modeling and Simulation of a Polymer Membrane Fuel

Cell Including Mass Transport Limitationrdquo International Journal of Hydrogen

Energy Vol 23 No 3 pp 213-218 March 1998

225

[411] Hubertus PLH van Bussel Frans GH Koene and Ronald KAM Mallant

ldquoDynamic Model of Solid Polymer Fuel Cell Water Managementrdquo Journal of

Power Sources Vol 71 No 1-2 pp 218-222 March 1998

[412] M Wang M H Nehrir ldquoFuel Cell Modeling and Fuzzy Logic-Based Voltage

Controlrdquo International Journal of Renewable Energy Engineering Vol 3 No 2

August 2001

[413] Michael D Lukas Kwang Y Lee Hossein Ghezel-Ayagh ldquoPerformance Implications of Rapid Load Changes in Carbonate Fuel Cell Systemsrdquo

Proceedings 2001 IEEE Power Engineering Society Winter Meeting Vol 3 pp

979-984 2001

[414] Robert Lasseter ldquoDynamic Models for Micro-turbines and Fuel Cellsrdquo

Proceedings 2001 IEEE Power Engineering Society Summer Meeting Vol 2 pp 761-766 2001

[415] Padmanabhan Srinivasan Ali Feliachi John Ed Sneckenberger ldquoProton Exchange

Membrane Fuel Cell Dynamic Model for Distributed Generation Control

Purposesrdquo Proceedings 34th North American Power Symposium pp 393-398

Oct 2002 Tempe Arizona

[416] Pariz Famouri and Randall S Gemmen ldquoElectrochemical Circuit Model of a PEM

Fuel Cellrdquo Proceedings 2003 IEEE Power Engineering Society Summer Meeting

0-7803-7990-X03 July 2003 Toronto Canada

[417] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained John Wiley amp

Sons Ltd 2001

[418] Fuel Cell Handbook (Sixth Edition) EGampG Services Inc Science Applications

International Corporation DOE Office of Fossil Energy National Energy

Technology Lab Nov 2002

[419] JA Smith MH Nehrir V Gerez and SR Shaw ldquoA Broad Look at the Workings

Types and Applications of Fuel Cellsrdquo Proceedings 2002 IEEE Power

Engineering Society Summer Meeting Vol 1 pp 70-75 July 2002 Chicago IL

[420] G Kortum Treatise on Electrochemistry (2nd Edition) Elsevier Publishing

Company 1965

[421] A Schneuwly M Baumlrtschi V Hermann G Sartorelli R Gallay and R Koetz

ldquoBOOSTCAP Double-Layer Capacitors for Peak Power Automotive Applicationsrdquo Proceedings the Second International ADVANCED

AUTOMOTIVE BATTERY Conference (AABC) Las Vegas Nevada February

2002

226

[422] George N Hatsopoulos and Joseph H Keenan Principles of General

Thermodynamics John Wiley amp Sons Inc 1965

[423] Thomas G Burke and David A Schiller ldquoUsing PSPICE for Electrical Heat

Analysisrdquo IEEE Potentials Vol 22 No 2 pp 35-38 AprilMay 2003

[424] PSpicereg includes PSpice AD PSpice AD Basics and Pspice Reference Guide Cadence Design Systems Inc Release 923

[425] SR-12 Modular PEM GeneratorTM Operatorrsquos Manual Avista Labs July 2000

[426] MT Iqbal ldquoSimulation of a Small Wind Fuel Cell Hybrid Energy Systemrdquo

Renewable Energy Vol 28 No 4 pp 511-522 April 2003

[427] SC Singhal ldquoSolid oxide fuel cells for stationary mobile and military

applicationsrdquo Solid State Ionics Vol 152-153 pp405-410 2002

[428] SC Singhal ldquoAdvances in tubular solid oxide fuel cell technologyrdquo Solid State Ionics Vol 135 pp305-313 2000

[429] O Yamamoto ldquoSolid oxide fuel cells fundamental aspects and prospectsrdquo

Electrochimica Acta Vol 45 No (15-16) pp 2423-2435 2000

[430] K Eguchi H Kojo T Takeguchi R Kikuchi and K Sasaki ldquoFuel flexibility in power generation by solid oxide fuel cellsrdquo Solid State Ionics No 152-153 pp

411-16 Dec 2002

[431] SH Chan KA Khor and ZT Xia ldquoA complete polarization model of a solid

oxide fuel cell and its sensitivity to the change of cell component thicknessrdquo

Journal of Power Sources Vol 93 No (1-2) pp 130-140 Feb 2001

[432] P Aguiar D Chadwick and L Kershenbaum ldquoModeling of an indirect internal

reforming solid oxide fuel cellrdquo Chemical Engineering Science Vol 57

pp1665-1677 2002

[433] P Costamagna and K Honegger ldquoModeling of solid oxide heat exchanger

integrated stacks and simulation at high fuel utilizationrdquo Journal of the

Electrochemical Society Vol 145 No 11 pp 3995-4007 Nov 1998

[434] J Padulleacutes GW Ault and J R McDonald ldquoAn integrated SOFC plant dynamic

model for power system simulationrdquo J Power Sources pp495ndash500 2000

[435] DJ Hall and RG Colclaser ldquoTransient Modeling and Simulation of a Tubular

Solid Oxide Fuel Cellrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 14 No3

pp 749-753 1999

227

[436] RS Gemmen ldquoAnalysis for the effect of inverter ripple current on fuel cell

operating conditionrdquo Transactions of the ASME - Journal of Fluids Engineering

Vol 125 No 3 pp576-585 May 2003

[437] K Acharya SK Mazumder RK Burra R Williams C Haynes Proceeding

38th IAS Annual Meeting (IEEE Industry Applications Society) Vol 3 pp

2026-2032 2003

[438] S H Chan CF Low OL Ding ldquoEnergy and exergy analysis of simple solid-oxide fuel-cell power systemsrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 103 No2

pp 188-200 Jan 2002

[439] S Nagata A Momma T Kato and Y Kasuga ldquoNumerical analysis of output

characteristics of tubular SOFC with internal reformerrdquo Journal of Power Sources

Vol 101 pp60-71 2001

[440] D J Hall Transient Modeling and Simulation of a Solid Oxide Fuel Cell PhD

Dissertation School of Engineering University of Pittsburg Nov 1997

[441] N Mohan T M Undeland and W P Robbins Power Electronics ndash Converters

Applications and Design John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2003

[442] S C Singhal ldquoRecent progress in tubular solid oxide fuel cell technologyrdquo Proceedings the Fifth International Symposium on SOFC (Electrochem Soc) pp

37-50 1997

[443] E Achenbach ldquoResponse of a solid oxide fuel cell to load changerdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 57 No (1-2) pp 105-109 1995

[444] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy

Conversion Vol 20 No 2 pp442-451 June 2005

[445] Rajib Datta and V T Ranganathan ldquoVariable-Speed Wind Power Generation

Using Doubly Fed Wound Rotor Induction Machine ndash A Comparison with

Alternative Schemesrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversions vol 17 no 3 pp 414-420 Sept 2002

[446] C F Wagner ldquoSelf-excitation of induction motorsrdquo Trans Amer Inst Elect Eng

vol 58 pp 47-51 Feb 1939

[447] E D Basset and F M Potter ldquoCapacitive excitation of induction generatorsrdquo Trans

Amer Inst Elect Eng vol 54 no 5 pp 540-545 May 1935

228

[448] J M Elder J T Boys and J L Woodward ldquoSelf-excited induction machine as a

small low-cost generatorrdquo in Proc Inst Elect Eng pt C vol 131 no 2 pp 33-41

Mar 1984

[449] L Ouazene and G Mcpherson Jr ldquoAnalysis of the isolated induction generatorrdquo

IEEE Trans Power Apparatus and Systems vol PAS-102 no 8 pp2793-2798

Aug 1983

[450] C Grantham D Sutanto and B Mismail ldquoSteady-state and transient analysis of self-excited induction generatorsrdquo in Proc Inst Elect Eng pt B vol 136 no 2

pp 61-68 Mar 1989

[451] Dawit Seyoum Colin Grantham and M F Rahman ldquoThe dynamic characteristics

of an isolated self-excited induction generator driven by a wind turbinerdquo IEEE

Trans Industry Applications vol39 no 4 pp936-944 JulyAugust 2003

[452] Eduard Muljadi and C P Butterfield ldquoPitch-Controlled Variable Wind turbine

Generationrdquo IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications vol 37 no 1 pp

240-246 JanFeb 2001

[453] Siegfried Heier Grid Integration of Wind energy Conversion Systems John Wileyamp Sons 1998 ch 1-2

[454] J G Slootweg SWH de Haan H Polinder and WL Kling ldquoGeneral Model for

Representing Variable Speed Wind Turbines in Power System Dynamics

Simulationsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Systems vol 18 no 1 pp 144-151

Feb 2003

[455] Bimal K Bose Modern Power Electronics and Ac Drives Pearson Education 2003

ch 2

[456] P M Anderson and Anjan Bose ldquo Stability Simulation of Wind Turbine systemsrdquo

IEEE Trans on Power and Apparatus and Systems vol PAS-102 no 12 pp

3791-3795 Dec 1983

[457] MatLabSimulink SimPowerSystems Documentation Available httpwwwmathworkscom

[458] M H Salama and P G Holmes ldquoTransient and steady-state load performance of

stand alone self-excited induction generatorrdquo in Proc IEE-Elect Power Applicat

vol 143 no 1 pp 50-58 Jan 1996

[459] S S Murthy O P Malik and A K Tandon ldquoAnalysis of self excited induction

generatorsrdquo in Proc Inst Elect Eng pt C vol 129 no 6 pp 260-265 Nov1982

229

[460] N H Malik and A H Al-Bahrani ldquoInfluence of the terminal capacitor on the

performance characteristics of a self-excited induction generatorrdquo in Proc Inst

Elect Eng pt C vol 137 no 2 pp 168-173 Mar 1990

[461] T F Chan ldquoCapacitance requirements of self-excited induction generatorsrdquo IEEE

Trans Energy Conversion vol 8 no 2 pp 304-311 June 1993

[462] Paul C Krause Oleg Wasynczuk and Scott D Sudhoff Analysis of Electric

Machinery IEEE Press 1994 ch 3-4

[463] M Godoy Simoes and Felix A Farret Renewable Energy Systems-Design and

Analysis with Induction Generators CRC Press 2004 ch 3-6

[464] JG Slootweg ldquoWind power modeling and impact on power system dynamicsrdquo

PhD dissertation Dept Elect Eng Delft University of Technology Delft

Netherlands 2003

[465] A K Al Jabri and AI Alolah ldquoCapacitance requirements for isolated self-excited

induction generatorrdquo Proceedings IEE pt B vol 137 no 3 pp 154-159 May

1990

[466] SR Guda ldquoModeling and power management of a hybrid wind-microturbine

power generation systemrdquo MS thesis Montana State University 2005

[467] Oslash Ulleberg and S O MOslashRNER ldquoTRNSYS simulation models for solar-hydrogen

systems rdquo Solar Energy Vol 59 No 4-6 pp 271-279 1997

[468] Oslashystein Ulleberg Stand-Alone Power Systems for the Future Optimal Design

Operation amp Control of Solar-Hydrogen Energy Systems PhD Dissertation

Norwegian University of Science and Technology Trondheim 1998

[469] TU Townsend A Method for Estimating the Long-Term Performance of

Direct-Coupled Photovoltaic Systems MS thesis University Of Wisconsin ndash

Madison 1989

[470] M R Patel Wind and Solar Power Systems CRC Press LLC 1999

[471] H Dehbonei Power conditioning for distributed renewable energy generation PhD Dissertation Curtin University of Technology Australia 2003

[472] MAS Masoum H Dehbonei and EF Fuchs ldquoTheoretical and experimental

analyses of photovoltaic systems with voltage and current-based maximum

power-point trackingrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 17 No 4

pp 514 ndash 522 Dec 2002

230

[473] JHR Enslin MS Wolf DB Snyman and W Swiegers ldquoIntegrated Photovoltaic

Maximum Power Point Tracking Converterrdquo IEEE Transactions On Industrial

Electronics Vol 44 No 6 December 1997

[474] S M Alghuwainem ldquoMatching of a dc motor to a photovoltaic generator using a

step-up converter with a current-locked looprdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy

Conversion vol 9 pp 192ndash198 Mar 1994

[475] Oslash Ulleberg ldquoModeling of advanced alkaline electrolyzers a system simulation approachrdquo International Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 28 pp 21-33 2003

[476] DW Hart Introduction to Power Electronics Prentice Hall 1997

[477] RD Middlebrook ldquoSmall-signal modeling of pulse-width modulated

switched-mode power convertersrdquo Proceedings of the IEEE Vol 76 No 4 pp 343

ndash 354 April 1988

[478] H Mao Study on Three-Phase High-Input-Power-Factor PWM-Voltage-Type

Reversible Rectifiers and Their Control Strategies PhD Dissertation Zhejiang

University 2000

[479] M Tsai WI Tsai ldquoAnalysis and Design of Three-phase AC-to-DC Converters

with High Power Factor and Near-Optimum Feedforwardrdquo IEEE Transactions on

Industrial Electronics Vol 46 No 3 pp535-543 June 1999

[480] C T RimN S Choi G C Cho G H Cho ldquoA Complete DC and AC Analysis of

Three-Phase Controlled-Current PWM Rectifier Using Circuit D-Q

Transformationrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Electronics Vol 9 No 4 pp

390-396 July 1994

[481] ZM Salameh MA Casacca and WA Lynch ldquoA mathematical model for

lead-acid batteriesrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 7 No1 pp

93-98 1992

[482] Handbook of Batteries 2nd edition D Linden Ed McGraw Hill Inc New York

NY 1995

[483] John Van de Vegte Feedback Control Systems (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall 1994

231

CHAPTER 5

CONTROL OF GRID-CONNECTED

FUEL CELL POWER GENERATION SYSTEMS

Introduction

Fuel cells show great promise to be an important distributed generation (DG) source

of the future due to many advantages they have such as high efficiency zero or low

emission (of pollutant gases) and flexible modular structure Fuel cell DGs can be

strategically placed at any site in a power system (normally at the distribution level) for

grid reinforcement deferring or eliminating the need for system upgrades and improving

system integrity reliability and efficiency When connected to a utility grid important

operation and performance requirements are imposed on fuel cell DGs For example they

should be able to deliver a pre-set amount of real and reactive power to the grid or be

able to follow a time varying load profile [52] [56] [527] Therefore proper

controllers need to be designed for a fuel cell DG to make its performance characteristics

as desired

Among different types of fuel cells proton exchange membrane fuel cells (PEMFC)

solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC) and molten carbonate fuel cells (MCFC) are likely to be

used in DG applications In order to study the performance characteristics of fuel cell

DGs accurate models of fuel cells are needed [51]-[58] Moreover models for the

interfacing power electronic circuits in a fuel cell DG are also needed to design

controllers for the overall system to improve its performance and to meet certain

232

operation requirements [57]-[59]

In this chapter the control of grid-connected FC systems is discussed Both a PEMFC

and a SOFC grid connected system are investigated The PEMFC model the SOFC

model and the models for boost DCDC converters and a three-phase inverter together

with a LC filter and transmission lines reported in Chapter 4 are used in this study The

controller design methodologies for the DCDC converters and the 3-phase inverter are

also presented for the proposed fuel cell DG systems Based on the individual component

models developed and the controllers designed simulation models for both a PEMFC DG

system and a SOFC DG system have been built in MATLABSimulink using the

SimPowerSystems block-set Simulation studies are carried out to investigate the real and

reactive power controllability of the fuel cell DG systems The system performances

under load-following and severe electrical faults are also discussed in this chapter

System Description

In order to meet the system operational requirements a fuel cell DG needs to be

interfaced through a set of power electronic devices The interface is very important as it

affects the operation of the fuel cell system as well as the power grid

Various power electronic circuits have been proposed in recent work to interface

different energy sources with the utility grid [59]-[516] Pulse-width modulated (PWM)

voltage source inverters (VSI) are widely used to interconnect a fuel cell energy system

to a utility grid for real and reactive power control purposes [59] [511] [515] [516]

233

Figure 51 Block diagram of a fuel cell distributed generation system

234

In addition fuel cell systems normally need boost DCDC converters to adapt the fuel

cell output voltage to the desired inverter input voltage and smooth the fuel cell output

current [517] [518]

Figure 51 shows the schematic diagram of the fuel cell DG system proposed in this

study In this dissertation the fuel cell power plant in the figure is either PEMFC or

SOFC type The system configuration ratings and parameters are given in Table 51 The

FC power plant consists of 10 fuel cell arrays connected in parallel Each array is rated at

48kW for a total of 480kW A boost converter is used to adapt the output voltage of each

fuel cell array to the DC bus voltage In this dissertation the DC bus voltage (DCDC

converter output) is chosen as VDC = 480V which is mainly determined by the inverter

AC output voltage and the voltage drop across the LC filter The following equation

should be satisfied between the DC side and AC side voltages of the inverter [515]

2

max

2

)(3)(22

3ILVVm fLLACDCa ω+ge (51)

where VDC is the DC bus voltage VACLL is the AC side line-line RMS voltage Lf is the

filter inductance Imax is the RMS value of maximum AC load current (IAC) and ma is the

modulation index of the inverter Linear pulse-width modulation (PWM) is used for the

inverter ie ma le 10 in this study

For a boost converter the higher the duty ratio (or the larger the voltage difference

between the input and output) the lower is the efficiency [516] In this study a duty ratio

around 55 is used for the DCDC converter at the fuel cellrsquos rated operating point The

approximate desired input voltage for the DCDC converter can be obtained to be

[ ]V216)5501( =timesminus DCV According to the V-I characteristics of the PEMFC given in

235

Figure 411 when the PEMFC load current is over 23A the fuel cell is in the

concentration zone which should be avoided [519] [520] In order to leave some safe

margin the fuel cell is operated around the point where its current is 20A (rated operating

point) and its output voltage (VPEMFC) is about 27V Therefore the number of PEMFC

stacks we need to connect in series to get a voltage of 216V is

827

216===

PEMFC

FC

sV

VN (52)

The number of PEMFC series stacks needed to compose a 48kW fuel cell array is

12508

48=

times=

times=

kW

kW

PN

PN

stacks

array

p (53)

Therefore each PEMFC array is composed of 8times12 stacks with the power rating of

48kW

For a SOFC array its configuration can be determined in a similar way According to

the SOFC V-I and P-I characteristics shown in Figures 420 and 422 when its load

current is over 110 A the SOFC stack is in the concentration zone where its output

voltage will decrease sharply as load current increases this situation should also be

avoided [519] In order to leave some safe margin the fuel cell is operated around the

point where its current is 100 A (rated operating point) and its output voltage (VSOFC) is

about 55 V Therefore the number (Ns) of fuel cell stacks we need to connect in series to

get a voltage of 220 V is

455

220===

SOFC

FC

sV

VN (54)

236

TABLE 51 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS OF THE PROPOSED SYSTEM

216V480kW PEMFC Power Plant

Ten 48kW FC arrays are connected in parallel

216V48kW consisting of PEMFC Array

8 (series)times12 (parallel) 500W fuel cell stacks

216V480kW SOFC Power Plant

Ten 48kW FC arrays are connected in parallel

216V48kW consisting of SOFC Array

200V480V 50kW each

Boost DCDC Converter 10 units connected in parallel

3-phase DCAC Inverter 480V DC208V AC 500kW

LC Filter Lf = 015mH Cf = 3065uF

Vn = 208V125kV Sn = 500kW Step Up Transformer

R1=R2=0005 pu X1=X2=0025 pu

Coupling Inductor Xc = 50Ω

05km ACSR 60 Transmission Line

R = 2149 Ωkm X = 05085 Ωkm

DC Bus Voltage 480V

AC Bus Voltage 120V208V

237

The total power rating of the series connection of 4 SOFC stacks (5 kW each) is 20

kW The number (Np) of these 20 kW SOFC units that need to be connected in parallel to

compose a 40 kW fuel cell array is

254

40=

times=

times=

kW

kW

PN

PN

stacks

array

p (55)

Therefore each 40 kW SOFC array is composed of 4times2 = 8 SOFC stacks (5 kW

each)

Super-capacitors or battery banks are connected to the DC bus to provide storage

capability and fast dynamic response to load transients A 3-phase 6-switch inverter

interfaces the DC bus with a 120208V AC power system An LC filter is connected to

the output of the inverter to reduce the harmonics introduced by the inverter A

208V125kV step up transformer connects the fuel cell power system to the utility grid

through a coupling inductor and a short transmission line The coupling inductor is

needed to control the real and reactive power flow between the fuel cell DG system and

the utility grid and to limit disturbance and fault currents

The controllers for the boost DCDC converters are designed to keep the DC bus

voltage within an acceptable band (plusmn5 in this study) Therefore the input to the 3-phase

inverter can be considered as a fairly good constant voltage source The inverter

controller controls the real and reactive power flows to the utility grid P Q power flows

follow their respective reference values which can either be set as fixed values or to

follow a certain load demand

238

Controller Designs for Power Electronic Devices

It was shown in Figures 411 and 420 that the output voltage of a fuel cell is a

function of load The boost DCDC converter adapts the fuel cell output voltage to the

DC bus voltage and the voltage controller helps regulate the output voltage within a plusmn5

tolerance band under normal operation In this section conventional PI controller is used

for the boost DCDC converters In practice a load sharing controller (not discussed in

this study) can be applied on the converters connected in parallel to achieve a uniform

load distribution among them [528] Also a dq transformed two-loop current control

scheme is presented for the inverter to control the real and reactive power delivered from

the fuel cell power system to the grid Based on the models for power electronic devices

discussed in Chapter 4 the designs for the controllers of power electronic devices are

given in this section

Controller Design for the Boost DCDC Converter

The main components of the DCDC converter can be determined by the prescribed

technical specifications such as the rated and peak voltage and current input current

ripple and output voltage ripple etc using the classic boost DCDC converter design

procedure [515] [516] The component values for the 48kW DCDC converter used in

this study are listed in Table 52 For a boost DCDC converter shown in Figure 469 the

transfer function of the output voltage over duty ratio )(sTvd is obtained as

minus+minus

minus++

==dddddd

dddddd

outdd

vdCL

XD

C

sX

CL

D

RCss

sd

svsT 21

2

_ )1(

)1()

1(

1

)(~

)(~

)( (56)

239

where D is the rated duty ratio of the switch X1 is the average current of inductor Ldd and

X2 is the output voltage at the rated operation point

The transfer function of PWM generator can be expressed as [515] [516]

tri

PWMV

sT1

)( = (57)

where Vtri is the saw-tooth waveform amplitude of PWM generator

The voltage ratio of the voltage transducer in Figure 469 is set as Kd = 1480 to

normalize the output voltage The PWM controller in the figure is chosen as a PI

controller with the transfer function

s

ksksG

didp

dc

+=)( (58)

Based on the transfer function in (56) the PI current controller can be designed using

the classic Bode-plot and root-locus method [521] The overall block diagram of its

control loop is shown in Figure 52 The parameters of the PI voltage controller are also

listed in Table 52 Figure 53 shows the open loop Bode plot of the system It is noted

from the figure that the system is quite stable and has 828deg phase margin

)(~_ sv outdd)(

~sd

Figure 52 Block diagram of the control loop for the boost DCDC converter

240

TABLE 52 SYSTEM PARAMETERS OF THE BOOST DCDC CONVERTER

Ldd 12 mH

Cdd 1000 uF

DN 05833

R 4608 Ω

X1 250 A

X2 480 V

kdi 50

kdp 005

-60

-40

-20

0

20Open-Loop Bode Plot Gc(s)T(s)

GM 884 dB

Freq 364 radsec

Stable loop

Magnitude (dB)

101

102

103

104

0

90

180

270

PM 828 deg

Freq 617 radsec

Phase (deg)

Frequency (radsec)

Figure 53 Bode plot of the control loop of the boost DCDC converter

241

Controller Design for the 3-Phase VSI

In order to meet the requirements for interconnecting a fuel cell system to a utility

grid and control the real and reactive power flow between them it is necessary to shape

and control the inverter output voltage in amplitude angle and frequency [522] In this

section a PWM controller is designed for the inverter shown in Figure 475 to satisfy

voltage regulation as well as to achieve real and reactive power control

Though the state-space equation (4156) in Chapter 4 is sufficient for theoretical

analysis and design it is too complicated to be applied in the actual controller design

from the engineering point of view In order to simplify the analysis and design a control

scheme consisting of an outer voltage regulator with an inner current control loop given

in [523] is adapted for inverter control The inner current control loop is designed to

respond faster than the outer voltage control loop so that these two loops can be

considered separately [523] [524]

Current Control Loop The ramp comparison method is used to generate the six PWM

signals in this study Base on the state-space averaging technique [515] [523] the

average value of the switching functions in a switching period is

( ) 321_

== kV

id

trim

ck

avgk (59)

where ick is the modulating (control) signal and trimV _ is the amplitude of the carrier

signal

Converting the control signals from abc coordinate into the dq frame yields

242

=

3

2

1

0 c

c

c

dqabc

c

cq

cd

i

i

i

T

i

i

i

(510)

where icd and icq are the control signals in dq frame and ic0 = 0 for the balanced system

Tabcdq is the abcdq transformation matrix as given in Appendix A

For the purpose of analysis only unity power factor operation (zero value on q axis)

is discussed in the section The effect of the capacitor Cf in the low pass LC filter (see

Figure 477) on the power frequency current is very small Therefore Cf can be neglected

when designing the current loop controller [523] Based on the state-space formula [see

(4156)] in Chapter 4 the current control loop can be represented in the diagram shown in

Figure 54

sLR ss +1

Figure 54 Block diagram of the current control loop of the inverter

GACR(s) in the figure is the current controller which is chosen as a generic PI

controller

s

ksksG

cicp

ACR

+=)( (511)

KPWM is the gain of the pulse generator

243

mtri

dcPWM

V

VK

_2= (512)

In the figure sLR ss +

1 is the model of the overall equivalent admittance of the LC

filter inductor power transformer coupling inductor and transmission line and kc is

simply the current transducer ratio The parameters of the current control loop are

summarized in Table 53

The transfer function of the current control loop can be obtained as

c

cc

refsd

sdc

P

si

sisT

∆∆

== 11

_ )(

)()( (513)

where )(

11

sLRKGP

ss

PWMACRc += 11 =∆ c

and)(

11

sLRk

KG

ssc

PWMACRc +

+=∆

TABLE 53 PARAMETERS OF THE CURRENT CONTROL LOOP THE INVERTER

Vdc 480 V

Vtri_m 1 V

Rs 0006316 Ω

Ls 01982 mH

kc 1388

kci 250

kcp 25

According to the parameters listed in Table 53 the Bode plot of the current control

loop is given in Figure 55 It is noted that the system is quite stable with phase margin of

882ordm

244

The unit step response of the current control loop is shown in Figure 56 It is noted

that the overshoot is about 25 and the equivalent dominant time constant is about

045ms Therefore the overall current control loop can be approximated by a simple lag

as

s

ksT

i

cc τ+

=1

)(ˆ (514)

where τi (045ms) is the equivalent time constant of the current control loop

The unit step response of )(ˆ sTcis also shown in Figure 56 This approximated

overall transfer function will be used in the following section to design the voltage

control loop

-20

0

20

40

60

80

GM Inf

Freq NaN

Stable loop

Magnitude (dB)

Current Control Loop Bode Plot

100

101

102

103

104

-180

-135

-90

PM 882 deg

Freq 218e+003 radsec

Phase (deg)

Frequency (radsec)

Figure 55 Bode plot of the current control loop

245

0 5 10 15 200

02

04

06

08

1

Time (ms)

Unit Step Response (pu)

Tc(s)

Simple lag approximation

Figure 56 Unit step response of the current control loop and its approximation

Voltage Control Loop Base on the state-space model given in (4156) in Chapter 4

the voltage control loop can be represented by the block diagram shown in Figure 57

For the purpose of analysis only the condition where the q-axis voltage component is

zero is discussed

GAVR

(s)_

+vsd_ref

isd

Rrsquos+Lrsquo

ss

ed

_+

vSd

1kv

s

k

i

c

τ+1

isd_ref

Current

Control Loop

Figure 57 Block diagram of the voltage control loop of the inverter

In the figure the GAVR(s) is the voltage regulator which is also chosen as a PI

246

controller

s

ksksG

vivp

AVR

+=)( (515)

Since the voltage control loop is designed to respond much slower than the inner

current control loop the current control loop can be approximated as a simple lag block

given in (514) to simplify analysis while without loosing accuracy [524]

sLR ss + in Figure 57 is the overall impedance of the power transformer coupling

inductor and transmission line and kv is the voltage transducer ratio The parameters of

the voltage control loop are listed in Table 54

The transfer function of the voltage control loop can be obtained as

v

vv

refsd

sd

v

P

sv

svsT

∆== 11

_ )(

)()( (516)

where ( )

s

sLRksGP

i

sscAVRv τ+

+=

1

)(1 11 =∆ v and

)1(

)()(1

sk

sLRksG

iv

sscAVRv τ+

++=∆

TABLE 54 PARAMETERS OF THE VOLTAGE CONTROL LOOP THE INVERTER

Rrsquos 0005316 Ω

Lrsquos 00482 mH

τi 045 ms

kc 1388

kv 1698

kvi 25

kvp 02

The Bode plot of the voltage control loop is shown in Figure 58 It is noted that the

247

system is stable with phase margin 91ordm

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

GM Inf

Freq NaN

Stable loop

Magnitude (dB)

Bode Plot of the Voltage Control Loop

100

101

102

103

104

105

-180

-90

0

90

Phase (deg)

PM 91 deg

Freq 109 radsec

Frequency (radsec)

Figure 58 Bode plot of the voltage control loop

Control of Power Flow Consider a voltage source δangsV connected to a utility

grid degang0E through a coupling impedance R+jX as shown in Figure 59 The real and

reactive powers delivered to the utility grid are [525]

δangsV degang0E

Figure 59 Power flow between a voltage source and utility grid

248

)cos()cos(2

zzs

Z

E

Z

EVP θδθ minusminus= (517)

)sin()sin(2

zzs

Z

E

Z

EVQ θδθ minusminus= (518)

where 22 XRZ += and )(tan 1 RXz

minus=θ

From (517) and (518) it is clear that the real and reactive powers delivered to the

utility grid are completely determined by the amplitude and angle of the sending voltage

source ie the output voltage of the inverter On the other hand if the desired values of

real and reactive power are given the values of Vs and δ can be determined from (517)

and (518)

2

1

222

2

2

)sin(2)cos(2)(

++++= zzs QZPZEQP

E

ZV θθ (519)

+minus= minus )cos(cos 1

z

ss

zV

E

EV

ZPθθδ (520)

The corresponding dq0 component values of the voltage can be obtained through

abcdq transformation as follows

deg+ang

degminusang

ang

=

=

)120(

)120(

0 δδ

δ

s

s

s

dqabc

c

b

a

dqabcq

d

V

V

V

T

V

V

V

T

V

V

V

(521)

249

Overall Power Control System for the Inverter The overall control system block

diagram for the inverter is given in Figure 510

Figure 510 Block diagram of the overall power control system of the inverter

In Figure 510 the ldquodq Reference Signal Computationrdquo block which is based on

equations (519) and (520) calculates the magnitude and angle of the filtered output

voltages of the inverter and then converts them into dq voltage reference signals

according to (521) The ldquoabcdq Transformationrdquo block takes the current and voltage

values (in abc coordinate) from the voltage and current meters and converts them into dq

values The outer voltage controller takes the error signals between the actual output

voltage in dq frame (Vdq) and the reference voltage (Vdq(ref)) and generates the current

250

reference signals (Idq(ref)) for the current control loop The inner current controller

produces the dq control signals which are converted back into the control signals in abc

coordinates through the ldquodqabc Transformationrdquo block These control signals are used to

modulate the sinusoidal pulse width modulation (SPWM) pulse generator to produce the

proper pulses for the inverter switches (Figure 477) which control the inverter output

voltage

The controllers given in this section for power electronic converters are designed on

the basis of small-signal linearized models Conceptually there is no guarantee that the

designed controllers will work well over a large operating range because of the

nonlinearity of power electronic devices Nevertheless the majority of controllers for

power electronic devices are linear time-invariant (LTI) that are designed on the basis of

linearized models The effectiveness of LTI controllers can be checked through

simulations on switched (nonlinear) models rather than the linearized ones used for the

initial controller design [530] We have verified the validity of the proposed control

schemes over a large operating range through simulations on nonlinear converterinverter

models The simulation results will be discussed in the following section

Simulation Results

Based on the individual component models developed in Chapter 4 and the

controllers designed in this chapter simulation models for both a PEMFC DG system and

a SOFC DG system have been built in MATLABSimulink using SimPowerSystems

block-set The system was tested under several different operating conditions to

investigate its power management and load-following capabilities as well as its stability

251

during electrical faults Sample simulation results from the scenarios studied are given

below

Desired P and Q Delivered to the Grid Heavy Loading

Normally when a utility is under heavy load it needs the connected DGs to deliver

more real power to the grid The DGs may also be required to deliver reactive power to

the grid to help boost the grid voltage Simulation results for such a scenario are given in

this sub-section for both PEMFC and SOFC DGs

PEMFC DG The reference values of P and Q are set as 360kW and 323kVar with a

ramp startup with 2s for this case study The voltage of the utility grid was set to E =

098 degang0 pu Using (519) and (520) the desired magnitude and angle of the filtered

output voltage of the inverter turn out to be Vs = 105 pu δ = 82678ordm Converting the

values from the abc reference frame into dq coordinates yields Vd (ref) = 10391 pu and

Vq (ref) = 0151 pu A 3-phase AC circuit breaker connects the inverter to the utility grid at

t=008s Figure 511 shows the real and reactive power delivered from the PEMFC DG

to the grid when the DG reaches its steady-state operation from the initial startup Note

that the output steady-state values of P and Q agree with their reference values very well

The corresponding dq components of the inverter output voltage are given in Figure 512

It is noted that the dq components of the output voltage also reach their prescribed

reference values

252

0 1 2 3 4 50

1

2

3

4x 10

5

P (W)

0 1 2 3 4 5-5

0

5

10

15x 10

4

Time (s)

Q (Var)

Pref = 360kW

Qref = 323kVar

Figure 511 PEMFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under heavy loading

0 1 2 3 4 5-05

0

05

1

15

2

Time (s)

dq Values of the Inverter Output Voltage (pu)

Vd reference value = 10391

Vq reference value = 0151

Figure 512 PEMFC DG dq values of the inverter output voltage under heavy load

253

The output voltage and current responses of each fuel cell array for this case are

shown in Figure 513 Note that when the system reaches steady-state the fuel cell output

current ripple is about 10 and the fuel cell output voltage ripple is less than 33 These

relatively small variations of the current and voltage are indicative of the healthy

operation of fuel cells [526] The DC bus voltage (output voltage of the boost DCDC

converter) for this case is shown in Figure 514 Note that the DC bus voltage comes up

to its reference value (480V) though the fuel cell terminal voltage is much lower than its

no-load value under this heavy loading condition (see Figure 513) The voltage ripple at

the DC bus is about 125 which is within the acceptable range of plusmn5

0 1 2 3 4 5150

200

250

300

350

FC Output Voltage (V)

0 1 2 3 4 5-100

0

100

200

300

Time (s)

FC Output Current (A)

Figure 513 PEMFC DG Output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under

heavy load

254

0 1 2 3 4 5300

400

500

600

700

Time (s)

DC Bus Voltage (V)

Desired Voltage = 480V

Figure 514 PEMFC DG DC bus voltage waveform under heavy load

SOFC DG The reference values of P and Q (Pref and Qref in Figure 510) are set as

450 kW and 845 kVar (heavy loading) with a ramp startup in 2s for this case study The

voltage of the utility grid was set to E = 098 degang0 pu Figure 515 shows the reference

and actual values of the real and reactive power delivered from the SOFC DG to the grid

Note that the final values of P and Q (delivered to the grid by the SOFC DG) agree with

their reference values very well

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-200

0

200

400

600

P (kW)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-100

0

100

200

Time (s)

Q (kVar)

Qref = 845kVar

Pref = 450 kW

Figure 515 SOFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under heavy loading

255

0 1 2 3 4 5 6250

300

350

400

450

SOFC output voltage (V)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-100

0

100

200

Time (s)

SOFC output current (A)

Figure 516 SOFC DG Output voltage and current of each FC array under heavy load

0 1 2 3 4 5 6300

400

500

600

Time (s)

DC bus voltage (V)

VDC ref = 480V

Figure 517 SOFC DG DC bus voltage under heavy loading

The output voltage and current curves of each 40 kW SOFC array (input to each

DCDC converter) for the above heavy loading case are shown in Figure 516 Note that

when the system output power reaches its pre-set value the fuel cell output current ripple

is about 10 and the fuel cell output voltage ripple is around 3 These relatively small

variations of the current and voltage are indicative of the healthy operation of fuel cells

[531] The DC bus voltage (output voltage of the boost DCDC converter) for this case is

256

shown in Figure 517 Note that the DC bus voltage comes up to its reference value

(480V) though the fuel cell terminal voltage is much lower than its no-load value under

this heavy loading condition (see Figure 516) The voltage ripple at the DC bus is about

15 which is within the acceptable range

Desired P Delivered to the Grid Q Consumed from the Grid Light Loading

PEMFC DG Under light utility loading the power required from the fuel cell DG is

normally low and the DG may be set to consume the excessive reactive power from the

grid ie Qlt0 This scenario is examined in this sub-section The reference values of P

and Q were set at Pref=100 kW and Qref=-318 kVar with an initial step-change startup

The voltage of the utility grid is set to E = 10 degang0 pu for this case study Using

equations (519) and (520) the desired amplitude and angle of the filtered output voltage

of the inverter turn out to be Vs = 10 pu δ = 2648ordm Converting the values into dq

coordinates we get Vd(ref)= 099893 pu and Vq(ref) = 00463 pu

Figure 518 shows the real and reactive power responses of the fuel cell DG Note that

at steady-state the fuel cell power system delivers 100kW of real power to the grid and

consumes 318 kVar of reactive power from the grid (Q=-318kVar) which match the

reference values set for P and Q

257

0 05 1 15 2 25 3-5

0

5

10

15x 10

4

P (W)

0 05 1 15 2 25 3-10

-5

0

5x 10

4

Time (s)

Q (Var)

Pref = 100kW

Qref = -318kVar

Figure 518 PEMFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid light loading

0 05 1 15 2 25 3260

280

300

320

FC Output Voltage (V)

0 05 1 15 2 25 3-50

0

50

100

150

Time (s)

FC Output Current (A)

Figure 519 PEMFC DG Output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under light loading

258

Figure 520 shows the DC output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under

light loading In this case the fuel cell output current percentage ripple is bigger than that

of case A due to lighter loading However the fuel cell output voltage ripple is only

about 2 which is even less than that of case A due to a higher steady-state fuel cell

output voltage under light loading

SOFC DG Similar to the case of PEMFC DG under light loading the SOFC DG

delivers less real power to the grid (compared to heavy loading condition) and may be

set to consume the excessive reactive power from the grid ie Qlt0 The simulation

results of this scenario study are given in Figures 520 and 521 The reference values of

P and Q are set as 250kW and -531kVar with a ramp startup in 2 s for this case study

The voltage of the utility grid was set to E = 10 degang0 pu Figure 521 shows the

reference and actual values of the real and reactive power delivered from the SOFC DG

to the grid Note that the output final values of P and Q agree with their reference values

very well The corresponding fuel cell array output voltage and current are given in

Figure 521 The current ripple percentage which is about 25 of the SOFC output

current under light loading is larger than heavy loading due to the lower average value of

the load current However the fuel cell output voltage ripple (about 2) under light

loading is even smaller than heavy loading since the average value of the voltage is

higher in this case

From the above simulation results it is noted that both the PEMFC and SOFC DG

systems can be controlled to deliver the pre-set amount of real and reactive power For

the purpose of text length only the simulation results of the PEMFC DG system are

259

given in the following simulation studies

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-100

0

100

200

300P (kW)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-100

-50

0

50

Time (s)

Q (kVar)

Pref = 250 kW

Qref = -531 kVar

Figure 520 SOFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under light loading

0 1 2 3 4 5 6300

350

400

450

SOFC output voltage (V)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-50

0

50

100

Time (s)

SOFC output current (A)

Figure 521 SOFC DG Output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under light

load

260

Load-Following Analysis

Fixed Grid Power In a fuel cell DG system a certain amount of power may be

scheduled to be delivered to a load center (micro-grid) from the utility grid with the rest

to be supplied by the fuel cell system Therefore a proper load-following controller must

be designed to ensure that only scheduled power is delivered from the grid and that the

fuel cell system follows the remainder of load demand In the deregulated power market

the ancillary service costs due to load-following operations can be as high as 20 of the

total ancillary service costs [527] Figure 522 shows the system configuration for which

the load-following study was carried out for PEMFC DG Bus 1 in the figure can be

considered as a micro-grid bus to which the PEMFC DG and the power grid are

connected to supply power to the load The power delivered from the grid (PGrid) is kept

constant (PGridsched) and the PEMFC DG is required to follow load as it changes

The load-following control diagram is also shown in Figure 522 PGrid is measured

and compared with the grid scheduled power The error (∆PGrid) is then fed through the

load-following controller to generate the adjustment power reference value (∆PFCref)

which is added to the initial power reference value (0

refFCP ) to give the new power

reference value (PFCref) for the PEMFC DG system The load-following controller can be

a simple PI controller Therefore as load varies PFCref is adjusted to ensure that the fuel

cell DG will compensate the changes of PLoad It should be noted that fuel cell power

adjustment is assumed to be within the safe operating range of the fuel cell DG

In this case study PGrid is set to 100kW (1 pu) As shown in Figure 523 at the

beginning the load is 2 pu and therefore the fuel cell system delivers the remaining 1

261

pu power to the load At t=03s the load demand steps up to 3 pu and drops back to its

original value (2 pu) at t=41s It is noted from Figure 523 that the power grid responds

to the initial load changes and then the PEMFC DG picks up the load changes to keep

the grid power at its scheduled value The simulation results show that the PEMFC DG

can follow the load power changes in less than 2s

GridP∆refFCP ∆

0

refFCP

Figure 522 System for the PEMFC DG load-following study

Fixed FC Power Referring to the system shown in Figure 524 the simulation study

for the scenario that the FC power plant is scheduled to supply a fixed amount of power

to the micro-grid while the grid will pick up the load variations The power delivered

from the FC DG is set to 200 kW The load changes used for this case study are the same

as the previous case The simulation results are shown in Figure 525 It is noted that the

FC power is kept well at 200 kW When the load changes at 03 s and 41 s the grid

balances the changes almost simultaneously as shown in Figure 525

262

1 2 3 4 5 6 70

2

4Sbase = 100kVA

PLoad (pu)

1 2 3 4 5 6 70

2

4

PGrid (pu)

1 2 3 4 5 6 70

2

4

Time (s)

PFC (pu)

Figure 523 Power curves of the load-following study with fixed grid power

Figure 524 System for the PEMFC DG load-following study

263

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 71

2

3

4PLoad (pu)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 70

1

2

PGrid (pu)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 70

1

2

3

Time (s)

PFC (pu)

Sbase = 100 kVA

Figure 525 Power curves of the load-following study with fixed FC power

Fault Analysis

It is important to know whether the fuel cell DG system will remain stable under an

electrical fault In this section the stability of the PEMFC DG under electrical faults is

investigated The FC DG system shown in Figure 526 delivers 2 pu to the utility grid

before the fault A severe 3-phase fault is simulated to occur at t=07s at the low voltage

side of the step-up transformer connecting the FC DG to the grid as shown in Figure

526 The fault lasts for 5 cycles (00833s) and is cleared at t=07833s

264

Figure 526 Faulted fuel cell DG system

The power flow through the transmission line is shown in Figure 527 During the

fault the transmission line power changes direction (flowing from the grid toward the

fault) since the utility grid also supplies power to the faulted point As shown in the

figure the fuel cell system remains stable after the disturbance Though the system is

stable there is a rush of power delivered from the fuel cell power plant to the utility grid

when the fault is cleared This is due to the large phase difference between the utility grid

and the inverter output voltage when the fault is cleared A soft-starting and a

re-connection controller can be added to limit the peak power when the system recovers

from a fault

One advantage of the two-loop (voltage and current) inverter control is its capability

to limit fault currents To show this advantage the simulation with the same fault on the

system with only voltage control on the inverter was also conducted for comparison The

output power of the PEMFC DG under these two different inverter control strategies is

shown in Figure 528 It is noticed that the system does not remain stable when only

voltage control is applied for inverter control Since there is no current limit control for

this case the fuel cell output current increases sharply due to the fault and exceeds the

current corresponding to the fuel cell maximum power point As a result the fuel cell

265

output power drops sharply It can be observed from Figure 528 that the system with

two-loop inverter control comes back to the pre-fault state while the system with only

voltage control on the inverter can not recover to its original state

Similar 3-phase electrical faults were also simulated on several other points along the

transmission line in Figure 526 In these cases the FC DG remained stable under the

two-loop control scheme

05 1 15 2 25 3 35-15

-1

-05

0

05

1x 10

6

Time (s)

Transmission Line Power (W)

200kW

t=07s

t=07833s

Figure 527 Faulted PEMFC DG Power flow of the transmission line

266

05 1 15 2 25 3 350

1

2

3

4

5

6x 10

5

Time (s)

FC Output Power (W)

Two-Loop Control

Voltage Control Only

Figure 528 Faulted PEMFC DG Fuel cell output powers for the fault studies

Summary

Control of grid-connected FC DG systems are investigated in this chapter The

PEMFC and SOFC models the model for boost DCDC converters and the model for

3-phase voltage source inverters are used to develop a simulation model for a

grid-connected FC system Controller designs for the DCDC converter and the 3-phase

inverter are given using linearized small-signal converterinverter models Conventional

PI voltage feedback controllers are used for the DCDC converters to regulate the DC bus

voltage and a dq transformed two-loop current control scheme is used on the inverter to

control the real and reactive power delivered from the fuel cell system to the utility grid

A MATLABSimulink model of the proposed FC DG system was implemented using

the SimPowerSystems block-set The validity of the proposed control schemes over a

267

large operating range was verified through simulations on switched nonlinear

converterinverter models Simulation results of the case studies show that the real and

reactive power delivered from the fuel cell system to the utility grid can be controlled as

desired while the DC bus voltage is maintained well within the prescribed range The

results also show that the fuel cell system is capable of load-following and can remain

stable under the occurrence of severe electrical faults It is noticed that a two-loop

inverter control scheme has advantage over a voltage only control scheme for the inverter

on fault protection and system stability

268

REFERENCES

[51] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation

for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy

Conversion vol 20 no 2 pp442-451 June 2005

[52] C J Hatziadoniu AA Lobo F Pourboghrat and MDaneshdoost ldquoA simplified

dynamic model of grid-connected fuel-cell generatorsrdquo IEEE Transactions on

Power Delivery Vol 17 No 2 pp 467-473 April 2002

[53] M DLukas K Y Lee H Ghezel-Ayagh ldquoDevelopment of a Stack Simulation

Model for Control Study on Direct Reforming Molten Carbonate Fuel Cell Power

Plantrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol14 No 4 pp1651-1657

Dec 1999

[54] J Padulleacutes GW Ault and J R McDonald ldquoAn integrated SOFC plant dynamic

model for power system simulationrdquo J Power Sources pp495ndash500 2000

[55] K Sedghisigarchi and A Feliachi ldquoDynamic and Transient Analysis of Power

Distribution Systems with Fuel CellsmdashPart I Fuel-Cell Dynamic Modelrdquo IEEE

Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 2 pp423-428 June 2004

[56] K Sedghisigarchi and A Feliachi ldquoDynamic and Transient Analysis of Power

Distribution Systems with Fuel CellsmdashPart II Control and Stability

Enhancementrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 2

pp429-434 June 2004

[57] Z Miao M A Choudhry R L Klein and L Fan ldquoStudy of A Fuel Cell Power

Plant in Power Distribution System ndash Part I Dynamic Modelrdquo Proc IEEE PES

General Meeting June 2004 Denver CO

[58] Z Miao M A Choudhry R L Klein and L Fan ldquoStudy of A Fuel Cell Power

Plant in Power Distribution System ndash Part II Stability Controlrdquo Proceedings IEEE PES General Meeting June 2004 Denver CO

[59] D Candusso L Valero and A Walter ldquoModelling control and simulation of a fuel

cell based power supply system with energy managementrdquo Proceedings 28th

Annual Conference of the IEEE Industrial Electronics Society (IECON 2002) Vol

2 pp1294-1299 2002

[510] R Naik N Mohan M Rogers and A Bulawka ldquoA Novel Grid Interface

Optimized for Utility-scale Applications of Photovoltaic Wind-electric and

269

Fuel-cell systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery Vol 10 No 4 pp

1920-1926 Oct 1995

[511] W Shireen and MS Arefeen ldquoAn utility interactive power electronics interface

for alternaterenewable energy systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion

Vol 11 No 3 pp 643-649 Sept 1996

[512] G Spiazzi S Buso GM Martins JA Pomilio ldquoSingle phase line frequency

commutated voltage source inverter suitable for fuel cell interfacingrdquo 2002 IEEE 33rd Annual IEEE Power Electronics Specialists Conference Vol 2 pp734-739

2002

[513] K Ro and S Rahman ldquoControl of Grid-connected Fuel Cell Plants for

Enhancement of Power System Stabilityrdquo Renewable Energy Vol 28 No 3 pp

397-407 March 2003

[514] H Komurcugil and O Kukrer ldquoA novel current-control method for three-phase

PWM ACDC voltage-source convertersrdquo IEEE Transactions on Industrial

Electronics Vol 46 No 3 pp 544-553 June 1999

[515] N Mohan T M Undeland and W P Robbins Power Electronics ndash Converters

Applications and Design John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2003

[516] DW Hart Introduction to Power Electronics Prentice Hall 1997

[517] M H Todorovic L Palma P Enjeti ldquoDesign of a Wide Input Range DC-DC

Converter with a Robust Power Control Scheme Suitable for Fuel Cell Power

Conversionrdquo 19th Annual IEEE Applied Power Electronics Conference CA 2004

[518] SM N Hasan S Kim I Husain ldquoPower Electronic Interface and Motor Control for a Fuel Cell Electric Vehiclerdquo 19th Annual IEEE Applied Power Electronics

Conference CA 2004

[519] Fuel Cell Handbook (Fifth Edition) EGampG Services Parsons Inc DEO of Fossil

Energy National Energy Technology Lab Oct 2000

[520] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained John Wiley amp

Sons Ltd 2001

[521] John Van de Vegte Feedback Control Systems (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall 1994

[522] IEEE Std 1547 IEEE Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Resources with Electric Power Systems 2003

270

[523] M Tsai WI Tsai ldquoAnalysis and Design of Three-phase AC-to-DC Converters

with High Power Factor and Near-Optimum Feedforwardrdquo IEEE Transactions on

Industrial Electronics Vol 46 No 3 pp535-543 June 1999

[524] H Mao Study on Three-Phase High-Input-Power-Factor PWM-Voltage-Type

Reversible Rectifiers and Their Control Strategies PhD Dissertation (in Chinese)

Zhejiang University 2000

[525] J D Glover MS Sarma Power System Analysis and Design 3rd Edition

Wadsworth Group BrooksCole 2002

[526] RS Gemmen ldquoAnalysis for the effect of inverter ripple current on fuel cell

operating conditionrdquo Transactions of the ASME - Journal of Fluids Engineering

Vol 125 No 3 pp576-585 May 2003

[527] Y Zhu and K Tomsovic ldquoDevelopment of models for analyzing the

load-following performance of microturbines and fuel cellsrdquo Journal of Electric

Power Systems Research pp 1-11 Vol 62 2002

[528] R Wu T Kohama Y Kodera T Ninomiya and F Ihara ldquoLoad-Current-Sharing

Control for Parallel Operation of DC-to-DC Convertersrdquo IEEE PESCrsquo93 pp

101-107 June 1993 Seattle WA

[529] PC Krause O Wasynczuk and SD Sudhoff Analysis of Electric Machinery

IEEE Press 1995

[530] John G Kassakian Martin F Schlecht and George C Verghese Principles of

Power Electronics pp 280-293 Addison-Wesley Publishing Company 1991SK

[531] Mazumder K Acharya CL Haynes R Williams Jr MR von Spakovsky DJ Nelson DF Rancruel J Hartvigsen and RS Gemmen ldquoSOFC Performance and

Durability Resolution of the Effects of Power-Conditioning Systems and

Application Loadsrdquo IEEE Transactions On Power Electronics Vol 19 No 5 pp

1263-1278 September 2004

271

CHAPTER 6

CONTROL OF STAND-ALONE FUEL CELL POWER GENERATION SYSTEMS

Introduction

As discussed in the previous chapters both PEMFC and SOFC show great potential

in DG and vehicular applications They are good energy sources to provide reliable

power at steady state but they cannot respond to electrical load transients as fast as

desired This is mainly due to their slow internal electrochemical and thermodynamic

responses [61] Load transients will cause a low-reactant condition inside the fuel cells

which is considered to be harmful and will shorten their life [62] In order to overcome

this weakness fuel cells can be combined with other energy sources with fast dynamics

such as battery or super-capacitor to form a hybrid power system [63]-[66] Dynamic

behavior of a PEMFC and lead-acid battery system was investigated in [63] while no

control was discussed in the paper Fuel cells and super-capacitor banks together with

boost DCDC converters are proposed in [64] to achieve a constant output dc voltage A

fuel cell-battery hybrid system is given in [66] however the paper concentrates on the

design of a new DCDC converter for fuel cell and battery applications only

In this chapter a load transient mitigation technique is proposed for stand-alone fuel

cell-battery power generation systems This technique is used to control the system in a

way that during a load transient the fuel cell provides the steady-state load and the

battery will supply the transient load The battery voltage is controlled to remain within a

272

desired range Meanwhile the fuel cell output current ripple is also limited in a certain

low range which is also important to fuel cellrsquos healthy operation and life time [62]

[67] [68]

The dynamic models for PEMFC SOFC and lead-acid batteries discussed in Chapter

4 are used in this chapter for FC load mitigation study Based on these component

models and the proposed control technique simulation studies have been carried out for

both PEMFC and SOFC systems to verify the effectiveness of the proposed technique

System Description and Control Strategy

Figure 61 shows the schematic diagram for the proposed FC-battery power

generation system where a boost DCDC converter is used to adapt the fuel cell output

voltage to the battery voltage (220 V in this study) Load mitigation will be investigated

both for a PEMFC and a SOFC based system The models for a 500W PEMFC and a 5

kW SOFC discussed in Chapter 4 are used to model the FC unit shown in Figure 61

For the example PEMFC based system studied the fuel cell unit consists of four 500 W

PEMFC stacks connected in series to provide a 2 kW PEMFC unit For the SOFC based

system the fuel cell unit is a single 5kW SOFC stack The system load can either be DC

or AC (interfaced through an inverter)

Load Mitigation Control

Load mitigation control is achieved through a current controller for the DCDC

converter Given that fuel cells are good energy sources (for providing steady-state

power) but not good power sources for transient conditions [61] [63] the purpose of

273

the proposed control strategy is to control the fuel cell to only supply steady state power

while the battery will supply the transient power to the load The load current (Iload) is fed

back through a low-pass filter to get rid of high-frequency transients This filtered load

current signal (Iref1) plus the output signal (Iref2) from the battery chargingdischarging

controller is taken as the reference signal (Iref) to control the DCDC converter Then the

output current of the DCDC converter (idd_out) is compared with the reference signal Iref

and the error signal is processed by the current controller to control the duty ratio of the

switch in the converter

The peak-to-peak ripple of the converter input current (fuel cell output current idd_in

in Figure 61) should also be controlled within a certain range (10 in this study) for

healthy operation of the fuel cell [62] [67] [68] The main components of the DCDC

converter can be selected on the basis of technical specifications such as rated and peak

voltage and current input current ripple and output voltage ripple etc using the classic

design procedure given in [612] [614] The component values for the 5kW DCDC

converter model used in this study are listed in Table 61 The value of the coupling

inductor (Ldd_out) is selected so that the combination of this inductor with the capacitor

(Cdd) yields a low resonant frequency (lt 10Hz in this study) to smooth out the converter

output current (idd_out)

274

Figure 61 Schem

atic diagram of a FC-battery hybrid system

with load transient mitigation control

275

dd_outV∆ ref

dd_out

V

∆V

gele

Figure 62 Schematic diagram of the battery chargingdischarging controller

An approximate state-space model of the converter at the rated operating point can be

derived using the averaging technique proposed by Middlebrook and Cuacutek explained in

[612] [615] Based on the converter model a PI current controller ( skk ip + ) can be

designed using the classic Bode-plot and root-locus method [613] The parameters of the

PI current controller are also listed in Table 61 The battery chargingdischarging

controller design and the optimal choice of the filter will be discussed in the following

sub-sections

TABLE 61 PARAMETERS OF THE DCDC CONVERTER

Ldd_in 12 mH

Cdd 2500 uF

Ldd_out 120 mH

fs (Switch Frequency) 5 kHz

ki 20

kp 002

276

Battery ChargingDischarging Controller

The battery in the system of Figure 61 is designed to buffer transient power A 220V

05kWh battery model discussed in Chapter 4 is used in the study The model

parameters are listed in Table 62 For healthy operation of the battery bank its voltage is

kept within plusmn5 of its nominal value A battery chargingdischarging controller is

designed as shown in Figure 62 In this figure Vref is the battery nominal voltage (220V)

The regulation constant Kc in the figure is determined by assuming that the

chargingdischarging adjustment of 5 voltage deviation can be achieved in half hour

(1800s) That is

1800

050 b

c

CK = (61)

where Cb is the battery capacitance

TABLE 62 PARAMETERS OF THE BATTERY MODEL

Cb 300 F

Rp 25 MΩ

R2 0075 Ω

C1 500 F

R1 01 Ω

The ldquonormalizedrdquo block normalizes the filtered battery voltage deviation (∆Vdd_out)

with respect to the reference voltage (Vref) The ldquo|abs|rdquo block will give a nonnegative

output (ref

outdd

V

V _∆) regardless of whether ∆Vdd_out is positive or negative ie whether the

battery voltage is higher or lower than the reference voltage The ldquorelayrdquo block in the

277

figure is a hysteresis block set as follows it will turn on (output = 1) when the input is

larger than 5 and will continue to be on until the input to the block is less than 05

Otherwise the output of the relay block is zero The battery will be charged (discharged)

at a constant current when its voltage is lower than 95 (higher than 105) of its rated

value The charging (discharging) process will stop when the battery voltage is within

05 of its rated value Therefore as long as the battery voltage is lower than 095Vref a

positive extra reference signal

1800

0502

refb

ref

VCI = (62)

will be generated for the current controller This reference value is kept until the voltage

is higher than 0995Vref On the other hand if the battery voltage is higher than 105Vref a

negative extra current reference value (1800

050 refbVCminus ) is generated and this value will be

held until the battery voltage is lower than 1005Vref Otherwise the output of the battery

chargingdischarging controller is zero

Filter Design

The choice of the low-pass filter needed for the load transient mitigation controller is

a trade-off design between the storage capacity of the battery and the smooth response of

fuel cell to load transients Figure 63 shows an example of the responses of different

low-pass filters to a load transient The damping factors of filters are all set to 1 to avoid

any oscillation It is noted from the figure that the higher is the cut-off frequency of the

filter the shorter is the settling time of the response A filter with shorter settling time

requires smaller storage battery capacity but may cause undesired overshoot On the

278

other hand the lower is the filter cut-off frequency the longer is the rise time of the filter

response and the smoother is the fuel cell response However a larger battery capacity is

needed if a lower cut-off frequency is chosen for the filter Therefore a trade off has to be

made to choose an optimal filter In practical applications one can estimate the fastest

possible load transient based on the load information at the location where the fuel cell

will be installed Transients with frequencies higher than 1250Hz can be neglected since

they do not affect the fuel cell performance significantly [62] Then one decides what

overshoot value (current ripple) is tolerable by the fuel cell An overshoot less than 10

which normally will not cause any significant impact on the fuel cellrsquos healthy operation

[62] [67] can be considered a good value The filter can therefore be chosen for the

fastest load transient with the highest possible cut-off frequency while its output

overshoot will not exceed a prescribed value (10 suggested in this study)

0 1 2 3 4 54

6

8

10

12

14

16

Time (s)

Responses of different filters (A) Original Transient

Filter fcutoff

= 3Hz

Filter fcutoff

= 1Hz

Filter fcutoff

= 05Hz

Figure 63 Example of the responses of different filters to a load transient

279

Simulation Results

The PEMFC and SOFC models and the battery model discussed Chapter 4 were used

to develop simulation models for a stand-alone PEMFC-battery and a SOFC-battery

power generation system in MATLABSimulink using SimPowerSystems block-set Both

systems are controlled by the load transient mitigation technique proposed in the previous

section The system performance under load transients is investigated to verify that power

flow is controlled in such a way that the fuel cells only provide steady-state power while

the battery will supply transient power to the load Simulation results on

chargingdischarging performance of the battery are also given

Load Transients

For the purpose of verifying the system performance under different load transients

both DC load transients and AC load transients were tested for the PEMFC and SOFC

based power systems Since the power rating of the PEMFC system studied is different

from that of the SOFC system different (but same type of) load transients will be used

for the two systems

280

0 5 10 15 200

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Amature current of DC motor (A)

5kW220V DC motor(load for SOFC)

25HP220V DC motor(load for PEMFC)

Figure 64 Load transient of starting a 25HP and a 5kW 220V DC motor

DC Load Transients The DC load transient due to a DC motor starting is used in the

simulation study Figure 64 shows the load current transient applied to the PEMFC and

SOFC systems when a DC motor is started with full voltage in three steps of resistance

starting A 25 HP220 V DC motor load is used for the 2 kW PEMFC-battery system and

a 5 kW220 V DC motor is used for the SOFC system

AC Load Transients A general dynamic load model is used to model AC load current

transients This transient current model is defined as follows

tteIeIIti 21

210)(αα minusminus minus+= (63)

where I0 I1 and I2 are non-negative constants and 012 gtgt αα It is assumed that the

load transient starts at t=0 in the above equation and i(t) is the amplitude of load current

at 60Hz

281

The above five constant parameters can be determined by the following equations

asympminus

=minus+

=minus

=minus+

=

minusminus

infin

S

peak

TT

p

TII

ieIeII

TI

I

iIII

iI

pp

1

01

210

12

11

22

0210

0

)020ln(ln

ln

21

α

αααα

αα

(64)

where i0 and iinfin are the initial and final values of the transient load current Tp is the time

that it takes the transient current to reach its peak value (ipeak) and TS is the settling time

which takes the transient to settle to within plusmn2 of its final value Therefore by

specifying the initial value (i0) final value (iinfin) peak value of the transient (ipeak) how fast

the transient reaches its peak (Tp) and how long it takes the transient to reach steady state

(TS) we can calculate the five parameters in (64) numerically Figure 65 shows the load

transient curve used for the PEMFC system which starts at 1s The parameters of this

load transient are I0 = 1584A I1 = 792A I2 = 9504A 51 =α and 302 =α The

parameters of the AC load current transient for the SOFC system studied are I0 = 396A

I1 = 198A I2 = 2376A 51 =α and 302 =α The load transient obtained when these

are used in (63) is similar to the waveform shown in Figure 65 but with a higher

magnitude

282

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

Time (s)

AC Side Load Current (A)

Figure 65 AC load transient used on PEMFC-battery system

Load mitigation

In this sub-section simulation results are presented for load transient mitigation

studies of PEMFC and SOFC systems Throughout the studies in this part it is assumed

that the battery in the system studied is fully charged to its rated voltage 220 V before

the application of load transients

PEMFC System First the system is tested under the DC motor load transient shown

in Figure 64 The cut-off frequency of the low-pass filter in this simulation is chosen to

be 01 Hz and the damping factor is set to 1 The corresponding current reference signal

(Iref in Figure 61) shown in Figure 66 shows that the rise time of the filter response to

283

the load transient is less than 10 s and there is no overshoot The battery current (ib) and

the converter output current (idd_out) responding to the load transient current are also

shown in Figure 66 The figure shows that idd_out follows the reference signal (Iref) very

well they almost overlap each other It is noted from the figure that the battery picks up

the transient current while the converter output current rises smoothly (as designed) from

its previous steady-state to its next steady-state value The corresponding PEMFC current

and voltage responses are shown in Figure 67 It is noted that the PEMFC outputs vary

smoothly during the load transient the PEMFC is controlled to supply only the

steady-state current to the load It is also noted that the fuel cell current ripple is around

55 which is within the acceptable range (10)

For the purpose of comparison a simulation study was carried out on the PEMFC

system shown in Figure 61 with a typical voltage controller for the DCDC converter

only (ie iload and idd_out are not fed back and Ldd_out is taken out in Figure 61) The

controller is used to keep the converter output voltage constant under load variations

Figure 67 also shows the PEMFC output voltage for this case study when the DC load

transient (Figure 64) is applied to the PEMFC system It is noted that the system fails to

start the DC motor under this case hence justifying the need for the current controller

284

0 5 10 15 200

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Current (A)

Battery current (ib)

Iref

idd_out

Figure 66 Reference signal (Iref) for the current controller battery current (ib) and

converter output current (idd_out) under the load transient for PEMFC shown in Figure 64

0 5 10 15 200

5

10

15

20

Current (A)

0 5 10 15 2040

80

120

160

200

Time (s)

Voltage (V)

PEMFC Voltage

PEMFC Current

System failedto start with only a

voltage controller

Figure 67 The PEMFC output current and voltage responses to the DC load transient

shown in Figure 64

285

Figures 68 and 69 show the simulation results when an AC load transient (Figure

65) is applied to the PEMFC-battery system Figure 68 shows the reference signal (Iref)

and the battery output current The corresponding PEMFC output current and voltage are

shown in Figure 69 The fuel cell output current ripple is around 55 and the voltage

ripple is around 2 It is noted from these figures that the proposed control technique

also works well under AC load transients and the PEMFC voltage and current vary

smoothly from one steady-state value to another

0 5 10 15-10

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Current (A) Battery current (i

b)

Iref

Figure 68 PEMFC The control reference signal (Iref) and battery current (ib) under

the AC load transient shown in Figure 65

286

0 5 10 150

5

10

15

20

Current (A)

0 5 10 1580

100

120

140

160

Time (s)

Voltage (V)

PEMFC Current

PEMFC Voltage

Figure 69 The PEMFC output current and voltage responses to the AC load transient

shown in Figure 65

SOFC System Similar to the PEMFC system the simulation study on the SOFC

system under a DC load transient (Figure 64) is investigated first The cut-off frequency

of the low-pass filter is also chosen to be 01 Hz and the damping factor is set to 1 as

well Figure 610 shows the current reference signal (Iref) the battery current (ib) and the

converter output current (idd_out) responding to the load transient current The figure

shows that idd_out follows the reference signal (Iref) very well for the SOFC system The

corresponding SOFC output current and voltage are given in Figure 611 It shows that

the SOFC output voltage and current vary smoothly during the load transient The SOFC

is controlled to supply only the steady-state current to the load and its output current

ripple is less than 15 which is much lower than the pre-set value (10)

287

0 5 10 15 200

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Current (A)

Battery current (ib)

idd_out

Iref

Figure 610 Reference signal (Iref) for the current controller the battery current (ib) and

the converter output current (idd_out) under the load transient for SOFC shown in Figure 64

0 5 10 15 200

30

60

90

Current (A)

0 5 10 15 2060

80

100

120

Time (s)

Voltage (V)

SOFC Voltage

SOFC Current

Figure 611 SOFC output current and voltage responses to the DC load transient shown

in Figure 64

288

0 5 10 15 20-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

Time (s)

Current (A)

Battery current (ib)

Iref

Figure 612 Control reference signal (Iref) and battery current (ib) under the AC load

transient

0 5 10 15 200

10

20

30

40

50

60

700

Current (A)

0 5 10 15 2075

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

Time (s)

Voltage (V)SOFC Current

SOFC Voltage

Figure 613 The SOFC output current and voltage responses to the AC load transient

289

Figures 612 and 613 show the simulation results when an AC load transient (shown

in Figure 65 but with different amplitude) is applied to the SOFC system The reference

signal (Iref) and the battery output current (ib) are given in Figure 612 It is clear from this

figure that the battery responds to the transient part of the load and the reference signal

(for the DCDC converter) rises smoothly to its new steady-state value The

corresponding SOFC output current and voltage under the AC load transient are shown in

Figure 613 The SOFC output ripple is also very small in this case Figures 612 and

613 show that the proposed control technique also works well for the SOFC system

under AC load transients

Battery ChargingDischarging

When the battery voltage is out of a certain range (plusmn5 in this study) the battery

chargingdischarging controller (Figures 61 and 62) will start operating to bring the

battery voltage back within the acceptable range In practice the battery normally needs

to be charged after a load transient applied to the FC-battery system This is because the

transient power delivered from the battery to the load together with the battery

self-discharging characteristic normally causes the battery voltage to drop If the battery

voltage drops below the pre-set value (95 of battery nominal voltage) the battery

chargingdischarging controller will start operating to charge the battery Similarly the

battery chargingdischarging controller will go into discharging mode if the battery

voltage goes above its pre-set limit (105 of battery nominal voltage) In this section

simulation results are given for battery charging after the DC motor load transient

(illustrated in Figure 64) is applied to the SOFC-battery system

290

Figure 614 shows the battery voltage and the extra current reference (Iref2 Figure 61)

after the load transient is applied to the FC-battery system Before the load transient

starts the battery voltage is already close to its lower limit (209V) During the transient

the battery voltage drops below the limit which triggers the battery chargingdischarging

controller to start operating and generating a new Iref2 This extra current reference is

added to the current reference (Iref1) from the current filter to produce the new current

reference signal (Iref) for the current controller (see Figure 61)

0 2 4 6 8 10202

207

212

Voltage (V)

0 2 4 6 8 100

1

2

Time (s)

Current (A)

Iref2

Battery Voltage

95220V = 209V

Figure 614 Battery voltage and extra current reference (Iref2) curves when the battery

is being charged

Figure 615 shows the load transient current the overall current reference signal (Iref)

the filter output reference signal (Iref1) the battery current (ib) and the corresponding

converter output current (idd_out) It is clear from Figures 614 and 615 that during and

after the transient load demand the battery picks up the transient load (battery

291

discharging) and the reference currents (Iref1 and Iref) slowly increase to bring the fuel cell

current to its new steady-state value and also charge the battery (battery charging) This

smooth transition of FC current is essential for their improved reliability and durability

0 2 4 6 8 10

-5

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

Time (s)

Current (A)

Iref1

Irefi

dd_out

Load transient

ib

Battery Discharging Battery Charging

Figure 615 The load transient the overall current control reference signal (Iref) the

low-pass filter output signal (Iref1) and the corresponding converter output current (idd_out)

when the battery is being charged

292

Summary

In this chapter a load transient mitigation control strategy is proposed for fuel

cell-battery power generation systems The control strategy consists of a current

controller for the DCDC converter and a battery chargingdischarging controller to keep

the battery voltage within a desired range During load transients fuel cells are controlled

(by the proposed transient mitigation technique) to supply the steady-state power to the

load while the battery will supply the transient power to the load Simulation studies

under different load transients have been carried for both the PEMFC system and the

SOFC system Simulation results show that the fuel cell current can be controlled as

desired and the battery voltage can be held in the prescribed range The results show that

the proposed load transient mitigation technique works well for both types of fuel cell

systems (PEMFC and SOFC) studied

293

REFERENCES

[61] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation

for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy

Conversion vol 20 no 2 pp442-451 June 2005

[62] R S Gemmen ldquoAnalysis for the effect of inverter ripple current on fuel cell

operating conditionrdquo Transactions of the ASME - Journal of Fluids Engineering

Vol 125 No 3 pp576-585 May 2003

[63] J C Amphlett EH de Oliveira RF Mann PR Roberge Aida Rodrigues

ldquoDynamic Interaction of a Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cell and a Lead-acid

Batteryrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 65 pp 173-178 1997

[64] D Candusso L Valero and A Walter ldquoModelling control and simulation of a

fuel cell based power supply system with energy managementrdquo Proceedings 28th

Annual Conference of the IEEE Industrial Electronics Society (IECON 2002) Vol

2 pp1294-1299 2002

[65] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained John Wiley amp

Sons Ltd pp 362-367 2001

[66] F Z Peng H Li G Su and JS Lawler ldquoA new ZVS bidirectional DC-DC

converter for fuel cell and battery applicationrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power

Electronics Vol19 No 1 pp54-65 Jan 2004

[67] K Acharya SK Mazumder RK Burra R Williams C Haynes ldquoSystem-interaction analyses of solid-oxide fuel cell (SOFC) power-conditioning

systemrdquo Conference Record of the 2003 IEEE Industry Applications Conference

Vol 3 pp 2026-2032 2003

[68] S K Mazumder K Acharya C L Haynes R Williams Jr M R

von-Spakovsky DJ Nelson DF Rancruel J Hartvigsen and RS Gemmen ldquoSolid-oxide-fuel-cell performance and durability resolution of the effects of

power-conditioning systems and application loadsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power

Electronics Vol 19 No 5 pp1263-1278 Sept 2004

[69] C Wang and MH Nehrir ldquoA Dynamic SOFC Model for Distributed Power

Generation Applicationsrdquo Proceedings 2005 Fuel Cell Seminar Nov 14-18 2005 Palm Springs CA

294

[610] ZM Salameh MA Casacca and WA Lynch ldquoA mathematical model for

lead-acid batteriesrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 7 No1 pp

93-98 1992

[611] Handbook of Batteries 2nd edition D Linden Ed McGraw Hill Inc New York

NY 1995

[612] N Mohan T M Undeland and W P Robbins Power Electronics ndash Converters

Applications and Design John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2003

[613] John Van de Vegte Feedback Control Systems (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall 1994

[614] DW Hart Introduction to Power Electronics Prentice Hall 1997

[615] R D Middlebrook ldquoSmall-signal modeling of pulse-width modulated

switched-mode power convertersrdquo Proceedings of the IEEE Vol 76 No 4 pp

343 ndash 354 April 1988

295

CHAPTER 7

CONTROL SCHEMES AND SIMULATION

RESULTS FOR THE PROPOSED HYBRID WINDPVFC SYSTEM

Introduction

Based on the component models given in Chapter 4 a simulation system test-bed for

the proposed hybrid alternative energy system (see Chapter 3) has been developed in

MATLABSimulink Figure 71 shows the overall diagram of the simulation model in

MATLABSimulink More details about the simulation model are given in Appendix B

The system is capable of being used as a test benchmark for other hybrid energy systems

that are AC coupled The overall control strategy for power management among different

energy sources in the system is discussed in this chapter The system performance under

different operating conditions is evaluated and discussed as well

System Control Strategy

Figure 72 shows the block diagram of the overall control strategy for the hybrid

alternative energy system The WTG controlled by the pitch angle controller (see Chapter

4) and PV electricity generation unit controlled by the MPPT controller (discussed in

Chapter 4) are the main energy sources of the system The power difference between the

generation sources and the load demand is calculated as

scloadpvwindnet PPPPP minusminus+= (71)

296

where Pwind = power generated by the wind energy conversion system

Ppv = power generated by the PV energy conversion system

Pload = load demand

Psc = self consumed power for operating the system

The system self consumed power is the power consumed by the auxiliary system

components to keep it running for example the power needed for running cooling

systems the control units and the gas compressor For the purpose of simplification only

the power consumed by the compressor (Pcomp defined in Chapter 4) is considered in this

study

Overall Power Management Strategy

The governing control strategy is that At any given time any excess wind and PV

generated power (Pnet gt 0) is supplied to the electrolyzer to generate hydrogen that is

delivered to the hydrogen storage tanks through a gas compressor Therefore power

balance equation (71) can be written as

compelecloadpvwind PPPPP ++=+ Pnet gt 0 (72)

where Pelec = the power consumed by the electrolyzer to generate H2

Pcomp = the power consumed by the gas compressor

When there is a deficit in power generation (Pnet lt 0) the FC stack begins to produce

energy for the load using hydrogen from the storage tanks Therefore the power balance

equation can be written as

loadFCpvwind PPPP =++ Pnet lt 0 (73)

where PFC = the power generated by the FC stack

297

AC BUS 208 V (L-L)

0

const2

Wspeed (ms)

WTGCB Ctrl 1=ON 0=OFF

A B C

WTG 50kW at 14ms

Ploadmat

To File5

Timer

ON 3s

Timer

ON 10s

Timer

ON 03s

Timer

ON 02s

Timer

ON 01 s

Terminator4

0 Q

Enable

Pava

Pdemand

Power control signal

[Pload]

Pload

[Pdemand]

Pdemand

[Pava]

Pava

Irradiance (Wm2)

PVCB Ctrl 1=ON 0=OFF

A B C

PV Array

The total power rate is about 30kW

under 1000 Wm^2

PQ

A B C

New Dynamic Load

com

A

B

C

a

b

c

Load CBVabc

Iabc

A

B

C

a

b

c

Load

Measurement

LoadDemandData

Load

Vabc

Iabc

PQ

Instantaneous P amp Q

[Pava]

From2

[Pdemand]

From1

SolarData

From

Workspace1

WindData

From

Workspace

FCCB Ctrl 1=ON 0=OFF

Pdemand (W)

Pstorage (atm)

nH2used (mols) A B C

FC with Gas Pressure Regulation

nH2_FC

Pava (W)

Ptank (atm)

A B C

Electrolyzer and H2 storage

Demux

A B C

Battery with Inverter

400 V battery

AC voltage control is applied

Output AC is 208 V ( L-L) at 60 Hz

gt 05

Figure 71 Sim

ulation m

odel for the proposed hybrid alternative energy system

in M

ATLABSim

ulink

298

Figure 72 Block diagram of the overall control schem

e for the proposed hybrid alternative energy system

299

The power controller has been discussed in Chapter 5 (see Figure 511) The model

for the gas pressure regulator has been discussed in Chapter 4 In the following sections

the AC bus voltage regulator and the electrolyzer controller are discussed in details

AC Bus Voltage Regulator

Figure 73 shows the block diagram of the AC bus voltage regulator In the figure the

AC bus voltage is measured and transformed into dq values (Vdq) through the ldquoabcdq

Transformationrdquo block Vdq is then compared with the reference voltage dq values

(Vdq(ref)) and the voltage error signals are fed into a PI controller The controller output is

transferred back into the control signals in abc coordinates through the ldquodqabc

Transformationrdquo block These control signals are used to generate proper SPWM pulses

for the inverter switches which shape the inverter output voltage (the AC bus voltage)

Figure 73 Block diagram of the AC voltage regulator

300

Electrolyzer Controller

The block diagram of the electrolyzer controller is shown in Figure 74 As discussed

in Chapter 4 (section 44) an electrolyzer can be considered as a voltage-sensitive

nonlinear DC load For the given electrolyzer within its rating range the higher the DC

voltage applied to it the larger is the load current and the more H2 is generated The

function of the electrolyzer controller is to control the controllable ACDC rectifier to

obtain a proper output DC voltage (Vdcelec) so that the excess available power can be fully

used by the electrolyzer to generate H2 For example if more power is available then the

controller controls the rectifier to give a higher DC voltage (Vdcelec) to the electrolyzer As

a result the power consumed by the electrolyzer (Pelec) becomes greater so that it matches

the excess available power

Figure 74 Block diagram of the electrolyzer controller

301

Simulation Results under Different Scenarios

In order to run the simulation for the hybrid alternative energy system the load

demand data and the weather data (wind speed solar irradiance and air temperature) are

needed As discussed in Chapter 3 the system is designed to supply electric power for

five houses in southeastern part of Montana A typical load demand for a house in the

Pacific Northwest regions reported in [71] is used in this simulation study The total

load demand profile of five houses has already been given in Chapter 3 For the purpose

of convenience the load demand profile over 24 hours is also given in this chapter

shown in Figure 75 The weather data are obtained from the online records of the

weather station at Deer Lodge Montana affiliated to the Pacific Northwest Cooperative

Agricultural Weather Network (AgriMet) [72] The general information about the station

and the types of relevant equipment and sensors used at the station are summarized in

Table 71 [72] Simulation studies are carried out for power management during a typical

winter and summer day The load demand is kept the same for the two cases Simulation

results for the winter and summer scenarios are given and discussed in the following

sections

302

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

Time (Hour of Day)

Demand (kW)

Figure 75 Load demand profile over 24 hours for the system simulation study

TABLE 71 WEATHER STATION INFORMATION

AT DEER LODGE MONTANA AGRIMET STATION (DRLM)

General Information

Latitude 46deg 20 08

Longitude 112deg 46 00

Elevation 4680

Equipment and Sensors

Sensors Sensor Height

Pyranometer Model LI-200SB 3 meters

Wind Monitor Model 05103 2 meters

Air Temperature Thermistor Model 44030 2 meters

303

Winter Scenario

Weather Data The weather data for the winter scenario simulation were collected on

February 1 2006 The wind speed data were collected at the height of 2 m The wind

turbine hub height is The wind speed data were corrected to the turbine hub height

(assumed to be 40 meters) using the following expression [73] [74]

α

=

0

101

H

HWW ss (74)

where Ws1 = wind speed at the height of H1(ms)

Ws0 = wind speed at the height of H0 (ms)

α = wind speed correction exponent

The exponent α is taken as 013 in this study as suggested and used in [73] and [74]

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Speed (ms)

Figure 76 Wind speed data for the winter scenario simulation study

304

Figure 76 shows the corrected hourly wind speed profile over 24 hours on the day the

data were collected The hourly solar irradiance data and air temperature collected on the

same winter day are shown in Figures 77 and 78 respectively

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

100

200

300

400

500

600

Time (Hour of Day)

Irradiance (Wm2)

Figure 77 Solar irradiance data for the winter scenario simulation study

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-05

0

05

1

15

2

25

3

35

4

45

Time (Hour of Day)

Air Temperature (degC)

Figure 78 Air temperature data for the winter scenario simulation study

305

Simulation Results The system performance under the load profile given in Figure

75 and the weather data shown in Figures 76 to 78 is evaluated and discussed below

The output power from the wind energy conversion unit in the hybrid energy system

over the 24 hour simulation period is shown in Figure 79 When the wind speed is over

14 ms the output power is limited at 50 kW by pitch angle controller (see Figure 434 in

Chapter 4) The pitch angle curve over the 24 hour is given in Figure 710 It is noted

from the figure that the pitch angle is increased to limit the wind turbine output power

when wind speed is greater than 14 ms Otherwise the pitch angle is kept at 2˚ (see

Figure 432 in Chapter 4) The corresponding rotor speed of the induction generator is

given in Figure 711 It is noted that the rotor speed variation follows as the wind speed

variation

4 8 12 16 20 240

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Power (kW)

Figure 79 Wind power of the winter scenario study

306

0 4 8 12 16 20 242

25

3

35

4

45

5

55

6

Time (Hour of Day)

Pitch Angle (deg)

Figure 710 Pitch angle of the wind turbine of the winter scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 241000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

2200

2400

2600

Time (Hour of Day)

Rotor Speed (rpm)

Figure 711 Rotor speed of the induction generator of the winter scenario study

307

The output power from the PV array in the system over the 24 hour simulation period

is shown in Figure 712 As discussed in Chapter 4 the PV array output power is

controlled by the current maximum power point tracking (CMPPT see Figure 457 in

Chapter 4) technique to give the maximum power output under different solar irradiances

Figure 713 shows the current difference (Ipverr) between the actual the output current (Ipv)

of a PV module and the reference current (Imp) at the maximum power point It is noted

that the PV output current follows the reference current very well using the CMPPT

method The current error is almost zero at steady state

As shown in Figures 453 and 454 in Chapter 4 temperature plays an important role

in the PV cellrsquos performance The PV cell temperature is estimated by the PV thermal

model discussed in Chapter 4 Figure 714 shows the PV temperature response over the

simulation period Two main factors for determining the temperature are the solar

irradiance and the air temperature (surrounding temperature) as shown in Figures 77 and

78 It is noted from Figures 453 and 454 that the higher the temperature the lower is

the maximum power value This effect of temperature upon the PV performance is also

illustrated by investigating Figure 712 and 714 For the purpose of comparison the air

temperature profile is also given in Figure 714

When Pnetgt0 there is excess power available for H2 generation Figure 715 shows

the available power profile over the 24 hour simulation period The available power is

used by the electrolyzer to generate H2 through the electrolyzer controller shown in

Figure 74 Figure 716 shows the H2 generation rate over the simulation period The

corresponding DC voltage applied to the electrolyzer and the electrolyzer current are

shown in Figure 717 It is noted from Figures 715 to 717 that the more power available

308

for storage the higher is the DC input voltage to the electrolyzer and the more is the H2

generated as a result

0 4 8 12 16 20 24

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

Time (Hour of Day)

PV Power (kW)

Figure 712 PV power for the winter scenario

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-015

-01

-005

0

005

01

015

02

025

03

035

Time (Hour of Day)

Current Difference (A)

Figure 713 Current difference between the actual output current and the reference

current for the maximum power point of the winter scenario

309

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-2

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

Time (Hour of Day)

Temperature ( degC)

Overall PV CellTemperature

Air Temperature

Figure 714 The PV temperature response over the simulation period for the winter

scenario

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

Time (Hour of Day)

Power available for H2 generation (kW)

Figure 715 Power available for H2 generation of the winter scenario

310

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

01

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 generation rate (mols)

Figure 716 H2 generation rate of the winter scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

Electrolyzer Voltage (V)

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

100

200

300

400

500

600

Time (Hour of Day)

Electrolyzer Current (A)

Current

Voltage

Figure 717 Electrolyzer voltage and current for the winter scenario study

311

When Pnetlt0 the wind and PV generated power from is not sufficient to supply the

load demand Under this condition the fuel cell turns on to supply the power shortage

Figure 718 shows the power shortage which should be supplied by the FC The actual

power delivered by the FC is given in Figure 719 and the corresponding H2 consumption

rate is given in Figure 720 Note that Figures 718 719 and 720 have similar pattern as

expected

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

Power shortage (kW)

Figure 718 Power shortage over the simulation period of the winter scenario study

312

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

FC output power (kW)

Figure 719 Power supplied by the FC of the winter scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

002

004

006

008

01

012

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 consumption rate (mols)

Figure 720 H2 consumption rate of the winter scenario study

313

0 4 8 12 16 20 2462

64

66

68

70

72

74

76

78

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 storage tank pressure (atm)

Figure 721 The pressure tank over the 24 hour of the winter scenario study

The H2 storage tank pressure varies as H2 flows in and out It is apparent that the

storage tank pressure will go up when there is excess power available for H2 generation

and will decrease when the FC supplies power to load and consumes H2 Figure 721

shows the tank pressure variations over the 24 hour simulation period

As discussed in Chapter 3 the capacity of the battery in the proposed hybrid system is

much smaller than the one used in a conventional system where the battery is taken as the

main storage device Figure 722 shows the battery power profile over the 24 hour

simulation period The positive spikes indicate the battery is discharging and the negative

ones indicate the battery is being charged It is noted from the figure that the battery

power is zero almost at all time As discussed in Chapter 3 the battery only supplies the

fast transient power such as fast load transients ripples and spikes

314

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-10

-8

-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

8

10

Time (Hour of Day)

Battery power (kW)

Figure 722 The battery power over the simulation period for the winter scenario

Summer Scenario

Weather Data The weather data collected in Dear Lodge MT on June 21 2005 are

used for the summer scenario study [72] The wind speed data are corrected to the height

of 40 m shown in Figure 723 The solar irradiance and air temperature data at the same

site on the same day are shown in Figures 724 and 725 respectively

By comparing the winter solar irradiance data shown in Figure 77 and the summer

solar irradiance data given in Figure 724 it is obvious that the time frame when solar

energy is available is wider in the summer than in the winter Another apparent

difference is that the air temperature in the summer (shown in Figure 725) is of course

higher than the air temperature in the winter (shown in Figure 78)

315

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Speed (ms)

Figure 723 Corrected wind speed data for the summer scenario simulation study

0 5 10 15 20 250

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

Time (Hour of Day)

Irradiance (Wm2)

Figure 724 Irradiance data for the summer scenario simulation study

316

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

20

25

30

Time (Hour of Day)

Air Temperature (degC)

Figure 725 Air temperature data for the summer scenario simulation study

Simulation Results In this section the system performance under the load demand

profile given in Figure 75 and the weather data shown in Figures 723 to 725 is

evaluated The output power from the wind energy conversion unit in the hybrid energy

system over the 24 hour simulation period is shown in Figure 726 The corresponding

rotor speed of the induction generator is given in Figure 727

317

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

20

25

Time (Hour of Day)

WTG output power (kW)

Figure 726 Wind power generated for the summer scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 241100

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

Time (Hour of Day)

WT rotor speed (rpm)

Figure 727 Rotor speed of the induction generator for the summer scenario study

The output power from the PV array in the system over the 24 hour simulation period

is shown in Figure 728 Figure 729 shows the PV temperature response over the

simulation period For the purpose of comparison the air temperature profile is also

illustrated in the figure It is noted from Figure 729 that the PV cells cool down to about

the same temperature as air when there is no sun The cell temperature climbs up when

318

the sun comes out The temperature difference between the PV cell and air can be as high

as 25 ˚C shown in Figure 729 This effect of the temperature upon the PV performance

is also illustrated by investigating Figures 728 and 729 The higher cell temperature

causes a lower maximum power value The spikes in Figure 728 are due to the MPPT

which tries to keep the PV array operate at its maximum power points under different

temperatures and solar irradiances The time range of the spike is small (about 1 s)

0 5 10 15 20 25-5

0

5

10

15

20

25

Time (Hour of Day)

PV Power (kW)

Figure 728 PV power generated for the winter scenario study

319

0 5 10 15 20 255

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

Time (Hour of Day)

Temperature ( degC)

AirTemperature

Overall PV Cell

Temperature

Figure 729 The PV and air temperature over the simulation period for the winter

scenario study

When Pnetgt0 there is excess power available for H2 generation Figure 730 shows

the available power profile over the 24 hour simulation period Figure 731 shows the

H2 generation rate over the simulation period The corresponding DC voltage applied to

the electrolyzer and the electrolyzer current are shown in Figure 732 It is clear from

Figures 730 - 732 that the more power is available for storage the higher is the DC

input voltage applied to the electrolyzer to balance the excess power and the more H2 is

generated as a result

320

0 5 10 15 20 250

5

10

15

20

25

30

Time (Hour of Day)

Power available for H2 generation (kW)

Figure 730 Power available for H2 generation for the summer scenario study

0 5 10 15 20 250

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 generation rate (mols)

Figure 731 H2 generation rate for the summer scenario study

321

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-20

20

60

100Electrolyzer Voltage (V)

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

150

300

450

Time (Hour of Day)

Electrolyzer Current (A)

Voltage

Current

Figure 732 Electrolyzer voltage and current for the summer scenario study

When Pnetlt0 the wind and PV generated power is not sufficient to supply the load

demand Under this scenario the fuel cell turns on to supply the power shortage Figure

733 shows the power shortage which should be supplied by the FC The actual power

delivered by FC is given in Figure 734 and the corresponding H2 consumption rate is

given in Figure 735 Comparing Figures733 and 734 we can see that the power

shortage is covered by the fuel cell very well

322

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

Power Shortage (kW)

Figure 733 Power shortage over the simulation period for the summer scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

FC Output Power (kW)

Figure 734 Power supplied by the FC over the simulation period for the summer

scenario study

323

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

002

004

006

008

01

012

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 Consumption Rate (mols)

Figure 735 H2 consumption rate for the summer scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 2452

54

56

58

60

62

64

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 Storage Tank Pressure (atm)

Figure 736 The H2 tank pressure over the 24 hour for the summer scenario study

324

Figure 736 shows the tank pressure variations over the 24 hour simulation period and

Figure 737 shows the battery power profile over the simulation period The large spikes

shown in Figure 737 are due to the sudden hourly changes in the weather data and the

load demand used for the simulation study

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-4

-2

0

2

4

6

8

Time (Hour of Day)

Battery Power (kW)

Figure 737 The battery power over the simulation period for the summer scenario

Simulation studies have also been carried out using continuous weather and load

demand data The same weather and load demand data points used for the winter scenario

study are used for this scenario study However for this case study each input (load

demand wind speed solar irradiance and air temperature) is a continuous piecewise

linear function over the simulation time where two adjacent data points are connected by

a straight line The continuous load demand curve shown in Figure 75 is used for this

simulation study and Figures 738 ndash 740 show the weather data used in this case

325

0 5 10 15 20 252

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Speed (ms)

Figure 738 Wind speed data for the simulation study with continuous weather data and

load demand

0 5 10 15 20 250

100

200

300

400

500

600

Time (Hour of Day)

Irradiance (Wm2)

Figure 739 Solar irradiance data for the simulation study with continuous weather data

and load demand

326

0 5 10 15 20 25-1

0

1

2

3

4

5

Time (Hour of Day)

Air Temperature (degC)

Figure 740 Air temperature for the simulation study with continuous weather data and

load demand

Figures 741 and 742 show the continuous wind and PV generated power

respectively The spikes in the PV output power shown in Figure 742 are due to the

CMPPT control of the power electronic interfacing devices for the PV array Figures 743

and 744 show the corresponding excess power (available for H2 generation) profile and

the FC output power (power shortage) profile over the simulation period

327

0 5 10 15 20 250

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Power (kW)

Figure 741 Wind power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario

0 5 10 15 20 250

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

Time (Hour of Day)

PV Power (kW)

Figure 742 PV power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario

328

0 5 10 15 20 250

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

Time (Hour of Day)

Power available for H2 generation (kW)

Figure 743 Power available for H2 generation for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario

0 5 10 15 20 250

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

FC Output Power (kW)

Figure 744 FC output power for the continuous weather data and load demand

scenario

329

Figure 745 shows the battery power profile over the 24 hour simulation period for

the continuous weather data and load demand scenario Comparing Figure 745 with

Figures 722 and 737 it is noted that the battery spikes are much smaller in this case than

the battery spikes when the discrete hourly weather and load demand data are used

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-10

-8

-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

8

10

Time (Hour of Day)

Battery Power (kW)

Figure 745 Battery power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario

330

Summary

In this chapter the overall control and power management strategy for the proposed

hybrid energy system is presented The wind and PV generation systems are the main

power generation devices The electrolyzer acts as a dump load using any excess power

to produce H2 The FC system is the back up generation and battery picks up the fast load

transients and ripples The simulation model of the hybrid system has been developed

using MATLABSimulink Simulation studies have been used to verify the system

performance under different scenarios using practical load profile and real weather

collected at Deer Lodge MT The simulation results have been given and discussed for a

winter and a summer scenario The results show that the overall power management

strategy is effective and the power flows among the different energy sources and the load

demand is balanced successfully

331

REFERENCES

[71] J Cahill K Ritland W Kelly ldquoDescription of Electric Energy Use in Single

Family Residences in the Pacific Northwest 1986-1992rdquo Office of Energy

Resources Bonneville Power Administration December 1992 Portland OR

[72] Online httpwwwusbrgovpnagrimetwebaghrreadhtml

[73] WD Kellogg MH Nehrir G Venkataramanan V Gerez ldquoGeneration unit sizing

and cost analysis for stand-alone wind photovoltaic and hybrid windPV systemsrdquo

IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 13 No 1 pp 70 ndash 75 March 1998

[74] P Gipe Wind power renewable energy for home farm and business Chelsea

Green Publishing Company 2004

332

CHAPTER 8

OPTIMAL PLACEMENT OF DISTRIBUTED GENERATION

SOURCES IN POWER SYSTEMS

Introduction

The ever-increasing need for electrical power generation steady progress in the

power deregulation and utility restructuring and tight constraints over the construction of

new transmission lines for long distance power transmission have created increased

interest in distributed power generation Distributed generation (DG) devices can be

strategically placed in power systems for grid reinforcement reducing power losses and

on-peak operating costs improving voltage profiles and load factors deferring or

eliminating system upgrades and improving system integrity reliability and efficiency

[81]-[85]

These DG sources are normally placed close to consumption centers and are added

mostly at the distribution level They are relatively small in size (relative to the power

capacity of the system in which they are placed) and modular in structure A common

strategy to find the site of DG is to minimize the power loss of the system [82]-[85]

Another method for placing DG is to apply rules that are often used in sitting shunt

capacitors in distribution systems A ldquo23 rulerdquo is presented in [86] to place DG on a

radial feeder with uniformly distributed load where it is suggested to install DG of

approximately 23 capacity of the incoming generation at approximately 23 of the length

of line This rule is simple and easy to use but it cannot be applied directly to a feeder

333

with other types of load distribution or to a networked system References [81] [87]

present power flow algorithms to find the optimal size of DG at each load bus in a

networked system assuming that every load bus can have a DG source

In this chapter analytical approaches for optimal placement of DG with unity power

factor in power systems are presented First placement of DG in a radial feeder is

analyzed and the theoretical optimal site (bus) for adding DG is obtained for different

types of loads and DG sources Then a method is presented to find the optimal bus for

placing DG in a networked system based on bus admittance matrix generation

information and load distribution of the system The proposed methods are tested by a

series of simulations on radial feeders an IEEE 6-bus test system [81] an IEEE 30-bus

test system [811] and a subset of it to show the effectiveness of the proposed methods in

determining the optimal bus for placing DG

In practice there are more constraints on the availability of DG sources and there

may be only one or a few DGs with limited output available to be added Therefore in

this study the DG size is not considered to be optimized The procedure to determine the

optimal bus for placing DG may also need to take into account other factors such as

economic and geographic considerations These factors are not discussed in this chapter

Optimal Placement of DG on a Radial Feeder

To simplify the analysis only overhead transmission lines with uniformly distributed

parameters are considered ie R and L (series resistance and inductance) per unit length

are the same along the feeder while the shunt capacitance and susceptance of lines are

neglected The loads along the feeder are assumed to vary in discrete time duration for

334

example the feeder load distributions along the line for time durations Ti and Ti+1 are

shown in Figure 81

Figure 81 A feeder with distributed loads along the line

Theoretical Analysis

First consider a radial feeder without DG During the time duration Ti the loads are

distributed along the line with the phasor current density Id(xTi) as shown in Figure 81

The phasor feeder current at point x is

int=x

idi dxTxITxI0

)()( (81)

Assuming the impedance per unit length of the line is Z=R+jX (Ωkm) then the

incremental power loss and phasor voltage drop at point x are

RdxdxTxITxdP

x

idi sdot

= int

2

0

)()( (82)

ZdxdxTxITxdV

x

idi sdot

= int

0

)()( (83)

The total power loss along the feeder within the time duration Ti is

RdxdxTxITxdPTPl x

id

l

iiloss sdot

== int intint

0

2

00

)()()( (84)

335

The voltage drop between point x and the receiving end is

ZdxdxTxITxdVTVTVTxVx x

id

x

iiixidrop sdot==minus= int intint0 00

0 )()()()()( (85)

And the voltage at point x is

)()()()()()( 0 idropidropilidropiix TxVTlVTVTxVTVTV +minus=+= (86)

The total voltage drop across the feeder is

ZdxdxTxITxdVTVTVTlVl x

id

l

iiilidrop sdot==minus= int intint0 00

0 )()()()()( (87)

Now consider a DG is added into the feeder at the location x0 shown in Figure 81 In

general the load current density Id(xTi) will change (normally decrease) as a result of

adding DG due to improvements in the voltage profile along the line This change in

the load current density will cause the feeder current to decrease The feeder current

between the source (at x=l) and the location of DG (at x = x0) will also change as a result

of the injected current source IDG(Ti) However the change in feeder current due to the

change in the load current density is generally much smaller than the change in the feeder

current due to the injected current IDG(Ti) For the purpose of analysis the change in the

load current density resulted from the addition of DG is neglected in this study

Therefore the load current density Id(xTi) used in (1) is also used for obtaining the

feeder current after adding DG In this case the feeder current can be written as follows

leleminus

lele

=

int

int

lxxTIdxTxI

xxdxTxI

TxI

iDG

x

id

x

id

i

0

0

0

0

)()(

0)(

)( (88)

The corresponding power loss and voltage drop in the feeder are

336

RdxTIdxTxIRdxdxTxITxPl

x

x

iDGid

x x

idiloss sdot

minus+sdot

= int intint int

0

2

0

0

0

2

0

0 )()()()( (89)

lelesdot

minus

+sdot

lelesdot

=

int int

int int

int int

lxxZdxTIdxTxI

ZdxdxTxI

xxZdxdxTxI

TxV

x

x

iDG

x

id

x x

id

x x

id

idrop

0

0 0

0

0 0

0

0 0

)()(

)(

0)(

)( (810)

The average power loss in a given time period T is

i

N

i

ilossloss TTxPT

xPt

sum=

=1

00 )(1

)( (811)

where Nt is the number of time durations in the time period T

sum=

=tN

i

iTT1

(812)

Equation (86) can still be used under this situation to calculate the voltage at point x

by using Vdrop(xTi) obtained from equation (810)

Procedure to Find the Optimal Location of DG on a Radial Feeder

The goal is to add DG in a location to minimize the total average power loss and

assure that the voltages Vx along the feeder are in the acceptable range 1plusmn005 pu ie

0)(

0

0 =dx

xPd loss (813)

The solution x0 of the above equation will give the optimal site for minimizing the

power loss but it cannot guarantee that all the voltages along the feeder are in the

acceptable range If the voltage regulation cannot be satisfied at the same time the DG

337

can be placed around x0 to satisfy the voltage regulation rule while decreasing the power

loss as much as possible or the DG size can be increased The analytical procedure to

determine the optimal point to place DG on a radial feeder is given as follows

1) Find the distributed load )( id TxI along the feeder

2) Get the output current of DG )( iDG TI

3) Use equations (89) and (811) to calculate )( 0xPloss and find the solution x0 of

equation (813)

4) Use equations (86) and (810) to check whether the voltage regulation is satisfied

5) If all the voltages are in the acceptable range then the calculated x0 is the optimal spot

(xop) to add DG

6) If x0 doesnrsquot meet the voltage regulation rule then move the DG to see whether there

is a point around point x0 where all bus voltages are in the acceptable range

7) If no point on the feeder can satisfy the voltage regulation rule then increase the size

of DG and repeat steps 2) to 7)

8) Sometimes more than one DG may be needed Under this situation the feeder can be

divided into several segments and steps 1) to 7) can be applied to each segment

The flow chart of the procedure is summarized in Figure 82

338

Case Studies with Time Invariant Loads and DGs

Table 81 shows the results of analyses using the foregoing procedure to find the

optimal location for placing DG on radial feeders with three different load distributions

uniformly distributed load centrally distributed load and uniformly increasing distributed

load In the results given in Table 81 it is assumed that the DG supplies all the loads

on the feeder in each case and the distribution system supplies the system losses It is

noted from the table that the DG reduces the system power losses significantly when it is

located properly

Figure 82 Procedure for finding optimal place for a DG source in a radial feeder

339

TABLE 81 THEORETICAL ANALYSIS RESULTS OF CASE STUDIES

WITH TIME INVARIANT LOADS AND DGS

Cases

(Assuming that DG supplies

all the loads in each case)

0

lossP

(Power loss

before adding

DG)

lossP

(Power loss

after adding

DG)

Percent of

power loss

reduction

Optimal

place x0

Id

xl 0

Source

IDG

x0

Vl Vx V0

Uniformly distributed load

332RlId 1232

RlId 75 2

l

xl 0

Source

IDG

x0

Vl Vx

lxl

lx

xlI

xIxI

ld

ld

d lelt

lelt

minus=

2

20

)()(

Centrally distributed load

52

960

23RlI ld 52

320

1RlI

ld 87

2

l

Id=Ild(l-x)

xl 0

Source

IDG

x0

Vl Vx V0

Increasingly distributed load

5213330 RlIld

52015550 RlI

ld

88 )221( minus

340

The 23 rule presented in [86] works well when the load is uniformly distributed

along the feeder but it gives inaccurate results if the load configuration is different For a

uniformly distributed load if the DG supplies 23 of the total load ( 62lII ldDG = ) the

optimal site is at 30 lx = according to equation (89) This result is exactly the same as

that given in [86] However when the loads are centrally and increasingly distributed

and the DG provides 23 of the total load the optimal location for placing DG turns out to

be 6l and l)321( minus respectively which differ from what the ldquo23 rulerdquo suggests

in [86]

Case Study with Time Varying Load and DG

The same feeders as in the previous section (shown in Figure 81) but with time

varying load and DG are analyzed in this case The analysis is given for uniformly

distributed load only The analyses for other types of loads follow similarly

Assuming that DG is located at point x0 then according to equation (89) the

effective power loss is

3

)())(())(()()(

32

0

222

00

lTRIlxTRIlxTITRITxP id

iDGiDGidiloss +minusminusminus=

(814)

where lTITI iloadid )()( = and )( iload TI is the load current at the very sending end of the

feeder The average power loss in a given time period T is

i

N

i

iDG

N

i

iiDGidloss TTIT

RxTTITI

T

RxCxP

tt

sumsum==

minus+=1

20

1

2

010 )()()()( (815)

341

where i

N

i

iDGiDGid

id TlTRIlTITRIlTRI

TC

t

sum=

+minus=

1

22

32

1 )()()(3

)(1

Setting 0)(

0

0 =dx

xPd loss x0 is obtained to be

sum

sum

sum

sum

=

=

=

=

sdot==

t

t

t

t

N

i

iiDGiload

i

N

i

iDG

N

i

iiDGid

i

N

i

iDG

TTITI

TTIl

TTITI

TTI

x

1

1

2

1

1

2

0

)()(2

)(

)()(2

)(

(816)

Assuming that all bus voltages along the feeder are in the acceptable range equation

(816) can be approximated as

sum

sum

sum

sum

=

=

=

=

sdot=asymp

t

t

t

t

N

i

iiDGiload

i

N

i

iDG

N

i

iiDGid

i

N

i

iDG

TTPTP

TTPl

TTPTP

TTP

x

1

1

2

1

1

2

0

)()(2

)(

)()(2

)(

(817)

where lTPTP iloadid )()( = and )( iload TP is the total load along the feeder in the time

duration Ti

Optimal Placement of DG in Networked Systems

The theoretical analysis for placing a DG in networked systems is different and more

complicated than in a radial feeder To simplify the analysis only one DG is considered

to be added to the system

Consider the system shown in Figure 83 with a DG added to the system to reinforce

it The system has N buses and loads and the DG is located at a bus say bus j The main

external power is injected into bus 1 which is taken as slack bus The objective is to find

the bus to install the DG so that the total system power loss is minimized and the voltage

level at each bus is held in the acceptable range 1plusmn005 pu

342

DGLoad 1

Load j

Load N

Bus 1

Bus j

Bus N

Figure 83 A networked power system

Before the DG is added to the system the bus admittance matrix is

=

0

0

1

00

2

0

1

0

1

0

12

0

11

0

NN

N

NjNN

j

bus

Y

Y

YYY

YYY

Y (818)

where superscript 0 denotes the original system

Assuming that the DG is located at bus j the system admittance matrix is changed

from Ybus0 to Ybus by considering that bus 1 and bus j are connected together Actually

there is no line to connect those buses together but the imaginary line will help in finding

the optimal location to add DG Ybus is one dimension less than Ybus0 except when the DG

is located at bus 1 If the DG is at bus 1 Ybus matrix will be the same as Ybus0 To obtain

the new matrix Ybus when the DG source is connected we treat the system as connecting

343

bus 1 and j by eliminating bus j in Ybus0 [810] The new matrix is

=

minusminus

minus

minusminusminus )1)(1(

)1(1

)1(2)1(1)1(

11211

NN

N

kNNN

k

bus

Y

Y

YYY

YYY

Y (819)

where

12

1

12

2

11

0

)1(

0

)1(11

00

11

0

1

00

1111

minus==

minus=+=

minus=+=

++=

++

NkYY

NjkYYY

jkYYY

YYYY

kk

kjkk

jkkk

jjj

1)(

121

112

1)(2

0

)1)(1(

0

)1(

0

)1(

0

minuslele=

minusleleminuslele=

minusleleminuslele=

minuslele=

++

+

+

NkijYY

jkNijYY

NkjjiYY

jkiYY

kiik

kiik

kiik

ikik

The new bus impedance matrix Zbus is

==

minusminus

minus

minusminusminus

minus

)1)(1(

)1(1

)1(2)1(1)1(

11211

1

NN

N

kNNN

k

busbus

Z

Z

ZZZ

ZZZ

YZ (820)

Suppose the complex load and generated power of the original system are

][ 000

2

0

1

0

LNLiLLL SSSSS = and

][ 000

2

0

1

0

GNGiGGG SSSSS = i=12 N (821)

where 000

LiLiLi jQPS += and 000

GiGiGi jQPS +=

A new load vector SL is set up as follows

[ ]LNLiLLL SSSSS 21= (822)

where

LiLiLi jQPS += and

0=LiS for i = 1 (slack bus)

344

0

LiLi SS = for i = load buses

GiLi

GiLiGiLiLi

PP

PPjPPS

le

gt

+minus

=0

000

for i = P-V buses

Note that at the slack bus (bus 1) SL1 = 0 it is assumed that the real and reactive

power consumed by the load are supplied directly by the external generation at that bus

Also at a voltage controlled (P-V) bus QLi = 0 it is assumed that the load reactive power

can be supplied by the external power source at the P-V bus

To find the optimal point to place the DG we set up an objective function for DG at

each bus j as follows

sumsum+=

minus

=

+=N

ji

Lii

j

i

Liij SjRSjRf1

2

1

1

1

2

1 )()( j=2 hellipN (823)

where R1i(j) is the equivalent resistance between bus 1 and bus i when DG is located at

bus j jne1

gt

lt

minus+

minus+=

minusminusminus ji

ji

ZZZReal

ZZZRealjR

iii

iii

i )2(

)2()(

)1(1)1)(1(11

111

1 (824)

When the DG is located at bus 1 (j=1) the objective function will be

sum=

=N

i

Lii SRf1

2

11 (825)

Note that in this case Ybus (Zbus) will be the same as Ybus0 (Zbus

0) and R11=0

The goal is to find the optimal bus m where the objective function reaches its

minimum value

NjfMinf jm 21)( == (826)

The theoretical procedure to find the optimal bus to place DG in a networked system

345

can be summarized as follows

1) Find the matrix Ybus0 and set up the load vector SL

2) Compute Ybus and the corresponding Zbus for different DG locations

3) Calculate the equivalent resistances according to (824)

4) Use (823) and (825) to calculate objective function values for DG at different buses

and find the optimal bus m

5) If all the voltages are in the acceptable range when the DG is located at bus m then

bus m is the optimal site

6) If some bus voltages do not meet the voltage rule then move the DG around bus m to

satisfy the voltage rule

7) If there is no bus that can satisfy the voltage regulation rule try a different size DG

and repeat steps 5) and 6)

The procedure is summarized in the flow chart shown in Figure 84 and the

corresponding MATLAB code is given in Appendix C

Though the discussion here is under the assumption that only one DG source is added

to the system it can be easily extended to the systems with multiple DG sources By

connecting all the DG buses and slack bus together through imaginary lines the new Ybus

matrix and the corresponding objective function can be established by the method

presented above

Simulation Results

Several simulation studies were carried out to verify the results obtained analytically

for both radial and network-connected systems

346

Radial Feeder with Time Invariant Loads and DG

A radial feeder with a time invariant DG was simulated under uniformly distributed

centrally distributed and increasingly distributed loads The simulated system for

uniformly distributed loads is shown in Figure 85 The system architecture is the same

when the loads are centrally distributed or increasingly distributed The line parameters

DG and load sizes are listed in Table 82

Figure 84 Flow chart of The theoretical procedure to find the optimal bus to place DG

in a networked system

347

power grid

DG

External

Bus 1 Bus 2 Bus 3 Bus 4 Bus 5 Bus 6 Bus 7 Bus 8 Bus 9 Bus 10 Bus 11

050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW

Figure 85 A radial feeder with uniformly distributed loads

TABLE 82 PARAMETERS OF THE SYSTEM IN FIGURE 85

Line parameters

(AWG ACSR 10)

Line spacing = 132m (equal spacing assumed)

R = 0 538Ω XL = 04626 Ω

Bus Voltage 125kV

Line length between two neighboring buses 25km

Load at each bus (MW) Load type

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Uniformly distributed 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05

Centrally distributed 005 01 02 03 04 05 04 03 02 01 005

Increasingly distributed 005 01 015 02 025 03 035 04 045 05 055

Uniformly Centrally Increasingly DG size

(MW) 55 26 33

348

TABLE 83 SIMULATION RESULTS OF CASE STUDIES WITH

TIME INVARIANT LOADS AND DG

Total Power

Losses (kW) Line Loading Optimal Bus No

(Simulation)

Optimal Place

(Theoretical) Without DG With DG

Uniform 6 6 17785 02106

Central 6 6 02589 00275

Increasing 8 8 08099 00606

In Table 83 the optimal bus for placing DG to minimize the total system power loss

is given for each load distribution The total system power losses are given both with and

without DG It is noted that the simulation results agree well with theoretical values

While some bus voltages fall far out of the acceptable range when there is no DG in the

system all the bus voltages are within 1plusmn005 pu with the DG added

Radial Feeder with Time Varying Loads and DG

This part of the study is helpful in understanding the effect of variable power DG

(such as wind and photovoltaic (PV)) sources on distribution systems with time varying

loads In practice the site of such DG sources may be mainly determined by

meteorological and geographic factors However DG sources with predictable output

power (such as fuel cells and microturbines) can be placed at any bus in the distribution

system to achieve optimal result

The feeder shown in Figure 85 is also used to simulate the situation with time

varying uniformly distributed loads and DG A wind-turbine generator is considered as

349

the time varying DG source Actual wind data taken in a rural area in south central

Montana were used to obtain the output power of a simulated (1-MW) wind turbine as

shown in Figure 86 [85] [88] It shows the annual daily average output power of the

turbine which can be viewed as the filtered version of the turbinersquos output power The

daily average demand of a typical house in the northwestern United States shown in

Figure 87 [89] is used here as one unit of the time varying loads The loads are assumed

to be uniformly distributed along the feeder with 100 houses at each bus

0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23

Time of the day

Ou

tpu

t o

f w

ind

tu

rbin

e (

kW

)

Figure 86 Annual daily average output power profile of a 1-MW wind-DG

The simulated wind-DG was installed at different buses and the total system power

loss was obtained in each case shown in Figure 88 It is noticed from this figure that

total feeder power loss reaches a minimum value when the wind-DG is placed at bus 10

in Figure 85 The theoretical optimal position to place the wind-DG is obtained (using

equation (817) and the generation and demand data shown in Figures 86 and 87) to be

x0 asymp 014l The position with this distance from the end of feeder in Figure 85 is between

bus 9 and 10 but closer to bus 10 which is the same bus obtained from the simulation

results shown in Figure 88

350

0

05

1

15

2

25

3

35

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23

Time of day

Dem

and (kw

)

Figure 87 Daily average demand of a typical house

80

90

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

DG loaction - Bus No

To

tal

avera

ge p

ow

er

loss (

kW

)

Figure 88 Power losses of the radial feeder with the wind-DG at different buses

351

Networked Systems

The 25 kV IEEE 6-bus system shown in Figure 89 [81] which can be considered as

a sub-transmissiondistribution system was used to verify the method presented in the

previous section The parameters of this system are given in Table 84 A 5-MW DG was

added to reinforce the system Total system power loss was obtained from the results of

power flow studies when DG was placed at different buses (Figure 810) It is noted from

this figure that minimum power loss is achieved when DG is placed at bus 3 The

values of the objective function for the system were obtained by applying the proposed

analytical approach when the DG was placed at different buses These values are shown

in the bar chart of Figure 811 It is noted from this figure that the objective function is

also at its minimum when the DG is placed at bus 3 indicating that the result obtained

from the proposed analytical method is the same as the simulation result

Reference Bus

Voltage Controlled Bus

Bus 1

Bus 2Bus 3

Bus 4

Bus 5Bus 6

80 MW

10 MVR 40 MW 725 MW

20 MVR

50 MW 125 MVR

50 MW

15 MVR

Figure 89 6-bus networked power system studied

352

TABLE 84 PARAMETERS OF THE SYSTEM IN FIGURE 89 [81]

Bus No Voltage (pu) Bus Power (MVA)

1 10+j00 Slack bus

2 ― -40 -j100

3 ― -725-j200

4 ― -500-j125

5 015 =V 800

6 ― -500-j150

Line Data

From To Zserial (pu) Yshunt(pu)

1 2 02238+j05090 j00012

2 3 02238+j05090 j00012

3 4 02238+j05090 j00012

4 5 02238+j05090 j00012

5 6 02238+j05090 j00012

6 1 02276+j02961 j00025

1 5 02603+j07382 j00008

0

01

02

03

04

05

2 3 4 5 6

DG Location - Bus No

Po

wer

Lo

ss (

MW

)

Figure 810 Power losses of the system in Figure 89 with a 5MW DG

353

0

5

10

15

20

25

2 3 4 5 6

DG Location - Bus No

Valu

e o

f th

e O

bje

cti

ve F

un

cti

on

Figure 811 Values of the objective function of the system in Figure 89

The proposed method was also tested on the IEEE 30-bus test system shown in Figure

812 which can be considered as a meshed transmissionsubtransmission system [811]

The system has 30 buses (mainly 132kV and 33kV buses) and 41 lines The system bus

data is given in Table 85 A 15 MW DG (about 5 of the total system load of 283 +

j1262 MVA) is considered to be added to reinforce the system The total power loss of

the system reaches a minimum value when DG is located at bus 5 as shown in Figure

813 The optimal bus determined by the method proposed in this study is also bus 5 as

given in Figure 814

354

1

2

3

4

5

6

7 8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20 21

22

23 24

25 26

27 28

29 30

subset

100 MVA Base

Figure 812 IEEE 30-bus test system

152

154

156

158

16

162

164

166

168

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30

DG Location - Bus No

Pow

er

Losses (M

W)

Figure 813 Power losses of the IEEE 30-bus test system with a 15MW DG

355

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

550

600

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30DG Location - Bus No

Valu

e o

f o

bje

cti

ve f

un

cti

on

Figure 814 Values of the objective function of the IEEE 30-bus system

A DG source may not be connected directly to a 132kV bus (bus 5 in Figure 812) as

determined by the proposed method For this reason a subset of the 30-bus test system

with lower voltage level (33kV) as indicated in Figure 812 was also chosen to test the

proposed method The new system has 18 buses 22 lines and a total load of 1047+j508

MVA A 5MW DG (about 5 of the total load of the subset) was added to the system

Simulation results for this system are given in Figure 815 It is noted that the total system

loss reaches a minimum value when the DG is located at bus 30 The optimal bus

suggested by the proposed method is also bus 30 as shown in Figure 816

All the power flow simulation studies in this chapter were carried out using

PowerWorldreg Simulator [812]

356

11

115

12

125

13

135

10 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 29 30

DG Location - Bus No

Po

wer

Lo

sses (

MW

)

Figure 815 Power losses of the subset system in Figure 812 with a 5MW DG

50

55

60

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

10 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 29 30

DG Location - Bus No

Valu

e o

f obje

ctive function

Figure 816 Values of the objective function of the subset system in Figure 812

357

TABLE 85 BUS DATA OF THE IEEE 30-BUS TEST SYSTEM [811]

Bus No Type Load

(pu)

Rated Bus

Voltage (kV)

Bus

Voltage (pu)

1 Swing 00 132 1060

2 P-V 0217+j0127 132 1043

3 P-Q 0024+j0012 132 ―

4 P-Q 0076+j0016 132 ―

5 P-V 0942+j019 132 1010

6 P-Q 00 132 ―

7 P-Q 0228+j0109 132 ―

8 P-V 03+j03 132 1010

9 P-Q 00 690 ―

10 P-Q 0058+j002 330 ―

11 P-V 00 110 1082

12 P-Q 0112+j0075 330 ―

13 P-V 00 110 1071

14 P-Q 0062+j0016 330 ―

15 P-Q 0082+j0025 330 ―

16 P-Q 0035+j0018 330 ―

17 P-Q 009+j0058 330 ―

18 P-Q 0032+j0009 330 ―

19 P-Q 0095+j0034 330 ―

20 P-Q 0022+j0007 330 ―

21 P-Q 0175+j0112 330 ―

22 P-Q 00 330 ―

23 P-Q 0032+j0016 330 ―

24 P-Q 0087+j0067 330 ―

25 P-Q 00 330 ―

26 P-Q 0035+j0023 330 ―

27 P-Q 00 330 ―

28 P-Q 00 330 ―

29 P-Q 0024+j0009 330 ―

30 P-Q 0106+j0019 330 ―

(100 MVA Base)

358

Summary

Analytical approaches are presented in this chapter to determine the optimal location

for placing DG in both radial and networked systems to minimize power losses The

proposed approaches are not iterative algorithms like power flow programs Therefore

there is no convergence problems involved and results could be obtained very quickly A

series of simulation studies were also conducted to verify the validity of the proposed

approaches and results show that the proposed methods work well

In practice there are other constraints which may affect the DG placement

Nevertheless methodologies presented in this chapter can be effective instructive and

helpful to system designers in selecting proper sites to place DGs

359

REFERENCES

[81] Narayan S Rau Yih-heui Wan ldquoOptimum Location of Resources in Distributed

Planningrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Systems Vol 9 No 4 pp 2014-2020

November 1994

[82] Kyu-Ho Kim Yu-Jeong Lee Sang-Bong Rhee Sang-Kuen Lee and Seok-Ku You

ldquoDispersed Generator Placement using Fuzzy-GA in Distribution Systemsrdquo

Proceedings 2002 IEEE Power Engineering Society Summer Meeting Vol 3 pp

1148-1153 July 2002 Chicago IL

[83] N Hadjsaid JF Canard F Dumas ldquoDispersed Generation Impact on Distribution

Networksrdquo IEEE Computer Applications in Power Vol 12 No 2 pp 22-28

April 1999

[84] T Griffin K Tomsovic D Secrest A Law ldquoPlacement of Dispersed Generation

Systems for Reduced Lossesrdquo Proceedings the 33rd Annual Hawaii International

Conference on Systems Sciences 2000

[85] MH Nehrir C Wang and V Gerez ldquoImpact of Wind Power Distributed

Generation on Distribution Systemsrdquo Proceedings 17th International Conference

on Electricity Distribution (CIRED) May 2003 Barcelona Spain

[86] H L Willis ldquoAnalytical Methods and Rules of Thumb for Modeling

DG-Distribution Interactionrdquo Proceedings 2000 IEEE Power Engineering Society

Summer Meeting Vol 3 pp 1643-1644 July 2000 Seattle WA

[87] JO Kim SW Nam SK Park C Singh ldquoDispersed Generation Planning Using

Improved Hereford Ranch Algorithmrdquo Electric Power Systems Research Elsevier

Vol 47 No 1 pp47-55 Oct 1998

[88] W Kellogg MH Nehrir G Venkataramanan and V Gerez ldquoGeneration Unit

Sizing and Cost Analysis for Stand-Alone Wind Photovoltaic and Hybrid WindPV Systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol13 No 1 pp

70-75 March 1998

[89] J Cahill K Ritland and W Kelly Description of Electric Energy Use in Single

Family Residences in the Pacific Northwest 1986-1992 Office of Energy

Resources Bonneville Power Administration Portland OR December 1992

[810] J Duncan Glover Mulukutla S Sarma ldquoPower System Analysis and Design 3rd

Editionrdquo BrooksCole Thomson Learning Inc 2001

360

[811] R Yokoyama SH Bae T Morita and H Sasaki ldquoMultiobjective Optimal

Generation Dispatch Based on Probability Security Criteriardquo IEEE Transactions

on Power Systems pp 317-324 Vol 3 No 1 Feb 1988

[812] Online httpwwwpowerworldcom

361

CHAPTER 9

CONCLUSIONS

This dissertation is on modeling and control of a hybrid windPVFC alternative

energy system The main part of the dissertation focuses on the modeling of different

energy systems and the corresponding control scheme development Special emphasis is

put on the modeling and control of fuel cell systems

DG system modeling and control are two other aspects of the research presented in

the dissertation A hybrid alternative energy system has great potential for use as a DG

source Analytical methods for optimal placement of DG sources in power systems are

given in the dissertation

The conclusions of the research work reported in this dissertation are summarized

below

(1) Environmentally friendly and sustainable alternative energy systems will play

more important roles in the future electricity supply

(2) Dynamic models have been developed for the following fuel cells (PEMFCs and

SOFCs) variable speed wind energy conversion systems photovoltaic power generation

systems electrolyzers power electronic interfacing devices battery banks and

accessories including gas compressor high-pressure hydrogen storage tank and gas

pressure regulator These dynamic models are suitable for both detailed fast transient and

large time scale performance evaluation studies They can be used to expedite research

processes in related alternative energy areas such as system control and performance

optimization studies

362

(3) Control of grid-connected FC (PEMFC and SOFC) DG systems is investigated

Controller designs for the DCDC converter and 3-phase inverter are given using

linearized small-signal converterinverter models A dq transformed two-loop current

control scheme is used on the inverter to control the real and reactive power delivered

from the fuel cell system to the utility grid The validity of the proposed control schemes

over a large operating range was verified through simulations on switched nonlinear

converterinverter models Simulation results of the case studies show that the real and

reactive power delivered from the fuel cell system to the utility grid can be controlled as

desired while the DC bus voltage is maintained well within its prescribed range The

results also show that the fuel cell system is capable of load-following and can remain

stable under the occurrence of severe electrical faults It is noticed that a two-loop

inverter control scheme has advantage over a voltage only control scheme for the inverter

on fault protection and system stability

(4) A load transient mitigation control strategy is proposed for stand-alone fuel

cell-battery power generation systems The control strategy consists of a current

controller for the DCDC converter and a battery chargingdischarging controller to keep

the battery voltage within a desired range During load transients the fuel cell is

controlled (by the proposed transient mitigation technique) to supply the steady-state

power to the load while the battery will supply the transient power to the load Simulation

studies under different load transients have been carried for both the PEMFC system and

the SOFC system These studies show that the fuel cell current can be controlled as

desired and the battery voltage can be held in the prescribed range The results show that

the proposed load transient mitigation technique works well for both types of fuel cell

363

systems (PEMFC and SOFC) studied

(5) A hybrid windPVFC DG system is proposed in this dissertation Wind and PV

are the primary power sources of the system and the combination of FC and electrolyzer

is used as a backup and long term storage unit The different energy sources in the system

are integrated through an AC link bus The system can be used as test-bed system for

other related studies on hybrid alternative energy systems

(6) Based on the dynamic component models a simulation model for the proposed

hybrid windPVFC energy system has been developed successfully using

MATLABSimulink The overall power management strategy for coordinating the power

flows among the different energy sources is presented in the dissertation Simulation

studies have been carried out to verify the system performance under different scenarios

using practical load profile and real weather data The results show that the overall power

management strategy is effective and the power flows among the different energy sources

and the load demand is balanced successfully

(7) Analytical approaches are presented to determine the optimal location for placing

DG in both radial and networked systems to minimize power losses The proposed

approaches are not iterative algorithms like power flow programs Therefore there is no

convergence problem involved and results could be obtained very quickly A series of

simulation studies were also conducted to verify the validity of the proposed approaches

The results show that the proposed methods work well

364

APPENDICES

365

APPENDIX A

abc-dq0 TRANSFORMATION

366

abc-dq0 Transformation

The abc-dq0 transformation transfers 3-phase variables in abc stationary frame to a

rotating dq0 frame As explained in [462] the transformation can be expressed as

abcdqabcdq VTV 00 = (A1)

Where

=

0

0

V

V

V

V q

d

dq

=

c

b

a

abc

V

V

V

V

+

minus

+

minus

=

2

1

2

1

2

13

2cos

3

2cos)cos(

3

2sin

3

2sin)sin(

3

20

πθ

πθθ

πθ

πθθ

dqabcT θ(0)dξω(ξ)θ

t

0

+= int

θ is the angular position ω is the angular speed and ξ is the dummy variable of

integration For abc variables with constant frequency at 60 Hz and zero initial phase θ

can written as tπθ 120=

In (A1) V can represent voltage current flux linkage or electric charge For

balanced 3-phase AC variables in abc frame the corresponding dq0 components are DC

variables with zero value for 0 component Therefore an abc-dq transformation given in

(A2) can be used in this case

+

minus

+

minus=

3

2cos

3

2cos)cos(

3

2sin

3

2sin)sin(

3

2 π

θπ

θθ

πθ

πθθ

dqabcT (A2)

367

dq0-abc Transformation

The inverses dq0-abc transformation can be expressed as

( ) ( )

+

+

minus

minus== minus

13

π2cos

3

π2sin

13

π2cos

3

π2sin

1cossin

)( 1

00

θθ

θθ

θθ

dqabcabcdq TT (A3)

The corresponding inverses dq-abc transformation is

( ) ( )

+

+

minus

minus=

3

π2cos

3

π2sin

3

π2cos

3

π2sin

cossin

θθ

θθ

θθ

abcdqT (A4)

368

APPENDIX B

SIMULATION DIAGRAMS OF THE HYBRID ENERGY SYSTEM

369

If Wspeed lt3 ms turn the CB OFF

3 C

2 B

1 A

Vabc (pu)

Vd_ref (pu)

Vq_ref (pu)

Enable

dq voltage controller

Enable

power control

generate dq control signal

for voltage controller

3

const

[Windspeed]

Wind speed

WindSpeed

V+

V- Wind Turbine

com

A B C

a b c

WTG CB

Pwtginvmat

To File5

Timer

ON 02s

Vabc

Iabc

A B C

a b c

Three-Phase

V-I Measurement

gt=

Relational

Operator

Multiply

Vabc

A B C

a b c

Measure2

Vabc

Iabc

PQ

Instantaneous P amp Q

[Pwin_inv]

Goto

[qctrl_win_inv]

From3

[dctrl_win_inv]

From2

[Windspeed]

From1

Demux

A B C

A B C

Coupling Inductor

dq_ref (pu)

DC +

DC -

A B C

Averaged model for 3phase inverter

A B C

A B C 005km

AWG ACSR 61

2

WTGCB Ctrl

1=ON 0=OFF

1

Wspeed

(ms)

Figure B1 Sim

ulink m

odel for the wind energy conversion system

370

It is a 1612 array For each unit the power rate is 173W at 1000 Wm^2 irradiancen and 25 C cell temperature

The total power rate is about 30kW under 1000 Wm^2 and 25 C

3 C

2 B

1 A

[pvqctrl]

qctrl

[Irradiance]

irradiance

[pvdctrl]

dctrl

Vabc (pu)

Vd_ref (pu)

Vq_ref (pu)

Enable

dq

controller

-6

const2

0

const1

116

1e-5s+1

Transfer Fcn

To avoid algebraic loop1

Ppv_invmat

To File5

Upvmat

To File4

Tpvmat

To File3

Vabc

Iabc

A B C

a b c

Three-Phase

V-I Measurement

Terminator4

Saturation2

Relay1

Relay

Product3

[Ppv_inv]

Ppv_inv com

A B C

a b c

PV CB

Irradiance

Ipv (A)

Tambient (C)

Upv Tc

Pmax

PV

InOut

PI

Vabc

IabcPQ

P amp Q

Vabc

A B C

a b c

Measure

[Ipv]

Ipv (A)

-K-

Gain1

12 Gain

[Irradiance]

From7

[mpvVdc]

From6

[Irradiance]

From5

[Irradiance]

From4

[pvqctrl]

From3

[Ipv]

From29

[pvdctrl]

From2

[Pepv]

From1

AirTempData

From

Workspace1

sin(u)

Fcn1

cos(u)

Fcn

Demux

Dead Zone

A B C

A B C

Coupling

Inductor

s

-+

CVS

i+

-

CM A

DC_IN+

DC_IN-DC_OUT+

DC_OUT-

Buck DCDC

dq_ref (pu)

DC +

DC -

A B C

Averaged model for 3phase inverter

gt=10

gt= 30Wm2

gt= 300Wm^2

A B C

A B C

1200 km

AWG ACSR 61

0-026

2

PVCB Ctrl

1=ON 0=OFF

1

Irradiance (Wm^2)

Figure B2 Sim

ulink m

odel for the solar energy conversion system

371

1

nH2used (mols)

3 C

2 B

1 A

Vabc (pu)

Vd_ref (pu)

Vq_ref (pu)

Enable

dq

voltage controller

Pdemand (W)

PFC_out (W)

Enable

dctrl

qctrl

power control

generate d q control signal

for voltage controller

v+ -

Vfc

PFC_invmat

To File5

PanodeFCmat

To File4

H2usedmat

To File2

Vfcmat

To File1

com

A B C

a b c

Three-Phase Breaker

Vabc

Iabc

A B C

a b c

Three-Phase

V-I Measurement

Panode (atm) nH2

FC+ FC-

PEMFC

Stack

Vabc

A B C

a b c

Measure2

Vabc

Iabc

PQ

Instantaneous P amp Q

1

Initial value of

the output pressure

[mPFC_inv]

Goto3

[Panode_fc]

Goto1

Pref (atm)

Pstorage (atm)

qo (mols)

Po_ini (atm)

Po (atm)

Gas Pressure Actutator

[Panode_fc]

From2

[mPFC_inv]

From1

1

Enabled always

15

Desired pressure

Demux

DC_IN+

DC_IN-

DC_OUT+

DC_OUT-

DCDC Boost

A B C

A B C

Coupling

Inductor

dq_ref (pu)

DC +

DC -

A B C

Averaged model for 3phase inverter

A B C

A B C

150 km

AWG ACSR 61

3

Pstorage (atm)

2

Pdemand (W)

1

FCCB Ctrl

1=ON 0=OFF

Figure B3 Sim

ulink m

odel for the fuel cell and the gas pressure regulation system

372

1

Ptank (atm)

3C2B1A

1

unity PF

Pava

Pused

elec_rectg

power control

14400

m0

1000

const

H2genmat

To File5

Pavamat

To File3

Pcompmat

To File2

Ptankmat

To File1

Terminator

Switch

n (flow rate)

Pcomp

Polytropic Compressor

n_in

n_out

m0

P (atm)

H2 storage tank

[Pcompressor]

Goto3

[Pcompressor]

From1

[Pdcrect_elec]

From

Tambient (C)

Tcm_in(C)

H2 (mols)

Tc

DC +

DC -

Electrolyzer

50kW 40 stacks in series

Gate (0-1)

PF (01-1)

A B C

DC +

DC-

Controllable Rectifier

Simplified average model

25

Constant2

25

Constant1

2

Pava (W)

1

nH2_FC

Figure B4 Sim

ulink m

odel for the electrolyzer and the gas compression system

373

APPENDIX C

MATLAB PROGRAMS FOR DG OPTIMAL PLACEMENT

374

DG Optimal Program for the IEEE 6-Bus system

Y matrix of the system 1 2 3 4 5 6 Y = [ 278-497j+0005-1j -072+165j 0 0 -042+12j -163+212j -072+165j 145-329j -072+165j 0 0 0 0 -072+165j 145-329j -072+165j 0 0 0 0 -072+165j 145-329j -072+165j 0 -042+12j 0 0 -072+165j 187-450j+0005-1j -072+165j -163+212j 0 0 0 -072+165j 236-377j]

Assume Xd and R of the Generator is R +jX = 0005+j1 Load data in the system corresponding to different buses Demand = [0 4+10i 725+20i 5+125i 0 5+15i] MVA Demand = abs(Demand)

f(i) = Sum(LiPi^2) objective function or f(i) = Sum(LiSi^2) objective function Li is the equivalent length from the DG location to load Pi or Si i is the bus number i=12 N Target find the i which yields the minimum value of f(i) BUSNO=6 fobj = zeros(BUSNO 1) for busno=1BUSNO Z = GetEqImpedance(Y 1 busno) Req = real(Z) fobj(1) = fobj(1) + ReqDemand(busno)^2 end for dg=2BUSNO move dg to different buses Y1 = changeYmatrix(Ydg) connect the bus dg with bus 1 for busno=1BUSNO if the dg location bus no is the same as the load bus no then line

power loss can be set to 0 if busno == dg

Z = 0 elseif busno lt dg Z = GetEqImpedance(Y1 1 busno) else Z = GetEqImpedance(Y1 1 busno-1) end Req = real(Z) fobj(dg) = fobj(dg) + ReqDemand(busno)^2 end end fobj

375

DG Optimal Program for the IEEE 30-Bus system

Assume Yg =1(0005+j11) for Synchronous Generator

Yc = 1(0008+j18) for Synchronous Condenser (Refer to Glovers Book) Generating Y matrix (imported from PowerWorld) j = sqrt(-1) Yg = 1(0005+j11) Yc = 1(0008+j18) Ybus = zeros(3030) Ybus( 1 1) = 67655+ j( -212316) + Yg Ybus( 1 2) = -52246+ j( 156467) Ybus( 1 3) = -15409+ j( 56317) Ybus( 2 1) = -52246+ j( 156467) Ybus( 2 2) = 97523+ j( -306487) + Yg Ybus( 2 4) = -17055+ j( 51974) Ybus( 2 5) = -11360+ j( 47725) Ybus( 2 6) = -16861+ j( 51165) Ybus( 3 1) = -15409+ j( 56317) Ybus( 3 3) = 97363+ j( -291379) Ybus( 3 4) = -81954+ j( 235309) Ybus( 4 2) = -17055+ j( 51974) Ybus( 4 3) = -81954+ j( 235309) Ybus( 4 4) = 163141+ j( -549186) Ybus( 4 6) = -64131+ j( 223112) Ybus( 4 12) = -00000+ j( 39062) Ybus( 5 2) = -11360+ j( 47725) Ybus( 5 5) = 40900+ j( -121906) + Yc Ybus( 5 7) = -29540+ j( 74493) Ybus( 6 2) = -16861+ j( 51165) Ybus( 6 4) = -64131+ j( 223112) Ybus( 6 6) = 223416+ j( -824934) Ybus( 6 7) = -35902+ j( 110261) Ybus( 6 8) = -62893+ j( 220126) Ybus( 6 9) = -00000+ j( 48077) Ybus( 6 10) = -00000+ j( 17986) Ybus( 6 28) = -43628+ j( 154636) Ybus( 7 5) = -29540+ j( 74493) Ybus( 7 6) = -35902+ j( 110261) Ybus( 7 7) = 65442+ j( -184567) Ybus( 8 6) = -62893+ j( 220126) Ybus( 8 8) = 77333+ j( -265275) + Yc Ybus( 8 28) = -14440+ j( 45408) Ybus( 9 6) = -00000+ j( 48077) Ybus( 9 9) = 00000+ j( -187063) Ybus( 9 10) = -00000+ j( 90909) Ybus( 9 11) = -00000+ j( 48077) Ybus( 10 6) = -00000+ j( 17986) Ybus( 10 9) = -00000+ j( 90909) Ybus( 10 10) = 134621+ j( -415738)

376

Ybus( 10 17) = -39560+ j( 103174) Ybus( 10 20) = -17848+ j( 39854) Ybus( 10 21) = -51019+ j( 109807) Ybus( 10 22) = -26193+ j( 54008) Ybus( 11 9) = -00000+ j( 48077) Ybus( 11 11) = 00000+ j( -48077) + Yc Ybus( 12 4) = -00000+ j( 39062) Ybus( 12 12) = 65740+ j( -244242) Ybus( 12 13) = -00000+ j( 71429) Ybus( 12 14) = -15266+ j( 31734) Ybus( 12 15) = -30954+ j( 60973) Ybus( 12 16) = -19520+ j( 41044) Ybus( 13 12) = -00000+ j( 71429) Ybus( 13 13) = 00000+ j( -71429) + Yc Ybus( 14 12) = -15266+ j( 31734) Ybus( 14 14) = 40175+ j( -54243) Ybus( 14 15) = -24910+ j( 22509) Ybus( 15 12) = -30954+ j( 60973) Ybus( 15 14) = -24910+ j( 22509) Ybus( 15 15) = 93655+ j( -160116) Ybus( 15 18) = -18108+ j( 36874) Ybus( 15 23) = -19683+ j( 39761) Ybus( 16 12) = -19520+ j( 41044) Ybus( 16 16) = 32596+ j( -89257) Ybus( 16 17) = -13076+ j( 48213) Ybus( 17 10) = -39560+ j( 103174) Ybus( 17 16) = -13076+ j( 48213) Ybus( 17 17) = 52637+ j( -151388) Ybus( 18 15) = -18108+ j( 36874) Ybus( 18 18) = 48865+ j( -99062) Ybus( 18 19) = -30757+ j( 62188) Ybus( 19 18) = -30757+ j( 62188) Ybus( 19 19) = 89580+ j( -179835) Ybus( 19 20) = -58824+ j( 117647) Ybus( 20 10) = -17848+ j( 39854) Ybus( 20 19) = -58824+ j( 117647) Ybus( 20 20) = 76672+ j( -157501) Ybus( 21 10) = -51019+ j( 109807) Ybus( 21 21) = 218765+ j( -451084) Ybus( 21 22) = -167746+ j( 341277) Ybus( 22 10) = -26193+ j( 54008) Ybus( 22 21) = -167746+ j( 341277) Ybus( 22 22) = 219345+ j( -434829) Ybus( 22 24) = -25405+ j( 39544) Ybus( 23 15) = -19683+ j( 39761) Ybus( 23 23) = 34298+ j( -69653) Ybus( 23 24) = -14614+ j( 29892) Ybus( 24 22) = -25405+ j( 39544) Ybus( 24 23) = -14614+ j( 29892) Ybus( 24 24) = 53118+ j( -92313) Ybus( 24 25) = -13099+ j( 22876) Ybus( 25 24) = -13099+ j( 22876) Ybus( 25 25) = 44957+ j( -78650) Ybus( 25 26) = -12165+ j( 18171) Ybus( 25 27) = -19693+ j( 37602)

377

Ybus( 26 25) = -12165+ j( 18171) Ybus( 26 26) = 12165+ j( -18171) Ybus( 27 25) = -19693+ j( 37602) Ybus( 27 27) = 36523+ j( -94604) Ybus( 27 28) = -00000+ j( 25253) Ybus( 27 29) = -09955+ j( 18810) Ybus( 27 30) = -06875+ j( 12940) Ybus( 28 6) = -43628+ j( 154636) Ybus( 28 8) = -14440+ j( 45408) Ybus( 28 27) = -00000+ j( 25253) Ybus( 28 28) = 58068+ j( -225016) Ybus( 29 27) = -09955+ j( 18810) Ybus( 29 29) = 19076+ j( -36044) Ybus( 29 30) = -09121+ j( 17234) Ybus( 30 27) = -06875+ j( 12940) Ybus( 30 29) = -09121+ j( 17234) Ybus( 30 30) = 15995+ j( -30173) BUSNO=30 Load data in the system corresponding to different buses Demand = zeros(1BUSNO) MVA Demand(1)= 00 Demand(2)= 00 Demand(3)= 24 + j12 Demand(4)= 76 + j16 Demand(5)= 942 + j190 Demand(6)= 00 Demand(7)= 228 + j109 Demand(8)= 300 + j300 Demand(9)= 00 Demand(10)= 58 + j20 Demand(11)= 00 Demand(12)= 112 + j75 Demand(13)= 00 Demand(14)= 62 + j16 Demand(15)= 82 + j25 Demand(16)= 35 + j18 Demand(17)= 90 + j58 Demand(18)= 32 + j09 Demand(19)= 95 + j34 Demand(20)= 22 + j07 Demand(21)= 175 + j112 Demand(22)= 00 Demand(23)= 32 + j16 Demand(24)= 87 + j67 Demand(25)= 00 Demand(26)= 35 + j23 Demand(27)= 00 Demand(28)= 00 Demand(29)= 24 + j09 Demand(30)= 106 + j19

378

Demand = abs(Demand) MVA Demand = Demand10 f(i) = Sum(LiPi^2) objective function or f(i) = Sum(LiSi^2) objective function Li is the equivalent length from the DG loaction to load Pi or Si i is thebus number i=12 N Target find the i which yields the minimum value of f(i) BUSNO=30 fobj = zeros(BUSNO 1) for busno=1BUSNO Z = GetEqImpedance(Ybus 1 busno) Req = real(Z) fobj(1) = fobj(1) + ReqDemand(busno)^2 end for dg=2BUSNO move dg to different buses Y1 = changeYmatrix(Ybusdg) connect the bus dg with bus 1 for busno=1BUSNO if busno == dg

if the dg location bus no is the same as the load bus no then line

power loss can be set to 0 Z = 0 elseif busno lt dg Z = GetEqImpedance(Y1 1 busno) else Z = GetEqImpedance(Y1 1 busno-1) end Req = real(Z) fobj(dg) = fobj(dg) + ReqDemand(busno)^2 end end fobj

copyCOPYRIGHT

by

Caisheng Wang

2006

All Rights Reserved

ii

APPROVAL

of a dissertation submitted by

Caisheng Wang

This dissertation has been read by each member of the thesis committee and has been found to be satisfactory regarding content English usage format citations bibliographic style and consistency and is ready for submission to the Division of Graduate Education

Dr M Hashem Nehrir

Approved for the Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering

Dr James N Peterson

Approved for the Division of Graduate Education

Dr Joseph J Fedock

iii

STATEMENT OF PERMISSION TO USE In presenting this dissertation in partial fulfillment of the requirements for a doctoral degree at Montana State University I agree that the Library shall make it available to borrowers under rules of the Library I further agree that copying of this dissertation is allowable only for scholarly purposes consistent with ldquofair userdquo as prescribed in the US Copyright Law Requests for extensive copying or reproduction of this dissertation should be referred to ProQuest Information and Learning 300 North Zeeb Road Ann Arbor Michigan 48106 to whom I have granted ldquothe exclusive right to reproduce and distribute my dissertation in and from microform along with the non-exclusive right to reproduce and distribute my abstract in any format in whole or in partrdquo

Caisheng Wang July 2006

iv

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

I am grateful to acknowledge and thank all of those who assisted me in my graduate

program at Montana State University First I would like to thank Dr Hashem Nehrir my

academic advisor here at MSU His guidance support patience and personal time

throughout my years as a graduate student have been truly appreciated Special thanks are

given to my other graduate committee members Dr Steven Shaw Dr Don Pierre Dr

Hongwei Gao Dr Robert Gunderson and Dr Gary Bogar Special thanks also go to Dr

Hong Mao for his time and clarifying conversations on design and control of power

electronic devices Mr Sreedhar Gudarsquos help in the model developing for wind energy

conversion systems and Mr Marc Kepplerrsquos help in setting up the experimental circuit

for PEM fuel cell model validation are acknowledged Most importantly I would like to

thank my family and friends for their support throughout all the years

v

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF FIGURES xii

LIST OF TABLES xi

Abstract xii

1 INTRODUCTION 1

World Energy Demands 1

World and US Electricity Demands amp Generation 2 Conventional Thermal Electric Power Generation 6 Coal 6 Natural Gas 6 Oil 7

Nuclear Power 9 Hydroelectric Power 9

Why AlternativeRenewable Energy 10

Recent Progress in AlternativeRenewable Energy Technologies 14 Wind Energy 14 Photovoltaic Energy 16 Fuel Cells 18 Other Renewable Energy Sources 20 Distributed Generation Applications 23

Need for the Research 26

Scope of the Study 28

Organization of the Dissertation 28

REFERENCES 30

2 FUNDAMENTALS OF ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SYSTEMS 33

Energy Forms 33 Definition of Energy 33 Mechanical Energy 34 Chemical Energy 35 Electrical and Electromagnetic Energy 35 Thermal Energy 36 Nuclear Energy 37

Fundamentals of Thermodynamics 37 The First Law of Thermodynamics 37 The Heat Engine and Carnot Cycle 39 The Second Law of Thermodynamics 41

vi

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

Heat Transfer 42 Heat Transfer by Conduction 42 Heat Transfer by Convection 42 Heat Transfer by Radiation 43

Fundamentals of Electrochemical Processes 43 The Gibbs Free Energy 43 Energy Balance in Chemical Reactions 44 The Nernst Equation 47

Fundamentals of Alternative Energy Systems 48 Wind Energy System 49 Energy in Wind 49 Power Extracted from Wind 49 Tip Speed Ratio 51 Wind Energy Conversion System 52 Constant Speed and Variable Speed Wind Energy Conversion Systems 53 Wind Turbine Output Power vs Wind Speed 54

Photovoltaic Energy System 57 Fuel Cells 59 PEMFC 61 SOFC 63 MCFC 65

Electrolyzer 66

Summary 69

REFERENCES 70

3 MULTI-SOURCE ALTERNATIVE ENERGY DISTRIBUTED GENERATION SYSTEM 72

Introduction 72

AC Coupling vs DC Coupling 75

Stand-alone vs Grid-connected Systems 79

The Proposed System Configuration 79

System Unit Sizing 80

REFERENCES 85

4 COMPONENT MODELING FOR THE HYBRID ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SYSTEM 89

Dynamic Models and Model Validation for PEMFC 89 Introduction 89 Dynamic Model Development 91

vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

Gas Diffusion in the Electrodes 92 Material Conservation Equations 96 Fuel Cell Output Voltage 97 Double-Layer Charging Effect 101 Energy Balance of the Thermodynamics 102

Dynamic Model Built in MatlabSimulink 104 Equivalent Electrical Model in Pspice 105 Internal Potential E 106 Circuit for Activation Loss 107 Circuits for Ohmic and Concentration Voltage Drops 108 Equivalent Capacitor of Double-layer Charging Effect 109 Thermodynamic Block 109

Model Validation110 Experimental Setup 111 Steady-State Characteristics 113 Temperature Response115 Transient Performance116

Dynamic Models for SOFC118 Introduction118 Dynamic Model Development 119 Effective Partial Pressures 120 Material Conservation Equations 124 Fuel Cell Output Voltage 126 Energy Balance of the Thermodynamics 131 Dynamic SOFC Model Implementation 135

Model Responses under Constant Fuel Flow Operation 137 Steady-State Characteristics 137 Dynamic Response 140

Constant Fuel Utilization Operation 144 Steady-state Characteristics 145 Dynamic Responses 147

Wind Energy Conversion System 150 Introduction 150 System Configuration 151

Dynamic Model for Variable Speed Wind Turbine 152 Wind Turbine Characteristics 152 Pitch Angle Controller 155 Variable-speed Wind Turbine Model 157

Dynamic Model for SEIG 157 Steady-state Model 157 Self-excitation Process 160 Dynamic Model of SEIG in dq Representations 161

viii

Responses of the Model for the Variable Speed WECS 165 Wind Turbine Output Power Characteristic 165 Process of Self-excitation in SEIG 166 Model Responses under Wind Speed Changes 169

Solar Energy Conversion System 172 Modeling for PV CellModule 172 Light Current 173 Saturation Current 174 Calculation of α 174 Series Resistance 175 Thermal Model of PV 175

PV Model Development in MATLABSimulink 176 Model Performance 177 Temperature Effect on the Model Performance 179

Maximum Power Point Tracking Control 180 Current-Based Maximum Power Point Tracking 180 Control Scheme 182 Simulation Results 183

Electrolyzer 185 U-I Characteristic 185 Hydrogen Production Rate 186 Thermal Model 187 Electrolyzer Model Implementation in MATLABSimulink 189 Electrolyzer Model Performance 191

Power Electronic Interfacing Circuits 193 ACDC Rectifiers 193 Simplified Model for Controllable Rectifiers 197

DCDC Converters 200 Circuit Topologies 200 State-space Models Based on the State-space Averaging Technique 202 Averaged Models for DCDC Converters 205

DCAC Inverters 208 Circuit Topology 208 State-Space Model 208 dq Representation of the State-Space Model 212 Ideal Model for Three-phase VSI 214

Battery Model 217

Models for Accessories 218 Gas Compressor 218 High Pressure H2 Storage Tank 219 Gas Pressure Regulator 220

Summary 223

ix

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

REFERENCES 224

5 CONTROL OF GRID-CONNECTED FUEL CELL POWER GENERATION SYSTEMS 231

Introduction 231

System Description 232

Controller Designs for Power Electronic Devices 238 Controller Design for the Boost DCDC Converter 238 Controller Design for the 3-Phase VSI 241 Current Control Loop 241 Voltage Control Loop 245 Control of Power Flow 247 Overall Power Control System for the Inverter 249

Simulation Results 250 Desired P and Q Delivered to the Grid Heavy Loading 251 PEMFC DG 251 SOFC DG 254

Desired P Delivered to the Grid Q Consumed from the Grid Light Loading 256 PEMFC DG 256 SOFC DG 258

Load-Following Analysis 260 Fixed Grid Power 260 Fixed FC Power 261

Fault Analysis 263

Summary 266

REFERENCES 268

6 CONTROL OF STAND-ALONE FUEL CELL POWER GENERATION SYSTEMS 271

Introduction 271

System Description and Control Strategy 272 Load Mitigation Control 272 Battery ChargingDischarging Controller 276 Filter Design 277

Simulation Results 279 Load Transients 279 DC Load Transients 280 AC Load Transients 280

Load mitigation 282

x

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

PEMFC System 282 SOFC System 286

Battery ChargingDischarging 289

Summary 292

REFERENCES 293

7 CONTROL SCHEMES AND SIMULATION RESULTS FOR THE PROPOSED HYBRID WINDPVFC SYSTEM 295

Introduction 295

System Control Strategy 295 Overall Power Management Strategy 296 AC Bus Voltage Regulator 299 Electrolyzer Controller 300

Simulation Results under Different Scenarios 301 Winter Scenario 303 Weather Data 303 Simulation Results 305

Summer Scenario 314 Weather Data 314 Simulation Results 316

Summary 330

REFERENCES 331

8 OPTIMAL PLACEMENT OF DISTRIBUTED GENERATION SOURCES IN POWER SYSTEMS 332

Introduction 332

Optimal Placement of DG on a Radial Feeder 333 Theoretical Analysis 334 Procedure to Find the Optimal Location of DG on a Radial Feeder 336 Case Studies with Time Invariant Loads and DGs 338 Case Study with Time Varying Load and DG 340

Optimal Placement of DG in Networked Systems 341

Simulation Results 345 Radial Feeder with Time Invariant Loads and DG 346 Radial Feeder with Time Varying Loads and DG 348 Networked Systems 351

Summary 358

xi

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

REFERENCES 359

9 CONCLUSIONS 361

APPENDICES 364

APPENDIX A abc-dq0 TRANSFORMATION 365 abc-dq0 Transformation 366 dq0-abc Transformation 367

APPENDIX B SIMULATION DIAGRAMS OF THE HYBRID ENERGY SYSTEM 368

APPENDIX C MATLAB PROGRAMS FOR DG OPTIMAL PLACEMENT 373 DG Optimal Program for the IEEE 6-Bus system 374 DG Optimal Program for the IEEE 30-Bus system 375

xii

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure Page

11 World Energy Consumption 1970-2025 2

12 World and US Electricity Demands 1980-2025 4

13 World Electricity Generating Capacity 1980-2025 5

14 The world and US net electricity generation by type in 2002 5

15 Fuel shares of world electricity generation 2002-2025 8

16 US electricity generation by fuel types 8

17 World crude oil prices1978-2006 13

18 The world and the US wind power cumulative capacity 16

19 Cumulative Installed PV capacity in IEA PVPS countries 18

110 Cumulative installed FC units world-wide 1990-2005 19

21 Block diagram of an ideal heat engine 39

22 Carnot cycle (a) P-V (pressure-volume) diagram 40

(b) T-S (temperature-entropy) diagram 40

23 Theoretical rotor efficiency vs v0v ratio 51

24 Block diagram of a typical wind energy conversion system 52

25 Constant and variable speed wind energy conversion systems 55

26 Typical curves for a constant speed stall controlled (dotted)

and variable speed pitch controlled (solid) wind turbine 56

27 Schematic block diagram of a PV cell 58

28 PV Cell module and array 59

29 Schematic diagram of a PEMFC 61

210 V-I characteristic of a 500W PEMFC stack 62

211 Schematic diagram of a SOFC 63

212 V-I characteristic of a 5kW SOFC stack 64

213 Schematic diagram of a MCFC 65

214 Progress in generic performance of MCFCs on reformate gas and air 66

215 Schematic diagram of an alkaline electrolyzer 68

31 Hybrid energy system integration DC coupling 75

xiii

Figure Page

32 Hybrid energy system integration (a) PFAC coupling (b) HFAC coupling 76

33 System configuration of the proposed multi-source alternative

hybrid energy system (coupling inductors are not shown in the figure) 81

34 Hourly average demand of a typical residence

in the Pacific Northwest area 82

41 Schematic diagram of a PEMFC and voltage drops across it 93

42 Equivalent circuit of the double-layer charging effect inside a PEMFC 101

43 Diagram of building a dynamic model of PEMFC in SIMULINK 105

44 Diagram of building an electrical model of PEMFC in Pspice 106

45 Electrical circuit for internal potential E 107

46 Electrical circuit for activation loss 107

47 Electrical circuit for ohmic voltage drop 108

48 Electrical circuit for concentration voltage drop 109

49 Equivalent circuit of thermodynamic property inside PEMFC 110

410 Experimental configuration on the SR-12 PEMFC stack 112

411 V-I characteristics of SR-12 and models114

412 P-I characteristics of SR-12 and models 114

413 Temperature responses of the SR 12 stack and models 115

414 Transient responses of the models in short time range 117

415 Transient responses of the models in long time range 117

416 Schematic diagram of a solid oxide fuel cell 121

417 Equivalent electrical circuit of the double-layer charging effect inside a SOFC 130

418 Heat transfer inside a tubular solid oxide fuel cell 132

419 Diagram of building a dynamic model of SOFC in SIMULINK 137

420 V-I characteristics of the SOFC model at different temperatures 138

421 Three voltage drops at different temperatures 139

422 P-I characteristics of the SOFC model at different temperatures 140

423 Model dynamic responses with different equivalent

capacitance values for double-layer charging effect in small time scale 141

xiv

Figure Page

424 Model dynamic responses under different

operating pressures in medium time scale 142

425 Model dynamic responses under different

inlet temperatures in large time scale 143

426 Model temperature responses 144

427 Constant utilization control 145

428 V-I and P-I characteristics of the SOFC model

under constant fuel utilization and constant fuel flow operating modes 146

429 H2 input for the constant utilization and constant flow operating modes 147

430 Model dynamic responses under different operating pressures

in medium time scale with constant utilization operating mode 149

431 System block diagram of the WECS 152

432 Cp-λ characteristics at different pitch angles (θ) 154

433 Variable speed pitch controlled wind turbine operation regions 155

434 Pitch angle controller 156

435 Simulation model of the variable speed pitch-regulated wind turbine 156

436 Equivalent T circuit of self-excited induction generator with R-L Load 159

437 Determination of stable operation of SEIG 161

438 dq representation of a SEIG (All values are referred to stator) 162

439 Wind turbine output power characteristic 166

440 A successful self excitation process 167

441 Voltage fails to build up 167

442 Variation of magnetizing current Im 168

443 Variation of magnetizing inductance Lm 168

444 Wind speed variations used for simulation study 169

445 Output power of the WECS model under wind speed changes 169

446 Wind turbine rotor speed 170

447 Pitch angle controller response to the wind changes 171

448 Variation of power coefficient Cp 171

xv

Figure Page

449 One-diode equivalent circuit model for a PV cell

(a) Five parameters model (b) Simplified four parameters model 172

450 Block diagram of the PV model built in MATLABSimulink 176

451 I-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different irradiances 178

452 P-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different irradiances 178

453 I-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different temperatures 179

454 P-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different temperatures 179

455 Linear relationship between Isc and Imp under different solar irradiances 181

456 Ump vs Uoc curve under different solar irradiances 181

457 CMPPT control scheme 182

458 Imp and Ipv curves under the CMPPT control 183

459 PV output power and the maximum power curves 184

460 Block diagram of the electrolyzer model built in MATLABSimulink 189

461 U-I characteristics of the electrolyzer model under different temperatures 191

462 Temperature response of the model 192

463 Three-phase full diode bridge rectifier 194

464 Three-phase 12-diode bridge rectifier with a Y-Y and a Y-∆ transformer 195

465 A 6-pulse thyristor rectifier 197

466 Block diagram of the simplified model for 3-phase controllable rectifiers 198

467 DC output voltages of the different rectifier models 199

468 AC side phase current of the different rectifier models 199

469 Boost DCDC converter 201

470 Buck DCDC converter 201

471 Averaged model for boost DCDC converters 205

472 Simulation result of the averaged model for boost DCDC converter 206

473 Simulation result of the detailed model for boost DCDC converter 206

474 Averaged model for buck DCDC converters 207

475 Simulation result of the averaged model for buck DCDC converter 207

476 Simulation result of the detailed model for buck DCDC converter 208

xvi

Figure Page

477 3-phase DCAC voltage source inverter 209

478 Ideal model for three-phase VSI 215

479 AC phase output voltages of the ideal VSI model and the switched VSI model216

480 Output power of the ideal VSI model and the switched VSI model 216

481 Equivalent circuit model for battery reported in [481] 217

482 Simplified circuit model for lead-acid batteries 218

483 Pressured H2 storage tank 219

484 Gas pressure regulator 221

485 Performance of the model for gas pressure regulators 222

51 Block diagram of a fuel cell distributed generation system 233

52 Block diagram of the control loop for the boost DCDC converter 239

53 Bode plot of the control loop of the boost DCDC converter 240

54 Block diagram of the current control loop of the inverter 242

55 Bode plot of the current control loop 244

56 Unit step response of the current control loop and its approximation 245

57 Block diagram of the voltage control loop of the inverter 245

58 Bode plot of the voltage control loop 247

59 Power flow between a voltage source and utility grid 247

510 Block diagram of the overall power control system of the inverter 249

511 PEMFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under heavy loading 252

512 PEMFC DG dq values of the inverter output voltage under heavy load 252

513 PEMFC DG Output voltage and current of

each fuel cell array under heavy load 253

514 PEMFC DG DC bus voltage waveform under heavy load 254

515 SOFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under heavy loading 254

516 SOFC DG Output voltage and current of each FC array under heavy load 255

517 SOFC DG DC bus voltage under heavy loading 255

518 PEMFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid light loading 257

519 PEMFC DG Output voltage and current of

xvii

Figure Page

each fuel cell array under light loading 257

520 SOFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under light loading 259

521 SOFC DG Output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under light load 259

522 System for the PEMFC DG load-following study 261

523 Power curves of the load-following study with fixed grid power 262

524 System for the PEMFC DG load-following study 262

525 Power curves of the load-following study with fixed FC power 263

526 Faulted fuel cell DG system 264

527 Faulted PEMFC DG Power flow of the transmission line 265

528 Faulted PEMFC DG Fuel cell output powers for the fault studies 266

61 Schematic diagram of a FC-battery hybrid system

with load transient mitigation control 274

62 Schematic diagram of the battery chargingdischarging controller 275

63 Example of the responses of different filters to a load transient 278

64 Load transient of starting a 25HP and a 5kW 220V DC motor 280

65 AC load transient used on PEMFC-battery system 282

66 Reference signal (Iref) for the current controller battery current (ib)

and converter output current (idd_out) under the load transient for

PEMFC shown in Figure 64 284

67 The PEMFC output current and voltage responses to the

DC load transient shown in Figure 64 284

68 PEMFC The control reference signal (Iref) and battery current (ib)

under the AC load transient shown in Figure 65 285

69 The PEMFC output current and voltage responses

to the AC load transient shown in Figure 65 286

610 Reference signal (Iref) for the current controller the battery current (ib)

and the converter output current (idd_out) under the load transient

for SOFC shown in Figure 64 287

611 SOFC output current and voltage responses

xviii

Figure Page

to the DC load transient shown in Figure 64 287

612 Control reference signal (Iref) and battery current (ib)

under the AC load transient 288

613 The SOFC output current and voltage responses to the AC load transient 288

614 Battery voltage and extra current reference (Iref2) curves

when the battery is being charged 290

615 The load transient the overall current control reference signal (Iref)

the low-pass filter output signal (Iref1) and the corresponding

converter output current (idd_out) when the battery is being charged 291

71 Simulation model for the proposed

hybrid alternative energy system in MATLABSimulink 297

72 Block diagram of the overall control scheme for

the proposed hybrid alternative energy system 298

73 Block diagram of the AC voltage regulator 299

74 Block diagram of the electrolyzer controller 300

75 Load demand profile over 24 hours for the system simulation study 302

76 Wind speed data for the winter scenario simulation study 303

77 Solar irradiance data for the winter scenario simulation study 304

78 Air temperature data for the winter scenario simulation study 304

79 Wind power of the winter scenario study 305

710 Pitch angle of the wind turbine of the winter scenario study 306

711 Rotor speed of the induction generator of the winter scenario study 306

712 PV power for the winter scenario 308

713 Current difference between the actual output current and

the reference current for the maximum power point of the winter scenario 308

714 The PV temperature response over the simulation period for

the winter scenario 309

715 Power available for H2 generation of the winter scenario 309

716 H2 generation rate of the winter scenario study 310

xix

Figure Page

717 Electrolyzer voltage and current for the winter scenario study 310

718 Power shortage over the simulation period of the winter scenario study 311

719 Power supplied by the FC of the winter scenario study 312

720 H2 consumption rate of the winter scenario study 312

721 The pressure tank over the 24 hour of the winter scenario study 313

722 The battery power over the simulation period for the winter scenario 314

723 Corrected wind speed data for the summer scenario simulation study 315

724 Irradiance data for the summer scenario simulation study 315

725 Air temperature data for the summer scenario simulation study 316

726 Wind power generated for the summer scenario study 317

727 Rotor speed of the induction generator for the summer scenario study 317

728 PV power generated for the winter scenario study 318

729 The PV and air temperature over the simulation period for

the winter scenario study 319

730 Power available for H2 generation for the summer scenario study 320

731 H2 generation rate for the summer scenario study 320

732 Electrolyzer voltage and current for the summer scenario study 321

733 Power shortage over the simulation period for the summer scenario study 322

734 Power supplied by the FC over the simulation period for

the summer scenario study 322

735 H2 consumption rate for the summer scenario study 323

736 The H2 tank pressure over the 24 hour for the summer scenario study 323

737 The battery power over the simulation period for the summer scenario 324

738 Wind speed data for the simulation study with continuous

weather data and load demand 325

739 Solar irradiance data for the simulation study with

continuous weather data and load demand 325

740 Air temperature for the simulation study with

continuous weather data and load demand 326

xx

Figure Page

741 Wind power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario 327

742 PV power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario 327

743 Power available for H2 generation for the

continuous weather data and load demand scenario 328

744 FC output power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario 328

745 Battery power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario 329

81 A feeder with distributed loads along the line 334

82 Procedure for finding optimal place for a DG source in a radial feeder 338

83 A networked power system 342

84 Flow chart of The theoretical procedure to find the

optimal bus to place DG in a networked system 346

85 A radial feeder with uniformly distributed loads 347

86 Annual daily average output power profile of a 1-MW wind-DG 349

87 Daily average demand of a typical house 350

88 Power losses of the radial feeder with the wind-DG at different buses 350

89 6-bus networked power system studied 351

810 Power losses of the system in Figure 89 with a 5MW DG 352

811 Values of the objective function of the system in Figure 89 353

812 IEEE 30-bus test system 354

813 Power losses of the IEEE 30-bus test system with a 15MW DG 354

814 Values of the objective function of the IEEE 30-bus system 355

815 Power losses of the subset system in Figure 812 with a 5MW DG 356

816 Values of the objective function of the subset system in Figure 812 356

B1 Simulink model for the wind energy conversion system 369

B2 Simulink model for the solar energy conversion system 370

B3 Simulink model for the fuel cell and the gas pressure regulation system 371

B4 Simulink model for the electrolyzer and the gas compression system 372

xi

LIST OF TABLES

Table Page 11 Current Status and the DOE Targets for

PEMFC Stack in Stationary Applications 21

12 Current status and the SECA targets for 3-10 kW

SOFC module in stationary applications 22

13 Technologies for Distributed Generation Systems 25

21 Standard thermodynamic properties (enthalpy entropy and Gibbs energy) 46

31 Comparison among Different Integration Schemes 78

32 Component Parameters of the Proposed Hybrid Energy System 84

41 Analogies between Thermodynamic and Electrical Quantities 110

42 Specifications of SR-12 111

43 Electrical Model Parameter Values for SR-12 Stack 112

44 Operating Conditions for the Model Dynamic Response Studies 141

45 Parameter values for C1-C5 153

46 SEIG Model Parameters 165

47 The PV Model Parameters 177

48 The Electrolyzer Model Parameters 190

49 Constants of Beattie-Bridgeman Equation of State for H2 220

51 Configuration Parameters of the Proposed System 236

52 System Parameters of the Boost DCDC Converter 240

53 Parameters of the Current Control Loop the Inverter 243

54 Parameters of the Voltage Control Loop the Inverter 246

61 Parameters of the DCDC Converter 275

62 Parameters of the Battery Model 276

71 Weather Station information at

Deer Lodge Montana AgriMet Station (DRLM) 302

81 Theoretical Analysis Results of Case Studies

with Time Invariant Loads and DGs 339

82 Parameters of the System in Figure 85 347

xii

83 Simulation Results of Case Studies with Time Invariant Loads and DG 348

84 Parameters of the System in Figure 89 352

85 Bus Data of the IEEE 30-Bus Test System 357

xii

Abstract

Due to ever increasing energy consumption rising public awareness of environmental protection and steady progress in power deregulation alternative (ie renewable and fuel cell based) distributed generation (DG) systems have attracted increased interest Wind and photovoltaic (PV) power generation are two of the most promising renewable energy technologies Fuel cell (FC) systems also show great potential in DG applications of the future due to their fast technology development and many merits they have such as high efficiency zero or low emission (of pollutant gases) and flexible modular structure

The modeling and control of a hybrid windPVFC DG system is addressed in this

dissertation Different energy sources in the system are integrated through an AC bus Dynamic models for the main system components namely wind energy conversion system (WECS) PV energy conversion system (PVECS) fuel cell electrolyzer power electronic interfacing circuits battery hydrogen storage tank gas compressor and gas pressure regulator are developed Two types of fuel cells have been modeled in this dissertation proton exchange membrane fuel cell (PEMFC) and solid oxide fuel cell (SOFC) Power control of a grid-connected FC system as well as load mitigation control of a stand-alone FC system are investigated The pitch angle control for WECS the maximum power point tracking (MPPT) control for PVECS and the control for electrolyzer and power electronic devices are also addressed in the dissertation

Based on the dynamic component models a simulation model for the proposed hybrid

energy system has been developed using MATLABSimulink The overall power management strategy for coordinating the power flows among the different energy sources is presented in the dissertation Simulation studies have been carried out to verify the system performance under different scenarios using a practical load profile and real weather data The results show that the overall power management strategy is effective and the power flows among the different energy sources and the load demand is balanced successfully

The DGrsquos impacts on the existing power system are also investigated in this

dissertation Analytical methods for finding optimal sites to deploy DG sources in power systems are presented and verified with simulation studies

1

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

Energy is essential to everyonersquos life no matter when and where they are This is

especially true in this new century where people keep pursuing higher quality of life

Among different types of energy electric energy is one of the most important that people

need everyday In this chapter an overview is given on the world energy demand

electricity consumption and their development trend in the near future The electric power

generation technologies based on different energy sources are also reviewed in the

chapter Finally the need for this research work is addressed and the scope of the research

is also defined

World Energy Demands

The world energy consumption is expected to grow about 57 in the next two

decades [11] Figure 11 shows the strong growth of the global energy demand in the

past three decades and its projection over the next two decades The world energy

consumption by fuel type in 2002 is also shown in the figure It is clear that a large part

of the total energy is provided by fossil fuels (about 86 in 2002) The future of the

global economy growth is highly dependent on whether the ever-increasing energy

demand can be met

Fossil fuels are not evenly distributed around the world and regional or global

conflicts may arise from energy crisis if our economy is still heavily dependent on them

Moreover during the process of generating and using electrical energy with todayrsquos

2

conventional technologies the global environment has already been significantly affected

and the environment of some regions has been damaged severely Therefore it is a big

challenge for the whole world to figure out how to generate the needed amount of energy

and the types of energy sources

207243

285310

348366

412

504

553

598

645

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2002 2010 2015 2020 2025

Quadrillion Btu

History Projections Nuclear

7

Other

8

Coal

24

Oil

38

Natural

Gas

23

Figure 11 World Energy Consumption 1970-2025 [11]-[13]

World and US Electricity Demands amp Generation

The world electric energy consumption is expected to increase by more than 50 by

2025 [11]-[13] shown in Figure 12 About 24 of the world total electricity demand in

2003 is consumed by US (Figure 12) and it is anticipated to grow 44 in the first

quarter of the new century [11]-[13] Moreover the electricity demand from emerging

economic regions such as China and India is increasing even faster

3

To meet the future global electricity demand an extensive expansion of installed

generating capacity is necessary Worldwide installed electricity generating capacity is

expected to increase from 3626 GW (gigawatts) in 2003 to 5495 GW in 2025 (Figure

13) at a 22-percent average annual growth rate [11]-[14]

The percentage of US electricity generating capacity over the total world generating

capacity is declining It drops from around 25 in 2003 to about 20 in 2025 (Figure 13)

according to the estimation of Energy Information Administration (EIA) Nevertheless

the electricity generation capacity of US is still expected to grow about 38 from 2000

to 2025 [11] By comparing the electricity consumption data in Figure 12 and the

generation capacity data in Figure 13 it is noted that the US electricity consumption is

growing faster than the generation capacity If this trend is not reversed it is expected

that the US would have to import more electric power in the near future Otherwise the

reserve margin of the whole power system in the US will shrink which will

compromise system stability and power delivery reliability

Electricity can be generated in many ways from various energy sources Electric

power can be generated by conventional thermal power plants (using fossil fuels or

nuclear energy) hydropower stations and other alternative power generating units (such

as wind turbine generators photovoltaic arrays fuel cells biomass power plants

geothermal power stations etc) Fossil fuels (including coal oil and natural gas) and

nuclear energy are not renewable and their resources are limited On the other hand

renewable energy resources (wind and solar energy for example) can self-renew and

sustain for future use Figure 14 shows the world and US net electricity generation by

type in 2002 It is clear from this figure that more than 80 of the world and US

4

electricity generation are still contributed by the conventional fossil-fuel thermal power

plants and nuclear power plants [11] [14] Except for the hydroelectric power the

portion of the electricity generated from other renewablealternative sources is very small

In the following of this section an overview will be given on the current status and the

future development trend of different types of electricity generation

0

5000

10000

15000

20000

25000

30000

1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2002 2003 2010 2015 2020 2025

World

US

Billion kWh

History Projections

Figure 12 World and US Electricity Demands 1980-2025 [11]-[13]

5

0

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2003 2010 2015 2020 2025

World

US

GW

History Projections

Figure 13 World Electricity Generating Capacity 1980-2025 [11] [14]

Nuclear

17

Hydroelectric

17 Conventional

Thermal

64

Hydroelectric

7

Nuclear

20

Conventional

Thermal

71

Figure 14 The world and US net electricity generation by type in 2002 [11] [14]

6

Conventional Thermal Electric Power Generation

Conventional thermal power plants generate electric power using fossil fuels namely

coal oil and natural gas In a fossil-fired thermal power plant water passes through a

boiler heated by burning fossil fuels to produce high temperature and high pressure

steam The steam then enters a multi-stage steam turbine which operates a generator to

produce electricity

Coal Due to its low price and relative abundant reserves coal is and should

continue to be the dominant fuel for electricity generation of the world and the US

shown in Figures 15 and 16 The United States and China currently are the leaders in

terms of installed coal-fired capacity Both countries have large amount of coal reserves

Even under the pressure of Kyoto Protocol for reducing greenhouse gas and other air

pollutant emissions coal-fired electricity generation capacity is still expected to grow by

15 percent per year and coal is expected to fuel 38 (Figure 15) of the electricity

generation of the entire world by 2025 [13] However this trend could be changed if

higher pressure is applied to implement environment protection policies such as the

Kyoto Protocol and the Clean Air Act in the US

Natural Gas Natural-gas-fired power generation technology is an attractive option

for new power plants because of its fuel efficiency operating flexibility rapid

deployment and lower installation costs compared to other conventional generation

technologies Regulatory policies to reduce carbon dioxide emissions could accelerate the

switch from coal to gas However the amount of natural gas reserve is not as plentiful as

7

coal In the US the amount of dry natural gas reverses was 192513 billion cubic feet in

2004 [14] In the same year the total natural gas consumption in the US was 224303

billion cubic feet And about a quarter of this consumption was for electricity generation

If dry natural gas was the only means of reserving and the amount of reserves would not

change then that amount could only supply the US natural gas needs for less than 10

years at the consumption rate of 2004 [14]

Oil On the world average oil is not and will not be a major source for electric

power The main reason is that the major petroleum products are produced for

transportation purposes such as automobile gasoline jet fuel etc but not for electricity

generation The first problem with oil is that the whole world is short of its reserves while

the demand for oil keeps increasing The oil demand is expected to grow at about 25

per year [15] The amount of proven crude oil reserves in the world in 2005 is 1277

billion barrels1 The world oil consumption in 2002 was 782 million barrels per day [15]

If we could keep this consuming rate unchanged then the whole world oil reserves could

only sustain for less than 45 years Even if the more optimistic data 2947 billion barrels

(including reserve growth and the estimated undiscovered oil reserves) of the oil reserves

are used the world will still run out of oil in about one hundred years and forty years

under the same consumption rate Greenhouse gas and air pollutant emission is another

big problem with using oil Moreover there are many other problems associated with oil

such as high oil price and the instability of some oil production regions

1 1 barrel = 42 US gallons

8

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

2002 2010 2015 2020 2025

HydroelectricOther

Nuclear

Natural Gas

Oil

Coal

Percentage

Figure 15 Fuel shares of world electricity generation 2002-2025 [11] [12]

0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

4500

5000

1990 2000 2010

HydroelectricOther

Nuclear

Natural Gas

Oil

Coal

Billion kWh

Figure 16 US electricity generation by fuel types [14]

9

Nuclear Power

Nuclear energy is an important source for electricity generation in many countries In

2003 19 countries depended on nuclear power for at least 20 percent of their electricity

generation [16] France is the country which has the highest portion (781) of the

electricity generated by nuclear power [16] Though the percentage of nuclear electric

power over the total national electricity generation is not very high (about 20) the US

is still the worlds largest producer of electric power using nuclear fuels Higher fossil

fuel prices and the entry into force of the Kyoto Protocol could result in more electricity

generated by nuclear power In the emerging economic regions such as China and India

nuclear power capacity is expected to grow [11] However nuclear power trends can be

difficult or even be reversed due to a variety of reasons The safety of a nuclear power

plant is still the biggest concern And how to deposit nuclear wastes can always be a

discussion topic for environmentalists Moreover the nuclear fuel (Uranium) is not

renewable The US Uranium reserves are 1414 million pounds at the end of 2003 [16]

This amount of reserve can supply the US for about 270 years at the Uranium annual

consumption rate of 24072 metric tons (2002 statistical data)

Hydroelectric Power

Today hydropower is still the largest renewable source for electricity generation in

the world In 2002 more than 18 of the world electricity was supplied by renewable

sources most of which comes from hydropower shown in Figure 15 [11] [12] The

world hydroelectric capacity is expected to grow slightly due to large hydroelectric

projects in the regions with emerging economies The Three Gorges hydropower project

10

in China is now the biggest hydropower project ever carried out in the world Upon the

completion of the Three Gorges project in 2009 it will have a generating capacity of 182

GW (26 units total and 700MW for each unit) [17]

Although the hydropower is clean and renewable there are still some problems

associated with it First the big dams and reservoirs cause a lot of environmental

concerns and social disputes Second the relocation of reservoir populations can be a big

problem For example over a million people will be relocated for the Three Gorges

project [18] Moreover hydropower is not as abundant as desired In the US for

example the available hydropower sources (except in Alaska) have almost been explored

All these factors determine that hydropower can not play a major role in the future new

electricity supply in the world

Why AlternativeRenewable Energy

The term ldquoalternative energyrdquo is referred to the energy produced in an

environmentally friendly way (different from conventional means ie through fossil-fuel

power plants nuclear power plants and hydropower plants) Alternative energy

considered in this dissertation is either renewable or with high energy conversion

efficiency There is a broad range of energy sources that can be classified as alternative

energy such as solar wind hydrogen (fuel cell) biomass and geothermal energy

Nevertheless as mentioned in the previous section at the present the majority of the

world electricity is still generated by fossil fuels nuclear power and hydropower

However due to the following problemsconcerns for conventional energy technologies

the renewablealternative energy sources will play important roles in electricity

11

generation And sooner or later todayrsquos alternatives will become tomorrowrsquos main

sources for electricity

1) Conventional energy sources are not renewable As discussed in the above

section both the fossil fuels (coal and oil and natural gas) and nuclear fuels are not

renewable The reserves of these fuels will run out some day in the future A long term

energy development strategy is therefore important for sustainable and continuous

economy growth

2) Conventional generation technologies are not environmentally friendly

Although there have been substantial improvements in the technologies (such as

desulfurization) for reducing emissions conventional thermal power plants still produce a

large amount of pollutant gases such as sulfur oxide and nitrogen oxide [19] The

radioactive waste of nuclear power plants is always a big concern to the environment

The dams and reservoirs of hydropower can change the ecological systems of the original

rivers and the regions of the reservoirs substantially [110]

3) The cost of using fossil and nuclear fuels will go higher and higher Since these

fuel sources are not renewable while the world energy demand is steadily increasing it is

obvious that the price of these fuels will go higher Taking world crude oil price for

example the price has been increased by 57 in the last year [111] Compared to natural

gas and petroleum coal is cheap for electricity generation However if the cost for

reducing emissions is taken into account the actual price of generating electricity from

coal would be much higher The growing cost of using conventional technologies will

make alternative power generation more competitive and will justify the switchover from

conventional to alternative ways for electric power generation

12

4) Hydropower sources are not enough and the sites are normally far away from

load centers Hydropower is good because it is clean and renewable However as

mentioned in the previous section the total amount of hydropower that can be explored is

not enough And in many developed countries the hydropower has been almost explored

fully Moreover hydroelectric sites normally are in remote areas Long transmission lines

add more difficulties and cost in exploring hydropower since the permission of the

right-of-way for transmission lines is much more difficult to obtain than before

5) Political and social concerns on safety are pushing nuclear power away In

general government energy strategy guides the development of nuclear power There are

almost no cases that corporations or utilities make the decisions to build nuclear power

plants based on their economic considerations Accidents at the Three Mile Island nuclear

power plant in the United States in 1979 and Chernobyl in the Soviet Union in 1986 fed

people full of fears No body wants to be a neighbor of a nuclear power plant or facility

This changes the government energy policy substantially In the US there is no new

order for nuclear units in the near future [16] In Europe several countries including

Italy Austria Belgium Germany and Sweden stepped out from nuclear power even

before the Chernobyl disaster [11]

On the other hand compared with conventional electricity generation technologies

alternativerenewable power have the following advantages

1) Renewable energy resources are not only renewable but also abundant For

example according to the data of 2000 the US wind resources can produce more

electricity than the entire nation would use [112] The total solar energy from sun in a

day at the earth surface is about 1000 times more than the all fossil fuels consumption

13

[19]

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

1978

1989

1990

1991

1992

1993

1994

1995

1996

1997

1998

1999

2000

2001

2002

2003

2004

2005

2006

US $ per barrel

Figure 17 World crude oil prices1978-2006 [111]

(Note The price is based on the first week data of January in each year)

2) Fuel cell systems have high energy efficiency The efficiency of low temperature

proton exchange membrane (PEM) fuel cells is around 35-45 [113] High temperature

solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC) can have efficiency as high as 65 [114] The overall

efficiency of an SOFC based combined-cycle system can even reach 70 [114]

3) Renewable energy and fuel cell systems are environmentally friendly From these

systems there is zero or low emission (of pollutant gases) that cause acid rain urban

smog and other health problems and therefore there is no environmental cleanup or

waste disposal cost associated with them [19]

4) Different renewable energy sources can complement each other Though renewable

14

energy resources are not evenly distributed throughout the world every region has some

kinds of renewable energy resources At least sunlight reaches every corner in the world

And different energy resources (such as solar and wind energy) can complement each

other This is important to improve energy security for a nation like the US which is

currently dependent on the foreign energy sources

5) These renewablealternative power generation systems normally have modular

structure and can be installed close to load centers as distributed generation sources

(except large wind and PV farms) Therefore no high voltage transmission lines are

needed for them to supply electricity

In general due to the ever increasing energy consumption the rising public

awareness for environmental protection the exhausting density of fossil-fuel and the

intensive political and social concerns upon the nuclear power safety alternative (ie

renewable and fuel cell based) power generation systems have attracted increased

interest

Recent Progress in AlternativeRenewable Energy Technologies

In the following section the recent progress in wind power solar power fuel cells

and other renewable energy technologies will be reviewed An overview on their

applications as distributed generation will also be given

Wind Energy

Wind energy is one of worlds fastest-growing energy technologies Both the global

and US wind energy experienced a record year in 2005 According to the figures

15

released by the Global Wind Energy Council (GWEC) in 2005 there was a 434

increase in annual additions to the global market and a 5642 increase in the annual

addition to the US wind power generation capacity Last year was just one of the record

years In the past 11 years the global wind energy capacity has increased more than 17

times mdash from 35 GW in 1994 to almost 60 GW by the end of 2005 (Figure 18) In the

United States wind power capacity has increased more than 3 times in only 5 years (from

2554 MW in 2000 to 9149 MW by the end of 2005) also shown in Figure 18 The future

prospects of the global wind industry are also very promising even based on a

conservative projection that the total global wind power installed could reach 160 GW by

2012 A spread of new countries across the world will participate in the global wind

energy market in the next ten years [115]

The phenomenal worldwide growth of the wind industry during the past decade can

be attributed to supportive government policies and the fast development in innovative

cost-reducing technologies In the US the work conducted under the Wind Energy

Programrsquos Next Generation Wind Turbine (1994 ndash 2003) and WindPACT (1999 ndash 2004)

projects under the Department of Energy (DOE) resulted in innovative designs high

power ratings and increased efficiencies [116] All these technological advances have

led to dramatic reductions in cost of electricity (COE) mdash from $08kWh in the

early1980s to about $004kWh today for utility-scale (normally gt= 750kW) turbines

[116] [19] Although this drop in COE has been impressive more research work is still

needed to make wind power more competitive Development in aerodynamic efficiency

structural strength of wind turbine blades larger turbine blades and higher towers

variable speed generators and power controllers will help to reduce the COE further The

16

DOE goal is to reduce the COE produced by land-based utility-scale turbines located in

Class 4 wind resource areas (areas with 58 ms wind speed at a10-m height) to

$003kWh by 2012 [116]

0

10000

20000

30000

40000

50000

60000

1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005

World

US

MW

Figure 18 The world and the US wind power cumulative capacity [115] [116]

Photovoltaic Energy

Solar energy basically is the ultimate source for all kinds of energy resources on the

earth with only a few exceptions such as geothermal energy There are normally two

ways to generate electricity from sunlight through photovoltaic (PV) and solar thermal

systems In this section and this dissertation only photovoltaic energy and system will be

discussed

Just like the growth of wind energy PV energy is another fast growing renewable

energy technology Though the absolute size of global solar power generation capacity is

17

much smaller than wind power it has been increased even faster than wind power during

the past dozen years (from 1992-2004) [117] In terms of the market for PV power

applications in the IEA-PVPS2 (International Energy Agency ndash Photovoltaic Power

Systems Programme) countries the total installed PV capacity has been increased more

than 23 times ndash from the 110 MW in 1992 to 2596 MW in 2004 (Figure 19) [117]

Due to improvements in semiconductor materials device designs and product quality

and the expansion of production capacity capital costs for PV panels have been

decreased significantly from more than $50W in the early of 1980s [19] to about 35$ to

45$ per watt in 2004 [117] The cost of electricity produced by PV systems continues to

drop It has declined from $090kWh in 1980 to about 020$kWh today [19] In the

US the DOE goal is to reduce the COE of PV to $006kWh by 2020 [119] However

PV energy is still usually more expensive than energy from the local utility Currently the

initial investment of a PV system is also higher than that of an engine generator

Nevertheless there are many applications for which a PV system is the most

cost-effective long-term option especially in remote areas such as power for remote

telecommunications remote lighting and signs remote homes and recreational vehicles

2 There are 19 countries participating in the IEA PVPS program They are Australia Austria Canada Denmark France Germany Israel Italy Japan Korea Mexico the Netherlands Norway Portugal Spain Sweden Switzerland UK and USA Over 90 of the world total PV capacity is installed in the IEA-PVPS countries The top three PV countries Japan Germany and the US are all the members of the organization

18

0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

1992 1994 1996 1998 2000 2002 2004

MW

Figure 19 Cumulative Installed PV capacity in IEA PVPS countries [117]

Fuel Cells

Fuel cells (FCs) are static energy conversion devices that convert the chemical energy

of fuel directly into DC electrical energy Fuel cells have a wide variety of potential

applications including micro-power auxiliary power transportation power stationary

power for buildings and other distributed generation applications and central power

Since entering the new century fuel cell technologies have experienced exponential

growth shown in Figure 110 [120] The total number of fuel cell applications reached

14500 in 2005 [120] Government policies public opinion and technology advance in

fuel cells all contributed to this phenomenal growth

19

Figure 110 Cumulative installed FC units world-wide 1990-2005 [120]

Among different types of fuel cells polymer electrolyte membrane fuel cells

(PEMFC) and solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC) both show great potentials in transportation

and DG applications3 [113] [120] Compared with conventional power plants these

fuel cell DG systems have many advantages such as high efficiency zero or low emission

(of pollutant gases) and flexible modular structure Fuel cell DGs can be strategically

placed at any site in a power system (normally at the distribution level) for grid

reinforcement deferring or eliminating the need for system upgrades and improving

system integrity reliability and efficiency Moreover as a byproduct high-temperature

fuel cells also generate heat that makes them suitable for residential commercial or

industrial applications where electricity and heat are needed simultaneously [113]

[121]

3 Vehicle application is still the main market for PEMFC though it also has high potential for stationary power generation For SOFCs stationary power generation is their main application But they do have a foothold in the transport market as well with new planar design

20

The DOE recently updated its ldquoHydrogen Fuel Cells and Infrastructure Technologies

Programrsquos Multi-Year Research Development and Demonstration Planrdquo written in 2003

[122] In the Plan it lays out industry targets for key fuel cell performance indices such

as cost durability and power density In 1999 the Solid State Energy Conversion

Alliance (SECA) was founded for bringing together government industry and the

scientific community to promote the development of SOFC Through these years

collaborative work among the government industry national labs and universities great

advances in fuel cell technologies have been achieved in many aspects These address

FCs a bright future although extensive work is still needed to be done before they can

really play main roles in energy market Table 11 gives the current status and the DOE

goals for PEMFC [122] [123] Table 12 summaries the current development stage of

SOFC and SECA targets [124]-[126] It is noted from the two tables that the possibility

of reaching the ultimate DOE and SECA goals is high

Other Renewable Energy Sources

In addition to PV and wind energy there are many other renewable energy resources

such as biomass geothermal energy solar thermal energy and tidal power These energy

resources can all be utilized to generate electricity Among them biomass and geothermal

energy technologies have the leading generation capacity in the US [19]

21

TABLE 11 CURRENT STATUS AND THE DOE TARGETS A FOR

PEMFC STACK B IN STATIONARY APPLICATIONS

Characteristics Units Current Status

2010 Goal

Stack power density WL 1330 2000

Stack specific power Wkg 1260 2000

Stack efficiency 25 of rated power 65 65

Stack efficiency rated power 55 55

Precious metal loading gkW 13 03

Cost $kWe 75 30

Durability with cycling hours 2200 C 5000

Transient response (time for 10 to 90 of rated power)

sec 1 1

Cold startup time to 90 of rated power ndash20 ordmC ambient temperature

sec 100 C 30

Survivability ordmC -40 -40

A Based on the technical targets reported in [122] for 80-kWe (net) transportation

fuel cell stacks operating on direct Hydrogen

B Excludes hydrogen storage and fuel cell ancillaries thermal water air

management systems

C Based on the performance data reported by Ballard in 2005 [123]

Biomass can be burned directly co-fired with coal or gasified first and then used to

generate electricity It can also be used to generate bio-fuels such as ethanol Most of

todayrsquos US biomass power plants use direct-combustion method In 2004 the total

22

generation capacity of biomass reached 9709 MW about 1 of the total US electric

capacity [127]

TABLE 12 CURRENT STATUS AND THE SECA TARGETS FOR

3-10 KW SOFC MODULE IN STATIONARY APPLICATIONS

Phase I A Current Status II

III (By 2010)

Cost 800$kW 724$kW B $400kW

Efficiency 35-55 41 b 40-60 40-60

Steady State

Test Hours 1500 1500 1500 1500

Availability 80 90 B 85 95

Power Degradation per 500 hours

le2 13 C le1 le01

Transient Test

Cycles 10 na 50 100

Power Degradation after Cycle Test

le1 na le05 le01

Power Density 03Wcm2 0575Wcm2 D 06Wcm2 06Wcm2

Operating Temperature

800 ordmC 700-750 ordmC C 700 ordmC 700 ordmC

Evaluate the potential to achieve $400kW [124]

A The goals of Phase I have been achieved GE is the first of six SECA industry

teams to complete phase I of the program [125]

B Based on the data reported by GE

C Based on the data reported by FuelCell Energy [126]

D Based on the data reported by Delphi [125]

23

Geothermal energy can be converted into electricity by three technologies dry steam

flush and binary cycle The most common type of geothermal plants is flush power plant

while the world largest geothermal plant is of the dry steam type [128] The dry stream

geothermal power plant at The Geysers in California is the largest geothermal power

plant in the world with a capacity of 2000 MW [19] However due to the limited

amount of available geothermal heat resources one will not expect to see any

considerable growth in this area Actually the geothermal generation capacity in the US

declined from 2793MW in 2000 to 2133 MW in 2004 [127] Nevertheless it can be an

important energy source in remote areas where geothermal resources are available and

abundant

Distributed Generation Applications

The ever-increasing need for electrical power generation steady progress in the

power deregulation and utility restructuring and tight constraints over the construction of

new transmission lines for long distance power transmission have created increased

interest in distributed power generation DG sources are normally placed close to

consumption centers and are added mostly at the distribution level They are relatively

small in size (relative to the power capacity of the system in which they are placed and

normally less than 10 MW) and modular in structure These DG devices can be

strategically placed in power systems for grid reinforcement reducing power losses and

on-peak operating costs improving voltage profiles and load factors deferring or

eliminating the need for system upgrades and improving system integrity reliability and

efficiency [133]

24

The technology advances in renewable energy sources fuel cells and small generation

techniques provide a diverse portfolio for DG applications Table 13 shows the candidate

technologies for DG systems The DOE proposed a strategic plan for distributed energy

sources in 2000 [129] The energy market with DG sources in 2020 was envisioned in

the plan as ldquoThe United States will have the cleanest and most efficient and reliable

energy system in the world by maximizing the use of affordable distributed energy

resourcesrdquo [129] To achieve this ultimate goal the DOE also set sub-goals for DG

development The long-term goal by 2020 is ldquoto make the nationrsquos energy generation and

delivery system the cleanest and most efficient reliable and affordable in the world by

maximizing the use of cost efficient distributed energy resourcesrdquo The mid-term by 2010

is to reduce costs to increase the efficiency and reliability of distributed generation

technologies and to add 20 of new electric capacity By the end of 1999 about 22GW

distributed energy systems with 18 GW backup units were installed across the US [131]

According to EIA US generation capacity history and forecast data 198 GW of new

capacity is needed during the period between 2000 and 2010 [14] Based on the

mid-term goal 20 (396 GW) of the new addition should come from DG systems This

means about 44 annual growth rate in DG capacity

25

TABLE 13 TECHNOLOGIES FOR DISTRIBUTED GENERATION SYSTEMS [130]

Technology Size Fuel Electrical Efficiency

( LHV)

Combustion Turbine Combined Cycle

50-500 MW Natural gas liquid

fuels 50-60

Industrial Combustion Turbine

1-50 MW Natural gas liquid

fuels 25-40

Internal Combustion Turbine(Reciprocating

Engine)

1kW ndash 10 MW

Natural gas diesel oil propane gasoline etc

25-38

Mircroturbine 27-400 kW Landfill gas

propane natural gas and other fuels

22-30

Stirling Engine 11-50kW Any 18-25

Fuel Cells 1kW Natural gas H2

other H2-rich fuels 35-60

Photovoltaic 1W ndash 10MW Renewable 5-15 A

Wind Turbine 02kW ndash 5MW

Renewable lt 40

Biomass B Several kW ndash 20 MW

Renewable ~ 20

A PV cell energy conversion efficiency

B Based on the data reported in [19]

26

Need for the Research

The ever increasing energy consumption rapid progress in wind PV and fuel cell

power generation technologies and the rising public awareness for environmental

protection have turned alternative energy and distributed generation as promising

research areas Due to natural intermittent properties of wind and solar irradiation

stand-alone windPV renewable energy systems normally require energy storage devices

or some other generation sources to form a hybrid system Because some of renewable

energy sources can complement each other (section 13) multi-source alternative energy

systems (with proper control) have great potential to provide higher quality and more

reliable power to customers than a system based on a single resource However the

issues on optimal system configuration proper power electronic interfaces and power

management among different energy sources are not resolved yet Therefore more

research work is needed on new alternative energy systems and their corresponding

control strategies

Fuel cells are good energy sources to provide reliable power at steady state but they

cannot respond to electrical load transients as fast as desired This problem is mainly due

to their slow internal electrochemical and thermodynamic responses [132] The transient

properties of fuel cells need to be studied and analyzed under different situations such as

electrical faults on the fuel cell terminals motor starting and electric vehicle starting and

acceleration Therefore dynamic fuel cell models are needed to study those transient

phenomena and to develop controllers to solve or mitigate the problem

27

Fuel cells normally work along with power electronic devices One problem is that

there is not adequate information exchange between fuel cell manufacturers and power

electronic interface designers Without adequate knowledge about the area of each other

the fuel cell manufacturers normally model the power electronic interface as an

equivalent impedance while the power electronic circuit designers take the fuel cell as a

constant voltage source with some series resistance These inaccurate approaches may

cause undesired results when fuel cells and their power electronic interfaces are

connected together It is important and necessary to get a better understanding of the

impact of power electronic interface on fuel cellrsquos performance and of the fuel cellrsquos

impact on power electronic interfacing circuits Dynamic model development for fuel

cells using electrical circuits can be a solution so that the researchers in both areas can

understand each other Moreover it will provide a more efficient way to integrate the fuel

cells and power electronic devices together

Distributed generation devices can pose both positive and negative impacts on the

existing power systems [133] These new issues have led DG operation to be an

important research area Research on optimal placement (including size) of DGs can help

obtain maximum potential benefits from DGs

28

Scope of the Study

Although there are many types of alternativerenewable resources the alternative

sources in this dissertation are confined to wind PV and fuel cells for the research on the

proposed hybrid alternative energy systems The main focus is given to modeling

validation and control for fuel cells and fuel cell based stand-alone and grid-connected

systems Two types of fuel cells will be modeled and used in the dissertation PEMFC

and SOFC The ultimate goal of this dissertation is to model a multi-source alternative

DG system consisting of wind turbine(s) PV arrays fuel cells and electrolyzers and to

manage the power flows among the different energy resources in the system The optimal

placement of DG sources in power systems is also investigated on system operation level

Organization of the Dissertation

After the introduction conducted and the reason for the research explained in this

chapter Chapter 2 reviews the fundamentals of electrochemistry thermodynamics power

electronics and the alternative energy technologies including wind PV and fuel cells

Chapter 3 introduces hybrid energy systems gives possible ways of system integration

and presents a proposed hybrid windPVFC energy system Chapter 4 describes the

models for the components in the proposed system discussed in Chapter 3 Power

electronic interfacing circuits with appropriate controllers are discussed in Chapter 4 as

well

29

Chapters 5 and 6 focus on control for fuel cell based systems Control for

grid-connected fuel cell systems is discussed in Chapter 5 In Chapter 6 load mitigation

control for stand-alone fuel cell systems is investigated

The overall control scheme development for the proposed multi-source alternative

system is given in Chapter 7 Simulation results under different scenarios are given and

discussed in the chapter The optimal placement of DG sources in power systems (both

radial feeders and networked systems) is investigated in Chapter 8

30

REFERENCES

[11] International Energy Outlook 2005 Energy Information Administration (EIA) httpwwweiadoegoviea

[12] International Energy Annual 2003 EIA httpwwweiadoegoviea

[13] System for the Analysis of Global Energy Markets 2005 EIA httpwwweiadoegoviea

[14] Annual Energy Outlook 2006 (Early Release) EIA httpwwweiadoegov

[15] World Oil Market International Energy outlook - International Petroleum (Oil) Reserves and Resources EIA httpwwweiadoegoviea

[16] US Nuclear Generation of Electricity EIA httpwwweiadoegoviea

[17] Online http www3ggovcn

[18] Million Relocates of Unprecedented Scale httpwww3ggovcnshuniuymgc200305170065htm

[19] SR Bull ldquoRenewable Energy Today and Tomorrowrdquo Proceedings of IEEE Vol 89 No 8 pp1216-1221 August 2001

[110] FA Farret and MG Simotildees Integration of Alternative Sources of Energy John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2006

[111] World Crude Oil Prices EIA httptontoeiadoegovdnavpetpet_pri_wco_k_whtm

[112] M R Patel Wind and Solar Power Systems CRC Press LLC 1999

[113] Fuel Cell Handbook (Sixth Edition) EGampG Services Inc Science Applications International Corporation DOE Office of Fossil Energy National Energy Technology Lab Nov 2002

[114] O Yamamoto ldquoSolid oxide fuel cells fundamental aspects and prospectsrdquo Electrochimica Acta Vol 45 No (15-16) pp 2423-2435 2000

[115] Global Power Source Global Wind Energy Council httpwwwgwecnet

[116] Wind Power Today ndash Federal Wind Program Highlights NREL DOEGO-102005-2115 April 2005

31

[117] Trends in photovoltaic applications Survey report of selected IEA countries between 1992 and 2004 International Energy Agency Photovoltaics Power Systems Programme (IEA PVPS) September 2005

[118] Online httpwwwnrelgovanalysisnewsletters2006_januaryhtml

[119] National Status Report 2004 ndashUSA IEA-PVPS httpwwwoja-servicesnliea-pvpsnsr04usa2htm

[120] Fuel Cell Today 2005 Worldwide Survey httpwwwfuelcelltodaycom

[121] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained 2nd Edition John Wiley amp Sons Ltd 2003

[122] The Hydrogen Fuel Cells amp Infrastructure Technologies Program Multi-Year Research Development and Demonstration Plan February 2005 Version

[123] Technology Road Map ndashBallard Power Systems Inc httpwwwballardcombe_informedfuel_cell_technologyroadmap

[124] SECA Program Plan DOE Office of Fossil Energy The DOE National Energy Technology Laboratory (NETL) and the Pacific Northwest National Laboratory Jan 2002

[125] Significant Milestone Achieved in SECA Fuel Cell Development Program httpwwwnetldoegovpublicationsTechNewstn_ge_secahtml Jan 2006

[126] Thermally Integrated High Power Density SOFC Generator FuelCell Energy Inc FY 2004 Progress Report

[127] Renewables and Alternate Fuels Energy Information Administration (EIA) httpwwweiadoegovfuelrenewablehtml

[128] Online httpwwweereenergygovgeothermalpowerplantshtmlflashsteam

[129] Strategic Plan for Distributed Energy Resources mdash Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy US Department of Energy September 2000

[130] DER Technologies Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) October 2002

[131] Establishing a Goal for Distributed Energy Resources Distributed Energy Resources The Power to Choose on November 28 2001 by Paul Lemar httpwwwdistributed-generationcomLibrarypaul_lemarpdf

[132] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion vol 20 no 2 pp442-451 June 2005

32

[133] C Wang and MH Nehrir ldquoAnalytical Approaches for Optimal Placement of Distributed Generation Sources in Power Systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Systems vol 19 no 4 pp 2068-2076 Nov 2004

33

CHAPTER 2

FUNDAMENTALS OF ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SYSTEMS

This chapter reviews the fundamental concepts and principles of energy systems and

energy conversion The overview of the fundamentals of electrochemistry

thermodynamics and alternative energy systems is a good introduction for understanding

and modeling of the proposed multi-source alternative energy system discussed in the

following chapters

Energy Forms

Definition of Energy

Energy is defined as the amount of work a physical system is capable of doing

Energy is a fundamental quantity that every physical system possesses In a broad sense

energy can neither be created nor consumed or destroyed However it may be converted

or transferred from one form to other Generally speaking there are two fundamental

types of energy transitional energy and stored energy [21] Transitional energy is energy

in motion also called kinetic energy such as mechanical kinetic energy Stored energy is

energy that exists as mass position in a force field (such as gravity and electromagnetic

fields) etc which is also called potential energy More specifically energy can exist in

the following five basic forms

(1) Mechanical energy

(2) Chemical energy

(3) Electrical and electromagnetic energy

34

(4) Thermal energy

(5) Nuclear energy

Mechanical Energy

Mechanical energy is the type of energy associated with moving objects or objects

that have potential to move themselves or others It can be defined as work used to raise a

weight [21] The mechanical kinetic energy of a translating object (Emt) with a mass m at

speed v is

2

2

1mvEmt = (21)

For a rotating body with moment of inertia (rotational inertia) I at angular speed ω its

kinetic mechanical energy (Emr) is defined as

2

2

1ωIEmr = (22)

Mechanical potential energy is the energy that a given system possesses as a result of

its status in a mechanical force field [21] For example in a gravity field g the potential

mechanical energy of a body with mass m at height h is given as

mghEmpg = (23)

As another example the potential energy of an elastic spring with the spring constant

k at the displacement x is

2

2

1kxEmps = (24)

35

Chemical Energy

Chemical energy is the energy held in the chemical bonds between atoms and

molecules [22] Every bond has a certain amount of energy Chemical energy exists as a

stored energy form which can be converted to other energy forms through reactions First

energy is required to break the bonds - called endothermic Then energy will be released

(called exothermic) when these broken bonds combine together to create more stable

molecules If the total energy released is more than the energy taken in then the whole

reaction is called exothermic Otherwise the reaction is called endothermic The burning

of fossil fuels (combustion) is one of the most important exothermic reactions for

producing energy Photosynthesis is a good example for endothermic reaction since

plants use energy from sun to make the reaction happen

Electrical and Electromagnetic Energy

Electrical and electromagnetic energy is the energy associated with electrical

magnetic andor electromagnetic fields It is normally expressed in terms of electrical

andor electromagnetic parameters For example the electro-static energy stored in a

capacitor is

C

qEC

2

2

1= (25)

where C is the capacitance of the capacitor and q is the total charge stored

The magnetic energy stored in an inductor with inductance L at current i is

2

2

1LiEm = (26)

36

Another expression used to represent magnetic energy is [23]

int=V

m dVHE 2

2

1micro (27)

where micro is the material permeability H is the magnetic field intensity and V is the object

volume under consideration This expression is especially useful in calculating hysteresis

losses inside power transformers

Radiation energy is one of the forms of electromagnetic energy The radiation energy

only exists in transitional form and it is given by [21]

fhER sdot= (28)

where h is the Planckrsquos constant (6626times10-34 Js) and f is the frequency of the radiation

Thermal Energy

From a macroscopic observation thermal energy or heat can be defined as energy

transferred between two systems due to temperature difference [24] From a micro-level

point of view thermal energy is associated with atomic and molecular vibration [21] All

other forms of energy can be converted into thermal energy while the opposite conversion

is limited by the second law of thermodynamics (which will be explained briefly in

section 22) Based on this fact thermal energy can be considered the most basic form of

energy [21]

37

Nuclear Energy

Nuclear energy is a topic irrelevant to this dissertation But for the completion of the

discussion on energy forms a very brief overview on nuclear energy is also included here

Similar to chemical energy nuclear energy is also a type of stored energy The energy

will be released as a result of nuclear reaction (normally fission reaction) to produce a

more stable configuration Take the uranium-235 nucleus as an example When it

captures a neutron it will split into two lighter atoms and throws off two or three new

neutrons The new atoms then emit gamma radiation as they settle into their new more

stable states An incredible amount of energy is released in the form of heat and gamma

radiation during the above process The mass of fission products and the neutrons

together is less than the original U-235 atom mass The mass defect is governed by the

famous Einsteinrsquos mass-energy equation [21]

E = mc2 (29)

where m is the material mass and c is the speed of light in vacuum (asymp2998times108 ms)

Fundamentals of Thermodynamics

Thermodynamic analysis of energy conversion processes is important for modeling

and control of hybrid energy systems Therefore in this section a brief overview of the

fundamental concepts and principles of thermodynamics is given

The First Law of Thermodynamics

According to the first law of thermodynamics the energy of a system is conserved

Energy here is in the form of either of heat or work This law describes that energy can

38

neither be created or destroyed but it can be converted from one type to another The

change in the system energy dE is contributed by the heat entering (dQ) the system and

the work done by the system (dW) to the outside [25] [26]

dWdQdE minus= (210)

Note that the work in the above equation is the work leaving the system The system

here is an idealized object which is used to limit our study scope A system can be

isolated from ldquoeverything elserdquo in the sense that changes in everything else need not

affect its state [25] The external ldquoeverything elserdquo is considered to be the environment

of the system Of particular interest is one type of system called a simple system that is

not affected by capillarity distortion of solid phase external force fields (electromagnetic

and gravitational) or internal adiabatic walls [25] For a simple system the total system

energy is equal to the total system internal energy denoted by symbol U [25] In this

dissertation we only consider simple systems

E = U (211)

For a control volume or open system (any prescribed and identifiable volume in

space) usually there is expansion when heat is absorbed by the system at constant

pressure Part of the heat goes into internal energy and causes temperature to rise And the

rest of the heat is used to expand against the pressure P A property of the system called

enthalpy (H) is used to represent the system state under certain condition

H = U +PV (212)

where V is the system volume Enthalpy is a state parameter which is independent of

which way the system reaches that condition Equation (211) now can be represented as

39

dWdQdH minus= (213)

The Heat Engine and Carnot Cycle

The heat engine is designed to convert heat to work Figure 21 shows the block

diagram of an idealized heat engine If we want the heat engine to work continuously

then the system (the working substance in the figure) is subjected to a cyclic process A

cyclic process is one in which the system returns to its original state after a cycle For a

practical heat engine there are many processes undergoing And it is also complicated

and difficult to analyze all of them In 1842 a French scientist named Sadi Carnot

presented a way to analyze cyclic thermal processes and discovered the maximum

possible heat efficiency of a heat engine

Figure 21 Block diagram of an ideal heat engine

The Carnot cycle is shown in Figure 22 The cycle consists of two isothermal

processes and two adiabatic processes Figure 22 (a) shows the P-V diagram of the

40

Carnot cycle [26] The heat Q1 enters the system at T1 and Q2 leaves system at T2 Since

this process is cyclic the system energy remains the same after any cycle According to

the First Law of Thermodynamics (Equation 210) it can be shown that

S∆

(a) (b)

Figure 22 Carnot cycle (a) P-V (pressure-volume) diagram (b) T-S (temperature-entropy) diagram

21 QQW minus= (214)

W is the work done by the system to the outside which can also be represented by the

area abcd in Figure 22 (a) For the Carnot cycle it has been proved that

2

2

1

1

T

Q

T

Q= (215)

The efficiency of the system then is

1

2

1

21

1

1T

T

Q

QQ

Q

Wc minus=

minus==η (216)

It is clear from (216) that in order to get a higher efficiency the temperature

difference should be larger

Another contribution from Carnot is that QT can be a state property of the system by

41

showing the equivalence of Q1T1 and Q2T2 [see (215)] Based on Carnotrsquos idea

Clausius developed the concept of entropy and presented the Second Law of

Thermodynamics

The Second Law of Thermodynamics

The concept is introduced to indicate to what extent of disorder a system is at If the

system is undergoing an infinitesimal reversible process with dQ heat entering the system

at temperature T then the infinitesimal change in its entropy is defined as [25]-[28]

revT

dQdS = (217)

A reversible process is a process that can be reversed without leaving any traces to its

environment If a cyclic process only consists of reversible processes then there is no

entropy change (∆S = 0) after a cycle On the other hand if the cycle contains an

irreversible process then a change of entropy will be generated Entropy is an important

system property It is also very useful in describing a thermodynamic process Figure 22

(b) shows the T-S diagram of a Carnot Cycle The area abcd also represents the work

done to the system environment

The Second Law of Thermodynamics is described by the Clausius inequality [25]

[28] For any cyclic process we have

int le 0T

dQ (218)

The equality sign only applies to a reversible cyclic process The above inequality can

be expressed in an infinitesimal form as

42

T

dQdS ge (219)

The equality sign applies to a reversible cyclic process and the inequality sign applies

to an irreversible process That is to say for any irreversible process it occurs in a

direction to which the change of entropy is greater than dQT This means that heat

cannot be transferred from a low temperature to a higher temperature without a need of

work from outside The Second Law also reveals that no real heat engine efficiency can

reach 100 due to the increase of entropy For an isolated system the change of entropy

will always be greater than or equal to zero

Heat Transfer

In this section the equations governing different ways of heat transfer are reviewed

Heat Transfer by Conduction For isotropic solids (whose properties and

constitution in the neighborhood of any two points are the same at any direction) heat

transfer by conduction is governed by Fourier heat-conduction equation [24]

d

TTkAQcond

12 minus= (220)

where Qcond is the heat transferred A is the face area of the element normal to the heat

flow k is the effective thermal conductivity d is the distance between the two points of

interest and (T2-T1) is the temperature difference

Heat Transfer by Convection Heat transfer by convection is the heat exchange

between a flowing fluid (natural or forced) and a solid surface The convective heat

transfer is given as [24]

43

)( sfconv TThAQ minus= (221)

where h is the effective convection heat transfer coefficient A is the solid area contacting

the fluid Tf is the bulk temperature of the fluid and Ts is the temperature of the solid This

equation is also called Newtonrsquos law of cooling

Heat Transfer by Radiation Based on (28) the radiation heat exchange rate

between two objects at different temperatures is [24]

)( 4

2

4

1 TTAQrad minus= εσamp (222)

where Qrad is the radiation heat (J) ε is the effective emissivity of the system σ is

Stefan-Boltzmann Constant (56703times10-8 Wmiddotm-2middotK-4)

Fundamentals of Electrochemical Processes

The Gibbs Free Energy

The Gibbs Free Energy also called the Gibbs Energy or ldquofree enthalpyrdquo is defined as

[25] [28]

G = H-TS = U + PV -TS (223)

Chemical reactions proceed towards the direction that minimizes the Gibbs Energy

Differentiating the above equation we can obtain

)()( SdTTdSVdPPdVdUSdTTdSdHdG +minus++=+minus= (224)

dG is negative as a chemical reaction approaches its equilibrium point and it will be

zero at the equilibrium point According to the First Law of Thermodynamics (210) for

a simple system the above equation can be rewritten as

)()( SdTTdSVdPPdVdWdQSdTTdSdHdG +minus++minus=+minus= (225)

44

If the system is restricted to performing only expansion-type of work (dW = PdV) and

the process is reversible (dQ = TdS) then four terms on the right side of (225) will be

cancelled out resulting in

SdTVdPdG minus= (226)

At a given temperature T Gibbs energy under any pressure can be calculated based

on the above equation for that given temperature

)ln()()(0

0

P

PnRTTGTG += (227)

where )(0 TG is the standard (P0 = 1 atm) Gibbs energy at temperature T

For an electrochemical reaction the maximum work (electricity) is determined by the

change in the Gibbs Energy as the reactants change to products It can be shown that the

maximum work is equal to the change in the Gibbs energy [28]

GWe ∆minus= (228)

Energy Balance in Chemical Reactions

In a chemical reaction the change in enthalpy due to the reaction is [28]

sumsum minus=minus=∆Rj

RjRj

Pi

PiPiRP HNHNHHH (229)

where HP is the total enthalpy of the products and HR is the total enthalpy of the reactants

NPi is the amount of moles of the ith species in the products and NRj is the amount of

moles of the jth species in the reactants Accordingly HPi (HRj) is the molar enthalpy of

the corresponding species which can be represented as

PifPi HHHH )( 00 minus+= (230)

45

where 0

fH is the standard molar enthalpy of formation (Jmol) and (H-H0) is the sensible

enthalpy due to the temperature difference

The change of entropy due to the reaction is [28]

sumsum minus=minus=∆Rj

RjRj

Pi

PiPiRP SNSNSSS (231)

where SP is the total entropy of the products and SR is the total entropy of the reactants

SPi (SRj) is the molar entropy of the corresponding species

The change of the Gibbs free energy due to the reaction then can be obtained from

(223) as

STHGGG RP ∆minus∆=∆minus∆=∆ (232)

Two example reactions [(233) and (234)] are given to show how to calculate the

change of Gibbs energy in a reaction The enthalpy and entropy values for water

hydrogen and oxygen are given in Table 21 The reactions are assumed to happen under

standard conditions (1 atm and 25 ˚C)

)(2

1222 gOHOH =+ (233)

)(2

1222 lOHOH =+ (234)

where subscript ldquogrdquo represents that the reaction product is in gas form and subscript

ldquolrdquo is used to indicate that the reaction product is in liquid form

46

TABLE 21 STANDARD THERMODYNAMIC PROPERTIES

(ENTHALPY ENTROPY AND GIBBS ENERGY) [29]

Name Hf (kJmol) S (JmolK)

H2O(g) -2418 1887

H2O(l) -2858 699

H2 0 1306

O2 0 205

For the reaction given in (233) we have

8241)008241( minus=minusminusminus=minus=∆ RP HHH (kJmol)

444)2055061307188( minus=timesminusminus=minus=∆ RP SSS (JmolK)

Therefore the change in the Gibbs energy of the reaction given in (233) is

=timesminustimesminusminus=∆minus∆=∆ minus )10444(2988241 3STHG -22857 kJmol

For the reaction given in (234) we have

8285)008285( minus=minusminusminus=minus=∆ RP HHH (kJmol)

2163)205506130969( minus=timesminusminus=minus=∆ RP SSS (JmolK)

Therefore the change in the Gibbs energy of the reaction given in (234) is

=timesminustimesminusminus=∆minus∆=∆ minus )102163(2988285 3STHG -23716 kJmol

From the above examples we can see that more work can be done if the product

(H2O) is in liquid form

47

The Nernst Equation

Consider an electrochemical reaction under constant temperature and pressure that the

reactants X and Y form products M and N given by (235)

dNcMbYaX +hArr+ (235)

where a b c and d are stoichiometric coefficients

According to (232) the change of the Gibbs energy of the reaction is [28]

YXNMRP bGaGdGcGGGG minusminus+=minus=∆

In terms of the change of the standard Gibbs energy G∆ can also be expressed as

[see (227)]

+∆=∆

b

Y

a

X

d

N

c

M

PP

PPRTGG ln0 (236)

where 00000

YXNM bGaGdGcGG minusminus+=∆

In an electrochemical reaction the work can be considered as the electrical energy

delivered by the reaction The electrochemical work is

FEnW ee = (237)

where ne is number of participating electrons F is Faraday constant (96487 Cmol) and E

is the voltage difference across the electrodes

According to (228) the change in Gibbs energy is the negative value of the work

done by the reaction

FEnWG ee minus=minus=∆ (238)

Under standard condition the above equation turns out to be

48

000 FEnWG ee minus=minus=∆ (239)

where E0 is the standard reference potential

From (238) we can calculate the electrode voltage E as

minus

∆minus=

∆minus=

b

Y

a

X

d

N

C

M

eee PP

PP

Fn

RT

Fn

G

Fn

GE ln

0

(240)

Writing the above in terms of standard reference potential E0 we get the well-known

electrochemical formula Nernst equation [28] [210]

+=

minus=

d

N

C

M

b

Y

a

X

e

b

Y

a

X

d

N

C

M

e PP

PP

Fn

RTE

PP

PP

Fn

RTEE lnln 00

(241)

For a fuel cell with an overall reaction as given by (233) then the voltage across the

fuel cell electrodes (or the internal potential of the fuel cell) is

+=

OH

OH

P

PP

F

RTEE

2

50

220 ln2

(242)

If the product (H2O) is in liquid form given by (234) then the fuel cell internal

potential is

( )5022

0 ln2

OH PPF

RTEE += (243)

Fundamentals of Alternative Energy Systems

In this section the fundamentals of wind energy generation system PV cells fuel

cells and electrolyzers are reviewed

49

Wind Energy System

Energy in Wind Wind energy systems harness the kinetic energy of wind and

convert it into electrical energy or use it to do other work such as pump water grind

grains etc The kinetic energy of air of mass m moving at speed v can be expressed as

[211]

2

2

1mvEk = (244)

During a time period t the mass (m) of air passing through a given area A at speed v

is

Avtm ρ= (245)

where ρ is the density of air (kgm3)

Based on the above two equations the wind power is

3

2

1AvP ρ= (246)

The specific power or power density of a wind site is given as

3

2

1v

A

PPden ρ== (247)

It is noted that the specific power of a wind site is proportional to the cube of the

wind speed

Power Extracted from Wind The actual power extracted by the rotor blades from

wind is the difference between the upstream and the down stream wind powers

)(2

1 2

0

2 vvkP m minus= (248)

50

where v is the upstream wind velocity at the entrance of the rotor blades v0 is the

downstream wind velocity at the exit of the rotor blades km is the mass flow rate which

can be expressed as

2

0vvAkm

+= ρ (249)

where A is the area swept by the rotor blades

From (248) and (249) the mechanical power extracted by the rotor is given by

)(22

1 2

0

20 vvvv

AP minus

+= ρ (250)

Let

minusminus

+=

2

00 1112

1

v

v

v

vC p and rearrange the terms in (250) we have

pCAvP 3

2

1ρ= (251)

Cp is called the power coefficient of the rotor or the rotor efficiency It is the fraction

of the upstream wind power which is captured by the rotor blades and has a theoretical

maximum value of 059 shown in Figure 23 In practical designs maximum achievable

Cp is between 04 and 05 for high-speed two-blade turbines and between 02 and 04 for

low-speed turbines with more blades [211]

It is noted from (251) that the output power of a turbine is determined by the

effective area of the rotor blades (A) wind speed (v) and wind flow conditions at the

rotor (Cp) Thus the output power of the turbine can be varied by changing the effective

area andor by changing the flow conditions at the rotor system Control of these

quantities forms the basis of control of wind energy systems

51

0 02 04 06 08 10

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

v0 v

Cp

Figure 23 Theoretical rotor efficiency vs v0v ratio

Tip Speed Ratio The tip speed ratio λ (TSR) defined as the ratio of the linear speed

at the tip of the blade to the free stream wind speed is given as follows [211]

v

Rωλ = (252)

where R is the rotor blade radius and ω is the rotor angular speed

TSR is related to the wind turbine operating point for extracting maximum power

The maximum rotor efficiency Cp is achieved at a particular TSR which is specific to the

aerodynamic design of a given wind turbine For variable TSR turbines the rotor speed

will change as wind speed changes to keep TSR at some optimum level Variable TSR

turbines can produce more power than fixed TSR turbines [212]

52

Wind Energy Conversion System The block diagram of a typical wind energy

conversion system is shown in Figure 24

Figure 24 Block diagram of a typical wind energy conversion system

The principle components of a modern wind turbine are the tower the yaw the rotor

and the nacelle which accommodates the gear box and the generator The tower holds the

53

main part of the wind turbine and keeps the rotating blades at a height to capture

sufficient wind power The yaw mechanism is used to turn the wind turbine rotor blades

against the wind Wind turbine captures the windrsquos kinetic energy in the rotor consisting

of two or more blades The gearbox transforms the slower rotational speeds of the wind

turbine to higher rotational speeds on the electrical generator side Electrical generator

will generate electricity when its shaft is driven by the wind turbine whose output is

maintained as per specifications by employing suitable control and supervising

techniques In addition to monitoring the output these control systems also include

protection equipment to protect the overall system [211]

Two distinctly different design configurations are available for a wind turbine the

horizontal axis configuration and the vertical axis configuration The vertical axis

machine has the shape like an egg beater (also called the Darrieus rotor after its inventor)

However most modern turbines use horizontal axis design [211]

Constant Speed and Variable Speed Wind Energy Conversion Systems (WECS)

Generally there are two types of wind energy conversion systems constant speed and

variable speed systems shown in Figure 25 [212] In Figure 25 (a) the generator

normally is a squirrel cage induction generator which is connected to a utility grid or load

directly Since the generator is directly coupled the wind turbine rotates at a constant

speed governed by the frequency of the utility grid (50 or 60 Hz) and the number of poles

of the generator The other two wind power generation systems shown in Figure 25 (b)

and (c) are variable speed systems In Figure 25 (b) the generator is a doubly-fed

induction generator (wound rotor) The rotor of the generator is fed by a back-to-back

54

converter voltage source converter The stator of the generator is directly connected to

load or grid Through proper control on the converter for the rotor the mechanical speed

of the rotor can be variable while the frequency of output AC from the stator can be kept

constant Figure 25 (c) shows a variable speed system which is completely decoupled

from load or grid through a power electronic interfacing circuit The generator can either

be a synchronous generator (with excitation winding or permanent magnet) or an

induction generator In this dissertation a variable speed WECS similar to the one shown

in Figure 25 (c) is used for the hybrid energy system study The generator used in the

study is a self-excited induction generator

Wind Turbine Output Power vs Wind Speed A typical power vs wind speed curve

is shown in Figure 26 [212] [215] When the wind speed is less than the cut-in speed

(normally 3-5 ms) [212] there is no power output Between the cut-in speed and the

rated or nominal wind speed (normally 11-16 ms) [212] the wind turbine output power

is directly related to the cubic of wind speed as given in (251) When the wind speed is

over the nominal value the output power needs to be limited to a certain value so that the

generator and the corresponding power electronic devices (if any) will not be damaged

In other words when the wind speed is greater than the rated value the power coefficient

Cp needs to be reduced [see (251)] When the wind speed is higher than the cut-out speed

(normally 17-30 ms) [212] the system will be taken out of operation for protection of

its components

55

Figure 25 Constant and variable speed wind energy conversion systems [212]

56

Figure 26 Typical curves for a constant speed stall controlled (dotted) and variable speed pitch controlled (solid) wind turbine [212] [215]

There are several ways to control the wind turbine output power The two common

ways to achieve this goal are stall control and pitch control [211]-[215]

For a stall controlled wind turbine there is no active control applied to it The output

power is regulated through a specifically designed rotor blades The design ensures that

when the wind speed is too high it creates turbulences on the side of the rotor blades The

turbulences will decrease the aerodynamic efficiency of the wind turbine as a result

Pitch control is an active method which is used to reduce the aerodynamic efficiency

by changing pitch angle (turning the rotor blades out of wind) of the rotor blades It

should be noted that the pitch angle can change at a finite rate which may be quite low

due to the size of the rotor blades The maximum rate of change of the pitch angle is in

the order of 3 to 10 degreessecond [215]

It is noted from Figure 26 that a variable speed system normally has lower cut-in

speed The rated speed is also normally lower than a constant speed system For wind

57

speeds between the cut-in and the nominal speed there will be 20-30 increase in the

energy capture with variable speed compared to the fixed-speed operation[211]-[215]

shown in Figure 26 For a pitch controlled wind system the power for wind speeds over

the nominal value can be held constant precisely On the other hand for a stall controlled

constant speed system the output power will reach its peak value somewhat higher than

its rated value and then decreases as wind speed grows

Photovoltaic Energy System

Terminology

Solar radiation Also called insolation consists of the radiation that comes directly

from the sun (beam radiation) as well as the radiation that comes indirectly (diffusion and

albedo radiation) [216]

Solar constant The solar radiation that falls on a unit area above the atmosphere at a

vertical angle is called solar constant It has a value of 1367 Wmsup2 [216]

Air mass A convenient lumped parameter used for the amount of sunlight absorbed in

the atmosphere The amount of beam solar radiation absorbed in the atmosphere in a

direct vertical path to sea level is designated as one air mass (AM1) In general air mass

is proportional to the secant of the zenith angle [216]

Irradiance A measure of power density of sunlight it has a unit of Wm2

Irradiation A measure of energy density (Jm2) it is the integral of irradiance over

time

Photovoltaic effect is a basic physical process through which solar energy is

converted into electrical energy directly The physics of a PV cell or solar cell is similar

58

to the classical p-n junction diode shown in Figure 27 [211] At night a PV cell can

basically be considered as a diode When the cell is illuminated the energy of photons is

transferred to the semiconductor material resulting in the creation of electron-hole pairs

The electric field created by the p-n junction causes the photon-generated electron-hole

pairs to separate The electrons are accelerated to n-region (N-type material) and the

holes are dragged into p-region (P-type material) shown in Figure 27 The electrons

from n-region flow through the external circuit and provide the electrical power to the

load at the same time

Figure 27 Schematic block diagram of a PV cell

The PV cell shown in Figure 27 is the basic component of a PV energy system Since

a typical PV cell produces less than 2 W at approximately 05 V DC it is necessary to

connect PV cells in series-parallel configurations to produce desired power and voltage

ratings Figure 28 shows how single PV cells are grouped to form modules and how

modules are connected to build arrays There is no fixed definition on the size of a

module and neither for an array A module may have a power output from a few watts to

59

hundreds of watts And the power rating of an array can vary from hundreds of watts to

megawatts [211] [216]

Figure 28 PV Cell module and array

Fuel Cells

Fuel cells (FCs) are static energy conversion devices that convert the chemical energy

of fuel directly into DC electrical energy [217]-[218] The basic physical structure of a

fuel cell consists of two porous electrodes (anode and cathode) and an electrolyte layer in

the middle Figure 29 shows a schematic diagram of a polymer electrolyte membrane

fuel cell (PEMFC) The electrolyte layer is a good conductor for ions (positive or

negative charged) but not for electrons The electrolyte can either be solid such as

PEMFC and solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC) or liquid such as molten carbonate fuel cells

(MCFC) The type and chemical properties of the electrolyte used in fuel cells are very

60

important to their operating characteristics such as their operating temperatures

The polarity of an ion and its transport direction can differ for different fuel cells

determining the site of water production and removal If the working ion is positive like

in a PEMFC shown in Figure 29 then water is produced at the cathode On the other

hand if the working ion is negative like SOFC and MCFC shown in Figures 211 and

213 water is formed at the anode In both cases electrons have to pass through an

external circuit and produce electric current

In a typical fuel cell fuel is fed continuously to the anode and oxidant is fed

continuously to the cathode The electrochemical reactions take place at the electrodes to

convert chemical energy into electricity Note that anode is the electrode from which

electrons leave (negative) and cathode is the electrode to which the electrons are coming

(positive) The most common used fuel for fuel cells is hydrogen and the oxidant is

usually oxygen or air Nevertheless theoretically any substance capable of chemical

oxidation that can be supplied continuously (as a fluid) can be used as fuel at the anode of

a fuel cell Similarly the oxidant can be any fluid that can be reduced at a sufficient rate

[219]

Among different types of fuel cells SOFC PEMFC and MCFC are most likely to be

used for distributed generation (DG) applications [217]-[218] [220]-[224] Compared

with conventional power plants these FCDG systems have many advantages such as high

efficiency zero or low emission (of pollutant gases) and flexible modular structure In the

following an overview is given on the operating principles of the above three types of

fuel cells Though MCFC is out of the scope of this dissertation it is also included here

as a potential candidate for fuel cell DG applications

61

PEMFC PEMFC has a sandwich like structure as shown in Figure 29 [217]

[218] [220] Between two porous electrodes is a Teflon-like membrane which is an

excellent conductor of protons and an insulator of electrons [217] [218] The hydrogen

molecules are broken into electrons and hydrogen protons at the anode with the help of

platinum catalyst The hydrogen protons pass through the membrane (electrolyte) reach

the cathode surface and combine with the electrons which travel from anode to cathode

through the external load to produce water The reactions at the anode and cathode side

and the overall reaction are given in Figure 29

Gas

Flow

Channel Anode

Electron

Flow

Cathode

Membrane

Catalyst

Layers

H2

H2O

O24H+

Load

4e- 4e-

Gas

Flow

Channel

2H2+ O

2 = 2H

2O

Current

Flow

Figure 29 Schematic diagram of a PEMFC

One of the advantages of the PEMFC is its high power density and high efficiency

(40-45) This makes the technology competitive in transportation and stationary

applications Another benefit is its lower operating temperature (between 60degC and 80degC)

62

and because of this the PEMFC has a quick start which is beneficial in automotive

applications where quick start is necessary

5 10 15 20 2522

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

Load Current (A)

PEMFC Output Voltage (V)

ActivationRegion

Ohmic Region

Concentration Region

Figure 210 V-I characteristic of a 500W PEMFC stack [220]

Figure 210 shows the output voltage vs load current (V-I) characteristic curve of a

500W PEMFC stack [220] This characteristic curve which is typical of other fuel cells

can be divided into three regions The voltage drop across the fuel cell associated with

low currents is due to the activation loss inside the fuel cell the voltage drop in the

middle of the curve (which is approximately linear) is due to the ohmic loss in the fuel

cell stack and as a result of the concentration loss the output voltage at the end of the

curve will drop sharply as the load current increases [217] [218]

63

SOFC SOFC is a high temperature fuel cell technology with a promising future

Based on a negative-ion conductive electrolyte SOFCs operate between 600 C and 1000

C and convert chemical energy into electricity at high efficiency which can reach up to

65 [221] The overall efficiency of an integrated SOFC-combustion turbine system can

even reach 70 [221] Despite slow start-up and more thermal stresses due to the high

operating temperature SOFC allows for internal reforming of gaseous fuel inside the fuel

cell which gives multi-fuel capability to SOFCs [217] [218] Moreover their solid

nature simplifies system designs where the corrosion and management problems related

to liquid electrolyte are eliminated [217] These merits give SOFC a bright future to be

used in stationary applications Figure 211 shows a block diagram of a SOFC The

reactions at the anode and cathode are also given in the figure

Figure 211 Schematic diagram of a SOFC

64

The steady-state terminal V-I curves of a 5kW SOFC model (which will be discussed

in detail in Chapter 4) at different temperatures which are typical of SOFCs are shown

in Figure 212 [223] The activation voltage drop dominates the voltage drop in the

low-current region As load current increases the ohmic voltage drop increases fast and

becomes the main contribution to the SOFC voltage drop When load current exceeds a

certain value fuel cell output voltage will drop sharply due to the concentration voltage

drop inside SOFC Figure 212 also shows the effect of temperature on SOFC V-I

characteristic curve SOFC output voltage is higher at lower temperature in the low

current zone while the voltage is higher at higher temperature in the high current region

0 50 100 1500

20

40

60

80

100

120

Load current (A)

SOFC output voltage (V)

1073K

1173K

1273K

Figure 212 V-I characteristic of a 5kW SOFC stack [223]

65

MCFC MCFCs use a molten mixture of alkali metal carbonate as their electrolyte

[217] [218] At high temperatures (600oC ndash 700 oC) the salt mixture is in liquid phase

and is an excellent conductor of minus23CO ions At the cathode the oxygen and carbon oxide

combine with the electrons flowing through the external circuit to produce carbonate ions

( minus23CO ) At the anode minus2

3CO ions are deoxidized by hydrogen and electrons are released

at the same time These electrons will have to go through the external circuit and then

reach the cathode surface Figure 213 shows the schematic diagram of a MCFC The

reactions at the anode and cathode side are given in the figure -

2 3

-

22

2CO

4e

2CO

O

=+

+

-

2

-2 3

24e

2CO

2CO

2H+

=+

Figure 213 Schematic diagram of a MCFC

Figure 214 shows the V-I performance progress for MCFCs from 1967 to 2002

[217] During the 1980s the performance of MCFC stacks made dramatic

improvements It is noted from this figure that MCFCs normally operate in the range of

100-200 mAcm2 at 750-850 mV for a single cell [217] MCFs have achieved

66

efficiencies in the range of 50-60 before heat recovery and with heat recovery their

efficiency could exceed 70 [224]

Figure 214 Progress in generic performance of MCFCs on reformate gas and air

Electrolyzer

An electrolyzer is a device that produces hydrogen and oxygen from water Water

electrolysis can be considered a reverse process of a hydrogen fueled fuel cell Opposite

to the electrochemical reaction occurring in fuel cell an electrolyzer converts the DC

electrical energy into chemical energy stored in hydrogen

Water electrolysis is a long-established process which started in the early part of

nineteen century [225] Nicholson and Carlisle English chemists first discovered the

phenomenon of electrolytic decomposition in acid water in 1800 However alkaline

medium is preferred in todayrsquos industrial electrolysis plants Currently there are three

principal types of electrolyzer available in the market alkaline PEM and solid oxide

67

The alkaline and PEM electrolyzers are well established devices with thousands of units

in operation while the solid-oxide electrolyzer is as yet unproven [226] Alkaline water

electrolysis is the dominating technology today In this section the principle of alkaline

water electrolysis is reviewed

An alkaline electrolyzer uses potassium hydroxide (KOH) as electrolyte solution for

transferring hydroxyl ions Figure 215 shows the schematic diagram of an alkaline

electrolyzer At the cathode two water molecules are reduced electrochemically (by the

two electrons from the cathode) to one molecule of H2 and two hydroxyl ions (OH-) The

reaction at the cathode can be expressed as

minusminus +uarrrarr+ OHHeOH 222 22 (253)

Under the external electric field the hydroxyl ions are forced to move towards the

anode through the porous diaphragm At the anode the two molecule hydroxyl ions

losing two electrons to the anode are discharged into 12 molecule of O2 and one

molecule of water The chemical reaction at the cathode is

minusminus ++uarrrarr eOHOOH 22

12 22 (254)

By combining the above two equations the overall chemical reaction inside an

electrolyzer is

uarr+uarrrarr 2222

1OHOH (255)

68

Figure 215 Schematic diagram of an alkaline electrolyzer

The current density of alkaline electrolyzers is normally less than 04 Acm2 The

energy conversion efficiencies can range from 60-90 Without auxiliary purification

equipment purities of 998 for H2 can be achieved Alkaline electrolysis technology

can be implemented at a variety of scales from less than 1 kW to large industrial

electrolyzer plant over 100 MW as long as there is a proper DC electricity supply [227]

69

Summary

In this chapter the fundamental concepts and principles of energy systems and energy

conversion are reviewed The chapter begins with the introduction of the basic energy

forms and then reviews the fundamentals of thermodynamics and electrochemistry The

First and Second Law of Thermodynamics the maximum conversion efficiency of a

conventional heat engine heat transfer the concepts of enthalpy entropy and the Gibbs

energy and the well-known Nernst equation are briefly explained The fundamentals of

wind energy conversion systems photovoltaic systems fuel cells and electrolyzers are

also reviewed The principles reviewed in this chapter are the fundamentals needed for

modeling the proposed multi-source alternative energy system discussed in the following

chapters

70

REFERENCES

[21] Archie W Culp Jr Principles of Energy Conversion McGraw-Hill Book Company 1979

[22] Steven S Zumdahl Chemical Principles 2nd Edition DC Heath and Company Toronto 1995

[23] FT Ulaby Fundamentals of Applied Electromagnetics Prentice-Hall Inc 1999

[24] ERG Eckert and R M Drake Jr Analysis of Heat and Mass Transfer McGraw-Hill Book Company 1972

[25] George N Hatsopoulos and Joseph H Keenan Principles of General

Thermodynamics John Wiley amp Sons Inc 1965

[26] E L Harder Fundamentals of Energy Production John Wiley amp Sons 1982

[27] FA Farret and MG Simotildees Integration of Alternative Sources of Energy John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2006

[28] G Hoogers Fuel Cell Technology Handbook CRC Press LLC 2003

[29] JANAF Thermochemical Tables 2nd Edition NSRDS-NBS 37 1971

[210] G Kortum Treatise on Electrochemistry (2nd Edition) Elsevier Publishing Company 1965

[211] M R Patel Wind and Solar Power Systems CRC Press LLC 1999

[212] JG Slootweg ldquoWind power modeling and impact on power system dynamicsrdquo PhD dissertation Dept Elect Eng Delft University of Technology Delft Netherlands 2003

[213] JF Manwell JG McGowan and AL Rogers Wind energy Explained ndash Theory

Design and Application John Wileyamp Sons 2002

[214] Tony Burton David sharpe Nick Jenkins and Ervin Bossanyi Wind Energy

Handbook John Wileyamp Sons 2001

[215] SR Guda ldquoModeling and power management of a hybrid wind-microturbine power generation systemrdquo MS thesis Montana State University 2005

71

[216] R Messenger and J Ventre Photovoltaic Systems Engineering CRC Press LLC 2000

[217] Fuel Cell Handbook (Sixth Edition) EGampG Services Inc Science Applications International Corporation DOE Office of Fossil Energy National Energy Technology Lab Nov 2002

[218] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained 2nd Edition John Wiley amp Sons Ltd 2003

[219] AJ Appleby FR Foulkes Fuel Cell Handbook Van Nostrand Reinhold New York NY 1989

[220] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 20 No 2 pp442-451 June 2005

[221] O Yamamoto ldquoSolid oxide fuel cells fundamental aspects and prospectsrdquo Electrochimica Acta Vol 45 No (15-16) pp 2423-2435 2000

[222] J Padulleacutes GW Ault and J R McDonald ldquoAn integrated SOFC plant dynamic model for power system simulationrdquo J Power Sources pp495ndash500 2000

[223] C Wang and MH Nehrir ldquoA Dynamic SOFC Model for Distributed Power Generation Applicationsrdquo Proceedings 2005 Fuel Cell Seminar Palm Springs CA Nov 14-18 2005

[224] MD Lukas KY Lee H Ghezel-Ayagh ldquoAn Explicit Dynamic Model for Direct Reforming Carbonate Fuel Cell Stackrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 16 No 3 pp 289-295 Sept 2000

[225] W Kreuter and H Hofmann ldquoElectrolysis The Important Energy Transformer in a World of Sustainable Energyrdquo Int J Hydrogen Energy Vol 23 No8 pp 661-666 1998

[226] M Newborough ldquoA Report on Electrolysers Future Markets and the Prospects for ITM Power Ltdrsquos Electrolyser Technologyrdquo Online http wwwh2fccomNewsletter

[227] AFG Smith and M Newborough ldquoLow-Cost Polymer Electrolysers and Electrolyser Implementation Scenarios for Carbon Abatementrdquo Report to the Carbon Trust and ITM-Power PLC Nov 2004

72

CHAPTER 3

MULTI-SOURCE ALTERNATIVE ENERGY

DISTRIBUTED GENERATION SYSTEM

Introduction

The ever increasing energy consumption the soaring cost and the exhaustible nature

of fossil fuel and the worsening global environment have created booming interest in

green (renewable energy source or fuel cell based) power generation systems Compared

to the conventional centralized power plants these systems are sustainable smaller in

size and (some) can be installed closer to load centers The power is delivered to

customers by many distributed generation (DG) systems other than the conventional way

that power is transmitted from centralized power plants to load centers over transmission

lines and then through distribution systems Due to steady progress in power deregulation

and utility restructuring and tight constraints imposed on the construction of new

transmission lines for long distance power transmission DG applications are expected to

increase in the future

Wind and solar power generation are two of the most promising renewable power

generation technologies The growth of wind and photovoltaic (PV) power generation

systems has exceeded the most optimistic estimation Fuel cells also show great potential

to be green power sources of the future because of many merits they have (such as high

efficiency zero or low emission of pollutant gases and flexible modular structure) and

73

the rapid progress in fuel cell technologies However none of these technologies is

perfect now Wind and solar power are highly dependent on climate while fuel cells need

hydrogen-rich fuel and the cost for fuel cells is still very high at current stage

Nevertheless because different renewable energy sources can complement each other

multi-source hybrid alternative energy systems (with proper control) have great potential

to provide higher quality and more reliable power to customers than a system based on a

single resource And because of this hybrid energy systems have caught worldwide

research attention [31]-[334]

There are many combinations of different alternative energy sources and storage

devices to build a hybrid system The following lists some of the stand-alone or

grid-connected hybrid systems that have been reported in the literature

1) WindPVFCelectrolyzerbattery system [31]-[33]

2) Micro-turbineFC system [34]-[35]

3) Microturbinewind system [36]

4) Gas-turbineFC system [37]-[39]

5) DieselFC system [310]-[311]

6) PVbattery [312]

7) PVFCelectrolyzer [313]-[315]

8) PVFCelectrolyzerbattery system [316]-[318]

9) FCbattery or super-capacitor system [319]-[320]

10) WindFC system [321]

11) Winddiesel system [322]

12) WindPVbattery system [323]-[325]

74

13) PVdiesel system [326]

14) DieselwindPV system [327]

15) PVFC Super-conducting Magnetic Energy Storage (SMES) system [328]

From the above listed hybrid energy systems it is noted that the main renewable

energy sources are wind and photovoltaic power Due to natural intermittent properties of

wind and photovoltaic power stand-alone wind andor PV renewable energy systems

normally require energy storage devices or some other generation sources to form a

hybrid system The storage device can be a battery bank super-capacitor bank SMES or

a FC-electrolyzer system

In this study a multi-source hybrid alternative distributed generation system

consisting of wind PV fuel cell electrolyzer and battery is proposed Wind and

photovoltaic are the primary power sources of the system to take full advantage of

renewable energy around us The FCelectrolyzer combination is used as a backup and

long term storage system For a stand-alone application a battery is also used in the

system as short term energy storage to supply fast transient and ripple power In the

proposed system the different energy sources are integrated through an AC link bus

(discussed later in this chapter) An overall power management controller is designed for

the system to coordinate the power flows among the different energy sources The details

of the system configuration are discussed in this chapter The system component

modeling will be discussed in Chapter 4 The system control scheme and simulation

results under different scenarios will be given in Chapter 7

75

Figure 31 Hybrid energy system integration DC coupling

AC Coupling vs DC Coupling

There are several ways to integrate different alternative energy sources to form a

hybrid system The methods can be generally classified into two categories DC coupling

and AC coupling AC coupling can be classified further into power frequency AC (PFAC)

coupling and high frequency AC (HFAC) coupling In a DC coupling configuration

shown in Figure 31 different alternative energy sources are connected to a DC bus

through appropriate power electronic interfacing circuits Then the DC energy is

converted into 60 Hz (or 50 Hz) AC through a DCAC converter (inverter) which can be

bi-directional

76

(a)

(b) Figure 32 Hybrid energy system integration (a) PFAC coupling (b) HFAC coupling

77

In a PFAC coupling scheme shown in Figure 32 (a) different energy sources are

integrated through proper power electronic interfacing circuits to a power frequency AC

bus Coupling inductors may also be needed to achieve desired power flow management

In a HFAC link scheme shown in Figure 32 (b) different alternative energy sources are

coupled to a HFAC bus HFAC loads are connected directly to the HFAC bus The HFAC

can also be converted into PFAC through an ACAC converter so that regular AC loads

can be connected to the PFAC bus HFAC link is originally developed for supplying

power to HFAC loads This configuration has been used mostly in applications with

HFAC (eg 400 Hz) loads such as airplanes vessels submarines and space station

applications [329]

Different coupling schemes find their own appropriate applications DC coupling is

the simplest and the oldest type of integration PFAC link is more modular than DC

scheme and is ready for grid connection HFAC coupling is more complicated and is

more suitable for the applications with HFAC loads Table 31 summaries the advantages

and disadvantages of each coupling scheme

78

TABLE 31 COMPARISON AMONG DIFFERENT INTEGRATION SCHEMES

Coupling Scheme

Advantage Disadvantage

DC [31]-[32] [312]

[329]-[330]

1 Synchronism not needed 2 Suitable for long distance

transmission it has less transmission losses

3 Single-wired connection

1 Concerns on the voltage compatibility

2 Corrosion concerns with the DC electrodes

3 Non-standard connection requires high costs in installing and maintenance

4 If the DCAC inverter is out of service the whole system fails to supply AC power

PFAC [329]

[331]-[332]

1 High reliability If one of the energy sources is out of service it can be isolated from the system easily

2 Ready for grid connection 3 Standard interfacing and

modular structure 3 Easy multi-voltage and

multi-terminal matching 4 Well established scale economy

1 Synchronism required 2 The need for power factor and harmonic distortion correction

3 Not suitable for long distance transmission

HFAC [329]

[333]-[334]

1 Higher order harmonics can be easily filtered out

2 Suitable for applications with HFAC loads with improved efficiency

3 Size of high frequency transformers harmonic filters and other passive components are smaller

1 Complex control 2 Higher component and maintenance costs due to high frequency

3 The dependence on future advances of power electronics

4 Concerns about electromagnetic compatibility

5 Extremely limited capability of long distance transmission

79

Stand-alone vs Grid-connected Systems

A hybrid alternative energy system can either be stand-alone or grid-connected if

utility grid is available For a stand-alone application the system needs to have sufficient

storage capacity to handle the power variations from the alternative energy sources

involved A system of this type can be considered as a micro-grid which has its own

generation sources and loads [335] For a grid-connected application the alternative

energy sources in the micro-grid can supply power both to the local loads and the utility

grid In addition to real power these DG sources can also be used to give reactive power

and voltage support to the utility grid The capacity of the storage device for these

systems can be smaller if they are grid-connected since the grid can be used as system

backup However when connected to a utility grid important operation and performance

requirements such as voltage frequency and harmonic regulations are imposed on the

system [336] Both grid-connected and stand-alone applications will be discussed in the

later chapters The optimal placement of DG sources in power systems will also be

discussed in Chapter 8

The Proposed System Configuration

Figure 33 shows the system configuration for the proposed hybrid alternative energy

system In the system the renewable wind and solar power are taken as the primary

source while fuel cellelectrolyzer combination is used as a backup and storage system

This system can be considered as a complete ldquogreenrdquo power generation system because

the main energy sources and storage system are all environmentally friendly and it can be

80

stand-alone or grid-connected When there is excess wind andor solar generation

available the electrolyzer turns on to begin producing hydrogen which is delivered to the

hydrogen storage tanks If the H2 storage tanks become full the excess power will be

diverted to other dump loads which are not shown in Figure 33 When there is a deficit

in power generation the fuel cell stack will begin to produce energy using hydrogen from

the reservoir tanks or in case they are empty from the backup H2 tanks A battery bank is

used to supply transient power to fast load transients ripples and spikes in stand-alone

applications For grid-connected applications the battery bank can be taken out from the

system the utility grid will take care of transient power Different energy sources are

connected to a 60 Hz AC bus through appropriate power electronic interfacing circuits

The system can be easily expended ie other energy sources can be integrated into the

system when they are available as shown in Figure 33 The main system components

and their sizes are discussed in the following section

System Unit Sizing

The unit sizing procedure discussed in this section is assumed for a stand-alone

hybrid system with the proposed structure (Figure 33) for residential electricity supply in

southwestern part of Montana The hybrid system is designed to supply power for five

homes A typical load demand for each home reported in [337] in the Pacific Northwest

regions is used in this simulation study The total load demand of the five homes is shown

in Figure 34 A 50 kW wind turbine is assumed to be available already for the hybrid

system The following unit sizing procedure is used to determine the size of PV arrays

fuel cells the electrolyzer and the battery

81

Figure 33 System configuration of the proposed multi-source alternative hybrid energy system (coupling inductors are not shown in the figure)

82

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

Time (Hour of Day)

Demand (kW)

Figure 34 Hourly average demand of a typical residence in the Pacific Northwest area

Before the discussion of unit sizing the following concept is applied for indicating

the overall efficiency and availability of a renewable energy source

Capacity factor of a renewable energy kcf is defined as

Actual average output power over a period of time T kcf =

Nominal power rating of the renewable energy source (31)

For the wind and solar data reported in [33] [324] the capacity factor of the wind

turbine (kcf_wtg) and the PV (kcf_pv) array used in the proposed hybrid system for the

southwestern part of Montana are taken as 13 and 10 respectively

The purpose of unit sizing is to minimize the difference between the generated power

( genP ) from the renewable energy source and the demand (demP ) over a period of time T T

is taken as one year in this study

83

demratedpvpveffratedwtgwtgeffdemgen PPkPkPPP minustimes+times=minus=∆ __ (32)

where Pwtgrated is the power rating of the wind turbine generator and Pwtgpv is the power

rating the PV array

To balance the generation and the demand the rated power for the PV arrays is

( )pveffratedwtgwtgeffdemratedpv kPkPP __ timesminus= (33)

From Figure 34 the average load demand is 976 kW Then according to (33) the

size of the PV array is calculated to be 326 kW

The FCelectrolyzer combination is taken as the storage for the system The fuel cell

needs to supply the peak load demand when there is no wind and solar power Therefore

the size of fuel cell is 146 kW (Figure 34) To leave some safe margin an 18 kW fuel

cell stack array is used

The electrolyzer should be able to handle the excess power from the wind and solar

power source The maximum possible excess power is

(Pgen - Pdem)max = 766 kW (34)

However the possibility that both the wind and solar power reach their maximum

points while the load demand is at its lowest value is very small According to the data

reported in [330] the excess available power normally is less than half of the maximum

possible value And electrolyzer is also very expensive Therefore a 50 kW electrolyzer

[over 60 of the maximum available given in (34)] is used in this study

Battery capacity can be determined based on the transient power at the load site In

this study a 10 kWh battery bank is used

The details of the system component parameters are listed in Table 32

84

TABLE 32 COMPONENT PARAMETERS OF THE PROPOSED HYBRID ENERGY SYSTEM

Wind turbine

Rated power 50 kW

Cut in speed (Cut out speed) 3 ms (25 ms)

Rated speed 14 ms

Blade diameter 15 m

Gear box ratio 75

Induction generator

Rated power 50 kW

Rated voltage 670 V

Rated frequency 60 Hz

PV array

Module unit 153 cells 173 W 1 kWm2 25 ˚C

Module number 16times12 = 192

Power rating 192times173 asymp 33 kW

Fuel cell array

PEMFC stack 500 W

PEMFC array 6times6 = 36

PEMFC array power rating 36times05 = 18 kW

Or SOFC stack 5 kW

SOFC array 2times2 = 4

SOFC array power rating 4times5 kW = 20 kW

Electrolyzer

Rated power 50 kW

Number of cells 40 (in series)

Operating voltage 60 - 80 V

Battery

Capacity 10 kWh

Rated voltage 400 V

85

REFERENCES

[31] K Agbossou M Kolhe J Hamelin and TK Bose ldquoPerformance of a stand-alone renewable energy system based on energy storage as hydrogenrdquo IEEE

Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 3 pp 633 ndash 640 Sept 2004

[32] K Agbossou R Chahine J Hamelin FLaurencelle A Anourar J-M St-Arnaud and TK Bose ldquoRenewable energy systems based on hydrogen for remote applicationsrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 96 pp168-172 2001

[33] DB Nelson MH Nehrir and C Wang ldquoUnit Sizing and Cost Analysis of Stand-Alone Hybrid WinPVFuel Cell Systemsrdquo Renewable Energy (accepted)

[34] R Lasseter ldquoDynamic models for micro-turbines and fuel cellsrdquo Proceedings 2001 PES Summer Meeting Vol 2 pp 761-766 2001

[35] Y Zhu and K Tomsovic ldquoDevelopment of models for analyzing the load-following performance of microturbines and fuel cellsrdquo Journal of Electric Power Systems Research pp 1-11 Vol 62 2002

[36] SR Guda C Wang and MH Nehrir ldquoModeling of Microturbine Power Generation Systemsrdquo Journal of Power Components amp Systems (accepted)

[37] K Sedghisigarchi and A Feliachi ldquoDynamic and Transient Analysis of Power Distribution Systems with Fuel CellsmdashPart I Fuel-Cell Dynamic Modelrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 2 pp423-428 June 2004

[38] K Sedghisigarchi and A Feliachi ldquoDynamic and Transient Analysis of Power Distribution Systems with Fuel CellsmdashPart II Control and Stability Enhancementrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 2 pp429-434 June 2004

[39] SH Chan HK Ho and Y Tian ldquoMulti-level modeling of SOFC-gas turbine hybrid systemrdquo International Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 28 No 8 pp 889-900 Aug 2003

[310] Z Miao M A Choudhry R L Klein and L Fan ldquoStudy of A Fuel Cell Power Plant in Power Distribution System ndash Part I Dynamic Modelrdquo Proceedings IEEE PES General Meeting June 2004 Denver CO

[311] Z Miao M A Choudhry R L Klein and L Fan ldquoStudy of A Fuel Cell Power Plant in Power Distribution System ndash Part II Stability Controlrdquo Proceedings IEEE PES General Meeting June 2004 Denver CO

86

[312] H Dehbonei ldquoPower conditioning for distributed renewable energy generationrdquo PhD Dissertation Curtin University of Technology Perth Western Australia 2003

[313] P A Lehman CE Chamberlin G Pauletto MA Rocheleau ldquoOperating Experience with a photovoltaic-hydrogen energy systemrdquo Proceedings

Hydrogenrsquo94 The 10th World Hydrogen Energy Conference Cocoa Beach FL June 1994

[314] A Arkin and J J Duffy ldquoModeling of PV Electrolyzer and Gas Storage in a Stand-Alone Solar-Fuel Cell Systemrdquo Proceedings the 2001 National Solar Energy Conference Annual Meeting American Solar Energy Society 2001

[315] L A Torres F J Rodriguez and PJ Sebastian ldquoSimulation of a solar-hydrogen-fuel cell system results for different locations in Mexicordquo International Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 23 No 11 pp 1005-1010 Nov 1998

[316] S R Vosen and JO Keller ldquoHybrid energy storage systems for stand-alone electric power systems optimization of system performance and cost through control strategiesrdquo International Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 24 No 12 pp 1139-56 Dec 1999

[317] Th F El-Shatter M N Eskandar and MT El-Hagry ldquoHybrid PVfuel cell system design and simulationrdquo Renewable Energy Vol 27 No 3 pp479-485 Nov 2002

[318] Oslash Ulleberg and S O MOslashRNER ldquoTRNSYS simulation models for solar-hydrogen systems rdquo Solar Energy Vol 59 No 4-6 pp 271-279 1997

[319] J C Amphlett EH de Oliveira RF Mann PR Roberge and Aida Rodrigues ldquoDynamic Interaction of a Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cell and a Lead-acid Batteryrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 65 pp 173-178 1997

[320] D Candusso L Valero and A Walter ldquoModelling control and simulation of a fuel cell based power supply system with energy managementrdquo Proceedings 28th Annual Conference of the IEEE Industrial Electronics Society (IECON 2002) Vol 2 pp1294-1299 2002

[321] M T Iqbal ldquoModeling and control of a wind fuel cell hybrid energy systemrdquo Renewable Energy Vol 28 No 2 pp 223-237 Feb 2003

[322] H Sharma S Islam and T Pryor ldquoDynamic modeling and simulation of a hybrid wind diesel remote area power systemrdquo International Journal of Renewable Energy Engineering Vol 2 No1 April 2000

87

[323] R Chedid H Akiki and S Rahman ldquoA decision support technique for the design of hybrid solar-wind power systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 13 No 1 pp 76-83 March 1998

[324] W D Kellogg M H Nehrir G Venkataramanan and V Gerez ldquoGeneration unit sizing and cost analysis for stand-alone wind photovoltaic and hybrid windPV systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 13 No 1 pp 70-75 March 1998

[325] F Giraud and Z M Salameh ldquoSteady-state performance of a grid-connected rooftop hybrid wind-photovoltaic power system with battery storagerdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 16 No 1 pp 1 ndash 7 March 2001

[326] E S Abdin A M Osheiba and MM Khater ldquoModeling and optimal controllers design for a stand-alone photovoltaic-diesel generating unitrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 14 No 3 pp 560-565 Sept 1999

[327] F Bonanno A Consoli A Raciti B Morgana and U Nocera ldquoTransient analysis of integrated diesel-wind-photovoltaic generation systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 14 No 2 pp 232-238 June 1999

[328] T Monai I Takano H Nishikawa and Sawada ldquoResponse characteristics and operating methods of new type dispersed power supply system using photovoltaic fuel cell and SMESrdquo 2002 IEEE PES Summer Meeting Vol 2 pp 874-879 2002

[329] F A Farret and M G Simotildees Integration of Alternative Sources of Energy John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2006

[330] Oslashystein Ulleberg ldquoStand-Alone Power Systems for the Future Optimal Design Operation amp Control of Solar-Hydrogen Energy Systemsrdquo PhD Dissertation Norwegian University of Science and Technology Trondheim 1998

[331] P Strauss A Engler ldquoAC coupled PV hybrid systems and microgrids-state of the art and future trendsrdquo Proceedings 3rd World Conference on Photovoltaic Energy Conversion Vol 3 No 12-16 pp 2129 ndash 2134 May 2003

[332] G Hegde P Pullammanappallil C Nayar ldquoModular AC coupled hybrid power systems for the emerging GHG mitigation products marketrdquo Proceedings Conference on Convergent Technologies for Asia-Pacific Region Vol 3 No15-17 pp 971 ndash 975 Oct 2003

[333] SK Sul I Alan and TA Lipo ldquoPerformance testing of a high frequency link converter for space station power distribution systemrdquo Proceedings the 24th Intersociety Energy Conversion Engineering Conference (IECEC-89) Vol 1 No 6-11 pp 617 ndash 623 Aug 1989

88

[334] H J Cha and P N Enjeti ldquoA three-phase ACAC high-frequency link matrix converter for VSCF applicationsrdquo Proceedings IEEE 34th Annual Power Electronics Specialist Conference 2003 (PESC 03) Vol 4 No 15-19 pp 1971 ndash 1976 June 2003

[335] R H Lasseter ldquoMicroGridsrdquo Proceedings 2002 IEEE PES Winter Meeting Vol 1 pp 305-308 2002

[336] IEEE Std 1547 IEEE Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Resources with Electric Power Systems 2003

[337] J Cahill K Ritland W Kelly ldquoDescription of Electric Energy Use in Single Family Residences in the Pacific Northwest 1986-1992rdquo Office of Energy Resources Bonneville Power Administration December 1992 Portland OR

89

CHAPTER 4

COMPONENT MODELING FOR THE HYBRID

ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SYSTEM

In this chapter the models for the main components of the proposed hybrid

alternative energy system given in Chapter 3 are developed Namely they are fuel cells

wind energy conversion system PV energy conversion system electrolyzer battery

power electronic interfacing circuits and accessory devices

Two types of fuel cells are modeled and their applications are discussed in this

dissertation They are low temperature proton exchange membrane fuel cell (PEMFC)

and high temperature solid oxide fuel cell (SOFC)

Dynamic Models and Model Validation for PEMFC

Introduction

PEMFCs show great promise for use as distributed generation (DG) sources

Compared with other DG technologies such as wind and photovoltaic (PV) generation

PEMFCs have the advantage that they can be placed at any site in a distribution system

without geographic limitations to achieve optimal performance Electric vehicles are

another major application of PEMFCs The increased desire for vehicles with less

emission has made PEMFCs attractive for vehicular applications since they emit

essentially no pollutants and have high power density and quick start

PEMFCs are good energy sources to provide reliable power at steady state but they

90

cannot respond to electrical load transients as fast as desired This is mainly due to their

slow internal electrochemical and thermodynamic responses The transient properties of

PEMFCs need to be studied and analyzed under different situations such as electrical

faults on the fuel cell terminals motor starting and electric vehicle starting and

acceleration

Some work has been reported in the literature on steady state fuel cell modeling eg

[41]ndash[47] as well as dynamic modeling [48]ndash[411] These studies are mostly based on

empirical equations andor electrochemical reactions inside the fuel cell In recent years

attempts have been made to study dynamic modeling of fuel cells with emphasis on the

electrical terminal characteristics eg [412]ndash[416] A detailed explanation of the

electrochemical properties of fuel cells and a simple equivalent electrical circuit

including a capacitor due to the double-layer charging effect inside fuel cells are reported

in [417]

In this dissertation dynamic models are presented for PEMFCs using electrical

circuits First through mechanistic analysis the equivalent internal voltage source and

equivalent resistors for activation loss ohmic voltage drop and concentration voltage

drop are given Then the double-layer charging effect is considered by adding an

equivalent capacitor to the circuit The thermodynamic characteristic inside the fuel cell

is also integrated into the model according to the energy balance equation A dynamic

model is built in MATLABSIMULINKreg and an electrical model is developed in Pspicereg

using equivalent electrical components from an electrical engineerrsquos point of view

Simulation results are given and validated with experimental data both for steady-state

and transient responses of PEMFCs The models show great potential to be useful in

91

other related studies such as real-time control of fuel cells and hybrid alternative energy

systems

Dynamic Model Development

In this section a mathematical approach is presented for building a dynamic model for

a PEMFC stack To simplify the analysis the following assumptions are made [41]

[45] [48] [417] [418]

(1) One-dimensional treatment

(2) Ideal and uniformly distributed gases

(3) Constant pressures in the fuel cell gas flow channels

(4) The fuel is humidified H2 and the oxidant is humidified air Assume the effective

anode water vapor pressure is 50 of the saturated vapor pressure while the

effective cathode water pressure is 100

(5) The fuel cell works under 100 ˚C and the reaction product is in liquid phase

(6) Thermodynamic properties are evaluated at the average stack temperature

temperature variations across the stack are neglected and the overall specific heat

capacity of the stack is assumed to be a constant

(7) Parameters for individual cells can be lumped together to represent a fuel cell

stack

A schematic diagram of a PEMFC and its internal voltage drops are shown in Figure

41

92

Gas Diffusion in the Electrodes In order to calculate the fuel cell output voltage

the effective partial pressures of H2 and O2 need to be determined In a gas mixture

consisting of N species the diffusion of component i through the porous electrodes can

be described by the Stefan-Maxwell formulation [41] [45]

sum=

minus=nabla

N

j ji

ijji

iD

NxNx

P

RTx

1

(41)

where xi (xj) = Mole fractions of species i (j)

Dij = effective binary diffusivity of i-j pair (m2s)

Ni(Nj) = Superficial gas flux of species i (j) [mol(m2middots)]

R = gas constant 83143 J(molmiddotK)

T = gas temperature (K)

P = overall pressure of the gas mixture (Pa)

93

Gas

Flow

Channel

Anode

Electrode

Cathode

Electrode

Membrane

Catalyst

Layers

H2O

H2

H2O

O2

N2

CO2

H+

0x

Vout

E

aohmV

membraneohmV

actV

concV

cohmV

Load

e- e-

Gas

Flow

Channel

Figure 41 Schematic diagram of a PEMFC and voltage drops across it

In the anode channel the gas stream is a mixture of H2 and H2O(g) The molar flux of

water (in gas phase) normal to anode surface OHN 2 can be set to zero according to

assumptions (1) ndash (3)

In the one-dimensional transport process along the x axis shown in Figure 41 the

diffusion of water can be simplified as

=

minus=

22

22

22

22222

HOH

HOH

aHOH

OHHHOH

a

OH

D

Nx

P

RT

D

NxNx

P

RT

dx

dx (42)

where Pa = overall gas pressure at the anode (Pa)

The molar flux of H2 can be determined by Faradayrsquos Law [41] [420]

94

F

IN den

H2

2 = (43)

where Iden = current density (Am2)

F = Faraday constant (96487 Cmol)

By combining (42) and (43) and integrating the expression with respect to x from the

anode channel to the catalyst surface it gives

=

22

2

22

expHOHa

adench

OHOHDFP

lRTIxx (44)

where la = distance from anode surface to the reaction site (m)

Superscript denotes the effective value

Superscript ldquochrdquo denotes the conditions at the anode or cathode channel

Since 1

2

2 =+ HOH xx the effective partial pressure of H2 is

)1(

2

2

2

2 OH

OH

OHH x

x

pp minus= (45)

According to assumption (4)

2OHp at the anode is sat

OHp 250 Therefore

2Hp is

given as [41]

minus

= 1

2exp

150

22

2

2

2

HOHa

adench

OH

sat

OHH

DFP

lRTIx

pp (46)

Superscript ldquosatrdquo denotes the condition of saturation

The gases flowing in the cathode channel are O2 N2 H2O(g) and CO2 Using (41) the

diffusion of H2O(g) at the cathode side can be obtained from

95

minus=

minus=

22

22

22

22222

OOH

OOH

cOOH

OOHOHO

c

OH

D

Nx

P

RT

D

NxNx

P

RT

dx

dx (47)

where Pc = overall gas pressure at the cathode (Pa)

Similar to the analysis for anode the effective molar fraction of water at the cathode

catalyst interface can be found as

=

22

2

24

expOOHc

cdench

OHOHDFP

lRTIxx (48)

where lc = distance from cathode surface to the reaction site (m)

Through similar analytical procedures [equations (47)-(48)] the effective molar

fraction of N2 and CO2 can also be determined

=

22

2

24

expONc

cdench

NNDFP

lRTIxx (49)

=

22

2

24

expOCOc

cdench

COCODFP

lRTIxx (410)

The effective molar fraction of O2 is

2

2

2

2 1 CONOHO xxxx minusminusminus= (411)

And the corresponding effective partial pressure of O2 is

)1(

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2 CONOH

OH

OH

O

OH

OH

O xxxx

px

x

pp minusminusminus== (412)

According to assumption (4)

2OHp at the cathode equals sat

OHp 2 and the above

equation can be rewritten as

minus

minusminus= 1

1

2

2

22

2

OH

CONsat

OHOx

xxpp (413)

96

2Hp and

2Op calculated from (46) and (413) will be used in the Nernst equation to

find the fuel cell output voltage In the following subsection material balance equations

will be developed which will also be used to determine the fuel cell output voltage

Material Conservation Equations The instantaneous change in the effective partial

pressures of hydrogen and oxygen can be determined through the ideal gas equations as

follows [422]

F

iM

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

VnetHoutHinH

Ha

22222

2 minus=minusminus= (414)

where Va = volume of anode channel (m3)

MH2 = H2 mole flow rate (mols)

i = fuel cell current (A)

Subscripts ldquoinrdquo ldquooutrdquo and ldquonetrdquo denote the values related to input output and

net

F

iM

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

VnetOoutOinO

Oc

44222

2 minus=minusminus= (415)

where Vc = volume of cathode channel (m3)

MO2 = O2 mole flow rate (mols)

At steady-state all partial pressures are considered to be kept constant ie

0

2

2 ==dt

dp

dt

dp OH (416)

Therefore the net mole flow rates of H2 and O2 at steady-state are

F

IMM netOnetH

22 22 == (417)

Under transient state there are delays between the change in the load current and the

97

flow of fuel and oxidant The following relationships are used to represent these delay

effects

netO

netO

c

netH

netH

a

MF

i

dt

dM

MF

i

dt

dM

2

2

2

2

4

2

minus=

minus=

τ

τ (418)

where τa = fuel flow delay (s)

τc = oxidant flow delay (s)

Fuel Cell Output Voltage The overall reaction in a PEMFC can be simply written

as

)(2222

1lOHOH =+ (419)

According to assumption (5) the corresponding Nernst equation used to calculate the

reversible potential is [420]

[ ]50

2

20 )(ln2

OHcellcell ppF

RTEE sdot+= (420)

where Ecell = reversible potential of each cell (V)

E0cell is the reference potential which is a function of temperature and can be

expressed as follows [41]

)298(00 minusminus= TkEE E

o

cellcell (421)

where o

cellE 0= standard reference potential at standard state 298 K and 1atm pressure

To simplify the analysis a voltage Edcell is considered to be subtracted from the right

side of (420) for the overall effect of the fuel and oxidant delay The steady-state value

of Edcell is zero but it will show the influence of the fuel and oxidant delays on the fuel

98

cell output voltage during load transients It can be written as

[ ])exp()()( eecelld ttitiE τλ minusotimesminus= (422)

where λe = constant factor in calculating Ed (Ω)

τe = overall flow delay (s)

where ldquootimesrdquo is the convolution operator Converting (422) to the Laplace domain we get

1)()( +

=s

ssIsE

e

eecelld τ

τλ (423)

Equation (423) is used for developing models both in SIMULINK and Pspice The

internal potential Ecell in (420) now becomes

[ ] celldOHcellcell EppF

RTEE

50

2

20 )(ln2

minussdot+= (424)

Ecell calculated from (424) is actually the open-circuit voltage of the fuel cell

However under normal operating conditions the fuel cell output voltage is less than Ecell

Activation loss ohmic resistance voltage drop and concentration overpotential are

voltage drops across the fuel cell as shown in Figure 41 [418] Therefore

cellconccellohmcellactcellcell VVVEV minusminusminus= (425)

where Vcell = output voltage of a single cell (V)

Vactcell = activation voltage drop of a single cell (V)

Vohmcell = ohmic voltage drop of a single cell (V)

Vconccell = concentration voltage drop of a single cell (V)

Applying assumption 7) the output voltage of the fuel cell stack can be obtained as

concohmactcellcellout VVVEVNV minusminusminus== (426)

where Vout = output voltage of the fuel cell stack (V)

99

Ncell = number of cells in the stack (V)

Vact = overall activation voltage drop (V)

Vohm = overall ohmic voltage drop (V)

Vconc = overall concentration voltage drop (V)

To calculate the fuel cell output voltage the following estimations are used

1) Activation Voltage Drop Tafel equation given below is used to calculate the

activation voltage drop in a fuel cell [418]

[ ])ln()ln(0

IbaTI

I

zF

RTVact +sdot==

α (427)

On the other hand an empirical equation for Vact is given in [41] where a constant

(η0) is added to (427) as follows

210 )ln()298( actactact VVIbTaTV +=sdot+sdotminus+=η (428)

where η0 a b = empirical constants terms

Vact1=(η0+(T-298)middota) is the voltage drop affected only by the fuel cell internal

temperature while Vact2=(Tmiddotbmiddotln(I)) is both current and temperature dependent

The equivalent resistance of activation corresponding to Vact2 is defined as

I

IbT

I

VR actact

)ln(2 sdot== (429)

2) Ohmic Voltage Drop The ohmic resistance of a PEMFC consists of the resistance

of polymer membrane the conducting resistance between the membrane and electrodes

and the resistances of electrodes The overall ohmic voltage drop can be expressed as

ohmcohmmembraneohmaohmohm IRVVVV =++= (430)

ohmR is also a function of current and temperature [41]

100

TkIkRR RTRIohmohm minus+= 0 (431)

where Rohm0 = constant part of the Rohm

kRI = empirical constant in calculating Rohmic (ΩA)

kRT = empirical constant in calculating Rohmic (ΩK)

The values of kRI and kRT used in the simulation study are given in Table 43

3) Concentration Voltage Drop During the reaction process concentration gradients

can be formed due to mass diffusions from the flow channels to the reaction sites

(catalyst surfaces) At high current densities slow transportation of reactants (products)

to (from) the reaction sites is the main reason for the concentration voltage drop [418]

Any water film covering the catalyst surfaces at the anode and cathode can be another

contributor to this voltage drop [41] The concentration overpotential in the fuel cell is

defined as [418]

B

Sconc

C

C

zF

RTV lnminus= (432)

where CS is the surface concentration and CB is the bulk concentration

According to Fickrsquos first law and Faradayrsquos law [420] the above equation can be

rewritten as

)1ln(limit

concI

I

zF

RTV minusminus= (433)

where Ilimi = limitation current (A)

z = number of electrons participating

The equivalent resistance for the concentration loss is

101

)1ln(limit

concconc

I

I

zFI

RT

I

VR minusminus== (434)

Double-Layer Charging Effect In a PEMFC the two electrodes are separated by a

solid membrane (Figure 41) which only allows the H+ ions to pass but blocks the

electron flow [417] [418] The electrons will flow from the anode through the external

load and gather at the surface of the cathode to which the protons of hydrogen will be

attracted at the same time Thus two charged layers of opposite polarity are formed

across the boundary between the porous cathode and the membrane [417] [421] The

layers known as electrochemical double-layer can store electrical energy and behave

like a super-capacitor The equivalent circuit of fuel cell considering this effect is given

in Figure 42 which is similar to the circuit reported in [417] But the values of Ract [see

(429)] and the voltage source are different from what are defined in [417] Ract in [417]

is defined as VactI and the value of voltage source used in [417] is E

Figure 42 Equivalent circuit of the double-layer charging effect inside a PEMFC

In the above circuit C is the equivalent capacitor due to double-layer charging effect

Since the electrodes of a PEMFC are porous the capacitance C is very large and can be

in the order of several Farads [417] [426] Ract and Rconc are equivalent resistances of

102

activation and concentration voltage drops which can be calculated according to (429)

and (434) The voltage across C is

))(( concactC

C RRdt

dVCIV +minus= (435)

The double-layer charging effect is integrated into the modeling by using VC instead

of Vact2 and Vconc to calculate Vout The fuel cell output voltage now turns out to be

ohmCactout VVVEV minusminusminus= 1 (436)

Energy Balance of the Thermodynamics The net heat generated by the chemical

reaction inside the fuel cell which causes its temperature to rise or fall can be written as

losslatentsenselecchemnet qqqqq ampampampampamp minusminusminus= + (437)

where qnet = net heat energy (J)

qchem = Chemical or heat energy (J)

qelec = Electrical energy (J)

qloss = Heat loss (J)

The available power released due to chemical reaction is calculated by

Hnq consumedHchem ∆sdot= 2ampamp (438)

where ∆H = the enthalpy change of the chemical reaction inside the fuel cell

consumedHn 2

amp = H2 consumption rate (mols)

The maximum available amount of electrical energy is [418] [420]

[ ]50

2

20 )(ln OH ppRTGSTHG sdotminus∆=∆minus∆=∆ (439)

where ∆G = Gibbs free energy (Jmol)

103

∆G0 = Gibbs free energy at standard condition4 (Jmol)

∆S = entropy change (JmolmiddotK-1)

The electrical output power is computed as

IVq outelec sdot=amp (440)

The sensible and latent heat absorbed during the process can be estimated by the

following equation [48] [422]

( )( )

VgeneratedOH

lOHroomgeneratedOH

OroominOoutO

HroominHoutHlatentsens

Hn

CTTn

CTnTn

CTnTnq

sdot+

sdotminussdot+

sdotsdotminussdot+

sdotsdotminussdot=+

2

22

222

222

)(

amp

amp

ampamp

ampampamp

(441)

where qsens+latent = sensible and latent heat (J)

inamp = flow rate of species i (mols)

Ci = specific heat capacity of species i [J(molmiddotK)]

HV = Vaporization heat of water (Jmol)

Troom = room temperature (K)

The heat loss which is mainly transferred by air convection can be estimated by the

following formula [422]

cellcellroomcellloss ANTThq )( minus=amp (442)

where hcell = convective heat transfer coefficient [W(m2middotK)] It can be obtained through

experiments [48]

At steady state netqamp = 0 and the fuel cell operates at a constant temperature During

transitions the temperature of fuel cell will rise or drop according to the following

4 1atm 298K

104

equation [422]

netFCFC qdt

dTCM amp= (443)

where MFC is the total mass of the fuel cell stack and CFC is the overall specific heat

capacity of the stack

Dynamic Model Built in MatlabSimulink

A dynamic model for the PEMFC has been developed in MATLABSIMULINK

based on the electrochemical and thermodynamic characteristics of the fuel cell discussed

in the previous section The fuel cell output voltage which is a function of temperature

and load current can be obtained from the model Figure 43 shows the block diagram

based on which the MATLABSIMULINK model has been developed In this figure the

input quantities are anode and cathode pressures initial temperature of the fuel cell and

room temperature At any given load current and time the internal temperature T is

determined and both the load current and temperature are fed back to different blocks

which take part in the calculation of the fuel cell output voltage

105

Mass DiffusionEquations

Thermodynamic Equations

Nernst EquationActivation

Loss CalculationOhmic VoltageDrop Calculation

ConcentrationLoss Calculation

Double-layer Charging Effect

x

Vout

Pa

PcTroom

I

T

Load

Input Output Feedback

- -

+Tinitial

Material Conservation(Fuel amp Oxdiant Delay)

x+-

Figure 43 Diagram of building a dynamic model of PEMFC in SIMULINK

In this block diagram mass diffusion equations (41)-(413) are used to calculate the

effective partial pressures of H2 and O2 Then the Nernst equation (420) and the overall

fuel and oxidant delay effect given by (422) are employed to determine the internal

potential (E) of the fuel cell The ohmic voltage drop equations (430)-(431) activation

voltage drop equations (427)-(429) and concentration voltage drop equations

(433)-(434) together with the double-layer charging effect equation (435) are applied to

determine the terminal (output) voltage of the fuel cell Thermodynamic effects are also

considered via energy balance equations (437)-(443)

Equivalent Electrical Model in Pspice

In practice fuel cells normally work together with other electrical devices such as

power electronic converters Pspice is a valuable simulation tool used to model and

investigate the behavior of electrical devices and circuits An electrical equivalent model

of fuel cell built in Pspice can be used with electrical models of other components to

106

study the performance characteristics of the fuel cell power generation unit A block

diagram to build such model for PEMFC is given in Figure 44 which is also based on

the characteristics discussed previously The development of electrical circuit model for

different blocks in Figure 44 is discussed below

Internal Potential E According to (420)-(426) the internal potential E is a

function of load current and temperature An electrical circuit for the internal potential

block is given in Figure 45 The current and temperature controlled voltage source f1(IT)

in the figure represents the current and temperature dependent part of (420) Note that

the effective partial pressures (

2Hp and

2Op ) given in (420) are current dependent The

current controlled voltage source f2(I) stands for Edcell in (422)

[ ] )298()(ln2

)( 50

2

21 minus+sdotminus= TkNppF

RTNTIf EcellOH

cell (444)

celldcellENIf 2 )( = (445)

C

I

InternalPotential E

Activation Concentration

ThermodynamicBlockTroom

Tinitial

T

TT

Ohmic

T

T

Vout

Figure 44 Diagram of building an electrical model of PEMFC in Pspice

107

f1(IT)

oE0

f2(I)

E

I

Figure 45 Electrical circuit for internal potential E

Circuit for Activation Loss From (428) the activation voltage drop can be divided

into two parts Vact1 and Vact2 Vact1 can be modeled by a constant voltage source in series

with a temperature controlled voltage source Vact2 can be represented by a temperature

and current dependent resistor Ract This resistor is assumed to be composed of a

constant-value resistor (Ract0) a current-dependent resistor (Ract1) and a

temperature-dependent resistor (Ract2) A current-dependent resistor can be easily built in

Pspice by using the polynomial current controlled voltage source model ldquoHPOLYrdquo A

temperature-dependent resistor can be built by Analog Behavioral Models (ABMs) in

Pspice [424] The electrical circuit for activation voltage drop is given in Figure 46 In

this figure with reference to (428) we can write

Ract0

f3(T)

Ract1

Ract2

I

Vact1

Vact2

Vact

Figure 46 Electrical circuit for activation loss

108

aTTf sdotminus= )298()(3 (446)

210 actactactact RRRR ++= (447)

Circuits for Ohmic and Concentration Voltage Drops According to (431) and

(434) both Rohm and Rconc are current and temperature dependent resistors Therefore

they can be modeled in Pspice the same way Ract is modeled Figure 47 shows the

equivalent circuit for ohmic voltage drop

210 ohmohmohmohm RRRR ++= (448)

Rohm0 is the constant part of Rohm With reference to (431) Rohm1=kRImiddotI is the

current-dependent part of Rohm and Rohm2 =-kRTmiddotT is its temperature-dependent part

Rohm0

Rohm1

Rohm2 I

Vohm

Figure 47 Electrical circuit for ohmic voltage drop

The electrical circuit model for concentration voltage drop is shown in Figure 48

210 concconcconcconc RRRR ++= (449)

where Rconc0 is the constant part of Rconc and Rconc1 Rconc2 are its current-dependent

and temperature-dependent parts

109

Rconc0

Rconc1

Rconc2 I

Vconc

Figure 48 Electrical circuit for concentration voltage drop

Equivalent Capacitor of Double-layer Charging Effect In Figure 44 C is the

equivalent capacitance of double-layer charging effect discussed in the previous section

This capacitance can be estimated through the measurement of the dynamic response of a

real fuel cell stack [417] Figure 42 shows how this capacitance is added into the circuit

Thermodynamic Block The analogies between the thermodynamic and electrical

quantities given in Table 41 are employed to develop the electrical circuit model for the

thermodynamic block shown in Figure 44 [423] The thermodynamic property inside the

fuel cell (437)-(443) can therefore be simulated by the circuit shown in Figure 49 The

power consumed by activation ohmic and concentration losses is considered as the heat

source which causes the fuel cell temperature to rise

IVEq outin sdotminus= )(amp (450)

The thermal resistance due to air convection is

)(1 cellcellcellT ANhR sdotsdot= (451)

In Figure 49 the constant voltage source ET represents the environmental

temperature and the voltage across the capacitance (Ch) is the overall temperature of the

fuel cell stack T

110

Environmental

Temperature

RT = Thermal Resistance

Ch = Heat Capacity

RT2 R

T2

Ch

inqamp

T

ET

Figure 49 Equivalent circuit of thermodynamic property inside PEMFC

TABLE 41 ANALOGIES BETWEEN THERMODYNAMIC AND ELECTRICAL QUANTITIES

Electrical Potential U (V) Temperature T(K)

Electrical Current I (A) Heat Flow Rate Ph (W)

Electrical Resistance R (Ohm) Thermal Resistance θ (KW)

Electrical Capacitance C (F) Heat Capacity Ch (JK)

URI = TθPh =

dt

dUCI =

dt

dTCP hh =

Model Validation

By applying the equations and the equivalent electrical circuits discussed in the

previous sections dynamic models for an Avista Labs (Relion now) SR-12 PEMFC stack

were built both in MATLABSIMULINK and Pspice environments The specifications of

SR-12 fuel cell stack are given in Table 42 [425] The electrical model parameter values

used in the simulation studies are listed in Table 43

111

TABLE 42 SPECIFICATIONS OF SR-12

Description Value

Capacity 500W

Number of cells 48

Operating environmental temperature 5degC to 35degC

Operating pressures PH2 asymp 15atm

Pcathode asymp 10atm

Unit Dimensions (WtimesDtimesH) 565times615times345 cm

Weight 44kg

The 9995 pure hydrogen flows at manifold pressure of about 7psi The

environmental air is driven by the SR-12rsquos internal fan to pass through the cathode to

provide oxygen

Experimental Setup To validate the models built in SIMULINK and Pspice real

input and output data were measured on the 500W SR-12 Avista Labs (Relion now)

PEMFC The block diagram of the experimental setup is shown in Figure 410 The

Chroma 63112 programmable electronic load was used as a current load Current signals

were measured by LEM LA100-P current transducers the output voltage was measured

by a LEM LV25-P voltage transducer and the temperature was measured by a k-type

thermocouple together with an analog connector The current voltage and temperature

data were all acquired by a 12-bit Advantech data acquisition card in a PC

112

TABLE 43 ELECTRICAL MODEL PARAMETER VALUES FOR SR-12 STACK

oE0 (V) 589 Ch (F) 22000

kE (VK) 000085 RT (Ω) 00347

τe (s) 800 C (F) 01F (48F for each cell)

λe (Ω) 000333 Rohm0 (Ω) 02793

η0 (V) 20145 Rohm1 (Ω) 0001872timesI

a (VK) -01373 Rohm2 (Ω) -00023712times(T-298)

Ract0 (Ω) 12581 Rconc0 (Ω) 0080312

Ract2 (Ω) 000112times(T-298) Rconc2 (Ω) 00002747times (T-298)

Ract1 (Ω) III

II

311600454501043

10223211067771

233

4456

minus+timesminus

times+timesminusminus

minusminus

Rconc1 (Ω) III

III

010542000555400100890

106437810457831022115

23

455668

minus+minus

times+timesminustimes minusminusminus

Chroma 63112

Programmable

Electronic Load

LEM LV25-P

Voltage

Transducer

LEM LA100-P

Current Transducer

Omega SMCJ

Thermocouple-to-

Analog Connector

PC with an Advantech PCI-1710

12-Bit Data Acquisition Card

K-Type

Thermocouple

SR-12

Internal

Circuit

SR-12

PEMFC

Stack

Istack

Iterminal

Figure 410 Experimental configuration on the SR-12 PEMFC stack

113

Steady-State Characteristics The steady state characteristics of SR-12 were

obtained by increasing the load current from 11A to 205A in steps of 02A every 40

seconds Both the stack current and terminal current (Figure 410) were measured but

only the stack current is used to validate the models since it is the current directly from

the fuel cell stack The experimental average value of V-I curve of the fuel cell is shown

in Figure 411 The steady-state responses of the models in SIMULINK and Pspice are

also given in Figure 411 in order to compare them with the experimental data Both the

SIMULINK and Pspice model responses agree very well with the real data from the fuel

cell stack The voltage drop at the beginning and end of the curves shown in Figure 411

are due to activation and concentration losses respectively The voltage drop in the

middle of the curves (which is approximately linear) is due to the ohmic loss in the fuel

cell stack [418]

Figure 412 shows the power vs current (P-I) curves of the PEMFC stack obtained

from the experimental data and the models The model responses also match well with

experimental data in this case Note that peak output power occurs near the fuel cell rated

output beyond which the fuel cell goes into the concentration zone In this region the

fuel cell output power will decrease with increasing load current due to a sharp decrease

in its terminal voltage

114

5 10 15 20 2522

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

Load Current (A)

PEMFC Output Voltage (V)

Average Value of the Measured DataResponse of the Model in SIMULINKResponse of the Model in Pspice

Upper range of the measured data

Lower range of the measured data

Figure 411 V-I characteristics of SR-12 and models

0 5 10 15 20 250

100

200

300

400

500

600

Load Current (A)

PEMFC Output Power (W)

Average Value of Measured DataModel in SIMULINKModel in Pspice

Lower range of the measured data

Upper range of the measured data

Figure 412 P-I characteristics of SR-12 and models

115

Temperature Response The temperature response of the PEMFC stack shown in

Figure 413 was measured under the same ramp load current as given in the previous

sub-section The temperature was measured as the current increased from 11A to 205A

with a slew rate of 5mAs The temperature response of the SIMULINK and Pspice

models are also given in Figure 413 for comparison with the measured values Although

there are some differences between the model responses and the measured data the

models can predict the temperature response of the fuel cell stack within 35K in the

worst case

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000306

308

310

312

314

316

318

320

Time (s)

Temperature Responses (K)

Measured Data

Model in SIMULINK

Model in Pspice

Figure 413 Temperature responses of the SR 12 stack and models

116

Transient Performance The dynamic property of PEMFC depends mainly on the

following three aspects double-layer charging effects fuel and oxidant flow delays and

thermodynamic characteristics inside the fuel cells Although the capacitance (C) due to

the double-layer charging effect is large (in the order of several Farads for each cell) the

time constant τ=(Ract+Rconc)middotC is normally small (less than 1 second) because (Ract+Rconc)

is small (less than 005Ω for the single cell used in this study) when the fuel cell works in

the linear zone Therefore capacitor C will affect the transient response of PEMFC in the

short time range The transient responses of the models to a fast step load change are

given in Figure 414 It is noted that when the load current steps up the voltage drops

simultaneously to some value due to the voltage drop across Rohm and then it decays

exponentially to its steady-state value due to the capacitance (C)

On the other hand the fuel and oxidant flows cannot follow the load current changes

instantaneously The delays can be in the range from several tens of seconds to several

hundreds of seconds Also the temperature of fuel cell stack cannot change

instantaneously The thermodynamic time constant of a PEMFC can be in the order of

minutes Thus the fuel and oxidant flow delays and the thermodynamic characteristics

will normally dominate the transient responses in the long time operation The

corresponding SIMULINK and Pspice model responses are given in Figure 415 From

this figure it is noticed that the voltage drops below its steady-state value when the load

steps up and then recovers back to its steady-state value in a relatively long time range (in

the order of about hundred seconds to several minutes) As shown in Figures 414 and

415 simulation results agree well with the measured data

117

209 2095 210 2105 211 2115 212 212526

28

30

32

34

36

38

Time (s)

Dynamic Responses in Short Time Range (V)

Measured DataModel in SIMULINKModel in Pspice

Model in Simulink

Model in Pspice

Measured Data

Figure 414 Transient responses of the models in short time range

400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 200026

28

30

32

34

36

38

Time (s)

PEMFC Dynamic Response (V)

Measured DataModel in SIMULINK

Model in Pspice

Measured Data Model in Pspice

Model in SIMULINK

Figure 415 Transient responses of the models in long time range

118

Dynamic Models for SOFC

Introduction

Solid oxide fuel cells are advanced electrochemical energy conversion devices

operating at a high temperature converting the chemical energy of fuel into electric

energy at high efficiency They have many advantages over conventional power plants

and show great promise in stationary power generation applications [427] [428] The

energy conversion efficiency of a SOFC stack can reach up to 65 and its overall

efficiency when used in combined heat and power (CHP) applications ie as an

integrated SOFC-combustion turbine system can even reach 70 [429] Despite slow

start-up and thermal stresses due to the high operating temperature SOFC allows for

internal reforming of gaseous fuel inside the fuel cell which gives its multi-fuel

capability [418] [430]

SOFC modeling is of interest for its performance prediction and controller design

Many SOFC models have been developed some are highly theoretical and are based on

empirical equations eg [431]-[433] and some are more application oriented

[434]-[437] Increased interest in SOFC power plant design and control has led to a

need for appropriate application oriented SOFC models An integrated SOFC plant

dynamic model for power system simulation (PSS) software was presented in [434]

Three operation limits of SOFC power plants were addressed in that paper in order to

achieve a safe and durable cell operation However the thermodynamic properties of

SOFCs were not discussed in the paper A transient model of a tubular SOFC consisting

of an electrochemical model and a thermal model was given in [435] However the

119

dynamic response of the model due to load variations was only investigated in large

(minute) time scale

In this section a dynamic model of a tubular SOFC stack is presented based on its

thermodynamic and electrochemical properties and on the mass and energy conservation

laws with emphasis on the fuel cell electrical (terminal) characteristics The SOFC model

implemented in MATLABSimulinkreg mainly consists of an electrochemical sub-model

and a thermodynamic sub-model The double-layer charging effect [439] is also taken

into account in the model The model responses are studied under both constant fuel flow

and constant fuel utilization operating modes The effect of temperature on the

steady-state V-I (output voltage vs current) and P-I (output power vs current)

characteristics are also studied The dynamic responses of the model are given and

discussed in different time scales ie from small time scale (10-3-10

-1 s) to large time

scale (102-10

3s) The temperature response of the model is given as well The SOFC

model has been used to study the SOFC overloading capability and to investigate the

performance of a SOFC distributed generation system which is reported in Chapters 5

and 6 The model shows the potential to be useful in SOFC related studies such as

real-time control of SOFC and its distributed generation applications

Dynamic Model Development

In this section a mathematical approach is presented for building a dynamic model for

a tubular SOFC fuel cell stack To simplify the analysis the following assumptions are

made

(1) One-dimensional treatment

120

(2) O= conducting electrolytes and ideal gases

(3) H2 fuel and large stoichiometric quantity of O2 at cathode

(4) H2 and O2 partial pressure are uniformly decreased along the anode channel while

the water vapor partial pressure is uniformly increased for normal operations

(5) Lumped thermal capacitance is used in the thermodynamic analysis and the

effective temperature of flowing gases in gas channels (anode and cathode

channels) is represented by its arithmetical mean value ( ) 2out

gas

in

gas

ch

gas TTT +=

(6) The combustion zone is not modeled in this SOFC thermal model The fuel and

air are assumed to be pre-heated

(7) Parameters for individual cells can be lumped together to represent a fuel cell

stack

A schematic diagram of a SOFC is shown in Figure 416 Two porous electrodes

(anode and cathode) are separated by a solid ceramic electrolyte This electrolyte material

(normally dense yttria-stabilized zirconia) is an excellent conductor for negatively

charged ions (such as O=) at high temperatures [418] At the cathode oxygen molecules

accept electrons from the external circuit and change to oxygen ions These negative ions

pass across the electrolyte and combine with hydrogen at the anode to produce water

For the details of principle of operation of SOFC the reader is referred to [418]

[427]-[429]

Effective Partial Pressures In this part expressions for H2 O2 and H2O partial

pressures at anode and cathode channels and their effective values at actual reaction sites

are derived in terms of the fuel cell operating parameters (eg fuel cell temperature fuel

121

and oxidant flow rates and anode and cathode inlet pressures) and the physical and

electrochemical parameters of the fuel cell These partial pressure values will be used to

calculate the fuel cell output voltage

Figure 416 Schematic diagram of a solid oxide fuel cell

As shown in Figure 416 when load current is being drawn H2 and O2 will diffuse

through the porous electrodes to reach the reaction sites and the reactant H2O will diffuse

from the reaction sites to the anode channel As a result H2 H2O and O2 partial pressure

gradients will be formed along the anode and cathode channels when the fuel cell is

under load Assuming uniform variation of gas partial pressures [assumption (4)] the

arithmetic mean values are used to present the overall effective gas partial pressures in

the channels

2

22

2

out

H

in

Hch

H

ppp

+= (452a)

122

2

22

2

out

OH

in

OHch

OH

ppp

+= (452b)

2

22

2

out

O

in

Och

O

ppp

+= (453)

The effective partial pressures of H2 and O2 at the actual reaction sites will be less

than those in the gas flow channels due to mass diffusion In contrast the vapor partial

pressure at reaction sites is higher than that in the anode flow channel In order to

calculate the fuel cell output voltage the effective partial pressures of H2 H2O and O2 at

the reaction sites need to be determined In a gas mixture consisting of N species the

diffusion of component i through the porous electrodes can be described by the

Stefan-Maxwell formulation [41]

sum=

minus=nabla

N

j ji

ijji

iD

NxNx

P

RTx

1

(454)

where xi (xj) = Mole fractions of species i (j)

Dij = effective binary diffusivity of i-j pair (m2s)

Ni(Nj) = Superficial gas flux of species i (j) [mol(m2middots)]

R = gas constant 83143 J(molmiddotK)

T = gas temperature (K)

P = overall pressure of the gas mixture (Pa)

In the anode channel the gas stream is a mixture of H2 and H2O In the

one-dimensional transport process along the x axis shown in Figure 416 the diffusion of

H2 can be simplified as

123

minus=

OHH

HOHOHH

ch

a

H

D

NxNx

P

RT

dx

dx

22

22222

(455)

The molar flux of H2 and H2O can be determined by Faradayrsquos Law [420]

F

iNN den

OHH222

=minus= (456)

Note that 122=+ OHH xx then (455) can be written as

F

i

D

RT

dx

dpden

OHH

H

222

2

minus= (457)

Similarly we can get the one-dimensional Stefan-Maxwell diffusion equation for

H2O

F

i

D

RT

dx

dpden

OHH

OH

222

2

= (458)

Integrating equations (457) and (458) with respect to x from the anode channel

surface to the actual reaction site will yield

den

OHH

ach

HH iFD

RTlpp

22

22

2minus= (459)

den

OHH

ach

OHOH iFD

RTlpp

22

22

2+= (460)

In the cathode channel the oxidant is air that mainly consists of O2 and N2 that is

122asymp+ NO xx Applying the same procedure as above the one-dimensional

Stefan-Maxwell diffusion equation for O2 can be expressed as

minus=

22

22222

NO

ONNO

ch

c

O

D

NxNx

P

RT

dx

dx (461)

124

Since nitrogen does not take part in the chemical reaction the net nitrogen molar flux

normal to the cathode surface can be set to zero

02=NN (462)

The molar flux of O2 is determined by Faradayrsquos Law

F

iN den

O42

= (463)

Equation (461) can now be rewritten as

)1(4 2

22

2

minus= O

NO

ch

c

denOx

DFP

RTi

dx

dx (464)

Similar to the analysis for the anode the effective partial pressure of oxygen at the

reaction site can be found as

( )

minusminus=

22

22

4exp

NO

ch

c

cdench

O

ch

c

ch

cODFP

lRTipPPp (465)

2Hp

2OHp and

2Op calculated from (459) (460) and (465) will be used in the

Nernst equation to find the fuel cell output voltage In the following subsection material

balance equations which will be also used to determine the fuel cell output voltage will

be developed

Material Conservation Equations The instantaneous change of the effective partial

pressures of hydrogen and water vapor in the anode gas flow channel can be determined

through the ideal gas equations as follows [422]

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

V out

H

in

H

ch

Ha

222

2 minusminus= (466a)

125

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

V out

OH

in

OH

ch

OHa

222

2 +minus= (466b)

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

V out

O

in

O

ch

Oc

422

2 minusminus= (467)

Based on assumption (3) mass flow rate for H2 H2O and O2 at the inlet and outlet of

the flow channels can be expressed as

sdot=sdot=

sdot=sdot=

ch

a

out

H

a

out

Ha

out

H

ch

a

in

H

a

in

Ha

in

H

P

pMxMM

P

pMxMM

2

22

2

22

(468a)

sdot=sdot=

sdot=sdot=

ch

a

out

OH

a

out

OHa

out

OH

ch

a

in

OH

a

in

OHa

in

OH

P

pMxMM

P

pMxMM

2

22

2

22

(468b)

sdot=sdot=

sdot=sdot=

ch

c

out

O

c

out

Oc

out

O

ch

c

in

O

c

in

Oc

in

O

P

pMxMM

P

pMxMM

2

22

2

22

(469)

Rewriting (466) and (467) will give

iFV

RTp

PV

RTMp

PV

RTM

dt

dp

a

ch

Hch

aa

ain

Hch

aa

a

ch

H

2

2222

2 minusminus= (470a)

iFV

RTp

PV

RTMp

PV

RTM

dt

dp

a

ch

OHch

aa

ain

OHch

aa

a

ch

OH

2

2222

2 +minus= (470b)

iFV

RTp

PV

RTMp

PV

RTM

dt

dp

c

ch

Och

cc

cin

Och

cc

c

ch

O

4

2222

2 minusminus= (471)

Putting the above equations into Laplacersquos form we obtain

126

minus+

+= )(

4)0()(

)1(

1)(

222sI

FM

PPsP

ssP

a

ch

ach

Ha

in

H

a

ch

H ττ

(472a)

++

+= )(

4)0()(

)1(

1)(

222sI

FM

PPsP

ssP

a

ch

ach

OHa

in

OH

a

ch

OH ττ

(472b)

minus+

+= )(

8)0()(

)1(

1)(

222sI

FM

PPsP

ssP

ch

cch

Oc

in

O

c

ch

O ττ

(473)

where the time constant RTM

PV

a

ch

aaa

2=τ and

RTM

PV

c

ch

ccc

2=τ

The physical meaning of the time constant τa is that it will take τa seconds to fill a

tank of volume Va2 at pressure ch

aP if the mass flow rate is Ma Similar physical

meaning holds for τc

Fuel Cell Output Voltage The overall reaction in a solid oxide fuel cell is [418]

)(222 22 gOHOH =+ (474)

where subscript ldquogrdquo indicates the product H2O is in gas form The corresponding Nernst

equation used to calculate the reversible potential is [418] [420]

sdot+=

2

2

0)(

)(ln

42

22

ch

OH

ch

O

ch

H

cellcellp

pp

F

RTEE (475)

E0cell is a function of temperature and can be expressed as [418]

)298(00 minusminus= TkEE E

o

cellcell (476)

where o

cellE 0 is the standard reference potential at standard state 298 K and 1atm

pressure

Ecell calculated from (475) is actually the open-circuit voltage of the fuel cell

127

However when the fuel cell is under load its output voltage is less than Ecell due to

activation loss ohmic resistance voltage drop and concentration overpotential [418]

[431] The output voltage of a cell can therefore be written as

cellconccellohmcellactcellcell VVVEV minusminusminus= (477)

Applying assumption (7) the output voltage of the fuel cell stack can be obtained as

concohmactcellcellout VVVEVNV minusminusminus== (478)

To calculate the fuel cell output voltage the above three voltage drops will be

calculated first

1) Activation Voltage Drop Action voltage loss is caused by an activation energy

barrier that must be overcome before the chemical reaction occurs The Butler-Volmer

equation is normally used to calculate the activation voltage drop [431]

minusminusminus

=RT

zFV

RT

zFVii actact )1(expexp0 ββ (479)

where i0 = apparent exchange current (A)

β = electron transfer coefficient

i0 is the apparent exchange current which is mainly a function of temperature [438]

[439]

)exp( 210 TkTki aa minussdotsdot= (480)

where ka1 ka2 are empirical constants

Under high activation condition the first term in (479) is much higher than the

second term and the well-known Tafel equation can be obtained from (479) by

neglecting its second term [418] thus

128

=

0

lni

i

Fz

RTV cellact β

(481)

Equation (481) will yield an unreasonable value for Vact when i = 0 According to

[438] the value of β is about 05 for fuel cell applications and (479) can be written as

= minus

0

1

2

sinh2

i

i

zF

RTV cellact (482)

The equivalent activation resistance can then be defined as

== minus

0

1

2

sinh2

i

i

zFi

RT

i

VR

cellact

cellact (483)

According to (482) the activation voltage drop will be zero when load current is

zero The ohmic and concentration voltage drops (discussed in the next two sub-sections)

are also zero when the fuel cell is not loaded (i=0) However even the open-circuit

voltage of a SOFC is known to be less than the theoretical value given by (75) [417]

Similar to the computation of activation voltage of a proton exchange membrane fuel cell

[41] a constant and a temperature-dependent term can also be added to (482) for

activation voltage drop computation of SOFC as follows

cellactcellactcellactcellact VViRTV 1010 +=++= ξξ (484)

where ξ0 = constant term of activation voltage drop (V)

ξ1 = temperature coefficient of second term in activation voltage drop (VK)

TV cellact 100 ξξ += is the part of activation drop affected only by the fuel cell internal

temperature while cellactcellact iRV 1 = is both current and temperature dependent

2) Ohmic Voltage Drop The ohmic resistance of a SOFC consists mainly of the

resistance of the electrolyte electrodes and interconnection between fuel cells In this

129

model only ohmic losses of electrolyte and interconnection are included while the

resistance of electrodes is neglected The overall ohmic voltage drop can be expressed as

cellohmintercohmelecytohmcellohm iRVVV =+= (485)

cellohmR normally decrease as temperature increases it can be expressed as [438]

interc

cell

intercintercelecyt

cell

elecytelecyt

cellohmA

Tba

A

TbaR δδ

)exp()exp( += (486)

3) Concentration Voltage Drop During the reaction process concentration gradients

can be formed due to mass diffusion from the flow channels to the reaction sites (catalyst

surfaces) The effective partial pressures of hydrogen and oxygen at the reaction site are

less than those in the electrode channels while the effective partial pressure of water at

the reaction site is higher than that in the anode channel At high current densities slow

transportation of reactants (products) to (from) the reaction site is the main reason for the

concentration voltage drop [417] [418] The concentration overpotential in the fuel cell

can be obtained as

cconcaconc

OH

OH

ch

OH

ch

O

ch

H

cellconc

VV

p

pp

p

pp

F

RTV

2

2

2

2

)(

)(ln

)(

)(ln

42

22

2

22

+=

sdotminus

sdot=

(487)

minus

+=

)2()(1

)2()(1ln

2222

222

ch

HHOHdena

ch

OHHOHdena

aconcpFDiRTl

pFDiRTl

F

RTV (488)

minusminusminus=

22

2

2

4

exp)(1

ln4 NO

ch

c

cdench

O

ch

c

ch

cch

O

cconcDFp

lRTippp

pF

RTV (489)

The equivalent resistance for the concentration voltage drop can be calculated as

130

i

VR

cellconc

cellconc

= (490)

4) Double-layer charging effect In a SOFC the two electrodes are separated by the

electrolyte (Figure 416) and two boundary layers are formed eg anode-electrolyte layer

and electrolyte-cathode layer These layers can be charged by polarization effect known

as electrochemical double-layer charging effect [417] during normal fuel cell operation

The layers can store electrical energy and behave like a super-capacitor The model for

SOFC considering this effect can be described by the equivalent circuit shown in Figure

417 [417] [444]

Figure 417 Equivalent electrical circuit of the double-layer charging effect inside a

SOFC

In the above circuit Rohmcell Ractcell and Rconccell are equivalent resistances of ohmic

voltage drop activation and concentration voltage drops which can be calculated

according to (486) (483) and (490) respectively C is the equivalent capacitance of the

double-layer charging effect Since the electrodes of a SOFC are porous the value of C is

large and can be in the order of several Farads [417] The voltage across C is

))((

cellconccellact

cellC

cellC RRdt

dVCiV +minus= (491)

131

The double-layer charging effect is integrated into the modeling by using VCcell

instead of Vact1cell and Vconccell to calculate Vcell The fuel cell output voltage now turns

out to be

cellohmcellactcellCcellcell VVVEV 0 minusminusminus= (492)

Then (492) and (478) can be used to calculate the output voltage Vout of a SOFC

stack

Energy Balance of the Thermodynamics The cross section profile and heat transfer

inside a tubular SOFC are shown in Figure 418 [418] [440] One advantage of this

tubular structure is that it eliminates the seal problems between cells since the support

tube of each cell is closed at one end [418] The air is fed through a central air supply

tube (AST) and forced to flow back past the interior of the cell (cathode surface) to the

open end The fuel gas flows past the exterior of the cell (anode surface) and in parallel

direction to the air [418]

The thermal analysis for fuel reformer and combustor are not included in this model

Heat exchanges between cells are also not considered in this model by assuming that

temperature differences between adjacent cells can be neglected Heat transport inside the

fuel cell occurs mainly by means of radiation convection and mass flow

The heat generated by the chemical reaction inside the fuel cell can be written as

elecchemgen qqq ampampamp minus= (493)

The available power released due to chemical reaction is calculated by

Hnq consumedHchem ∆sdot= 2ampamp (494)

where ∆H is the enthalpy change of the chemical reaction inside the fuel cell

132

The real electrical output power is

iVq outelec sdot=amp (495)

Air Air Supply Tube

Fuel Cell

Fuel Cell

Fuel

Fuel

qgen

qconvinner

qconvann

qflowairAST

qflowairann q

rad

qfuel conv q

fuel flow

qconvouter

Figure 418 Heat transfer inside a tubular solid oxide fuel cell

The thermodynamic and energy balance analysis for different parts inside the cell are

discussed below [422] [440]

1) Cell Tube

elecchemgencellin qqqq ampampampamp minus== (496a)

fuelflowfuelconvannairflowannconvradcellout qqqqqq ampampampampampamp ++++= (496b)

dt

dTCmqqq cell

cellcellcelloutcellincellnet =minus= ampampamp (496c)

)( 44

ASTcellouterASTASTrad TTAq minus= σεamp (496d)

)( annaircellinnercellcellannconv TTAhq minus=amp (496e)

( )annairoutannairinairairmwairannairflow TTCMMq minus=amp (496f)

133

)( fuelcelloutercellcellfuelconv TTAhq minus=amp (496g)

OHflowHflowfuelflow qqq22

ampampamp += (496h)

22222 ))(( HmwH

in

fuel

out

fuel

out

H

in

HHflow MCTTMMq minus+=amp (496i)

OHmwOH

in

fuel

out

fuel

out

OH

in

OHOHflow MCTTMMq22222 ))(( minus+=amp (496j)

2) Fuel

fuelflowfuelconvfuelin qqq ampampamp += (497a)

fuelflowfuelout qq ampamp = (497b)

dt

dTCmqqq

fuel

fuelfuelfueloutfuelinfuelnet =minus= ampampamp (497c)

3) Air between Cell and Air Supply Tube (AST)

annairflowanncellconvannairin qqq ampampamp += (498a)

annairflowannairout qq ampamp = (498b)

dt

dTCmqqq

annair

airannairannairoutannairinannairnet

=minus= ampampamp (498c)

4) Air Supply Tube

outerASTconvradASTin qqq ampampamp += (499a)

ASTairflowinnerASTconvASTout qqq ampampamp += (499b)

dt

dTmCqqq AST

ASTASTASToutASTinASTnet =minus= ampampamp (499c)

)( ASTcellairouterASTouterASTouterASTconv TTAhq minus=amp (499d)

134

)( ASTairASTinnerASTinnerASTinnerASTconv TTAhq minus=amp (499e)

( )ASTairoutASTairinairairASTflowair TTCMq minus=amp (499f)

5) Air in AST

ASTairflowinnerASTconvASToutASTairin qqqq ampampampamp +== (4100a)

ASTairflowASTairout qq ampamp = (4100b)

dt

dTmCqqq

ASTair

ASTairairASTairoutASTairinASTairnet

=minus= ampampamp (4100c)

The symbols in the above equations (493-4100) are defined as

m = mass (kg)

Ci = specific heat capacity of species i [J(molmiddotK) or J(kgmiddotK)]

h = heat transfer coefficient [W(m2middotK)]

A = area (m2)

Mi = mole flow rate of species i (mols)

Mmw i = molecular weight of species i (kgmol)

ε = emissivity

σ = Stefan-Boltzmann constant 56696times10-8 Wm-2K-4

The superscripts and subscripts in the above equations are defined as

air Conditions for air

ann Annulus of cell

AST Air supply tube

cell Conditions for a single cell

135

ch Conditions at the anode or cathode channel

chem Chemical

conv Convective

conc Concentration

consumed Material consumed in chemical reaction

gen Material (energy) generated in chemical reaction

flow Flow heat exchange

Fuel Conditions for fuel

H2 Hydrogen

H2O Water

in Conditions of inputinlet

innerouter Innerouter conditions

mw Molecular weight (kgmol)

net Net values

O2 Oxygen

out Output

rad Radiation

Effective value

The thermal model of SOFC will be developed according to (493)-(4100)

Dynamic SOFC Model Implementation A dynamic model for a 5kW SOFC has

been developed in MATLABSimulink based on the electrochemical and thermodynamic

136

characteristics of the fuel cell discussed in the previous section The output voltage of the

fuel cell depends on conditions including fuel composition fuel flow oxidant flow

anode and cathode pressures cell temperature load current and the electrical and thermal

properties of the cell materials Figure 419 shows the block diagram based on which the

model has been developed In this figure the input quantities are anode and cathode

pressures (Pa and Pc) H2 flow rate (MH2) H2O flow rate (MH2O) air flow rate (Mair)

and initial temperature of the fuel cell and air (Tfuelinlet and Tairinlet) At any given load

current and time the cell temperature Tcell is determined and both the load current and

temperature are fed back to different blocks which take part in the calculation of the fuel

cell output voltage

In this block diagram material conservation equations (466)-(473) are used to

calculate the partial pressures of H2 H2O and O2 in flow channels Then the Nernst

equation (475) is employed to determine the internal potential (E) of the fuel cell

Diffusion equations (454)-(465) and the material conservation equations will give the

concentration loss of the cell The ohmic voltage drop is determined by (485) and

activation voltage is computed from (484) Eventually the terminal (output) voltage of

the fuel cell is determined by (478) and (492) and the double-layer charging effect

(491) The thermal model is developed via energy balance equations (493)-(4100)

137

Model Responses under Constant Fuel Flow Operation

Both the steady-state and dynamic responses of the SOFC model under constant flow

operating mode are given in this section The thermodynamic response of the model and

the impact of the operating temperature are also given The dynamic responses of the

model are investigated in different time scales

ch

gasP

gasP

Figure 419 Diagram of building a dynamic model of SOFC in SIMULINK

Steady-State Characteristics The steady-state terminal voltage vs current (V-I)

curves of the SOFC model at different temperatures are shown in Figure 420 These

curves are similar to the real test data reported in [418] [442] The activation voltage

drop dominates the voltage drop in the low-current region As load current increases the

ohmic voltage drop increases fast and becomes the main contribution to the SOFC

voltage drop When the load current exceeds a certain value (140A for this SOFC model)

the fuel cell output voltage will drop sharply due to large ohmic and concentration

voltage drops inside SOFC The variations of the above three voltage drops vs load

138

current at three different temperatures are shown in Figure 421

Figure 420 shows the effect of temperature on the SOFC V-I characteristic curve

The SOFC output voltage is higher at lower temperature in the low current zone while the

voltage is higher at higher temperature in the high current region These simulation

results showing the effect of temperature on SOFC performance are also similar to the

test data given in [418] and [442] The negative temperature coefficient of the

open-circuit internal potential E0cell defined by (476) and the temperature-dependent

activation voltage drop and ohmic voltage drop (shown in Figure 421) are the main

reasons for this kind of temperature dependent performance of the SOFC model As

shown in Figure 421 both the activation and ohmic voltage drops decrease as the fuel

cell temperature increases

0 50 100 1500

20

40

60

80

100

120

Load current (A)

SOFC output voltage (V)

1073K

1173K

1273K

Figure 420 V-I characteristics of the SOFC model at different temperatures

The corresponding output power vs current (P-I) curves of the model at different

139

temperatures are shown in Figure 422 At higher load currents (I gt 40 A) higher output

power can be achieved at higher operating temperatures Under each operating

temperature there is a critical load current point (Icrit) where the model output power

reaches its maximum value For example Icrit is 95 A at 1073 K 110 A at 1173 K and

120 A at 1273 K Beyond these points an increase in the load current will reduce the

output power due to large ohmic and concentration voltage drops

0 50 100 1500

10

20

30

40

50

Load current (A)

Voltage drops (V)

Figure 421 Three voltage drops at different temperatures

140

0 50 100 1500

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Load current (A)

SOFC output power (kW)

Pa = 3atm Pc = 3atm Fuel 90H

2+10H

2O

Constant Flow (0096mols) Oxidant Air(6 Stoichs O

2)

1073K

1173K

1273K

Figure 422 P-I characteristics of the SOFC model at different temperatures

Dynamic Response The dynamic response of the SOFC model is mainly dominated

by the double-layer charging effect the time constants τa and τc [defined in (472) and

(473)] and the thermodynamic property of the fuel cell Although the capacitance (C) of

the double-layer charging effect is large (in the order of several Farads) the time constant

τdlc=(Ractcell+Rconccell)C is normally small (in the order of around 10-2 s) because

(Ractcell+Rconccell) is small (less than 20 mΩ for a single cell used in this study) when the

fuel cell works in the linear zone Therefore capacitor C will only affect the model

dynamic response in small time scale ie 10-3-10

-1 s The operating conditions of the

SOFC model for this simulation study are listed in Table 44 Figure 423 shows the

model dynamic responses in this small time scale under step current changes The load

current steps up from 0 A to 80 A at 01s and then steps down to 30 A at 02 s The lower

part of the figure shows the corresponding SOFC output voltage responses with different

141

capacitance values for the double-layer charging effect When the load current steps up

(down) the fuel cell output voltage drops down (rises up) immediately due to the ohmic

voltage drop Then the voltage drops (rises) ldquosmoothlyrdquo to its final value It is noted that

the larger is the capacitance C the slower the output voltage reaches its final value

because the larger is the effective time constant τdlc

0 005 01 015 02 025 030

50

100

Load current (A)

0 005 01 015 02 025 0360

70

80

90

100

110

Time (s)

SOFC output voltage (V)

C=4F

C=15F

C=04F

Fuel 90 H2 + 10 H

2O

Constant flow 0096 molsOxidant Air (6 Stoichs O

2)

Figure 423 Model dynamic responses with different equivalent capacitance values for

double-layer charging effect in small time scale

TABLE 44 OPERATING CONDITIONS FOR THE MODEL DYNAMIC RESPONSE STUDIES

Temperature (K) 1173

Anode input pressure (atm) 3

Cathode input pressure (atm) 3

Anode H2 flow rate (mols) 00864

Anode H2O flow rate (mols) 00096

Oxidant Air (6 stoichs O2)

142

Time constants τa and τc are in the order of 10-1-10

0 s for the model parameters used

in this dissertation They mainly affect the model dynamic responses in the time scale

10-1 to 10

1 s Figure 424 shows the model dynamic responses in this medium time scale

under the same type of step current changes as shown in Figure 423 The load current

steps up from 0 A to 80 A at 1s and then steps down to 30 A at 11s The operating

conditions of the model are the same as given in Table 44 except for the operating

pressures Figure 424 shows the SOFC output voltage responses under different

operating pressures (Pa = Pc = P) Higher operating pressure gives higher output voltage

and also increases time constants τa and τc [see (472) and (473)] shown in the figure

0 5 10 15 200

50

100

Load current (A)

0 5 10 15 2060

70

80

90

100

110

Time (s)

SOFC output voltage (V)

P=1atm

P=3atmP=9atm

Fuel 90 H2 + 10 H

2O

Constant flow 0096 molsOxidant Air (6 Stoichs O

2)

Figure 424 Model dynamic responses under different operating pressures in medium

time scale

The equivalent thermodynamic time constant of a SOFC can be in the order of tens of

minutes [440] [443] Thus for large time scale (102-10

3 s) the thermodynamic

characteristic will dominate the model dynamic responses Figure 425 shows the

143

transient response of the SOFC model under load changes The model was subjected to a

step change in the load current from zero to 100 A at 10 min and then the current drops

back to 30 A at 120 min The operating conditions are also the same as given in Table 44

except for the varying fuel cell operating temperatures The fuel and air inlet

temperatures are given in the figure When the load current steps up the SOFC output

voltage drops sharply and then rises to its final value When the load current steps down

the output voltage jumps up and then drops slowly towards its final value as shown in

Figure 425

0 50 100 150 200 2500

50

100

Load current (A)

0 50 100 150 200 25020

40

60

80

100

120

SOFC output voltage (V)

Time (Minute)

Figure 425 Model dynamic responses under different inlet temperatures in large time

scale

The corresponding temperature responses of the SOFC model are shown in Figure

426 From this figure the equivalent overall thermodynamic time constant of the model

is around 15 minutes

144

0 50 100 150 200 250950

1000

1050

1100

1150

1200

1250

1300

Time (Minute)

SOFC temperature (K)

Tinlet = 1073K

Tinlet = 1173K

Tinlet = 973K

Figure 426 Model temperature responses

Constant Fuel Utilization Operation

In the previous sections only constant flow operation for the SOFC model was

discussed The fuel cell can also be operated in constant fuel utilization mode in which

the utilization factor will be kept constant The utilization factor is defined as [418]

inHinH

consumedH

M

Fi

M

Mu

22

2 2== (4101)

The direct way to achieve constant utilization operation is to feed back the load

current with a proportional gain )2(1 uF times as shown in Figure 427 to control fuel flow

to the fuel processor As a result the input H2 will change as load varies to keep the fuel

utilization constant As shown in Figure 427 the fuel processor is modeled by a simple

delay transfer function )1(1 +sfτ τf is set to 5s in this dissertation

145

)(1 sf +τ

)2(1 uF times

Figure 427 Constant utilization control

In this section the fuel cellrsquos steady state characteristics and dynamic responses under

constant fuel utilization mode will be discussed The results will also be compared with

those obtained under constant flow operating mode The utilization factor is set for 085

(85 fuel utilization) for this study and other operating conditions are the same as listed

in Table 44 except the fuel and water flow rates that will change as the load current

changes

Steady-state Characteristics Figure 428 shows a comparison between the V-I

characteristic of the SOFC model with constant fuel utilization and constant fuel flow

operating modes The operating conditions for the constant flow operating mode are

listed in Table 44 For this specific study the output voltage under constant flow

operating mode is higher than that under constant utilization mode at the same load

current The voltage difference between the two operating modes keeps getting smaller as

the load current increases The reason for this is that the utilization factor of the constant

flow operation will be getting closer to the utilization factor (085) of the constant

utilization operation as load current increases The corresponding P-I curves also given

in Figure 428 show that the SOFC can provide more power under constant flow

146

operation

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 1600

20

40

60

80

100

120SOFC output voltage (V)

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 1600

1

2

3

4

5

6

Load current (A)

SOFC output power (kW)

Constant Flow

Constant Utilization

Pa = 3atm Pc = 3atmFuel 90H

2+10H

2O

T = 1173K

Figure 428 V-I and P-I characteristics of the SOFC model under constant fuel utilization

and constant fuel flow operating modes

Figure 429 shows the curves of input fuel versus load current for both operation

modes It shows that the constant flow operation mode requires more fuel input

especially at light loading But the unused H2 is not just wasted it can be used for other

purposes [440] or recycled to use again

147

20 40 60 80 100 120 1400

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

Load current (A)

Input H2 flow rate (mols)

Constant Flow

Constant Utilization

Figure 429 H2 input for the constant utilization and constant flow operating modes

Dynamic Responses Dynamic response of the SOFC model in small time scale is

dominated by the double-layer charging effect and in large time scale is mainly

determined by the thermodynamic properties of the fuel cell Both the double-layer

charging effect and the thermodynamic characteristics of the fuel cell are determined by

the fuel cellrsquos physical and electrochemical properties These properties are normally not

affected by whether the SOFC is operating under constant fuel flow mode or constant

fuel utilization mode However the dynamic response in medium time scale will be

affected by the operating mode since the fuel flow rate will change as load varies under

constant utilization operating mode This load-dependent fuel flow rate will give a

load-dependent time constant τa as well Therefore only the dynamic response in this

time scale will be discussed for the constant utilization operating mode

148

Figure 430 shows the model dynamic responses in the medium time scale under

similar step current changes used in the constant fuel flow operating mode The load

current steps up from 0 A to 80 A at 1s and then steps down to 30 A at 31 s The lower

part of Figure 430 shows the corresponding SOFC output voltage responses under

different operating pressures Similar to what is shown in Figure 424 for constant fuel

flow operating mode a higher operating pressure results in a higher output voltage and

larger time constants τa and τc [see (472) and (473)] In this case the dynamic responses

are not determined only by τa and τc but also by the dynamics of the fuel processor The

output voltage curves (Figure 430) show the typical characteristic of a second order

system while the dynamic responses in medium time scale for the constant flow operating

mode (Figure 424) exhibit the characteristic of a first order system Figure 230 shows

that the SOFC output voltage drops as the load current steps up undershoots and then

rises back to its final value While the load current steps down the voltage rises up

overshoots and then drops back to its final value We note that the fuel cell fails to start

up at 1 atm operating pressure due to the delay in the fuel processor which causes

insufficient fuel supply

The selection of a SOFC operating mode depends on the actual desired performance

requirements and is beyond the scope of this dissertation Only the constant fuel flow

operating mode will be studied in the following chapters

149

0 10 20 30 40 50 600

50

100

Load current (A)

0 10 20 30 40 50 6020

40

60

80

100

120

Time (s)

SOFC output voltage (V)

1atm

3atm

9atm

Fuel 90 H2 + 10 H

2O

T = 1173 KConstant utilizationOxidant Air (6 Stoichs O

2)

Starting failure at 1atm

Figure 430 Model dynamic responses under different operating pressures in medium

time scale with constant utilization operating mode

150

Wind Energy Conversion System

Introduction

Among the renewable energy technologies for electricity production wind energy

technology is the most mature and promising one The use of wind energy conversion

systems (WECS) is increasing world-wide (see Chapter 1) Moreover the economic

aspects of wind energy technology are promising enough to justify their use in stand

alone applications as well as grid connected operations

As wind velocity in an area changes continuously the energy available from it varies

continuously This necessitates a need for dynamic models of all systems involved which

are responsive to the changes in the wind to have a better understanding of the overall

system

Induction machines (usually squirrel cage rotor type) are often used for wind power

generation because of their ruggedness and low cost [445] However they are used

mostly in grid-connected operation because of their excitation requirement Induction

machines can be used in stand-alone applications provided that enough reactive

excitation is provided to them for self-excitation [446] [447] Induction generators can

cope with a small increase in the speed from rated value because due to saturation the

rate of increase of generated voltage is not linear with speed Furthermore self excited

induction generator (SEIG) has a self-protection mechanism because its output voltage

collapses when overloaded [448]-[451]

In this section modeling of variable speed wind energy conversion systems is

discussed A description of the proposed wind energy conversion system is presented and

151

dynamic models for both the SEIG and wind turbine are developed In addition the

effects of saturation characteristic on the SEIG are presented The developed models are

simulated in MATLABSimulink [457] Different wind and load conditions are applied

to the WECS model for validation purposes

System Configuration The configuration of the WECS system (Figure 431)

studied in this dissertation is similar to the system shown in Figure 25 (c) A SEIG

driven by a pitch controlled variable speed wind turbine acting as the prime mover is

used to generate electricity The output AC voltage (with variable frequency) of the SEIG

is rectified into DC and then a DCAC inverter is used to convert the DC into 60 Hz AC

For stand-alone operation an excitation compensating capacitor bank is necessary to start

the induction generator For grid-connected application the compensating capacitor bank

can be eliminated from the system However for a weak-grid the reactive power

consumed by the induction generator will deteriorate the situation It is better to have a

generation system with self starting capability Therefore for the wind energy system

studied in this dissertation an excitation capacitor bank is always added regardless of the

system being stand-alone or grid-connected

In this section only the modeling of the components inside the rectangle in Figure 4

31 is discussed The design and modeling of power electronic circuits are discussed later

in this chapter It is noted from the figure that there are two main components inside the

rectangle the wind turbine together with the gear box and the SEIG

152

Figure 431 System block diagram of the WECS

Dynamic Model for Variable Speed Wind Turbine

The following sections explain the modeling and the control principles of the variable

speed pitch controlled wind turbine

Wind Turbine Characteristics The power Pwind (in watts) extracted from the wind is

given in equation 251 It is rewritten here as

)(2

1 3 θλρ pwind CAvP = (4102)

where ρ is the air density in kgm3 A is the area swept by the rotor blades in m

2 v is

the wind velocity in ms Cp is called the power coefficient or the rotor efficiency and is

function of tip speed ratio (TSR or λ see equation 252) and pitch angle (θ) [464]

The maximum rotor efficiency Cp is achieved at a particular TSR which is specific to

the aerodynamic design of a given turbine The rotor must turn at high speed at high

wind and at low speed at low wind to keep TSR constant at the optimum level at all

153

times For operation over a wide range of wind speeds wind turbines with high tip speed

ratios are preferred [453]

In the case of the variable speed pitch-regulated wind turbines considered in this

dissertation the pitch angle controller plays an important role Groups of λCpminus curves

with pitch angle as the parameter obtained by measurement or by computation can be

represented as a nonlinear function [455] [456] [466] The following function is used

( ) )exp( 54321 CCCCCC p minusminusminus= θ (4103)

where θ is the pitch angle

Proper adjustment of the coefficients C1-C5 would result in a close simulation of a

specific turbine under consideration The values for C1-C5 used in this study are listed in

Table 45 The Cp-λ characteristic curves at different pitch angles are plotted in Figure

432 From the set of curves in Figure 432 we can observe that when pitch angle is equal

to 2 degrees the tip speed ratio has a wide range and a maximum Cp value of 035

suitable for wind turbines designed to operate over a wide range of wind speeds With an

increase in the pitch angle the range of TSR and the maximum value of power coefficient

decrease considerably

TABLE 45 PARAMETER VALUES FOR C1-C5

C1 05

C2 116kθ

C3 04

C4 5

C5 21kθ

154

kθ in Table 45 used to calculate C2 and C5 is determined by λ and θ as [455] [456]

[466]

1

3 1

0350

080

1minus

+

minus+

=θθλθk (4104)

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 200

005

01

015

02

025

03

035

04

045

05

TSR λ

Cp

0 deg

1 deg

2 deg

3 deg

4 deg5 deg

10 deg

15 deg

20 deg

30 deg

Figure 432 Cp-λ characteristics at different pitch angles (θ)

For variable speed pitch-regulated wind turbines two variables have direct effect on

their operation namely rotor speed and blade pitch angle [452]-[454] Power

optimization strategy is employed when wind speed is below the turbine rated wind

speed to optimize the energy capture by maintaining the optimum TSR Power limitation

strategy is used above the rated wind speed of the turbine to limit the output power to the

rated power This is achieved by employing a pitch angle controller which changes the

blade pitch to reduce the aerodynamic efficiency thereby reducing the wind turbine

power to acceptable levels as discussed in Chapter 2 The different regions of the

155

above-mentioned control strategies of a variable speed wind turbine system are as shown

in the Figure 433

Figure 433 Variable speed pitch controlled wind turbine operation regions

Pitch Angle Controller The pitch angle controller used in this study employs PI

controllers as shown in Figure 434 [452] [456] [466] These controllers control the

wind flow around the wind turbine blade thereby controlling the toque exerted on the

turbine shaft If the wind speed is less than the rated wind speed the pitch angle is kept

constant at an optimum value If the wind speed exceeds the rated wind speed the

controller calculates the power error (between the reference power and the output power

of the wind turbine) and the frequency error (between the measured stator electrical

frequency of the SEIG and the rated frequency) The output of the controllers gives the

required pitch angle (Figure 434) In this figure the Pitch Angle Rate Limiter block

limits the rate of change of pitch angle as most modern wind turbines consist of huge

rotor blades The maximum rate of change of the pitch angle is usually in the order of 3o

to 10osecond

156

Figure 434 Pitch angle controller

turbineω

λminuspC

genω

ratedω

Figure 435 Simulation model of the variable speed pitch-regulated wind turbine

157

Variable-speed Wind Turbine Model The dynamic model of the variable speed

wind turbine are developed in MATLABSimulink Figure 435 shows the block diagram

of the wind turbine model

The inputs for the wind turbine model are wind speed air density radius of the wind

turbine mechanical speed of the rotor referred to the wind turbine side and power

reference for the pitch angle controller The output is the drive torque Tdrive which drives

the electrical generator The wind turbine calculates the tip speed ratio from the input

values and estimates the value of the power coefficient from the performance curves The

pitch angle controller maintains the value of the blade pitch at optimum value until the

power output of the wind turbine exceeds the reference power input

Dynamic Model for SEIG

There are two fundamental circuit models employed for examining the characteristics

of a SEIG One is the per-phase equivalent circuit which includes the loop-impedance

method adapted by Murthy et al [459] and Malik and Al-Bahrani [460] and the nodal

admittance method proposed by Ouazene and Mcpherson [449] and Chan [461] These

methods are suitable for studying the machinersquos steady-state characteristics Another

method is the dq-axis model based on the generalized machine theory proposed by Elder

et al [448] and Grantham et al [450] and is employed to analyze both the machinersquos

transient as well as steady-state

Steady-state Model Steady-state analysis of induction generators is of interest both

from the design and operational points of view By knowing the parameters of the

158

machine it is possible to determine its performance at a given speed capacitance and

load conditions

Loop impedance and nodal admittance methods used for the analysis of SEIG are

both based on per-phase steady-state equivalent circuit of the induction machine (Figure

436) modified for the self-excitation case They make use of the principle of

conservation of active and reactive powers by writing proper loop equations [459]

[460] [465] or nodal equations [449] [461] for the equivalent circuit These methods

are very effective in calculating the minimum value of capacitance needed for

guaranteeing self-excitation of the induction generator For stable operation excitation

capacitance must be slightly higher than the minimum value Also there is a speed

threshold the cutoff speed of the machine below which no excitation is possible In the

following paragraph a brief description of the loop impedance method is given for better

understanding

The per-unit (pu) per-phase steady-state circuit of a self-excited induction generator

under lagging (RL) load is shown in Figure 436 [459] [449] In the analysis of SEIG

the following assumptions were made [459]

1 Only the magnetizing reactance Xm is assumed to be affected by magnetic

saturation and all other parameters of the equivalent circuit are assumed to be constant

Self-excitation results in the saturation of the main flux and the value of Xm reflects the

magnitude of the main flux Leakage flux passes mainly in the air and thus these fluxes

are not affected to any large extent by saturation of the main flux

159

2 Per unit values of the stator and rotor leakage reactance (referred to stator side)

are assumed to be equal (Xls = Xlr = Xl) This assumption is normally valid in induction

machine analysis

3 Core loss in the machine is neglected

Figure 436 Equivalent T circuit of self-excited induction generator with R-L Load

In the figure the symbols are

Rs Rr R pu per-phase stator rotor (referred to stator) and load resistance

respectively

Xl X Xm pu per-phase statorrotor leakage load and magnetizing reactances (at

base frequency) respectively

Xc pu per-phase capacitive reactance (at base frequency) of the terminal excitation

capacitor

f v pu frequency and speed respectively

Vg V0 pu per-phase air gap and output voltages respectively

For the circuit shown in Figure 436 the loop equation for the current can be written

as

160

I Z = 0 (4105)

where Z is the net loop impedance given by

+

minus+++

+

minus= jX

f

R

f

jXjX

f

RjXjX

vf

RZ c

l

s

ml

r

2 (4106)

For equation (4105) to hold true for any current I the loop impedance (Z) should be

zero This implies that both the real and imaginary parts of Z are zero These two

equations can be solved simultaneously for any two unknowns such as f and Xc

Self-excitation Process The process of self-excitation in induction machines has

been known for several decades [446] [447] When capacitors are connected across the

stator terminals of an induction machine driven by an external prime mover voltage will

be induced at its terminals The induced electromotive force (EMF) and current in the

stator windings will continue to rise until the steady state condition influenced by the

magnetic saturation of the machine is reached At this operating point the voltage will be

stabilized at a given value and frequency In order for self-excitation to occur for a

particular capacitance value there is a corresponding minimum speed [447] [458]

Therefore in stand-alone mode of operation it is necessary for the induction generator to

be operated in the saturation region This guarantees one and only one intersection

between the magnetization curve and the capacitor reactance line as well as output

voltage stability under load as seen in Figure 437 [445] [455]

Under no load the capacitor current cgc XVI = must be equal to the magnetizing

current mgm XVI = when the stator impedance (Rs + jXl) is neglected and the rotor

circuit can be considered as open circuit as shown in Figure 437 The stator phase

161

voltage Vg (Vg = V0 in this case) is a function of magnetizing current Im linearly rising

until the saturation point of the magnetic core is reached With the value of self exciting

capacitance equal to C the output frequency of the self-excited generator is

)π(21 mCXf =

ω

minus

C

1tan 1

Figure 437 Determination of stable operation of SEIG

Dynamic Model of SEIG in dq Representations The process of self-excitation is a

transient phenomenon and is better understood if analyzed using a transient model To

arrive at a transient model of an induction generator an abc-dq0 transformation is used

The dq axis model based on the generalized machine theory proposed by Elder

[448] Salama [458] and Grantham [450] is employed to analyze the machinersquos

transient state as well as steady state To arrive at a transient model of an induction

generator abc-dq0 transformation [462] has been used in this analysis

Figure 438 shows the dq axis equivalent circuit of a self excited induction generator

shown in Figure 436 in stationary reference frame [451] [458] [462]

162

drrλω

+

qsVmL

sr lrL + minus

qrrλωminus

+

minus

dsV mL

srlsL lrL

+ minus

minus

rr

rr

lsL

cqVLZ

cdVLZdsλ

drλ

qrλqsλ

+

minus

minus

+

Figure 438 dq representation of a SEIG (All values are referred to stator)

In the figure rω is the electrical angular velocity of the rotor s(r) subscript denotes

parameters and variables associated with stator (rotor) respectively Vcq (Vqs) and Vcd

(Vds) are q and d axis voltages respectively and iqs (ids) is the q (d) axis component of

stator current Iqr (idr) is the q (d) axis component of rotor current Lls Llr and Lm are stator

leakage rotor leakage and magnetizing inductances of the stator qsλ and dsλ are q and

d axis components of stator flux linkages qrλ and drλ are q and d axis components of

rotor flux linkages

From Figure 438 the equation for no-load operation of SEIG can be written as

shown below

163

+

+

minus+minus

++

++

=

d

q

cdo

cqo

dr

qr

ds

qs

rrrrmmr

rrrrmrm

mss

mss

K

K

V

V

i

i

i

i

pLrLωpLLω

LωpLrLωpL

pL0pC1pLr0

0pL0pC1pLr

0

0

0

0

(4107)

where p = ddt Kd (Kq) is a constant representing initial induced voltage along the d (q)

axis due to the remaining magnetic flux in the core Vcqo and Vcdo are initial q and d

component voltages across the capacitor and Ls=Lls+Lm Lr=Llr+Lm

Equation (4107) can be modified to obtain four first order differential equations as

BAIpI += (4108)

The mechanical system is described by

generdrive TpωP

2JT minus+

= (4109)

where

minusminusminus

minus

minus

minusminusminus

=

rsrrssmmrs

rrsrsmrssm

rmrrmssr

2

m

rrmrmr

2

msr

rLLωLrLLωL

LωLrLLωLrL

rLLωLrLωL

LωLrLωLrL

L

1A

minus

minus

minus

minus

=

dscdm

qscqm

cdrdm

cqrqm

KLVL

KLVL

VLKL

VLKL

L

1B

=

dr

qr

ds

qs

i

i

i

i

I 2

mrs LLLL minus= 0

0

1cq

t

qscq VdtiC

V += int and 0

0

1cd

t

dscd VdtiC

V += int

J - Inertia of the rotor in (Kgm2)

Tdrive ndash wind turbine torque in (Nm)

Te_gen ndash electromagnetic torque by the generator in (Nm)

P ndash number of poles

164

The simulation of the SEIG can be carried out by solving (4108) Since the

magnetization inductance Lm is nonlinear in nature an internal iteration has to be done at

each integration step Given the initial condition from the previous step the

magnetization current can be calculated as shown below [450]

22 )()( qrqsdrdsm iiiiI +++= (4110)

The variation of magnetizing inductance as a function of magnetizing current used in

this study is given by

Lm = 05times[0025+02974timesexp(-004878timesIm)] (4111)

Any combination of R L and C can be added in parallel with the self-excitation

capacitance to act as load For example if resistance R is added in parallel with the

self-excitation capacitance then the term 1pC in the matrix (see 4107) becomes

R(1+RpC) The load can be connected across the capacitors once the voltage reaches a

steady-state value [450] [451] If there is an inductive load connected across the

excitation capacitor it influences the effective value of excitation capacitance such that it

results in an increase in the slope of the straight line of the capacitive reactance (Figure

437) reducing the terminal voltage This phenomenon is more pronounced when the

load inductance gets higher in value A capacitor for individual compensation can be

connected across the terminal of the load in such a way that it follows the load

conditions [463]

Ratings of the induction machine simulated are given in Table 32 (Chapter 3) The

detailed parameters used in modeling the SEIG are given in Table 46 The parameters

are obtained from [462] based on the same pu values of a 500 hp 2300 V induction

165

machine

TABLE 46 SEIG MODEL PARAMETERS

rs 0164 Ω

rr 0117 Ω

Xls 0754 Ω

Xlr 0754 Ω

Lm See (4111)

J 1106 kgm2

C 240 microF

P (Number of poles) 4

All reactances are based on 60 Hz

Responses of the Model for the Variable Speed WECS

The model of a 50 kW variable speed wind energy conversion system consisting of a

pitch-regulated wind turbine and self excited induction generator is developed in

MATLABSimulink environment using SimPowersystems block-set In this sub-section

the model responses under different scenarios are discussed

Wind Turbine Output Power Characteristic Figure 439 shows the wind turbine

output power of the simulated model for different wind velocities It can be observed that

the output power is kept constant at higher wind velocities even though the wind turbine

has the potential to produce more power This is done to protect the electrical system and

to prevent the over speeding of the rotor

166

0 5 10 15 20 250

10

20

30

40

50

Wind Speed (ms)

Output Power (kW)

Figure 439 Wind turbine output power characteristic

Process of Self-excitation in SEIG The process of self-excitation can occur only if

there is some residual magnetism For numerical method of integration residual

magnetism cannot be zero at the beginning of the simulation Therefore non-zero initial

values are set for Kq [andor Kd see equation (4107)] and the rotor speed

The process of voltage build up continues starting with the help of the residual

magnetism until the iron circuit saturates and therefore the voltage stabilizes In other

terms the effect of this saturation is to modify the magnetization inductance Lm such that

it reaches a saturated value the transient then neither increases nor decreases and

becomes a steady state quantity giving continuous self-excitation The energy for the

above process is provided by the kinetic energy of the wind turbine rotor [450] Figure

440 shows the process of a successful self excitation in an induction machine under no

load condition with wind speed at 10ms The value of the excitation capacitor is given in

the figure An unsuccessful self excitation process under the same condition (except a

167

smaller capacitor bank) is shown in Figure 441

0 05 1 15 2 25 3-600

-400

-200

0

200

400

600

Time (s)

Terminal Voltage (V)

C = 240 microF

Figure 440 A successful self excitation process

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

Time (s)

Terminal Voltage (V)

C = 10 microF

Figure 441 Voltage fails to build up

168

Figures 442 and 443 show the variations in magnetizing current and magnetizing

inductance vs time for successful voltage build up of the SEIG From Figures 440 442

and 443 it can be observed that the phase voltage slowly starts building up and reaches a

steady state value as the magnetization current starts from zero and reaches a steady state

value Also we see that the self excitation follows the process of magnetic saturation of

the core and the stable output value is reached only when the machine core is saturated

0 05 1 15 2 25 30

10

20

30

40

50

Time (s)

Magnetizing Current Im (A)

Figure 442 Variation of magnetizing current Im

0 05 1 15 2 25 30

005

01

015

02

Time (s)

Magnetizing Inductance Lm (H)

Figure 443 Variation of magnetizing inductance Lm

169

Model Responses under Wind Speed Changes In this section the responses of the

model for the variable speed WECS to wind speed variations are given and discussed

The wind speed changes are shown in Figure 444 The wind speed used in simulation

steps up from 10 ms to 16 ms at t = 30 s and changes from 16 ms to 8 ms at 60 s

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

Time (s)

Wind Speed (ms)

Figure 444 Wind speed variations used for simulation study

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 800

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Wind Power (kW)

Wind speed 10 ms

Wind speed 16 ms

Wind speed 8 ms

Figure 445 Output power of the WECS model under wind speed changes

170

Figure 445 shows the output power of the WECS The WECS starts to supply power

at 3 s It is noted from the figure that the output power is 162 kW at 10 ms wind speed

50 kW at 16 ms and 486 kW at 8 ms respectively This matches the system output

power characteristic shown in Figure 439

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 801200

1400

1600

1800

2000

2200

2400

2600

Time (s)

Rotor Speed (rpm)

Wind speed 10 ms

Wind speed 16 ms

Wind speed 8 ms

Figure 446 Wind turbine rotor speed

Figure 446 shows the wind turbine rotor speed under the wind speed changes The

rotor speed is a slightly under 1800 rpm (rated speed) when there is no load When the

load is connected at 3 s the speed drops to about 1430 rpm When the wind speed is

increased to 16 ms at 30 s there is a fast increase in rotor speed as shown in Figure

446 Then the pitch controller starts operating to bring the rotor speed down to 1890 rpm

which is the upper limit (+5) of the frequency regulation band in the pitch controller

(see Figure 434) The rotor speed drops to 1257 rpm as the wind speed drops to 8 ms at

60 s

171

Figure 447 shows how the pitch angle changes during the wind speed variation Note

that the pitch angle keeps at the optimum value (2˚ in this study) when the wind speed is

below the nominal value (14 ms) When the wind speed exceeds 14 ms (at 30 s) the

pitch controller begins to work and increases the pitch angle to about 615˚ to keep the

output power constant (at 50 kW) The corresponding Cp is shown in Figure 448

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 802

3

4

5

6

7

Time (s)

Pitch Angle (Degree)

Figure 447 Pitch angle controller response to the wind changes

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 800

01

02

03

04

Time (s)

Cp

Figure 448 Variation of power coefficient Cp

172

Solar Energy Conversion System

The principle of operation of a PV cell is discussed in Chapter 2 In this section

model development of a PV module is given in details The PV model developed for this

study is based on the research work reported in [467]-[470]

Modeling for PV CellModule

The most commonly used model for a PV cell is the one-diode equivalent circuit as

shown in Figure 449 [467]-[470] Since the shunt resistance Rsh is large it normally can

be neglected The five parameters model shown in Figure 449 (a) can therefore be

simplified into that shown in Figure 449 (b) This simplified equivalent circuit model is

used in this study

Figure 449 One-diode equivalent circuit model for a PV cell (a) Five parameters

model (b) Simplified four parameters model

The relationship between the output voltage V and the load current I can be expressed

as

minus

+minus=minus= 1exp0 α

s

LDL

IRUIIIII (4112)

173

where IL = light current (A)

I0 = saturation current (A)

I = load current (A)

U = output voltage (V)

Rs = series resistance (Ω)

α = thermal voltage timing completion factor (V)

There are four parameters (IL I0 Rs and α) that need to be determined before the I-U

relationship can be obtained That is why the model is called a four-parameter model

Both the equivalent circuit shown in Figure 449 (b) and the equation (4112) look simple

However the actual model is more complicated than it looks because the above four

parameters are functions of temperature load current andor solar irradiance In the

remainder of this section procedures are given for determining the four parameters

Light Current IL According to [468] and [469] IL can be calculated as

( )[ ]refccSCIrefL

ref

L TTIΦ

ΦI minus+= micro (4113)

where Φ = irradiance (Wm2)

Φref = reference irradiance (1000 Wm2 is used in this study)

ILref = light current at the reference condition (1000Wm2 and 25 ˚C)

Tc = PV cell temperature (˚C)

Tcref = reference temperature (25 ˚C is used in this study)

microISC = temperature coefficient of the short-circuit current (A˚C)

Both ILref and microISC can be obtained from manufacturer data sheet [469]

174

Saturation Current I0 The saturation current can be expressed in terms of its value

at the reference condition as [468]-[469]

+

+minus

+

+=

273

2731exp

273

273

3

00

c

refc

ref

sgap

c

refc

refT

T

q

Ne

T

TII

α (4114)

where I0ref = saturation current at the reference condition (A)

egap = band gap of the material (117 eV for Si materials)

Ns = number of cells in series of a PV module

q = charge of an electron (160217733times10-19 C)

αref = the value of α at the reference condition

I0ref can be calculated as

minus=

ref

refoc

refLref

UII

α

0 exp (4115)

where Uocref = the open circuit voltage of the PV module at reference condition (V)

The value of Uocref is provided by manufacturers The value calculation for α is

discussed in the next section

Calculation of α According to [469] the value of αref can be calculated as

minus+

minus

minus=

refsc

refmp

refmprefsc

refsc

refocrefmp

ref

I

I

II

I

UU

1ln

2α (4116)

where Umpref = maximum power point voltage at the reference condition (V)

Impref = maximum power point current at the reference condition (A)

Iscref = short circuit current at the reference condition (A)

175

α is a function of temperature which as expressed as

ref

refc

c

T

Tαα

273

273

+

+= (4117)

Series Resistance Rs Some manufacturers provide the value of Rs If not provided

the following equation can be used to estimate its value [469]

refmp

refmprefoc

refsc

refmp

ref

sI

UUI

I

R

1ln minus+

minus

=

α

(4118)

Rs is taken as a constant in the model of this study

Thermal Model of PV From equations (4113) to (4118) it can be noted that the

temperature plays an important role in the PV performance Therefore it is necessary to

have a thermal model for a PV cellmodule In this study a lumped thermal model is

developed for the PV module based on [468] The temperature of the PV module varies

with surrounding temperature irradiance and its output current and voltage and can be

written as

( )aclossPVin

c

PV TTkA

IUΦk

dt

dTC minusminus

timesminus= (4119)

where CPV = the overall heat capacity per unit area of the PV cellmodule [J(˚Cmiddotm2)]

kinPV = transmittance-absorption product of PV cells

kloss = overall heat loss coefficient [W(˚Cmiddotm2)]

Ta = ambient temperature (˚C)

A = effective area of the PV cellmodule (m2)

176

PV Model Development in MATLABSimulink

Based on the mathematical equations discussed before a dynamic model for a PV

module consisting of 153 cells in series has been developed using MATLABSimulink

Figure 450 shows the block diagram of the PV model The input quantities (solar

irradiance Φ and the ambient temperature Ta) together with manufacturer data are used to

calculate the four parameters (4113 -4118) Then based on equation 4112 the output

voltage is obtained numerically The thermal model is used to estimate the PV cell

temperature The two output quantities (PV output voltage U and the PV cell temperature

Tc) and the load current I are fed back to participate in the calculations The model

parameters used in the simulation are given in Table 47 which is based on the values

reported in [468]-[469]

Φ

Figure 450 Block diagram of the PV model built in MATLABSimulink

177

TABLE 47 THE PV MODEL PARAMETERS

ILref (ISCref) 2664 A

αref 5472 V

Rs 1324 Ω

Uocref 8772 V

Umpref 70731 V

Impref 2448 A

Φref 1000 Wm2

Tcref 25 ˚C

CPV 5times104 J(˚Cmiddotm

2)

A 15 m2

kinPV 09

kloss 30 W(˚Cmiddotm2)

Model Performance The model I-U characteristic curves under different irradiances

are given in Figure 451 at 25 ˚C It is noted from the figure that the higher is the

irradiance the larger are the short-circuit current (Isc) and the open-circuit voltage (Uoc)

And obviously the larger will be the maximum power (Pmp) shown in Figure 452 The

maximum power point short-circuit current and open-circuit voltage are also illustrated

in the figures

178

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1000

05

1

15

2

25

3

Output Voltage (V)

Current (A)

Tc = 25 degC 1000 Wm2

800 Wm2

600 Wm2

400 Wm2

200 Wm2

Uoc

Isc

Figure 451 I-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different irradiances

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 900

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

Output Voltage

Output Power (W)

1000 Wm2

800 Wm2

600 Wm2

400 Wm2

200 Wm2

Tc = 25 degC

Pmp

Ump

MaximumPowerPoint

Figure 452 P-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different irradiances

179

Temperature Effect on the Model Performance The effect of the temperature on the

PV model performance is illustrated in Figures 453 and 454 From these two figures it

is noted that the lower the temperature the higher is the maximum power and the larger

the open circuit voltage On the other hand a lower temperature gives a slightly lower

short circuit current

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1000

05

1

15

2

25

3

Output Voltage (V)

Current (A)

Tc = 50 degC

Φ = 1000 Wm20 degC

25 degC

Figure 453 I-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different temperatures

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1000

50

100

150

200

Output Voltage

Output Power (W)

Φ = 1000 Wm2

Tc = 50 degC

0 degC

25 degC

Figure 454 P-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different temperatures

180

Maximum Power Point Tracking Control

Though the capital cost for installing a PV array is decreasing due to recent

technology development (see Chapter 1) the initial investment on a PV system is still

very high compared to conventional electricity generation techniques Therefore it is

very natural to desire to draw as much power as possible from a PV array which has

already been installed Maximum power point tracking (MPPT) is one of the techniques

to obtain maximum power from a PV system

Several different MPPT techniques have been proposed in the literature The

techniques summarized in [472] can be classified as (1) Look-up table methods (2)

Perturbation and observation methods and (3) Model-based computational methods Two

major techniques in the ldquoModel-based computational methodsrdquo category are

voltage-based MPPT (VMPPT) and current-based MPPT (CMPPT) techniques Both the

CMPPT and VMPPT methods have been investigated in [472] for matching resistive

loads and DC motor loads A CMPPT method was reported in [473] for matching a DC

motor load In this study a CMPPT method is proposed to obtain maximum power for the

PV array proposed in the AC-coupled hybrid system (see Figure 33 in Chapter 3)

Current-Based Maximum Power Point Tracking The main idea behind the

current-based MPPT is that the current at the maximum power point Imp has a strong

linear relationship with the short circuit current Isc Isc can either be measured on line

under different operation conditions or computed from a validated model Figure 455

shows the curve of Imp vs Isc It can be noted that Imp has a very good linear dependence

on Isc which can be expressed as

181

Imp = kcmppttimesIsc (4120)

where kcmppt is the current factor CMPPT control

0 05 1 15 2 25 3 35 40

05

1

15

2

25

3

35

Short Circuit Current Isc (A)

Imp (A)

Model response

Curve fitting

y = 09245x

Tc = 25 degC

Figure 455 Linear relationship between Isc and Imp under different solar irradiances

75 80 85 9060

62

64

66

68

70

72

Open Circuit Voltage Uoc (V)

Ump (V)

Model response

Curve fittingTc = 25 degC

y = 06659x+ 119

Figure 456 Ump vs Uoc curve under different solar irradiances

182

The VMPPT control is based on the similar idea Figure 456 shows the relationship

between the voltage at the maximum power point Ump and the open circuit voltage Uoc

By comparing Figure 455 and Figure 456 we can see that Figure 455 shows a stronger

linear relationship This is why the CMPPT is used in this study

Control Scheme The control scheme of the CMPPT for the PV system in the

proposed hybrid system is shown Figure 457 The value of Imp calculated form (4120) is

used as the reference signal to control the buck DCDC converter so that the output

current of the PV system matches Imp This reference value is also used to control the

inverter so that the maximum available of power is delivered to the AC bus shown in

Figure 457

Figure 457 CMPPT control scheme

The details on how to control the power electronic devices will be discussed later in

this chapter

183

Simulation Results Simulation studies have been carried out to verify the proposed

CMPPT method For the purpose of simulation the solar irradiance is kept constant at a

value at 600Wm2 for t lt 40 s At t = 40 s the irradiance changes from 600 Wm

2 to 1000

Wm2 shown in Figure 458 This figure also shows the PV output current Ipv and the

reference Imp which is calculated based on (4120) The error between these two currents

is also illustrated in the figure Note that the proposed CMPPT controller works well to

match the PV output current with Imp The corresponding PV output power and the

calculated maximum power curves of the PV system are shown in Figure 459 The figure

also shows that the maximum power point is tracked well with the proposed CMPPT

method

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 800

05

1

15

2

25

Time (s)

Current (A)

Ta = 25 degC

Φ = 600 Wm2

Φ = 1000 Wm2

PV output current Ipv

The error between Ipv and Imp

Imp

Figure 458 Imp and Ipv curves under the CMPPT control

184

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 8060

80

100

120

140

160

180

Time (s)

Power (W)

Ta = 25 degC

Φ = 600 Wm2

Φ = 1000 Wm2

Output Power

Maximum power

Figure 459 PV output power and the maximum power curves

185

Electrolyzer

The fundamentals of operation of electrolyzer have been discussed in Chapter 2

From electrical circuit aspect an electrolyzer can be considered as a voltage-sensitive

nonlinear DC load For a given electrolyzer within its rating range the higher DC

voltage applied the larger is the load current That is by applying a higher DC voltage

we can get more H2 generated Of course more electrical power is consumed at the same

time The model for an electrolyzer stack developed in this study is based on the

empirical I-U equations reported in [468] and [475] described below

U-I Characteristic

The U-I characteristic of an electrolyzer cell can be expressed as [468] [475]

+

+++

++= 1

ln

2

32121

IA

TkTkkkI

A

TrrUU TTT

elecrevcellelec (4121)

where Ueleccell = is the cell terminal voltage (V)

Urev = reversible cell voltage (V)

r1 r2 = parameters for ohmic resistance (Ωmiddotm2 Ωmiddotm

2˚C)

kelec kT1 kT2 kT3 = parameters for overvoltage (V m2A m

2middot˚CA m

2middot˚C

2A)

A = area of cell electrode (m2)

I = electrolyzer current (A)

T = cell temperature (˚C)

The reversible voltage Urev is determined by the Gibbs free energy change of the

electrochemical process as

186

F

GU rev

2

∆minus= (4122)

It is a function of temperature which can be expressed by an empirical equation as

)25(0 minusminus= TkUU revrevrev (4123)

where 0

revU = reversible cell voltage at standard condition (V)

krev = empirical temperature coefficient of reversible voltage (V˚C)

For an electrolyzer stack consisting of nc cells in series the terminal voltage of the

stack can be expressed as

celleleccelec UnU = (4124)

where nc = number of cells in series

Hydrogen Production Rate

According to Faradayrsquo Law [417] [420] the ideal hydrogen production rate of an

electrolyzer stack is given by

F

Inn cH

22 =amp (4125)

where 2Hnamp = hydrogen production rate (mols)

However the actual hydrogen rate is always lower than the above theoretical

maximum value due to parasitic current losses The actual hydrogen production rate can

be obtained as

F

Inn c

FH2

2 η=amp (4126)

where ηF = current efficiency or Faraday efficiency

The current efficiency (ηF) will increase as the current density grows because the

187

percentage of the parasitic current over the total current decreases A higher temperature

will result in a lower resistance value which leads to higher parasitic current and a lower

current efficiency [475] However in high current density regions the effect of

temperature upon current efficiency is small and can be neglected [468] Hence in this

study ηF is considered as function of current density only An empirical formula for ηF is

given in [475] as

( )( ) 22

1

2

f

f

F kAIk

AI

+=η (4127)

where kf1 kf2 = parameters in current efficiency calculation

Thermal Model

The operating temperature of an electrolyzer stack affects its performance

significantly [see (4121)] Therefore it is necessary to have a thermal model for an

electrolyzer stack In this study a lumped thermal model is developed based on the

findings reported in [468] and [475]

coollossgenelec QQQdt

dTC ampampamp minusminus= (4128)

where T = overall electrolyzer temperature (˚C)

Celec = overall heat capacity of the electrolyzer stack (J˚C)

genQamp is the heat power generated inside the electrolyzer stack It can be written as

( )IUUnQ thcelleleccgen minus= amp (4129)

where Uth is the thermal voltage which is expressed as

188

F

STU

F

STG

F

HU revth

222

∆minus=

∆+∆minus=

∆minus= (4130)

lossQamp is the heat power loss It can be determined by

elecT

a

lossR

TTQ

minus=amp (4131)

where Ta = ambient temperature (˚C)

RTelec = equivalent thermal resistance (˚CW)

coolQamp the heat power loss due to cooling can be written as

( )icmocmcmcool TTCQ minus=amp (4132)

where Ccm = overall heat capacity of the flowing cooling medium per second (W˚C)

Tcmo Tcmi = outlet and inlet temperature of the cooling medium (˚C)

Water is used as the cooling medium for the eletrolyzer stack used in this study Tcmo

can be estimated as [468]

minusminusminus+=

cm

HX

icmicmocmC

kTTTT exp1)( (4133)

where kHX = effective heat exchange coefficient for the cooling process It can be

obtained by the following empirical equation [468] [475]

Ihhk convcondHX sdot+= (4134)

where hcond = coefficient related to conductive heat exchange (W˚C)

hconv = coefficient related to convective heat exchange [W(˚CmiddotA)]

189

Electrolyzer Model Implementation in MATLABSimulink

Based on the mathematical equations discussed previously a dynamic model for an

electrolyzer stack consisting of 40 cells in series (50 kW stack) has been developed in

MATLABSimulink Figure 460 shows the block diagram of the electrolyzer model The

input quantities are the applied DC voltage Uelec ambient temperature Ta inlet

temperature of the cooling water Tcm i and the cooling water flow rate ncm The two

output quantities are the hydrogen production rate 2Hnamp and the stack temperature T The

U-I characteristic block [(4121) - (4124)] calculates the electrolyzer current and the

electrolyzer temperature is estimated by the thermal model block (4128-4134) Based on

the calculated electrolyzer current I the current efficiency block (4126-4127) gives the

hydrogen production rate The model parameters are given in Table 48 which is based

on the values reported in [468] and [475]

2Hnamp

Figure 460 Block diagram of the electrolyzer model built in MATLABSimulink

190

TABLE 48 THE ELECTROLYZER MODEL PARAMETERS

r1 805times10-5 Ωmiddotm

2

r2 -25times10-7 Ωmiddotm

2˚C

kelec 0185 V

t1 -1002 m2A

t2 8424 m2middot˚CA

nc 40

krev 193times10-3 V˚C

Celec 6252times105 J˚C

RTelec 0167 ˚CW

A 025 m2

kf1 25times104 Am

2

kf2 096

hcond 70 W˚C

hconv 002 W(˚CmiddotA)

ncm 600 kgh

Ccm (Based on the value of ncm) 69767 W˚C

191

Electrolyzer Model Performance

The U-I characteristics of the electrolyzer model under different cell temperatures are

given in Figure 461 At the same current the higher the operating temperature the lower

the terminal voltage is needed Figure 462 shows the model temperature responses The

ambient temperature and the inlet temperature of the cooling water are set to 25 ˚C for the

simulation study The applied DC voltage starts at 70 V and steps up to 80 V at hour 5

The stack temperature increases from 25 ˚C to 2537 ˚C and stays at that temperature as

long as the applied voltage is 70 V The temperature increases slowly (in approximately 5

hours) to about 302 ˚C when the output voltage jumps to 80 V

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 50060

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

Current (A)

Voltage (V)

T = 25 degC

T = 50 degC

T = 80 degC

Figure 461 U-I characteristics of the electrolyzer model under different temperatures

192

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1065

70

75

80

85

Time (hour)

Voltage (V)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1025

30

35

Stack Temperature (degC)

Voltage

Temperature

Ta = Tcmi = 25 degC

Figure 462 Temperature response of the model

193

Power Electronic Interfacing Circuits

Power electronic (PE) interfacing circuits also called power conditioning circuits are

necessary for a hybrid energy system like the one proposed in Chapter 3 (see Figure 33)

In this section the electrical circuit diagrams state-space models and effective

average-models (for long-time simulation studies) for the main PE interfacing circuits in

the proposed hybrid energy system are discussed They are ACDC rectifiers DCDC

converters DCAC inverters

A detailed model for a PE device together with the control switching signals will

dramatically decrease the simulation speed using MATLABSimulink The detailed

models for PE devices such as those given in the SimPowerSystems block-set are not

suitable for long time simulation studies Effective average-models for PE devices will be

developed in this section which help improve the simulation speed significantly and at

the same time keep the desirable accuracy

ACDC Rectifiers

Circuit Topologies Basically there are two types of ACDC rectifiers

controllableuncontrollable rectifiers Uncontrollable rectifiers are normally referred to

diode (or diode bridge) rectifiers Figure 463 shows a typical three-phase full diode

bridge rectifier [441]

194

Figure 463 Three-phase full diode bridge rectifier

If Ls = 0 in the above figure the average value of the output DC voltage Vdc is given

as [441]

LLdc VV 23

π= (4135)

where VLL is the AC source line-line RMS voltage

The quality of the output DC voltage is fairly good The voltage ripple is within plusmn 5

However the input AC current ia for example is distorted The AC side inductor Ls can

be increased to reduce the current distortion But this will cause extra voltage drop across

the inductor Another way is to use a Y-Y and a Y-∆ connection transformer to form a

12-diode bridge rectifier as shown in Figure 464 There is a 30˚ phase shift between the

two transformer outputs which reduces the transition period from 60˚ to 30˚ in one (360˚)

period The average value of the DC output voltage now is

195

LLdc VV 26

π= (4136)

where VLL is the line-line RMS voltage of the transformersrsquo output

The output DC voltage ripple now is reduced to within plusmn 115 and the harmonics of

the AC side current are much reduced The total harmonic distortion (THD) of a 12-pulse

rectifier is typically 12 with the 11th and 13th harmonics dominant while the THD of a

6-pulse rectifier is about 30 with the 5th and 7th harmonics dominant [441] [476]

Figure 464 Three-phase 12-diode bridge rectifier with a Y-Y and a Y-∆ transformer

Based on the same principle a 24-diode rectifier can be built using zig-zag

transformer group [476] But it is not used commonly in low power rating applications

Controllable rectifiers are normally firing angle controlled thyristor rectifiers and

pulse width modulated (PWM) rectifiers A PWM rectifier has the same circuit topology

as a PWM inverter which will be discussed later in this section It is just the same circuit

196

working at a different operation modes inverter mode vs rectifier mode Therefore only

the thyristor rectifier is discussed here

A thyristor can work just like a diode with the exception that it starts to conduct

when it is not only forward biased but also its gate receives a positive current pulse and

it continues to be conducting as long as it is still forward biased Thyristors can be used in

Figure 463 and 474 to replace the diodes Figure 465 shows a 6-pulse thyristor rectifier

The output DC voltage can be regulated by controlling the firing angles of thyristors The

firing angle α shown in Figure 465 is the angular delay between the time when a

thyristor is forward biased and the time when a positive current pulse is applied to its gate

For a 6-pulse thyristor rectifier the output DC voltage is [441]

)cos(23

απ LLdc VV = (4137)

where α = firing angle

If cos(α) is taken as the control variable it is noted from the above equation that the

output voltage of a thyristor rectifier is proportional to the control input

197

α

Figure 465 A 6-pulse thyristor rectifier

Simplified Model for Controllable Rectifiers Figure 466 shows the block diagram

of the simplified ideal model for controllable three phase rectifiers This model is

developed for long time simulation studies The ldquoline-line voltage peak valuerdquo block

calculates the peak value of the AC line-line voltage LLV2 The input quantity g which

can be considered as cos(α) is the control variable to regulate the output DC voltage The

output DC voltage is calculated based on (4137) For 6-pulse rectifiers gain kdc is 3π

Then the signal Edc is fed to control a controlled voltage source which actually is the DC

output of the model The series resistor Rs is used to model the power and voltage losses

within a real rectifier The ldquoP Q Calculationrdquo block calculates the amount of the real and

reactive power consumed at the AC side based on the DC side real power and the input

198

quantity power angle θ shown in Figure 466 The ldquodynamic loadrdquo block is a built-in

model in Simulink which consumes the real and reactive power assigned by its P amp Q

inputs

Figure 466 Block diagram of the simplified model for 3-phase controllable rectifiers

Figures 467 and 468 compare the voltage and current responses of the simplified

ideal rectifier model with the detailed rectifier models a 6-pulse model and a 12-pulse

model with the same AC source and the same DC load Figure 467 shows that the

average output DC voltage of the ideal model is slightly higher than those of the detailed

rectifier models Figure 468 shows the AC side phase current of the different models It

is noted that the AC current is distorted for the 6-pulse rectifier model However the

harmonic is much reduced for the 12-pulse rectifier model and the response of this

rectifier model is very close to that of the ideal rectifier model The simplified ideal

199

controllable rectifier model shown in Figure 466 is used in the proposed hybrid energy

system It can improve the simulation speed and at the same time keep the desired

accuracy

032 033 034 035 036265

270

275

Time (s)

Output DC Voltage (V) Ideal rectifier model

6-pulse thyristorrectifier model

12-pulse thyristorrectifier model

Figure 467 DC output voltages of the different rectifier models

032 033 034 035 036

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

30

Time (s)

AC side phase current (A)

Idealrectifiermodel

6-pulsethyristorrectifiermodel

12-pulsethyristorrectifiermodel

Figure 468 AC side phase current of the different rectifier models

200

DCDC Converters

There are many types of DCDC converters In this section only typical boost

converters and buck converters are discussed

Circuit Topologies Figure 469 shows the circuit diagram of a boost DCDC

converter (inside the rectangle) The output voltage regulation feedback is also given in

the figure At steady-state the average value of the output voltage is given as

)1(

_

_d

VV

indd

outdd minus= (4138)

where d is the duty ratio of the switching pulse

Since 10 ltle d the output voltage is always higher than the input voltage5 That is

why the circuit (in Figure 469) is called a boost DCDC converter The controller for the

converter is to regulate the DC bus voltage within a desirable range The output voltage is

measured and compared with the reference value The error signal is processed through

the PWM controller which can be a simple PI controller The output of the controller is

used to generate a PWM pulse with the right duty ratio so that the output voltage follows

the reference value

5 When d=1 the input is short circuited and the circuit will not work This situation should be avoided d

normally is less than 085 [476]

201

Figure 469 Boost DCDC converter

Figure 470 Buck DCDC converter

A buck DCDC converter is shown in Figure 470 At steady-state the average value

of the output voltage is given as

202

inddoutdd dVV __ = (4139)

Since 10 lele d the output voltage of a buck converter is always lower than its input

voltage In contrast to a boost converter a buck converter is a step-down DCDC

converter Its output voltage can also be regulated by controlling the duty ratio (d) of the

switching signals The voltage regulation feedback loop is also shown in Figure 470

State-space Models Based on the State-space Averaging Technique In order to

apply classical control analysis and design methods (such as Nyquist criterion Bode plots

and root loci analysis) in converter controls state-space small-signal models for the

above boost and buck converters are needed and are discussed in this section These

models are based on the state-space averaging technique developed by Middlebrook Cuacutek

and their colleagues [477]

1) State-space model for boost DCDC converters

In Figure 469 take ddLix =1 and Cddvx =2 as state variables Let xXx ~+=

dDd~

+= inddinddindd vVv ___~+= and outddoutddoutdd vVv ___

~+= ldquo~rdquo here is used to

denote small perturbation signals and state variable X denotes the system operating point

When the switch Sdd is on and diode Ddd is off the state-space representation of the

main circuit can be written as

xCv

vBxAx

T

outdd

indd

1_

_11

=

+=amp (4140)

where

minus=

ddRC

A 10

00

1

=

0

11

ddLB and ]10[1 =TC

203

When switch Sdd is off and diode Ddd is on the state-space equation of the circuit

turns out to be

xCv

vBxAx

T

outdd

indd

2_

_22

=

+=amp (4141)

where

minus

minus

=

dddd

dd

RCC

LA

11

10

2

=

0

12

ddLB and ]10[2 =TC

Therefore the average state-space model of the main circuit at the operating point is

xCv

BvAxx

T

outdd

indd

=

+=

_

_amp

(4142)

where

minusminus

minusminus

=

dddd

dd

RCC

d

L

d

A11

)1(0

===

0

121

LBBB and ]10[21 === TTT CCC

Then the small signal model for the boost DCDC converter can be obtained as

xCv

vBdBxAx

T

outdd

inddvdd

~~

~~~~

_

_

=

++=amp (4143)

where

minusminus

minusminus

=

dddd

ddd

RCC

D

L

D

A11

)1(0

minus=

dd

dd

dCX

LXB

1

2

=

0

1 dd

v

LB X1 and X2 are the steady

state values of x1 and x2 respectively

Using Eq (4143) and only considering the perturbation of duty ratio d~ ( inddv _~ =0)

204

the transfer function )(

~)(~

)(_

sd

svsT

outdd

vd = is obtained as

[ ]

minus+minus

minus++

=minus= minus

dddddd

dddddd

dd

T

vdCL

XD

C

sX

CL

D

RCss

BASICsT 21

2

1 )1(

)1()

1(

1)( (4144)

2) State-Space model for buck DCDC converters

Similar to the procedure discussed in the previous part a small-signal state-space

model of a buck converter can be obtained which has been reported in [441] and [476]

as

xCv

dBxAx

T

boutdd

bb

=

+=

_

amp

(4145)

where

=

Cdd

ddL

v

ix

minus

minus=

dddd

ddb

RCC

LA

11

10

=

0

_

dd

indd

b L

V

B ]10[=T

bC

The small signal model can be obtained as

xCv

dBxAx

T

boutdd

bb

~~

~~~~

_ =

+=amp (4146)

where

=

Cdd

ddL

v

ix ~

~~ and

=

0

~ _ ddindd

b

LVB

Similarly the transfer function for the output voltage over duty ratio can be obtained

++

==

dddddd

dddd

inddoutdd

p

CLRC

ssCL

V

sd

svsT

1)(~

)(~

)(2

__ (4147)

205

Averaged Models for DCDC Converters Averaged models for boost and buck

DCDC converters suitable for long time simulation studies are given in this part These

models simulate the DCDC converter transient behavior in large scale rather than the

detailed cycle-to-cycle variations of values of voltages and currents The models

discussed here are based on the models reported in [476]

1) Averaged model for boost DCDC converters

Lddid times

outddVd _times

Figure 471 Averaged model for boost DCDC converters

Comparing the circuit diagram of boost converter in Figure 469 and its averaged

model shown in Figure 471 we can see that the power electronic switch and diode are

replaced by the combination of controlled current and voltage sources in the averaged

model This gives the same performance as the detailed circuit model at large time scale

Figures 472 and 473 show the simulation results of the averaged model and the detailed

circuit model under a load change It is noted from these two figures that the averaged

model can simulate the converter behavior precisely at large time scale with reasonable

accuracy

206

008 009 01 011 012 013 014 015 016120

140

160

180

200

220

240Output Voltage (V)

008 009 01 011 012 013 014 015 016150

200

250

300

350

400

450

Time (s)

Inductor Current (A)

Output Voltage

Inductor Current

Figure 472 Simulation result of the averaged model for boost DCDC converter

008 009 01 011 012 013 014 015 016120

140

160

180

200

220

240

Output Voltage (V)

008 009 01 011 012 013 014 015 016150

200

250

300

350

400

450

Time (s)

Inductor Current (A)

Inductor Current

Output Voltage

Figure 473 Simulation result of the detailed model for boost DCDC converter

207

2) Averaged model for buck DCDC converters

Lddid times

inddVd _times

Figure 474 Averaged model for buck DCDC converters

Figure 474 shows the averaged model for buck converters Simulation results shown

in Figures 475 and 476 illustrate the effectiveness of the averaged model for buck

DCDC converters

008 009 01 011 012 013 01430

40

50

60

Output Voltage (V)

008 009 01 011 012 013 0140

40

80

120

Time (s)

Inductor Current (A)

Inductor Current

Output Voltage

Figure 475 Simulation result of the averaged model for buck DCDC converter

208

008 009 01 011 012 013 01430

40

50

60Output Voltage (V)

008 009 01 011 012 013 0140

40

80

120

Time (s)

Inductor Current (A)

Output Voltage

Inductor Current

Figure 476 Simulation result of the detailed model for buck DCDC converter

DCAC Inverters

Circuit Topology A 3-phase 6-switch DCAC PWM voltage source inverter is used

to convert the power from DC to AC Figure 477 shows the main circuit of a 3-phase

voltage source inverter (VSI) which is connected to the AC bus or utility grid through

LC filters and coupling inductors

State-Space Model For deducing convenience the neutral point N of the AC

system is chosen as the common potential reference point For the purpose of simplicity

only the inverter under balanced loads and without a neutral line (used in this dissertation)

is discussed Define the following switching functions

209

minus=

minus

+

OFFS

ONSd

a

a

1

1

1

minus=

minus

+

OFFS

ONSd

b

b

1

1

2 (4148)

minus=

minus

+

OFFS

ONSd

c

c

1

1

3

Figure 477 3-phase DCAC voltage source inverter

van vbn and vcn (the inverter output voltages between each phase and its imaginary

neutral point n) can be expressed as

=

=

=

dccn

dcbn

dcan

Vd

v

Vd

v

Vd

v

2

2

2

3

2

1

(4149)

where Vdc is the DC bus voltage

The output phase potentials of the inverter va vb and vc can be obtained as

210

+=

+=

+=

ncnc

nbnb

nana

vvv

vvv

vvv

(4150)

where vn is the voltage between the point n and the common reference neutral point N

Since 0=++ fcfbfa iii and 0=++ CBA eee vn is obtained as [478]-[479]

sum=

minus=3

1

6 k

k

dc

n dV

v (4151)

For the circuit shown in Figure 477 the following dynamic equations can be

obtained

++=

++=

++=

scfcf

fc

fc

sbfbf

fb

fb

safaf

fa

fa

viRdt

diLv

viRdt

diLv

viRdt

diLv

(4152)

minus+

minus+=

minus+

minus+=

minus+

minus+=

dt

vvdC

dt

vvdCii

dt

vvdC

dt

vvdCii

dt

vvdC

dt

vvdCii

sbscf

sascfscfc

scsbf

sasbfsbfb

scsaf

sbsafsafa

)()(

)()(

)()(

(4153)

minus=+

minus=+

minus=+

Cscsc

sscs

Bsbsb

ssbs

Asa

sa

ssas

evdt

diLiR

evdt

diLiR

evdt

diLiR

(4154)

Writing the above equations into the state-space form

abcabcabcabcabc UBXAX +=amp (4155)

211

where [ ]Tscsbsascsbsafcfbfaabc iiivvviiiX = [ ]TCBAdcabc eeeVU =

minus

minus

minus

minus

minus

minus

minusminus

minusminus

minusminus

=

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

ff

ff

ff

ff

f

ff

f

ff

f

abc

L

R

L

L

R

L

L

R

L

CC

CC

CC

LL

R

LL

R

LL

R

A

001

00000

0001

0000

00001

000

3

100000

3

100

03

100000

3

10

003

100000

3

1

0001

0000

00001

000

000001

00

and

minus

minus

minus

minus

minus

minus

=

sum

sum

sum

=

=

=

s

s

s

f

k

k

f

k

k

f

k

k

abc

L

L

L

Ldd

Ldd

Ldd

B

1000

01

00

001

0

0000

0000

0000

0006

1

2

0006

1

2

0006

1

2

3

1

3

3

1

2

3

1

1

212

dq Representation of the State-Space Model The dq transformation transfers a

stationary 3-coordinate (abc) system to a rotating 2-coordinate (dq) system The dq

signals can be used to achieve zero tracking error control [478] Due to this merit the dq

transformation has been widely used in PWM converter and rotating machine control

[462] [478] [480]

Using the dq transformation explained in [462] (see Appendix A) the system

state-space equation given in (4155) can be represented in the rotating dq frame as

dqdqdqdqdq UBXAX +=amp (4156)

where

[ ]Tsqsdsqsddqdddq iivviiX = [ ]Tqddcdq eeVU =

=

dc

db

da

dqabc

dq

dd

i

i

i

Ti

i

=

sc

sb

sa

dqabc

sq

sd

v

v

v

Tv

v and

=

C

B

A

dqabc

q

d

e

e

e

Te

e

minusminus

minus

minusminus

minus

minusminusminus

minusminus

=

s

s

s

s

s

s

ff

ff

ff

f

ff

f

dq

L

R

L

L

R

L

CC

CC

LL

R

LL

R

A

ω

ω

ω

ω

ω

ω

1000

01

00

3

100

3

10

03

100

3

1

001

0

0001

minus

minus

=

100

010

000

000

00)(

00)(

3

2

12

3

2

11

f

f

dq

L

dddtf

L

dddtf

B

f1 and f2 are obtained as

213

minus++

minusminus+

minus

=

sum

sumsum

=

==

3

1

3

3

1

2

3

1

1

3

2

11

3

1)

3

2sin(

3

1)

3

2sin(

3

1)sin(

3

1

)(

k

k

k

k

k

k

ddt

ddtddt

dddtf

πω

πωω

minus++

minusminus+

minus

=

sum

sumsum

=

==

3

1

3

3

1

2

3

1

1

3

2

12

3

1)

3

2cos(

3

1)

3

2cos(

3

1)cos(

3

1

)(

k

k

k

k

k

k

ddt

ddtddt

dddtf

πω

πωω

Tabcdq is the abcdq transformation matrix The methodology for developing the

abcdq transformation is explained in [462] (see Appendix A)

214

Ideal Model for Three-phase VSI Figure 478 shows the ideal model for a

three-phase VSI It is not a detailed model with all the power electronic switches and

switching signals it is an idealized model used for long time simulation studies The load

current of the input DC voltage source (Idc) is determined by the power consumed at the

AC side The other three input quantities are the desired output AC frequency f AC

voltage amplitude index (similar to the modulation index in a real VSI control) m and the

initial phase of the three-phase AC output voltages 0φ The ldquoabc signal formationrdquo block

gives the base signals for the three phases va(t) vb(t) and vc(t)

++=

++=

+=

)342sin()(

)322sin()(

)2sin()(

0

0

0

φππφππ

φπ

ftmtv

ftmtv

ftmtv

c

b

a

(4157)

The output voltage values Va(t) Vb(t) and Vc(t) are calculated by multiplying the

base signal values by the possible peak of the output AC which is 05Vdc For example

Va(t) = 05Vdctimesva(t) Then Va(t) Vb(t) and Vc(t) are used to control the three controlled

voltage sources which are the AC output voltages of the inverter model The AC power

is calculated through the ldquoPower Calculationrdquo block as

)()()()()()( tVtItVtItVtIP ccbbaaac times+times+times= (4158)

For the purpose of comparison a 208 V three-phase VSI is simulated to supply 100

kW to a load both by the ideal model shown in Figure 478 and the switched model given

in Figure 477 Figure 479 shows the output AC phase voltage of the two models It is

noted that though there are harmonics in voltage from the switched model its output

voltage waveform is very close to the output from the ideal model when a properly

215

designed filter is applied to the system Figure 480 shows the output power to the load

from the two models We can see that the ideal model output is ideal delivering a

constant power of 100 kW On the other hand a more practical and detailed output power

curve (with ripples) is obtained from the switched model Nevertheless the ideal model is

capable of simulating a VSI with good accuracy at large time scale

Figure 478 Ideal model for three-phase VSI

216

16 161 162 163 164

-150

-100

-50

0

50

100

150

Time (s)

AC phase voltage (V)

Figure 479 AC phase output voltages of the ideal VSI model and the switched VSI

model

16 162 164 166 168 170

50

100

150

200

Time (s)

Output Power (kW)

Switched Model

Ideal Model

Figure 480 Output power of the ideal VSI model and the switched VSI model

217

Battery Model

A validated electrical circuit model for lead-acid batteries shown in Figure 481 was

reported in [481] The diodes in the model are all ideal and just used to select different

resistances for charging and discharging states The model parameters (capacitances and

resistances) defined in Figure 481 are functions of battery current temperature and state

of charge (SOC) [481] [482] However within the voltage range (100plusmn5) there is not

a big difference between the charge and discharge resistances [481] For the purpose of

analysis these component values in the model are considered constant within the100plusmn5

voltage range in this study Then the model shown in Figure 481 can be simplified into

the circuit model given in Figure 482

Cb= battery capacitance Rp= self-discharge resistance or insulation resistance

R2c= internal resistance for charge R2d= internal resistance for discharge

R1c= overvoltage resistance for charge R1d= overvoltage resistance for discharge

C1= overvoltage capacitance

Figure 481 Equivalent circuit model for battery reported in [481]

218

Figure 482 Simplified circuit model for lead-acid batteries

Models for Accessories

Gas Compressor

A gas compressor can be modeled by considering the compression process as a

two-stage polytropic compression which can be described as [422]

CVP m

ii = (4159)

where Pi Vi = the pressure and voltage at stage i (1 2)

m = polytropic exponent

C = constant

Based on the above equation the power needed to compress a gas at pressure P1 to

pressure P2 with the flow rate gasnamp can be obtained as

comp

m

m

x

gascompP

P

m

mRTnP

η1

11

2

1

2

minus

minus=

minus

amp (4160)

where Pcomp = power consumed (W)

gasnamp = gas flow rate (mols)

219

R = gas constant 83144 J(molmiddotK)

T = gas temperature (K)

P2 = exit pressure (Pa)

21PPPx = intermediate pressure (Pa)

P1 = inlet pressure (Pa)

ηcomp = overall efficiency of the compressor

High Pressure H2 Storage Tank

For H2 in the high pressure storage tank shown in Figure 483 the ideal gas equation

does not accurately describe the relation between P V and T a modified equation of state

should be used The Beattie-Bridgeman equation has been successful in fitting the

measured values of pressure volume and temperature in a high-pressure gas storage tank

with good accuracy [422] This modified state equation can be written as

innamp outnamp

Figure 483 Pressured H2 storage tank

2

2

0

032

21

11V

nV

anA

V

bnB

n

V

VT

cn

V

RTnP

minusminus

minus+

minus= (4161)

where P = pressure of hydrogen in the tank (atm)

V = Volume of the tank (liter)

220

T = temperature of H2 (K)

n = number of moles of H2 in the tank

R = Gas constant 008206 atmmiddotliter(molmiddotK)

A0 B0 a b c are constants for certain type of gas Their values for H2 are given

in Table 49

The change of mole number of gas (H2) in the tank is governed by

outin nndt

dnampamp minus= (4162)

TABLE 49 CONSTANTS OF BEATTIE-BRIDGEMAN EQUATION OF STATE FOR H2 [422]

A0 01975 atmmiddotliter2mol

2

B0 002096 litermol

a -000506 litermol

b -004359 litermol

c 00504times104 litermiddotK3mol

Gas Pressure Regulator

Figure 484 shows a schematic diagram of a commonly used gas pressure regulator

[483] Its function is to keep the output pressure Po constant at a desired value (Pref)

under changes of the gas flow rates qo The pressure regulation is achieved by the

deformation of the diaphragm Suppose there is a reduction in Po which will reduce the

pressure against the bottom of the diaphragm This causes the spring force to push

downward to increase the valve opening in the direction axis x Therefore the valve flow

221

is increased and as a result the output pressure Po is raised back toward the reference

value The system can be modeled by the following equations [483]

( )( )oicxi PPkxkq minus+= (4163)

where qi = input flow rate (mols)

kx kc = constants used in calculating fluid resistanceadmittance [mol(Pamiddotsmiddotm)

mol(Pamiddots)]

Figure 484 Gas pressure regulator

The net flow entering the volume below the diaphragm is

( )( ) ooicxoinet qPPkxkqqq minusminus+=minus= (4164)

Normally the diaphragm deformation is small hence the volume V can be considered

constant The dynamic state equation can be written as

ognet PCq amp= (4165)

where Cg = VRT The output pressure Po can be expressed as

A

xkPP s

refo minus= (4166)

where ks = spring constant (Nm)

A = diaphragm area (m2)

Figure 485 shows the model performance under output flow variations and the

222

variations in reference pressure The model is adjusted to keep the output pressure at the

reference value at the flow rate of 01 mols The reference pressure steps up from 2 atm

to 3 atm at 10 s The figure shows that the output pressure follows the reference value

very well It is noted from the figure that the output pressure drops a little bit (from 2 atm

to about 198 atm) when the output flow rate jumps up to 02 mols at 2 s The output

pressure comes back to its preset value (2 atm) when the output flow rate drops back to

01 mols at 6 s

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 1615

2

25

3

35

Pressure (atm)

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 160

01

02

Time (s)

Flow rate (mols)

Output flow rate qo

Output pressure Po

Pref

Figure 485 Performance of the model for gas pressure regulators

223

Summary

In this chapter the model development for the components of the proposed hybrid

alternative energy system is discussed These components are fuel cells (PEMFCs and

SOFCs) variable speed wind energy conversion unit solar power generation unit

electrolyzers power electronic interfacing devices battery bank and accessories

including gas compressor high-pressure H2 storage tank and gas pressure regulator

Performance evaluation of these models is also discussed in this chapter The models will

be used in Chapters 5 and 6 to investigate grid-connected and stand-alone fuel cell power

generation systems and in Chapter 7 for the study of hybrid energy systems

224

REFERENCES

[41] J C Amphlett R M Baumert R F Mann B A Peppley and P R Roberge

ldquoPerformance Modeling of the Ballard Mark IV Solid Polymer Electrolyte Fuel

Cell I Mechanistic Model Developmentrdquo Journal of the Electrochemical Society

Vol 142 No 1 pp 1-8 Jan 1995

[42] J C Amphlett R M Baumert R F Mann B A Peppley and P R Roberge

ldquoPerformance Modeling of the Ballard Mark IV Solid Polymer Electrolyte Fuel

Cell II Empirical Model Developmentrdquo Journal of the Electrochemical Society

Vol 142 No 1 pp 9-15 Jan 1995

[43] R Cownden M Nahon M A Rosen ldquoModeling and Analysis of a Solid Polymer

Fuel Cell System for Transportation Applicationsrdquo International Journal of

Hydrogen Energy Vol 26 No 6 pp 615-623 June 2001

[44] Charles E Chamberlin ldquoModeling of Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cell

Performance with an Empirical Equationrdquo Journal of the Electrochemical Society

Vol 142 No 8 pp 2670-2674 August 1995

[45] Andrew Rowe Xianguo Li ldquoMathematical Modeling of Proton Exchange

Membrane Fuel Cellsrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 102 No 1-2 pp82-96

Dec 2001

[46] D Bevers M Woumlhr ldquoSimulation of a Polymer Electrolyte Fuel Cell Electroderdquo

Journal of Applied Electrochemistry Vol27 No 11 pp 1254-1264 Nov 1997

[47] G Maggio V Recupero L Pino ldquoModeling Polymer Electrolyte Fuel Cells An

Innovative Approachrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 101 No 2 pp275-286 Oct

2001

[48] J C Amphlett R F Mann B A Peppley P R Roberge and A Rodrigues ldquoA

Model Predicting Transient Responses of Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cellsrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 61 No 1-2 pp 183-188 July-Aug 1996

[49] J Hamelin K Agbossou A Laperriegravere F Laurencelle and T K Bose ldquoDynamic

Behavior of a PEM Fuel Cell Stack for Stationary Applicationsrdquo International

Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 26 No 6 pp 625-629 June 2001

[410] M Woumlhr K Bolwin W Schnurnberger M Fischer W Neubrand and G

Eigenberger ldquoDynamic Modeling and Simulation of a Polymer Membrane Fuel

Cell Including Mass Transport Limitationrdquo International Journal of Hydrogen

Energy Vol 23 No 3 pp 213-218 March 1998

225

[411] Hubertus PLH van Bussel Frans GH Koene and Ronald KAM Mallant

ldquoDynamic Model of Solid Polymer Fuel Cell Water Managementrdquo Journal of

Power Sources Vol 71 No 1-2 pp 218-222 March 1998

[412] M Wang M H Nehrir ldquoFuel Cell Modeling and Fuzzy Logic-Based Voltage

Controlrdquo International Journal of Renewable Energy Engineering Vol 3 No 2

August 2001

[413] Michael D Lukas Kwang Y Lee Hossein Ghezel-Ayagh ldquoPerformance Implications of Rapid Load Changes in Carbonate Fuel Cell Systemsrdquo

Proceedings 2001 IEEE Power Engineering Society Winter Meeting Vol 3 pp

979-984 2001

[414] Robert Lasseter ldquoDynamic Models for Micro-turbines and Fuel Cellsrdquo

Proceedings 2001 IEEE Power Engineering Society Summer Meeting Vol 2 pp 761-766 2001

[415] Padmanabhan Srinivasan Ali Feliachi John Ed Sneckenberger ldquoProton Exchange

Membrane Fuel Cell Dynamic Model for Distributed Generation Control

Purposesrdquo Proceedings 34th North American Power Symposium pp 393-398

Oct 2002 Tempe Arizona

[416] Pariz Famouri and Randall S Gemmen ldquoElectrochemical Circuit Model of a PEM

Fuel Cellrdquo Proceedings 2003 IEEE Power Engineering Society Summer Meeting

0-7803-7990-X03 July 2003 Toronto Canada

[417] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained John Wiley amp

Sons Ltd 2001

[418] Fuel Cell Handbook (Sixth Edition) EGampG Services Inc Science Applications

International Corporation DOE Office of Fossil Energy National Energy

Technology Lab Nov 2002

[419] JA Smith MH Nehrir V Gerez and SR Shaw ldquoA Broad Look at the Workings

Types and Applications of Fuel Cellsrdquo Proceedings 2002 IEEE Power

Engineering Society Summer Meeting Vol 1 pp 70-75 July 2002 Chicago IL

[420] G Kortum Treatise on Electrochemistry (2nd Edition) Elsevier Publishing

Company 1965

[421] A Schneuwly M Baumlrtschi V Hermann G Sartorelli R Gallay and R Koetz

ldquoBOOSTCAP Double-Layer Capacitors for Peak Power Automotive Applicationsrdquo Proceedings the Second International ADVANCED

AUTOMOTIVE BATTERY Conference (AABC) Las Vegas Nevada February

2002

226

[422] George N Hatsopoulos and Joseph H Keenan Principles of General

Thermodynamics John Wiley amp Sons Inc 1965

[423] Thomas G Burke and David A Schiller ldquoUsing PSPICE for Electrical Heat

Analysisrdquo IEEE Potentials Vol 22 No 2 pp 35-38 AprilMay 2003

[424] PSpicereg includes PSpice AD PSpice AD Basics and Pspice Reference Guide Cadence Design Systems Inc Release 923

[425] SR-12 Modular PEM GeneratorTM Operatorrsquos Manual Avista Labs July 2000

[426] MT Iqbal ldquoSimulation of a Small Wind Fuel Cell Hybrid Energy Systemrdquo

Renewable Energy Vol 28 No 4 pp 511-522 April 2003

[427] SC Singhal ldquoSolid oxide fuel cells for stationary mobile and military

applicationsrdquo Solid State Ionics Vol 152-153 pp405-410 2002

[428] SC Singhal ldquoAdvances in tubular solid oxide fuel cell technologyrdquo Solid State Ionics Vol 135 pp305-313 2000

[429] O Yamamoto ldquoSolid oxide fuel cells fundamental aspects and prospectsrdquo

Electrochimica Acta Vol 45 No (15-16) pp 2423-2435 2000

[430] K Eguchi H Kojo T Takeguchi R Kikuchi and K Sasaki ldquoFuel flexibility in power generation by solid oxide fuel cellsrdquo Solid State Ionics No 152-153 pp

411-16 Dec 2002

[431] SH Chan KA Khor and ZT Xia ldquoA complete polarization model of a solid

oxide fuel cell and its sensitivity to the change of cell component thicknessrdquo

Journal of Power Sources Vol 93 No (1-2) pp 130-140 Feb 2001

[432] P Aguiar D Chadwick and L Kershenbaum ldquoModeling of an indirect internal

reforming solid oxide fuel cellrdquo Chemical Engineering Science Vol 57

pp1665-1677 2002

[433] P Costamagna and K Honegger ldquoModeling of solid oxide heat exchanger

integrated stacks and simulation at high fuel utilizationrdquo Journal of the

Electrochemical Society Vol 145 No 11 pp 3995-4007 Nov 1998

[434] J Padulleacutes GW Ault and J R McDonald ldquoAn integrated SOFC plant dynamic

model for power system simulationrdquo J Power Sources pp495ndash500 2000

[435] DJ Hall and RG Colclaser ldquoTransient Modeling and Simulation of a Tubular

Solid Oxide Fuel Cellrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 14 No3

pp 749-753 1999

227

[436] RS Gemmen ldquoAnalysis for the effect of inverter ripple current on fuel cell

operating conditionrdquo Transactions of the ASME - Journal of Fluids Engineering

Vol 125 No 3 pp576-585 May 2003

[437] K Acharya SK Mazumder RK Burra R Williams C Haynes Proceeding

38th IAS Annual Meeting (IEEE Industry Applications Society) Vol 3 pp

2026-2032 2003

[438] S H Chan CF Low OL Ding ldquoEnergy and exergy analysis of simple solid-oxide fuel-cell power systemsrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 103 No2

pp 188-200 Jan 2002

[439] S Nagata A Momma T Kato and Y Kasuga ldquoNumerical analysis of output

characteristics of tubular SOFC with internal reformerrdquo Journal of Power Sources

Vol 101 pp60-71 2001

[440] D J Hall Transient Modeling and Simulation of a Solid Oxide Fuel Cell PhD

Dissertation School of Engineering University of Pittsburg Nov 1997

[441] N Mohan T M Undeland and W P Robbins Power Electronics ndash Converters

Applications and Design John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2003

[442] S C Singhal ldquoRecent progress in tubular solid oxide fuel cell technologyrdquo Proceedings the Fifth International Symposium on SOFC (Electrochem Soc) pp

37-50 1997

[443] E Achenbach ldquoResponse of a solid oxide fuel cell to load changerdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 57 No (1-2) pp 105-109 1995

[444] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy

Conversion Vol 20 No 2 pp442-451 June 2005

[445] Rajib Datta and V T Ranganathan ldquoVariable-Speed Wind Power Generation

Using Doubly Fed Wound Rotor Induction Machine ndash A Comparison with

Alternative Schemesrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversions vol 17 no 3 pp 414-420 Sept 2002

[446] C F Wagner ldquoSelf-excitation of induction motorsrdquo Trans Amer Inst Elect Eng

vol 58 pp 47-51 Feb 1939

[447] E D Basset and F M Potter ldquoCapacitive excitation of induction generatorsrdquo Trans

Amer Inst Elect Eng vol 54 no 5 pp 540-545 May 1935

228

[448] J M Elder J T Boys and J L Woodward ldquoSelf-excited induction machine as a

small low-cost generatorrdquo in Proc Inst Elect Eng pt C vol 131 no 2 pp 33-41

Mar 1984

[449] L Ouazene and G Mcpherson Jr ldquoAnalysis of the isolated induction generatorrdquo

IEEE Trans Power Apparatus and Systems vol PAS-102 no 8 pp2793-2798

Aug 1983

[450] C Grantham D Sutanto and B Mismail ldquoSteady-state and transient analysis of self-excited induction generatorsrdquo in Proc Inst Elect Eng pt B vol 136 no 2

pp 61-68 Mar 1989

[451] Dawit Seyoum Colin Grantham and M F Rahman ldquoThe dynamic characteristics

of an isolated self-excited induction generator driven by a wind turbinerdquo IEEE

Trans Industry Applications vol39 no 4 pp936-944 JulyAugust 2003

[452] Eduard Muljadi and C P Butterfield ldquoPitch-Controlled Variable Wind turbine

Generationrdquo IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications vol 37 no 1 pp

240-246 JanFeb 2001

[453] Siegfried Heier Grid Integration of Wind energy Conversion Systems John Wileyamp Sons 1998 ch 1-2

[454] J G Slootweg SWH de Haan H Polinder and WL Kling ldquoGeneral Model for

Representing Variable Speed Wind Turbines in Power System Dynamics

Simulationsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Systems vol 18 no 1 pp 144-151

Feb 2003

[455] Bimal K Bose Modern Power Electronics and Ac Drives Pearson Education 2003

ch 2

[456] P M Anderson and Anjan Bose ldquo Stability Simulation of Wind Turbine systemsrdquo

IEEE Trans on Power and Apparatus and Systems vol PAS-102 no 12 pp

3791-3795 Dec 1983

[457] MatLabSimulink SimPowerSystems Documentation Available httpwwwmathworkscom

[458] M H Salama and P G Holmes ldquoTransient and steady-state load performance of

stand alone self-excited induction generatorrdquo in Proc IEE-Elect Power Applicat

vol 143 no 1 pp 50-58 Jan 1996

[459] S S Murthy O P Malik and A K Tandon ldquoAnalysis of self excited induction

generatorsrdquo in Proc Inst Elect Eng pt C vol 129 no 6 pp 260-265 Nov1982

229

[460] N H Malik and A H Al-Bahrani ldquoInfluence of the terminal capacitor on the

performance characteristics of a self-excited induction generatorrdquo in Proc Inst

Elect Eng pt C vol 137 no 2 pp 168-173 Mar 1990

[461] T F Chan ldquoCapacitance requirements of self-excited induction generatorsrdquo IEEE

Trans Energy Conversion vol 8 no 2 pp 304-311 June 1993

[462] Paul C Krause Oleg Wasynczuk and Scott D Sudhoff Analysis of Electric

Machinery IEEE Press 1994 ch 3-4

[463] M Godoy Simoes and Felix A Farret Renewable Energy Systems-Design and

Analysis with Induction Generators CRC Press 2004 ch 3-6

[464] JG Slootweg ldquoWind power modeling and impact on power system dynamicsrdquo

PhD dissertation Dept Elect Eng Delft University of Technology Delft

Netherlands 2003

[465] A K Al Jabri and AI Alolah ldquoCapacitance requirements for isolated self-excited

induction generatorrdquo Proceedings IEE pt B vol 137 no 3 pp 154-159 May

1990

[466] SR Guda ldquoModeling and power management of a hybrid wind-microturbine

power generation systemrdquo MS thesis Montana State University 2005

[467] Oslash Ulleberg and S O MOslashRNER ldquoTRNSYS simulation models for solar-hydrogen

systems rdquo Solar Energy Vol 59 No 4-6 pp 271-279 1997

[468] Oslashystein Ulleberg Stand-Alone Power Systems for the Future Optimal Design

Operation amp Control of Solar-Hydrogen Energy Systems PhD Dissertation

Norwegian University of Science and Technology Trondheim 1998

[469] TU Townsend A Method for Estimating the Long-Term Performance of

Direct-Coupled Photovoltaic Systems MS thesis University Of Wisconsin ndash

Madison 1989

[470] M R Patel Wind and Solar Power Systems CRC Press LLC 1999

[471] H Dehbonei Power conditioning for distributed renewable energy generation PhD Dissertation Curtin University of Technology Australia 2003

[472] MAS Masoum H Dehbonei and EF Fuchs ldquoTheoretical and experimental

analyses of photovoltaic systems with voltage and current-based maximum

power-point trackingrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 17 No 4

pp 514 ndash 522 Dec 2002

230

[473] JHR Enslin MS Wolf DB Snyman and W Swiegers ldquoIntegrated Photovoltaic

Maximum Power Point Tracking Converterrdquo IEEE Transactions On Industrial

Electronics Vol 44 No 6 December 1997

[474] S M Alghuwainem ldquoMatching of a dc motor to a photovoltaic generator using a

step-up converter with a current-locked looprdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy

Conversion vol 9 pp 192ndash198 Mar 1994

[475] Oslash Ulleberg ldquoModeling of advanced alkaline electrolyzers a system simulation approachrdquo International Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 28 pp 21-33 2003

[476] DW Hart Introduction to Power Electronics Prentice Hall 1997

[477] RD Middlebrook ldquoSmall-signal modeling of pulse-width modulated

switched-mode power convertersrdquo Proceedings of the IEEE Vol 76 No 4 pp 343

ndash 354 April 1988

[478] H Mao Study on Three-Phase High-Input-Power-Factor PWM-Voltage-Type

Reversible Rectifiers and Their Control Strategies PhD Dissertation Zhejiang

University 2000

[479] M Tsai WI Tsai ldquoAnalysis and Design of Three-phase AC-to-DC Converters

with High Power Factor and Near-Optimum Feedforwardrdquo IEEE Transactions on

Industrial Electronics Vol 46 No 3 pp535-543 June 1999

[480] C T RimN S Choi G C Cho G H Cho ldquoA Complete DC and AC Analysis of

Three-Phase Controlled-Current PWM Rectifier Using Circuit D-Q

Transformationrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Electronics Vol 9 No 4 pp

390-396 July 1994

[481] ZM Salameh MA Casacca and WA Lynch ldquoA mathematical model for

lead-acid batteriesrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 7 No1 pp

93-98 1992

[482] Handbook of Batteries 2nd edition D Linden Ed McGraw Hill Inc New York

NY 1995

[483] John Van de Vegte Feedback Control Systems (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall 1994

231

CHAPTER 5

CONTROL OF GRID-CONNECTED

FUEL CELL POWER GENERATION SYSTEMS

Introduction

Fuel cells show great promise to be an important distributed generation (DG) source

of the future due to many advantages they have such as high efficiency zero or low

emission (of pollutant gases) and flexible modular structure Fuel cell DGs can be

strategically placed at any site in a power system (normally at the distribution level) for

grid reinforcement deferring or eliminating the need for system upgrades and improving

system integrity reliability and efficiency When connected to a utility grid important

operation and performance requirements are imposed on fuel cell DGs For example they

should be able to deliver a pre-set amount of real and reactive power to the grid or be

able to follow a time varying load profile [52] [56] [527] Therefore proper

controllers need to be designed for a fuel cell DG to make its performance characteristics

as desired

Among different types of fuel cells proton exchange membrane fuel cells (PEMFC)

solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC) and molten carbonate fuel cells (MCFC) are likely to be

used in DG applications In order to study the performance characteristics of fuel cell

DGs accurate models of fuel cells are needed [51]-[58] Moreover models for the

interfacing power electronic circuits in a fuel cell DG are also needed to design

controllers for the overall system to improve its performance and to meet certain

232

operation requirements [57]-[59]

In this chapter the control of grid-connected FC systems is discussed Both a PEMFC

and a SOFC grid connected system are investigated The PEMFC model the SOFC

model and the models for boost DCDC converters and a three-phase inverter together

with a LC filter and transmission lines reported in Chapter 4 are used in this study The

controller design methodologies for the DCDC converters and the 3-phase inverter are

also presented for the proposed fuel cell DG systems Based on the individual component

models developed and the controllers designed simulation models for both a PEMFC DG

system and a SOFC DG system have been built in MATLABSimulink using the

SimPowerSystems block-set Simulation studies are carried out to investigate the real and

reactive power controllability of the fuel cell DG systems The system performances

under load-following and severe electrical faults are also discussed in this chapter

System Description

In order to meet the system operational requirements a fuel cell DG needs to be

interfaced through a set of power electronic devices The interface is very important as it

affects the operation of the fuel cell system as well as the power grid

Various power electronic circuits have been proposed in recent work to interface

different energy sources with the utility grid [59]-[516] Pulse-width modulated (PWM)

voltage source inverters (VSI) are widely used to interconnect a fuel cell energy system

to a utility grid for real and reactive power control purposes [59] [511] [515] [516]

233

Figure 51 Block diagram of a fuel cell distributed generation system

234

In addition fuel cell systems normally need boost DCDC converters to adapt the fuel

cell output voltage to the desired inverter input voltage and smooth the fuel cell output

current [517] [518]

Figure 51 shows the schematic diagram of the fuel cell DG system proposed in this

study In this dissertation the fuel cell power plant in the figure is either PEMFC or

SOFC type The system configuration ratings and parameters are given in Table 51 The

FC power plant consists of 10 fuel cell arrays connected in parallel Each array is rated at

48kW for a total of 480kW A boost converter is used to adapt the output voltage of each

fuel cell array to the DC bus voltage In this dissertation the DC bus voltage (DCDC

converter output) is chosen as VDC = 480V which is mainly determined by the inverter

AC output voltage and the voltage drop across the LC filter The following equation

should be satisfied between the DC side and AC side voltages of the inverter [515]

2

max

2

)(3)(22

3ILVVm fLLACDCa ω+ge (51)

where VDC is the DC bus voltage VACLL is the AC side line-line RMS voltage Lf is the

filter inductance Imax is the RMS value of maximum AC load current (IAC) and ma is the

modulation index of the inverter Linear pulse-width modulation (PWM) is used for the

inverter ie ma le 10 in this study

For a boost converter the higher the duty ratio (or the larger the voltage difference

between the input and output) the lower is the efficiency [516] In this study a duty ratio

around 55 is used for the DCDC converter at the fuel cellrsquos rated operating point The

approximate desired input voltage for the DCDC converter can be obtained to be

[ ]V216)5501( =timesminus DCV According to the V-I characteristics of the PEMFC given in

235

Figure 411 when the PEMFC load current is over 23A the fuel cell is in the

concentration zone which should be avoided [519] [520] In order to leave some safe

margin the fuel cell is operated around the point where its current is 20A (rated operating

point) and its output voltage (VPEMFC) is about 27V Therefore the number of PEMFC

stacks we need to connect in series to get a voltage of 216V is

827

216===

PEMFC

FC

sV

VN (52)

The number of PEMFC series stacks needed to compose a 48kW fuel cell array is

12508

48=

times=

times=

kW

kW

PN

PN

stacks

array

p (53)

Therefore each PEMFC array is composed of 8times12 stacks with the power rating of

48kW

For a SOFC array its configuration can be determined in a similar way According to

the SOFC V-I and P-I characteristics shown in Figures 420 and 422 when its load

current is over 110 A the SOFC stack is in the concentration zone where its output

voltage will decrease sharply as load current increases this situation should also be

avoided [519] In order to leave some safe margin the fuel cell is operated around the

point where its current is 100 A (rated operating point) and its output voltage (VSOFC) is

about 55 V Therefore the number (Ns) of fuel cell stacks we need to connect in series to

get a voltage of 220 V is

455

220===

SOFC

FC

sV

VN (54)

236

TABLE 51 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS OF THE PROPOSED SYSTEM

216V480kW PEMFC Power Plant

Ten 48kW FC arrays are connected in parallel

216V48kW consisting of PEMFC Array

8 (series)times12 (parallel) 500W fuel cell stacks

216V480kW SOFC Power Plant

Ten 48kW FC arrays are connected in parallel

216V48kW consisting of SOFC Array

200V480V 50kW each

Boost DCDC Converter 10 units connected in parallel

3-phase DCAC Inverter 480V DC208V AC 500kW

LC Filter Lf = 015mH Cf = 3065uF

Vn = 208V125kV Sn = 500kW Step Up Transformer

R1=R2=0005 pu X1=X2=0025 pu

Coupling Inductor Xc = 50Ω

05km ACSR 60 Transmission Line

R = 2149 Ωkm X = 05085 Ωkm

DC Bus Voltage 480V

AC Bus Voltage 120V208V

237

The total power rating of the series connection of 4 SOFC stacks (5 kW each) is 20

kW The number (Np) of these 20 kW SOFC units that need to be connected in parallel to

compose a 40 kW fuel cell array is

254

40=

times=

times=

kW

kW

PN

PN

stacks

array

p (55)

Therefore each 40 kW SOFC array is composed of 4times2 = 8 SOFC stacks (5 kW

each)

Super-capacitors or battery banks are connected to the DC bus to provide storage

capability and fast dynamic response to load transients A 3-phase 6-switch inverter

interfaces the DC bus with a 120208V AC power system An LC filter is connected to

the output of the inverter to reduce the harmonics introduced by the inverter A

208V125kV step up transformer connects the fuel cell power system to the utility grid

through a coupling inductor and a short transmission line The coupling inductor is

needed to control the real and reactive power flow between the fuel cell DG system and

the utility grid and to limit disturbance and fault currents

The controllers for the boost DCDC converters are designed to keep the DC bus

voltage within an acceptable band (plusmn5 in this study) Therefore the input to the 3-phase

inverter can be considered as a fairly good constant voltage source The inverter

controller controls the real and reactive power flows to the utility grid P Q power flows

follow their respective reference values which can either be set as fixed values or to

follow a certain load demand

238

Controller Designs for Power Electronic Devices

It was shown in Figures 411 and 420 that the output voltage of a fuel cell is a

function of load The boost DCDC converter adapts the fuel cell output voltage to the

DC bus voltage and the voltage controller helps regulate the output voltage within a plusmn5

tolerance band under normal operation In this section conventional PI controller is used

for the boost DCDC converters In practice a load sharing controller (not discussed in

this study) can be applied on the converters connected in parallel to achieve a uniform

load distribution among them [528] Also a dq transformed two-loop current control

scheme is presented for the inverter to control the real and reactive power delivered from

the fuel cell power system to the grid Based on the models for power electronic devices

discussed in Chapter 4 the designs for the controllers of power electronic devices are

given in this section

Controller Design for the Boost DCDC Converter

The main components of the DCDC converter can be determined by the prescribed

technical specifications such as the rated and peak voltage and current input current

ripple and output voltage ripple etc using the classic boost DCDC converter design

procedure [515] [516] The component values for the 48kW DCDC converter used in

this study are listed in Table 52 For a boost DCDC converter shown in Figure 469 the

transfer function of the output voltage over duty ratio )(sTvd is obtained as

minus+minus

minus++

==dddddd

dddddd

outdd

vdCL

XD

C

sX

CL

D

RCss

sd

svsT 21

2

_ )1(

)1()

1(

1

)(~

)(~

)( (56)

239

where D is the rated duty ratio of the switch X1 is the average current of inductor Ldd and

X2 is the output voltage at the rated operation point

The transfer function of PWM generator can be expressed as [515] [516]

tri

PWMV

sT1

)( = (57)

where Vtri is the saw-tooth waveform amplitude of PWM generator

The voltage ratio of the voltage transducer in Figure 469 is set as Kd = 1480 to

normalize the output voltage The PWM controller in the figure is chosen as a PI

controller with the transfer function

s

ksksG

didp

dc

+=)( (58)

Based on the transfer function in (56) the PI current controller can be designed using

the classic Bode-plot and root-locus method [521] The overall block diagram of its

control loop is shown in Figure 52 The parameters of the PI voltage controller are also

listed in Table 52 Figure 53 shows the open loop Bode plot of the system It is noted

from the figure that the system is quite stable and has 828deg phase margin

)(~_ sv outdd)(

~sd

Figure 52 Block diagram of the control loop for the boost DCDC converter

240

TABLE 52 SYSTEM PARAMETERS OF THE BOOST DCDC CONVERTER

Ldd 12 mH

Cdd 1000 uF

DN 05833

R 4608 Ω

X1 250 A

X2 480 V

kdi 50

kdp 005

-60

-40

-20

0

20Open-Loop Bode Plot Gc(s)T(s)

GM 884 dB

Freq 364 radsec

Stable loop

Magnitude (dB)

101

102

103

104

0

90

180

270

PM 828 deg

Freq 617 radsec

Phase (deg)

Frequency (radsec)

Figure 53 Bode plot of the control loop of the boost DCDC converter

241

Controller Design for the 3-Phase VSI

In order to meet the requirements for interconnecting a fuel cell system to a utility

grid and control the real and reactive power flow between them it is necessary to shape

and control the inverter output voltage in amplitude angle and frequency [522] In this

section a PWM controller is designed for the inverter shown in Figure 475 to satisfy

voltage regulation as well as to achieve real and reactive power control

Though the state-space equation (4156) in Chapter 4 is sufficient for theoretical

analysis and design it is too complicated to be applied in the actual controller design

from the engineering point of view In order to simplify the analysis and design a control

scheme consisting of an outer voltage regulator with an inner current control loop given

in [523] is adapted for inverter control The inner current control loop is designed to

respond faster than the outer voltage control loop so that these two loops can be

considered separately [523] [524]

Current Control Loop The ramp comparison method is used to generate the six PWM

signals in this study Base on the state-space averaging technique [515] [523] the

average value of the switching functions in a switching period is

( ) 321_

== kV

id

trim

ck

avgk (59)

where ick is the modulating (control) signal and trimV _ is the amplitude of the carrier

signal

Converting the control signals from abc coordinate into the dq frame yields

242

=

3

2

1

0 c

c

c

dqabc

c

cq

cd

i

i

i

T

i

i

i

(510)

where icd and icq are the control signals in dq frame and ic0 = 0 for the balanced system

Tabcdq is the abcdq transformation matrix as given in Appendix A

For the purpose of analysis only unity power factor operation (zero value on q axis)

is discussed in the section The effect of the capacitor Cf in the low pass LC filter (see

Figure 477) on the power frequency current is very small Therefore Cf can be neglected

when designing the current loop controller [523] Based on the state-space formula [see

(4156)] in Chapter 4 the current control loop can be represented in the diagram shown in

Figure 54

sLR ss +1

Figure 54 Block diagram of the current control loop of the inverter

GACR(s) in the figure is the current controller which is chosen as a generic PI

controller

s

ksksG

cicp

ACR

+=)( (511)

KPWM is the gain of the pulse generator

243

mtri

dcPWM

V

VK

_2= (512)

In the figure sLR ss +

1 is the model of the overall equivalent admittance of the LC

filter inductor power transformer coupling inductor and transmission line and kc is

simply the current transducer ratio The parameters of the current control loop are

summarized in Table 53

The transfer function of the current control loop can be obtained as

c

cc

refsd

sdc

P

si

sisT

∆∆

== 11

_ )(

)()( (513)

where )(

11

sLRKGP

ss

PWMACRc += 11 =∆ c

and)(

11

sLRk

KG

ssc

PWMACRc +

+=∆

TABLE 53 PARAMETERS OF THE CURRENT CONTROL LOOP THE INVERTER

Vdc 480 V

Vtri_m 1 V

Rs 0006316 Ω

Ls 01982 mH

kc 1388

kci 250

kcp 25

According to the parameters listed in Table 53 the Bode plot of the current control

loop is given in Figure 55 It is noted that the system is quite stable with phase margin of

882ordm

244

The unit step response of the current control loop is shown in Figure 56 It is noted

that the overshoot is about 25 and the equivalent dominant time constant is about

045ms Therefore the overall current control loop can be approximated by a simple lag

as

s

ksT

i

cc τ+

=1

)(ˆ (514)

where τi (045ms) is the equivalent time constant of the current control loop

The unit step response of )(ˆ sTcis also shown in Figure 56 This approximated

overall transfer function will be used in the following section to design the voltage

control loop

-20

0

20

40

60

80

GM Inf

Freq NaN

Stable loop

Magnitude (dB)

Current Control Loop Bode Plot

100

101

102

103

104

-180

-135

-90

PM 882 deg

Freq 218e+003 radsec

Phase (deg)

Frequency (radsec)

Figure 55 Bode plot of the current control loop

245

0 5 10 15 200

02

04

06

08

1

Time (ms)

Unit Step Response (pu)

Tc(s)

Simple lag approximation

Figure 56 Unit step response of the current control loop and its approximation

Voltage Control Loop Base on the state-space model given in (4156) in Chapter 4

the voltage control loop can be represented by the block diagram shown in Figure 57

For the purpose of analysis only the condition where the q-axis voltage component is

zero is discussed

GAVR

(s)_

+vsd_ref

isd

Rrsquos+Lrsquo

ss

ed

_+

vSd

1kv

s

k

i

c

τ+1

isd_ref

Current

Control Loop

Figure 57 Block diagram of the voltage control loop of the inverter

In the figure the GAVR(s) is the voltage regulator which is also chosen as a PI

246

controller

s

ksksG

vivp

AVR

+=)( (515)

Since the voltage control loop is designed to respond much slower than the inner

current control loop the current control loop can be approximated as a simple lag block

given in (514) to simplify analysis while without loosing accuracy [524]

sLR ss + in Figure 57 is the overall impedance of the power transformer coupling

inductor and transmission line and kv is the voltage transducer ratio The parameters of

the voltage control loop are listed in Table 54

The transfer function of the voltage control loop can be obtained as

v

vv

refsd

sd

v

P

sv

svsT

∆== 11

_ )(

)()( (516)

where ( )

s

sLRksGP

i

sscAVRv τ+

+=

1

)(1 11 =∆ v and

)1(

)()(1

sk

sLRksG

iv

sscAVRv τ+

++=∆

TABLE 54 PARAMETERS OF THE VOLTAGE CONTROL LOOP THE INVERTER

Rrsquos 0005316 Ω

Lrsquos 00482 mH

τi 045 ms

kc 1388

kv 1698

kvi 25

kvp 02

The Bode plot of the voltage control loop is shown in Figure 58 It is noted that the

247

system is stable with phase margin 91ordm

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

GM Inf

Freq NaN

Stable loop

Magnitude (dB)

Bode Plot of the Voltage Control Loop

100

101

102

103

104

105

-180

-90

0

90

Phase (deg)

PM 91 deg

Freq 109 radsec

Frequency (radsec)

Figure 58 Bode plot of the voltage control loop

Control of Power Flow Consider a voltage source δangsV connected to a utility

grid degang0E through a coupling impedance R+jX as shown in Figure 59 The real and

reactive powers delivered to the utility grid are [525]

δangsV degang0E

Figure 59 Power flow between a voltage source and utility grid

248

)cos()cos(2

zzs

Z

E

Z

EVP θδθ minusminus= (517)

)sin()sin(2

zzs

Z

E

Z

EVQ θδθ minusminus= (518)

where 22 XRZ += and )(tan 1 RXz

minus=θ

From (517) and (518) it is clear that the real and reactive powers delivered to the

utility grid are completely determined by the amplitude and angle of the sending voltage

source ie the output voltage of the inverter On the other hand if the desired values of

real and reactive power are given the values of Vs and δ can be determined from (517)

and (518)

2

1

222

2

2

)sin(2)cos(2)(

++++= zzs QZPZEQP

E

ZV θθ (519)

+minus= minus )cos(cos 1

z

ss

zV

E

EV

ZPθθδ (520)

The corresponding dq0 component values of the voltage can be obtained through

abcdq transformation as follows

deg+ang

degminusang

ang

=

=

)120(

)120(

0 δδ

δ

s

s

s

dqabc

c

b

a

dqabcq

d

V

V

V

T

V

V

V

T

V

V

V

(521)

249

Overall Power Control System for the Inverter The overall control system block

diagram for the inverter is given in Figure 510

Figure 510 Block diagram of the overall power control system of the inverter

In Figure 510 the ldquodq Reference Signal Computationrdquo block which is based on

equations (519) and (520) calculates the magnitude and angle of the filtered output

voltages of the inverter and then converts them into dq voltage reference signals

according to (521) The ldquoabcdq Transformationrdquo block takes the current and voltage

values (in abc coordinate) from the voltage and current meters and converts them into dq

values The outer voltage controller takes the error signals between the actual output

voltage in dq frame (Vdq) and the reference voltage (Vdq(ref)) and generates the current

250

reference signals (Idq(ref)) for the current control loop The inner current controller

produces the dq control signals which are converted back into the control signals in abc

coordinates through the ldquodqabc Transformationrdquo block These control signals are used to

modulate the sinusoidal pulse width modulation (SPWM) pulse generator to produce the

proper pulses for the inverter switches (Figure 477) which control the inverter output

voltage

The controllers given in this section for power electronic converters are designed on

the basis of small-signal linearized models Conceptually there is no guarantee that the

designed controllers will work well over a large operating range because of the

nonlinearity of power electronic devices Nevertheless the majority of controllers for

power electronic devices are linear time-invariant (LTI) that are designed on the basis of

linearized models The effectiveness of LTI controllers can be checked through

simulations on switched (nonlinear) models rather than the linearized ones used for the

initial controller design [530] We have verified the validity of the proposed control

schemes over a large operating range through simulations on nonlinear converterinverter

models The simulation results will be discussed in the following section

Simulation Results

Based on the individual component models developed in Chapter 4 and the

controllers designed in this chapter simulation models for both a PEMFC DG system and

a SOFC DG system have been built in MATLABSimulink using SimPowerSystems

block-set The system was tested under several different operating conditions to

investigate its power management and load-following capabilities as well as its stability

251

during electrical faults Sample simulation results from the scenarios studied are given

below

Desired P and Q Delivered to the Grid Heavy Loading

Normally when a utility is under heavy load it needs the connected DGs to deliver

more real power to the grid The DGs may also be required to deliver reactive power to

the grid to help boost the grid voltage Simulation results for such a scenario are given in

this sub-section for both PEMFC and SOFC DGs

PEMFC DG The reference values of P and Q are set as 360kW and 323kVar with a

ramp startup with 2s for this case study The voltage of the utility grid was set to E =

098 degang0 pu Using (519) and (520) the desired magnitude and angle of the filtered

output voltage of the inverter turn out to be Vs = 105 pu δ = 82678ordm Converting the

values from the abc reference frame into dq coordinates yields Vd (ref) = 10391 pu and

Vq (ref) = 0151 pu A 3-phase AC circuit breaker connects the inverter to the utility grid at

t=008s Figure 511 shows the real and reactive power delivered from the PEMFC DG

to the grid when the DG reaches its steady-state operation from the initial startup Note

that the output steady-state values of P and Q agree with their reference values very well

The corresponding dq components of the inverter output voltage are given in Figure 512

It is noted that the dq components of the output voltage also reach their prescribed

reference values

252

0 1 2 3 4 50

1

2

3

4x 10

5

P (W)

0 1 2 3 4 5-5

0

5

10

15x 10

4

Time (s)

Q (Var)

Pref = 360kW

Qref = 323kVar

Figure 511 PEMFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under heavy loading

0 1 2 3 4 5-05

0

05

1

15

2

Time (s)

dq Values of the Inverter Output Voltage (pu)

Vd reference value = 10391

Vq reference value = 0151

Figure 512 PEMFC DG dq values of the inverter output voltage under heavy load

253

The output voltage and current responses of each fuel cell array for this case are

shown in Figure 513 Note that when the system reaches steady-state the fuel cell output

current ripple is about 10 and the fuel cell output voltage ripple is less than 33 These

relatively small variations of the current and voltage are indicative of the healthy

operation of fuel cells [526] The DC bus voltage (output voltage of the boost DCDC

converter) for this case is shown in Figure 514 Note that the DC bus voltage comes up

to its reference value (480V) though the fuel cell terminal voltage is much lower than its

no-load value under this heavy loading condition (see Figure 513) The voltage ripple at

the DC bus is about 125 which is within the acceptable range of plusmn5

0 1 2 3 4 5150

200

250

300

350

FC Output Voltage (V)

0 1 2 3 4 5-100

0

100

200

300

Time (s)

FC Output Current (A)

Figure 513 PEMFC DG Output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under

heavy load

254

0 1 2 3 4 5300

400

500

600

700

Time (s)

DC Bus Voltage (V)

Desired Voltage = 480V

Figure 514 PEMFC DG DC bus voltage waveform under heavy load

SOFC DG The reference values of P and Q (Pref and Qref in Figure 510) are set as

450 kW and 845 kVar (heavy loading) with a ramp startup in 2s for this case study The

voltage of the utility grid was set to E = 098 degang0 pu Figure 515 shows the reference

and actual values of the real and reactive power delivered from the SOFC DG to the grid

Note that the final values of P and Q (delivered to the grid by the SOFC DG) agree with

their reference values very well

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-200

0

200

400

600

P (kW)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-100

0

100

200

Time (s)

Q (kVar)

Qref = 845kVar

Pref = 450 kW

Figure 515 SOFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under heavy loading

255

0 1 2 3 4 5 6250

300

350

400

450

SOFC output voltage (V)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-100

0

100

200

Time (s)

SOFC output current (A)

Figure 516 SOFC DG Output voltage and current of each FC array under heavy load

0 1 2 3 4 5 6300

400

500

600

Time (s)

DC bus voltage (V)

VDC ref = 480V

Figure 517 SOFC DG DC bus voltage under heavy loading

The output voltage and current curves of each 40 kW SOFC array (input to each

DCDC converter) for the above heavy loading case are shown in Figure 516 Note that

when the system output power reaches its pre-set value the fuel cell output current ripple

is about 10 and the fuel cell output voltage ripple is around 3 These relatively small

variations of the current and voltage are indicative of the healthy operation of fuel cells

[531] The DC bus voltage (output voltage of the boost DCDC converter) for this case is

256

shown in Figure 517 Note that the DC bus voltage comes up to its reference value

(480V) though the fuel cell terminal voltage is much lower than its no-load value under

this heavy loading condition (see Figure 516) The voltage ripple at the DC bus is about

15 which is within the acceptable range

Desired P Delivered to the Grid Q Consumed from the Grid Light Loading

PEMFC DG Under light utility loading the power required from the fuel cell DG is

normally low and the DG may be set to consume the excessive reactive power from the

grid ie Qlt0 This scenario is examined in this sub-section The reference values of P

and Q were set at Pref=100 kW and Qref=-318 kVar with an initial step-change startup

The voltage of the utility grid is set to E = 10 degang0 pu for this case study Using

equations (519) and (520) the desired amplitude and angle of the filtered output voltage

of the inverter turn out to be Vs = 10 pu δ = 2648ordm Converting the values into dq

coordinates we get Vd(ref)= 099893 pu and Vq(ref) = 00463 pu

Figure 518 shows the real and reactive power responses of the fuel cell DG Note that

at steady-state the fuel cell power system delivers 100kW of real power to the grid and

consumes 318 kVar of reactive power from the grid (Q=-318kVar) which match the

reference values set for P and Q

257

0 05 1 15 2 25 3-5

0

5

10

15x 10

4

P (W)

0 05 1 15 2 25 3-10

-5

0

5x 10

4

Time (s)

Q (Var)

Pref = 100kW

Qref = -318kVar

Figure 518 PEMFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid light loading

0 05 1 15 2 25 3260

280

300

320

FC Output Voltage (V)

0 05 1 15 2 25 3-50

0

50

100

150

Time (s)

FC Output Current (A)

Figure 519 PEMFC DG Output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under light loading

258

Figure 520 shows the DC output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under

light loading In this case the fuel cell output current percentage ripple is bigger than that

of case A due to lighter loading However the fuel cell output voltage ripple is only

about 2 which is even less than that of case A due to a higher steady-state fuel cell

output voltage under light loading

SOFC DG Similar to the case of PEMFC DG under light loading the SOFC DG

delivers less real power to the grid (compared to heavy loading condition) and may be

set to consume the excessive reactive power from the grid ie Qlt0 The simulation

results of this scenario study are given in Figures 520 and 521 The reference values of

P and Q are set as 250kW and -531kVar with a ramp startup in 2 s for this case study

The voltage of the utility grid was set to E = 10 degang0 pu Figure 521 shows the

reference and actual values of the real and reactive power delivered from the SOFC DG

to the grid Note that the output final values of P and Q agree with their reference values

very well The corresponding fuel cell array output voltage and current are given in

Figure 521 The current ripple percentage which is about 25 of the SOFC output

current under light loading is larger than heavy loading due to the lower average value of

the load current However the fuel cell output voltage ripple (about 2) under light

loading is even smaller than heavy loading since the average value of the voltage is

higher in this case

From the above simulation results it is noted that both the PEMFC and SOFC DG

systems can be controlled to deliver the pre-set amount of real and reactive power For

the purpose of text length only the simulation results of the PEMFC DG system are

259

given in the following simulation studies

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-100

0

100

200

300P (kW)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-100

-50

0

50

Time (s)

Q (kVar)

Pref = 250 kW

Qref = -531 kVar

Figure 520 SOFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under light loading

0 1 2 3 4 5 6300

350

400

450

SOFC output voltage (V)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-50

0

50

100

Time (s)

SOFC output current (A)

Figure 521 SOFC DG Output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under light

load

260

Load-Following Analysis

Fixed Grid Power In a fuel cell DG system a certain amount of power may be

scheduled to be delivered to a load center (micro-grid) from the utility grid with the rest

to be supplied by the fuel cell system Therefore a proper load-following controller must

be designed to ensure that only scheduled power is delivered from the grid and that the

fuel cell system follows the remainder of load demand In the deregulated power market

the ancillary service costs due to load-following operations can be as high as 20 of the

total ancillary service costs [527] Figure 522 shows the system configuration for which

the load-following study was carried out for PEMFC DG Bus 1 in the figure can be

considered as a micro-grid bus to which the PEMFC DG and the power grid are

connected to supply power to the load The power delivered from the grid (PGrid) is kept

constant (PGridsched) and the PEMFC DG is required to follow load as it changes

The load-following control diagram is also shown in Figure 522 PGrid is measured

and compared with the grid scheduled power The error (∆PGrid) is then fed through the

load-following controller to generate the adjustment power reference value (∆PFCref)

which is added to the initial power reference value (0

refFCP ) to give the new power

reference value (PFCref) for the PEMFC DG system The load-following controller can be

a simple PI controller Therefore as load varies PFCref is adjusted to ensure that the fuel

cell DG will compensate the changes of PLoad It should be noted that fuel cell power

adjustment is assumed to be within the safe operating range of the fuel cell DG

In this case study PGrid is set to 100kW (1 pu) As shown in Figure 523 at the

beginning the load is 2 pu and therefore the fuel cell system delivers the remaining 1

261

pu power to the load At t=03s the load demand steps up to 3 pu and drops back to its

original value (2 pu) at t=41s It is noted from Figure 523 that the power grid responds

to the initial load changes and then the PEMFC DG picks up the load changes to keep

the grid power at its scheduled value The simulation results show that the PEMFC DG

can follow the load power changes in less than 2s

GridP∆refFCP ∆

0

refFCP

Figure 522 System for the PEMFC DG load-following study

Fixed FC Power Referring to the system shown in Figure 524 the simulation study

for the scenario that the FC power plant is scheduled to supply a fixed amount of power

to the micro-grid while the grid will pick up the load variations The power delivered

from the FC DG is set to 200 kW The load changes used for this case study are the same

as the previous case The simulation results are shown in Figure 525 It is noted that the

FC power is kept well at 200 kW When the load changes at 03 s and 41 s the grid

balances the changes almost simultaneously as shown in Figure 525

262

1 2 3 4 5 6 70

2

4Sbase = 100kVA

PLoad (pu)

1 2 3 4 5 6 70

2

4

PGrid (pu)

1 2 3 4 5 6 70

2

4

Time (s)

PFC (pu)

Figure 523 Power curves of the load-following study with fixed grid power

Figure 524 System for the PEMFC DG load-following study

263

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 71

2

3

4PLoad (pu)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 70

1

2

PGrid (pu)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 70

1

2

3

Time (s)

PFC (pu)

Sbase = 100 kVA

Figure 525 Power curves of the load-following study with fixed FC power

Fault Analysis

It is important to know whether the fuel cell DG system will remain stable under an

electrical fault In this section the stability of the PEMFC DG under electrical faults is

investigated The FC DG system shown in Figure 526 delivers 2 pu to the utility grid

before the fault A severe 3-phase fault is simulated to occur at t=07s at the low voltage

side of the step-up transformer connecting the FC DG to the grid as shown in Figure

526 The fault lasts for 5 cycles (00833s) and is cleared at t=07833s

264

Figure 526 Faulted fuel cell DG system

The power flow through the transmission line is shown in Figure 527 During the

fault the transmission line power changes direction (flowing from the grid toward the

fault) since the utility grid also supplies power to the faulted point As shown in the

figure the fuel cell system remains stable after the disturbance Though the system is

stable there is a rush of power delivered from the fuel cell power plant to the utility grid

when the fault is cleared This is due to the large phase difference between the utility grid

and the inverter output voltage when the fault is cleared A soft-starting and a

re-connection controller can be added to limit the peak power when the system recovers

from a fault

One advantage of the two-loop (voltage and current) inverter control is its capability

to limit fault currents To show this advantage the simulation with the same fault on the

system with only voltage control on the inverter was also conducted for comparison The

output power of the PEMFC DG under these two different inverter control strategies is

shown in Figure 528 It is noticed that the system does not remain stable when only

voltage control is applied for inverter control Since there is no current limit control for

this case the fuel cell output current increases sharply due to the fault and exceeds the

current corresponding to the fuel cell maximum power point As a result the fuel cell

265

output power drops sharply It can be observed from Figure 528 that the system with

two-loop inverter control comes back to the pre-fault state while the system with only

voltage control on the inverter can not recover to its original state

Similar 3-phase electrical faults were also simulated on several other points along the

transmission line in Figure 526 In these cases the FC DG remained stable under the

two-loop control scheme

05 1 15 2 25 3 35-15

-1

-05

0

05

1x 10

6

Time (s)

Transmission Line Power (W)

200kW

t=07s

t=07833s

Figure 527 Faulted PEMFC DG Power flow of the transmission line

266

05 1 15 2 25 3 350

1

2

3

4

5

6x 10

5

Time (s)

FC Output Power (W)

Two-Loop Control

Voltage Control Only

Figure 528 Faulted PEMFC DG Fuel cell output powers for the fault studies

Summary

Control of grid-connected FC DG systems are investigated in this chapter The

PEMFC and SOFC models the model for boost DCDC converters and the model for

3-phase voltage source inverters are used to develop a simulation model for a

grid-connected FC system Controller designs for the DCDC converter and the 3-phase

inverter are given using linearized small-signal converterinverter models Conventional

PI voltage feedback controllers are used for the DCDC converters to regulate the DC bus

voltage and a dq transformed two-loop current control scheme is used on the inverter to

control the real and reactive power delivered from the fuel cell system to the utility grid

A MATLABSimulink model of the proposed FC DG system was implemented using

the SimPowerSystems block-set The validity of the proposed control schemes over a

267

large operating range was verified through simulations on switched nonlinear

converterinverter models Simulation results of the case studies show that the real and

reactive power delivered from the fuel cell system to the utility grid can be controlled as

desired while the DC bus voltage is maintained well within the prescribed range The

results also show that the fuel cell system is capable of load-following and can remain

stable under the occurrence of severe electrical faults It is noticed that a two-loop

inverter control scheme has advantage over a voltage only control scheme for the inverter

on fault protection and system stability

268

REFERENCES

[51] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation

for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy

Conversion vol 20 no 2 pp442-451 June 2005

[52] C J Hatziadoniu AA Lobo F Pourboghrat and MDaneshdoost ldquoA simplified

dynamic model of grid-connected fuel-cell generatorsrdquo IEEE Transactions on

Power Delivery Vol 17 No 2 pp 467-473 April 2002

[53] M DLukas K Y Lee H Ghezel-Ayagh ldquoDevelopment of a Stack Simulation

Model for Control Study on Direct Reforming Molten Carbonate Fuel Cell Power

Plantrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol14 No 4 pp1651-1657

Dec 1999

[54] J Padulleacutes GW Ault and J R McDonald ldquoAn integrated SOFC plant dynamic

model for power system simulationrdquo J Power Sources pp495ndash500 2000

[55] K Sedghisigarchi and A Feliachi ldquoDynamic and Transient Analysis of Power

Distribution Systems with Fuel CellsmdashPart I Fuel-Cell Dynamic Modelrdquo IEEE

Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 2 pp423-428 June 2004

[56] K Sedghisigarchi and A Feliachi ldquoDynamic and Transient Analysis of Power

Distribution Systems with Fuel CellsmdashPart II Control and Stability

Enhancementrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 2

pp429-434 June 2004

[57] Z Miao M A Choudhry R L Klein and L Fan ldquoStudy of A Fuel Cell Power

Plant in Power Distribution System ndash Part I Dynamic Modelrdquo Proc IEEE PES

General Meeting June 2004 Denver CO

[58] Z Miao M A Choudhry R L Klein and L Fan ldquoStudy of A Fuel Cell Power

Plant in Power Distribution System ndash Part II Stability Controlrdquo Proceedings IEEE PES General Meeting June 2004 Denver CO

[59] D Candusso L Valero and A Walter ldquoModelling control and simulation of a fuel

cell based power supply system with energy managementrdquo Proceedings 28th

Annual Conference of the IEEE Industrial Electronics Society (IECON 2002) Vol

2 pp1294-1299 2002

[510] R Naik N Mohan M Rogers and A Bulawka ldquoA Novel Grid Interface

Optimized for Utility-scale Applications of Photovoltaic Wind-electric and

269

Fuel-cell systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery Vol 10 No 4 pp

1920-1926 Oct 1995

[511] W Shireen and MS Arefeen ldquoAn utility interactive power electronics interface

for alternaterenewable energy systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion

Vol 11 No 3 pp 643-649 Sept 1996

[512] G Spiazzi S Buso GM Martins JA Pomilio ldquoSingle phase line frequency

commutated voltage source inverter suitable for fuel cell interfacingrdquo 2002 IEEE 33rd Annual IEEE Power Electronics Specialists Conference Vol 2 pp734-739

2002

[513] K Ro and S Rahman ldquoControl of Grid-connected Fuel Cell Plants for

Enhancement of Power System Stabilityrdquo Renewable Energy Vol 28 No 3 pp

397-407 March 2003

[514] H Komurcugil and O Kukrer ldquoA novel current-control method for three-phase

PWM ACDC voltage-source convertersrdquo IEEE Transactions on Industrial

Electronics Vol 46 No 3 pp 544-553 June 1999

[515] N Mohan T M Undeland and W P Robbins Power Electronics ndash Converters

Applications and Design John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2003

[516] DW Hart Introduction to Power Electronics Prentice Hall 1997

[517] M H Todorovic L Palma P Enjeti ldquoDesign of a Wide Input Range DC-DC

Converter with a Robust Power Control Scheme Suitable for Fuel Cell Power

Conversionrdquo 19th Annual IEEE Applied Power Electronics Conference CA 2004

[518] SM N Hasan S Kim I Husain ldquoPower Electronic Interface and Motor Control for a Fuel Cell Electric Vehiclerdquo 19th Annual IEEE Applied Power Electronics

Conference CA 2004

[519] Fuel Cell Handbook (Fifth Edition) EGampG Services Parsons Inc DEO of Fossil

Energy National Energy Technology Lab Oct 2000

[520] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained John Wiley amp

Sons Ltd 2001

[521] John Van de Vegte Feedback Control Systems (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall 1994

[522] IEEE Std 1547 IEEE Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Resources with Electric Power Systems 2003

270

[523] M Tsai WI Tsai ldquoAnalysis and Design of Three-phase AC-to-DC Converters

with High Power Factor and Near-Optimum Feedforwardrdquo IEEE Transactions on

Industrial Electronics Vol 46 No 3 pp535-543 June 1999

[524] H Mao Study on Three-Phase High-Input-Power-Factor PWM-Voltage-Type

Reversible Rectifiers and Their Control Strategies PhD Dissertation (in Chinese)

Zhejiang University 2000

[525] J D Glover MS Sarma Power System Analysis and Design 3rd Edition

Wadsworth Group BrooksCole 2002

[526] RS Gemmen ldquoAnalysis for the effect of inverter ripple current on fuel cell

operating conditionrdquo Transactions of the ASME - Journal of Fluids Engineering

Vol 125 No 3 pp576-585 May 2003

[527] Y Zhu and K Tomsovic ldquoDevelopment of models for analyzing the

load-following performance of microturbines and fuel cellsrdquo Journal of Electric

Power Systems Research pp 1-11 Vol 62 2002

[528] R Wu T Kohama Y Kodera T Ninomiya and F Ihara ldquoLoad-Current-Sharing

Control for Parallel Operation of DC-to-DC Convertersrdquo IEEE PESCrsquo93 pp

101-107 June 1993 Seattle WA

[529] PC Krause O Wasynczuk and SD Sudhoff Analysis of Electric Machinery

IEEE Press 1995

[530] John G Kassakian Martin F Schlecht and George C Verghese Principles of

Power Electronics pp 280-293 Addison-Wesley Publishing Company 1991SK

[531] Mazumder K Acharya CL Haynes R Williams Jr MR von Spakovsky DJ Nelson DF Rancruel J Hartvigsen and RS Gemmen ldquoSOFC Performance and

Durability Resolution of the Effects of Power-Conditioning Systems and

Application Loadsrdquo IEEE Transactions On Power Electronics Vol 19 No 5 pp

1263-1278 September 2004

271

CHAPTER 6

CONTROL OF STAND-ALONE FUEL CELL POWER GENERATION SYSTEMS

Introduction

As discussed in the previous chapters both PEMFC and SOFC show great potential

in DG and vehicular applications They are good energy sources to provide reliable

power at steady state but they cannot respond to electrical load transients as fast as

desired This is mainly due to their slow internal electrochemical and thermodynamic

responses [61] Load transients will cause a low-reactant condition inside the fuel cells

which is considered to be harmful and will shorten their life [62] In order to overcome

this weakness fuel cells can be combined with other energy sources with fast dynamics

such as battery or super-capacitor to form a hybrid power system [63]-[66] Dynamic

behavior of a PEMFC and lead-acid battery system was investigated in [63] while no

control was discussed in the paper Fuel cells and super-capacitor banks together with

boost DCDC converters are proposed in [64] to achieve a constant output dc voltage A

fuel cell-battery hybrid system is given in [66] however the paper concentrates on the

design of a new DCDC converter for fuel cell and battery applications only

In this chapter a load transient mitigation technique is proposed for stand-alone fuel

cell-battery power generation systems This technique is used to control the system in a

way that during a load transient the fuel cell provides the steady-state load and the

battery will supply the transient load The battery voltage is controlled to remain within a

272

desired range Meanwhile the fuel cell output current ripple is also limited in a certain

low range which is also important to fuel cellrsquos healthy operation and life time [62]

[67] [68]

The dynamic models for PEMFC SOFC and lead-acid batteries discussed in Chapter

4 are used in this chapter for FC load mitigation study Based on these component

models and the proposed control technique simulation studies have been carried out for

both PEMFC and SOFC systems to verify the effectiveness of the proposed technique

System Description and Control Strategy

Figure 61 shows the schematic diagram for the proposed FC-battery power

generation system where a boost DCDC converter is used to adapt the fuel cell output

voltage to the battery voltage (220 V in this study) Load mitigation will be investigated

both for a PEMFC and a SOFC based system The models for a 500W PEMFC and a 5

kW SOFC discussed in Chapter 4 are used to model the FC unit shown in Figure 61

For the example PEMFC based system studied the fuel cell unit consists of four 500 W

PEMFC stacks connected in series to provide a 2 kW PEMFC unit For the SOFC based

system the fuel cell unit is a single 5kW SOFC stack The system load can either be DC

or AC (interfaced through an inverter)

Load Mitigation Control

Load mitigation control is achieved through a current controller for the DCDC

converter Given that fuel cells are good energy sources (for providing steady-state

power) but not good power sources for transient conditions [61] [63] the purpose of

273

the proposed control strategy is to control the fuel cell to only supply steady state power

while the battery will supply the transient power to the load The load current (Iload) is fed

back through a low-pass filter to get rid of high-frequency transients This filtered load

current signal (Iref1) plus the output signal (Iref2) from the battery chargingdischarging

controller is taken as the reference signal (Iref) to control the DCDC converter Then the

output current of the DCDC converter (idd_out) is compared with the reference signal Iref

and the error signal is processed by the current controller to control the duty ratio of the

switch in the converter

The peak-to-peak ripple of the converter input current (fuel cell output current idd_in

in Figure 61) should also be controlled within a certain range (10 in this study) for

healthy operation of the fuel cell [62] [67] [68] The main components of the DCDC

converter can be selected on the basis of technical specifications such as rated and peak

voltage and current input current ripple and output voltage ripple etc using the classic

design procedure given in [612] [614] The component values for the 5kW DCDC

converter model used in this study are listed in Table 61 The value of the coupling

inductor (Ldd_out) is selected so that the combination of this inductor with the capacitor

(Cdd) yields a low resonant frequency (lt 10Hz in this study) to smooth out the converter

output current (idd_out)

274

Figure 61 Schem

atic diagram of a FC-battery hybrid system

with load transient mitigation control

275

dd_outV∆ ref

dd_out

V

∆V

gele

Figure 62 Schematic diagram of the battery chargingdischarging controller

An approximate state-space model of the converter at the rated operating point can be

derived using the averaging technique proposed by Middlebrook and Cuacutek explained in

[612] [615] Based on the converter model a PI current controller ( skk ip + ) can be

designed using the classic Bode-plot and root-locus method [613] The parameters of the

PI current controller are also listed in Table 61 The battery chargingdischarging

controller design and the optimal choice of the filter will be discussed in the following

sub-sections

TABLE 61 PARAMETERS OF THE DCDC CONVERTER

Ldd_in 12 mH

Cdd 2500 uF

Ldd_out 120 mH

fs (Switch Frequency) 5 kHz

ki 20

kp 002

276

Battery ChargingDischarging Controller

The battery in the system of Figure 61 is designed to buffer transient power A 220V

05kWh battery model discussed in Chapter 4 is used in the study The model

parameters are listed in Table 62 For healthy operation of the battery bank its voltage is

kept within plusmn5 of its nominal value A battery chargingdischarging controller is

designed as shown in Figure 62 In this figure Vref is the battery nominal voltage (220V)

The regulation constant Kc in the figure is determined by assuming that the

chargingdischarging adjustment of 5 voltage deviation can be achieved in half hour

(1800s) That is

1800

050 b

c

CK = (61)

where Cb is the battery capacitance

TABLE 62 PARAMETERS OF THE BATTERY MODEL

Cb 300 F

Rp 25 MΩ

R2 0075 Ω

C1 500 F

R1 01 Ω

The ldquonormalizedrdquo block normalizes the filtered battery voltage deviation (∆Vdd_out)

with respect to the reference voltage (Vref) The ldquo|abs|rdquo block will give a nonnegative

output (ref

outdd

V

V _∆) regardless of whether ∆Vdd_out is positive or negative ie whether the

battery voltage is higher or lower than the reference voltage The ldquorelayrdquo block in the

277

figure is a hysteresis block set as follows it will turn on (output = 1) when the input is

larger than 5 and will continue to be on until the input to the block is less than 05

Otherwise the output of the relay block is zero The battery will be charged (discharged)

at a constant current when its voltage is lower than 95 (higher than 105) of its rated

value The charging (discharging) process will stop when the battery voltage is within

05 of its rated value Therefore as long as the battery voltage is lower than 095Vref a

positive extra reference signal

1800

0502

refb

ref

VCI = (62)

will be generated for the current controller This reference value is kept until the voltage

is higher than 0995Vref On the other hand if the battery voltage is higher than 105Vref a

negative extra current reference value (1800

050 refbVCminus ) is generated and this value will be

held until the battery voltage is lower than 1005Vref Otherwise the output of the battery

chargingdischarging controller is zero

Filter Design

The choice of the low-pass filter needed for the load transient mitigation controller is

a trade-off design between the storage capacity of the battery and the smooth response of

fuel cell to load transients Figure 63 shows an example of the responses of different

low-pass filters to a load transient The damping factors of filters are all set to 1 to avoid

any oscillation It is noted from the figure that the higher is the cut-off frequency of the

filter the shorter is the settling time of the response A filter with shorter settling time

requires smaller storage battery capacity but may cause undesired overshoot On the

278

other hand the lower is the filter cut-off frequency the longer is the rise time of the filter

response and the smoother is the fuel cell response However a larger battery capacity is

needed if a lower cut-off frequency is chosen for the filter Therefore a trade off has to be

made to choose an optimal filter In practical applications one can estimate the fastest

possible load transient based on the load information at the location where the fuel cell

will be installed Transients with frequencies higher than 1250Hz can be neglected since

they do not affect the fuel cell performance significantly [62] Then one decides what

overshoot value (current ripple) is tolerable by the fuel cell An overshoot less than 10

which normally will not cause any significant impact on the fuel cellrsquos healthy operation

[62] [67] can be considered a good value The filter can therefore be chosen for the

fastest load transient with the highest possible cut-off frequency while its output

overshoot will not exceed a prescribed value (10 suggested in this study)

0 1 2 3 4 54

6

8

10

12

14

16

Time (s)

Responses of different filters (A) Original Transient

Filter fcutoff

= 3Hz

Filter fcutoff

= 1Hz

Filter fcutoff

= 05Hz

Figure 63 Example of the responses of different filters to a load transient

279

Simulation Results

The PEMFC and SOFC models and the battery model discussed Chapter 4 were used

to develop simulation models for a stand-alone PEMFC-battery and a SOFC-battery

power generation system in MATLABSimulink using SimPowerSystems block-set Both

systems are controlled by the load transient mitigation technique proposed in the previous

section The system performance under load transients is investigated to verify that power

flow is controlled in such a way that the fuel cells only provide steady-state power while

the battery will supply transient power to the load Simulation results on

chargingdischarging performance of the battery are also given

Load Transients

For the purpose of verifying the system performance under different load transients

both DC load transients and AC load transients were tested for the PEMFC and SOFC

based power systems Since the power rating of the PEMFC system studied is different

from that of the SOFC system different (but same type of) load transients will be used

for the two systems

280

0 5 10 15 200

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Amature current of DC motor (A)

5kW220V DC motor(load for SOFC)

25HP220V DC motor(load for PEMFC)

Figure 64 Load transient of starting a 25HP and a 5kW 220V DC motor

DC Load Transients The DC load transient due to a DC motor starting is used in the

simulation study Figure 64 shows the load current transient applied to the PEMFC and

SOFC systems when a DC motor is started with full voltage in three steps of resistance

starting A 25 HP220 V DC motor load is used for the 2 kW PEMFC-battery system and

a 5 kW220 V DC motor is used for the SOFC system

AC Load Transients A general dynamic load model is used to model AC load current

transients This transient current model is defined as follows

tteIeIIti 21

210)(αα minusminus minus+= (63)

where I0 I1 and I2 are non-negative constants and 012 gtgt αα It is assumed that the

load transient starts at t=0 in the above equation and i(t) is the amplitude of load current

at 60Hz

281

The above five constant parameters can be determined by the following equations

asympminus

=minus+

=minus

=minus+

=

minusminus

infin

S

peak

TT

p

TII

ieIeII

TI

I

iIII

iI

pp

1

01

210

12

11

22

0210

0

)020ln(ln

ln

21

α

αααα

αα

(64)

where i0 and iinfin are the initial and final values of the transient load current Tp is the time

that it takes the transient current to reach its peak value (ipeak) and TS is the settling time

which takes the transient to settle to within plusmn2 of its final value Therefore by

specifying the initial value (i0) final value (iinfin) peak value of the transient (ipeak) how fast

the transient reaches its peak (Tp) and how long it takes the transient to reach steady state

(TS) we can calculate the five parameters in (64) numerically Figure 65 shows the load

transient curve used for the PEMFC system which starts at 1s The parameters of this

load transient are I0 = 1584A I1 = 792A I2 = 9504A 51 =α and 302 =α The

parameters of the AC load current transient for the SOFC system studied are I0 = 396A

I1 = 198A I2 = 2376A 51 =α and 302 =α The load transient obtained when these

are used in (63) is similar to the waveform shown in Figure 65 but with a higher

magnitude

282

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

Time (s)

AC Side Load Current (A)

Figure 65 AC load transient used on PEMFC-battery system

Load mitigation

In this sub-section simulation results are presented for load transient mitigation

studies of PEMFC and SOFC systems Throughout the studies in this part it is assumed

that the battery in the system studied is fully charged to its rated voltage 220 V before

the application of load transients

PEMFC System First the system is tested under the DC motor load transient shown

in Figure 64 The cut-off frequency of the low-pass filter in this simulation is chosen to

be 01 Hz and the damping factor is set to 1 The corresponding current reference signal

(Iref in Figure 61) shown in Figure 66 shows that the rise time of the filter response to

283

the load transient is less than 10 s and there is no overshoot The battery current (ib) and

the converter output current (idd_out) responding to the load transient current are also

shown in Figure 66 The figure shows that idd_out follows the reference signal (Iref) very

well they almost overlap each other It is noted from the figure that the battery picks up

the transient current while the converter output current rises smoothly (as designed) from

its previous steady-state to its next steady-state value The corresponding PEMFC current

and voltage responses are shown in Figure 67 It is noted that the PEMFC outputs vary

smoothly during the load transient the PEMFC is controlled to supply only the

steady-state current to the load It is also noted that the fuel cell current ripple is around

55 which is within the acceptable range (10)

For the purpose of comparison a simulation study was carried out on the PEMFC

system shown in Figure 61 with a typical voltage controller for the DCDC converter

only (ie iload and idd_out are not fed back and Ldd_out is taken out in Figure 61) The

controller is used to keep the converter output voltage constant under load variations

Figure 67 also shows the PEMFC output voltage for this case study when the DC load

transient (Figure 64) is applied to the PEMFC system It is noted that the system fails to

start the DC motor under this case hence justifying the need for the current controller

284

0 5 10 15 200

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Current (A)

Battery current (ib)

Iref

idd_out

Figure 66 Reference signal (Iref) for the current controller battery current (ib) and

converter output current (idd_out) under the load transient for PEMFC shown in Figure 64

0 5 10 15 200

5

10

15

20

Current (A)

0 5 10 15 2040

80

120

160

200

Time (s)

Voltage (V)

PEMFC Voltage

PEMFC Current

System failedto start with only a

voltage controller

Figure 67 The PEMFC output current and voltage responses to the DC load transient

shown in Figure 64

285

Figures 68 and 69 show the simulation results when an AC load transient (Figure

65) is applied to the PEMFC-battery system Figure 68 shows the reference signal (Iref)

and the battery output current The corresponding PEMFC output current and voltage are

shown in Figure 69 The fuel cell output current ripple is around 55 and the voltage

ripple is around 2 It is noted from these figures that the proposed control technique

also works well under AC load transients and the PEMFC voltage and current vary

smoothly from one steady-state value to another

0 5 10 15-10

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Current (A) Battery current (i

b)

Iref

Figure 68 PEMFC The control reference signal (Iref) and battery current (ib) under

the AC load transient shown in Figure 65

286

0 5 10 150

5

10

15

20

Current (A)

0 5 10 1580

100

120

140

160

Time (s)

Voltage (V)

PEMFC Current

PEMFC Voltage

Figure 69 The PEMFC output current and voltage responses to the AC load transient

shown in Figure 65

SOFC System Similar to the PEMFC system the simulation study on the SOFC

system under a DC load transient (Figure 64) is investigated first The cut-off frequency

of the low-pass filter is also chosen to be 01 Hz and the damping factor is set to 1 as

well Figure 610 shows the current reference signal (Iref) the battery current (ib) and the

converter output current (idd_out) responding to the load transient current The figure

shows that idd_out follows the reference signal (Iref) very well for the SOFC system The

corresponding SOFC output current and voltage are given in Figure 611 It shows that

the SOFC output voltage and current vary smoothly during the load transient The SOFC

is controlled to supply only the steady-state current to the load and its output current

ripple is less than 15 which is much lower than the pre-set value (10)

287

0 5 10 15 200

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Current (A)

Battery current (ib)

idd_out

Iref

Figure 610 Reference signal (Iref) for the current controller the battery current (ib) and

the converter output current (idd_out) under the load transient for SOFC shown in Figure 64

0 5 10 15 200

30

60

90

Current (A)

0 5 10 15 2060

80

100

120

Time (s)

Voltage (V)

SOFC Voltage

SOFC Current

Figure 611 SOFC output current and voltage responses to the DC load transient shown

in Figure 64

288

0 5 10 15 20-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

Time (s)

Current (A)

Battery current (ib)

Iref

Figure 612 Control reference signal (Iref) and battery current (ib) under the AC load

transient

0 5 10 15 200

10

20

30

40

50

60

700

Current (A)

0 5 10 15 2075

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

Time (s)

Voltage (V)SOFC Current

SOFC Voltage

Figure 613 The SOFC output current and voltage responses to the AC load transient

289

Figures 612 and 613 show the simulation results when an AC load transient (shown

in Figure 65 but with different amplitude) is applied to the SOFC system The reference

signal (Iref) and the battery output current (ib) are given in Figure 612 It is clear from this

figure that the battery responds to the transient part of the load and the reference signal

(for the DCDC converter) rises smoothly to its new steady-state value The

corresponding SOFC output current and voltage under the AC load transient are shown in

Figure 613 The SOFC output ripple is also very small in this case Figures 612 and

613 show that the proposed control technique also works well for the SOFC system

under AC load transients

Battery ChargingDischarging

When the battery voltage is out of a certain range (plusmn5 in this study) the battery

chargingdischarging controller (Figures 61 and 62) will start operating to bring the

battery voltage back within the acceptable range In practice the battery normally needs

to be charged after a load transient applied to the FC-battery system This is because the

transient power delivered from the battery to the load together with the battery

self-discharging characteristic normally causes the battery voltage to drop If the battery

voltage drops below the pre-set value (95 of battery nominal voltage) the battery

chargingdischarging controller will start operating to charge the battery Similarly the

battery chargingdischarging controller will go into discharging mode if the battery

voltage goes above its pre-set limit (105 of battery nominal voltage) In this section

simulation results are given for battery charging after the DC motor load transient

(illustrated in Figure 64) is applied to the SOFC-battery system

290

Figure 614 shows the battery voltage and the extra current reference (Iref2 Figure 61)

after the load transient is applied to the FC-battery system Before the load transient

starts the battery voltage is already close to its lower limit (209V) During the transient

the battery voltage drops below the limit which triggers the battery chargingdischarging

controller to start operating and generating a new Iref2 This extra current reference is

added to the current reference (Iref1) from the current filter to produce the new current

reference signal (Iref) for the current controller (see Figure 61)

0 2 4 6 8 10202

207

212

Voltage (V)

0 2 4 6 8 100

1

2

Time (s)

Current (A)

Iref2

Battery Voltage

95220V = 209V

Figure 614 Battery voltage and extra current reference (Iref2) curves when the battery

is being charged

Figure 615 shows the load transient current the overall current reference signal (Iref)

the filter output reference signal (Iref1) the battery current (ib) and the corresponding

converter output current (idd_out) It is clear from Figures 614 and 615 that during and

after the transient load demand the battery picks up the transient load (battery

291

discharging) and the reference currents (Iref1 and Iref) slowly increase to bring the fuel cell

current to its new steady-state value and also charge the battery (battery charging) This

smooth transition of FC current is essential for their improved reliability and durability

0 2 4 6 8 10

-5

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

Time (s)

Current (A)

Iref1

Irefi

dd_out

Load transient

ib

Battery Discharging Battery Charging

Figure 615 The load transient the overall current control reference signal (Iref) the

low-pass filter output signal (Iref1) and the corresponding converter output current (idd_out)

when the battery is being charged

292

Summary

In this chapter a load transient mitigation control strategy is proposed for fuel

cell-battery power generation systems The control strategy consists of a current

controller for the DCDC converter and a battery chargingdischarging controller to keep

the battery voltage within a desired range During load transients fuel cells are controlled

(by the proposed transient mitigation technique) to supply the steady-state power to the

load while the battery will supply the transient power to the load Simulation studies

under different load transients have been carried for both the PEMFC system and the

SOFC system Simulation results show that the fuel cell current can be controlled as

desired and the battery voltage can be held in the prescribed range The results show that

the proposed load transient mitigation technique works well for both types of fuel cell

systems (PEMFC and SOFC) studied

293

REFERENCES

[61] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation

for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy

Conversion vol 20 no 2 pp442-451 June 2005

[62] R S Gemmen ldquoAnalysis for the effect of inverter ripple current on fuel cell

operating conditionrdquo Transactions of the ASME - Journal of Fluids Engineering

Vol 125 No 3 pp576-585 May 2003

[63] J C Amphlett EH de Oliveira RF Mann PR Roberge Aida Rodrigues

ldquoDynamic Interaction of a Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cell and a Lead-acid

Batteryrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 65 pp 173-178 1997

[64] D Candusso L Valero and A Walter ldquoModelling control and simulation of a

fuel cell based power supply system with energy managementrdquo Proceedings 28th

Annual Conference of the IEEE Industrial Electronics Society (IECON 2002) Vol

2 pp1294-1299 2002

[65] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained John Wiley amp

Sons Ltd pp 362-367 2001

[66] F Z Peng H Li G Su and JS Lawler ldquoA new ZVS bidirectional DC-DC

converter for fuel cell and battery applicationrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power

Electronics Vol19 No 1 pp54-65 Jan 2004

[67] K Acharya SK Mazumder RK Burra R Williams C Haynes ldquoSystem-interaction analyses of solid-oxide fuel cell (SOFC) power-conditioning

systemrdquo Conference Record of the 2003 IEEE Industry Applications Conference

Vol 3 pp 2026-2032 2003

[68] S K Mazumder K Acharya C L Haynes R Williams Jr M R

von-Spakovsky DJ Nelson DF Rancruel J Hartvigsen and RS Gemmen ldquoSolid-oxide-fuel-cell performance and durability resolution of the effects of

power-conditioning systems and application loadsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power

Electronics Vol 19 No 5 pp1263-1278 Sept 2004

[69] C Wang and MH Nehrir ldquoA Dynamic SOFC Model for Distributed Power

Generation Applicationsrdquo Proceedings 2005 Fuel Cell Seminar Nov 14-18 2005 Palm Springs CA

294

[610] ZM Salameh MA Casacca and WA Lynch ldquoA mathematical model for

lead-acid batteriesrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 7 No1 pp

93-98 1992

[611] Handbook of Batteries 2nd edition D Linden Ed McGraw Hill Inc New York

NY 1995

[612] N Mohan T M Undeland and W P Robbins Power Electronics ndash Converters

Applications and Design John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2003

[613] John Van de Vegte Feedback Control Systems (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall 1994

[614] DW Hart Introduction to Power Electronics Prentice Hall 1997

[615] R D Middlebrook ldquoSmall-signal modeling of pulse-width modulated

switched-mode power convertersrdquo Proceedings of the IEEE Vol 76 No 4 pp

343 ndash 354 April 1988

295

CHAPTER 7

CONTROL SCHEMES AND SIMULATION

RESULTS FOR THE PROPOSED HYBRID WINDPVFC SYSTEM

Introduction

Based on the component models given in Chapter 4 a simulation system test-bed for

the proposed hybrid alternative energy system (see Chapter 3) has been developed in

MATLABSimulink Figure 71 shows the overall diagram of the simulation model in

MATLABSimulink More details about the simulation model are given in Appendix B

The system is capable of being used as a test benchmark for other hybrid energy systems

that are AC coupled The overall control strategy for power management among different

energy sources in the system is discussed in this chapter The system performance under

different operating conditions is evaluated and discussed as well

System Control Strategy

Figure 72 shows the block diagram of the overall control strategy for the hybrid

alternative energy system The WTG controlled by the pitch angle controller (see Chapter

4) and PV electricity generation unit controlled by the MPPT controller (discussed in

Chapter 4) are the main energy sources of the system The power difference between the

generation sources and the load demand is calculated as

scloadpvwindnet PPPPP minusminus+= (71)

296

where Pwind = power generated by the wind energy conversion system

Ppv = power generated by the PV energy conversion system

Pload = load demand

Psc = self consumed power for operating the system

The system self consumed power is the power consumed by the auxiliary system

components to keep it running for example the power needed for running cooling

systems the control units and the gas compressor For the purpose of simplification only

the power consumed by the compressor (Pcomp defined in Chapter 4) is considered in this

study

Overall Power Management Strategy

The governing control strategy is that At any given time any excess wind and PV

generated power (Pnet gt 0) is supplied to the electrolyzer to generate hydrogen that is

delivered to the hydrogen storage tanks through a gas compressor Therefore power

balance equation (71) can be written as

compelecloadpvwind PPPPP ++=+ Pnet gt 0 (72)

where Pelec = the power consumed by the electrolyzer to generate H2

Pcomp = the power consumed by the gas compressor

When there is a deficit in power generation (Pnet lt 0) the FC stack begins to produce

energy for the load using hydrogen from the storage tanks Therefore the power balance

equation can be written as

loadFCpvwind PPPP =++ Pnet lt 0 (73)

where PFC = the power generated by the FC stack

297

AC BUS 208 V (L-L)

0

const2

Wspeed (ms)

WTGCB Ctrl 1=ON 0=OFF

A B C

WTG 50kW at 14ms

Ploadmat

To File5

Timer

ON 3s

Timer

ON 10s

Timer

ON 03s

Timer

ON 02s

Timer

ON 01 s

Terminator4

0 Q

Enable

Pava

Pdemand

Power control signal

[Pload]

Pload

[Pdemand]

Pdemand

[Pava]

Pava

Irradiance (Wm2)

PVCB Ctrl 1=ON 0=OFF

A B C

PV Array

The total power rate is about 30kW

under 1000 Wm^2

PQ

A B C

New Dynamic Load

com

A

B

C

a

b

c

Load CBVabc

Iabc

A

B

C

a

b

c

Load

Measurement

LoadDemandData

Load

Vabc

Iabc

PQ

Instantaneous P amp Q

[Pava]

From2

[Pdemand]

From1

SolarData

From

Workspace1

WindData

From

Workspace

FCCB Ctrl 1=ON 0=OFF

Pdemand (W)

Pstorage (atm)

nH2used (mols) A B C

FC with Gas Pressure Regulation

nH2_FC

Pava (W)

Ptank (atm)

A B C

Electrolyzer and H2 storage

Demux

A B C

Battery with Inverter

400 V battery

AC voltage control is applied

Output AC is 208 V ( L-L) at 60 Hz

gt 05

Figure 71 Sim

ulation m

odel for the proposed hybrid alternative energy system

in M

ATLABSim

ulink

298

Figure 72 Block diagram of the overall control schem

e for the proposed hybrid alternative energy system

299

The power controller has been discussed in Chapter 5 (see Figure 511) The model

for the gas pressure regulator has been discussed in Chapter 4 In the following sections

the AC bus voltage regulator and the electrolyzer controller are discussed in details

AC Bus Voltage Regulator

Figure 73 shows the block diagram of the AC bus voltage regulator In the figure the

AC bus voltage is measured and transformed into dq values (Vdq) through the ldquoabcdq

Transformationrdquo block Vdq is then compared with the reference voltage dq values

(Vdq(ref)) and the voltage error signals are fed into a PI controller The controller output is

transferred back into the control signals in abc coordinates through the ldquodqabc

Transformationrdquo block These control signals are used to generate proper SPWM pulses

for the inverter switches which shape the inverter output voltage (the AC bus voltage)

Figure 73 Block diagram of the AC voltage regulator

300

Electrolyzer Controller

The block diagram of the electrolyzer controller is shown in Figure 74 As discussed

in Chapter 4 (section 44) an electrolyzer can be considered as a voltage-sensitive

nonlinear DC load For the given electrolyzer within its rating range the higher the DC

voltage applied to it the larger is the load current and the more H2 is generated The

function of the electrolyzer controller is to control the controllable ACDC rectifier to

obtain a proper output DC voltage (Vdcelec) so that the excess available power can be fully

used by the electrolyzer to generate H2 For example if more power is available then the

controller controls the rectifier to give a higher DC voltage (Vdcelec) to the electrolyzer As

a result the power consumed by the electrolyzer (Pelec) becomes greater so that it matches

the excess available power

Figure 74 Block diagram of the electrolyzer controller

301

Simulation Results under Different Scenarios

In order to run the simulation for the hybrid alternative energy system the load

demand data and the weather data (wind speed solar irradiance and air temperature) are

needed As discussed in Chapter 3 the system is designed to supply electric power for

five houses in southeastern part of Montana A typical load demand for a house in the

Pacific Northwest regions reported in [71] is used in this simulation study The total

load demand profile of five houses has already been given in Chapter 3 For the purpose

of convenience the load demand profile over 24 hours is also given in this chapter

shown in Figure 75 The weather data are obtained from the online records of the

weather station at Deer Lodge Montana affiliated to the Pacific Northwest Cooperative

Agricultural Weather Network (AgriMet) [72] The general information about the station

and the types of relevant equipment and sensors used at the station are summarized in

Table 71 [72] Simulation studies are carried out for power management during a typical

winter and summer day The load demand is kept the same for the two cases Simulation

results for the winter and summer scenarios are given and discussed in the following

sections

302

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

Time (Hour of Day)

Demand (kW)

Figure 75 Load demand profile over 24 hours for the system simulation study

TABLE 71 WEATHER STATION INFORMATION

AT DEER LODGE MONTANA AGRIMET STATION (DRLM)

General Information

Latitude 46deg 20 08

Longitude 112deg 46 00

Elevation 4680

Equipment and Sensors

Sensors Sensor Height

Pyranometer Model LI-200SB 3 meters

Wind Monitor Model 05103 2 meters

Air Temperature Thermistor Model 44030 2 meters

303

Winter Scenario

Weather Data The weather data for the winter scenario simulation were collected on

February 1 2006 The wind speed data were collected at the height of 2 m The wind

turbine hub height is The wind speed data were corrected to the turbine hub height

(assumed to be 40 meters) using the following expression [73] [74]

α

=

0

101

H

HWW ss (74)

where Ws1 = wind speed at the height of H1(ms)

Ws0 = wind speed at the height of H0 (ms)

α = wind speed correction exponent

The exponent α is taken as 013 in this study as suggested and used in [73] and [74]

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Speed (ms)

Figure 76 Wind speed data for the winter scenario simulation study

304

Figure 76 shows the corrected hourly wind speed profile over 24 hours on the day the

data were collected The hourly solar irradiance data and air temperature collected on the

same winter day are shown in Figures 77 and 78 respectively

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

100

200

300

400

500

600

Time (Hour of Day)

Irradiance (Wm2)

Figure 77 Solar irradiance data for the winter scenario simulation study

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-05

0

05

1

15

2

25

3

35

4

45

Time (Hour of Day)

Air Temperature (degC)

Figure 78 Air temperature data for the winter scenario simulation study

305

Simulation Results The system performance under the load profile given in Figure

75 and the weather data shown in Figures 76 to 78 is evaluated and discussed below

The output power from the wind energy conversion unit in the hybrid energy system

over the 24 hour simulation period is shown in Figure 79 When the wind speed is over

14 ms the output power is limited at 50 kW by pitch angle controller (see Figure 434 in

Chapter 4) The pitch angle curve over the 24 hour is given in Figure 710 It is noted

from the figure that the pitch angle is increased to limit the wind turbine output power

when wind speed is greater than 14 ms Otherwise the pitch angle is kept at 2˚ (see

Figure 432 in Chapter 4) The corresponding rotor speed of the induction generator is

given in Figure 711 It is noted that the rotor speed variation follows as the wind speed

variation

4 8 12 16 20 240

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Power (kW)

Figure 79 Wind power of the winter scenario study

306

0 4 8 12 16 20 242

25

3

35

4

45

5

55

6

Time (Hour of Day)

Pitch Angle (deg)

Figure 710 Pitch angle of the wind turbine of the winter scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 241000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

2200

2400

2600

Time (Hour of Day)

Rotor Speed (rpm)

Figure 711 Rotor speed of the induction generator of the winter scenario study

307

The output power from the PV array in the system over the 24 hour simulation period

is shown in Figure 712 As discussed in Chapter 4 the PV array output power is

controlled by the current maximum power point tracking (CMPPT see Figure 457 in

Chapter 4) technique to give the maximum power output under different solar irradiances

Figure 713 shows the current difference (Ipverr) between the actual the output current (Ipv)

of a PV module and the reference current (Imp) at the maximum power point It is noted

that the PV output current follows the reference current very well using the CMPPT

method The current error is almost zero at steady state

As shown in Figures 453 and 454 in Chapter 4 temperature plays an important role

in the PV cellrsquos performance The PV cell temperature is estimated by the PV thermal

model discussed in Chapter 4 Figure 714 shows the PV temperature response over the

simulation period Two main factors for determining the temperature are the solar

irradiance and the air temperature (surrounding temperature) as shown in Figures 77 and

78 It is noted from Figures 453 and 454 that the higher the temperature the lower is

the maximum power value This effect of temperature upon the PV performance is also

illustrated by investigating Figure 712 and 714 For the purpose of comparison the air

temperature profile is also given in Figure 714

When Pnetgt0 there is excess power available for H2 generation Figure 715 shows

the available power profile over the 24 hour simulation period The available power is

used by the electrolyzer to generate H2 through the electrolyzer controller shown in

Figure 74 Figure 716 shows the H2 generation rate over the simulation period The

corresponding DC voltage applied to the electrolyzer and the electrolyzer current are

shown in Figure 717 It is noted from Figures 715 to 717 that the more power available

308

for storage the higher is the DC input voltage to the electrolyzer and the more is the H2

generated as a result

0 4 8 12 16 20 24

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

Time (Hour of Day)

PV Power (kW)

Figure 712 PV power for the winter scenario

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-015

-01

-005

0

005

01

015

02

025

03

035

Time (Hour of Day)

Current Difference (A)

Figure 713 Current difference between the actual output current and the reference

current for the maximum power point of the winter scenario

309

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-2

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

Time (Hour of Day)

Temperature ( degC)

Overall PV CellTemperature

Air Temperature

Figure 714 The PV temperature response over the simulation period for the winter

scenario

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

Time (Hour of Day)

Power available for H2 generation (kW)

Figure 715 Power available for H2 generation of the winter scenario

310

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

01

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 generation rate (mols)

Figure 716 H2 generation rate of the winter scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

Electrolyzer Voltage (V)

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

100

200

300

400

500

600

Time (Hour of Day)

Electrolyzer Current (A)

Current

Voltage

Figure 717 Electrolyzer voltage and current for the winter scenario study

311

When Pnetlt0 the wind and PV generated power from is not sufficient to supply the

load demand Under this condition the fuel cell turns on to supply the power shortage

Figure 718 shows the power shortage which should be supplied by the FC The actual

power delivered by the FC is given in Figure 719 and the corresponding H2 consumption

rate is given in Figure 720 Note that Figures 718 719 and 720 have similar pattern as

expected

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

Power shortage (kW)

Figure 718 Power shortage over the simulation period of the winter scenario study

312

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

FC output power (kW)

Figure 719 Power supplied by the FC of the winter scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

002

004

006

008

01

012

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 consumption rate (mols)

Figure 720 H2 consumption rate of the winter scenario study

313

0 4 8 12 16 20 2462

64

66

68

70

72

74

76

78

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 storage tank pressure (atm)

Figure 721 The pressure tank over the 24 hour of the winter scenario study

The H2 storage tank pressure varies as H2 flows in and out It is apparent that the

storage tank pressure will go up when there is excess power available for H2 generation

and will decrease when the FC supplies power to load and consumes H2 Figure 721

shows the tank pressure variations over the 24 hour simulation period

As discussed in Chapter 3 the capacity of the battery in the proposed hybrid system is

much smaller than the one used in a conventional system where the battery is taken as the

main storage device Figure 722 shows the battery power profile over the 24 hour

simulation period The positive spikes indicate the battery is discharging and the negative

ones indicate the battery is being charged It is noted from the figure that the battery

power is zero almost at all time As discussed in Chapter 3 the battery only supplies the

fast transient power such as fast load transients ripples and spikes

314

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-10

-8

-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

8

10

Time (Hour of Day)

Battery power (kW)

Figure 722 The battery power over the simulation period for the winter scenario

Summer Scenario

Weather Data The weather data collected in Dear Lodge MT on June 21 2005 are

used for the summer scenario study [72] The wind speed data are corrected to the height

of 40 m shown in Figure 723 The solar irradiance and air temperature data at the same

site on the same day are shown in Figures 724 and 725 respectively

By comparing the winter solar irradiance data shown in Figure 77 and the summer

solar irradiance data given in Figure 724 it is obvious that the time frame when solar

energy is available is wider in the summer than in the winter Another apparent

difference is that the air temperature in the summer (shown in Figure 725) is of course

higher than the air temperature in the winter (shown in Figure 78)

315

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Speed (ms)

Figure 723 Corrected wind speed data for the summer scenario simulation study

0 5 10 15 20 250

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

Time (Hour of Day)

Irradiance (Wm2)

Figure 724 Irradiance data for the summer scenario simulation study

316

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

20

25

30

Time (Hour of Day)

Air Temperature (degC)

Figure 725 Air temperature data for the summer scenario simulation study

Simulation Results In this section the system performance under the load demand

profile given in Figure 75 and the weather data shown in Figures 723 to 725 is

evaluated The output power from the wind energy conversion unit in the hybrid energy

system over the 24 hour simulation period is shown in Figure 726 The corresponding

rotor speed of the induction generator is given in Figure 727

317

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

20

25

Time (Hour of Day)

WTG output power (kW)

Figure 726 Wind power generated for the summer scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 241100

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

Time (Hour of Day)

WT rotor speed (rpm)

Figure 727 Rotor speed of the induction generator for the summer scenario study

The output power from the PV array in the system over the 24 hour simulation period

is shown in Figure 728 Figure 729 shows the PV temperature response over the

simulation period For the purpose of comparison the air temperature profile is also

illustrated in the figure It is noted from Figure 729 that the PV cells cool down to about

the same temperature as air when there is no sun The cell temperature climbs up when

318

the sun comes out The temperature difference between the PV cell and air can be as high

as 25 ˚C shown in Figure 729 This effect of the temperature upon the PV performance

is also illustrated by investigating Figures 728 and 729 The higher cell temperature

causes a lower maximum power value The spikes in Figure 728 are due to the MPPT

which tries to keep the PV array operate at its maximum power points under different

temperatures and solar irradiances The time range of the spike is small (about 1 s)

0 5 10 15 20 25-5

0

5

10

15

20

25

Time (Hour of Day)

PV Power (kW)

Figure 728 PV power generated for the winter scenario study

319

0 5 10 15 20 255

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

Time (Hour of Day)

Temperature ( degC)

AirTemperature

Overall PV Cell

Temperature

Figure 729 The PV and air temperature over the simulation period for the winter

scenario study

When Pnetgt0 there is excess power available for H2 generation Figure 730 shows

the available power profile over the 24 hour simulation period Figure 731 shows the

H2 generation rate over the simulation period The corresponding DC voltage applied to

the electrolyzer and the electrolyzer current are shown in Figure 732 It is clear from

Figures 730 - 732 that the more power is available for storage the higher is the DC

input voltage applied to the electrolyzer to balance the excess power and the more H2 is

generated as a result

320

0 5 10 15 20 250

5

10

15

20

25

30

Time (Hour of Day)

Power available for H2 generation (kW)

Figure 730 Power available for H2 generation for the summer scenario study

0 5 10 15 20 250

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 generation rate (mols)

Figure 731 H2 generation rate for the summer scenario study

321

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-20

20

60

100Electrolyzer Voltage (V)

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

150

300

450

Time (Hour of Day)

Electrolyzer Current (A)

Voltage

Current

Figure 732 Electrolyzer voltage and current for the summer scenario study

When Pnetlt0 the wind and PV generated power is not sufficient to supply the load

demand Under this scenario the fuel cell turns on to supply the power shortage Figure

733 shows the power shortage which should be supplied by the FC The actual power

delivered by FC is given in Figure 734 and the corresponding H2 consumption rate is

given in Figure 735 Comparing Figures733 and 734 we can see that the power

shortage is covered by the fuel cell very well

322

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

Power Shortage (kW)

Figure 733 Power shortage over the simulation period for the summer scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

FC Output Power (kW)

Figure 734 Power supplied by the FC over the simulation period for the summer

scenario study

323

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

002

004

006

008

01

012

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 Consumption Rate (mols)

Figure 735 H2 consumption rate for the summer scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 2452

54

56

58

60

62

64

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 Storage Tank Pressure (atm)

Figure 736 The H2 tank pressure over the 24 hour for the summer scenario study

324

Figure 736 shows the tank pressure variations over the 24 hour simulation period and

Figure 737 shows the battery power profile over the simulation period The large spikes

shown in Figure 737 are due to the sudden hourly changes in the weather data and the

load demand used for the simulation study

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-4

-2

0

2

4

6

8

Time (Hour of Day)

Battery Power (kW)

Figure 737 The battery power over the simulation period for the summer scenario

Simulation studies have also been carried out using continuous weather and load

demand data The same weather and load demand data points used for the winter scenario

study are used for this scenario study However for this case study each input (load

demand wind speed solar irradiance and air temperature) is a continuous piecewise

linear function over the simulation time where two adjacent data points are connected by

a straight line The continuous load demand curve shown in Figure 75 is used for this

simulation study and Figures 738 ndash 740 show the weather data used in this case

325

0 5 10 15 20 252

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Speed (ms)

Figure 738 Wind speed data for the simulation study with continuous weather data and

load demand

0 5 10 15 20 250

100

200

300

400

500

600

Time (Hour of Day)

Irradiance (Wm2)

Figure 739 Solar irradiance data for the simulation study with continuous weather data

and load demand

326

0 5 10 15 20 25-1

0

1

2

3

4

5

Time (Hour of Day)

Air Temperature (degC)

Figure 740 Air temperature for the simulation study with continuous weather data and

load demand

Figures 741 and 742 show the continuous wind and PV generated power

respectively The spikes in the PV output power shown in Figure 742 are due to the

CMPPT control of the power electronic interfacing devices for the PV array Figures 743

and 744 show the corresponding excess power (available for H2 generation) profile and

the FC output power (power shortage) profile over the simulation period

327

0 5 10 15 20 250

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Power (kW)

Figure 741 Wind power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario

0 5 10 15 20 250

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

Time (Hour of Day)

PV Power (kW)

Figure 742 PV power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario

328

0 5 10 15 20 250

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

Time (Hour of Day)

Power available for H2 generation (kW)

Figure 743 Power available for H2 generation for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario

0 5 10 15 20 250

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

FC Output Power (kW)

Figure 744 FC output power for the continuous weather data and load demand

scenario

329

Figure 745 shows the battery power profile over the 24 hour simulation period for

the continuous weather data and load demand scenario Comparing Figure 745 with

Figures 722 and 737 it is noted that the battery spikes are much smaller in this case than

the battery spikes when the discrete hourly weather and load demand data are used

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-10

-8

-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

8

10

Time (Hour of Day)

Battery Power (kW)

Figure 745 Battery power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario

330

Summary

In this chapter the overall control and power management strategy for the proposed

hybrid energy system is presented The wind and PV generation systems are the main

power generation devices The electrolyzer acts as a dump load using any excess power

to produce H2 The FC system is the back up generation and battery picks up the fast load

transients and ripples The simulation model of the hybrid system has been developed

using MATLABSimulink Simulation studies have been used to verify the system

performance under different scenarios using practical load profile and real weather

collected at Deer Lodge MT The simulation results have been given and discussed for a

winter and a summer scenario The results show that the overall power management

strategy is effective and the power flows among the different energy sources and the load

demand is balanced successfully

331

REFERENCES

[71] J Cahill K Ritland W Kelly ldquoDescription of Electric Energy Use in Single

Family Residences in the Pacific Northwest 1986-1992rdquo Office of Energy

Resources Bonneville Power Administration December 1992 Portland OR

[72] Online httpwwwusbrgovpnagrimetwebaghrreadhtml

[73] WD Kellogg MH Nehrir G Venkataramanan V Gerez ldquoGeneration unit sizing

and cost analysis for stand-alone wind photovoltaic and hybrid windPV systemsrdquo

IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 13 No 1 pp 70 ndash 75 March 1998

[74] P Gipe Wind power renewable energy for home farm and business Chelsea

Green Publishing Company 2004

332

CHAPTER 8

OPTIMAL PLACEMENT OF DISTRIBUTED GENERATION

SOURCES IN POWER SYSTEMS

Introduction

The ever-increasing need for electrical power generation steady progress in the

power deregulation and utility restructuring and tight constraints over the construction of

new transmission lines for long distance power transmission have created increased

interest in distributed power generation Distributed generation (DG) devices can be

strategically placed in power systems for grid reinforcement reducing power losses and

on-peak operating costs improving voltage profiles and load factors deferring or

eliminating system upgrades and improving system integrity reliability and efficiency

[81]-[85]

These DG sources are normally placed close to consumption centers and are added

mostly at the distribution level They are relatively small in size (relative to the power

capacity of the system in which they are placed) and modular in structure A common

strategy to find the site of DG is to minimize the power loss of the system [82]-[85]

Another method for placing DG is to apply rules that are often used in sitting shunt

capacitors in distribution systems A ldquo23 rulerdquo is presented in [86] to place DG on a

radial feeder with uniformly distributed load where it is suggested to install DG of

approximately 23 capacity of the incoming generation at approximately 23 of the length

of line This rule is simple and easy to use but it cannot be applied directly to a feeder

333

with other types of load distribution or to a networked system References [81] [87]

present power flow algorithms to find the optimal size of DG at each load bus in a

networked system assuming that every load bus can have a DG source

In this chapter analytical approaches for optimal placement of DG with unity power

factor in power systems are presented First placement of DG in a radial feeder is

analyzed and the theoretical optimal site (bus) for adding DG is obtained for different

types of loads and DG sources Then a method is presented to find the optimal bus for

placing DG in a networked system based on bus admittance matrix generation

information and load distribution of the system The proposed methods are tested by a

series of simulations on radial feeders an IEEE 6-bus test system [81] an IEEE 30-bus

test system [811] and a subset of it to show the effectiveness of the proposed methods in

determining the optimal bus for placing DG

In practice there are more constraints on the availability of DG sources and there

may be only one or a few DGs with limited output available to be added Therefore in

this study the DG size is not considered to be optimized The procedure to determine the

optimal bus for placing DG may also need to take into account other factors such as

economic and geographic considerations These factors are not discussed in this chapter

Optimal Placement of DG on a Radial Feeder

To simplify the analysis only overhead transmission lines with uniformly distributed

parameters are considered ie R and L (series resistance and inductance) per unit length

are the same along the feeder while the shunt capacitance and susceptance of lines are

neglected The loads along the feeder are assumed to vary in discrete time duration for

334

example the feeder load distributions along the line for time durations Ti and Ti+1 are

shown in Figure 81

Figure 81 A feeder with distributed loads along the line

Theoretical Analysis

First consider a radial feeder without DG During the time duration Ti the loads are

distributed along the line with the phasor current density Id(xTi) as shown in Figure 81

The phasor feeder current at point x is

int=x

idi dxTxITxI0

)()( (81)

Assuming the impedance per unit length of the line is Z=R+jX (Ωkm) then the

incremental power loss and phasor voltage drop at point x are

RdxdxTxITxdP

x

idi sdot

= int

2

0

)()( (82)

ZdxdxTxITxdV

x

idi sdot

= int

0

)()( (83)

The total power loss along the feeder within the time duration Ti is

RdxdxTxITxdPTPl x

id

l

iiloss sdot

== int intint

0

2

00

)()()( (84)

335

The voltage drop between point x and the receiving end is

ZdxdxTxITxdVTVTVTxVx x

id

x

iiixidrop sdot==minus= int intint0 00

0 )()()()()( (85)

And the voltage at point x is

)()()()()()( 0 idropidropilidropiix TxVTlVTVTxVTVTV +minus=+= (86)

The total voltage drop across the feeder is

ZdxdxTxITxdVTVTVTlVl x

id

l

iiilidrop sdot==minus= int intint0 00

0 )()()()()( (87)

Now consider a DG is added into the feeder at the location x0 shown in Figure 81 In

general the load current density Id(xTi) will change (normally decrease) as a result of

adding DG due to improvements in the voltage profile along the line This change in

the load current density will cause the feeder current to decrease The feeder current

between the source (at x=l) and the location of DG (at x = x0) will also change as a result

of the injected current source IDG(Ti) However the change in feeder current due to the

change in the load current density is generally much smaller than the change in the feeder

current due to the injected current IDG(Ti) For the purpose of analysis the change in the

load current density resulted from the addition of DG is neglected in this study

Therefore the load current density Id(xTi) used in (1) is also used for obtaining the

feeder current after adding DG In this case the feeder current can be written as follows

leleminus

lele

=

int

int

lxxTIdxTxI

xxdxTxI

TxI

iDG

x

id

x

id

i

0

0

0

0

)()(

0)(

)( (88)

The corresponding power loss and voltage drop in the feeder are

336

RdxTIdxTxIRdxdxTxITxPl

x

x

iDGid

x x

idiloss sdot

minus+sdot

= int intint int

0

2

0

0

0

2

0

0 )()()()( (89)

lelesdot

minus

+sdot

lelesdot

=

int int

int int

int int

lxxZdxTIdxTxI

ZdxdxTxI

xxZdxdxTxI

TxV

x

x

iDG

x

id

x x

id

x x

id

idrop

0

0 0

0

0 0

0

0 0

)()(

)(

0)(

)( (810)

The average power loss in a given time period T is

i

N

i

ilossloss TTxPT

xPt

sum=

=1

00 )(1

)( (811)

where Nt is the number of time durations in the time period T

sum=

=tN

i

iTT1

(812)

Equation (86) can still be used under this situation to calculate the voltage at point x

by using Vdrop(xTi) obtained from equation (810)

Procedure to Find the Optimal Location of DG on a Radial Feeder

The goal is to add DG in a location to minimize the total average power loss and

assure that the voltages Vx along the feeder are in the acceptable range 1plusmn005 pu ie

0)(

0

0 =dx

xPd loss (813)

The solution x0 of the above equation will give the optimal site for minimizing the

power loss but it cannot guarantee that all the voltages along the feeder are in the

acceptable range If the voltage regulation cannot be satisfied at the same time the DG

337

can be placed around x0 to satisfy the voltage regulation rule while decreasing the power

loss as much as possible or the DG size can be increased The analytical procedure to

determine the optimal point to place DG on a radial feeder is given as follows

1) Find the distributed load )( id TxI along the feeder

2) Get the output current of DG )( iDG TI

3) Use equations (89) and (811) to calculate )( 0xPloss and find the solution x0 of

equation (813)

4) Use equations (86) and (810) to check whether the voltage regulation is satisfied

5) If all the voltages are in the acceptable range then the calculated x0 is the optimal spot

(xop) to add DG

6) If x0 doesnrsquot meet the voltage regulation rule then move the DG to see whether there

is a point around point x0 where all bus voltages are in the acceptable range

7) If no point on the feeder can satisfy the voltage regulation rule then increase the size

of DG and repeat steps 2) to 7)

8) Sometimes more than one DG may be needed Under this situation the feeder can be

divided into several segments and steps 1) to 7) can be applied to each segment

The flow chart of the procedure is summarized in Figure 82

338

Case Studies with Time Invariant Loads and DGs

Table 81 shows the results of analyses using the foregoing procedure to find the

optimal location for placing DG on radial feeders with three different load distributions

uniformly distributed load centrally distributed load and uniformly increasing distributed

load In the results given in Table 81 it is assumed that the DG supplies all the loads

on the feeder in each case and the distribution system supplies the system losses It is

noted from the table that the DG reduces the system power losses significantly when it is

located properly

Figure 82 Procedure for finding optimal place for a DG source in a radial feeder

339

TABLE 81 THEORETICAL ANALYSIS RESULTS OF CASE STUDIES

WITH TIME INVARIANT LOADS AND DGS

Cases

(Assuming that DG supplies

all the loads in each case)

0

lossP

(Power loss

before adding

DG)

lossP

(Power loss

after adding

DG)

Percent of

power loss

reduction

Optimal

place x0

Id

xl 0

Source

IDG

x0

Vl Vx V0

Uniformly distributed load

332RlId 1232

RlId 75 2

l

xl 0

Source

IDG

x0

Vl Vx

lxl

lx

xlI

xIxI

ld

ld

d lelt

lelt

minus=

2

20

)()(

Centrally distributed load

52

960

23RlI ld 52

320

1RlI

ld 87

2

l

Id=Ild(l-x)

xl 0

Source

IDG

x0

Vl Vx V0

Increasingly distributed load

5213330 RlIld

52015550 RlI

ld

88 )221( minus

340

The 23 rule presented in [86] works well when the load is uniformly distributed

along the feeder but it gives inaccurate results if the load configuration is different For a

uniformly distributed load if the DG supplies 23 of the total load ( 62lII ldDG = ) the

optimal site is at 30 lx = according to equation (89) This result is exactly the same as

that given in [86] However when the loads are centrally and increasingly distributed

and the DG provides 23 of the total load the optimal location for placing DG turns out to

be 6l and l)321( minus respectively which differ from what the ldquo23 rulerdquo suggests

in [86]

Case Study with Time Varying Load and DG

The same feeders as in the previous section (shown in Figure 81) but with time

varying load and DG are analyzed in this case The analysis is given for uniformly

distributed load only The analyses for other types of loads follow similarly

Assuming that DG is located at point x0 then according to equation (89) the

effective power loss is

3

)())(())(()()(

32

0

222

00

lTRIlxTRIlxTITRITxP id

iDGiDGidiloss +minusminusminus=

(814)

where lTITI iloadid )()( = and )( iload TI is the load current at the very sending end of the

feeder The average power loss in a given time period T is

i

N

i

iDG

N

i

iiDGidloss TTIT

RxTTITI

T

RxCxP

tt

sumsum==

minus+=1

20

1

2

010 )()()()( (815)

341

where i

N

i

iDGiDGid

id TlTRIlTITRIlTRI

TC

t

sum=

+minus=

1

22

32

1 )()()(3

)(1

Setting 0)(

0

0 =dx

xPd loss x0 is obtained to be

sum

sum

sum

sum

=

=

=

=

sdot==

t

t

t

t

N

i

iiDGiload

i

N

i

iDG

N

i

iiDGid

i

N

i

iDG

TTITI

TTIl

TTITI

TTI

x

1

1

2

1

1

2

0

)()(2

)(

)()(2

)(

(816)

Assuming that all bus voltages along the feeder are in the acceptable range equation

(816) can be approximated as

sum

sum

sum

sum

=

=

=

=

sdot=asymp

t

t

t

t

N

i

iiDGiload

i

N

i

iDG

N

i

iiDGid

i

N

i

iDG

TTPTP

TTPl

TTPTP

TTP

x

1

1

2

1

1

2

0

)()(2

)(

)()(2

)(

(817)

where lTPTP iloadid )()( = and )( iload TP is the total load along the feeder in the time

duration Ti

Optimal Placement of DG in Networked Systems

The theoretical analysis for placing a DG in networked systems is different and more

complicated than in a radial feeder To simplify the analysis only one DG is considered

to be added to the system

Consider the system shown in Figure 83 with a DG added to the system to reinforce

it The system has N buses and loads and the DG is located at a bus say bus j The main

external power is injected into bus 1 which is taken as slack bus The objective is to find

the bus to install the DG so that the total system power loss is minimized and the voltage

level at each bus is held in the acceptable range 1plusmn005 pu

342

DGLoad 1

Load j

Load N

Bus 1

Bus j

Bus N

Figure 83 A networked power system

Before the DG is added to the system the bus admittance matrix is

=

0

0

1

00

2

0

1

0

1

0

12

0

11

0

NN

N

NjNN

j

bus

Y

Y

YYY

YYY

Y (818)

where superscript 0 denotes the original system

Assuming that the DG is located at bus j the system admittance matrix is changed

from Ybus0 to Ybus by considering that bus 1 and bus j are connected together Actually

there is no line to connect those buses together but the imaginary line will help in finding

the optimal location to add DG Ybus is one dimension less than Ybus0 except when the DG

is located at bus 1 If the DG is at bus 1 Ybus matrix will be the same as Ybus0 To obtain

the new matrix Ybus when the DG source is connected we treat the system as connecting

343

bus 1 and j by eliminating bus j in Ybus0 [810] The new matrix is

=

minusminus

minus

minusminusminus )1)(1(

)1(1

)1(2)1(1)1(

11211

NN

N

kNNN

k

bus

Y

Y

YYY

YYY

Y (819)

where

12

1

12

2

11

0

)1(

0

)1(11

00

11

0

1

00

1111

minus==

minus=+=

minus=+=

++=

++

NkYY

NjkYYY

jkYYY

YYYY

kk

kjkk

jkkk

jjj

1)(

121

112

1)(2

0

)1)(1(

0

)1(

0

)1(

0

minuslele=

minusleleminuslele=

minusleleminuslele=

minuslele=

++

+

+

NkijYY

jkNijYY

NkjjiYY

jkiYY

kiik

kiik

kiik

ikik

The new bus impedance matrix Zbus is

==

minusminus

minus

minusminusminus

minus

)1)(1(

)1(1

)1(2)1(1)1(

11211

1

NN

N

kNNN

k

busbus

Z

Z

ZZZ

ZZZ

YZ (820)

Suppose the complex load and generated power of the original system are

][ 000

2

0

1

0

LNLiLLL SSSSS = and

][ 000

2

0

1

0

GNGiGGG SSSSS = i=12 N (821)

where 000

LiLiLi jQPS += and 000

GiGiGi jQPS +=

A new load vector SL is set up as follows

[ ]LNLiLLL SSSSS 21= (822)

where

LiLiLi jQPS += and

0=LiS for i = 1 (slack bus)

344

0

LiLi SS = for i = load buses

GiLi

GiLiGiLiLi

PP

PPjPPS

le

gt

+minus

=0

000

for i = P-V buses

Note that at the slack bus (bus 1) SL1 = 0 it is assumed that the real and reactive

power consumed by the load are supplied directly by the external generation at that bus

Also at a voltage controlled (P-V) bus QLi = 0 it is assumed that the load reactive power

can be supplied by the external power source at the P-V bus

To find the optimal point to place the DG we set up an objective function for DG at

each bus j as follows

sumsum+=

minus

=

+=N

ji

Lii

j

i

Liij SjRSjRf1

2

1

1

1

2

1 )()( j=2 hellipN (823)

where R1i(j) is the equivalent resistance between bus 1 and bus i when DG is located at

bus j jne1

gt

lt

minus+

minus+=

minusminusminus ji

ji

ZZZReal

ZZZRealjR

iii

iii

i )2(

)2()(

)1(1)1)(1(11

111

1 (824)

When the DG is located at bus 1 (j=1) the objective function will be

sum=

=N

i

Lii SRf1

2

11 (825)

Note that in this case Ybus (Zbus) will be the same as Ybus0 (Zbus

0) and R11=0

The goal is to find the optimal bus m where the objective function reaches its

minimum value

NjfMinf jm 21)( == (826)

The theoretical procedure to find the optimal bus to place DG in a networked system

345

can be summarized as follows

1) Find the matrix Ybus0 and set up the load vector SL

2) Compute Ybus and the corresponding Zbus for different DG locations

3) Calculate the equivalent resistances according to (824)

4) Use (823) and (825) to calculate objective function values for DG at different buses

and find the optimal bus m

5) If all the voltages are in the acceptable range when the DG is located at bus m then

bus m is the optimal site

6) If some bus voltages do not meet the voltage rule then move the DG around bus m to

satisfy the voltage rule

7) If there is no bus that can satisfy the voltage regulation rule try a different size DG

and repeat steps 5) and 6)

The procedure is summarized in the flow chart shown in Figure 84 and the

corresponding MATLAB code is given in Appendix C

Though the discussion here is under the assumption that only one DG source is added

to the system it can be easily extended to the systems with multiple DG sources By

connecting all the DG buses and slack bus together through imaginary lines the new Ybus

matrix and the corresponding objective function can be established by the method

presented above

Simulation Results

Several simulation studies were carried out to verify the results obtained analytically

for both radial and network-connected systems

346

Radial Feeder with Time Invariant Loads and DG

A radial feeder with a time invariant DG was simulated under uniformly distributed

centrally distributed and increasingly distributed loads The simulated system for

uniformly distributed loads is shown in Figure 85 The system architecture is the same

when the loads are centrally distributed or increasingly distributed The line parameters

DG and load sizes are listed in Table 82

Figure 84 Flow chart of The theoretical procedure to find the optimal bus to place DG

in a networked system

347

power grid

DG

External

Bus 1 Bus 2 Bus 3 Bus 4 Bus 5 Bus 6 Bus 7 Bus 8 Bus 9 Bus 10 Bus 11

050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW

Figure 85 A radial feeder with uniformly distributed loads

TABLE 82 PARAMETERS OF THE SYSTEM IN FIGURE 85

Line parameters

(AWG ACSR 10)

Line spacing = 132m (equal spacing assumed)

R = 0 538Ω XL = 04626 Ω

Bus Voltage 125kV

Line length between two neighboring buses 25km

Load at each bus (MW) Load type

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Uniformly distributed 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05

Centrally distributed 005 01 02 03 04 05 04 03 02 01 005

Increasingly distributed 005 01 015 02 025 03 035 04 045 05 055

Uniformly Centrally Increasingly DG size

(MW) 55 26 33

348

TABLE 83 SIMULATION RESULTS OF CASE STUDIES WITH

TIME INVARIANT LOADS AND DG

Total Power

Losses (kW) Line Loading Optimal Bus No

(Simulation)

Optimal Place

(Theoretical) Without DG With DG

Uniform 6 6 17785 02106

Central 6 6 02589 00275

Increasing 8 8 08099 00606

In Table 83 the optimal bus for placing DG to minimize the total system power loss

is given for each load distribution The total system power losses are given both with and

without DG It is noted that the simulation results agree well with theoretical values

While some bus voltages fall far out of the acceptable range when there is no DG in the

system all the bus voltages are within 1plusmn005 pu with the DG added

Radial Feeder with Time Varying Loads and DG

This part of the study is helpful in understanding the effect of variable power DG

(such as wind and photovoltaic (PV)) sources on distribution systems with time varying

loads In practice the site of such DG sources may be mainly determined by

meteorological and geographic factors However DG sources with predictable output

power (such as fuel cells and microturbines) can be placed at any bus in the distribution

system to achieve optimal result

The feeder shown in Figure 85 is also used to simulate the situation with time

varying uniformly distributed loads and DG A wind-turbine generator is considered as

349

the time varying DG source Actual wind data taken in a rural area in south central

Montana were used to obtain the output power of a simulated (1-MW) wind turbine as

shown in Figure 86 [85] [88] It shows the annual daily average output power of the

turbine which can be viewed as the filtered version of the turbinersquos output power The

daily average demand of a typical house in the northwestern United States shown in

Figure 87 [89] is used here as one unit of the time varying loads The loads are assumed

to be uniformly distributed along the feeder with 100 houses at each bus

0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23

Time of the day

Ou

tpu

t o

f w

ind

tu

rbin

e (

kW

)

Figure 86 Annual daily average output power profile of a 1-MW wind-DG

The simulated wind-DG was installed at different buses and the total system power

loss was obtained in each case shown in Figure 88 It is noticed from this figure that

total feeder power loss reaches a minimum value when the wind-DG is placed at bus 10

in Figure 85 The theoretical optimal position to place the wind-DG is obtained (using

equation (817) and the generation and demand data shown in Figures 86 and 87) to be

x0 asymp 014l The position with this distance from the end of feeder in Figure 85 is between

bus 9 and 10 but closer to bus 10 which is the same bus obtained from the simulation

results shown in Figure 88

350

0

05

1

15

2

25

3

35

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23

Time of day

Dem

and (kw

)

Figure 87 Daily average demand of a typical house

80

90

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

DG loaction - Bus No

To

tal

avera

ge p

ow

er

loss (

kW

)

Figure 88 Power losses of the radial feeder with the wind-DG at different buses

351

Networked Systems

The 25 kV IEEE 6-bus system shown in Figure 89 [81] which can be considered as

a sub-transmissiondistribution system was used to verify the method presented in the

previous section The parameters of this system are given in Table 84 A 5-MW DG was

added to reinforce the system Total system power loss was obtained from the results of

power flow studies when DG was placed at different buses (Figure 810) It is noted from

this figure that minimum power loss is achieved when DG is placed at bus 3 The

values of the objective function for the system were obtained by applying the proposed

analytical approach when the DG was placed at different buses These values are shown

in the bar chart of Figure 811 It is noted from this figure that the objective function is

also at its minimum when the DG is placed at bus 3 indicating that the result obtained

from the proposed analytical method is the same as the simulation result

Reference Bus

Voltage Controlled Bus

Bus 1

Bus 2Bus 3

Bus 4

Bus 5Bus 6

80 MW

10 MVR 40 MW 725 MW

20 MVR

50 MW 125 MVR

50 MW

15 MVR

Figure 89 6-bus networked power system studied

352

TABLE 84 PARAMETERS OF THE SYSTEM IN FIGURE 89 [81]

Bus No Voltage (pu) Bus Power (MVA)

1 10+j00 Slack bus

2 ― -40 -j100

3 ― -725-j200

4 ― -500-j125

5 015 =V 800

6 ― -500-j150

Line Data

From To Zserial (pu) Yshunt(pu)

1 2 02238+j05090 j00012

2 3 02238+j05090 j00012

3 4 02238+j05090 j00012

4 5 02238+j05090 j00012

5 6 02238+j05090 j00012

6 1 02276+j02961 j00025

1 5 02603+j07382 j00008

0

01

02

03

04

05

2 3 4 5 6

DG Location - Bus No

Po

wer

Lo

ss (

MW

)

Figure 810 Power losses of the system in Figure 89 with a 5MW DG

353

0

5

10

15

20

25

2 3 4 5 6

DG Location - Bus No

Valu

e o

f th

e O

bje

cti

ve F

un

cti

on

Figure 811 Values of the objective function of the system in Figure 89

The proposed method was also tested on the IEEE 30-bus test system shown in Figure

812 which can be considered as a meshed transmissionsubtransmission system [811]

The system has 30 buses (mainly 132kV and 33kV buses) and 41 lines The system bus

data is given in Table 85 A 15 MW DG (about 5 of the total system load of 283 +

j1262 MVA) is considered to be added to reinforce the system The total power loss of

the system reaches a minimum value when DG is located at bus 5 as shown in Figure

813 The optimal bus determined by the method proposed in this study is also bus 5 as

given in Figure 814

354

1

2

3

4

5

6

7 8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20 21

22

23 24

25 26

27 28

29 30

subset

100 MVA Base

Figure 812 IEEE 30-bus test system

152

154

156

158

16

162

164

166

168

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30

DG Location - Bus No

Pow

er

Losses (M

W)

Figure 813 Power losses of the IEEE 30-bus test system with a 15MW DG

355

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

550

600

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30DG Location - Bus No

Valu

e o

f o

bje

cti

ve f

un

cti

on

Figure 814 Values of the objective function of the IEEE 30-bus system

A DG source may not be connected directly to a 132kV bus (bus 5 in Figure 812) as

determined by the proposed method For this reason a subset of the 30-bus test system

with lower voltage level (33kV) as indicated in Figure 812 was also chosen to test the

proposed method The new system has 18 buses 22 lines and a total load of 1047+j508

MVA A 5MW DG (about 5 of the total load of the subset) was added to the system

Simulation results for this system are given in Figure 815 It is noted that the total system

loss reaches a minimum value when the DG is located at bus 30 The optimal bus

suggested by the proposed method is also bus 30 as shown in Figure 816

All the power flow simulation studies in this chapter were carried out using

PowerWorldreg Simulator [812]

356

11

115

12

125

13

135

10 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 29 30

DG Location - Bus No

Po

wer

Lo

sses (

MW

)

Figure 815 Power losses of the subset system in Figure 812 with a 5MW DG

50

55

60

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

10 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 29 30

DG Location - Bus No

Valu

e o

f obje

ctive function

Figure 816 Values of the objective function of the subset system in Figure 812

357

TABLE 85 BUS DATA OF THE IEEE 30-BUS TEST SYSTEM [811]

Bus No Type Load

(pu)

Rated Bus

Voltage (kV)

Bus

Voltage (pu)

1 Swing 00 132 1060

2 P-V 0217+j0127 132 1043

3 P-Q 0024+j0012 132 ―

4 P-Q 0076+j0016 132 ―

5 P-V 0942+j019 132 1010

6 P-Q 00 132 ―

7 P-Q 0228+j0109 132 ―

8 P-V 03+j03 132 1010

9 P-Q 00 690 ―

10 P-Q 0058+j002 330 ―

11 P-V 00 110 1082

12 P-Q 0112+j0075 330 ―

13 P-V 00 110 1071

14 P-Q 0062+j0016 330 ―

15 P-Q 0082+j0025 330 ―

16 P-Q 0035+j0018 330 ―

17 P-Q 009+j0058 330 ―

18 P-Q 0032+j0009 330 ―

19 P-Q 0095+j0034 330 ―

20 P-Q 0022+j0007 330 ―

21 P-Q 0175+j0112 330 ―

22 P-Q 00 330 ―

23 P-Q 0032+j0016 330 ―

24 P-Q 0087+j0067 330 ―

25 P-Q 00 330 ―

26 P-Q 0035+j0023 330 ―

27 P-Q 00 330 ―

28 P-Q 00 330 ―

29 P-Q 0024+j0009 330 ―

30 P-Q 0106+j0019 330 ―

(100 MVA Base)

358

Summary

Analytical approaches are presented in this chapter to determine the optimal location

for placing DG in both radial and networked systems to minimize power losses The

proposed approaches are not iterative algorithms like power flow programs Therefore

there is no convergence problems involved and results could be obtained very quickly A

series of simulation studies were also conducted to verify the validity of the proposed

approaches and results show that the proposed methods work well

In practice there are other constraints which may affect the DG placement

Nevertheless methodologies presented in this chapter can be effective instructive and

helpful to system designers in selecting proper sites to place DGs

359

REFERENCES

[81] Narayan S Rau Yih-heui Wan ldquoOptimum Location of Resources in Distributed

Planningrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Systems Vol 9 No 4 pp 2014-2020

November 1994

[82] Kyu-Ho Kim Yu-Jeong Lee Sang-Bong Rhee Sang-Kuen Lee and Seok-Ku You

ldquoDispersed Generator Placement using Fuzzy-GA in Distribution Systemsrdquo

Proceedings 2002 IEEE Power Engineering Society Summer Meeting Vol 3 pp

1148-1153 July 2002 Chicago IL

[83] N Hadjsaid JF Canard F Dumas ldquoDispersed Generation Impact on Distribution

Networksrdquo IEEE Computer Applications in Power Vol 12 No 2 pp 22-28

April 1999

[84] T Griffin K Tomsovic D Secrest A Law ldquoPlacement of Dispersed Generation

Systems for Reduced Lossesrdquo Proceedings the 33rd Annual Hawaii International

Conference on Systems Sciences 2000

[85] MH Nehrir C Wang and V Gerez ldquoImpact of Wind Power Distributed

Generation on Distribution Systemsrdquo Proceedings 17th International Conference

on Electricity Distribution (CIRED) May 2003 Barcelona Spain

[86] H L Willis ldquoAnalytical Methods and Rules of Thumb for Modeling

DG-Distribution Interactionrdquo Proceedings 2000 IEEE Power Engineering Society

Summer Meeting Vol 3 pp 1643-1644 July 2000 Seattle WA

[87] JO Kim SW Nam SK Park C Singh ldquoDispersed Generation Planning Using

Improved Hereford Ranch Algorithmrdquo Electric Power Systems Research Elsevier

Vol 47 No 1 pp47-55 Oct 1998

[88] W Kellogg MH Nehrir G Venkataramanan and V Gerez ldquoGeneration Unit

Sizing and Cost Analysis for Stand-Alone Wind Photovoltaic and Hybrid WindPV Systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol13 No 1 pp

70-75 March 1998

[89] J Cahill K Ritland and W Kelly Description of Electric Energy Use in Single

Family Residences in the Pacific Northwest 1986-1992 Office of Energy

Resources Bonneville Power Administration Portland OR December 1992

[810] J Duncan Glover Mulukutla S Sarma ldquoPower System Analysis and Design 3rd

Editionrdquo BrooksCole Thomson Learning Inc 2001

360

[811] R Yokoyama SH Bae T Morita and H Sasaki ldquoMultiobjective Optimal

Generation Dispatch Based on Probability Security Criteriardquo IEEE Transactions

on Power Systems pp 317-324 Vol 3 No 1 Feb 1988

[812] Online httpwwwpowerworldcom

361

CHAPTER 9

CONCLUSIONS

This dissertation is on modeling and control of a hybrid windPVFC alternative

energy system The main part of the dissertation focuses on the modeling of different

energy systems and the corresponding control scheme development Special emphasis is

put on the modeling and control of fuel cell systems

DG system modeling and control are two other aspects of the research presented in

the dissertation A hybrid alternative energy system has great potential for use as a DG

source Analytical methods for optimal placement of DG sources in power systems are

given in the dissertation

The conclusions of the research work reported in this dissertation are summarized

below

(1) Environmentally friendly and sustainable alternative energy systems will play

more important roles in the future electricity supply

(2) Dynamic models have been developed for the following fuel cells (PEMFCs and

SOFCs) variable speed wind energy conversion systems photovoltaic power generation

systems electrolyzers power electronic interfacing devices battery banks and

accessories including gas compressor high-pressure hydrogen storage tank and gas

pressure regulator These dynamic models are suitable for both detailed fast transient and

large time scale performance evaluation studies They can be used to expedite research

processes in related alternative energy areas such as system control and performance

optimization studies

362

(3) Control of grid-connected FC (PEMFC and SOFC) DG systems is investigated

Controller designs for the DCDC converter and 3-phase inverter are given using

linearized small-signal converterinverter models A dq transformed two-loop current

control scheme is used on the inverter to control the real and reactive power delivered

from the fuel cell system to the utility grid The validity of the proposed control schemes

over a large operating range was verified through simulations on switched nonlinear

converterinverter models Simulation results of the case studies show that the real and

reactive power delivered from the fuel cell system to the utility grid can be controlled as

desired while the DC bus voltage is maintained well within its prescribed range The

results also show that the fuel cell system is capable of load-following and can remain

stable under the occurrence of severe electrical faults It is noticed that a two-loop

inverter control scheme has advantage over a voltage only control scheme for the inverter

on fault protection and system stability

(4) A load transient mitigation control strategy is proposed for stand-alone fuel

cell-battery power generation systems The control strategy consists of a current

controller for the DCDC converter and a battery chargingdischarging controller to keep

the battery voltage within a desired range During load transients the fuel cell is

controlled (by the proposed transient mitigation technique) to supply the steady-state

power to the load while the battery will supply the transient power to the load Simulation

studies under different load transients have been carried for both the PEMFC system and

the SOFC system These studies show that the fuel cell current can be controlled as

desired and the battery voltage can be held in the prescribed range The results show that

the proposed load transient mitigation technique works well for both types of fuel cell

363

systems (PEMFC and SOFC) studied

(5) A hybrid windPVFC DG system is proposed in this dissertation Wind and PV

are the primary power sources of the system and the combination of FC and electrolyzer

is used as a backup and long term storage unit The different energy sources in the system

are integrated through an AC link bus The system can be used as test-bed system for

other related studies on hybrid alternative energy systems

(6) Based on the dynamic component models a simulation model for the proposed

hybrid windPVFC energy system has been developed successfully using

MATLABSimulink The overall power management strategy for coordinating the power

flows among the different energy sources is presented in the dissertation Simulation

studies have been carried out to verify the system performance under different scenarios

using practical load profile and real weather data The results show that the overall power

management strategy is effective and the power flows among the different energy sources

and the load demand is balanced successfully

(7) Analytical approaches are presented to determine the optimal location for placing

DG in both radial and networked systems to minimize power losses The proposed

approaches are not iterative algorithms like power flow programs Therefore there is no

convergence problem involved and results could be obtained very quickly A series of

simulation studies were also conducted to verify the validity of the proposed approaches

The results show that the proposed methods work well

364

APPENDICES

365

APPENDIX A

abc-dq0 TRANSFORMATION

366

abc-dq0 Transformation

The abc-dq0 transformation transfers 3-phase variables in abc stationary frame to a

rotating dq0 frame As explained in [462] the transformation can be expressed as

abcdqabcdq VTV 00 = (A1)

Where

=

0

0

V

V

V

V q

d

dq

=

c

b

a

abc

V

V

V

V

+

minus

+

minus

=

2

1

2

1

2

13

2cos

3

2cos)cos(

3

2sin

3

2sin)sin(

3

20

πθ

πθθ

πθ

πθθ

dqabcT θ(0)dξω(ξ)θ

t

0

+= int

θ is the angular position ω is the angular speed and ξ is the dummy variable of

integration For abc variables with constant frequency at 60 Hz and zero initial phase θ

can written as tπθ 120=

In (A1) V can represent voltage current flux linkage or electric charge For

balanced 3-phase AC variables in abc frame the corresponding dq0 components are DC

variables with zero value for 0 component Therefore an abc-dq transformation given in

(A2) can be used in this case

+

minus

+

minus=

3

2cos

3

2cos)cos(

3

2sin

3

2sin)sin(

3

2 π

θπ

θθ

πθ

πθθ

dqabcT (A2)

367

dq0-abc Transformation

The inverses dq0-abc transformation can be expressed as

( ) ( )

+

+

minus

minus== minus

13

π2cos

3

π2sin

13

π2cos

3

π2sin

1cossin

)( 1

00

θθ

θθ

θθ

dqabcabcdq TT (A3)

The corresponding inverses dq-abc transformation is

( ) ( )

+

+

minus

minus=

3

π2cos

3

π2sin

3

π2cos

3

π2sin

cossin

θθ

θθ

θθ

abcdqT (A4)

368

APPENDIX B

SIMULATION DIAGRAMS OF THE HYBRID ENERGY SYSTEM

369

If Wspeed lt3 ms turn the CB OFF

3 C

2 B

1 A

Vabc (pu)

Vd_ref (pu)

Vq_ref (pu)

Enable

dq voltage controller

Enable

power control

generate dq control signal

for voltage controller

3

const

[Windspeed]

Wind speed

WindSpeed

V+

V- Wind Turbine

com

A B C

a b c

WTG CB

Pwtginvmat

To File5

Timer

ON 02s

Vabc

Iabc

A B C

a b c

Three-Phase

V-I Measurement

gt=

Relational

Operator

Multiply

Vabc

A B C

a b c

Measure2

Vabc

Iabc

PQ

Instantaneous P amp Q

[Pwin_inv]

Goto

[qctrl_win_inv]

From3

[dctrl_win_inv]

From2

[Windspeed]

From1

Demux

A B C

A B C

Coupling Inductor

dq_ref (pu)

DC +

DC -

A B C

Averaged model for 3phase inverter

A B C

A B C 005km

AWG ACSR 61

2

WTGCB Ctrl

1=ON 0=OFF

1

Wspeed

(ms)

Figure B1 Sim

ulink m

odel for the wind energy conversion system

370

It is a 1612 array For each unit the power rate is 173W at 1000 Wm^2 irradiancen and 25 C cell temperature

The total power rate is about 30kW under 1000 Wm^2 and 25 C

3 C

2 B

1 A

[pvqctrl]

qctrl

[Irradiance]

irradiance

[pvdctrl]

dctrl

Vabc (pu)

Vd_ref (pu)

Vq_ref (pu)

Enable

dq

controller

-6

const2

0

const1

116

1e-5s+1

Transfer Fcn

To avoid algebraic loop1

Ppv_invmat

To File5

Upvmat

To File4

Tpvmat

To File3

Vabc

Iabc

A B C

a b c

Three-Phase

V-I Measurement

Terminator4

Saturation2

Relay1

Relay

Product3

[Ppv_inv]

Ppv_inv com

A B C

a b c

PV CB

Irradiance

Ipv (A)

Tambient (C)

Upv Tc

Pmax

PV

InOut

PI

Vabc

IabcPQ

P amp Q

Vabc

A B C

a b c

Measure

[Ipv]

Ipv (A)

-K-

Gain1

12 Gain

[Irradiance]

From7

[mpvVdc]

From6

[Irradiance]

From5

[Irradiance]

From4

[pvqctrl]

From3

[Ipv]

From29

[pvdctrl]

From2

[Pepv]

From1

AirTempData

From

Workspace1

sin(u)

Fcn1

cos(u)

Fcn

Demux

Dead Zone

A B C

A B C

Coupling

Inductor

s

-+

CVS

i+

-

CM A

DC_IN+

DC_IN-DC_OUT+

DC_OUT-

Buck DCDC

dq_ref (pu)

DC +

DC -

A B C

Averaged model for 3phase inverter

gt=10

gt= 30Wm2

gt= 300Wm^2

A B C

A B C

1200 km

AWG ACSR 61

0-026

2

PVCB Ctrl

1=ON 0=OFF

1

Irradiance (Wm^2)

Figure B2 Sim

ulink m

odel for the solar energy conversion system

371

1

nH2used (mols)

3 C

2 B

1 A

Vabc (pu)

Vd_ref (pu)

Vq_ref (pu)

Enable

dq

voltage controller

Pdemand (W)

PFC_out (W)

Enable

dctrl

qctrl

power control

generate d q control signal

for voltage controller

v+ -

Vfc

PFC_invmat

To File5

PanodeFCmat

To File4

H2usedmat

To File2

Vfcmat

To File1

com

A B C

a b c

Three-Phase Breaker

Vabc

Iabc

A B C

a b c

Three-Phase

V-I Measurement

Panode (atm) nH2

FC+ FC-

PEMFC

Stack

Vabc

A B C

a b c

Measure2

Vabc

Iabc

PQ

Instantaneous P amp Q

1

Initial value of

the output pressure

[mPFC_inv]

Goto3

[Panode_fc]

Goto1

Pref (atm)

Pstorage (atm)

qo (mols)

Po_ini (atm)

Po (atm)

Gas Pressure Actutator

[Panode_fc]

From2

[mPFC_inv]

From1

1

Enabled always

15

Desired pressure

Demux

DC_IN+

DC_IN-

DC_OUT+

DC_OUT-

DCDC Boost

A B C

A B C

Coupling

Inductor

dq_ref (pu)

DC +

DC -

A B C

Averaged model for 3phase inverter

A B C

A B C

150 km

AWG ACSR 61

3

Pstorage (atm)

2

Pdemand (W)

1

FCCB Ctrl

1=ON 0=OFF

Figure B3 Sim

ulink m

odel for the fuel cell and the gas pressure regulation system

372

1

Ptank (atm)

3C2B1A

1

unity PF

Pava

Pused

elec_rectg

power control

14400

m0

1000

const

H2genmat

To File5

Pavamat

To File3

Pcompmat

To File2

Ptankmat

To File1

Terminator

Switch

n (flow rate)

Pcomp

Polytropic Compressor

n_in

n_out

m0

P (atm)

H2 storage tank

[Pcompressor]

Goto3

[Pcompressor]

From1

[Pdcrect_elec]

From

Tambient (C)

Tcm_in(C)

H2 (mols)

Tc

DC +

DC -

Electrolyzer

50kW 40 stacks in series

Gate (0-1)

PF (01-1)

A B C

DC +

DC-

Controllable Rectifier

Simplified average model

25

Constant2

25

Constant1

2

Pava (W)

1

nH2_FC

Figure B4 Sim

ulink m

odel for the electrolyzer and the gas compression system

373

APPENDIX C

MATLAB PROGRAMS FOR DG OPTIMAL PLACEMENT

374

DG Optimal Program for the IEEE 6-Bus system

Y matrix of the system 1 2 3 4 5 6 Y = [ 278-497j+0005-1j -072+165j 0 0 -042+12j -163+212j -072+165j 145-329j -072+165j 0 0 0 0 -072+165j 145-329j -072+165j 0 0 0 0 -072+165j 145-329j -072+165j 0 -042+12j 0 0 -072+165j 187-450j+0005-1j -072+165j -163+212j 0 0 0 -072+165j 236-377j]

Assume Xd and R of the Generator is R +jX = 0005+j1 Load data in the system corresponding to different buses Demand = [0 4+10i 725+20i 5+125i 0 5+15i] MVA Demand = abs(Demand)

f(i) = Sum(LiPi^2) objective function or f(i) = Sum(LiSi^2) objective function Li is the equivalent length from the DG location to load Pi or Si i is the bus number i=12 N Target find the i which yields the minimum value of f(i) BUSNO=6 fobj = zeros(BUSNO 1) for busno=1BUSNO Z = GetEqImpedance(Y 1 busno) Req = real(Z) fobj(1) = fobj(1) + ReqDemand(busno)^2 end for dg=2BUSNO move dg to different buses Y1 = changeYmatrix(Ydg) connect the bus dg with bus 1 for busno=1BUSNO if the dg location bus no is the same as the load bus no then line

power loss can be set to 0 if busno == dg

Z = 0 elseif busno lt dg Z = GetEqImpedance(Y1 1 busno) else Z = GetEqImpedance(Y1 1 busno-1) end Req = real(Z) fobj(dg) = fobj(dg) + ReqDemand(busno)^2 end end fobj

375

DG Optimal Program for the IEEE 30-Bus system

Assume Yg =1(0005+j11) for Synchronous Generator

Yc = 1(0008+j18) for Synchronous Condenser (Refer to Glovers Book) Generating Y matrix (imported from PowerWorld) j = sqrt(-1) Yg = 1(0005+j11) Yc = 1(0008+j18) Ybus = zeros(3030) Ybus( 1 1) = 67655+ j( -212316) + Yg Ybus( 1 2) = -52246+ j( 156467) Ybus( 1 3) = -15409+ j( 56317) Ybus( 2 1) = -52246+ j( 156467) Ybus( 2 2) = 97523+ j( -306487) + Yg Ybus( 2 4) = -17055+ j( 51974) Ybus( 2 5) = -11360+ j( 47725) Ybus( 2 6) = -16861+ j( 51165) Ybus( 3 1) = -15409+ j( 56317) Ybus( 3 3) = 97363+ j( -291379) Ybus( 3 4) = -81954+ j( 235309) Ybus( 4 2) = -17055+ j( 51974) Ybus( 4 3) = -81954+ j( 235309) Ybus( 4 4) = 163141+ j( -549186) Ybus( 4 6) = -64131+ j( 223112) Ybus( 4 12) = -00000+ j( 39062) Ybus( 5 2) = -11360+ j( 47725) Ybus( 5 5) = 40900+ j( -121906) + Yc Ybus( 5 7) = -29540+ j( 74493) Ybus( 6 2) = -16861+ j( 51165) Ybus( 6 4) = -64131+ j( 223112) Ybus( 6 6) = 223416+ j( -824934) Ybus( 6 7) = -35902+ j( 110261) Ybus( 6 8) = -62893+ j( 220126) Ybus( 6 9) = -00000+ j( 48077) Ybus( 6 10) = -00000+ j( 17986) Ybus( 6 28) = -43628+ j( 154636) Ybus( 7 5) = -29540+ j( 74493) Ybus( 7 6) = -35902+ j( 110261) Ybus( 7 7) = 65442+ j( -184567) Ybus( 8 6) = -62893+ j( 220126) Ybus( 8 8) = 77333+ j( -265275) + Yc Ybus( 8 28) = -14440+ j( 45408) Ybus( 9 6) = -00000+ j( 48077) Ybus( 9 9) = 00000+ j( -187063) Ybus( 9 10) = -00000+ j( 90909) Ybus( 9 11) = -00000+ j( 48077) Ybus( 10 6) = -00000+ j( 17986) Ybus( 10 9) = -00000+ j( 90909) Ybus( 10 10) = 134621+ j( -415738)

376

Ybus( 10 17) = -39560+ j( 103174) Ybus( 10 20) = -17848+ j( 39854) Ybus( 10 21) = -51019+ j( 109807) Ybus( 10 22) = -26193+ j( 54008) Ybus( 11 9) = -00000+ j( 48077) Ybus( 11 11) = 00000+ j( -48077) + Yc Ybus( 12 4) = -00000+ j( 39062) Ybus( 12 12) = 65740+ j( -244242) Ybus( 12 13) = -00000+ j( 71429) Ybus( 12 14) = -15266+ j( 31734) Ybus( 12 15) = -30954+ j( 60973) Ybus( 12 16) = -19520+ j( 41044) Ybus( 13 12) = -00000+ j( 71429) Ybus( 13 13) = 00000+ j( -71429) + Yc Ybus( 14 12) = -15266+ j( 31734) Ybus( 14 14) = 40175+ j( -54243) Ybus( 14 15) = -24910+ j( 22509) Ybus( 15 12) = -30954+ j( 60973) Ybus( 15 14) = -24910+ j( 22509) Ybus( 15 15) = 93655+ j( -160116) Ybus( 15 18) = -18108+ j( 36874) Ybus( 15 23) = -19683+ j( 39761) Ybus( 16 12) = -19520+ j( 41044) Ybus( 16 16) = 32596+ j( -89257) Ybus( 16 17) = -13076+ j( 48213) Ybus( 17 10) = -39560+ j( 103174) Ybus( 17 16) = -13076+ j( 48213) Ybus( 17 17) = 52637+ j( -151388) Ybus( 18 15) = -18108+ j( 36874) Ybus( 18 18) = 48865+ j( -99062) Ybus( 18 19) = -30757+ j( 62188) Ybus( 19 18) = -30757+ j( 62188) Ybus( 19 19) = 89580+ j( -179835) Ybus( 19 20) = -58824+ j( 117647) Ybus( 20 10) = -17848+ j( 39854) Ybus( 20 19) = -58824+ j( 117647) Ybus( 20 20) = 76672+ j( -157501) Ybus( 21 10) = -51019+ j( 109807) Ybus( 21 21) = 218765+ j( -451084) Ybus( 21 22) = -167746+ j( 341277) Ybus( 22 10) = -26193+ j( 54008) Ybus( 22 21) = -167746+ j( 341277) Ybus( 22 22) = 219345+ j( -434829) Ybus( 22 24) = -25405+ j( 39544) Ybus( 23 15) = -19683+ j( 39761) Ybus( 23 23) = 34298+ j( -69653) Ybus( 23 24) = -14614+ j( 29892) Ybus( 24 22) = -25405+ j( 39544) Ybus( 24 23) = -14614+ j( 29892) Ybus( 24 24) = 53118+ j( -92313) Ybus( 24 25) = -13099+ j( 22876) Ybus( 25 24) = -13099+ j( 22876) Ybus( 25 25) = 44957+ j( -78650) Ybus( 25 26) = -12165+ j( 18171) Ybus( 25 27) = -19693+ j( 37602)

377

Ybus( 26 25) = -12165+ j( 18171) Ybus( 26 26) = 12165+ j( -18171) Ybus( 27 25) = -19693+ j( 37602) Ybus( 27 27) = 36523+ j( -94604) Ybus( 27 28) = -00000+ j( 25253) Ybus( 27 29) = -09955+ j( 18810) Ybus( 27 30) = -06875+ j( 12940) Ybus( 28 6) = -43628+ j( 154636) Ybus( 28 8) = -14440+ j( 45408) Ybus( 28 27) = -00000+ j( 25253) Ybus( 28 28) = 58068+ j( -225016) Ybus( 29 27) = -09955+ j( 18810) Ybus( 29 29) = 19076+ j( -36044) Ybus( 29 30) = -09121+ j( 17234) Ybus( 30 27) = -06875+ j( 12940) Ybus( 30 29) = -09121+ j( 17234) Ybus( 30 30) = 15995+ j( -30173) BUSNO=30 Load data in the system corresponding to different buses Demand = zeros(1BUSNO) MVA Demand(1)= 00 Demand(2)= 00 Demand(3)= 24 + j12 Demand(4)= 76 + j16 Demand(5)= 942 + j190 Demand(6)= 00 Demand(7)= 228 + j109 Demand(8)= 300 + j300 Demand(9)= 00 Demand(10)= 58 + j20 Demand(11)= 00 Demand(12)= 112 + j75 Demand(13)= 00 Demand(14)= 62 + j16 Demand(15)= 82 + j25 Demand(16)= 35 + j18 Demand(17)= 90 + j58 Demand(18)= 32 + j09 Demand(19)= 95 + j34 Demand(20)= 22 + j07 Demand(21)= 175 + j112 Demand(22)= 00 Demand(23)= 32 + j16 Demand(24)= 87 + j67 Demand(25)= 00 Demand(26)= 35 + j23 Demand(27)= 00 Demand(28)= 00 Demand(29)= 24 + j09 Demand(30)= 106 + j19

378

Demand = abs(Demand) MVA Demand = Demand10 f(i) = Sum(LiPi^2) objective function or f(i) = Sum(LiSi^2) objective function Li is the equivalent length from the DG loaction to load Pi or Si i is thebus number i=12 N Target find the i which yields the minimum value of f(i) BUSNO=30 fobj = zeros(BUSNO 1) for busno=1BUSNO Z = GetEqImpedance(Ybus 1 busno) Req = real(Z) fobj(1) = fobj(1) + ReqDemand(busno)^2 end for dg=2BUSNO move dg to different buses Y1 = changeYmatrix(Ybusdg) connect the bus dg with bus 1 for busno=1BUSNO if busno == dg

if the dg location bus no is the same as the load bus no then line

power loss can be set to 0 Z = 0 elseif busno lt dg Z = GetEqImpedance(Y1 1 busno) else Z = GetEqImpedance(Y1 1 busno-1) end Req = real(Z) fobj(dg) = fobj(dg) + ReqDemand(busno)^2 end end fobj

ii

APPROVAL

of a dissertation submitted by

Caisheng Wang

This dissertation has been read by each member of the thesis committee and has been found to be satisfactory regarding content English usage format citations bibliographic style and consistency and is ready for submission to the Division of Graduate Education

Dr M Hashem Nehrir

Approved for the Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering

Dr James N Peterson

Approved for the Division of Graduate Education

Dr Joseph J Fedock

iii

STATEMENT OF PERMISSION TO USE In presenting this dissertation in partial fulfillment of the requirements for a doctoral degree at Montana State University I agree that the Library shall make it available to borrowers under rules of the Library I further agree that copying of this dissertation is allowable only for scholarly purposes consistent with ldquofair userdquo as prescribed in the US Copyright Law Requests for extensive copying or reproduction of this dissertation should be referred to ProQuest Information and Learning 300 North Zeeb Road Ann Arbor Michigan 48106 to whom I have granted ldquothe exclusive right to reproduce and distribute my dissertation in and from microform along with the non-exclusive right to reproduce and distribute my abstract in any format in whole or in partrdquo

Caisheng Wang July 2006

iv

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

I am grateful to acknowledge and thank all of those who assisted me in my graduate

program at Montana State University First I would like to thank Dr Hashem Nehrir my

academic advisor here at MSU His guidance support patience and personal time

throughout my years as a graduate student have been truly appreciated Special thanks are

given to my other graduate committee members Dr Steven Shaw Dr Don Pierre Dr

Hongwei Gao Dr Robert Gunderson and Dr Gary Bogar Special thanks also go to Dr

Hong Mao for his time and clarifying conversations on design and control of power

electronic devices Mr Sreedhar Gudarsquos help in the model developing for wind energy

conversion systems and Mr Marc Kepplerrsquos help in setting up the experimental circuit

for PEM fuel cell model validation are acknowledged Most importantly I would like to

thank my family and friends for their support throughout all the years

v

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF FIGURES xii

LIST OF TABLES xi

Abstract xii

1 INTRODUCTION 1

World Energy Demands 1

World and US Electricity Demands amp Generation 2 Conventional Thermal Electric Power Generation 6 Coal 6 Natural Gas 6 Oil 7

Nuclear Power 9 Hydroelectric Power 9

Why AlternativeRenewable Energy 10

Recent Progress in AlternativeRenewable Energy Technologies 14 Wind Energy 14 Photovoltaic Energy 16 Fuel Cells 18 Other Renewable Energy Sources 20 Distributed Generation Applications 23

Need for the Research 26

Scope of the Study 28

Organization of the Dissertation 28

REFERENCES 30

2 FUNDAMENTALS OF ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SYSTEMS 33

Energy Forms 33 Definition of Energy 33 Mechanical Energy 34 Chemical Energy 35 Electrical and Electromagnetic Energy 35 Thermal Energy 36 Nuclear Energy 37

Fundamentals of Thermodynamics 37 The First Law of Thermodynamics 37 The Heat Engine and Carnot Cycle 39 The Second Law of Thermodynamics 41

vi

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

Heat Transfer 42 Heat Transfer by Conduction 42 Heat Transfer by Convection 42 Heat Transfer by Radiation 43

Fundamentals of Electrochemical Processes 43 The Gibbs Free Energy 43 Energy Balance in Chemical Reactions 44 The Nernst Equation 47

Fundamentals of Alternative Energy Systems 48 Wind Energy System 49 Energy in Wind 49 Power Extracted from Wind 49 Tip Speed Ratio 51 Wind Energy Conversion System 52 Constant Speed and Variable Speed Wind Energy Conversion Systems 53 Wind Turbine Output Power vs Wind Speed 54

Photovoltaic Energy System 57 Fuel Cells 59 PEMFC 61 SOFC 63 MCFC 65

Electrolyzer 66

Summary 69

REFERENCES 70

3 MULTI-SOURCE ALTERNATIVE ENERGY DISTRIBUTED GENERATION SYSTEM 72

Introduction 72

AC Coupling vs DC Coupling 75

Stand-alone vs Grid-connected Systems 79

The Proposed System Configuration 79

System Unit Sizing 80

REFERENCES 85

4 COMPONENT MODELING FOR THE HYBRID ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SYSTEM 89

Dynamic Models and Model Validation for PEMFC 89 Introduction 89 Dynamic Model Development 91

vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

Gas Diffusion in the Electrodes 92 Material Conservation Equations 96 Fuel Cell Output Voltage 97 Double-Layer Charging Effect 101 Energy Balance of the Thermodynamics 102

Dynamic Model Built in MatlabSimulink 104 Equivalent Electrical Model in Pspice 105 Internal Potential E 106 Circuit for Activation Loss 107 Circuits for Ohmic and Concentration Voltage Drops 108 Equivalent Capacitor of Double-layer Charging Effect 109 Thermodynamic Block 109

Model Validation110 Experimental Setup 111 Steady-State Characteristics 113 Temperature Response115 Transient Performance116

Dynamic Models for SOFC118 Introduction118 Dynamic Model Development 119 Effective Partial Pressures 120 Material Conservation Equations 124 Fuel Cell Output Voltage 126 Energy Balance of the Thermodynamics 131 Dynamic SOFC Model Implementation 135

Model Responses under Constant Fuel Flow Operation 137 Steady-State Characteristics 137 Dynamic Response 140

Constant Fuel Utilization Operation 144 Steady-state Characteristics 145 Dynamic Responses 147

Wind Energy Conversion System 150 Introduction 150 System Configuration 151

Dynamic Model for Variable Speed Wind Turbine 152 Wind Turbine Characteristics 152 Pitch Angle Controller 155 Variable-speed Wind Turbine Model 157

Dynamic Model for SEIG 157 Steady-state Model 157 Self-excitation Process 160 Dynamic Model of SEIG in dq Representations 161

viii

Responses of the Model for the Variable Speed WECS 165 Wind Turbine Output Power Characteristic 165 Process of Self-excitation in SEIG 166 Model Responses under Wind Speed Changes 169

Solar Energy Conversion System 172 Modeling for PV CellModule 172 Light Current 173 Saturation Current 174 Calculation of α 174 Series Resistance 175 Thermal Model of PV 175

PV Model Development in MATLABSimulink 176 Model Performance 177 Temperature Effect on the Model Performance 179

Maximum Power Point Tracking Control 180 Current-Based Maximum Power Point Tracking 180 Control Scheme 182 Simulation Results 183

Electrolyzer 185 U-I Characteristic 185 Hydrogen Production Rate 186 Thermal Model 187 Electrolyzer Model Implementation in MATLABSimulink 189 Electrolyzer Model Performance 191

Power Electronic Interfacing Circuits 193 ACDC Rectifiers 193 Simplified Model for Controllable Rectifiers 197

DCDC Converters 200 Circuit Topologies 200 State-space Models Based on the State-space Averaging Technique 202 Averaged Models for DCDC Converters 205

DCAC Inverters 208 Circuit Topology 208 State-Space Model 208 dq Representation of the State-Space Model 212 Ideal Model for Three-phase VSI 214

Battery Model 217

Models for Accessories 218 Gas Compressor 218 High Pressure H2 Storage Tank 219 Gas Pressure Regulator 220

Summary 223

ix

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

REFERENCES 224

5 CONTROL OF GRID-CONNECTED FUEL CELL POWER GENERATION SYSTEMS 231

Introduction 231

System Description 232

Controller Designs for Power Electronic Devices 238 Controller Design for the Boost DCDC Converter 238 Controller Design for the 3-Phase VSI 241 Current Control Loop 241 Voltage Control Loop 245 Control of Power Flow 247 Overall Power Control System for the Inverter 249

Simulation Results 250 Desired P and Q Delivered to the Grid Heavy Loading 251 PEMFC DG 251 SOFC DG 254

Desired P Delivered to the Grid Q Consumed from the Grid Light Loading 256 PEMFC DG 256 SOFC DG 258

Load-Following Analysis 260 Fixed Grid Power 260 Fixed FC Power 261

Fault Analysis 263

Summary 266

REFERENCES 268

6 CONTROL OF STAND-ALONE FUEL CELL POWER GENERATION SYSTEMS 271

Introduction 271

System Description and Control Strategy 272 Load Mitigation Control 272 Battery ChargingDischarging Controller 276 Filter Design 277

Simulation Results 279 Load Transients 279 DC Load Transients 280 AC Load Transients 280

Load mitigation 282

x

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

PEMFC System 282 SOFC System 286

Battery ChargingDischarging 289

Summary 292

REFERENCES 293

7 CONTROL SCHEMES AND SIMULATION RESULTS FOR THE PROPOSED HYBRID WINDPVFC SYSTEM 295

Introduction 295

System Control Strategy 295 Overall Power Management Strategy 296 AC Bus Voltage Regulator 299 Electrolyzer Controller 300

Simulation Results under Different Scenarios 301 Winter Scenario 303 Weather Data 303 Simulation Results 305

Summer Scenario 314 Weather Data 314 Simulation Results 316

Summary 330

REFERENCES 331

8 OPTIMAL PLACEMENT OF DISTRIBUTED GENERATION SOURCES IN POWER SYSTEMS 332

Introduction 332

Optimal Placement of DG on a Radial Feeder 333 Theoretical Analysis 334 Procedure to Find the Optimal Location of DG on a Radial Feeder 336 Case Studies with Time Invariant Loads and DGs 338 Case Study with Time Varying Load and DG 340

Optimal Placement of DG in Networked Systems 341

Simulation Results 345 Radial Feeder with Time Invariant Loads and DG 346 Radial Feeder with Time Varying Loads and DG 348 Networked Systems 351

Summary 358

xi

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

REFERENCES 359

9 CONCLUSIONS 361

APPENDICES 364

APPENDIX A abc-dq0 TRANSFORMATION 365 abc-dq0 Transformation 366 dq0-abc Transformation 367

APPENDIX B SIMULATION DIAGRAMS OF THE HYBRID ENERGY SYSTEM 368

APPENDIX C MATLAB PROGRAMS FOR DG OPTIMAL PLACEMENT 373 DG Optimal Program for the IEEE 6-Bus system 374 DG Optimal Program for the IEEE 30-Bus system 375

xii

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure Page

11 World Energy Consumption 1970-2025 2

12 World and US Electricity Demands 1980-2025 4

13 World Electricity Generating Capacity 1980-2025 5

14 The world and US net electricity generation by type in 2002 5

15 Fuel shares of world electricity generation 2002-2025 8

16 US electricity generation by fuel types 8

17 World crude oil prices1978-2006 13

18 The world and the US wind power cumulative capacity 16

19 Cumulative Installed PV capacity in IEA PVPS countries 18

110 Cumulative installed FC units world-wide 1990-2005 19

21 Block diagram of an ideal heat engine 39

22 Carnot cycle (a) P-V (pressure-volume) diagram 40

(b) T-S (temperature-entropy) diagram 40

23 Theoretical rotor efficiency vs v0v ratio 51

24 Block diagram of a typical wind energy conversion system 52

25 Constant and variable speed wind energy conversion systems 55

26 Typical curves for a constant speed stall controlled (dotted)

and variable speed pitch controlled (solid) wind turbine 56

27 Schematic block diagram of a PV cell 58

28 PV Cell module and array 59

29 Schematic diagram of a PEMFC 61

210 V-I characteristic of a 500W PEMFC stack 62

211 Schematic diagram of a SOFC 63

212 V-I characteristic of a 5kW SOFC stack 64

213 Schematic diagram of a MCFC 65

214 Progress in generic performance of MCFCs on reformate gas and air 66

215 Schematic diagram of an alkaline electrolyzer 68

31 Hybrid energy system integration DC coupling 75

xiii

Figure Page

32 Hybrid energy system integration (a) PFAC coupling (b) HFAC coupling 76

33 System configuration of the proposed multi-source alternative

hybrid energy system (coupling inductors are not shown in the figure) 81

34 Hourly average demand of a typical residence

in the Pacific Northwest area 82

41 Schematic diagram of a PEMFC and voltage drops across it 93

42 Equivalent circuit of the double-layer charging effect inside a PEMFC 101

43 Diagram of building a dynamic model of PEMFC in SIMULINK 105

44 Diagram of building an electrical model of PEMFC in Pspice 106

45 Electrical circuit for internal potential E 107

46 Electrical circuit for activation loss 107

47 Electrical circuit for ohmic voltage drop 108

48 Electrical circuit for concentration voltage drop 109

49 Equivalent circuit of thermodynamic property inside PEMFC 110

410 Experimental configuration on the SR-12 PEMFC stack 112

411 V-I characteristics of SR-12 and models114

412 P-I characteristics of SR-12 and models 114

413 Temperature responses of the SR 12 stack and models 115

414 Transient responses of the models in short time range 117

415 Transient responses of the models in long time range 117

416 Schematic diagram of a solid oxide fuel cell 121

417 Equivalent electrical circuit of the double-layer charging effect inside a SOFC 130

418 Heat transfer inside a tubular solid oxide fuel cell 132

419 Diagram of building a dynamic model of SOFC in SIMULINK 137

420 V-I characteristics of the SOFC model at different temperatures 138

421 Three voltage drops at different temperatures 139

422 P-I characteristics of the SOFC model at different temperatures 140

423 Model dynamic responses with different equivalent

capacitance values for double-layer charging effect in small time scale 141

xiv

Figure Page

424 Model dynamic responses under different

operating pressures in medium time scale 142

425 Model dynamic responses under different

inlet temperatures in large time scale 143

426 Model temperature responses 144

427 Constant utilization control 145

428 V-I and P-I characteristics of the SOFC model

under constant fuel utilization and constant fuel flow operating modes 146

429 H2 input for the constant utilization and constant flow operating modes 147

430 Model dynamic responses under different operating pressures

in medium time scale with constant utilization operating mode 149

431 System block diagram of the WECS 152

432 Cp-λ characteristics at different pitch angles (θ) 154

433 Variable speed pitch controlled wind turbine operation regions 155

434 Pitch angle controller 156

435 Simulation model of the variable speed pitch-regulated wind turbine 156

436 Equivalent T circuit of self-excited induction generator with R-L Load 159

437 Determination of stable operation of SEIG 161

438 dq representation of a SEIG (All values are referred to stator) 162

439 Wind turbine output power characteristic 166

440 A successful self excitation process 167

441 Voltage fails to build up 167

442 Variation of magnetizing current Im 168

443 Variation of magnetizing inductance Lm 168

444 Wind speed variations used for simulation study 169

445 Output power of the WECS model under wind speed changes 169

446 Wind turbine rotor speed 170

447 Pitch angle controller response to the wind changes 171

448 Variation of power coefficient Cp 171

xv

Figure Page

449 One-diode equivalent circuit model for a PV cell

(a) Five parameters model (b) Simplified four parameters model 172

450 Block diagram of the PV model built in MATLABSimulink 176

451 I-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different irradiances 178

452 P-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different irradiances 178

453 I-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different temperatures 179

454 P-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different temperatures 179

455 Linear relationship between Isc and Imp under different solar irradiances 181

456 Ump vs Uoc curve under different solar irradiances 181

457 CMPPT control scheme 182

458 Imp and Ipv curves under the CMPPT control 183

459 PV output power and the maximum power curves 184

460 Block diagram of the electrolyzer model built in MATLABSimulink 189

461 U-I characteristics of the electrolyzer model under different temperatures 191

462 Temperature response of the model 192

463 Three-phase full diode bridge rectifier 194

464 Three-phase 12-diode bridge rectifier with a Y-Y and a Y-∆ transformer 195

465 A 6-pulse thyristor rectifier 197

466 Block diagram of the simplified model for 3-phase controllable rectifiers 198

467 DC output voltages of the different rectifier models 199

468 AC side phase current of the different rectifier models 199

469 Boost DCDC converter 201

470 Buck DCDC converter 201

471 Averaged model for boost DCDC converters 205

472 Simulation result of the averaged model for boost DCDC converter 206

473 Simulation result of the detailed model for boost DCDC converter 206

474 Averaged model for buck DCDC converters 207

475 Simulation result of the averaged model for buck DCDC converter 207

476 Simulation result of the detailed model for buck DCDC converter 208

xvi

Figure Page

477 3-phase DCAC voltage source inverter 209

478 Ideal model for three-phase VSI 215

479 AC phase output voltages of the ideal VSI model and the switched VSI model216

480 Output power of the ideal VSI model and the switched VSI model 216

481 Equivalent circuit model for battery reported in [481] 217

482 Simplified circuit model for lead-acid batteries 218

483 Pressured H2 storage tank 219

484 Gas pressure regulator 221

485 Performance of the model for gas pressure regulators 222

51 Block diagram of a fuel cell distributed generation system 233

52 Block diagram of the control loop for the boost DCDC converter 239

53 Bode plot of the control loop of the boost DCDC converter 240

54 Block diagram of the current control loop of the inverter 242

55 Bode plot of the current control loop 244

56 Unit step response of the current control loop and its approximation 245

57 Block diagram of the voltage control loop of the inverter 245

58 Bode plot of the voltage control loop 247

59 Power flow between a voltage source and utility grid 247

510 Block diagram of the overall power control system of the inverter 249

511 PEMFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under heavy loading 252

512 PEMFC DG dq values of the inverter output voltage under heavy load 252

513 PEMFC DG Output voltage and current of

each fuel cell array under heavy load 253

514 PEMFC DG DC bus voltage waveform under heavy load 254

515 SOFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under heavy loading 254

516 SOFC DG Output voltage and current of each FC array under heavy load 255

517 SOFC DG DC bus voltage under heavy loading 255

518 PEMFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid light loading 257

519 PEMFC DG Output voltage and current of

xvii

Figure Page

each fuel cell array under light loading 257

520 SOFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under light loading 259

521 SOFC DG Output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under light load 259

522 System for the PEMFC DG load-following study 261

523 Power curves of the load-following study with fixed grid power 262

524 System for the PEMFC DG load-following study 262

525 Power curves of the load-following study with fixed FC power 263

526 Faulted fuel cell DG system 264

527 Faulted PEMFC DG Power flow of the transmission line 265

528 Faulted PEMFC DG Fuel cell output powers for the fault studies 266

61 Schematic diagram of a FC-battery hybrid system

with load transient mitigation control 274

62 Schematic diagram of the battery chargingdischarging controller 275

63 Example of the responses of different filters to a load transient 278

64 Load transient of starting a 25HP and a 5kW 220V DC motor 280

65 AC load transient used on PEMFC-battery system 282

66 Reference signal (Iref) for the current controller battery current (ib)

and converter output current (idd_out) under the load transient for

PEMFC shown in Figure 64 284

67 The PEMFC output current and voltage responses to the

DC load transient shown in Figure 64 284

68 PEMFC The control reference signal (Iref) and battery current (ib)

under the AC load transient shown in Figure 65 285

69 The PEMFC output current and voltage responses

to the AC load transient shown in Figure 65 286

610 Reference signal (Iref) for the current controller the battery current (ib)

and the converter output current (idd_out) under the load transient

for SOFC shown in Figure 64 287

611 SOFC output current and voltage responses

xviii

Figure Page

to the DC load transient shown in Figure 64 287

612 Control reference signal (Iref) and battery current (ib)

under the AC load transient 288

613 The SOFC output current and voltage responses to the AC load transient 288

614 Battery voltage and extra current reference (Iref2) curves

when the battery is being charged 290

615 The load transient the overall current control reference signal (Iref)

the low-pass filter output signal (Iref1) and the corresponding

converter output current (idd_out) when the battery is being charged 291

71 Simulation model for the proposed

hybrid alternative energy system in MATLABSimulink 297

72 Block diagram of the overall control scheme for

the proposed hybrid alternative energy system 298

73 Block diagram of the AC voltage regulator 299

74 Block diagram of the electrolyzer controller 300

75 Load demand profile over 24 hours for the system simulation study 302

76 Wind speed data for the winter scenario simulation study 303

77 Solar irradiance data for the winter scenario simulation study 304

78 Air temperature data for the winter scenario simulation study 304

79 Wind power of the winter scenario study 305

710 Pitch angle of the wind turbine of the winter scenario study 306

711 Rotor speed of the induction generator of the winter scenario study 306

712 PV power for the winter scenario 308

713 Current difference between the actual output current and

the reference current for the maximum power point of the winter scenario 308

714 The PV temperature response over the simulation period for

the winter scenario 309

715 Power available for H2 generation of the winter scenario 309

716 H2 generation rate of the winter scenario study 310

xix

Figure Page

717 Electrolyzer voltage and current for the winter scenario study 310

718 Power shortage over the simulation period of the winter scenario study 311

719 Power supplied by the FC of the winter scenario study 312

720 H2 consumption rate of the winter scenario study 312

721 The pressure tank over the 24 hour of the winter scenario study 313

722 The battery power over the simulation period for the winter scenario 314

723 Corrected wind speed data for the summer scenario simulation study 315

724 Irradiance data for the summer scenario simulation study 315

725 Air temperature data for the summer scenario simulation study 316

726 Wind power generated for the summer scenario study 317

727 Rotor speed of the induction generator for the summer scenario study 317

728 PV power generated for the winter scenario study 318

729 The PV and air temperature over the simulation period for

the winter scenario study 319

730 Power available for H2 generation for the summer scenario study 320

731 H2 generation rate for the summer scenario study 320

732 Electrolyzer voltage and current for the summer scenario study 321

733 Power shortage over the simulation period for the summer scenario study 322

734 Power supplied by the FC over the simulation period for

the summer scenario study 322

735 H2 consumption rate for the summer scenario study 323

736 The H2 tank pressure over the 24 hour for the summer scenario study 323

737 The battery power over the simulation period for the summer scenario 324

738 Wind speed data for the simulation study with continuous

weather data and load demand 325

739 Solar irradiance data for the simulation study with

continuous weather data and load demand 325

740 Air temperature for the simulation study with

continuous weather data and load demand 326

xx

Figure Page

741 Wind power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario 327

742 PV power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario 327

743 Power available for H2 generation for the

continuous weather data and load demand scenario 328

744 FC output power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario 328

745 Battery power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario 329

81 A feeder with distributed loads along the line 334

82 Procedure for finding optimal place for a DG source in a radial feeder 338

83 A networked power system 342

84 Flow chart of The theoretical procedure to find the

optimal bus to place DG in a networked system 346

85 A radial feeder with uniformly distributed loads 347

86 Annual daily average output power profile of a 1-MW wind-DG 349

87 Daily average demand of a typical house 350

88 Power losses of the radial feeder with the wind-DG at different buses 350

89 6-bus networked power system studied 351

810 Power losses of the system in Figure 89 with a 5MW DG 352

811 Values of the objective function of the system in Figure 89 353

812 IEEE 30-bus test system 354

813 Power losses of the IEEE 30-bus test system with a 15MW DG 354

814 Values of the objective function of the IEEE 30-bus system 355

815 Power losses of the subset system in Figure 812 with a 5MW DG 356

816 Values of the objective function of the subset system in Figure 812 356

B1 Simulink model for the wind energy conversion system 369

B2 Simulink model for the solar energy conversion system 370

B3 Simulink model for the fuel cell and the gas pressure regulation system 371

B4 Simulink model for the electrolyzer and the gas compression system 372

xi

LIST OF TABLES

Table Page 11 Current Status and the DOE Targets for

PEMFC Stack in Stationary Applications 21

12 Current status and the SECA targets for 3-10 kW

SOFC module in stationary applications 22

13 Technologies for Distributed Generation Systems 25

21 Standard thermodynamic properties (enthalpy entropy and Gibbs energy) 46

31 Comparison among Different Integration Schemes 78

32 Component Parameters of the Proposed Hybrid Energy System 84

41 Analogies between Thermodynamic and Electrical Quantities 110

42 Specifications of SR-12 111

43 Electrical Model Parameter Values for SR-12 Stack 112

44 Operating Conditions for the Model Dynamic Response Studies 141

45 Parameter values for C1-C5 153

46 SEIG Model Parameters 165

47 The PV Model Parameters 177

48 The Electrolyzer Model Parameters 190

49 Constants of Beattie-Bridgeman Equation of State for H2 220

51 Configuration Parameters of the Proposed System 236

52 System Parameters of the Boost DCDC Converter 240

53 Parameters of the Current Control Loop the Inverter 243

54 Parameters of the Voltage Control Loop the Inverter 246

61 Parameters of the DCDC Converter 275

62 Parameters of the Battery Model 276

71 Weather Station information at

Deer Lodge Montana AgriMet Station (DRLM) 302

81 Theoretical Analysis Results of Case Studies

with Time Invariant Loads and DGs 339

82 Parameters of the System in Figure 85 347

xii

83 Simulation Results of Case Studies with Time Invariant Loads and DG 348

84 Parameters of the System in Figure 89 352

85 Bus Data of the IEEE 30-Bus Test System 357

xii

Abstract

Due to ever increasing energy consumption rising public awareness of environmental protection and steady progress in power deregulation alternative (ie renewable and fuel cell based) distributed generation (DG) systems have attracted increased interest Wind and photovoltaic (PV) power generation are two of the most promising renewable energy technologies Fuel cell (FC) systems also show great potential in DG applications of the future due to their fast technology development and many merits they have such as high efficiency zero or low emission (of pollutant gases) and flexible modular structure

The modeling and control of a hybrid windPVFC DG system is addressed in this

dissertation Different energy sources in the system are integrated through an AC bus Dynamic models for the main system components namely wind energy conversion system (WECS) PV energy conversion system (PVECS) fuel cell electrolyzer power electronic interfacing circuits battery hydrogen storage tank gas compressor and gas pressure regulator are developed Two types of fuel cells have been modeled in this dissertation proton exchange membrane fuel cell (PEMFC) and solid oxide fuel cell (SOFC) Power control of a grid-connected FC system as well as load mitigation control of a stand-alone FC system are investigated The pitch angle control for WECS the maximum power point tracking (MPPT) control for PVECS and the control for electrolyzer and power electronic devices are also addressed in the dissertation

Based on the dynamic component models a simulation model for the proposed hybrid

energy system has been developed using MATLABSimulink The overall power management strategy for coordinating the power flows among the different energy sources is presented in the dissertation Simulation studies have been carried out to verify the system performance under different scenarios using a practical load profile and real weather data The results show that the overall power management strategy is effective and the power flows among the different energy sources and the load demand is balanced successfully

The DGrsquos impacts on the existing power system are also investigated in this

dissertation Analytical methods for finding optimal sites to deploy DG sources in power systems are presented and verified with simulation studies

1

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

Energy is essential to everyonersquos life no matter when and where they are This is

especially true in this new century where people keep pursuing higher quality of life

Among different types of energy electric energy is one of the most important that people

need everyday In this chapter an overview is given on the world energy demand

electricity consumption and their development trend in the near future The electric power

generation technologies based on different energy sources are also reviewed in the

chapter Finally the need for this research work is addressed and the scope of the research

is also defined

World Energy Demands

The world energy consumption is expected to grow about 57 in the next two

decades [11] Figure 11 shows the strong growth of the global energy demand in the

past three decades and its projection over the next two decades The world energy

consumption by fuel type in 2002 is also shown in the figure It is clear that a large part

of the total energy is provided by fossil fuels (about 86 in 2002) The future of the

global economy growth is highly dependent on whether the ever-increasing energy

demand can be met

Fossil fuels are not evenly distributed around the world and regional or global

conflicts may arise from energy crisis if our economy is still heavily dependent on them

Moreover during the process of generating and using electrical energy with todayrsquos

2

conventional technologies the global environment has already been significantly affected

and the environment of some regions has been damaged severely Therefore it is a big

challenge for the whole world to figure out how to generate the needed amount of energy

and the types of energy sources

207243

285310

348366

412

504

553

598

645

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2002 2010 2015 2020 2025

Quadrillion Btu

History Projections Nuclear

7

Other

8

Coal

24

Oil

38

Natural

Gas

23

Figure 11 World Energy Consumption 1970-2025 [11]-[13]

World and US Electricity Demands amp Generation

The world electric energy consumption is expected to increase by more than 50 by

2025 [11]-[13] shown in Figure 12 About 24 of the world total electricity demand in

2003 is consumed by US (Figure 12) and it is anticipated to grow 44 in the first

quarter of the new century [11]-[13] Moreover the electricity demand from emerging

economic regions such as China and India is increasing even faster

3

To meet the future global electricity demand an extensive expansion of installed

generating capacity is necessary Worldwide installed electricity generating capacity is

expected to increase from 3626 GW (gigawatts) in 2003 to 5495 GW in 2025 (Figure

13) at a 22-percent average annual growth rate [11]-[14]

The percentage of US electricity generating capacity over the total world generating

capacity is declining It drops from around 25 in 2003 to about 20 in 2025 (Figure 13)

according to the estimation of Energy Information Administration (EIA) Nevertheless

the electricity generation capacity of US is still expected to grow about 38 from 2000

to 2025 [11] By comparing the electricity consumption data in Figure 12 and the

generation capacity data in Figure 13 it is noted that the US electricity consumption is

growing faster than the generation capacity If this trend is not reversed it is expected

that the US would have to import more electric power in the near future Otherwise the

reserve margin of the whole power system in the US will shrink which will

compromise system stability and power delivery reliability

Electricity can be generated in many ways from various energy sources Electric

power can be generated by conventional thermal power plants (using fossil fuels or

nuclear energy) hydropower stations and other alternative power generating units (such

as wind turbine generators photovoltaic arrays fuel cells biomass power plants

geothermal power stations etc) Fossil fuels (including coal oil and natural gas) and

nuclear energy are not renewable and their resources are limited On the other hand

renewable energy resources (wind and solar energy for example) can self-renew and

sustain for future use Figure 14 shows the world and US net electricity generation by

type in 2002 It is clear from this figure that more than 80 of the world and US

4

electricity generation are still contributed by the conventional fossil-fuel thermal power

plants and nuclear power plants [11] [14] Except for the hydroelectric power the

portion of the electricity generated from other renewablealternative sources is very small

In the following of this section an overview will be given on the current status and the

future development trend of different types of electricity generation

0

5000

10000

15000

20000

25000

30000

1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2002 2003 2010 2015 2020 2025

World

US

Billion kWh

History Projections

Figure 12 World and US Electricity Demands 1980-2025 [11]-[13]

5

0

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2003 2010 2015 2020 2025

World

US

GW

History Projections

Figure 13 World Electricity Generating Capacity 1980-2025 [11] [14]

Nuclear

17

Hydroelectric

17 Conventional

Thermal

64

Hydroelectric

7

Nuclear

20

Conventional

Thermal

71

Figure 14 The world and US net electricity generation by type in 2002 [11] [14]

6

Conventional Thermal Electric Power Generation

Conventional thermal power plants generate electric power using fossil fuels namely

coal oil and natural gas In a fossil-fired thermal power plant water passes through a

boiler heated by burning fossil fuels to produce high temperature and high pressure

steam The steam then enters a multi-stage steam turbine which operates a generator to

produce electricity

Coal Due to its low price and relative abundant reserves coal is and should

continue to be the dominant fuel for electricity generation of the world and the US

shown in Figures 15 and 16 The United States and China currently are the leaders in

terms of installed coal-fired capacity Both countries have large amount of coal reserves

Even under the pressure of Kyoto Protocol for reducing greenhouse gas and other air

pollutant emissions coal-fired electricity generation capacity is still expected to grow by

15 percent per year and coal is expected to fuel 38 (Figure 15) of the electricity

generation of the entire world by 2025 [13] However this trend could be changed if

higher pressure is applied to implement environment protection policies such as the

Kyoto Protocol and the Clean Air Act in the US

Natural Gas Natural-gas-fired power generation technology is an attractive option

for new power plants because of its fuel efficiency operating flexibility rapid

deployment and lower installation costs compared to other conventional generation

technologies Regulatory policies to reduce carbon dioxide emissions could accelerate the

switch from coal to gas However the amount of natural gas reserve is not as plentiful as

7

coal In the US the amount of dry natural gas reverses was 192513 billion cubic feet in

2004 [14] In the same year the total natural gas consumption in the US was 224303

billion cubic feet And about a quarter of this consumption was for electricity generation

If dry natural gas was the only means of reserving and the amount of reserves would not

change then that amount could only supply the US natural gas needs for less than 10

years at the consumption rate of 2004 [14]

Oil On the world average oil is not and will not be a major source for electric

power The main reason is that the major petroleum products are produced for

transportation purposes such as automobile gasoline jet fuel etc but not for electricity

generation The first problem with oil is that the whole world is short of its reserves while

the demand for oil keeps increasing The oil demand is expected to grow at about 25

per year [15] The amount of proven crude oil reserves in the world in 2005 is 1277

billion barrels1 The world oil consumption in 2002 was 782 million barrels per day [15]

If we could keep this consuming rate unchanged then the whole world oil reserves could

only sustain for less than 45 years Even if the more optimistic data 2947 billion barrels

(including reserve growth and the estimated undiscovered oil reserves) of the oil reserves

are used the world will still run out of oil in about one hundred years and forty years

under the same consumption rate Greenhouse gas and air pollutant emission is another

big problem with using oil Moreover there are many other problems associated with oil

such as high oil price and the instability of some oil production regions

1 1 barrel = 42 US gallons

8

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

2002 2010 2015 2020 2025

HydroelectricOther

Nuclear

Natural Gas

Oil

Coal

Percentage

Figure 15 Fuel shares of world electricity generation 2002-2025 [11] [12]

0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

4500

5000

1990 2000 2010

HydroelectricOther

Nuclear

Natural Gas

Oil

Coal

Billion kWh

Figure 16 US electricity generation by fuel types [14]

9

Nuclear Power

Nuclear energy is an important source for electricity generation in many countries In

2003 19 countries depended on nuclear power for at least 20 percent of their electricity

generation [16] France is the country which has the highest portion (781) of the

electricity generated by nuclear power [16] Though the percentage of nuclear electric

power over the total national electricity generation is not very high (about 20) the US

is still the worlds largest producer of electric power using nuclear fuels Higher fossil

fuel prices and the entry into force of the Kyoto Protocol could result in more electricity

generated by nuclear power In the emerging economic regions such as China and India

nuclear power capacity is expected to grow [11] However nuclear power trends can be

difficult or even be reversed due to a variety of reasons The safety of a nuclear power

plant is still the biggest concern And how to deposit nuclear wastes can always be a

discussion topic for environmentalists Moreover the nuclear fuel (Uranium) is not

renewable The US Uranium reserves are 1414 million pounds at the end of 2003 [16]

This amount of reserve can supply the US for about 270 years at the Uranium annual

consumption rate of 24072 metric tons (2002 statistical data)

Hydroelectric Power

Today hydropower is still the largest renewable source for electricity generation in

the world In 2002 more than 18 of the world electricity was supplied by renewable

sources most of which comes from hydropower shown in Figure 15 [11] [12] The

world hydroelectric capacity is expected to grow slightly due to large hydroelectric

projects in the regions with emerging economies The Three Gorges hydropower project

10

in China is now the biggest hydropower project ever carried out in the world Upon the

completion of the Three Gorges project in 2009 it will have a generating capacity of 182

GW (26 units total and 700MW for each unit) [17]

Although the hydropower is clean and renewable there are still some problems

associated with it First the big dams and reservoirs cause a lot of environmental

concerns and social disputes Second the relocation of reservoir populations can be a big

problem For example over a million people will be relocated for the Three Gorges

project [18] Moreover hydropower is not as abundant as desired In the US for

example the available hydropower sources (except in Alaska) have almost been explored

All these factors determine that hydropower can not play a major role in the future new

electricity supply in the world

Why AlternativeRenewable Energy

The term ldquoalternative energyrdquo is referred to the energy produced in an

environmentally friendly way (different from conventional means ie through fossil-fuel

power plants nuclear power plants and hydropower plants) Alternative energy

considered in this dissertation is either renewable or with high energy conversion

efficiency There is a broad range of energy sources that can be classified as alternative

energy such as solar wind hydrogen (fuel cell) biomass and geothermal energy

Nevertheless as mentioned in the previous section at the present the majority of the

world electricity is still generated by fossil fuels nuclear power and hydropower

However due to the following problemsconcerns for conventional energy technologies

the renewablealternative energy sources will play important roles in electricity

11

generation And sooner or later todayrsquos alternatives will become tomorrowrsquos main

sources for electricity

1) Conventional energy sources are not renewable As discussed in the above

section both the fossil fuels (coal and oil and natural gas) and nuclear fuels are not

renewable The reserves of these fuels will run out some day in the future A long term

energy development strategy is therefore important for sustainable and continuous

economy growth

2) Conventional generation technologies are not environmentally friendly

Although there have been substantial improvements in the technologies (such as

desulfurization) for reducing emissions conventional thermal power plants still produce a

large amount of pollutant gases such as sulfur oxide and nitrogen oxide [19] The

radioactive waste of nuclear power plants is always a big concern to the environment

The dams and reservoirs of hydropower can change the ecological systems of the original

rivers and the regions of the reservoirs substantially [110]

3) The cost of using fossil and nuclear fuels will go higher and higher Since these

fuel sources are not renewable while the world energy demand is steadily increasing it is

obvious that the price of these fuels will go higher Taking world crude oil price for

example the price has been increased by 57 in the last year [111] Compared to natural

gas and petroleum coal is cheap for electricity generation However if the cost for

reducing emissions is taken into account the actual price of generating electricity from

coal would be much higher The growing cost of using conventional technologies will

make alternative power generation more competitive and will justify the switchover from

conventional to alternative ways for electric power generation

12

4) Hydropower sources are not enough and the sites are normally far away from

load centers Hydropower is good because it is clean and renewable However as

mentioned in the previous section the total amount of hydropower that can be explored is

not enough And in many developed countries the hydropower has been almost explored

fully Moreover hydroelectric sites normally are in remote areas Long transmission lines

add more difficulties and cost in exploring hydropower since the permission of the

right-of-way for transmission lines is much more difficult to obtain than before

5) Political and social concerns on safety are pushing nuclear power away In

general government energy strategy guides the development of nuclear power There are

almost no cases that corporations or utilities make the decisions to build nuclear power

plants based on their economic considerations Accidents at the Three Mile Island nuclear

power plant in the United States in 1979 and Chernobyl in the Soviet Union in 1986 fed

people full of fears No body wants to be a neighbor of a nuclear power plant or facility

This changes the government energy policy substantially In the US there is no new

order for nuclear units in the near future [16] In Europe several countries including

Italy Austria Belgium Germany and Sweden stepped out from nuclear power even

before the Chernobyl disaster [11]

On the other hand compared with conventional electricity generation technologies

alternativerenewable power have the following advantages

1) Renewable energy resources are not only renewable but also abundant For

example according to the data of 2000 the US wind resources can produce more

electricity than the entire nation would use [112] The total solar energy from sun in a

day at the earth surface is about 1000 times more than the all fossil fuels consumption

13

[19]

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

1978

1989

1990

1991

1992

1993

1994

1995

1996

1997

1998

1999

2000

2001

2002

2003

2004

2005

2006

US $ per barrel

Figure 17 World crude oil prices1978-2006 [111]

(Note The price is based on the first week data of January in each year)

2) Fuel cell systems have high energy efficiency The efficiency of low temperature

proton exchange membrane (PEM) fuel cells is around 35-45 [113] High temperature

solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC) can have efficiency as high as 65 [114] The overall

efficiency of an SOFC based combined-cycle system can even reach 70 [114]

3) Renewable energy and fuel cell systems are environmentally friendly From these

systems there is zero or low emission (of pollutant gases) that cause acid rain urban

smog and other health problems and therefore there is no environmental cleanup or

waste disposal cost associated with them [19]

4) Different renewable energy sources can complement each other Though renewable

14

energy resources are not evenly distributed throughout the world every region has some

kinds of renewable energy resources At least sunlight reaches every corner in the world

And different energy resources (such as solar and wind energy) can complement each

other This is important to improve energy security for a nation like the US which is

currently dependent on the foreign energy sources

5) These renewablealternative power generation systems normally have modular

structure and can be installed close to load centers as distributed generation sources

(except large wind and PV farms) Therefore no high voltage transmission lines are

needed for them to supply electricity

In general due to the ever increasing energy consumption the rising public

awareness for environmental protection the exhausting density of fossil-fuel and the

intensive political and social concerns upon the nuclear power safety alternative (ie

renewable and fuel cell based) power generation systems have attracted increased

interest

Recent Progress in AlternativeRenewable Energy Technologies

In the following section the recent progress in wind power solar power fuel cells

and other renewable energy technologies will be reviewed An overview on their

applications as distributed generation will also be given

Wind Energy

Wind energy is one of worlds fastest-growing energy technologies Both the global

and US wind energy experienced a record year in 2005 According to the figures

15

released by the Global Wind Energy Council (GWEC) in 2005 there was a 434

increase in annual additions to the global market and a 5642 increase in the annual

addition to the US wind power generation capacity Last year was just one of the record

years In the past 11 years the global wind energy capacity has increased more than 17

times mdash from 35 GW in 1994 to almost 60 GW by the end of 2005 (Figure 18) In the

United States wind power capacity has increased more than 3 times in only 5 years (from

2554 MW in 2000 to 9149 MW by the end of 2005) also shown in Figure 18 The future

prospects of the global wind industry are also very promising even based on a

conservative projection that the total global wind power installed could reach 160 GW by

2012 A spread of new countries across the world will participate in the global wind

energy market in the next ten years [115]

The phenomenal worldwide growth of the wind industry during the past decade can

be attributed to supportive government policies and the fast development in innovative

cost-reducing technologies In the US the work conducted under the Wind Energy

Programrsquos Next Generation Wind Turbine (1994 ndash 2003) and WindPACT (1999 ndash 2004)

projects under the Department of Energy (DOE) resulted in innovative designs high

power ratings and increased efficiencies [116] All these technological advances have

led to dramatic reductions in cost of electricity (COE) mdash from $08kWh in the

early1980s to about $004kWh today for utility-scale (normally gt= 750kW) turbines

[116] [19] Although this drop in COE has been impressive more research work is still

needed to make wind power more competitive Development in aerodynamic efficiency

structural strength of wind turbine blades larger turbine blades and higher towers

variable speed generators and power controllers will help to reduce the COE further The

16

DOE goal is to reduce the COE produced by land-based utility-scale turbines located in

Class 4 wind resource areas (areas with 58 ms wind speed at a10-m height) to

$003kWh by 2012 [116]

0

10000

20000

30000

40000

50000

60000

1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005

World

US

MW

Figure 18 The world and the US wind power cumulative capacity [115] [116]

Photovoltaic Energy

Solar energy basically is the ultimate source for all kinds of energy resources on the

earth with only a few exceptions such as geothermal energy There are normally two

ways to generate electricity from sunlight through photovoltaic (PV) and solar thermal

systems In this section and this dissertation only photovoltaic energy and system will be

discussed

Just like the growth of wind energy PV energy is another fast growing renewable

energy technology Though the absolute size of global solar power generation capacity is

17

much smaller than wind power it has been increased even faster than wind power during

the past dozen years (from 1992-2004) [117] In terms of the market for PV power

applications in the IEA-PVPS2 (International Energy Agency ndash Photovoltaic Power

Systems Programme) countries the total installed PV capacity has been increased more

than 23 times ndash from the 110 MW in 1992 to 2596 MW in 2004 (Figure 19) [117]

Due to improvements in semiconductor materials device designs and product quality

and the expansion of production capacity capital costs for PV panels have been

decreased significantly from more than $50W in the early of 1980s [19] to about 35$ to

45$ per watt in 2004 [117] The cost of electricity produced by PV systems continues to

drop It has declined from $090kWh in 1980 to about 020$kWh today [19] In the

US the DOE goal is to reduce the COE of PV to $006kWh by 2020 [119] However

PV energy is still usually more expensive than energy from the local utility Currently the

initial investment of a PV system is also higher than that of an engine generator

Nevertheless there are many applications for which a PV system is the most

cost-effective long-term option especially in remote areas such as power for remote

telecommunications remote lighting and signs remote homes and recreational vehicles

2 There are 19 countries participating in the IEA PVPS program They are Australia Austria Canada Denmark France Germany Israel Italy Japan Korea Mexico the Netherlands Norway Portugal Spain Sweden Switzerland UK and USA Over 90 of the world total PV capacity is installed in the IEA-PVPS countries The top three PV countries Japan Germany and the US are all the members of the organization

18

0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

1992 1994 1996 1998 2000 2002 2004

MW

Figure 19 Cumulative Installed PV capacity in IEA PVPS countries [117]

Fuel Cells

Fuel cells (FCs) are static energy conversion devices that convert the chemical energy

of fuel directly into DC electrical energy Fuel cells have a wide variety of potential

applications including micro-power auxiliary power transportation power stationary

power for buildings and other distributed generation applications and central power

Since entering the new century fuel cell technologies have experienced exponential

growth shown in Figure 110 [120] The total number of fuel cell applications reached

14500 in 2005 [120] Government policies public opinion and technology advance in

fuel cells all contributed to this phenomenal growth

19

Figure 110 Cumulative installed FC units world-wide 1990-2005 [120]

Among different types of fuel cells polymer electrolyte membrane fuel cells

(PEMFC) and solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC) both show great potentials in transportation

and DG applications3 [113] [120] Compared with conventional power plants these

fuel cell DG systems have many advantages such as high efficiency zero or low emission

(of pollutant gases) and flexible modular structure Fuel cell DGs can be strategically

placed at any site in a power system (normally at the distribution level) for grid

reinforcement deferring or eliminating the need for system upgrades and improving

system integrity reliability and efficiency Moreover as a byproduct high-temperature

fuel cells also generate heat that makes them suitable for residential commercial or

industrial applications where electricity and heat are needed simultaneously [113]

[121]

3 Vehicle application is still the main market for PEMFC though it also has high potential for stationary power generation For SOFCs stationary power generation is their main application But they do have a foothold in the transport market as well with new planar design

20

The DOE recently updated its ldquoHydrogen Fuel Cells and Infrastructure Technologies

Programrsquos Multi-Year Research Development and Demonstration Planrdquo written in 2003

[122] In the Plan it lays out industry targets for key fuel cell performance indices such

as cost durability and power density In 1999 the Solid State Energy Conversion

Alliance (SECA) was founded for bringing together government industry and the

scientific community to promote the development of SOFC Through these years

collaborative work among the government industry national labs and universities great

advances in fuel cell technologies have been achieved in many aspects These address

FCs a bright future although extensive work is still needed to be done before they can

really play main roles in energy market Table 11 gives the current status and the DOE

goals for PEMFC [122] [123] Table 12 summaries the current development stage of

SOFC and SECA targets [124]-[126] It is noted from the two tables that the possibility

of reaching the ultimate DOE and SECA goals is high

Other Renewable Energy Sources

In addition to PV and wind energy there are many other renewable energy resources

such as biomass geothermal energy solar thermal energy and tidal power These energy

resources can all be utilized to generate electricity Among them biomass and geothermal

energy technologies have the leading generation capacity in the US [19]

21

TABLE 11 CURRENT STATUS AND THE DOE TARGETS A FOR

PEMFC STACK B IN STATIONARY APPLICATIONS

Characteristics Units Current Status

2010 Goal

Stack power density WL 1330 2000

Stack specific power Wkg 1260 2000

Stack efficiency 25 of rated power 65 65

Stack efficiency rated power 55 55

Precious metal loading gkW 13 03

Cost $kWe 75 30

Durability with cycling hours 2200 C 5000

Transient response (time for 10 to 90 of rated power)

sec 1 1

Cold startup time to 90 of rated power ndash20 ordmC ambient temperature

sec 100 C 30

Survivability ordmC -40 -40

A Based on the technical targets reported in [122] for 80-kWe (net) transportation

fuel cell stacks operating on direct Hydrogen

B Excludes hydrogen storage and fuel cell ancillaries thermal water air

management systems

C Based on the performance data reported by Ballard in 2005 [123]

Biomass can be burned directly co-fired with coal or gasified first and then used to

generate electricity It can also be used to generate bio-fuels such as ethanol Most of

todayrsquos US biomass power plants use direct-combustion method In 2004 the total

22

generation capacity of biomass reached 9709 MW about 1 of the total US electric

capacity [127]

TABLE 12 CURRENT STATUS AND THE SECA TARGETS FOR

3-10 KW SOFC MODULE IN STATIONARY APPLICATIONS

Phase I A Current Status II

III (By 2010)

Cost 800$kW 724$kW B $400kW

Efficiency 35-55 41 b 40-60 40-60

Steady State

Test Hours 1500 1500 1500 1500

Availability 80 90 B 85 95

Power Degradation per 500 hours

le2 13 C le1 le01

Transient Test

Cycles 10 na 50 100

Power Degradation after Cycle Test

le1 na le05 le01

Power Density 03Wcm2 0575Wcm2 D 06Wcm2 06Wcm2

Operating Temperature

800 ordmC 700-750 ordmC C 700 ordmC 700 ordmC

Evaluate the potential to achieve $400kW [124]

A The goals of Phase I have been achieved GE is the first of six SECA industry

teams to complete phase I of the program [125]

B Based on the data reported by GE

C Based on the data reported by FuelCell Energy [126]

D Based on the data reported by Delphi [125]

23

Geothermal energy can be converted into electricity by three technologies dry steam

flush and binary cycle The most common type of geothermal plants is flush power plant

while the world largest geothermal plant is of the dry steam type [128] The dry stream

geothermal power plant at The Geysers in California is the largest geothermal power

plant in the world with a capacity of 2000 MW [19] However due to the limited

amount of available geothermal heat resources one will not expect to see any

considerable growth in this area Actually the geothermal generation capacity in the US

declined from 2793MW in 2000 to 2133 MW in 2004 [127] Nevertheless it can be an

important energy source in remote areas where geothermal resources are available and

abundant

Distributed Generation Applications

The ever-increasing need for electrical power generation steady progress in the

power deregulation and utility restructuring and tight constraints over the construction of

new transmission lines for long distance power transmission have created increased

interest in distributed power generation DG sources are normally placed close to

consumption centers and are added mostly at the distribution level They are relatively

small in size (relative to the power capacity of the system in which they are placed and

normally less than 10 MW) and modular in structure These DG devices can be

strategically placed in power systems for grid reinforcement reducing power losses and

on-peak operating costs improving voltage profiles and load factors deferring or

eliminating the need for system upgrades and improving system integrity reliability and

efficiency [133]

24

The technology advances in renewable energy sources fuel cells and small generation

techniques provide a diverse portfolio for DG applications Table 13 shows the candidate

technologies for DG systems The DOE proposed a strategic plan for distributed energy

sources in 2000 [129] The energy market with DG sources in 2020 was envisioned in

the plan as ldquoThe United States will have the cleanest and most efficient and reliable

energy system in the world by maximizing the use of affordable distributed energy

resourcesrdquo [129] To achieve this ultimate goal the DOE also set sub-goals for DG

development The long-term goal by 2020 is ldquoto make the nationrsquos energy generation and

delivery system the cleanest and most efficient reliable and affordable in the world by

maximizing the use of cost efficient distributed energy resourcesrdquo The mid-term by 2010

is to reduce costs to increase the efficiency and reliability of distributed generation

technologies and to add 20 of new electric capacity By the end of 1999 about 22GW

distributed energy systems with 18 GW backup units were installed across the US [131]

According to EIA US generation capacity history and forecast data 198 GW of new

capacity is needed during the period between 2000 and 2010 [14] Based on the

mid-term goal 20 (396 GW) of the new addition should come from DG systems This

means about 44 annual growth rate in DG capacity

25

TABLE 13 TECHNOLOGIES FOR DISTRIBUTED GENERATION SYSTEMS [130]

Technology Size Fuel Electrical Efficiency

( LHV)

Combustion Turbine Combined Cycle

50-500 MW Natural gas liquid

fuels 50-60

Industrial Combustion Turbine

1-50 MW Natural gas liquid

fuels 25-40

Internal Combustion Turbine(Reciprocating

Engine)

1kW ndash 10 MW

Natural gas diesel oil propane gasoline etc

25-38

Mircroturbine 27-400 kW Landfill gas

propane natural gas and other fuels

22-30

Stirling Engine 11-50kW Any 18-25

Fuel Cells 1kW Natural gas H2

other H2-rich fuels 35-60

Photovoltaic 1W ndash 10MW Renewable 5-15 A

Wind Turbine 02kW ndash 5MW

Renewable lt 40

Biomass B Several kW ndash 20 MW

Renewable ~ 20

A PV cell energy conversion efficiency

B Based on the data reported in [19]

26

Need for the Research

The ever increasing energy consumption rapid progress in wind PV and fuel cell

power generation technologies and the rising public awareness for environmental

protection have turned alternative energy and distributed generation as promising

research areas Due to natural intermittent properties of wind and solar irradiation

stand-alone windPV renewable energy systems normally require energy storage devices

or some other generation sources to form a hybrid system Because some of renewable

energy sources can complement each other (section 13) multi-source alternative energy

systems (with proper control) have great potential to provide higher quality and more

reliable power to customers than a system based on a single resource However the

issues on optimal system configuration proper power electronic interfaces and power

management among different energy sources are not resolved yet Therefore more

research work is needed on new alternative energy systems and their corresponding

control strategies

Fuel cells are good energy sources to provide reliable power at steady state but they

cannot respond to electrical load transients as fast as desired This problem is mainly due

to their slow internal electrochemical and thermodynamic responses [132] The transient

properties of fuel cells need to be studied and analyzed under different situations such as

electrical faults on the fuel cell terminals motor starting and electric vehicle starting and

acceleration Therefore dynamic fuel cell models are needed to study those transient

phenomena and to develop controllers to solve or mitigate the problem

27

Fuel cells normally work along with power electronic devices One problem is that

there is not adequate information exchange between fuel cell manufacturers and power

electronic interface designers Without adequate knowledge about the area of each other

the fuel cell manufacturers normally model the power electronic interface as an

equivalent impedance while the power electronic circuit designers take the fuel cell as a

constant voltage source with some series resistance These inaccurate approaches may

cause undesired results when fuel cells and their power electronic interfaces are

connected together It is important and necessary to get a better understanding of the

impact of power electronic interface on fuel cellrsquos performance and of the fuel cellrsquos

impact on power electronic interfacing circuits Dynamic model development for fuel

cells using electrical circuits can be a solution so that the researchers in both areas can

understand each other Moreover it will provide a more efficient way to integrate the fuel

cells and power electronic devices together

Distributed generation devices can pose both positive and negative impacts on the

existing power systems [133] These new issues have led DG operation to be an

important research area Research on optimal placement (including size) of DGs can help

obtain maximum potential benefits from DGs

28

Scope of the Study

Although there are many types of alternativerenewable resources the alternative

sources in this dissertation are confined to wind PV and fuel cells for the research on the

proposed hybrid alternative energy systems The main focus is given to modeling

validation and control for fuel cells and fuel cell based stand-alone and grid-connected

systems Two types of fuel cells will be modeled and used in the dissertation PEMFC

and SOFC The ultimate goal of this dissertation is to model a multi-source alternative

DG system consisting of wind turbine(s) PV arrays fuel cells and electrolyzers and to

manage the power flows among the different energy resources in the system The optimal

placement of DG sources in power systems is also investigated on system operation level

Organization of the Dissertation

After the introduction conducted and the reason for the research explained in this

chapter Chapter 2 reviews the fundamentals of electrochemistry thermodynamics power

electronics and the alternative energy technologies including wind PV and fuel cells

Chapter 3 introduces hybrid energy systems gives possible ways of system integration

and presents a proposed hybrid windPVFC energy system Chapter 4 describes the

models for the components in the proposed system discussed in Chapter 3 Power

electronic interfacing circuits with appropriate controllers are discussed in Chapter 4 as

well

29

Chapters 5 and 6 focus on control for fuel cell based systems Control for

grid-connected fuel cell systems is discussed in Chapter 5 In Chapter 6 load mitigation

control for stand-alone fuel cell systems is investigated

The overall control scheme development for the proposed multi-source alternative

system is given in Chapter 7 Simulation results under different scenarios are given and

discussed in the chapter The optimal placement of DG sources in power systems (both

radial feeders and networked systems) is investigated in Chapter 8

30

REFERENCES

[11] International Energy Outlook 2005 Energy Information Administration (EIA) httpwwweiadoegoviea

[12] International Energy Annual 2003 EIA httpwwweiadoegoviea

[13] System for the Analysis of Global Energy Markets 2005 EIA httpwwweiadoegoviea

[14] Annual Energy Outlook 2006 (Early Release) EIA httpwwweiadoegov

[15] World Oil Market International Energy outlook - International Petroleum (Oil) Reserves and Resources EIA httpwwweiadoegoviea

[16] US Nuclear Generation of Electricity EIA httpwwweiadoegoviea

[17] Online http www3ggovcn

[18] Million Relocates of Unprecedented Scale httpwww3ggovcnshuniuymgc200305170065htm

[19] SR Bull ldquoRenewable Energy Today and Tomorrowrdquo Proceedings of IEEE Vol 89 No 8 pp1216-1221 August 2001

[110] FA Farret and MG Simotildees Integration of Alternative Sources of Energy John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2006

[111] World Crude Oil Prices EIA httptontoeiadoegovdnavpetpet_pri_wco_k_whtm

[112] M R Patel Wind and Solar Power Systems CRC Press LLC 1999

[113] Fuel Cell Handbook (Sixth Edition) EGampG Services Inc Science Applications International Corporation DOE Office of Fossil Energy National Energy Technology Lab Nov 2002

[114] O Yamamoto ldquoSolid oxide fuel cells fundamental aspects and prospectsrdquo Electrochimica Acta Vol 45 No (15-16) pp 2423-2435 2000

[115] Global Power Source Global Wind Energy Council httpwwwgwecnet

[116] Wind Power Today ndash Federal Wind Program Highlights NREL DOEGO-102005-2115 April 2005

31

[117] Trends in photovoltaic applications Survey report of selected IEA countries between 1992 and 2004 International Energy Agency Photovoltaics Power Systems Programme (IEA PVPS) September 2005

[118] Online httpwwwnrelgovanalysisnewsletters2006_januaryhtml

[119] National Status Report 2004 ndashUSA IEA-PVPS httpwwwoja-servicesnliea-pvpsnsr04usa2htm

[120] Fuel Cell Today 2005 Worldwide Survey httpwwwfuelcelltodaycom

[121] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained 2nd Edition John Wiley amp Sons Ltd 2003

[122] The Hydrogen Fuel Cells amp Infrastructure Technologies Program Multi-Year Research Development and Demonstration Plan February 2005 Version

[123] Technology Road Map ndashBallard Power Systems Inc httpwwwballardcombe_informedfuel_cell_technologyroadmap

[124] SECA Program Plan DOE Office of Fossil Energy The DOE National Energy Technology Laboratory (NETL) and the Pacific Northwest National Laboratory Jan 2002

[125] Significant Milestone Achieved in SECA Fuel Cell Development Program httpwwwnetldoegovpublicationsTechNewstn_ge_secahtml Jan 2006

[126] Thermally Integrated High Power Density SOFC Generator FuelCell Energy Inc FY 2004 Progress Report

[127] Renewables and Alternate Fuels Energy Information Administration (EIA) httpwwweiadoegovfuelrenewablehtml

[128] Online httpwwweereenergygovgeothermalpowerplantshtmlflashsteam

[129] Strategic Plan for Distributed Energy Resources mdash Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy US Department of Energy September 2000

[130] DER Technologies Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) October 2002

[131] Establishing a Goal for Distributed Energy Resources Distributed Energy Resources The Power to Choose on November 28 2001 by Paul Lemar httpwwwdistributed-generationcomLibrarypaul_lemarpdf

[132] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion vol 20 no 2 pp442-451 June 2005

32

[133] C Wang and MH Nehrir ldquoAnalytical Approaches for Optimal Placement of Distributed Generation Sources in Power Systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Systems vol 19 no 4 pp 2068-2076 Nov 2004

33

CHAPTER 2

FUNDAMENTALS OF ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SYSTEMS

This chapter reviews the fundamental concepts and principles of energy systems and

energy conversion The overview of the fundamentals of electrochemistry

thermodynamics and alternative energy systems is a good introduction for understanding

and modeling of the proposed multi-source alternative energy system discussed in the

following chapters

Energy Forms

Definition of Energy

Energy is defined as the amount of work a physical system is capable of doing

Energy is a fundamental quantity that every physical system possesses In a broad sense

energy can neither be created nor consumed or destroyed However it may be converted

or transferred from one form to other Generally speaking there are two fundamental

types of energy transitional energy and stored energy [21] Transitional energy is energy

in motion also called kinetic energy such as mechanical kinetic energy Stored energy is

energy that exists as mass position in a force field (such as gravity and electromagnetic

fields) etc which is also called potential energy More specifically energy can exist in

the following five basic forms

(1) Mechanical energy

(2) Chemical energy

(3) Electrical and electromagnetic energy

34

(4) Thermal energy

(5) Nuclear energy

Mechanical Energy

Mechanical energy is the type of energy associated with moving objects or objects

that have potential to move themselves or others It can be defined as work used to raise a

weight [21] The mechanical kinetic energy of a translating object (Emt) with a mass m at

speed v is

2

2

1mvEmt = (21)

For a rotating body with moment of inertia (rotational inertia) I at angular speed ω its

kinetic mechanical energy (Emr) is defined as

2

2

1ωIEmr = (22)

Mechanical potential energy is the energy that a given system possesses as a result of

its status in a mechanical force field [21] For example in a gravity field g the potential

mechanical energy of a body with mass m at height h is given as

mghEmpg = (23)

As another example the potential energy of an elastic spring with the spring constant

k at the displacement x is

2

2

1kxEmps = (24)

35

Chemical Energy

Chemical energy is the energy held in the chemical bonds between atoms and

molecules [22] Every bond has a certain amount of energy Chemical energy exists as a

stored energy form which can be converted to other energy forms through reactions First

energy is required to break the bonds - called endothermic Then energy will be released

(called exothermic) when these broken bonds combine together to create more stable

molecules If the total energy released is more than the energy taken in then the whole

reaction is called exothermic Otherwise the reaction is called endothermic The burning

of fossil fuels (combustion) is one of the most important exothermic reactions for

producing energy Photosynthesis is a good example for endothermic reaction since

plants use energy from sun to make the reaction happen

Electrical and Electromagnetic Energy

Electrical and electromagnetic energy is the energy associated with electrical

magnetic andor electromagnetic fields It is normally expressed in terms of electrical

andor electromagnetic parameters For example the electro-static energy stored in a

capacitor is

C

qEC

2

2

1= (25)

where C is the capacitance of the capacitor and q is the total charge stored

The magnetic energy stored in an inductor with inductance L at current i is

2

2

1LiEm = (26)

36

Another expression used to represent magnetic energy is [23]

int=V

m dVHE 2

2

1micro (27)

where micro is the material permeability H is the magnetic field intensity and V is the object

volume under consideration This expression is especially useful in calculating hysteresis

losses inside power transformers

Radiation energy is one of the forms of electromagnetic energy The radiation energy

only exists in transitional form and it is given by [21]

fhER sdot= (28)

where h is the Planckrsquos constant (6626times10-34 Js) and f is the frequency of the radiation

Thermal Energy

From a macroscopic observation thermal energy or heat can be defined as energy

transferred between two systems due to temperature difference [24] From a micro-level

point of view thermal energy is associated with atomic and molecular vibration [21] All

other forms of energy can be converted into thermal energy while the opposite conversion

is limited by the second law of thermodynamics (which will be explained briefly in

section 22) Based on this fact thermal energy can be considered the most basic form of

energy [21]

37

Nuclear Energy

Nuclear energy is a topic irrelevant to this dissertation But for the completion of the

discussion on energy forms a very brief overview on nuclear energy is also included here

Similar to chemical energy nuclear energy is also a type of stored energy The energy

will be released as a result of nuclear reaction (normally fission reaction) to produce a

more stable configuration Take the uranium-235 nucleus as an example When it

captures a neutron it will split into two lighter atoms and throws off two or three new

neutrons The new atoms then emit gamma radiation as they settle into their new more

stable states An incredible amount of energy is released in the form of heat and gamma

radiation during the above process The mass of fission products and the neutrons

together is less than the original U-235 atom mass The mass defect is governed by the

famous Einsteinrsquos mass-energy equation [21]

E = mc2 (29)

where m is the material mass and c is the speed of light in vacuum (asymp2998times108 ms)

Fundamentals of Thermodynamics

Thermodynamic analysis of energy conversion processes is important for modeling

and control of hybrid energy systems Therefore in this section a brief overview of the

fundamental concepts and principles of thermodynamics is given

The First Law of Thermodynamics

According to the first law of thermodynamics the energy of a system is conserved

Energy here is in the form of either of heat or work This law describes that energy can

38

neither be created or destroyed but it can be converted from one type to another The

change in the system energy dE is contributed by the heat entering (dQ) the system and

the work done by the system (dW) to the outside [25] [26]

dWdQdE minus= (210)

Note that the work in the above equation is the work leaving the system The system

here is an idealized object which is used to limit our study scope A system can be

isolated from ldquoeverything elserdquo in the sense that changes in everything else need not

affect its state [25] The external ldquoeverything elserdquo is considered to be the environment

of the system Of particular interest is one type of system called a simple system that is

not affected by capillarity distortion of solid phase external force fields (electromagnetic

and gravitational) or internal adiabatic walls [25] For a simple system the total system

energy is equal to the total system internal energy denoted by symbol U [25] In this

dissertation we only consider simple systems

E = U (211)

For a control volume or open system (any prescribed and identifiable volume in

space) usually there is expansion when heat is absorbed by the system at constant

pressure Part of the heat goes into internal energy and causes temperature to rise And the

rest of the heat is used to expand against the pressure P A property of the system called

enthalpy (H) is used to represent the system state under certain condition

H = U +PV (212)

where V is the system volume Enthalpy is a state parameter which is independent of

which way the system reaches that condition Equation (211) now can be represented as

39

dWdQdH minus= (213)

The Heat Engine and Carnot Cycle

The heat engine is designed to convert heat to work Figure 21 shows the block

diagram of an idealized heat engine If we want the heat engine to work continuously

then the system (the working substance in the figure) is subjected to a cyclic process A

cyclic process is one in which the system returns to its original state after a cycle For a

practical heat engine there are many processes undergoing And it is also complicated

and difficult to analyze all of them In 1842 a French scientist named Sadi Carnot

presented a way to analyze cyclic thermal processes and discovered the maximum

possible heat efficiency of a heat engine

Figure 21 Block diagram of an ideal heat engine

The Carnot cycle is shown in Figure 22 The cycle consists of two isothermal

processes and two adiabatic processes Figure 22 (a) shows the P-V diagram of the

40

Carnot cycle [26] The heat Q1 enters the system at T1 and Q2 leaves system at T2 Since

this process is cyclic the system energy remains the same after any cycle According to

the First Law of Thermodynamics (Equation 210) it can be shown that

S∆

(a) (b)

Figure 22 Carnot cycle (a) P-V (pressure-volume) diagram (b) T-S (temperature-entropy) diagram

21 QQW minus= (214)

W is the work done by the system to the outside which can also be represented by the

area abcd in Figure 22 (a) For the Carnot cycle it has been proved that

2

2

1

1

T

Q

T

Q= (215)

The efficiency of the system then is

1

2

1

21

1

1T

T

Q

QQ

Q

Wc minus=

minus==η (216)

It is clear from (216) that in order to get a higher efficiency the temperature

difference should be larger

Another contribution from Carnot is that QT can be a state property of the system by

41

showing the equivalence of Q1T1 and Q2T2 [see (215)] Based on Carnotrsquos idea

Clausius developed the concept of entropy and presented the Second Law of

Thermodynamics

The Second Law of Thermodynamics

The concept is introduced to indicate to what extent of disorder a system is at If the

system is undergoing an infinitesimal reversible process with dQ heat entering the system

at temperature T then the infinitesimal change in its entropy is defined as [25]-[28]

revT

dQdS = (217)

A reversible process is a process that can be reversed without leaving any traces to its

environment If a cyclic process only consists of reversible processes then there is no

entropy change (∆S = 0) after a cycle On the other hand if the cycle contains an

irreversible process then a change of entropy will be generated Entropy is an important

system property It is also very useful in describing a thermodynamic process Figure 22

(b) shows the T-S diagram of a Carnot Cycle The area abcd also represents the work

done to the system environment

The Second Law of Thermodynamics is described by the Clausius inequality [25]

[28] For any cyclic process we have

int le 0T

dQ (218)

The equality sign only applies to a reversible cyclic process The above inequality can

be expressed in an infinitesimal form as

42

T

dQdS ge (219)

The equality sign applies to a reversible cyclic process and the inequality sign applies

to an irreversible process That is to say for any irreversible process it occurs in a

direction to which the change of entropy is greater than dQT This means that heat

cannot be transferred from a low temperature to a higher temperature without a need of

work from outside The Second Law also reveals that no real heat engine efficiency can

reach 100 due to the increase of entropy For an isolated system the change of entropy

will always be greater than or equal to zero

Heat Transfer

In this section the equations governing different ways of heat transfer are reviewed

Heat Transfer by Conduction For isotropic solids (whose properties and

constitution in the neighborhood of any two points are the same at any direction) heat

transfer by conduction is governed by Fourier heat-conduction equation [24]

d

TTkAQcond

12 minus= (220)

where Qcond is the heat transferred A is the face area of the element normal to the heat

flow k is the effective thermal conductivity d is the distance between the two points of

interest and (T2-T1) is the temperature difference

Heat Transfer by Convection Heat transfer by convection is the heat exchange

between a flowing fluid (natural or forced) and a solid surface The convective heat

transfer is given as [24]

43

)( sfconv TThAQ minus= (221)

where h is the effective convection heat transfer coefficient A is the solid area contacting

the fluid Tf is the bulk temperature of the fluid and Ts is the temperature of the solid This

equation is also called Newtonrsquos law of cooling

Heat Transfer by Radiation Based on (28) the radiation heat exchange rate

between two objects at different temperatures is [24]

)( 4

2

4

1 TTAQrad minus= εσamp (222)

where Qrad is the radiation heat (J) ε is the effective emissivity of the system σ is

Stefan-Boltzmann Constant (56703times10-8 Wmiddotm-2middotK-4)

Fundamentals of Electrochemical Processes

The Gibbs Free Energy

The Gibbs Free Energy also called the Gibbs Energy or ldquofree enthalpyrdquo is defined as

[25] [28]

G = H-TS = U + PV -TS (223)

Chemical reactions proceed towards the direction that minimizes the Gibbs Energy

Differentiating the above equation we can obtain

)()( SdTTdSVdPPdVdUSdTTdSdHdG +minus++=+minus= (224)

dG is negative as a chemical reaction approaches its equilibrium point and it will be

zero at the equilibrium point According to the First Law of Thermodynamics (210) for

a simple system the above equation can be rewritten as

)()( SdTTdSVdPPdVdWdQSdTTdSdHdG +minus++minus=+minus= (225)

44

If the system is restricted to performing only expansion-type of work (dW = PdV) and

the process is reversible (dQ = TdS) then four terms on the right side of (225) will be

cancelled out resulting in

SdTVdPdG minus= (226)

At a given temperature T Gibbs energy under any pressure can be calculated based

on the above equation for that given temperature

)ln()()(0

0

P

PnRTTGTG += (227)

where )(0 TG is the standard (P0 = 1 atm) Gibbs energy at temperature T

For an electrochemical reaction the maximum work (electricity) is determined by the

change in the Gibbs Energy as the reactants change to products It can be shown that the

maximum work is equal to the change in the Gibbs energy [28]

GWe ∆minus= (228)

Energy Balance in Chemical Reactions

In a chemical reaction the change in enthalpy due to the reaction is [28]

sumsum minus=minus=∆Rj

RjRj

Pi

PiPiRP HNHNHHH (229)

where HP is the total enthalpy of the products and HR is the total enthalpy of the reactants

NPi is the amount of moles of the ith species in the products and NRj is the amount of

moles of the jth species in the reactants Accordingly HPi (HRj) is the molar enthalpy of

the corresponding species which can be represented as

PifPi HHHH )( 00 minus+= (230)

45

where 0

fH is the standard molar enthalpy of formation (Jmol) and (H-H0) is the sensible

enthalpy due to the temperature difference

The change of entropy due to the reaction is [28]

sumsum minus=minus=∆Rj

RjRj

Pi

PiPiRP SNSNSSS (231)

where SP is the total entropy of the products and SR is the total entropy of the reactants

SPi (SRj) is the molar entropy of the corresponding species

The change of the Gibbs free energy due to the reaction then can be obtained from

(223) as

STHGGG RP ∆minus∆=∆minus∆=∆ (232)

Two example reactions [(233) and (234)] are given to show how to calculate the

change of Gibbs energy in a reaction The enthalpy and entropy values for water

hydrogen and oxygen are given in Table 21 The reactions are assumed to happen under

standard conditions (1 atm and 25 ˚C)

)(2

1222 gOHOH =+ (233)

)(2

1222 lOHOH =+ (234)

where subscript ldquogrdquo represents that the reaction product is in gas form and subscript

ldquolrdquo is used to indicate that the reaction product is in liquid form

46

TABLE 21 STANDARD THERMODYNAMIC PROPERTIES

(ENTHALPY ENTROPY AND GIBBS ENERGY) [29]

Name Hf (kJmol) S (JmolK)

H2O(g) -2418 1887

H2O(l) -2858 699

H2 0 1306

O2 0 205

For the reaction given in (233) we have

8241)008241( minus=minusminusminus=minus=∆ RP HHH (kJmol)

444)2055061307188( minus=timesminusminus=minus=∆ RP SSS (JmolK)

Therefore the change in the Gibbs energy of the reaction given in (233) is

=timesminustimesminusminus=∆minus∆=∆ minus )10444(2988241 3STHG -22857 kJmol

For the reaction given in (234) we have

8285)008285( minus=minusminusminus=minus=∆ RP HHH (kJmol)

2163)205506130969( minus=timesminusminus=minus=∆ RP SSS (JmolK)

Therefore the change in the Gibbs energy of the reaction given in (234) is

=timesminustimesminusminus=∆minus∆=∆ minus )102163(2988285 3STHG -23716 kJmol

From the above examples we can see that more work can be done if the product

(H2O) is in liquid form

47

The Nernst Equation

Consider an electrochemical reaction under constant temperature and pressure that the

reactants X and Y form products M and N given by (235)

dNcMbYaX +hArr+ (235)

where a b c and d are stoichiometric coefficients

According to (232) the change of the Gibbs energy of the reaction is [28]

YXNMRP bGaGdGcGGGG minusminus+=minus=∆

In terms of the change of the standard Gibbs energy G∆ can also be expressed as

[see (227)]

+∆=∆

b

Y

a

X

d

N

c

M

PP

PPRTGG ln0 (236)

where 00000

YXNM bGaGdGcGG minusminus+=∆

In an electrochemical reaction the work can be considered as the electrical energy

delivered by the reaction The electrochemical work is

FEnW ee = (237)

where ne is number of participating electrons F is Faraday constant (96487 Cmol) and E

is the voltage difference across the electrodes

According to (228) the change in Gibbs energy is the negative value of the work

done by the reaction

FEnWG ee minus=minus=∆ (238)

Under standard condition the above equation turns out to be

48

000 FEnWG ee minus=minus=∆ (239)

where E0 is the standard reference potential

From (238) we can calculate the electrode voltage E as

minus

∆minus=

∆minus=

b

Y

a

X

d

N

C

M

eee PP

PP

Fn

RT

Fn

G

Fn

GE ln

0

(240)

Writing the above in terms of standard reference potential E0 we get the well-known

electrochemical formula Nernst equation [28] [210]

+=

minus=

d

N

C

M

b

Y

a

X

e

b

Y

a

X

d

N

C

M

e PP

PP

Fn

RTE

PP

PP

Fn

RTEE lnln 00

(241)

For a fuel cell with an overall reaction as given by (233) then the voltage across the

fuel cell electrodes (or the internal potential of the fuel cell) is

+=

OH

OH

P

PP

F

RTEE

2

50

220 ln2

(242)

If the product (H2O) is in liquid form given by (234) then the fuel cell internal

potential is

( )5022

0 ln2

OH PPF

RTEE += (243)

Fundamentals of Alternative Energy Systems

In this section the fundamentals of wind energy generation system PV cells fuel

cells and electrolyzers are reviewed

49

Wind Energy System

Energy in Wind Wind energy systems harness the kinetic energy of wind and

convert it into electrical energy or use it to do other work such as pump water grind

grains etc The kinetic energy of air of mass m moving at speed v can be expressed as

[211]

2

2

1mvEk = (244)

During a time period t the mass (m) of air passing through a given area A at speed v

is

Avtm ρ= (245)

where ρ is the density of air (kgm3)

Based on the above two equations the wind power is

3

2

1AvP ρ= (246)

The specific power or power density of a wind site is given as

3

2

1v

A

PPden ρ== (247)

It is noted that the specific power of a wind site is proportional to the cube of the

wind speed

Power Extracted from Wind The actual power extracted by the rotor blades from

wind is the difference between the upstream and the down stream wind powers

)(2

1 2

0

2 vvkP m minus= (248)

50

where v is the upstream wind velocity at the entrance of the rotor blades v0 is the

downstream wind velocity at the exit of the rotor blades km is the mass flow rate which

can be expressed as

2

0vvAkm

+= ρ (249)

where A is the area swept by the rotor blades

From (248) and (249) the mechanical power extracted by the rotor is given by

)(22

1 2

0

20 vvvv

AP minus

+= ρ (250)

Let

minusminus

+=

2

00 1112

1

v

v

v

vC p and rearrange the terms in (250) we have

pCAvP 3

2

1ρ= (251)

Cp is called the power coefficient of the rotor or the rotor efficiency It is the fraction

of the upstream wind power which is captured by the rotor blades and has a theoretical

maximum value of 059 shown in Figure 23 In practical designs maximum achievable

Cp is between 04 and 05 for high-speed two-blade turbines and between 02 and 04 for

low-speed turbines with more blades [211]

It is noted from (251) that the output power of a turbine is determined by the

effective area of the rotor blades (A) wind speed (v) and wind flow conditions at the

rotor (Cp) Thus the output power of the turbine can be varied by changing the effective

area andor by changing the flow conditions at the rotor system Control of these

quantities forms the basis of control of wind energy systems

51

0 02 04 06 08 10

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

v0 v

Cp

Figure 23 Theoretical rotor efficiency vs v0v ratio

Tip Speed Ratio The tip speed ratio λ (TSR) defined as the ratio of the linear speed

at the tip of the blade to the free stream wind speed is given as follows [211]

v

Rωλ = (252)

where R is the rotor blade radius and ω is the rotor angular speed

TSR is related to the wind turbine operating point for extracting maximum power

The maximum rotor efficiency Cp is achieved at a particular TSR which is specific to the

aerodynamic design of a given wind turbine For variable TSR turbines the rotor speed

will change as wind speed changes to keep TSR at some optimum level Variable TSR

turbines can produce more power than fixed TSR turbines [212]

52

Wind Energy Conversion System The block diagram of a typical wind energy

conversion system is shown in Figure 24

Figure 24 Block diagram of a typical wind energy conversion system

The principle components of a modern wind turbine are the tower the yaw the rotor

and the nacelle which accommodates the gear box and the generator The tower holds the

53

main part of the wind turbine and keeps the rotating blades at a height to capture

sufficient wind power The yaw mechanism is used to turn the wind turbine rotor blades

against the wind Wind turbine captures the windrsquos kinetic energy in the rotor consisting

of two or more blades The gearbox transforms the slower rotational speeds of the wind

turbine to higher rotational speeds on the electrical generator side Electrical generator

will generate electricity when its shaft is driven by the wind turbine whose output is

maintained as per specifications by employing suitable control and supervising

techniques In addition to monitoring the output these control systems also include

protection equipment to protect the overall system [211]

Two distinctly different design configurations are available for a wind turbine the

horizontal axis configuration and the vertical axis configuration The vertical axis

machine has the shape like an egg beater (also called the Darrieus rotor after its inventor)

However most modern turbines use horizontal axis design [211]

Constant Speed and Variable Speed Wind Energy Conversion Systems (WECS)

Generally there are two types of wind energy conversion systems constant speed and

variable speed systems shown in Figure 25 [212] In Figure 25 (a) the generator

normally is a squirrel cage induction generator which is connected to a utility grid or load

directly Since the generator is directly coupled the wind turbine rotates at a constant

speed governed by the frequency of the utility grid (50 or 60 Hz) and the number of poles

of the generator The other two wind power generation systems shown in Figure 25 (b)

and (c) are variable speed systems In Figure 25 (b) the generator is a doubly-fed

induction generator (wound rotor) The rotor of the generator is fed by a back-to-back

54

converter voltage source converter The stator of the generator is directly connected to

load or grid Through proper control on the converter for the rotor the mechanical speed

of the rotor can be variable while the frequency of output AC from the stator can be kept

constant Figure 25 (c) shows a variable speed system which is completely decoupled

from load or grid through a power electronic interfacing circuit The generator can either

be a synchronous generator (with excitation winding or permanent magnet) or an

induction generator In this dissertation a variable speed WECS similar to the one shown

in Figure 25 (c) is used for the hybrid energy system study The generator used in the

study is a self-excited induction generator

Wind Turbine Output Power vs Wind Speed A typical power vs wind speed curve

is shown in Figure 26 [212] [215] When the wind speed is less than the cut-in speed

(normally 3-5 ms) [212] there is no power output Between the cut-in speed and the

rated or nominal wind speed (normally 11-16 ms) [212] the wind turbine output power

is directly related to the cubic of wind speed as given in (251) When the wind speed is

over the nominal value the output power needs to be limited to a certain value so that the

generator and the corresponding power electronic devices (if any) will not be damaged

In other words when the wind speed is greater than the rated value the power coefficient

Cp needs to be reduced [see (251)] When the wind speed is higher than the cut-out speed

(normally 17-30 ms) [212] the system will be taken out of operation for protection of

its components

55

Figure 25 Constant and variable speed wind energy conversion systems [212]

56

Figure 26 Typical curves for a constant speed stall controlled (dotted) and variable speed pitch controlled (solid) wind turbine [212] [215]

There are several ways to control the wind turbine output power The two common

ways to achieve this goal are stall control and pitch control [211]-[215]

For a stall controlled wind turbine there is no active control applied to it The output

power is regulated through a specifically designed rotor blades The design ensures that

when the wind speed is too high it creates turbulences on the side of the rotor blades The

turbulences will decrease the aerodynamic efficiency of the wind turbine as a result

Pitch control is an active method which is used to reduce the aerodynamic efficiency

by changing pitch angle (turning the rotor blades out of wind) of the rotor blades It

should be noted that the pitch angle can change at a finite rate which may be quite low

due to the size of the rotor blades The maximum rate of change of the pitch angle is in

the order of 3 to 10 degreessecond [215]

It is noted from Figure 26 that a variable speed system normally has lower cut-in

speed The rated speed is also normally lower than a constant speed system For wind

57

speeds between the cut-in and the nominal speed there will be 20-30 increase in the

energy capture with variable speed compared to the fixed-speed operation[211]-[215]

shown in Figure 26 For a pitch controlled wind system the power for wind speeds over

the nominal value can be held constant precisely On the other hand for a stall controlled

constant speed system the output power will reach its peak value somewhat higher than

its rated value and then decreases as wind speed grows

Photovoltaic Energy System

Terminology

Solar radiation Also called insolation consists of the radiation that comes directly

from the sun (beam radiation) as well as the radiation that comes indirectly (diffusion and

albedo radiation) [216]

Solar constant The solar radiation that falls on a unit area above the atmosphere at a

vertical angle is called solar constant It has a value of 1367 Wmsup2 [216]

Air mass A convenient lumped parameter used for the amount of sunlight absorbed in

the atmosphere The amount of beam solar radiation absorbed in the atmosphere in a

direct vertical path to sea level is designated as one air mass (AM1) In general air mass

is proportional to the secant of the zenith angle [216]

Irradiance A measure of power density of sunlight it has a unit of Wm2

Irradiation A measure of energy density (Jm2) it is the integral of irradiance over

time

Photovoltaic effect is a basic physical process through which solar energy is

converted into electrical energy directly The physics of a PV cell or solar cell is similar

58

to the classical p-n junction diode shown in Figure 27 [211] At night a PV cell can

basically be considered as a diode When the cell is illuminated the energy of photons is

transferred to the semiconductor material resulting in the creation of electron-hole pairs

The electric field created by the p-n junction causes the photon-generated electron-hole

pairs to separate The electrons are accelerated to n-region (N-type material) and the

holes are dragged into p-region (P-type material) shown in Figure 27 The electrons

from n-region flow through the external circuit and provide the electrical power to the

load at the same time

Figure 27 Schematic block diagram of a PV cell

The PV cell shown in Figure 27 is the basic component of a PV energy system Since

a typical PV cell produces less than 2 W at approximately 05 V DC it is necessary to

connect PV cells in series-parallel configurations to produce desired power and voltage

ratings Figure 28 shows how single PV cells are grouped to form modules and how

modules are connected to build arrays There is no fixed definition on the size of a

module and neither for an array A module may have a power output from a few watts to

59

hundreds of watts And the power rating of an array can vary from hundreds of watts to

megawatts [211] [216]

Figure 28 PV Cell module and array

Fuel Cells

Fuel cells (FCs) are static energy conversion devices that convert the chemical energy

of fuel directly into DC electrical energy [217]-[218] The basic physical structure of a

fuel cell consists of two porous electrodes (anode and cathode) and an electrolyte layer in

the middle Figure 29 shows a schematic diagram of a polymer electrolyte membrane

fuel cell (PEMFC) The electrolyte layer is a good conductor for ions (positive or

negative charged) but not for electrons The electrolyte can either be solid such as

PEMFC and solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC) or liquid such as molten carbonate fuel cells

(MCFC) The type and chemical properties of the electrolyte used in fuel cells are very

60

important to their operating characteristics such as their operating temperatures

The polarity of an ion and its transport direction can differ for different fuel cells

determining the site of water production and removal If the working ion is positive like

in a PEMFC shown in Figure 29 then water is produced at the cathode On the other

hand if the working ion is negative like SOFC and MCFC shown in Figures 211 and

213 water is formed at the anode In both cases electrons have to pass through an

external circuit and produce electric current

In a typical fuel cell fuel is fed continuously to the anode and oxidant is fed

continuously to the cathode The electrochemical reactions take place at the electrodes to

convert chemical energy into electricity Note that anode is the electrode from which

electrons leave (negative) and cathode is the electrode to which the electrons are coming

(positive) The most common used fuel for fuel cells is hydrogen and the oxidant is

usually oxygen or air Nevertheless theoretically any substance capable of chemical

oxidation that can be supplied continuously (as a fluid) can be used as fuel at the anode of

a fuel cell Similarly the oxidant can be any fluid that can be reduced at a sufficient rate

[219]

Among different types of fuel cells SOFC PEMFC and MCFC are most likely to be

used for distributed generation (DG) applications [217]-[218] [220]-[224] Compared

with conventional power plants these FCDG systems have many advantages such as high

efficiency zero or low emission (of pollutant gases) and flexible modular structure In the

following an overview is given on the operating principles of the above three types of

fuel cells Though MCFC is out of the scope of this dissertation it is also included here

as a potential candidate for fuel cell DG applications

61

PEMFC PEMFC has a sandwich like structure as shown in Figure 29 [217]

[218] [220] Between two porous electrodes is a Teflon-like membrane which is an

excellent conductor of protons and an insulator of electrons [217] [218] The hydrogen

molecules are broken into electrons and hydrogen protons at the anode with the help of

platinum catalyst The hydrogen protons pass through the membrane (electrolyte) reach

the cathode surface and combine with the electrons which travel from anode to cathode

through the external load to produce water The reactions at the anode and cathode side

and the overall reaction are given in Figure 29

Gas

Flow

Channel Anode

Electron

Flow

Cathode

Membrane

Catalyst

Layers

H2

H2O

O24H+

Load

4e- 4e-

Gas

Flow

Channel

2H2+ O

2 = 2H

2O

Current

Flow

Figure 29 Schematic diagram of a PEMFC

One of the advantages of the PEMFC is its high power density and high efficiency

(40-45) This makes the technology competitive in transportation and stationary

applications Another benefit is its lower operating temperature (between 60degC and 80degC)

62

and because of this the PEMFC has a quick start which is beneficial in automotive

applications where quick start is necessary

5 10 15 20 2522

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

Load Current (A)

PEMFC Output Voltage (V)

ActivationRegion

Ohmic Region

Concentration Region

Figure 210 V-I characteristic of a 500W PEMFC stack [220]

Figure 210 shows the output voltage vs load current (V-I) characteristic curve of a

500W PEMFC stack [220] This characteristic curve which is typical of other fuel cells

can be divided into three regions The voltage drop across the fuel cell associated with

low currents is due to the activation loss inside the fuel cell the voltage drop in the

middle of the curve (which is approximately linear) is due to the ohmic loss in the fuel

cell stack and as a result of the concentration loss the output voltage at the end of the

curve will drop sharply as the load current increases [217] [218]

63

SOFC SOFC is a high temperature fuel cell technology with a promising future

Based on a negative-ion conductive electrolyte SOFCs operate between 600 C and 1000

C and convert chemical energy into electricity at high efficiency which can reach up to

65 [221] The overall efficiency of an integrated SOFC-combustion turbine system can

even reach 70 [221] Despite slow start-up and more thermal stresses due to the high

operating temperature SOFC allows for internal reforming of gaseous fuel inside the fuel

cell which gives multi-fuel capability to SOFCs [217] [218] Moreover their solid

nature simplifies system designs where the corrosion and management problems related

to liquid electrolyte are eliminated [217] These merits give SOFC a bright future to be

used in stationary applications Figure 211 shows a block diagram of a SOFC The

reactions at the anode and cathode are also given in the figure

Figure 211 Schematic diagram of a SOFC

64

The steady-state terminal V-I curves of a 5kW SOFC model (which will be discussed

in detail in Chapter 4) at different temperatures which are typical of SOFCs are shown

in Figure 212 [223] The activation voltage drop dominates the voltage drop in the

low-current region As load current increases the ohmic voltage drop increases fast and

becomes the main contribution to the SOFC voltage drop When load current exceeds a

certain value fuel cell output voltage will drop sharply due to the concentration voltage

drop inside SOFC Figure 212 also shows the effect of temperature on SOFC V-I

characteristic curve SOFC output voltage is higher at lower temperature in the low

current zone while the voltage is higher at higher temperature in the high current region

0 50 100 1500

20

40

60

80

100

120

Load current (A)

SOFC output voltage (V)

1073K

1173K

1273K

Figure 212 V-I characteristic of a 5kW SOFC stack [223]

65

MCFC MCFCs use a molten mixture of alkali metal carbonate as their electrolyte

[217] [218] At high temperatures (600oC ndash 700 oC) the salt mixture is in liquid phase

and is an excellent conductor of minus23CO ions At the cathode the oxygen and carbon oxide

combine with the electrons flowing through the external circuit to produce carbonate ions

( minus23CO ) At the anode minus2

3CO ions are deoxidized by hydrogen and electrons are released

at the same time These electrons will have to go through the external circuit and then

reach the cathode surface Figure 213 shows the schematic diagram of a MCFC The

reactions at the anode and cathode side are given in the figure -

2 3

-

22

2CO

4e

2CO

O

=+

+

-

2

-2 3

24e

2CO

2CO

2H+

=+

Figure 213 Schematic diagram of a MCFC

Figure 214 shows the V-I performance progress for MCFCs from 1967 to 2002

[217] During the 1980s the performance of MCFC stacks made dramatic

improvements It is noted from this figure that MCFCs normally operate in the range of

100-200 mAcm2 at 750-850 mV for a single cell [217] MCFs have achieved

66

efficiencies in the range of 50-60 before heat recovery and with heat recovery their

efficiency could exceed 70 [224]

Figure 214 Progress in generic performance of MCFCs on reformate gas and air

Electrolyzer

An electrolyzer is a device that produces hydrogen and oxygen from water Water

electrolysis can be considered a reverse process of a hydrogen fueled fuel cell Opposite

to the electrochemical reaction occurring in fuel cell an electrolyzer converts the DC

electrical energy into chemical energy stored in hydrogen

Water electrolysis is a long-established process which started in the early part of

nineteen century [225] Nicholson and Carlisle English chemists first discovered the

phenomenon of electrolytic decomposition in acid water in 1800 However alkaline

medium is preferred in todayrsquos industrial electrolysis plants Currently there are three

principal types of electrolyzer available in the market alkaline PEM and solid oxide

67

The alkaline and PEM electrolyzers are well established devices with thousands of units

in operation while the solid-oxide electrolyzer is as yet unproven [226] Alkaline water

electrolysis is the dominating technology today In this section the principle of alkaline

water electrolysis is reviewed

An alkaline electrolyzer uses potassium hydroxide (KOH) as electrolyte solution for

transferring hydroxyl ions Figure 215 shows the schematic diagram of an alkaline

electrolyzer At the cathode two water molecules are reduced electrochemically (by the

two electrons from the cathode) to one molecule of H2 and two hydroxyl ions (OH-) The

reaction at the cathode can be expressed as

minusminus +uarrrarr+ OHHeOH 222 22 (253)

Under the external electric field the hydroxyl ions are forced to move towards the

anode through the porous diaphragm At the anode the two molecule hydroxyl ions

losing two electrons to the anode are discharged into 12 molecule of O2 and one

molecule of water The chemical reaction at the cathode is

minusminus ++uarrrarr eOHOOH 22

12 22 (254)

By combining the above two equations the overall chemical reaction inside an

electrolyzer is

uarr+uarrrarr 2222

1OHOH (255)

68

Figure 215 Schematic diagram of an alkaline electrolyzer

The current density of alkaline electrolyzers is normally less than 04 Acm2 The

energy conversion efficiencies can range from 60-90 Without auxiliary purification

equipment purities of 998 for H2 can be achieved Alkaline electrolysis technology

can be implemented at a variety of scales from less than 1 kW to large industrial

electrolyzer plant over 100 MW as long as there is a proper DC electricity supply [227]

69

Summary

In this chapter the fundamental concepts and principles of energy systems and energy

conversion are reviewed The chapter begins with the introduction of the basic energy

forms and then reviews the fundamentals of thermodynamics and electrochemistry The

First and Second Law of Thermodynamics the maximum conversion efficiency of a

conventional heat engine heat transfer the concepts of enthalpy entropy and the Gibbs

energy and the well-known Nernst equation are briefly explained The fundamentals of

wind energy conversion systems photovoltaic systems fuel cells and electrolyzers are

also reviewed The principles reviewed in this chapter are the fundamentals needed for

modeling the proposed multi-source alternative energy system discussed in the following

chapters

70

REFERENCES

[21] Archie W Culp Jr Principles of Energy Conversion McGraw-Hill Book Company 1979

[22] Steven S Zumdahl Chemical Principles 2nd Edition DC Heath and Company Toronto 1995

[23] FT Ulaby Fundamentals of Applied Electromagnetics Prentice-Hall Inc 1999

[24] ERG Eckert and R M Drake Jr Analysis of Heat and Mass Transfer McGraw-Hill Book Company 1972

[25] George N Hatsopoulos and Joseph H Keenan Principles of General

Thermodynamics John Wiley amp Sons Inc 1965

[26] E L Harder Fundamentals of Energy Production John Wiley amp Sons 1982

[27] FA Farret and MG Simotildees Integration of Alternative Sources of Energy John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2006

[28] G Hoogers Fuel Cell Technology Handbook CRC Press LLC 2003

[29] JANAF Thermochemical Tables 2nd Edition NSRDS-NBS 37 1971

[210] G Kortum Treatise on Electrochemistry (2nd Edition) Elsevier Publishing Company 1965

[211] M R Patel Wind and Solar Power Systems CRC Press LLC 1999

[212] JG Slootweg ldquoWind power modeling and impact on power system dynamicsrdquo PhD dissertation Dept Elect Eng Delft University of Technology Delft Netherlands 2003

[213] JF Manwell JG McGowan and AL Rogers Wind energy Explained ndash Theory

Design and Application John Wileyamp Sons 2002

[214] Tony Burton David sharpe Nick Jenkins and Ervin Bossanyi Wind Energy

Handbook John Wileyamp Sons 2001

[215] SR Guda ldquoModeling and power management of a hybrid wind-microturbine power generation systemrdquo MS thesis Montana State University 2005

71

[216] R Messenger and J Ventre Photovoltaic Systems Engineering CRC Press LLC 2000

[217] Fuel Cell Handbook (Sixth Edition) EGampG Services Inc Science Applications International Corporation DOE Office of Fossil Energy National Energy Technology Lab Nov 2002

[218] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained 2nd Edition John Wiley amp Sons Ltd 2003

[219] AJ Appleby FR Foulkes Fuel Cell Handbook Van Nostrand Reinhold New York NY 1989

[220] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 20 No 2 pp442-451 June 2005

[221] O Yamamoto ldquoSolid oxide fuel cells fundamental aspects and prospectsrdquo Electrochimica Acta Vol 45 No (15-16) pp 2423-2435 2000

[222] J Padulleacutes GW Ault and J R McDonald ldquoAn integrated SOFC plant dynamic model for power system simulationrdquo J Power Sources pp495ndash500 2000

[223] C Wang and MH Nehrir ldquoA Dynamic SOFC Model for Distributed Power Generation Applicationsrdquo Proceedings 2005 Fuel Cell Seminar Palm Springs CA Nov 14-18 2005

[224] MD Lukas KY Lee H Ghezel-Ayagh ldquoAn Explicit Dynamic Model for Direct Reforming Carbonate Fuel Cell Stackrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 16 No 3 pp 289-295 Sept 2000

[225] W Kreuter and H Hofmann ldquoElectrolysis The Important Energy Transformer in a World of Sustainable Energyrdquo Int J Hydrogen Energy Vol 23 No8 pp 661-666 1998

[226] M Newborough ldquoA Report on Electrolysers Future Markets and the Prospects for ITM Power Ltdrsquos Electrolyser Technologyrdquo Online http wwwh2fccomNewsletter

[227] AFG Smith and M Newborough ldquoLow-Cost Polymer Electrolysers and Electrolyser Implementation Scenarios for Carbon Abatementrdquo Report to the Carbon Trust and ITM-Power PLC Nov 2004

72

CHAPTER 3

MULTI-SOURCE ALTERNATIVE ENERGY

DISTRIBUTED GENERATION SYSTEM

Introduction

The ever increasing energy consumption the soaring cost and the exhaustible nature

of fossil fuel and the worsening global environment have created booming interest in

green (renewable energy source or fuel cell based) power generation systems Compared

to the conventional centralized power plants these systems are sustainable smaller in

size and (some) can be installed closer to load centers The power is delivered to

customers by many distributed generation (DG) systems other than the conventional way

that power is transmitted from centralized power plants to load centers over transmission

lines and then through distribution systems Due to steady progress in power deregulation

and utility restructuring and tight constraints imposed on the construction of new

transmission lines for long distance power transmission DG applications are expected to

increase in the future

Wind and solar power generation are two of the most promising renewable power

generation technologies The growth of wind and photovoltaic (PV) power generation

systems has exceeded the most optimistic estimation Fuel cells also show great potential

to be green power sources of the future because of many merits they have (such as high

efficiency zero or low emission of pollutant gases and flexible modular structure) and

73

the rapid progress in fuel cell technologies However none of these technologies is

perfect now Wind and solar power are highly dependent on climate while fuel cells need

hydrogen-rich fuel and the cost for fuel cells is still very high at current stage

Nevertheless because different renewable energy sources can complement each other

multi-source hybrid alternative energy systems (with proper control) have great potential

to provide higher quality and more reliable power to customers than a system based on a

single resource And because of this hybrid energy systems have caught worldwide

research attention [31]-[334]

There are many combinations of different alternative energy sources and storage

devices to build a hybrid system The following lists some of the stand-alone or

grid-connected hybrid systems that have been reported in the literature

1) WindPVFCelectrolyzerbattery system [31]-[33]

2) Micro-turbineFC system [34]-[35]

3) Microturbinewind system [36]

4) Gas-turbineFC system [37]-[39]

5) DieselFC system [310]-[311]

6) PVbattery [312]

7) PVFCelectrolyzer [313]-[315]

8) PVFCelectrolyzerbattery system [316]-[318]

9) FCbattery or super-capacitor system [319]-[320]

10) WindFC system [321]

11) Winddiesel system [322]

12) WindPVbattery system [323]-[325]

74

13) PVdiesel system [326]

14) DieselwindPV system [327]

15) PVFC Super-conducting Magnetic Energy Storage (SMES) system [328]

From the above listed hybrid energy systems it is noted that the main renewable

energy sources are wind and photovoltaic power Due to natural intermittent properties of

wind and photovoltaic power stand-alone wind andor PV renewable energy systems

normally require energy storage devices or some other generation sources to form a

hybrid system The storage device can be a battery bank super-capacitor bank SMES or

a FC-electrolyzer system

In this study a multi-source hybrid alternative distributed generation system

consisting of wind PV fuel cell electrolyzer and battery is proposed Wind and

photovoltaic are the primary power sources of the system to take full advantage of

renewable energy around us The FCelectrolyzer combination is used as a backup and

long term storage system For a stand-alone application a battery is also used in the

system as short term energy storage to supply fast transient and ripple power In the

proposed system the different energy sources are integrated through an AC link bus

(discussed later in this chapter) An overall power management controller is designed for

the system to coordinate the power flows among the different energy sources The details

of the system configuration are discussed in this chapter The system component

modeling will be discussed in Chapter 4 The system control scheme and simulation

results under different scenarios will be given in Chapter 7

75

Figure 31 Hybrid energy system integration DC coupling

AC Coupling vs DC Coupling

There are several ways to integrate different alternative energy sources to form a

hybrid system The methods can be generally classified into two categories DC coupling

and AC coupling AC coupling can be classified further into power frequency AC (PFAC)

coupling and high frequency AC (HFAC) coupling In a DC coupling configuration

shown in Figure 31 different alternative energy sources are connected to a DC bus

through appropriate power electronic interfacing circuits Then the DC energy is

converted into 60 Hz (or 50 Hz) AC through a DCAC converter (inverter) which can be

bi-directional

76

(a)

(b) Figure 32 Hybrid energy system integration (a) PFAC coupling (b) HFAC coupling

77

In a PFAC coupling scheme shown in Figure 32 (a) different energy sources are

integrated through proper power electronic interfacing circuits to a power frequency AC

bus Coupling inductors may also be needed to achieve desired power flow management

In a HFAC link scheme shown in Figure 32 (b) different alternative energy sources are

coupled to a HFAC bus HFAC loads are connected directly to the HFAC bus The HFAC

can also be converted into PFAC through an ACAC converter so that regular AC loads

can be connected to the PFAC bus HFAC link is originally developed for supplying

power to HFAC loads This configuration has been used mostly in applications with

HFAC (eg 400 Hz) loads such as airplanes vessels submarines and space station

applications [329]

Different coupling schemes find their own appropriate applications DC coupling is

the simplest and the oldest type of integration PFAC link is more modular than DC

scheme and is ready for grid connection HFAC coupling is more complicated and is

more suitable for the applications with HFAC loads Table 31 summaries the advantages

and disadvantages of each coupling scheme

78

TABLE 31 COMPARISON AMONG DIFFERENT INTEGRATION SCHEMES

Coupling Scheme

Advantage Disadvantage

DC [31]-[32] [312]

[329]-[330]

1 Synchronism not needed 2 Suitable for long distance

transmission it has less transmission losses

3 Single-wired connection

1 Concerns on the voltage compatibility

2 Corrosion concerns with the DC electrodes

3 Non-standard connection requires high costs in installing and maintenance

4 If the DCAC inverter is out of service the whole system fails to supply AC power

PFAC [329]

[331]-[332]

1 High reliability If one of the energy sources is out of service it can be isolated from the system easily

2 Ready for grid connection 3 Standard interfacing and

modular structure 3 Easy multi-voltage and

multi-terminal matching 4 Well established scale economy

1 Synchronism required 2 The need for power factor and harmonic distortion correction

3 Not suitable for long distance transmission

HFAC [329]

[333]-[334]

1 Higher order harmonics can be easily filtered out

2 Suitable for applications with HFAC loads with improved efficiency

3 Size of high frequency transformers harmonic filters and other passive components are smaller

1 Complex control 2 Higher component and maintenance costs due to high frequency

3 The dependence on future advances of power electronics

4 Concerns about electromagnetic compatibility

5 Extremely limited capability of long distance transmission

79

Stand-alone vs Grid-connected Systems

A hybrid alternative energy system can either be stand-alone or grid-connected if

utility grid is available For a stand-alone application the system needs to have sufficient

storage capacity to handle the power variations from the alternative energy sources

involved A system of this type can be considered as a micro-grid which has its own

generation sources and loads [335] For a grid-connected application the alternative

energy sources in the micro-grid can supply power both to the local loads and the utility

grid In addition to real power these DG sources can also be used to give reactive power

and voltage support to the utility grid The capacity of the storage device for these

systems can be smaller if they are grid-connected since the grid can be used as system

backup However when connected to a utility grid important operation and performance

requirements such as voltage frequency and harmonic regulations are imposed on the

system [336] Both grid-connected and stand-alone applications will be discussed in the

later chapters The optimal placement of DG sources in power systems will also be

discussed in Chapter 8

The Proposed System Configuration

Figure 33 shows the system configuration for the proposed hybrid alternative energy

system In the system the renewable wind and solar power are taken as the primary

source while fuel cellelectrolyzer combination is used as a backup and storage system

This system can be considered as a complete ldquogreenrdquo power generation system because

the main energy sources and storage system are all environmentally friendly and it can be

80

stand-alone or grid-connected When there is excess wind andor solar generation

available the electrolyzer turns on to begin producing hydrogen which is delivered to the

hydrogen storage tanks If the H2 storage tanks become full the excess power will be

diverted to other dump loads which are not shown in Figure 33 When there is a deficit

in power generation the fuel cell stack will begin to produce energy using hydrogen from

the reservoir tanks or in case they are empty from the backup H2 tanks A battery bank is

used to supply transient power to fast load transients ripples and spikes in stand-alone

applications For grid-connected applications the battery bank can be taken out from the

system the utility grid will take care of transient power Different energy sources are

connected to a 60 Hz AC bus through appropriate power electronic interfacing circuits

The system can be easily expended ie other energy sources can be integrated into the

system when they are available as shown in Figure 33 The main system components

and their sizes are discussed in the following section

System Unit Sizing

The unit sizing procedure discussed in this section is assumed for a stand-alone

hybrid system with the proposed structure (Figure 33) for residential electricity supply in

southwestern part of Montana The hybrid system is designed to supply power for five

homes A typical load demand for each home reported in [337] in the Pacific Northwest

regions is used in this simulation study The total load demand of the five homes is shown

in Figure 34 A 50 kW wind turbine is assumed to be available already for the hybrid

system The following unit sizing procedure is used to determine the size of PV arrays

fuel cells the electrolyzer and the battery

81

Figure 33 System configuration of the proposed multi-source alternative hybrid energy system (coupling inductors are not shown in the figure)

82

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

Time (Hour of Day)

Demand (kW)

Figure 34 Hourly average demand of a typical residence in the Pacific Northwest area

Before the discussion of unit sizing the following concept is applied for indicating

the overall efficiency and availability of a renewable energy source

Capacity factor of a renewable energy kcf is defined as

Actual average output power over a period of time T kcf =

Nominal power rating of the renewable energy source (31)

For the wind and solar data reported in [33] [324] the capacity factor of the wind

turbine (kcf_wtg) and the PV (kcf_pv) array used in the proposed hybrid system for the

southwestern part of Montana are taken as 13 and 10 respectively

The purpose of unit sizing is to minimize the difference between the generated power

( genP ) from the renewable energy source and the demand (demP ) over a period of time T T

is taken as one year in this study

83

demratedpvpveffratedwtgwtgeffdemgen PPkPkPPP minustimes+times=minus=∆ __ (32)

where Pwtgrated is the power rating of the wind turbine generator and Pwtgpv is the power

rating the PV array

To balance the generation and the demand the rated power for the PV arrays is

( )pveffratedwtgwtgeffdemratedpv kPkPP __ timesminus= (33)

From Figure 34 the average load demand is 976 kW Then according to (33) the

size of the PV array is calculated to be 326 kW

The FCelectrolyzer combination is taken as the storage for the system The fuel cell

needs to supply the peak load demand when there is no wind and solar power Therefore

the size of fuel cell is 146 kW (Figure 34) To leave some safe margin an 18 kW fuel

cell stack array is used

The electrolyzer should be able to handle the excess power from the wind and solar

power source The maximum possible excess power is

(Pgen - Pdem)max = 766 kW (34)

However the possibility that both the wind and solar power reach their maximum

points while the load demand is at its lowest value is very small According to the data

reported in [330] the excess available power normally is less than half of the maximum

possible value And electrolyzer is also very expensive Therefore a 50 kW electrolyzer

[over 60 of the maximum available given in (34)] is used in this study

Battery capacity can be determined based on the transient power at the load site In

this study a 10 kWh battery bank is used

The details of the system component parameters are listed in Table 32

84

TABLE 32 COMPONENT PARAMETERS OF THE PROPOSED HYBRID ENERGY SYSTEM

Wind turbine

Rated power 50 kW

Cut in speed (Cut out speed) 3 ms (25 ms)

Rated speed 14 ms

Blade diameter 15 m

Gear box ratio 75

Induction generator

Rated power 50 kW

Rated voltage 670 V

Rated frequency 60 Hz

PV array

Module unit 153 cells 173 W 1 kWm2 25 ˚C

Module number 16times12 = 192

Power rating 192times173 asymp 33 kW

Fuel cell array

PEMFC stack 500 W

PEMFC array 6times6 = 36

PEMFC array power rating 36times05 = 18 kW

Or SOFC stack 5 kW

SOFC array 2times2 = 4

SOFC array power rating 4times5 kW = 20 kW

Electrolyzer

Rated power 50 kW

Number of cells 40 (in series)

Operating voltage 60 - 80 V

Battery

Capacity 10 kWh

Rated voltage 400 V

85

REFERENCES

[31] K Agbossou M Kolhe J Hamelin and TK Bose ldquoPerformance of a stand-alone renewable energy system based on energy storage as hydrogenrdquo IEEE

Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 3 pp 633 ndash 640 Sept 2004

[32] K Agbossou R Chahine J Hamelin FLaurencelle A Anourar J-M St-Arnaud and TK Bose ldquoRenewable energy systems based on hydrogen for remote applicationsrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 96 pp168-172 2001

[33] DB Nelson MH Nehrir and C Wang ldquoUnit Sizing and Cost Analysis of Stand-Alone Hybrid WinPVFuel Cell Systemsrdquo Renewable Energy (accepted)

[34] R Lasseter ldquoDynamic models for micro-turbines and fuel cellsrdquo Proceedings 2001 PES Summer Meeting Vol 2 pp 761-766 2001

[35] Y Zhu and K Tomsovic ldquoDevelopment of models for analyzing the load-following performance of microturbines and fuel cellsrdquo Journal of Electric Power Systems Research pp 1-11 Vol 62 2002

[36] SR Guda C Wang and MH Nehrir ldquoModeling of Microturbine Power Generation Systemsrdquo Journal of Power Components amp Systems (accepted)

[37] K Sedghisigarchi and A Feliachi ldquoDynamic and Transient Analysis of Power Distribution Systems with Fuel CellsmdashPart I Fuel-Cell Dynamic Modelrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 2 pp423-428 June 2004

[38] K Sedghisigarchi and A Feliachi ldquoDynamic and Transient Analysis of Power Distribution Systems with Fuel CellsmdashPart II Control and Stability Enhancementrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 2 pp429-434 June 2004

[39] SH Chan HK Ho and Y Tian ldquoMulti-level modeling of SOFC-gas turbine hybrid systemrdquo International Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 28 No 8 pp 889-900 Aug 2003

[310] Z Miao M A Choudhry R L Klein and L Fan ldquoStudy of A Fuel Cell Power Plant in Power Distribution System ndash Part I Dynamic Modelrdquo Proceedings IEEE PES General Meeting June 2004 Denver CO

[311] Z Miao M A Choudhry R L Klein and L Fan ldquoStudy of A Fuel Cell Power Plant in Power Distribution System ndash Part II Stability Controlrdquo Proceedings IEEE PES General Meeting June 2004 Denver CO

86

[312] H Dehbonei ldquoPower conditioning for distributed renewable energy generationrdquo PhD Dissertation Curtin University of Technology Perth Western Australia 2003

[313] P A Lehman CE Chamberlin G Pauletto MA Rocheleau ldquoOperating Experience with a photovoltaic-hydrogen energy systemrdquo Proceedings

Hydrogenrsquo94 The 10th World Hydrogen Energy Conference Cocoa Beach FL June 1994

[314] A Arkin and J J Duffy ldquoModeling of PV Electrolyzer and Gas Storage in a Stand-Alone Solar-Fuel Cell Systemrdquo Proceedings the 2001 National Solar Energy Conference Annual Meeting American Solar Energy Society 2001

[315] L A Torres F J Rodriguez and PJ Sebastian ldquoSimulation of a solar-hydrogen-fuel cell system results for different locations in Mexicordquo International Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 23 No 11 pp 1005-1010 Nov 1998

[316] S R Vosen and JO Keller ldquoHybrid energy storage systems for stand-alone electric power systems optimization of system performance and cost through control strategiesrdquo International Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 24 No 12 pp 1139-56 Dec 1999

[317] Th F El-Shatter M N Eskandar and MT El-Hagry ldquoHybrid PVfuel cell system design and simulationrdquo Renewable Energy Vol 27 No 3 pp479-485 Nov 2002

[318] Oslash Ulleberg and S O MOslashRNER ldquoTRNSYS simulation models for solar-hydrogen systems rdquo Solar Energy Vol 59 No 4-6 pp 271-279 1997

[319] J C Amphlett EH de Oliveira RF Mann PR Roberge and Aida Rodrigues ldquoDynamic Interaction of a Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cell and a Lead-acid Batteryrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 65 pp 173-178 1997

[320] D Candusso L Valero and A Walter ldquoModelling control and simulation of a fuel cell based power supply system with energy managementrdquo Proceedings 28th Annual Conference of the IEEE Industrial Electronics Society (IECON 2002) Vol 2 pp1294-1299 2002

[321] M T Iqbal ldquoModeling and control of a wind fuel cell hybrid energy systemrdquo Renewable Energy Vol 28 No 2 pp 223-237 Feb 2003

[322] H Sharma S Islam and T Pryor ldquoDynamic modeling and simulation of a hybrid wind diesel remote area power systemrdquo International Journal of Renewable Energy Engineering Vol 2 No1 April 2000

87

[323] R Chedid H Akiki and S Rahman ldquoA decision support technique for the design of hybrid solar-wind power systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 13 No 1 pp 76-83 March 1998

[324] W D Kellogg M H Nehrir G Venkataramanan and V Gerez ldquoGeneration unit sizing and cost analysis for stand-alone wind photovoltaic and hybrid windPV systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 13 No 1 pp 70-75 March 1998

[325] F Giraud and Z M Salameh ldquoSteady-state performance of a grid-connected rooftop hybrid wind-photovoltaic power system with battery storagerdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 16 No 1 pp 1 ndash 7 March 2001

[326] E S Abdin A M Osheiba and MM Khater ldquoModeling and optimal controllers design for a stand-alone photovoltaic-diesel generating unitrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 14 No 3 pp 560-565 Sept 1999

[327] F Bonanno A Consoli A Raciti B Morgana and U Nocera ldquoTransient analysis of integrated diesel-wind-photovoltaic generation systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 14 No 2 pp 232-238 June 1999

[328] T Monai I Takano H Nishikawa and Sawada ldquoResponse characteristics and operating methods of new type dispersed power supply system using photovoltaic fuel cell and SMESrdquo 2002 IEEE PES Summer Meeting Vol 2 pp 874-879 2002

[329] F A Farret and M G Simotildees Integration of Alternative Sources of Energy John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2006

[330] Oslashystein Ulleberg ldquoStand-Alone Power Systems for the Future Optimal Design Operation amp Control of Solar-Hydrogen Energy Systemsrdquo PhD Dissertation Norwegian University of Science and Technology Trondheim 1998

[331] P Strauss A Engler ldquoAC coupled PV hybrid systems and microgrids-state of the art and future trendsrdquo Proceedings 3rd World Conference on Photovoltaic Energy Conversion Vol 3 No 12-16 pp 2129 ndash 2134 May 2003

[332] G Hegde P Pullammanappallil C Nayar ldquoModular AC coupled hybrid power systems for the emerging GHG mitigation products marketrdquo Proceedings Conference on Convergent Technologies for Asia-Pacific Region Vol 3 No15-17 pp 971 ndash 975 Oct 2003

[333] SK Sul I Alan and TA Lipo ldquoPerformance testing of a high frequency link converter for space station power distribution systemrdquo Proceedings the 24th Intersociety Energy Conversion Engineering Conference (IECEC-89) Vol 1 No 6-11 pp 617 ndash 623 Aug 1989

88

[334] H J Cha and P N Enjeti ldquoA three-phase ACAC high-frequency link matrix converter for VSCF applicationsrdquo Proceedings IEEE 34th Annual Power Electronics Specialist Conference 2003 (PESC 03) Vol 4 No 15-19 pp 1971 ndash 1976 June 2003

[335] R H Lasseter ldquoMicroGridsrdquo Proceedings 2002 IEEE PES Winter Meeting Vol 1 pp 305-308 2002

[336] IEEE Std 1547 IEEE Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Resources with Electric Power Systems 2003

[337] J Cahill K Ritland W Kelly ldquoDescription of Electric Energy Use in Single Family Residences in the Pacific Northwest 1986-1992rdquo Office of Energy Resources Bonneville Power Administration December 1992 Portland OR

89

CHAPTER 4

COMPONENT MODELING FOR THE HYBRID

ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SYSTEM

In this chapter the models for the main components of the proposed hybrid

alternative energy system given in Chapter 3 are developed Namely they are fuel cells

wind energy conversion system PV energy conversion system electrolyzer battery

power electronic interfacing circuits and accessory devices

Two types of fuel cells are modeled and their applications are discussed in this

dissertation They are low temperature proton exchange membrane fuel cell (PEMFC)

and high temperature solid oxide fuel cell (SOFC)

Dynamic Models and Model Validation for PEMFC

Introduction

PEMFCs show great promise for use as distributed generation (DG) sources

Compared with other DG technologies such as wind and photovoltaic (PV) generation

PEMFCs have the advantage that they can be placed at any site in a distribution system

without geographic limitations to achieve optimal performance Electric vehicles are

another major application of PEMFCs The increased desire for vehicles with less

emission has made PEMFCs attractive for vehicular applications since they emit

essentially no pollutants and have high power density and quick start

PEMFCs are good energy sources to provide reliable power at steady state but they

90

cannot respond to electrical load transients as fast as desired This is mainly due to their

slow internal electrochemical and thermodynamic responses The transient properties of

PEMFCs need to be studied and analyzed under different situations such as electrical

faults on the fuel cell terminals motor starting and electric vehicle starting and

acceleration

Some work has been reported in the literature on steady state fuel cell modeling eg

[41]ndash[47] as well as dynamic modeling [48]ndash[411] These studies are mostly based on

empirical equations andor electrochemical reactions inside the fuel cell In recent years

attempts have been made to study dynamic modeling of fuel cells with emphasis on the

electrical terminal characteristics eg [412]ndash[416] A detailed explanation of the

electrochemical properties of fuel cells and a simple equivalent electrical circuit

including a capacitor due to the double-layer charging effect inside fuel cells are reported

in [417]

In this dissertation dynamic models are presented for PEMFCs using electrical

circuits First through mechanistic analysis the equivalent internal voltage source and

equivalent resistors for activation loss ohmic voltage drop and concentration voltage

drop are given Then the double-layer charging effect is considered by adding an

equivalent capacitor to the circuit The thermodynamic characteristic inside the fuel cell

is also integrated into the model according to the energy balance equation A dynamic

model is built in MATLABSIMULINKreg and an electrical model is developed in Pspicereg

using equivalent electrical components from an electrical engineerrsquos point of view

Simulation results are given and validated with experimental data both for steady-state

and transient responses of PEMFCs The models show great potential to be useful in

91

other related studies such as real-time control of fuel cells and hybrid alternative energy

systems

Dynamic Model Development

In this section a mathematical approach is presented for building a dynamic model for

a PEMFC stack To simplify the analysis the following assumptions are made [41]

[45] [48] [417] [418]

(1) One-dimensional treatment

(2) Ideal and uniformly distributed gases

(3) Constant pressures in the fuel cell gas flow channels

(4) The fuel is humidified H2 and the oxidant is humidified air Assume the effective

anode water vapor pressure is 50 of the saturated vapor pressure while the

effective cathode water pressure is 100

(5) The fuel cell works under 100 ˚C and the reaction product is in liquid phase

(6) Thermodynamic properties are evaluated at the average stack temperature

temperature variations across the stack are neglected and the overall specific heat

capacity of the stack is assumed to be a constant

(7) Parameters for individual cells can be lumped together to represent a fuel cell

stack

A schematic diagram of a PEMFC and its internal voltage drops are shown in Figure

41

92

Gas Diffusion in the Electrodes In order to calculate the fuel cell output voltage

the effective partial pressures of H2 and O2 need to be determined In a gas mixture

consisting of N species the diffusion of component i through the porous electrodes can

be described by the Stefan-Maxwell formulation [41] [45]

sum=

minus=nabla

N

j ji

ijji

iD

NxNx

P

RTx

1

(41)

where xi (xj) = Mole fractions of species i (j)

Dij = effective binary diffusivity of i-j pair (m2s)

Ni(Nj) = Superficial gas flux of species i (j) [mol(m2middots)]

R = gas constant 83143 J(molmiddotK)

T = gas temperature (K)

P = overall pressure of the gas mixture (Pa)

93

Gas

Flow

Channel

Anode

Electrode

Cathode

Electrode

Membrane

Catalyst

Layers

H2O

H2

H2O

O2

N2

CO2

H+

0x

Vout

E

aohmV

membraneohmV

actV

concV

cohmV

Load

e- e-

Gas

Flow

Channel

Figure 41 Schematic diagram of a PEMFC and voltage drops across it

In the anode channel the gas stream is a mixture of H2 and H2O(g) The molar flux of

water (in gas phase) normal to anode surface OHN 2 can be set to zero according to

assumptions (1) ndash (3)

In the one-dimensional transport process along the x axis shown in Figure 41 the

diffusion of water can be simplified as

=

minus=

22

22

22

22222

HOH

HOH

aHOH

OHHHOH

a

OH

D

Nx

P

RT

D

NxNx

P

RT

dx

dx (42)

where Pa = overall gas pressure at the anode (Pa)

The molar flux of H2 can be determined by Faradayrsquos Law [41] [420]

94

F

IN den

H2

2 = (43)

where Iden = current density (Am2)

F = Faraday constant (96487 Cmol)

By combining (42) and (43) and integrating the expression with respect to x from the

anode channel to the catalyst surface it gives

=

22

2

22

expHOHa

adench

OHOHDFP

lRTIxx (44)

where la = distance from anode surface to the reaction site (m)

Superscript denotes the effective value

Superscript ldquochrdquo denotes the conditions at the anode or cathode channel

Since 1

2

2 =+ HOH xx the effective partial pressure of H2 is

)1(

2

2

2

2 OH

OH

OHH x

x

pp minus= (45)

According to assumption (4)

2OHp at the anode is sat

OHp 250 Therefore

2Hp is

given as [41]

minus

= 1

2exp

150

22

2

2

2

HOHa

adench

OH

sat

OHH

DFP

lRTIx

pp (46)

Superscript ldquosatrdquo denotes the condition of saturation

The gases flowing in the cathode channel are O2 N2 H2O(g) and CO2 Using (41) the

diffusion of H2O(g) at the cathode side can be obtained from

95

minus=

minus=

22

22

22

22222

OOH

OOH

cOOH

OOHOHO

c

OH

D

Nx

P

RT

D

NxNx

P

RT

dx

dx (47)

where Pc = overall gas pressure at the cathode (Pa)

Similar to the analysis for anode the effective molar fraction of water at the cathode

catalyst interface can be found as

=

22

2

24

expOOHc

cdench

OHOHDFP

lRTIxx (48)

where lc = distance from cathode surface to the reaction site (m)

Through similar analytical procedures [equations (47)-(48)] the effective molar

fraction of N2 and CO2 can also be determined

=

22

2

24

expONc

cdench

NNDFP

lRTIxx (49)

=

22

2

24

expOCOc

cdench

COCODFP

lRTIxx (410)

The effective molar fraction of O2 is

2

2

2

2 1 CONOHO xxxx minusminusminus= (411)

And the corresponding effective partial pressure of O2 is

)1(

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2 CONOH

OH

OH

O

OH

OH

O xxxx

px

x

pp minusminusminus== (412)

According to assumption (4)

2OHp at the cathode equals sat

OHp 2 and the above

equation can be rewritten as

minus

minusminus= 1

1

2

2

22

2

OH

CONsat

OHOx

xxpp (413)

96

2Hp and

2Op calculated from (46) and (413) will be used in the Nernst equation to

find the fuel cell output voltage In the following subsection material balance equations

will be developed which will also be used to determine the fuel cell output voltage

Material Conservation Equations The instantaneous change in the effective partial

pressures of hydrogen and oxygen can be determined through the ideal gas equations as

follows [422]

F

iM

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

VnetHoutHinH

Ha

22222

2 minus=minusminus= (414)

where Va = volume of anode channel (m3)

MH2 = H2 mole flow rate (mols)

i = fuel cell current (A)

Subscripts ldquoinrdquo ldquooutrdquo and ldquonetrdquo denote the values related to input output and

net

F

iM

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

VnetOoutOinO

Oc

44222

2 minus=minusminus= (415)

where Vc = volume of cathode channel (m3)

MO2 = O2 mole flow rate (mols)

At steady-state all partial pressures are considered to be kept constant ie

0

2

2 ==dt

dp

dt

dp OH (416)

Therefore the net mole flow rates of H2 and O2 at steady-state are

F

IMM netOnetH

22 22 == (417)

Under transient state there are delays between the change in the load current and the

97

flow of fuel and oxidant The following relationships are used to represent these delay

effects

netO

netO

c

netH

netH

a

MF

i

dt

dM

MF

i

dt

dM

2

2

2

2

4

2

minus=

minus=

τ

τ (418)

where τa = fuel flow delay (s)

τc = oxidant flow delay (s)

Fuel Cell Output Voltage The overall reaction in a PEMFC can be simply written

as

)(2222

1lOHOH =+ (419)

According to assumption (5) the corresponding Nernst equation used to calculate the

reversible potential is [420]

[ ]50

2

20 )(ln2

OHcellcell ppF

RTEE sdot+= (420)

where Ecell = reversible potential of each cell (V)

E0cell is the reference potential which is a function of temperature and can be

expressed as follows [41]

)298(00 minusminus= TkEE E

o

cellcell (421)

where o

cellE 0= standard reference potential at standard state 298 K and 1atm pressure

To simplify the analysis a voltage Edcell is considered to be subtracted from the right

side of (420) for the overall effect of the fuel and oxidant delay The steady-state value

of Edcell is zero but it will show the influence of the fuel and oxidant delays on the fuel

98

cell output voltage during load transients It can be written as

[ ])exp()()( eecelld ttitiE τλ minusotimesminus= (422)

where λe = constant factor in calculating Ed (Ω)

τe = overall flow delay (s)

where ldquootimesrdquo is the convolution operator Converting (422) to the Laplace domain we get

1)()( +

=s

ssIsE

e

eecelld τ

τλ (423)

Equation (423) is used for developing models both in SIMULINK and Pspice The

internal potential Ecell in (420) now becomes

[ ] celldOHcellcell EppF

RTEE

50

2

20 )(ln2

minussdot+= (424)

Ecell calculated from (424) is actually the open-circuit voltage of the fuel cell

However under normal operating conditions the fuel cell output voltage is less than Ecell

Activation loss ohmic resistance voltage drop and concentration overpotential are

voltage drops across the fuel cell as shown in Figure 41 [418] Therefore

cellconccellohmcellactcellcell VVVEV minusminusminus= (425)

where Vcell = output voltage of a single cell (V)

Vactcell = activation voltage drop of a single cell (V)

Vohmcell = ohmic voltage drop of a single cell (V)

Vconccell = concentration voltage drop of a single cell (V)

Applying assumption 7) the output voltage of the fuel cell stack can be obtained as

concohmactcellcellout VVVEVNV minusminusminus== (426)

where Vout = output voltage of the fuel cell stack (V)

99

Ncell = number of cells in the stack (V)

Vact = overall activation voltage drop (V)

Vohm = overall ohmic voltage drop (V)

Vconc = overall concentration voltage drop (V)

To calculate the fuel cell output voltage the following estimations are used

1) Activation Voltage Drop Tafel equation given below is used to calculate the

activation voltage drop in a fuel cell [418]

[ ])ln()ln(0

IbaTI

I

zF

RTVact +sdot==

α (427)

On the other hand an empirical equation for Vact is given in [41] where a constant

(η0) is added to (427) as follows

210 )ln()298( actactact VVIbTaTV +=sdot+sdotminus+=η (428)

where η0 a b = empirical constants terms

Vact1=(η0+(T-298)middota) is the voltage drop affected only by the fuel cell internal

temperature while Vact2=(Tmiddotbmiddotln(I)) is both current and temperature dependent

The equivalent resistance of activation corresponding to Vact2 is defined as

I

IbT

I

VR actact

)ln(2 sdot== (429)

2) Ohmic Voltage Drop The ohmic resistance of a PEMFC consists of the resistance

of polymer membrane the conducting resistance between the membrane and electrodes

and the resistances of electrodes The overall ohmic voltage drop can be expressed as

ohmcohmmembraneohmaohmohm IRVVVV =++= (430)

ohmR is also a function of current and temperature [41]

100

TkIkRR RTRIohmohm minus+= 0 (431)

where Rohm0 = constant part of the Rohm

kRI = empirical constant in calculating Rohmic (ΩA)

kRT = empirical constant in calculating Rohmic (ΩK)

The values of kRI and kRT used in the simulation study are given in Table 43

3) Concentration Voltage Drop During the reaction process concentration gradients

can be formed due to mass diffusions from the flow channels to the reaction sites

(catalyst surfaces) At high current densities slow transportation of reactants (products)

to (from) the reaction sites is the main reason for the concentration voltage drop [418]

Any water film covering the catalyst surfaces at the anode and cathode can be another

contributor to this voltage drop [41] The concentration overpotential in the fuel cell is

defined as [418]

B

Sconc

C

C

zF

RTV lnminus= (432)

where CS is the surface concentration and CB is the bulk concentration

According to Fickrsquos first law and Faradayrsquos law [420] the above equation can be

rewritten as

)1ln(limit

concI

I

zF

RTV minusminus= (433)

where Ilimi = limitation current (A)

z = number of electrons participating

The equivalent resistance for the concentration loss is

101

)1ln(limit

concconc

I

I

zFI

RT

I

VR minusminus== (434)

Double-Layer Charging Effect In a PEMFC the two electrodes are separated by a

solid membrane (Figure 41) which only allows the H+ ions to pass but blocks the

electron flow [417] [418] The electrons will flow from the anode through the external

load and gather at the surface of the cathode to which the protons of hydrogen will be

attracted at the same time Thus two charged layers of opposite polarity are formed

across the boundary between the porous cathode and the membrane [417] [421] The

layers known as electrochemical double-layer can store electrical energy and behave

like a super-capacitor The equivalent circuit of fuel cell considering this effect is given

in Figure 42 which is similar to the circuit reported in [417] But the values of Ract [see

(429)] and the voltage source are different from what are defined in [417] Ract in [417]

is defined as VactI and the value of voltage source used in [417] is E

Figure 42 Equivalent circuit of the double-layer charging effect inside a PEMFC

In the above circuit C is the equivalent capacitor due to double-layer charging effect

Since the electrodes of a PEMFC are porous the capacitance C is very large and can be

in the order of several Farads [417] [426] Ract and Rconc are equivalent resistances of

102

activation and concentration voltage drops which can be calculated according to (429)

and (434) The voltage across C is

))(( concactC

C RRdt

dVCIV +minus= (435)

The double-layer charging effect is integrated into the modeling by using VC instead

of Vact2 and Vconc to calculate Vout The fuel cell output voltage now turns out to be

ohmCactout VVVEV minusminusminus= 1 (436)

Energy Balance of the Thermodynamics The net heat generated by the chemical

reaction inside the fuel cell which causes its temperature to rise or fall can be written as

losslatentsenselecchemnet qqqqq ampampampampamp minusminusminus= + (437)

where qnet = net heat energy (J)

qchem = Chemical or heat energy (J)

qelec = Electrical energy (J)

qloss = Heat loss (J)

The available power released due to chemical reaction is calculated by

Hnq consumedHchem ∆sdot= 2ampamp (438)

where ∆H = the enthalpy change of the chemical reaction inside the fuel cell

consumedHn 2

amp = H2 consumption rate (mols)

The maximum available amount of electrical energy is [418] [420]

[ ]50

2

20 )(ln OH ppRTGSTHG sdotminus∆=∆minus∆=∆ (439)

where ∆G = Gibbs free energy (Jmol)

103

∆G0 = Gibbs free energy at standard condition4 (Jmol)

∆S = entropy change (JmolmiddotK-1)

The electrical output power is computed as

IVq outelec sdot=amp (440)

The sensible and latent heat absorbed during the process can be estimated by the

following equation [48] [422]

( )( )

VgeneratedOH

lOHroomgeneratedOH

OroominOoutO

HroominHoutHlatentsens

Hn

CTTn

CTnTn

CTnTnq

sdot+

sdotminussdot+

sdotsdotminussdot+

sdotsdotminussdot=+

2

22

222

222

)(

amp

amp

ampamp

ampampamp

(441)

where qsens+latent = sensible and latent heat (J)

inamp = flow rate of species i (mols)

Ci = specific heat capacity of species i [J(molmiddotK)]

HV = Vaporization heat of water (Jmol)

Troom = room temperature (K)

The heat loss which is mainly transferred by air convection can be estimated by the

following formula [422]

cellcellroomcellloss ANTThq )( minus=amp (442)

where hcell = convective heat transfer coefficient [W(m2middotK)] It can be obtained through

experiments [48]

At steady state netqamp = 0 and the fuel cell operates at a constant temperature During

transitions the temperature of fuel cell will rise or drop according to the following

4 1atm 298K

104

equation [422]

netFCFC qdt

dTCM amp= (443)

where MFC is the total mass of the fuel cell stack and CFC is the overall specific heat

capacity of the stack

Dynamic Model Built in MatlabSimulink

A dynamic model for the PEMFC has been developed in MATLABSIMULINK

based on the electrochemical and thermodynamic characteristics of the fuel cell discussed

in the previous section The fuel cell output voltage which is a function of temperature

and load current can be obtained from the model Figure 43 shows the block diagram

based on which the MATLABSIMULINK model has been developed In this figure the

input quantities are anode and cathode pressures initial temperature of the fuel cell and

room temperature At any given load current and time the internal temperature T is

determined and both the load current and temperature are fed back to different blocks

which take part in the calculation of the fuel cell output voltage

105

Mass DiffusionEquations

Thermodynamic Equations

Nernst EquationActivation

Loss CalculationOhmic VoltageDrop Calculation

ConcentrationLoss Calculation

Double-layer Charging Effect

x

Vout

Pa

PcTroom

I

T

Load

Input Output Feedback

- -

+Tinitial

Material Conservation(Fuel amp Oxdiant Delay)

x+-

Figure 43 Diagram of building a dynamic model of PEMFC in SIMULINK

In this block diagram mass diffusion equations (41)-(413) are used to calculate the

effective partial pressures of H2 and O2 Then the Nernst equation (420) and the overall

fuel and oxidant delay effect given by (422) are employed to determine the internal

potential (E) of the fuel cell The ohmic voltage drop equations (430)-(431) activation

voltage drop equations (427)-(429) and concentration voltage drop equations

(433)-(434) together with the double-layer charging effect equation (435) are applied to

determine the terminal (output) voltage of the fuel cell Thermodynamic effects are also

considered via energy balance equations (437)-(443)

Equivalent Electrical Model in Pspice

In practice fuel cells normally work together with other electrical devices such as

power electronic converters Pspice is a valuable simulation tool used to model and

investigate the behavior of electrical devices and circuits An electrical equivalent model

of fuel cell built in Pspice can be used with electrical models of other components to

106

study the performance characteristics of the fuel cell power generation unit A block

diagram to build such model for PEMFC is given in Figure 44 which is also based on

the characteristics discussed previously The development of electrical circuit model for

different blocks in Figure 44 is discussed below

Internal Potential E According to (420)-(426) the internal potential E is a

function of load current and temperature An electrical circuit for the internal potential

block is given in Figure 45 The current and temperature controlled voltage source f1(IT)

in the figure represents the current and temperature dependent part of (420) Note that

the effective partial pressures (

2Hp and

2Op ) given in (420) are current dependent The

current controlled voltage source f2(I) stands for Edcell in (422)

[ ] )298()(ln2

)( 50

2

21 minus+sdotminus= TkNppF

RTNTIf EcellOH

cell (444)

celldcellENIf 2 )( = (445)

C

I

InternalPotential E

Activation Concentration

ThermodynamicBlockTroom

Tinitial

T

TT

Ohmic

T

T

Vout

Figure 44 Diagram of building an electrical model of PEMFC in Pspice

107

f1(IT)

oE0

f2(I)

E

I

Figure 45 Electrical circuit for internal potential E

Circuit for Activation Loss From (428) the activation voltage drop can be divided

into two parts Vact1 and Vact2 Vact1 can be modeled by a constant voltage source in series

with a temperature controlled voltage source Vact2 can be represented by a temperature

and current dependent resistor Ract This resistor is assumed to be composed of a

constant-value resistor (Ract0) a current-dependent resistor (Ract1) and a

temperature-dependent resistor (Ract2) A current-dependent resistor can be easily built in

Pspice by using the polynomial current controlled voltage source model ldquoHPOLYrdquo A

temperature-dependent resistor can be built by Analog Behavioral Models (ABMs) in

Pspice [424] The electrical circuit for activation voltage drop is given in Figure 46 In

this figure with reference to (428) we can write

Ract0

f3(T)

Ract1

Ract2

I

Vact1

Vact2

Vact

Figure 46 Electrical circuit for activation loss

108

aTTf sdotminus= )298()(3 (446)

210 actactactact RRRR ++= (447)

Circuits for Ohmic and Concentration Voltage Drops According to (431) and

(434) both Rohm and Rconc are current and temperature dependent resistors Therefore

they can be modeled in Pspice the same way Ract is modeled Figure 47 shows the

equivalent circuit for ohmic voltage drop

210 ohmohmohmohm RRRR ++= (448)

Rohm0 is the constant part of Rohm With reference to (431) Rohm1=kRImiddotI is the

current-dependent part of Rohm and Rohm2 =-kRTmiddotT is its temperature-dependent part

Rohm0

Rohm1

Rohm2 I

Vohm

Figure 47 Electrical circuit for ohmic voltage drop

The electrical circuit model for concentration voltage drop is shown in Figure 48

210 concconcconcconc RRRR ++= (449)

where Rconc0 is the constant part of Rconc and Rconc1 Rconc2 are its current-dependent

and temperature-dependent parts

109

Rconc0

Rconc1

Rconc2 I

Vconc

Figure 48 Electrical circuit for concentration voltage drop

Equivalent Capacitor of Double-layer Charging Effect In Figure 44 C is the

equivalent capacitance of double-layer charging effect discussed in the previous section

This capacitance can be estimated through the measurement of the dynamic response of a

real fuel cell stack [417] Figure 42 shows how this capacitance is added into the circuit

Thermodynamic Block The analogies between the thermodynamic and electrical

quantities given in Table 41 are employed to develop the electrical circuit model for the

thermodynamic block shown in Figure 44 [423] The thermodynamic property inside the

fuel cell (437)-(443) can therefore be simulated by the circuit shown in Figure 49 The

power consumed by activation ohmic and concentration losses is considered as the heat

source which causes the fuel cell temperature to rise

IVEq outin sdotminus= )(amp (450)

The thermal resistance due to air convection is

)(1 cellcellcellT ANhR sdotsdot= (451)

In Figure 49 the constant voltage source ET represents the environmental

temperature and the voltage across the capacitance (Ch) is the overall temperature of the

fuel cell stack T

110

Environmental

Temperature

RT = Thermal Resistance

Ch = Heat Capacity

RT2 R

T2

Ch

inqamp

T

ET

Figure 49 Equivalent circuit of thermodynamic property inside PEMFC

TABLE 41 ANALOGIES BETWEEN THERMODYNAMIC AND ELECTRICAL QUANTITIES

Electrical Potential U (V) Temperature T(K)

Electrical Current I (A) Heat Flow Rate Ph (W)

Electrical Resistance R (Ohm) Thermal Resistance θ (KW)

Electrical Capacitance C (F) Heat Capacity Ch (JK)

URI = TθPh =

dt

dUCI =

dt

dTCP hh =

Model Validation

By applying the equations and the equivalent electrical circuits discussed in the

previous sections dynamic models for an Avista Labs (Relion now) SR-12 PEMFC stack

were built both in MATLABSIMULINK and Pspice environments The specifications of

SR-12 fuel cell stack are given in Table 42 [425] The electrical model parameter values

used in the simulation studies are listed in Table 43

111

TABLE 42 SPECIFICATIONS OF SR-12

Description Value

Capacity 500W

Number of cells 48

Operating environmental temperature 5degC to 35degC

Operating pressures PH2 asymp 15atm

Pcathode asymp 10atm

Unit Dimensions (WtimesDtimesH) 565times615times345 cm

Weight 44kg

The 9995 pure hydrogen flows at manifold pressure of about 7psi The

environmental air is driven by the SR-12rsquos internal fan to pass through the cathode to

provide oxygen

Experimental Setup To validate the models built in SIMULINK and Pspice real

input and output data were measured on the 500W SR-12 Avista Labs (Relion now)

PEMFC The block diagram of the experimental setup is shown in Figure 410 The

Chroma 63112 programmable electronic load was used as a current load Current signals

were measured by LEM LA100-P current transducers the output voltage was measured

by a LEM LV25-P voltage transducer and the temperature was measured by a k-type

thermocouple together with an analog connector The current voltage and temperature

data were all acquired by a 12-bit Advantech data acquisition card in a PC

112

TABLE 43 ELECTRICAL MODEL PARAMETER VALUES FOR SR-12 STACK

oE0 (V) 589 Ch (F) 22000

kE (VK) 000085 RT (Ω) 00347

τe (s) 800 C (F) 01F (48F for each cell)

λe (Ω) 000333 Rohm0 (Ω) 02793

η0 (V) 20145 Rohm1 (Ω) 0001872timesI

a (VK) -01373 Rohm2 (Ω) -00023712times(T-298)

Ract0 (Ω) 12581 Rconc0 (Ω) 0080312

Ract2 (Ω) 000112times(T-298) Rconc2 (Ω) 00002747times (T-298)

Ract1 (Ω) III

II

311600454501043

10223211067771

233

4456

minus+timesminus

times+timesminusminus

minusminus

Rconc1 (Ω) III

III

010542000555400100890

106437810457831022115

23

455668

minus+minus

times+timesminustimes minusminusminus

Chroma 63112

Programmable

Electronic Load

LEM LV25-P

Voltage

Transducer

LEM LA100-P

Current Transducer

Omega SMCJ

Thermocouple-to-

Analog Connector

PC with an Advantech PCI-1710

12-Bit Data Acquisition Card

K-Type

Thermocouple

SR-12

Internal

Circuit

SR-12

PEMFC

Stack

Istack

Iterminal

Figure 410 Experimental configuration on the SR-12 PEMFC stack

113

Steady-State Characteristics The steady state characteristics of SR-12 were

obtained by increasing the load current from 11A to 205A in steps of 02A every 40

seconds Both the stack current and terminal current (Figure 410) were measured but

only the stack current is used to validate the models since it is the current directly from

the fuel cell stack The experimental average value of V-I curve of the fuel cell is shown

in Figure 411 The steady-state responses of the models in SIMULINK and Pspice are

also given in Figure 411 in order to compare them with the experimental data Both the

SIMULINK and Pspice model responses agree very well with the real data from the fuel

cell stack The voltage drop at the beginning and end of the curves shown in Figure 411

are due to activation and concentration losses respectively The voltage drop in the

middle of the curves (which is approximately linear) is due to the ohmic loss in the fuel

cell stack [418]

Figure 412 shows the power vs current (P-I) curves of the PEMFC stack obtained

from the experimental data and the models The model responses also match well with

experimental data in this case Note that peak output power occurs near the fuel cell rated

output beyond which the fuel cell goes into the concentration zone In this region the

fuel cell output power will decrease with increasing load current due to a sharp decrease

in its terminal voltage

114

5 10 15 20 2522

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

Load Current (A)

PEMFC Output Voltage (V)

Average Value of the Measured DataResponse of the Model in SIMULINKResponse of the Model in Pspice

Upper range of the measured data

Lower range of the measured data

Figure 411 V-I characteristics of SR-12 and models

0 5 10 15 20 250

100

200

300

400

500

600

Load Current (A)

PEMFC Output Power (W)

Average Value of Measured DataModel in SIMULINKModel in Pspice

Lower range of the measured data

Upper range of the measured data

Figure 412 P-I characteristics of SR-12 and models

115

Temperature Response The temperature response of the PEMFC stack shown in

Figure 413 was measured under the same ramp load current as given in the previous

sub-section The temperature was measured as the current increased from 11A to 205A

with a slew rate of 5mAs The temperature response of the SIMULINK and Pspice

models are also given in Figure 413 for comparison with the measured values Although

there are some differences between the model responses and the measured data the

models can predict the temperature response of the fuel cell stack within 35K in the

worst case

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000306

308

310

312

314

316

318

320

Time (s)

Temperature Responses (K)

Measured Data

Model in SIMULINK

Model in Pspice

Figure 413 Temperature responses of the SR 12 stack and models

116

Transient Performance The dynamic property of PEMFC depends mainly on the

following three aspects double-layer charging effects fuel and oxidant flow delays and

thermodynamic characteristics inside the fuel cells Although the capacitance (C) due to

the double-layer charging effect is large (in the order of several Farads for each cell) the

time constant τ=(Ract+Rconc)middotC is normally small (less than 1 second) because (Ract+Rconc)

is small (less than 005Ω for the single cell used in this study) when the fuel cell works in

the linear zone Therefore capacitor C will affect the transient response of PEMFC in the

short time range The transient responses of the models to a fast step load change are

given in Figure 414 It is noted that when the load current steps up the voltage drops

simultaneously to some value due to the voltage drop across Rohm and then it decays

exponentially to its steady-state value due to the capacitance (C)

On the other hand the fuel and oxidant flows cannot follow the load current changes

instantaneously The delays can be in the range from several tens of seconds to several

hundreds of seconds Also the temperature of fuel cell stack cannot change

instantaneously The thermodynamic time constant of a PEMFC can be in the order of

minutes Thus the fuel and oxidant flow delays and the thermodynamic characteristics

will normally dominate the transient responses in the long time operation The

corresponding SIMULINK and Pspice model responses are given in Figure 415 From

this figure it is noticed that the voltage drops below its steady-state value when the load

steps up and then recovers back to its steady-state value in a relatively long time range (in

the order of about hundred seconds to several minutes) As shown in Figures 414 and

415 simulation results agree well with the measured data

117

209 2095 210 2105 211 2115 212 212526

28

30

32

34

36

38

Time (s)

Dynamic Responses in Short Time Range (V)

Measured DataModel in SIMULINKModel in Pspice

Model in Simulink

Model in Pspice

Measured Data

Figure 414 Transient responses of the models in short time range

400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 200026

28

30

32

34

36

38

Time (s)

PEMFC Dynamic Response (V)

Measured DataModel in SIMULINK

Model in Pspice

Measured Data Model in Pspice

Model in SIMULINK

Figure 415 Transient responses of the models in long time range

118

Dynamic Models for SOFC

Introduction

Solid oxide fuel cells are advanced electrochemical energy conversion devices

operating at a high temperature converting the chemical energy of fuel into electric

energy at high efficiency They have many advantages over conventional power plants

and show great promise in stationary power generation applications [427] [428] The

energy conversion efficiency of a SOFC stack can reach up to 65 and its overall

efficiency when used in combined heat and power (CHP) applications ie as an

integrated SOFC-combustion turbine system can even reach 70 [429] Despite slow

start-up and thermal stresses due to the high operating temperature SOFC allows for

internal reforming of gaseous fuel inside the fuel cell which gives its multi-fuel

capability [418] [430]

SOFC modeling is of interest for its performance prediction and controller design

Many SOFC models have been developed some are highly theoretical and are based on

empirical equations eg [431]-[433] and some are more application oriented

[434]-[437] Increased interest in SOFC power plant design and control has led to a

need for appropriate application oriented SOFC models An integrated SOFC plant

dynamic model for power system simulation (PSS) software was presented in [434]

Three operation limits of SOFC power plants were addressed in that paper in order to

achieve a safe and durable cell operation However the thermodynamic properties of

SOFCs were not discussed in the paper A transient model of a tubular SOFC consisting

of an electrochemical model and a thermal model was given in [435] However the

119

dynamic response of the model due to load variations was only investigated in large

(minute) time scale

In this section a dynamic model of a tubular SOFC stack is presented based on its

thermodynamic and electrochemical properties and on the mass and energy conservation

laws with emphasis on the fuel cell electrical (terminal) characteristics The SOFC model

implemented in MATLABSimulinkreg mainly consists of an electrochemical sub-model

and a thermodynamic sub-model The double-layer charging effect [439] is also taken

into account in the model The model responses are studied under both constant fuel flow

and constant fuel utilization operating modes The effect of temperature on the

steady-state V-I (output voltage vs current) and P-I (output power vs current)

characteristics are also studied The dynamic responses of the model are given and

discussed in different time scales ie from small time scale (10-3-10

-1 s) to large time

scale (102-10

3s) The temperature response of the model is given as well The SOFC

model has been used to study the SOFC overloading capability and to investigate the

performance of a SOFC distributed generation system which is reported in Chapters 5

and 6 The model shows the potential to be useful in SOFC related studies such as

real-time control of SOFC and its distributed generation applications

Dynamic Model Development

In this section a mathematical approach is presented for building a dynamic model for

a tubular SOFC fuel cell stack To simplify the analysis the following assumptions are

made

(1) One-dimensional treatment

120

(2) O= conducting electrolytes and ideal gases

(3) H2 fuel and large stoichiometric quantity of O2 at cathode

(4) H2 and O2 partial pressure are uniformly decreased along the anode channel while

the water vapor partial pressure is uniformly increased for normal operations

(5) Lumped thermal capacitance is used in the thermodynamic analysis and the

effective temperature of flowing gases in gas channels (anode and cathode

channels) is represented by its arithmetical mean value ( ) 2out

gas

in

gas

ch

gas TTT +=

(6) The combustion zone is not modeled in this SOFC thermal model The fuel and

air are assumed to be pre-heated

(7) Parameters for individual cells can be lumped together to represent a fuel cell

stack

A schematic diagram of a SOFC is shown in Figure 416 Two porous electrodes

(anode and cathode) are separated by a solid ceramic electrolyte This electrolyte material

(normally dense yttria-stabilized zirconia) is an excellent conductor for negatively

charged ions (such as O=) at high temperatures [418] At the cathode oxygen molecules

accept electrons from the external circuit and change to oxygen ions These negative ions

pass across the electrolyte and combine with hydrogen at the anode to produce water

For the details of principle of operation of SOFC the reader is referred to [418]

[427]-[429]

Effective Partial Pressures In this part expressions for H2 O2 and H2O partial

pressures at anode and cathode channels and their effective values at actual reaction sites

are derived in terms of the fuel cell operating parameters (eg fuel cell temperature fuel

121

and oxidant flow rates and anode and cathode inlet pressures) and the physical and

electrochemical parameters of the fuel cell These partial pressure values will be used to

calculate the fuel cell output voltage

Figure 416 Schematic diagram of a solid oxide fuel cell

As shown in Figure 416 when load current is being drawn H2 and O2 will diffuse

through the porous electrodes to reach the reaction sites and the reactant H2O will diffuse

from the reaction sites to the anode channel As a result H2 H2O and O2 partial pressure

gradients will be formed along the anode and cathode channels when the fuel cell is

under load Assuming uniform variation of gas partial pressures [assumption (4)] the

arithmetic mean values are used to present the overall effective gas partial pressures in

the channels

2

22

2

out

H

in

Hch

H

ppp

+= (452a)

122

2

22

2

out

OH

in

OHch

OH

ppp

+= (452b)

2

22

2

out

O

in

Och

O

ppp

+= (453)

The effective partial pressures of H2 and O2 at the actual reaction sites will be less

than those in the gas flow channels due to mass diffusion In contrast the vapor partial

pressure at reaction sites is higher than that in the anode flow channel In order to

calculate the fuel cell output voltage the effective partial pressures of H2 H2O and O2 at

the reaction sites need to be determined In a gas mixture consisting of N species the

diffusion of component i through the porous electrodes can be described by the

Stefan-Maxwell formulation [41]

sum=

minus=nabla

N

j ji

ijji

iD

NxNx

P

RTx

1

(454)

where xi (xj) = Mole fractions of species i (j)

Dij = effective binary diffusivity of i-j pair (m2s)

Ni(Nj) = Superficial gas flux of species i (j) [mol(m2middots)]

R = gas constant 83143 J(molmiddotK)

T = gas temperature (K)

P = overall pressure of the gas mixture (Pa)

In the anode channel the gas stream is a mixture of H2 and H2O In the

one-dimensional transport process along the x axis shown in Figure 416 the diffusion of

H2 can be simplified as

123

minus=

OHH

HOHOHH

ch

a

H

D

NxNx

P

RT

dx

dx

22

22222

(455)

The molar flux of H2 and H2O can be determined by Faradayrsquos Law [420]

F

iNN den

OHH222

=minus= (456)

Note that 122=+ OHH xx then (455) can be written as

F

i

D

RT

dx

dpden

OHH

H

222

2

minus= (457)

Similarly we can get the one-dimensional Stefan-Maxwell diffusion equation for

H2O

F

i

D

RT

dx

dpden

OHH

OH

222

2

= (458)

Integrating equations (457) and (458) with respect to x from the anode channel

surface to the actual reaction site will yield

den

OHH

ach

HH iFD

RTlpp

22

22

2minus= (459)

den

OHH

ach

OHOH iFD

RTlpp

22

22

2+= (460)

In the cathode channel the oxidant is air that mainly consists of O2 and N2 that is

122asymp+ NO xx Applying the same procedure as above the one-dimensional

Stefan-Maxwell diffusion equation for O2 can be expressed as

minus=

22

22222

NO

ONNO

ch

c

O

D

NxNx

P

RT

dx

dx (461)

124

Since nitrogen does not take part in the chemical reaction the net nitrogen molar flux

normal to the cathode surface can be set to zero

02=NN (462)

The molar flux of O2 is determined by Faradayrsquos Law

F

iN den

O42

= (463)

Equation (461) can now be rewritten as

)1(4 2

22

2

minus= O

NO

ch

c

denOx

DFP

RTi

dx

dx (464)

Similar to the analysis for the anode the effective partial pressure of oxygen at the

reaction site can be found as

( )

minusminus=

22

22

4exp

NO

ch

c

cdench

O

ch

c

ch

cODFP

lRTipPPp (465)

2Hp

2OHp and

2Op calculated from (459) (460) and (465) will be used in the

Nernst equation to find the fuel cell output voltage In the following subsection material

balance equations which will be also used to determine the fuel cell output voltage will

be developed

Material Conservation Equations The instantaneous change of the effective partial

pressures of hydrogen and water vapor in the anode gas flow channel can be determined

through the ideal gas equations as follows [422]

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

V out

H

in

H

ch

Ha

222

2 minusminus= (466a)

125

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

V out

OH

in

OH

ch

OHa

222

2 +minus= (466b)

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

V out

O

in

O

ch

Oc

422

2 minusminus= (467)

Based on assumption (3) mass flow rate for H2 H2O and O2 at the inlet and outlet of

the flow channels can be expressed as

sdot=sdot=

sdot=sdot=

ch

a

out

H

a

out

Ha

out

H

ch

a

in

H

a

in

Ha

in

H

P

pMxMM

P

pMxMM

2

22

2

22

(468a)

sdot=sdot=

sdot=sdot=

ch

a

out

OH

a

out

OHa

out

OH

ch

a

in

OH

a

in

OHa

in

OH

P

pMxMM

P

pMxMM

2

22

2

22

(468b)

sdot=sdot=

sdot=sdot=

ch

c

out

O

c

out

Oc

out

O

ch

c

in

O

c

in

Oc

in

O

P

pMxMM

P

pMxMM

2

22

2

22

(469)

Rewriting (466) and (467) will give

iFV

RTp

PV

RTMp

PV

RTM

dt

dp

a

ch

Hch

aa

ain

Hch

aa

a

ch

H

2

2222

2 minusminus= (470a)

iFV

RTp

PV

RTMp

PV

RTM

dt

dp

a

ch

OHch

aa

ain

OHch

aa

a

ch

OH

2

2222

2 +minus= (470b)

iFV

RTp

PV

RTMp

PV

RTM

dt

dp

c

ch

Och

cc

cin

Och

cc

c

ch

O

4

2222

2 minusminus= (471)

Putting the above equations into Laplacersquos form we obtain

126

minus+

+= )(

4)0()(

)1(

1)(

222sI

FM

PPsP

ssP

a

ch

ach

Ha

in

H

a

ch

H ττ

(472a)

++

+= )(

4)0()(

)1(

1)(

222sI

FM

PPsP

ssP

a

ch

ach

OHa

in

OH

a

ch

OH ττ

(472b)

minus+

+= )(

8)0()(

)1(

1)(

222sI

FM

PPsP

ssP

ch

cch

Oc

in

O

c

ch

O ττ

(473)

where the time constant RTM

PV

a

ch

aaa

2=τ and

RTM

PV

c

ch

ccc

2=τ

The physical meaning of the time constant τa is that it will take τa seconds to fill a

tank of volume Va2 at pressure ch

aP if the mass flow rate is Ma Similar physical

meaning holds for τc

Fuel Cell Output Voltage The overall reaction in a solid oxide fuel cell is [418]

)(222 22 gOHOH =+ (474)

where subscript ldquogrdquo indicates the product H2O is in gas form The corresponding Nernst

equation used to calculate the reversible potential is [418] [420]

sdot+=

2

2

0)(

)(ln

42

22

ch

OH

ch

O

ch

H

cellcellp

pp

F

RTEE (475)

E0cell is a function of temperature and can be expressed as [418]

)298(00 minusminus= TkEE E

o

cellcell (476)

where o

cellE 0 is the standard reference potential at standard state 298 K and 1atm

pressure

Ecell calculated from (475) is actually the open-circuit voltage of the fuel cell

127

However when the fuel cell is under load its output voltage is less than Ecell due to

activation loss ohmic resistance voltage drop and concentration overpotential [418]

[431] The output voltage of a cell can therefore be written as

cellconccellohmcellactcellcell VVVEV minusminusminus= (477)

Applying assumption (7) the output voltage of the fuel cell stack can be obtained as

concohmactcellcellout VVVEVNV minusminusminus== (478)

To calculate the fuel cell output voltage the above three voltage drops will be

calculated first

1) Activation Voltage Drop Action voltage loss is caused by an activation energy

barrier that must be overcome before the chemical reaction occurs The Butler-Volmer

equation is normally used to calculate the activation voltage drop [431]

minusminusminus

=RT

zFV

RT

zFVii actact )1(expexp0 ββ (479)

where i0 = apparent exchange current (A)

β = electron transfer coefficient

i0 is the apparent exchange current which is mainly a function of temperature [438]

[439]

)exp( 210 TkTki aa minussdotsdot= (480)

where ka1 ka2 are empirical constants

Under high activation condition the first term in (479) is much higher than the

second term and the well-known Tafel equation can be obtained from (479) by

neglecting its second term [418] thus

128

=

0

lni

i

Fz

RTV cellact β

(481)

Equation (481) will yield an unreasonable value for Vact when i = 0 According to

[438] the value of β is about 05 for fuel cell applications and (479) can be written as

= minus

0

1

2

sinh2

i

i

zF

RTV cellact (482)

The equivalent activation resistance can then be defined as

== minus

0

1

2

sinh2

i

i

zFi

RT

i

VR

cellact

cellact (483)

According to (482) the activation voltage drop will be zero when load current is

zero The ohmic and concentration voltage drops (discussed in the next two sub-sections)

are also zero when the fuel cell is not loaded (i=0) However even the open-circuit

voltage of a SOFC is known to be less than the theoretical value given by (75) [417]

Similar to the computation of activation voltage of a proton exchange membrane fuel cell

[41] a constant and a temperature-dependent term can also be added to (482) for

activation voltage drop computation of SOFC as follows

cellactcellactcellactcellact VViRTV 1010 +=++= ξξ (484)

where ξ0 = constant term of activation voltage drop (V)

ξ1 = temperature coefficient of second term in activation voltage drop (VK)

TV cellact 100 ξξ += is the part of activation drop affected only by the fuel cell internal

temperature while cellactcellact iRV 1 = is both current and temperature dependent

2) Ohmic Voltage Drop The ohmic resistance of a SOFC consists mainly of the

resistance of the electrolyte electrodes and interconnection between fuel cells In this

129

model only ohmic losses of electrolyte and interconnection are included while the

resistance of electrodes is neglected The overall ohmic voltage drop can be expressed as

cellohmintercohmelecytohmcellohm iRVVV =+= (485)

cellohmR normally decrease as temperature increases it can be expressed as [438]

interc

cell

intercintercelecyt

cell

elecytelecyt

cellohmA

Tba

A

TbaR δδ

)exp()exp( += (486)

3) Concentration Voltage Drop During the reaction process concentration gradients

can be formed due to mass diffusion from the flow channels to the reaction sites (catalyst

surfaces) The effective partial pressures of hydrogen and oxygen at the reaction site are

less than those in the electrode channels while the effective partial pressure of water at

the reaction site is higher than that in the anode channel At high current densities slow

transportation of reactants (products) to (from) the reaction site is the main reason for the

concentration voltage drop [417] [418] The concentration overpotential in the fuel cell

can be obtained as

cconcaconc

OH

OH

ch

OH

ch

O

ch

H

cellconc

VV

p

pp

p

pp

F

RTV

2

2

2

2

)(

)(ln

)(

)(ln

42

22

2

22

+=

sdotminus

sdot=

(487)

minus

+=

)2()(1

)2()(1ln

2222

222

ch

HHOHdena

ch

OHHOHdena

aconcpFDiRTl

pFDiRTl

F

RTV (488)

minusminusminus=

22

2

2

4

exp)(1

ln4 NO

ch

c

cdench

O

ch

c

ch

cch

O

cconcDFp

lRTippp

pF

RTV (489)

The equivalent resistance for the concentration voltage drop can be calculated as

130

i

VR

cellconc

cellconc

= (490)

4) Double-layer charging effect In a SOFC the two electrodes are separated by the

electrolyte (Figure 416) and two boundary layers are formed eg anode-electrolyte layer

and electrolyte-cathode layer These layers can be charged by polarization effect known

as electrochemical double-layer charging effect [417] during normal fuel cell operation

The layers can store electrical energy and behave like a super-capacitor The model for

SOFC considering this effect can be described by the equivalent circuit shown in Figure

417 [417] [444]

Figure 417 Equivalent electrical circuit of the double-layer charging effect inside a

SOFC

In the above circuit Rohmcell Ractcell and Rconccell are equivalent resistances of ohmic

voltage drop activation and concentration voltage drops which can be calculated

according to (486) (483) and (490) respectively C is the equivalent capacitance of the

double-layer charging effect Since the electrodes of a SOFC are porous the value of C is

large and can be in the order of several Farads [417] The voltage across C is

))((

cellconccellact

cellC

cellC RRdt

dVCiV +minus= (491)

131

The double-layer charging effect is integrated into the modeling by using VCcell

instead of Vact1cell and Vconccell to calculate Vcell The fuel cell output voltage now turns

out to be

cellohmcellactcellCcellcell VVVEV 0 minusminusminus= (492)

Then (492) and (478) can be used to calculate the output voltage Vout of a SOFC

stack

Energy Balance of the Thermodynamics The cross section profile and heat transfer

inside a tubular SOFC are shown in Figure 418 [418] [440] One advantage of this

tubular structure is that it eliminates the seal problems between cells since the support

tube of each cell is closed at one end [418] The air is fed through a central air supply

tube (AST) and forced to flow back past the interior of the cell (cathode surface) to the

open end The fuel gas flows past the exterior of the cell (anode surface) and in parallel

direction to the air [418]

The thermal analysis for fuel reformer and combustor are not included in this model

Heat exchanges between cells are also not considered in this model by assuming that

temperature differences between adjacent cells can be neglected Heat transport inside the

fuel cell occurs mainly by means of radiation convection and mass flow

The heat generated by the chemical reaction inside the fuel cell can be written as

elecchemgen qqq ampampamp minus= (493)

The available power released due to chemical reaction is calculated by

Hnq consumedHchem ∆sdot= 2ampamp (494)

where ∆H is the enthalpy change of the chemical reaction inside the fuel cell

132

The real electrical output power is

iVq outelec sdot=amp (495)

Air Air Supply Tube

Fuel Cell

Fuel Cell

Fuel

Fuel

qgen

qconvinner

qconvann

qflowairAST

qflowairann q

rad

qfuel conv q

fuel flow

qconvouter

Figure 418 Heat transfer inside a tubular solid oxide fuel cell

The thermodynamic and energy balance analysis for different parts inside the cell are

discussed below [422] [440]

1) Cell Tube

elecchemgencellin qqqq ampampampamp minus== (496a)

fuelflowfuelconvannairflowannconvradcellout qqqqqq ampampampampampamp ++++= (496b)

dt

dTCmqqq cell

cellcellcelloutcellincellnet =minus= ampampamp (496c)

)( 44

ASTcellouterASTASTrad TTAq minus= σεamp (496d)

)( annaircellinnercellcellannconv TTAhq minus=amp (496e)

( )annairoutannairinairairmwairannairflow TTCMMq minus=amp (496f)

133

)( fuelcelloutercellcellfuelconv TTAhq minus=amp (496g)

OHflowHflowfuelflow qqq22

ampampamp += (496h)

22222 ))(( HmwH

in

fuel

out

fuel

out

H

in

HHflow MCTTMMq minus+=amp (496i)

OHmwOH

in

fuel

out

fuel

out

OH

in

OHOHflow MCTTMMq22222 ))(( minus+=amp (496j)

2) Fuel

fuelflowfuelconvfuelin qqq ampampamp += (497a)

fuelflowfuelout qq ampamp = (497b)

dt

dTCmqqq

fuel

fuelfuelfueloutfuelinfuelnet =minus= ampampamp (497c)

3) Air between Cell and Air Supply Tube (AST)

annairflowanncellconvannairin qqq ampampamp += (498a)

annairflowannairout qq ampamp = (498b)

dt

dTCmqqq

annair

airannairannairoutannairinannairnet

=minus= ampampamp (498c)

4) Air Supply Tube

outerASTconvradASTin qqq ampampamp += (499a)

ASTairflowinnerASTconvASTout qqq ampampamp += (499b)

dt

dTmCqqq AST

ASTASTASToutASTinASTnet =minus= ampampamp (499c)

)( ASTcellairouterASTouterASTouterASTconv TTAhq minus=amp (499d)

134

)( ASTairASTinnerASTinnerASTinnerASTconv TTAhq minus=amp (499e)

( )ASTairoutASTairinairairASTflowair TTCMq minus=amp (499f)

5) Air in AST

ASTairflowinnerASTconvASToutASTairin qqqq ampampampamp +== (4100a)

ASTairflowASTairout qq ampamp = (4100b)

dt

dTmCqqq

ASTair

ASTairairASTairoutASTairinASTairnet

=minus= ampampamp (4100c)

The symbols in the above equations (493-4100) are defined as

m = mass (kg)

Ci = specific heat capacity of species i [J(molmiddotK) or J(kgmiddotK)]

h = heat transfer coefficient [W(m2middotK)]

A = area (m2)

Mi = mole flow rate of species i (mols)

Mmw i = molecular weight of species i (kgmol)

ε = emissivity

σ = Stefan-Boltzmann constant 56696times10-8 Wm-2K-4

The superscripts and subscripts in the above equations are defined as

air Conditions for air

ann Annulus of cell

AST Air supply tube

cell Conditions for a single cell

135

ch Conditions at the anode or cathode channel

chem Chemical

conv Convective

conc Concentration

consumed Material consumed in chemical reaction

gen Material (energy) generated in chemical reaction

flow Flow heat exchange

Fuel Conditions for fuel

H2 Hydrogen

H2O Water

in Conditions of inputinlet

innerouter Innerouter conditions

mw Molecular weight (kgmol)

net Net values

O2 Oxygen

out Output

rad Radiation

Effective value

The thermal model of SOFC will be developed according to (493)-(4100)

Dynamic SOFC Model Implementation A dynamic model for a 5kW SOFC has

been developed in MATLABSimulink based on the electrochemical and thermodynamic

136

characteristics of the fuel cell discussed in the previous section The output voltage of the

fuel cell depends on conditions including fuel composition fuel flow oxidant flow

anode and cathode pressures cell temperature load current and the electrical and thermal

properties of the cell materials Figure 419 shows the block diagram based on which the

model has been developed In this figure the input quantities are anode and cathode

pressures (Pa and Pc) H2 flow rate (MH2) H2O flow rate (MH2O) air flow rate (Mair)

and initial temperature of the fuel cell and air (Tfuelinlet and Tairinlet) At any given load

current and time the cell temperature Tcell is determined and both the load current and

temperature are fed back to different blocks which take part in the calculation of the fuel

cell output voltage

In this block diagram material conservation equations (466)-(473) are used to

calculate the partial pressures of H2 H2O and O2 in flow channels Then the Nernst

equation (475) is employed to determine the internal potential (E) of the fuel cell

Diffusion equations (454)-(465) and the material conservation equations will give the

concentration loss of the cell The ohmic voltage drop is determined by (485) and

activation voltage is computed from (484) Eventually the terminal (output) voltage of

the fuel cell is determined by (478) and (492) and the double-layer charging effect

(491) The thermal model is developed via energy balance equations (493)-(4100)

137

Model Responses under Constant Fuel Flow Operation

Both the steady-state and dynamic responses of the SOFC model under constant flow

operating mode are given in this section The thermodynamic response of the model and

the impact of the operating temperature are also given The dynamic responses of the

model are investigated in different time scales

ch

gasP

gasP

Figure 419 Diagram of building a dynamic model of SOFC in SIMULINK

Steady-State Characteristics The steady-state terminal voltage vs current (V-I)

curves of the SOFC model at different temperatures are shown in Figure 420 These

curves are similar to the real test data reported in [418] [442] The activation voltage

drop dominates the voltage drop in the low-current region As load current increases the

ohmic voltage drop increases fast and becomes the main contribution to the SOFC

voltage drop When the load current exceeds a certain value (140A for this SOFC model)

the fuel cell output voltage will drop sharply due to large ohmic and concentration

voltage drops inside SOFC The variations of the above three voltage drops vs load

138

current at three different temperatures are shown in Figure 421

Figure 420 shows the effect of temperature on the SOFC V-I characteristic curve

The SOFC output voltage is higher at lower temperature in the low current zone while the

voltage is higher at higher temperature in the high current region These simulation

results showing the effect of temperature on SOFC performance are also similar to the

test data given in [418] and [442] The negative temperature coefficient of the

open-circuit internal potential E0cell defined by (476) and the temperature-dependent

activation voltage drop and ohmic voltage drop (shown in Figure 421) are the main

reasons for this kind of temperature dependent performance of the SOFC model As

shown in Figure 421 both the activation and ohmic voltage drops decrease as the fuel

cell temperature increases

0 50 100 1500

20

40

60

80

100

120

Load current (A)

SOFC output voltage (V)

1073K

1173K

1273K

Figure 420 V-I characteristics of the SOFC model at different temperatures

The corresponding output power vs current (P-I) curves of the model at different

139

temperatures are shown in Figure 422 At higher load currents (I gt 40 A) higher output

power can be achieved at higher operating temperatures Under each operating

temperature there is a critical load current point (Icrit) where the model output power

reaches its maximum value For example Icrit is 95 A at 1073 K 110 A at 1173 K and

120 A at 1273 K Beyond these points an increase in the load current will reduce the

output power due to large ohmic and concentration voltage drops

0 50 100 1500

10

20

30

40

50

Load current (A)

Voltage drops (V)

Figure 421 Three voltage drops at different temperatures

140

0 50 100 1500

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Load current (A)

SOFC output power (kW)

Pa = 3atm Pc = 3atm Fuel 90H

2+10H

2O

Constant Flow (0096mols) Oxidant Air(6 Stoichs O

2)

1073K

1173K

1273K

Figure 422 P-I characteristics of the SOFC model at different temperatures

Dynamic Response The dynamic response of the SOFC model is mainly dominated

by the double-layer charging effect the time constants τa and τc [defined in (472) and

(473)] and the thermodynamic property of the fuel cell Although the capacitance (C) of

the double-layer charging effect is large (in the order of several Farads) the time constant

τdlc=(Ractcell+Rconccell)C is normally small (in the order of around 10-2 s) because

(Ractcell+Rconccell) is small (less than 20 mΩ for a single cell used in this study) when the

fuel cell works in the linear zone Therefore capacitor C will only affect the model

dynamic response in small time scale ie 10-3-10

-1 s The operating conditions of the

SOFC model for this simulation study are listed in Table 44 Figure 423 shows the

model dynamic responses in this small time scale under step current changes The load

current steps up from 0 A to 80 A at 01s and then steps down to 30 A at 02 s The lower

part of the figure shows the corresponding SOFC output voltage responses with different

141

capacitance values for the double-layer charging effect When the load current steps up

(down) the fuel cell output voltage drops down (rises up) immediately due to the ohmic

voltage drop Then the voltage drops (rises) ldquosmoothlyrdquo to its final value It is noted that

the larger is the capacitance C the slower the output voltage reaches its final value

because the larger is the effective time constant τdlc

0 005 01 015 02 025 030

50

100

Load current (A)

0 005 01 015 02 025 0360

70

80

90

100

110

Time (s)

SOFC output voltage (V)

C=4F

C=15F

C=04F

Fuel 90 H2 + 10 H

2O

Constant flow 0096 molsOxidant Air (6 Stoichs O

2)

Figure 423 Model dynamic responses with different equivalent capacitance values for

double-layer charging effect in small time scale

TABLE 44 OPERATING CONDITIONS FOR THE MODEL DYNAMIC RESPONSE STUDIES

Temperature (K) 1173

Anode input pressure (atm) 3

Cathode input pressure (atm) 3

Anode H2 flow rate (mols) 00864

Anode H2O flow rate (mols) 00096

Oxidant Air (6 stoichs O2)

142

Time constants τa and τc are in the order of 10-1-10

0 s for the model parameters used

in this dissertation They mainly affect the model dynamic responses in the time scale

10-1 to 10

1 s Figure 424 shows the model dynamic responses in this medium time scale

under the same type of step current changes as shown in Figure 423 The load current

steps up from 0 A to 80 A at 1s and then steps down to 30 A at 11s The operating

conditions of the model are the same as given in Table 44 except for the operating

pressures Figure 424 shows the SOFC output voltage responses under different

operating pressures (Pa = Pc = P) Higher operating pressure gives higher output voltage

and also increases time constants τa and τc [see (472) and (473)] shown in the figure

0 5 10 15 200

50

100

Load current (A)

0 5 10 15 2060

70

80

90

100

110

Time (s)

SOFC output voltage (V)

P=1atm

P=3atmP=9atm

Fuel 90 H2 + 10 H

2O

Constant flow 0096 molsOxidant Air (6 Stoichs O

2)

Figure 424 Model dynamic responses under different operating pressures in medium

time scale

The equivalent thermodynamic time constant of a SOFC can be in the order of tens of

minutes [440] [443] Thus for large time scale (102-10

3 s) the thermodynamic

characteristic will dominate the model dynamic responses Figure 425 shows the

143

transient response of the SOFC model under load changes The model was subjected to a

step change in the load current from zero to 100 A at 10 min and then the current drops

back to 30 A at 120 min The operating conditions are also the same as given in Table 44

except for the varying fuel cell operating temperatures The fuel and air inlet

temperatures are given in the figure When the load current steps up the SOFC output

voltage drops sharply and then rises to its final value When the load current steps down

the output voltage jumps up and then drops slowly towards its final value as shown in

Figure 425

0 50 100 150 200 2500

50

100

Load current (A)

0 50 100 150 200 25020

40

60

80

100

120

SOFC output voltage (V)

Time (Minute)

Figure 425 Model dynamic responses under different inlet temperatures in large time

scale

The corresponding temperature responses of the SOFC model are shown in Figure

426 From this figure the equivalent overall thermodynamic time constant of the model

is around 15 minutes

144

0 50 100 150 200 250950

1000

1050

1100

1150

1200

1250

1300

Time (Minute)

SOFC temperature (K)

Tinlet = 1073K

Tinlet = 1173K

Tinlet = 973K

Figure 426 Model temperature responses

Constant Fuel Utilization Operation

In the previous sections only constant flow operation for the SOFC model was

discussed The fuel cell can also be operated in constant fuel utilization mode in which

the utilization factor will be kept constant The utilization factor is defined as [418]

inHinH

consumedH

M

Fi

M

Mu

22

2 2== (4101)

The direct way to achieve constant utilization operation is to feed back the load

current with a proportional gain )2(1 uF times as shown in Figure 427 to control fuel flow

to the fuel processor As a result the input H2 will change as load varies to keep the fuel

utilization constant As shown in Figure 427 the fuel processor is modeled by a simple

delay transfer function )1(1 +sfτ τf is set to 5s in this dissertation

145

)(1 sf +τ

)2(1 uF times

Figure 427 Constant utilization control

In this section the fuel cellrsquos steady state characteristics and dynamic responses under

constant fuel utilization mode will be discussed The results will also be compared with

those obtained under constant flow operating mode The utilization factor is set for 085

(85 fuel utilization) for this study and other operating conditions are the same as listed

in Table 44 except the fuel and water flow rates that will change as the load current

changes

Steady-state Characteristics Figure 428 shows a comparison between the V-I

characteristic of the SOFC model with constant fuel utilization and constant fuel flow

operating modes The operating conditions for the constant flow operating mode are

listed in Table 44 For this specific study the output voltage under constant flow

operating mode is higher than that under constant utilization mode at the same load

current The voltage difference between the two operating modes keeps getting smaller as

the load current increases The reason for this is that the utilization factor of the constant

flow operation will be getting closer to the utilization factor (085) of the constant

utilization operation as load current increases The corresponding P-I curves also given

in Figure 428 show that the SOFC can provide more power under constant flow

146

operation

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 1600

20

40

60

80

100

120SOFC output voltage (V)

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 1600

1

2

3

4

5

6

Load current (A)

SOFC output power (kW)

Constant Flow

Constant Utilization

Pa = 3atm Pc = 3atmFuel 90H

2+10H

2O

T = 1173K

Figure 428 V-I and P-I characteristics of the SOFC model under constant fuel utilization

and constant fuel flow operating modes

Figure 429 shows the curves of input fuel versus load current for both operation

modes It shows that the constant flow operation mode requires more fuel input

especially at light loading But the unused H2 is not just wasted it can be used for other

purposes [440] or recycled to use again

147

20 40 60 80 100 120 1400

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

Load current (A)

Input H2 flow rate (mols)

Constant Flow

Constant Utilization

Figure 429 H2 input for the constant utilization and constant flow operating modes

Dynamic Responses Dynamic response of the SOFC model in small time scale is

dominated by the double-layer charging effect and in large time scale is mainly

determined by the thermodynamic properties of the fuel cell Both the double-layer

charging effect and the thermodynamic characteristics of the fuel cell are determined by

the fuel cellrsquos physical and electrochemical properties These properties are normally not

affected by whether the SOFC is operating under constant fuel flow mode or constant

fuel utilization mode However the dynamic response in medium time scale will be

affected by the operating mode since the fuel flow rate will change as load varies under

constant utilization operating mode This load-dependent fuel flow rate will give a

load-dependent time constant τa as well Therefore only the dynamic response in this

time scale will be discussed for the constant utilization operating mode

148

Figure 430 shows the model dynamic responses in the medium time scale under

similar step current changes used in the constant fuel flow operating mode The load

current steps up from 0 A to 80 A at 1s and then steps down to 30 A at 31 s The lower

part of Figure 430 shows the corresponding SOFC output voltage responses under

different operating pressures Similar to what is shown in Figure 424 for constant fuel

flow operating mode a higher operating pressure results in a higher output voltage and

larger time constants τa and τc [see (472) and (473)] In this case the dynamic responses

are not determined only by τa and τc but also by the dynamics of the fuel processor The

output voltage curves (Figure 430) show the typical characteristic of a second order

system while the dynamic responses in medium time scale for the constant flow operating

mode (Figure 424) exhibit the characteristic of a first order system Figure 230 shows

that the SOFC output voltage drops as the load current steps up undershoots and then

rises back to its final value While the load current steps down the voltage rises up

overshoots and then drops back to its final value We note that the fuel cell fails to start

up at 1 atm operating pressure due to the delay in the fuel processor which causes

insufficient fuel supply

The selection of a SOFC operating mode depends on the actual desired performance

requirements and is beyond the scope of this dissertation Only the constant fuel flow

operating mode will be studied in the following chapters

149

0 10 20 30 40 50 600

50

100

Load current (A)

0 10 20 30 40 50 6020

40

60

80

100

120

Time (s)

SOFC output voltage (V)

1atm

3atm

9atm

Fuel 90 H2 + 10 H

2O

T = 1173 KConstant utilizationOxidant Air (6 Stoichs O

2)

Starting failure at 1atm

Figure 430 Model dynamic responses under different operating pressures in medium

time scale with constant utilization operating mode

150

Wind Energy Conversion System

Introduction

Among the renewable energy technologies for electricity production wind energy

technology is the most mature and promising one The use of wind energy conversion

systems (WECS) is increasing world-wide (see Chapter 1) Moreover the economic

aspects of wind energy technology are promising enough to justify their use in stand

alone applications as well as grid connected operations

As wind velocity in an area changes continuously the energy available from it varies

continuously This necessitates a need for dynamic models of all systems involved which

are responsive to the changes in the wind to have a better understanding of the overall

system

Induction machines (usually squirrel cage rotor type) are often used for wind power

generation because of their ruggedness and low cost [445] However they are used

mostly in grid-connected operation because of their excitation requirement Induction

machines can be used in stand-alone applications provided that enough reactive

excitation is provided to them for self-excitation [446] [447] Induction generators can

cope with a small increase in the speed from rated value because due to saturation the

rate of increase of generated voltage is not linear with speed Furthermore self excited

induction generator (SEIG) has a self-protection mechanism because its output voltage

collapses when overloaded [448]-[451]

In this section modeling of variable speed wind energy conversion systems is

discussed A description of the proposed wind energy conversion system is presented and

151

dynamic models for both the SEIG and wind turbine are developed In addition the

effects of saturation characteristic on the SEIG are presented The developed models are

simulated in MATLABSimulink [457] Different wind and load conditions are applied

to the WECS model for validation purposes

System Configuration The configuration of the WECS system (Figure 431)

studied in this dissertation is similar to the system shown in Figure 25 (c) A SEIG

driven by a pitch controlled variable speed wind turbine acting as the prime mover is

used to generate electricity The output AC voltage (with variable frequency) of the SEIG

is rectified into DC and then a DCAC inverter is used to convert the DC into 60 Hz AC

For stand-alone operation an excitation compensating capacitor bank is necessary to start

the induction generator For grid-connected application the compensating capacitor bank

can be eliminated from the system However for a weak-grid the reactive power

consumed by the induction generator will deteriorate the situation It is better to have a

generation system with self starting capability Therefore for the wind energy system

studied in this dissertation an excitation capacitor bank is always added regardless of the

system being stand-alone or grid-connected

In this section only the modeling of the components inside the rectangle in Figure 4

31 is discussed The design and modeling of power electronic circuits are discussed later

in this chapter It is noted from the figure that there are two main components inside the

rectangle the wind turbine together with the gear box and the SEIG

152

Figure 431 System block diagram of the WECS

Dynamic Model for Variable Speed Wind Turbine

The following sections explain the modeling and the control principles of the variable

speed pitch controlled wind turbine

Wind Turbine Characteristics The power Pwind (in watts) extracted from the wind is

given in equation 251 It is rewritten here as

)(2

1 3 θλρ pwind CAvP = (4102)

where ρ is the air density in kgm3 A is the area swept by the rotor blades in m

2 v is

the wind velocity in ms Cp is called the power coefficient or the rotor efficiency and is

function of tip speed ratio (TSR or λ see equation 252) and pitch angle (θ) [464]

The maximum rotor efficiency Cp is achieved at a particular TSR which is specific to

the aerodynamic design of a given turbine The rotor must turn at high speed at high

wind and at low speed at low wind to keep TSR constant at the optimum level at all

153

times For operation over a wide range of wind speeds wind turbines with high tip speed

ratios are preferred [453]

In the case of the variable speed pitch-regulated wind turbines considered in this

dissertation the pitch angle controller plays an important role Groups of λCpminus curves

with pitch angle as the parameter obtained by measurement or by computation can be

represented as a nonlinear function [455] [456] [466] The following function is used

( ) )exp( 54321 CCCCCC p minusminusminus= θ (4103)

where θ is the pitch angle

Proper adjustment of the coefficients C1-C5 would result in a close simulation of a

specific turbine under consideration The values for C1-C5 used in this study are listed in

Table 45 The Cp-λ characteristic curves at different pitch angles are plotted in Figure

432 From the set of curves in Figure 432 we can observe that when pitch angle is equal

to 2 degrees the tip speed ratio has a wide range and a maximum Cp value of 035

suitable for wind turbines designed to operate over a wide range of wind speeds With an

increase in the pitch angle the range of TSR and the maximum value of power coefficient

decrease considerably

TABLE 45 PARAMETER VALUES FOR C1-C5

C1 05

C2 116kθ

C3 04

C4 5

C5 21kθ

154

kθ in Table 45 used to calculate C2 and C5 is determined by λ and θ as [455] [456]

[466]

1

3 1

0350

080

1minus

+

minus+

=θθλθk (4104)

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 200

005

01

015

02

025

03

035

04

045

05

TSR λ

Cp

0 deg

1 deg

2 deg

3 deg

4 deg5 deg

10 deg

15 deg

20 deg

30 deg

Figure 432 Cp-λ characteristics at different pitch angles (θ)

For variable speed pitch-regulated wind turbines two variables have direct effect on

their operation namely rotor speed and blade pitch angle [452]-[454] Power

optimization strategy is employed when wind speed is below the turbine rated wind

speed to optimize the energy capture by maintaining the optimum TSR Power limitation

strategy is used above the rated wind speed of the turbine to limit the output power to the

rated power This is achieved by employing a pitch angle controller which changes the

blade pitch to reduce the aerodynamic efficiency thereby reducing the wind turbine

power to acceptable levels as discussed in Chapter 2 The different regions of the

155

above-mentioned control strategies of a variable speed wind turbine system are as shown

in the Figure 433

Figure 433 Variable speed pitch controlled wind turbine operation regions

Pitch Angle Controller The pitch angle controller used in this study employs PI

controllers as shown in Figure 434 [452] [456] [466] These controllers control the

wind flow around the wind turbine blade thereby controlling the toque exerted on the

turbine shaft If the wind speed is less than the rated wind speed the pitch angle is kept

constant at an optimum value If the wind speed exceeds the rated wind speed the

controller calculates the power error (between the reference power and the output power

of the wind turbine) and the frequency error (between the measured stator electrical

frequency of the SEIG and the rated frequency) The output of the controllers gives the

required pitch angle (Figure 434) In this figure the Pitch Angle Rate Limiter block

limits the rate of change of pitch angle as most modern wind turbines consist of huge

rotor blades The maximum rate of change of the pitch angle is usually in the order of 3o

to 10osecond

156

Figure 434 Pitch angle controller

turbineω

λminuspC

genω

ratedω

Figure 435 Simulation model of the variable speed pitch-regulated wind turbine

157

Variable-speed Wind Turbine Model The dynamic model of the variable speed

wind turbine are developed in MATLABSimulink Figure 435 shows the block diagram

of the wind turbine model

The inputs for the wind turbine model are wind speed air density radius of the wind

turbine mechanical speed of the rotor referred to the wind turbine side and power

reference for the pitch angle controller The output is the drive torque Tdrive which drives

the electrical generator The wind turbine calculates the tip speed ratio from the input

values and estimates the value of the power coefficient from the performance curves The

pitch angle controller maintains the value of the blade pitch at optimum value until the

power output of the wind turbine exceeds the reference power input

Dynamic Model for SEIG

There are two fundamental circuit models employed for examining the characteristics

of a SEIG One is the per-phase equivalent circuit which includes the loop-impedance

method adapted by Murthy et al [459] and Malik and Al-Bahrani [460] and the nodal

admittance method proposed by Ouazene and Mcpherson [449] and Chan [461] These

methods are suitable for studying the machinersquos steady-state characteristics Another

method is the dq-axis model based on the generalized machine theory proposed by Elder

et al [448] and Grantham et al [450] and is employed to analyze both the machinersquos

transient as well as steady-state

Steady-state Model Steady-state analysis of induction generators is of interest both

from the design and operational points of view By knowing the parameters of the

158

machine it is possible to determine its performance at a given speed capacitance and

load conditions

Loop impedance and nodal admittance methods used for the analysis of SEIG are

both based on per-phase steady-state equivalent circuit of the induction machine (Figure

436) modified for the self-excitation case They make use of the principle of

conservation of active and reactive powers by writing proper loop equations [459]

[460] [465] or nodal equations [449] [461] for the equivalent circuit These methods

are very effective in calculating the minimum value of capacitance needed for

guaranteeing self-excitation of the induction generator For stable operation excitation

capacitance must be slightly higher than the minimum value Also there is a speed

threshold the cutoff speed of the machine below which no excitation is possible In the

following paragraph a brief description of the loop impedance method is given for better

understanding

The per-unit (pu) per-phase steady-state circuit of a self-excited induction generator

under lagging (RL) load is shown in Figure 436 [459] [449] In the analysis of SEIG

the following assumptions were made [459]

1 Only the magnetizing reactance Xm is assumed to be affected by magnetic

saturation and all other parameters of the equivalent circuit are assumed to be constant

Self-excitation results in the saturation of the main flux and the value of Xm reflects the

magnitude of the main flux Leakage flux passes mainly in the air and thus these fluxes

are not affected to any large extent by saturation of the main flux

159

2 Per unit values of the stator and rotor leakage reactance (referred to stator side)

are assumed to be equal (Xls = Xlr = Xl) This assumption is normally valid in induction

machine analysis

3 Core loss in the machine is neglected

Figure 436 Equivalent T circuit of self-excited induction generator with R-L Load

In the figure the symbols are

Rs Rr R pu per-phase stator rotor (referred to stator) and load resistance

respectively

Xl X Xm pu per-phase statorrotor leakage load and magnetizing reactances (at

base frequency) respectively

Xc pu per-phase capacitive reactance (at base frequency) of the terminal excitation

capacitor

f v pu frequency and speed respectively

Vg V0 pu per-phase air gap and output voltages respectively

For the circuit shown in Figure 436 the loop equation for the current can be written

as

160

I Z = 0 (4105)

where Z is the net loop impedance given by

+

minus+++

+

minus= jX

f

R

f

jXjX

f

RjXjX

vf

RZ c

l

s

ml

r

2 (4106)

For equation (4105) to hold true for any current I the loop impedance (Z) should be

zero This implies that both the real and imaginary parts of Z are zero These two

equations can be solved simultaneously for any two unknowns such as f and Xc

Self-excitation Process The process of self-excitation in induction machines has

been known for several decades [446] [447] When capacitors are connected across the

stator terminals of an induction machine driven by an external prime mover voltage will

be induced at its terminals The induced electromotive force (EMF) and current in the

stator windings will continue to rise until the steady state condition influenced by the

magnetic saturation of the machine is reached At this operating point the voltage will be

stabilized at a given value and frequency In order for self-excitation to occur for a

particular capacitance value there is a corresponding minimum speed [447] [458]

Therefore in stand-alone mode of operation it is necessary for the induction generator to

be operated in the saturation region This guarantees one and only one intersection

between the magnetization curve and the capacitor reactance line as well as output

voltage stability under load as seen in Figure 437 [445] [455]

Under no load the capacitor current cgc XVI = must be equal to the magnetizing

current mgm XVI = when the stator impedance (Rs + jXl) is neglected and the rotor

circuit can be considered as open circuit as shown in Figure 437 The stator phase

161

voltage Vg (Vg = V0 in this case) is a function of magnetizing current Im linearly rising

until the saturation point of the magnetic core is reached With the value of self exciting

capacitance equal to C the output frequency of the self-excited generator is

)π(21 mCXf =

ω

minus

C

1tan 1

Figure 437 Determination of stable operation of SEIG

Dynamic Model of SEIG in dq Representations The process of self-excitation is a

transient phenomenon and is better understood if analyzed using a transient model To

arrive at a transient model of an induction generator an abc-dq0 transformation is used

The dq axis model based on the generalized machine theory proposed by Elder

[448] Salama [458] and Grantham [450] is employed to analyze the machinersquos

transient state as well as steady state To arrive at a transient model of an induction

generator abc-dq0 transformation [462] has been used in this analysis

Figure 438 shows the dq axis equivalent circuit of a self excited induction generator

shown in Figure 436 in stationary reference frame [451] [458] [462]

162

drrλω

+

qsVmL

sr lrL + minus

qrrλωminus

+

minus

dsV mL

srlsL lrL

+ minus

minus

rr

rr

lsL

cqVLZ

cdVLZdsλ

drλ

qrλqsλ

+

minus

minus

+

Figure 438 dq representation of a SEIG (All values are referred to stator)

In the figure rω is the electrical angular velocity of the rotor s(r) subscript denotes

parameters and variables associated with stator (rotor) respectively Vcq (Vqs) and Vcd

(Vds) are q and d axis voltages respectively and iqs (ids) is the q (d) axis component of

stator current Iqr (idr) is the q (d) axis component of rotor current Lls Llr and Lm are stator

leakage rotor leakage and magnetizing inductances of the stator qsλ and dsλ are q and

d axis components of stator flux linkages qrλ and drλ are q and d axis components of

rotor flux linkages

From Figure 438 the equation for no-load operation of SEIG can be written as

shown below

163

+

+

minus+minus

++

++

=

d

q

cdo

cqo

dr

qr

ds

qs

rrrrmmr

rrrrmrm

mss

mss

K

K

V

V

i

i

i

i

pLrLωpLLω

LωpLrLωpL

pL0pC1pLr0

0pL0pC1pLr

0

0

0

0

(4107)

where p = ddt Kd (Kq) is a constant representing initial induced voltage along the d (q)

axis due to the remaining magnetic flux in the core Vcqo and Vcdo are initial q and d

component voltages across the capacitor and Ls=Lls+Lm Lr=Llr+Lm

Equation (4107) can be modified to obtain four first order differential equations as

BAIpI += (4108)

The mechanical system is described by

generdrive TpωP

2JT minus+

= (4109)

where

minusminusminus

minus

minus

minusminusminus

=

rsrrssmmrs

rrsrsmrssm

rmrrmssr

2

m

rrmrmr

2

msr

rLLωLrLLωL

LωLrLLωLrL

rLLωLrLωL

LωLrLωLrL

L

1A

minus

minus

minus

minus

=

dscdm

qscqm

cdrdm

cqrqm

KLVL

KLVL

VLKL

VLKL

L

1B

=

dr

qr

ds

qs

i

i

i

i

I 2

mrs LLLL minus= 0

0

1cq

t

qscq VdtiC

V += int and 0

0

1cd

t

dscd VdtiC

V += int

J - Inertia of the rotor in (Kgm2)

Tdrive ndash wind turbine torque in (Nm)

Te_gen ndash electromagnetic torque by the generator in (Nm)

P ndash number of poles

164

The simulation of the SEIG can be carried out by solving (4108) Since the

magnetization inductance Lm is nonlinear in nature an internal iteration has to be done at

each integration step Given the initial condition from the previous step the

magnetization current can be calculated as shown below [450]

22 )()( qrqsdrdsm iiiiI +++= (4110)

The variation of magnetizing inductance as a function of magnetizing current used in

this study is given by

Lm = 05times[0025+02974timesexp(-004878timesIm)] (4111)

Any combination of R L and C can be added in parallel with the self-excitation

capacitance to act as load For example if resistance R is added in parallel with the

self-excitation capacitance then the term 1pC in the matrix (see 4107) becomes

R(1+RpC) The load can be connected across the capacitors once the voltage reaches a

steady-state value [450] [451] If there is an inductive load connected across the

excitation capacitor it influences the effective value of excitation capacitance such that it

results in an increase in the slope of the straight line of the capacitive reactance (Figure

437) reducing the terminal voltage This phenomenon is more pronounced when the

load inductance gets higher in value A capacitor for individual compensation can be

connected across the terminal of the load in such a way that it follows the load

conditions [463]

Ratings of the induction machine simulated are given in Table 32 (Chapter 3) The

detailed parameters used in modeling the SEIG are given in Table 46 The parameters

are obtained from [462] based on the same pu values of a 500 hp 2300 V induction

165

machine

TABLE 46 SEIG MODEL PARAMETERS

rs 0164 Ω

rr 0117 Ω

Xls 0754 Ω

Xlr 0754 Ω

Lm See (4111)

J 1106 kgm2

C 240 microF

P (Number of poles) 4

All reactances are based on 60 Hz

Responses of the Model for the Variable Speed WECS

The model of a 50 kW variable speed wind energy conversion system consisting of a

pitch-regulated wind turbine and self excited induction generator is developed in

MATLABSimulink environment using SimPowersystems block-set In this sub-section

the model responses under different scenarios are discussed

Wind Turbine Output Power Characteristic Figure 439 shows the wind turbine

output power of the simulated model for different wind velocities It can be observed that

the output power is kept constant at higher wind velocities even though the wind turbine

has the potential to produce more power This is done to protect the electrical system and

to prevent the over speeding of the rotor

166

0 5 10 15 20 250

10

20

30

40

50

Wind Speed (ms)

Output Power (kW)

Figure 439 Wind turbine output power characteristic

Process of Self-excitation in SEIG The process of self-excitation can occur only if

there is some residual magnetism For numerical method of integration residual

magnetism cannot be zero at the beginning of the simulation Therefore non-zero initial

values are set for Kq [andor Kd see equation (4107)] and the rotor speed

The process of voltage build up continues starting with the help of the residual

magnetism until the iron circuit saturates and therefore the voltage stabilizes In other

terms the effect of this saturation is to modify the magnetization inductance Lm such that

it reaches a saturated value the transient then neither increases nor decreases and

becomes a steady state quantity giving continuous self-excitation The energy for the

above process is provided by the kinetic energy of the wind turbine rotor [450] Figure

440 shows the process of a successful self excitation in an induction machine under no

load condition with wind speed at 10ms The value of the excitation capacitor is given in

the figure An unsuccessful self excitation process under the same condition (except a

167

smaller capacitor bank) is shown in Figure 441

0 05 1 15 2 25 3-600

-400

-200

0

200

400

600

Time (s)

Terminal Voltage (V)

C = 240 microF

Figure 440 A successful self excitation process

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

Time (s)

Terminal Voltage (V)

C = 10 microF

Figure 441 Voltage fails to build up

168

Figures 442 and 443 show the variations in magnetizing current and magnetizing

inductance vs time for successful voltage build up of the SEIG From Figures 440 442

and 443 it can be observed that the phase voltage slowly starts building up and reaches a

steady state value as the magnetization current starts from zero and reaches a steady state

value Also we see that the self excitation follows the process of magnetic saturation of

the core and the stable output value is reached only when the machine core is saturated

0 05 1 15 2 25 30

10

20

30

40

50

Time (s)

Magnetizing Current Im (A)

Figure 442 Variation of magnetizing current Im

0 05 1 15 2 25 30

005

01

015

02

Time (s)

Magnetizing Inductance Lm (H)

Figure 443 Variation of magnetizing inductance Lm

169

Model Responses under Wind Speed Changes In this section the responses of the

model for the variable speed WECS to wind speed variations are given and discussed

The wind speed changes are shown in Figure 444 The wind speed used in simulation

steps up from 10 ms to 16 ms at t = 30 s and changes from 16 ms to 8 ms at 60 s

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

Time (s)

Wind Speed (ms)

Figure 444 Wind speed variations used for simulation study

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 800

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Wind Power (kW)

Wind speed 10 ms

Wind speed 16 ms

Wind speed 8 ms

Figure 445 Output power of the WECS model under wind speed changes

170

Figure 445 shows the output power of the WECS The WECS starts to supply power

at 3 s It is noted from the figure that the output power is 162 kW at 10 ms wind speed

50 kW at 16 ms and 486 kW at 8 ms respectively This matches the system output

power characteristic shown in Figure 439

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 801200

1400

1600

1800

2000

2200

2400

2600

Time (s)

Rotor Speed (rpm)

Wind speed 10 ms

Wind speed 16 ms

Wind speed 8 ms

Figure 446 Wind turbine rotor speed

Figure 446 shows the wind turbine rotor speed under the wind speed changes The

rotor speed is a slightly under 1800 rpm (rated speed) when there is no load When the

load is connected at 3 s the speed drops to about 1430 rpm When the wind speed is

increased to 16 ms at 30 s there is a fast increase in rotor speed as shown in Figure

446 Then the pitch controller starts operating to bring the rotor speed down to 1890 rpm

which is the upper limit (+5) of the frequency regulation band in the pitch controller

(see Figure 434) The rotor speed drops to 1257 rpm as the wind speed drops to 8 ms at

60 s

171

Figure 447 shows how the pitch angle changes during the wind speed variation Note

that the pitch angle keeps at the optimum value (2˚ in this study) when the wind speed is

below the nominal value (14 ms) When the wind speed exceeds 14 ms (at 30 s) the

pitch controller begins to work and increases the pitch angle to about 615˚ to keep the

output power constant (at 50 kW) The corresponding Cp is shown in Figure 448

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 802

3

4

5

6

7

Time (s)

Pitch Angle (Degree)

Figure 447 Pitch angle controller response to the wind changes

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 800

01

02

03

04

Time (s)

Cp

Figure 448 Variation of power coefficient Cp

172

Solar Energy Conversion System

The principle of operation of a PV cell is discussed in Chapter 2 In this section

model development of a PV module is given in details The PV model developed for this

study is based on the research work reported in [467]-[470]

Modeling for PV CellModule

The most commonly used model for a PV cell is the one-diode equivalent circuit as

shown in Figure 449 [467]-[470] Since the shunt resistance Rsh is large it normally can

be neglected The five parameters model shown in Figure 449 (a) can therefore be

simplified into that shown in Figure 449 (b) This simplified equivalent circuit model is

used in this study

Figure 449 One-diode equivalent circuit model for a PV cell (a) Five parameters

model (b) Simplified four parameters model

The relationship between the output voltage V and the load current I can be expressed

as

minus

+minus=minus= 1exp0 α

s

LDL

IRUIIIII (4112)

173

where IL = light current (A)

I0 = saturation current (A)

I = load current (A)

U = output voltage (V)

Rs = series resistance (Ω)

α = thermal voltage timing completion factor (V)

There are four parameters (IL I0 Rs and α) that need to be determined before the I-U

relationship can be obtained That is why the model is called a four-parameter model

Both the equivalent circuit shown in Figure 449 (b) and the equation (4112) look simple

However the actual model is more complicated than it looks because the above four

parameters are functions of temperature load current andor solar irradiance In the

remainder of this section procedures are given for determining the four parameters

Light Current IL According to [468] and [469] IL can be calculated as

( )[ ]refccSCIrefL

ref

L TTIΦ

ΦI minus+= micro (4113)

where Φ = irradiance (Wm2)

Φref = reference irradiance (1000 Wm2 is used in this study)

ILref = light current at the reference condition (1000Wm2 and 25 ˚C)

Tc = PV cell temperature (˚C)

Tcref = reference temperature (25 ˚C is used in this study)

microISC = temperature coefficient of the short-circuit current (A˚C)

Both ILref and microISC can be obtained from manufacturer data sheet [469]

174

Saturation Current I0 The saturation current can be expressed in terms of its value

at the reference condition as [468]-[469]

+

+minus

+

+=

273

2731exp

273

273

3

00

c

refc

ref

sgap

c

refc

refT

T

q

Ne

T

TII

α (4114)

where I0ref = saturation current at the reference condition (A)

egap = band gap of the material (117 eV for Si materials)

Ns = number of cells in series of a PV module

q = charge of an electron (160217733times10-19 C)

αref = the value of α at the reference condition

I0ref can be calculated as

minus=

ref

refoc

refLref

UII

α

0 exp (4115)

where Uocref = the open circuit voltage of the PV module at reference condition (V)

The value of Uocref is provided by manufacturers The value calculation for α is

discussed in the next section

Calculation of α According to [469] the value of αref can be calculated as

minus+

minus

minus=

refsc

refmp

refmprefsc

refsc

refocrefmp

ref

I

I

II

I

UU

1ln

2α (4116)

where Umpref = maximum power point voltage at the reference condition (V)

Impref = maximum power point current at the reference condition (A)

Iscref = short circuit current at the reference condition (A)

175

α is a function of temperature which as expressed as

ref

refc

c

T

Tαα

273

273

+

+= (4117)

Series Resistance Rs Some manufacturers provide the value of Rs If not provided

the following equation can be used to estimate its value [469]

refmp

refmprefoc

refsc

refmp

ref

sI

UUI

I

R

1ln minus+

minus

=

α

(4118)

Rs is taken as a constant in the model of this study

Thermal Model of PV From equations (4113) to (4118) it can be noted that the

temperature plays an important role in the PV performance Therefore it is necessary to

have a thermal model for a PV cellmodule In this study a lumped thermal model is

developed for the PV module based on [468] The temperature of the PV module varies

with surrounding temperature irradiance and its output current and voltage and can be

written as

( )aclossPVin

c

PV TTkA

IUΦk

dt

dTC minusminus

timesminus= (4119)

where CPV = the overall heat capacity per unit area of the PV cellmodule [J(˚Cmiddotm2)]

kinPV = transmittance-absorption product of PV cells

kloss = overall heat loss coefficient [W(˚Cmiddotm2)]

Ta = ambient temperature (˚C)

A = effective area of the PV cellmodule (m2)

176

PV Model Development in MATLABSimulink

Based on the mathematical equations discussed before a dynamic model for a PV

module consisting of 153 cells in series has been developed using MATLABSimulink

Figure 450 shows the block diagram of the PV model The input quantities (solar

irradiance Φ and the ambient temperature Ta) together with manufacturer data are used to

calculate the four parameters (4113 -4118) Then based on equation 4112 the output

voltage is obtained numerically The thermal model is used to estimate the PV cell

temperature The two output quantities (PV output voltage U and the PV cell temperature

Tc) and the load current I are fed back to participate in the calculations The model

parameters used in the simulation are given in Table 47 which is based on the values

reported in [468]-[469]

Φ

Figure 450 Block diagram of the PV model built in MATLABSimulink

177

TABLE 47 THE PV MODEL PARAMETERS

ILref (ISCref) 2664 A

αref 5472 V

Rs 1324 Ω

Uocref 8772 V

Umpref 70731 V

Impref 2448 A

Φref 1000 Wm2

Tcref 25 ˚C

CPV 5times104 J(˚Cmiddotm

2)

A 15 m2

kinPV 09

kloss 30 W(˚Cmiddotm2)

Model Performance The model I-U characteristic curves under different irradiances

are given in Figure 451 at 25 ˚C It is noted from the figure that the higher is the

irradiance the larger are the short-circuit current (Isc) and the open-circuit voltage (Uoc)

And obviously the larger will be the maximum power (Pmp) shown in Figure 452 The

maximum power point short-circuit current and open-circuit voltage are also illustrated

in the figures

178

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1000

05

1

15

2

25

3

Output Voltage (V)

Current (A)

Tc = 25 degC 1000 Wm2

800 Wm2

600 Wm2

400 Wm2

200 Wm2

Uoc

Isc

Figure 451 I-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different irradiances

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 900

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

Output Voltage

Output Power (W)

1000 Wm2

800 Wm2

600 Wm2

400 Wm2

200 Wm2

Tc = 25 degC

Pmp

Ump

MaximumPowerPoint

Figure 452 P-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different irradiances

179

Temperature Effect on the Model Performance The effect of the temperature on the

PV model performance is illustrated in Figures 453 and 454 From these two figures it

is noted that the lower the temperature the higher is the maximum power and the larger

the open circuit voltage On the other hand a lower temperature gives a slightly lower

short circuit current

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1000

05

1

15

2

25

3

Output Voltage (V)

Current (A)

Tc = 50 degC

Φ = 1000 Wm20 degC

25 degC

Figure 453 I-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different temperatures

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1000

50

100

150

200

Output Voltage

Output Power (W)

Φ = 1000 Wm2

Tc = 50 degC

0 degC

25 degC

Figure 454 P-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different temperatures

180

Maximum Power Point Tracking Control

Though the capital cost for installing a PV array is decreasing due to recent

technology development (see Chapter 1) the initial investment on a PV system is still

very high compared to conventional electricity generation techniques Therefore it is

very natural to desire to draw as much power as possible from a PV array which has

already been installed Maximum power point tracking (MPPT) is one of the techniques

to obtain maximum power from a PV system

Several different MPPT techniques have been proposed in the literature The

techniques summarized in [472] can be classified as (1) Look-up table methods (2)

Perturbation and observation methods and (3) Model-based computational methods Two

major techniques in the ldquoModel-based computational methodsrdquo category are

voltage-based MPPT (VMPPT) and current-based MPPT (CMPPT) techniques Both the

CMPPT and VMPPT methods have been investigated in [472] for matching resistive

loads and DC motor loads A CMPPT method was reported in [473] for matching a DC

motor load In this study a CMPPT method is proposed to obtain maximum power for the

PV array proposed in the AC-coupled hybrid system (see Figure 33 in Chapter 3)

Current-Based Maximum Power Point Tracking The main idea behind the

current-based MPPT is that the current at the maximum power point Imp has a strong

linear relationship with the short circuit current Isc Isc can either be measured on line

under different operation conditions or computed from a validated model Figure 455

shows the curve of Imp vs Isc It can be noted that Imp has a very good linear dependence

on Isc which can be expressed as

181

Imp = kcmppttimesIsc (4120)

where kcmppt is the current factor CMPPT control

0 05 1 15 2 25 3 35 40

05

1

15

2

25

3

35

Short Circuit Current Isc (A)

Imp (A)

Model response

Curve fitting

y = 09245x

Tc = 25 degC

Figure 455 Linear relationship between Isc and Imp under different solar irradiances

75 80 85 9060

62

64

66

68

70

72

Open Circuit Voltage Uoc (V)

Ump (V)

Model response

Curve fittingTc = 25 degC

y = 06659x+ 119

Figure 456 Ump vs Uoc curve under different solar irradiances

182

The VMPPT control is based on the similar idea Figure 456 shows the relationship

between the voltage at the maximum power point Ump and the open circuit voltage Uoc

By comparing Figure 455 and Figure 456 we can see that Figure 455 shows a stronger

linear relationship This is why the CMPPT is used in this study

Control Scheme The control scheme of the CMPPT for the PV system in the

proposed hybrid system is shown Figure 457 The value of Imp calculated form (4120) is

used as the reference signal to control the buck DCDC converter so that the output

current of the PV system matches Imp This reference value is also used to control the

inverter so that the maximum available of power is delivered to the AC bus shown in

Figure 457

Figure 457 CMPPT control scheme

The details on how to control the power electronic devices will be discussed later in

this chapter

183

Simulation Results Simulation studies have been carried out to verify the proposed

CMPPT method For the purpose of simulation the solar irradiance is kept constant at a

value at 600Wm2 for t lt 40 s At t = 40 s the irradiance changes from 600 Wm

2 to 1000

Wm2 shown in Figure 458 This figure also shows the PV output current Ipv and the

reference Imp which is calculated based on (4120) The error between these two currents

is also illustrated in the figure Note that the proposed CMPPT controller works well to

match the PV output current with Imp The corresponding PV output power and the

calculated maximum power curves of the PV system are shown in Figure 459 The figure

also shows that the maximum power point is tracked well with the proposed CMPPT

method

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 800

05

1

15

2

25

Time (s)

Current (A)

Ta = 25 degC

Φ = 600 Wm2

Φ = 1000 Wm2

PV output current Ipv

The error between Ipv and Imp

Imp

Figure 458 Imp and Ipv curves under the CMPPT control

184

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 8060

80

100

120

140

160

180

Time (s)

Power (W)

Ta = 25 degC

Φ = 600 Wm2

Φ = 1000 Wm2

Output Power

Maximum power

Figure 459 PV output power and the maximum power curves

185

Electrolyzer

The fundamentals of operation of electrolyzer have been discussed in Chapter 2

From electrical circuit aspect an electrolyzer can be considered as a voltage-sensitive

nonlinear DC load For a given electrolyzer within its rating range the higher DC

voltage applied the larger is the load current That is by applying a higher DC voltage

we can get more H2 generated Of course more electrical power is consumed at the same

time The model for an electrolyzer stack developed in this study is based on the

empirical I-U equations reported in [468] and [475] described below

U-I Characteristic

The U-I characteristic of an electrolyzer cell can be expressed as [468] [475]

+

+++

++= 1

ln

2

32121

IA

TkTkkkI

A

TrrUU TTT

elecrevcellelec (4121)

where Ueleccell = is the cell terminal voltage (V)

Urev = reversible cell voltage (V)

r1 r2 = parameters for ohmic resistance (Ωmiddotm2 Ωmiddotm

2˚C)

kelec kT1 kT2 kT3 = parameters for overvoltage (V m2A m

2middot˚CA m

2middot˚C

2A)

A = area of cell electrode (m2)

I = electrolyzer current (A)

T = cell temperature (˚C)

The reversible voltage Urev is determined by the Gibbs free energy change of the

electrochemical process as

186

F

GU rev

2

∆minus= (4122)

It is a function of temperature which can be expressed by an empirical equation as

)25(0 minusminus= TkUU revrevrev (4123)

where 0

revU = reversible cell voltage at standard condition (V)

krev = empirical temperature coefficient of reversible voltage (V˚C)

For an electrolyzer stack consisting of nc cells in series the terminal voltage of the

stack can be expressed as

celleleccelec UnU = (4124)

where nc = number of cells in series

Hydrogen Production Rate

According to Faradayrsquo Law [417] [420] the ideal hydrogen production rate of an

electrolyzer stack is given by

F

Inn cH

22 =amp (4125)

where 2Hnamp = hydrogen production rate (mols)

However the actual hydrogen rate is always lower than the above theoretical

maximum value due to parasitic current losses The actual hydrogen production rate can

be obtained as

F

Inn c

FH2

2 η=amp (4126)

where ηF = current efficiency or Faraday efficiency

The current efficiency (ηF) will increase as the current density grows because the

187

percentage of the parasitic current over the total current decreases A higher temperature

will result in a lower resistance value which leads to higher parasitic current and a lower

current efficiency [475] However in high current density regions the effect of

temperature upon current efficiency is small and can be neglected [468] Hence in this

study ηF is considered as function of current density only An empirical formula for ηF is

given in [475] as

( )( ) 22

1

2

f

f

F kAIk

AI

+=η (4127)

where kf1 kf2 = parameters in current efficiency calculation

Thermal Model

The operating temperature of an electrolyzer stack affects its performance

significantly [see (4121)] Therefore it is necessary to have a thermal model for an

electrolyzer stack In this study a lumped thermal model is developed based on the

findings reported in [468] and [475]

coollossgenelec QQQdt

dTC ampampamp minusminus= (4128)

where T = overall electrolyzer temperature (˚C)

Celec = overall heat capacity of the electrolyzer stack (J˚C)

genQamp is the heat power generated inside the electrolyzer stack It can be written as

( )IUUnQ thcelleleccgen minus= amp (4129)

where Uth is the thermal voltage which is expressed as

188

F

STU

F

STG

F

HU revth

222

∆minus=

∆+∆minus=

∆minus= (4130)

lossQamp is the heat power loss It can be determined by

elecT

a

lossR

TTQ

minus=amp (4131)

where Ta = ambient temperature (˚C)

RTelec = equivalent thermal resistance (˚CW)

coolQamp the heat power loss due to cooling can be written as

( )icmocmcmcool TTCQ minus=amp (4132)

where Ccm = overall heat capacity of the flowing cooling medium per second (W˚C)

Tcmo Tcmi = outlet and inlet temperature of the cooling medium (˚C)

Water is used as the cooling medium for the eletrolyzer stack used in this study Tcmo

can be estimated as [468]

minusminusminus+=

cm

HX

icmicmocmC

kTTTT exp1)( (4133)

where kHX = effective heat exchange coefficient for the cooling process It can be

obtained by the following empirical equation [468] [475]

Ihhk convcondHX sdot+= (4134)

where hcond = coefficient related to conductive heat exchange (W˚C)

hconv = coefficient related to convective heat exchange [W(˚CmiddotA)]

189

Electrolyzer Model Implementation in MATLABSimulink

Based on the mathematical equations discussed previously a dynamic model for an

electrolyzer stack consisting of 40 cells in series (50 kW stack) has been developed in

MATLABSimulink Figure 460 shows the block diagram of the electrolyzer model The

input quantities are the applied DC voltage Uelec ambient temperature Ta inlet

temperature of the cooling water Tcm i and the cooling water flow rate ncm The two

output quantities are the hydrogen production rate 2Hnamp and the stack temperature T The

U-I characteristic block [(4121) - (4124)] calculates the electrolyzer current and the

electrolyzer temperature is estimated by the thermal model block (4128-4134) Based on

the calculated electrolyzer current I the current efficiency block (4126-4127) gives the

hydrogen production rate The model parameters are given in Table 48 which is based

on the values reported in [468] and [475]

2Hnamp

Figure 460 Block diagram of the electrolyzer model built in MATLABSimulink

190

TABLE 48 THE ELECTROLYZER MODEL PARAMETERS

r1 805times10-5 Ωmiddotm

2

r2 -25times10-7 Ωmiddotm

2˚C

kelec 0185 V

t1 -1002 m2A

t2 8424 m2middot˚CA

nc 40

krev 193times10-3 V˚C

Celec 6252times105 J˚C

RTelec 0167 ˚CW

A 025 m2

kf1 25times104 Am

2

kf2 096

hcond 70 W˚C

hconv 002 W(˚CmiddotA)

ncm 600 kgh

Ccm (Based on the value of ncm) 69767 W˚C

191

Electrolyzer Model Performance

The U-I characteristics of the electrolyzer model under different cell temperatures are

given in Figure 461 At the same current the higher the operating temperature the lower

the terminal voltage is needed Figure 462 shows the model temperature responses The

ambient temperature and the inlet temperature of the cooling water are set to 25 ˚C for the

simulation study The applied DC voltage starts at 70 V and steps up to 80 V at hour 5

The stack temperature increases from 25 ˚C to 2537 ˚C and stays at that temperature as

long as the applied voltage is 70 V The temperature increases slowly (in approximately 5

hours) to about 302 ˚C when the output voltage jumps to 80 V

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 50060

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

Current (A)

Voltage (V)

T = 25 degC

T = 50 degC

T = 80 degC

Figure 461 U-I characteristics of the electrolyzer model under different temperatures

192

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1065

70

75

80

85

Time (hour)

Voltage (V)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1025

30

35

Stack Temperature (degC)

Voltage

Temperature

Ta = Tcmi = 25 degC

Figure 462 Temperature response of the model

193

Power Electronic Interfacing Circuits

Power electronic (PE) interfacing circuits also called power conditioning circuits are

necessary for a hybrid energy system like the one proposed in Chapter 3 (see Figure 33)

In this section the electrical circuit diagrams state-space models and effective

average-models (for long-time simulation studies) for the main PE interfacing circuits in

the proposed hybrid energy system are discussed They are ACDC rectifiers DCDC

converters DCAC inverters

A detailed model for a PE device together with the control switching signals will

dramatically decrease the simulation speed using MATLABSimulink The detailed

models for PE devices such as those given in the SimPowerSystems block-set are not

suitable for long time simulation studies Effective average-models for PE devices will be

developed in this section which help improve the simulation speed significantly and at

the same time keep the desirable accuracy

ACDC Rectifiers

Circuit Topologies Basically there are two types of ACDC rectifiers

controllableuncontrollable rectifiers Uncontrollable rectifiers are normally referred to

diode (or diode bridge) rectifiers Figure 463 shows a typical three-phase full diode

bridge rectifier [441]

194

Figure 463 Three-phase full diode bridge rectifier

If Ls = 0 in the above figure the average value of the output DC voltage Vdc is given

as [441]

LLdc VV 23

π= (4135)

where VLL is the AC source line-line RMS voltage

The quality of the output DC voltage is fairly good The voltage ripple is within plusmn 5

However the input AC current ia for example is distorted The AC side inductor Ls can

be increased to reduce the current distortion But this will cause extra voltage drop across

the inductor Another way is to use a Y-Y and a Y-∆ connection transformer to form a

12-diode bridge rectifier as shown in Figure 464 There is a 30˚ phase shift between the

two transformer outputs which reduces the transition period from 60˚ to 30˚ in one (360˚)

period The average value of the DC output voltage now is

195

LLdc VV 26

π= (4136)

where VLL is the line-line RMS voltage of the transformersrsquo output

The output DC voltage ripple now is reduced to within plusmn 115 and the harmonics of

the AC side current are much reduced The total harmonic distortion (THD) of a 12-pulse

rectifier is typically 12 with the 11th and 13th harmonics dominant while the THD of a

6-pulse rectifier is about 30 with the 5th and 7th harmonics dominant [441] [476]

Figure 464 Three-phase 12-diode bridge rectifier with a Y-Y and a Y-∆ transformer

Based on the same principle a 24-diode rectifier can be built using zig-zag

transformer group [476] But it is not used commonly in low power rating applications

Controllable rectifiers are normally firing angle controlled thyristor rectifiers and

pulse width modulated (PWM) rectifiers A PWM rectifier has the same circuit topology

as a PWM inverter which will be discussed later in this section It is just the same circuit

196

working at a different operation modes inverter mode vs rectifier mode Therefore only

the thyristor rectifier is discussed here

A thyristor can work just like a diode with the exception that it starts to conduct

when it is not only forward biased but also its gate receives a positive current pulse and

it continues to be conducting as long as it is still forward biased Thyristors can be used in

Figure 463 and 474 to replace the diodes Figure 465 shows a 6-pulse thyristor rectifier

The output DC voltage can be regulated by controlling the firing angles of thyristors The

firing angle α shown in Figure 465 is the angular delay between the time when a

thyristor is forward biased and the time when a positive current pulse is applied to its gate

For a 6-pulse thyristor rectifier the output DC voltage is [441]

)cos(23

απ LLdc VV = (4137)

where α = firing angle

If cos(α) is taken as the control variable it is noted from the above equation that the

output voltage of a thyristor rectifier is proportional to the control input

197

α

Figure 465 A 6-pulse thyristor rectifier

Simplified Model for Controllable Rectifiers Figure 466 shows the block diagram

of the simplified ideal model for controllable three phase rectifiers This model is

developed for long time simulation studies The ldquoline-line voltage peak valuerdquo block

calculates the peak value of the AC line-line voltage LLV2 The input quantity g which

can be considered as cos(α) is the control variable to regulate the output DC voltage The

output DC voltage is calculated based on (4137) For 6-pulse rectifiers gain kdc is 3π

Then the signal Edc is fed to control a controlled voltage source which actually is the DC

output of the model The series resistor Rs is used to model the power and voltage losses

within a real rectifier The ldquoP Q Calculationrdquo block calculates the amount of the real and

reactive power consumed at the AC side based on the DC side real power and the input

198

quantity power angle θ shown in Figure 466 The ldquodynamic loadrdquo block is a built-in

model in Simulink which consumes the real and reactive power assigned by its P amp Q

inputs

Figure 466 Block diagram of the simplified model for 3-phase controllable rectifiers

Figures 467 and 468 compare the voltage and current responses of the simplified

ideal rectifier model with the detailed rectifier models a 6-pulse model and a 12-pulse

model with the same AC source and the same DC load Figure 467 shows that the

average output DC voltage of the ideal model is slightly higher than those of the detailed

rectifier models Figure 468 shows the AC side phase current of the different models It

is noted that the AC current is distorted for the 6-pulse rectifier model However the

harmonic is much reduced for the 12-pulse rectifier model and the response of this

rectifier model is very close to that of the ideal rectifier model The simplified ideal

199

controllable rectifier model shown in Figure 466 is used in the proposed hybrid energy

system It can improve the simulation speed and at the same time keep the desired

accuracy

032 033 034 035 036265

270

275

Time (s)

Output DC Voltage (V) Ideal rectifier model

6-pulse thyristorrectifier model

12-pulse thyristorrectifier model

Figure 467 DC output voltages of the different rectifier models

032 033 034 035 036

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

30

Time (s)

AC side phase current (A)

Idealrectifiermodel

6-pulsethyristorrectifiermodel

12-pulsethyristorrectifiermodel

Figure 468 AC side phase current of the different rectifier models

200

DCDC Converters

There are many types of DCDC converters In this section only typical boost

converters and buck converters are discussed

Circuit Topologies Figure 469 shows the circuit diagram of a boost DCDC

converter (inside the rectangle) The output voltage regulation feedback is also given in

the figure At steady-state the average value of the output voltage is given as

)1(

_

_d

VV

indd

outdd minus= (4138)

where d is the duty ratio of the switching pulse

Since 10 ltle d the output voltage is always higher than the input voltage5 That is

why the circuit (in Figure 469) is called a boost DCDC converter The controller for the

converter is to regulate the DC bus voltage within a desirable range The output voltage is

measured and compared with the reference value The error signal is processed through

the PWM controller which can be a simple PI controller The output of the controller is

used to generate a PWM pulse with the right duty ratio so that the output voltage follows

the reference value

5 When d=1 the input is short circuited and the circuit will not work This situation should be avoided d

normally is less than 085 [476]

201

Figure 469 Boost DCDC converter

Figure 470 Buck DCDC converter

A buck DCDC converter is shown in Figure 470 At steady-state the average value

of the output voltage is given as

202

inddoutdd dVV __ = (4139)

Since 10 lele d the output voltage of a buck converter is always lower than its input

voltage In contrast to a boost converter a buck converter is a step-down DCDC

converter Its output voltage can also be regulated by controlling the duty ratio (d) of the

switching signals The voltage regulation feedback loop is also shown in Figure 470

State-space Models Based on the State-space Averaging Technique In order to

apply classical control analysis and design methods (such as Nyquist criterion Bode plots

and root loci analysis) in converter controls state-space small-signal models for the

above boost and buck converters are needed and are discussed in this section These

models are based on the state-space averaging technique developed by Middlebrook Cuacutek

and their colleagues [477]

1) State-space model for boost DCDC converters

In Figure 469 take ddLix =1 and Cddvx =2 as state variables Let xXx ~+=

dDd~

+= inddinddindd vVv ___~+= and outddoutddoutdd vVv ___

~+= ldquo~rdquo here is used to

denote small perturbation signals and state variable X denotes the system operating point

When the switch Sdd is on and diode Ddd is off the state-space representation of the

main circuit can be written as

xCv

vBxAx

T

outdd

indd

1_

_11

=

+=amp (4140)

where

minus=

ddRC

A 10

00

1

=

0

11

ddLB and ]10[1 =TC

203

When switch Sdd is off and diode Ddd is on the state-space equation of the circuit

turns out to be

xCv

vBxAx

T

outdd

indd

2_

_22

=

+=amp (4141)

where

minus

minus

=

dddd

dd

RCC

LA

11

10

2

=

0

12

ddLB and ]10[2 =TC

Therefore the average state-space model of the main circuit at the operating point is

xCv

BvAxx

T

outdd

indd

=

+=

_

_amp

(4142)

where

minusminus

minusminus

=

dddd

dd

RCC

d

L

d

A11

)1(0

===

0

121

LBBB and ]10[21 === TTT CCC

Then the small signal model for the boost DCDC converter can be obtained as

xCv

vBdBxAx

T

outdd

inddvdd

~~

~~~~

_

_

=

++=amp (4143)

where

minusminus

minusminus

=

dddd

ddd

RCC

D

L

D

A11

)1(0

minus=

dd

dd

dCX

LXB

1

2

=

0

1 dd

v

LB X1 and X2 are the steady

state values of x1 and x2 respectively

Using Eq (4143) and only considering the perturbation of duty ratio d~ ( inddv _~ =0)

204

the transfer function )(

~)(~

)(_

sd

svsT

outdd

vd = is obtained as

[ ]

minus+minus

minus++

=minus= minus

dddddd

dddddd

dd

T

vdCL

XD

C

sX

CL

D

RCss

BASICsT 21

2

1 )1(

)1()

1(

1)( (4144)

2) State-Space model for buck DCDC converters

Similar to the procedure discussed in the previous part a small-signal state-space

model of a buck converter can be obtained which has been reported in [441] and [476]

as

xCv

dBxAx

T

boutdd

bb

=

+=

_

amp

(4145)

where

=

Cdd

ddL

v

ix

minus

minus=

dddd

ddb

RCC

LA

11

10

=

0

_

dd

indd

b L

V

B ]10[=T

bC

The small signal model can be obtained as

xCv

dBxAx

T

boutdd

bb

~~

~~~~

_ =

+=amp (4146)

where

=

Cdd

ddL

v

ix ~

~~ and

=

0

~ _ ddindd

b

LVB

Similarly the transfer function for the output voltage over duty ratio can be obtained

++

==

dddddd

dddd

inddoutdd

p

CLRC

ssCL

V

sd

svsT

1)(~

)(~

)(2

__ (4147)

205

Averaged Models for DCDC Converters Averaged models for boost and buck

DCDC converters suitable for long time simulation studies are given in this part These

models simulate the DCDC converter transient behavior in large scale rather than the

detailed cycle-to-cycle variations of values of voltages and currents The models

discussed here are based on the models reported in [476]

1) Averaged model for boost DCDC converters

Lddid times

outddVd _times

Figure 471 Averaged model for boost DCDC converters

Comparing the circuit diagram of boost converter in Figure 469 and its averaged

model shown in Figure 471 we can see that the power electronic switch and diode are

replaced by the combination of controlled current and voltage sources in the averaged

model This gives the same performance as the detailed circuit model at large time scale

Figures 472 and 473 show the simulation results of the averaged model and the detailed

circuit model under a load change It is noted from these two figures that the averaged

model can simulate the converter behavior precisely at large time scale with reasonable

accuracy

206

008 009 01 011 012 013 014 015 016120

140

160

180

200

220

240Output Voltage (V)

008 009 01 011 012 013 014 015 016150

200

250

300

350

400

450

Time (s)

Inductor Current (A)

Output Voltage

Inductor Current

Figure 472 Simulation result of the averaged model for boost DCDC converter

008 009 01 011 012 013 014 015 016120

140

160

180

200

220

240

Output Voltage (V)

008 009 01 011 012 013 014 015 016150

200

250

300

350

400

450

Time (s)

Inductor Current (A)

Inductor Current

Output Voltage

Figure 473 Simulation result of the detailed model for boost DCDC converter

207

2) Averaged model for buck DCDC converters

Lddid times

inddVd _times

Figure 474 Averaged model for buck DCDC converters

Figure 474 shows the averaged model for buck converters Simulation results shown

in Figures 475 and 476 illustrate the effectiveness of the averaged model for buck

DCDC converters

008 009 01 011 012 013 01430

40

50

60

Output Voltage (V)

008 009 01 011 012 013 0140

40

80

120

Time (s)

Inductor Current (A)

Inductor Current

Output Voltage

Figure 475 Simulation result of the averaged model for buck DCDC converter

208

008 009 01 011 012 013 01430

40

50

60Output Voltage (V)

008 009 01 011 012 013 0140

40

80

120

Time (s)

Inductor Current (A)

Output Voltage

Inductor Current

Figure 476 Simulation result of the detailed model for buck DCDC converter

DCAC Inverters

Circuit Topology A 3-phase 6-switch DCAC PWM voltage source inverter is used

to convert the power from DC to AC Figure 477 shows the main circuit of a 3-phase

voltage source inverter (VSI) which is connected to the AC bus or utility grid through

LC filters and coupling inductors

State-Space Model For deducing convenience the neutral point N of the AC

system is chosen as the common potential reference point For the purpose of simplicity

only the inverter under balanced loads and without a neutral line (used in this dissertation)

is discussed Define the following switching functions

209

minus=

minus

+

OFFS

ONSd

a

a

1

1

1

minus=

minus

+

OFFS

ONSd

b

b

1

1

2 (4148)

minus=

minus

+

OFFS

ONSd

c

c

1

1

3

Figure 477 3-phase DCAC voltage source inverter

van vbn and vcn (the inverter output voltages between each phase and its imaginary

neutral point n) can be expressed as

=

=

=

dccn

dcbn

dcan

Vd

v

Vd

v

Vd

v

2

2

2

3

2

1

(4149)

where Vdc is the DC bus voltage

The output phase potentials of the inverter va vb and vc can be obtained as

210

+=

+=

+=

ncnc

nbnb

nana

vvv

vvv

vvv

(4150)

where vn is the voltage between the point n and the common reference neutral point N

Since 0=++ fcfbfa iii and 0=++ CBA eee vn is obtained as [478]-[479]

sum=

minus=3

1

6 k

k

dc

n dV

v (4151)

For the circuit shown in Figure 477 the following dynamic equations can be

obtained

++=

++=

++=

scfcf

fc

fc

sbfbf

fb

fb

safaf

fa

fa

viRdt

diLv

viRdt

diLv

viRdt

diLv

(4152)

minus+

minus+=

minus+

minus+=

minus+

minus+=

dt

vvdC

dt

vvdCii

dt

vvdC

dt

vvdCii

dt

vvdC

dt

vvdCii

sbscf

sascfscfc

scsbf

sasbfsbfb

scsaf

sbsafsafa

)()(

)()(

)()(

(4153)

minus=+

minus=+

minus=+

Cscsc

sscs

Bsbsb

ssbs

Asa

sa

ssas

evdt

diLiR

evdt

diLiR

evdt

diLiR

(4154)

Writing the above equations into the state-space form

abcabcabcabcabc UBXAX +=amp (4155)

211

where [ ]Tscsbsascsbsafcfbfaabc iiivvviiiX = [ ]TCBAdcabc eeeVU =

minus

minus

minus

minus

minus

minus

minusminus

minusminus

minusminus

=

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

ff

ff

ff

ff

f

ff

f

ff

f

abc

L

R

L

L

R

L

L

R

L

CC

CC

CC

LL

R

LL

R

LL

R

A

001

00000

0001

0000

00001

000

3

100000

3

100

03

100000

3

10

003

100000

3

1

0001

0000

00001

000

000001

00

and

minus

minus

minus

minus

minus

minus

=

sum

sum

sum

=

=

=

s

s

s

f

k

k

f

k

k

f

k

k

abc

L

L

L

Ldd

Ldd

Ldd

B

1000

01

00

001

0

0000

0000

0000

0006

1

2

0006

1

2

0006

1

2

3

1

3

3

1

2

3

1

1

212

dq Representation of the State-Space Model The dq transformation transfers a

stationary 3-coordinate (abc) system to a rotating 2-coordinate (dq) system The dq

signals can be used to achieve zero tracking error control [478] Due to this merit the dq

transformation has been widely used in PWM converter and rotating machine control

[462] [478] [480]

Using the dq transformation explained in [462] (see Appendix A) the system

state-space equation given in (4155) can be represented in the rotating dq frame as

dqdqdqdqdq UBXAX +=amp (4156)

where

[ ]Tsqsdsqsddqdddq iivviiX = [ ]Tqddcdq eeVU =

=

dc

db

da

dqabc

dq

dd

i

i

i

Ti

i

=

sc

sb

sa

dqabc

sq

sd

v

v

v

Tv

v and

=

C

B

A

dqabc

q

d

e

e

e

Te

e

minusminus

minus

minusminus

minus

minusminusminus

minusminus

=

s

s

s

s

s

s

ff

ff

ff

f

ff

f

dq

L

R

L

L

R

L

CC

CC

LL

R

LL

R

A

ω

ω

ω

ω

ω

ω

1000

01

00

3

100

3

10

03

100

3

1

001

0

0001

minus

minus

=

100

010

000

000

00)(

00)(

3

2

12

3

2

11

f

f

dq

L

dddtf

L

dddtf

B

f1 and f2 are obtained as

213

minus++

minusminus+

minus

=

sum

sumsum

=

==

3

1

3

3

1

2

3

1

1

3

2

11

3

1)

3

2sin(

3

1)

3

2sin(

3

1)sin(

3

1

)(

k

k

k

k

k

k

ddt

ddtddt

dddtf

πω

πωω

minus++

minusminus+

minus

=

sum

sumsum

=

==

3

1

3

3

1

2

3

1

1

3

2

12

3

1)

3

2cos(

3

1)

3

2cos(

3

1)cos(

3

1

)(

k

k

k

k

k

k

ddt

ddtddt

dddtf

πω

πωω

Tabcdq is the abcdq transformation matrix The methodology for developing the

abcdq transformation is explained in [462] (see Appendix A)

214

Ideal Model for Three-phase VSI Figure 478 shows the ideal model for a

three-phase VSI It is not a detailed model with all the power electronic switches and

switching signals it is an idealized model used for long time simulation studies The load

current of the input DC voltage source (Idc) is determined by the power consumed at the

AC side The other three input quantities are the desired output AC frequency f AC

voltage amplitude index (similar to the modulation index in a real VSI control) m and the

initial phase of the three-phase AC output voltages 0φ The ldquoabc signal formationrdquo block

gives the base signals for the three phases va(t) vb(t) and vc(t)

++=

++=

+=

)342sin()(

)322sin()(

)2sin()(

0

0

0

φππφππ

φπ

ftmtv

ftmtv

ftmtv

c

b

a

(4157)

The output voltage values Va(t) Vb(t) and Vc(t) are calculated by multiplying the

base signal values by the possible peak of the output AC which is 05Vdc For example

Va(t) = 05Vdctimesva(t) Then Va(t) Vb(t) and Vc(t) are used to control the three controlled

voltage sources which are the AC output voltages of the inverter model The AC power

is calculated through the ldquoPower Calculationrdquo block as

)()()()()()( tVtItVtItVtIP ccbbaaac times+times+times= (4158)

For the purpose of comparison a 208 V three-phase VSI is simulated to supply 100

kW to a load both by the ideal model shown in Figure 478 and the switched model given

in Figure 477 Figure 479 shows the output AC phase voltage of the two models It is

noted that though there are harmonics in voltage from the switched model its output

voltage waveform is very close to the output from the ideal model when a properly

215

designed filter is applied to the system Figure 480 shows the output power to the load

from the two models We can see that the ideal model output is ideal delivering a

constant power of 100 kW On the other hand a more practical and detailed output power

curve (with ripples) is obtained from the switched model Nevertheless the ideal model is

capable of simulating a VSI with good accuracy at large time scale

Figure 478 Ideal model for three-phase VSI

216

16 161 162 163 164

-150

-100

-50

0

50

100

150

Time (s)

AC phase voltage (V)

Figure 479 AC phase output voltages of the ideal VSI model and the switched VSI

model

16 162 164 166 168 170

50

100

150

200

Time (s)

Output Power (kW)

Switched Model

Ideal Model

Figure 480 Output power of the ideal VSI model and the switched VSI model

217

Battery Model

A validated electrical circuit model for lead-acid batteries shown in Figure 481 was

reported in [481] The diodes in the model are all ideal and just used to select different

resistances for charging and discharging states The model parameters (capacitances and

resistances) defined in Figure 481 are functions of battery current temperature and state

of charge (SOC) [481] [482] However within the voltage range (100plusmn5) there is not

a big difference between the charge and discharge resistances [481] For the purpose of

analysis these component values in the model are considered constant within the100plusmn5

voltage range in this study Then the model shown in Figure 481 can be simplified into

the circuit model given in Figure 482

Cb= battery capacitance Rp= self-discharge resistance or insulation resistance

R2c= internal resistance for charge R2d= internal resistance for discharge

R1c= overvoltage resistance for charge R1d= overvoltage resistance for discharge

C1= overvoltage capacitance

Figure 481 Equivalent circuit model for battery reported in [481]

218

Figure 482 Simplified circuit model for lead-acid batteries

Models for Accessories

Gas Compressor

A gas compressor can be modeled by considering the compression process as a

two-stage polytropic compression which can be described as [422]

CVP m

ii = (4159)

where Pi Vi = the pressure and voltage at stage i (1 2)

m = polytropic exponent

C = constant

Based on the above equation the power needed to compress a gas at pressure P1 to

pressure P2 with the flow rate gasnamp can be obtained as

comp

m

m

x

gascompP

P

m

mRTnP

η1

11

2

1

2

minus

minus=

minus

amp (4160)

where Pcomp = power consumed (W)

gasnamp = gas flow rate (mols)

219

R = gas constant 83144 J(molmiddotK)

T = gas temperature (K)

P2 = exit pressure (Pa)

21PPPx = intermediate pressure (Pa)

P1 = inlet pressure (Pa)

ηcomp = overall efficiency of the compressor

High Pressure H2 Storage Tank

For H2 in the high pressure storage tank shown in Figure 483 the ideal gas equation

does not accurately describe the relation between P V and T a modified equation of state

should be used The Beattie-Bridgeman equation has been successful in fitting the

measured values of pressure volume and temperature in a high-pressure gas storage tank

with good accuracy [422] This modified state equation can be written as

innamp outnamp

Figure 483 Pressured H2 storage tank

2

2

0

032

21

11V

nV

anA

V

bnB

n

V

VT

cn

V

RTnP

minusminus

minus+

minus= (4161)

where P = pressure of hydrogen in the tank (atm)

V = Volume of the tank (liter)

220

T = temperature of H2 (K)

n = number of moles of H2 in the tank

R = Gas constant 008206 atmmiddotliter(molmiddotK)

A0 B0 a b c are constants for certain type of gas Their values for H2 are given

in Table 49

The change of mole number of gas (H2) in the tank is governed by

outin nndt

dnampamp minus= (4162)

TABLE 49 CONSTANTS OF BEATTIE-BRIDGEMAN EQUATION OF STATE FOR H2 [422]

A0 01975 atmmiddotliter2mol

2

B0 002096 litermol

a -000506 litermol

b -004359 litermol

c 00504times104 litermiddotK3mol

Gas Pressure Regulator

Figure 484 shows a schematic diagram of a commonly used gas pressure regulator

[483] Its function is to keep the output pressure Po constant at a desired value (Pref)

under changes of the gas flow rates qo The pressure regulation is achieved by the

deformation of the diaphragm Suppose there is a reduction in Po which will reduce the

pressure against the bottom of the diaphragm This causes the spring force to push

downward to increase the valve opening in the direction axis x Therefore the valve flow

221

is increased and as a result the output pressure Po is raised back toward the reference

value The system can be modeled by the following equations [483]

( )( )oicxi PPkxkq minus+= (4163)

where qi = input flow rate (mols)

kx kc = constants used in calculating fluid resistanceadmittance [mol(Pamiddotsmiddotm)

mol(Pamiddots)]

Figure 484 Gas pressure regulator

The net flow entering the volume below the diaphragm is

( )( ) ooicxoinet qPPkxkqqq minusminus+=minus= (4164)

Normally the diaphragm deformation is small hence the volume V can be considered

constant The dynamic state equation can be written as

ognet PCq amp= (4165)

where Cg = VRT The output pressure Po can be expressed as

A

xkPP s

refo minus= (4166)

where ks = spring constant (Nm)

A = diaphragm area (m2)

Figure 485 shows the model performance under output flow variations and the

222

variations in reference pressure The model is adjusted to keep the output pressure at the

reference value at the flow rate of 01 mols The reference pressure steps up from 2 atm

to 3 atm at 10 s The figure shows that the output pressure follows the reference value

very well It is noted from the figure that the output pressure drops a little bit (from 2 atm

to about 198 atm) when the output flow rate jumps up to 02 mols at 2 s The output

pressure comes back to its preset value (2 atm) when the output flow rate drops back to

01 mols at 6 s

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 1615

2

25

3

35

Pressure (atm)

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 160

01

02

Time (s)

Flow rate (mols)

Output flow rate qo

Output pressure Po

Pref

Figure 485 Performance of the model for gas pressure regulators

223

Summary

In this chapter the model development for the components of the proposed hybrid

alternative energy system is discussed These components are fuel cells (PEMFCs and

SOFCs) variable speed wind energy conversion unit solar power generation unit

electrolyzers power electronic interfacing devices battery bank and accessories

including gas compressor high-pressure H2 storage tank and gas pressure regulator

Performance evaluation of these models is also discussed in this chapter The models will

be used in Chapters 5 and 6 to investigate grid-connected and stand-alone fuel cell power

generation systems and in Chapter 7 for the study of hybrid energy systems

224

REFERENCES

[41] J C Amphlett R M Baumert R F Mann B A Peppley and P R Roberge

ldquoPerformance Modeling of the Ballard Mark IV Solid Polymer Electrolyte Fuel

Cell I Mechanistic Model Developmentrdquo Journal of the Electrochemical Society

Vol 142 No 1 pp 1-8 Jan 1995

[42] J C Amphlett R M Baumert R F Mann B A Peppley and P R Roberge

ldquoPerformance Modeling of the Ballard Mark IV Solid Polymer Electrolyte Fuel

Cell II Empirical Model Developmentrdquo Journal of the Electrochemical Society

Vol 142 No 1 pp 9-15 Jan 1995

[43] R Cownden M Nahon M A Rosen ldquoModeling and Analysis of a Solid Polymer

Fuel Cell System for Transportation Applicationsrdquo International Journal of

Hydrogen Energy Vol 26 No 6 pp 615-623 June 2001

[44] Charles E Chamberlin ldquoModeling of Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cell

Performance with an Empirical Equationrdquo Journal of the Electrochemical Society

Vol 142 No 8 pp 2670-2674 August 1995

[45] Andrew Rowe Xianguo Li ldquoMathematical Modeling of Proton Exchange

Membrane Fuel Cellsrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 102 No 1-2 pp82-96

Dec 2001

[46] D Bevers M Woumlhr ldquoSimulation of a Polymer Electrolyte Fuel Cell Electroderdquo

Journal of Applied Electrochemistry Vol27 No 11 pp 1254-1264 Nov 1997

[47] G Maggio V Recupero L Pino ldquoModeling Polymer Electrolyte Fuel Cells An

Innovative Approachrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 101 No 2 pp275-286 Oct

2001

[48] J C Amphlett R F Mann B A Peppley P R Roberge and A Rodrigues ldquoA

Model Predicting Transient Responses of Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cellsrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 61 No 1-2 pp 183-188 July-Aug 1996

[49] J Hamelin K Agbossou A Laperriegravere F Laurencelle and T K Bose ldquoDynamic

Behavior of a PEM Fuel Cell Stack for Stationary Applicationsrdquo International

Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 26 No 6 pp 625-629 June 2001

[410] M Woumlhr K Bolwin W Schnurnberger M Fischer W Neubrand and G

Eigenberger ldquoDynamic Modeling and Simulation of a Polymer Membrane Fuel

Cell Including Mass Transport Limitationrdquo International Journal of Hydrogen

Energy Vol 23 No 3 pp 213-218 March 1998

225

[411] Hubertus PLH van Bussel Frans GH Koene and Ronald KAM Mallant

ldquoDynamic Model of Solid Polymer Fuel Cell Water Managementrdquo Journal of

Power Sources Vol 71 No 1-2 pp 218-222 March 1998

[412] M Wang M H Nehrir ldquoFuel Cell Modeling and Fuzzy Logic-Based Voltage

Controlrdquo International Journal of Renewable Energy Engineering Vol 3 No 2

August 2001

[413] Michael D Lukas Kwang Y Lee Hossein Ghezel-Ayagh ldquoPerformance Implications of Rapid Load Changes in Carbonate Fuel Cell Systemsrdquo

Proceedings 2001 IEEE Power Engineering Society Winter Meeting Vol 3 pp

979-984 2001

[414] Robert Lasseter ldquoDynamic Models for Micro-turbines and Fuel Cellsrdquo

Proceedings 2001 IEEE Power Engineering Society Summer Meeting Vol 2 pp 761-766 2001

[415] Padmanabhan Srinivasan Ali Feliachi John Ed Sneckenberger ldquoProton Exchange

Membrane Fuel Cell Dynamic Model for Distributed Generation Control

Purposesrdquo Proceedings 34th North American Power Symposium pp 393-398

Oct 2002 Tempe Arizona

[416] Pariz Famouri and Randall S Gemmen ldquoElectrochemical Circuit Model of a PEM

Fuel Cellrdquo Proceedings 2003 IEEE Power Engineering Society Summer Meeting

0-7803-7990-X03 July 2003 Toronto Canada

[417] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained John Wiley amp

Sons Ltd 2001

[418] Fuel Cell Handbook (Sixth Edition) EGampG Services Inc Science Applications

International Corporation DOE Office of Fossil Energy National Energy

Technology Lab Nov 2002

[419] JA Smith MH Nehrir V Gerez and SR Shaw ldquoA Broad Look at the Workings

Types and Applications of Fuel Cellsrdquo Proceedings 2002 IEEE Power

Engineering Society Summer Meeting Vol 1 pp 70-75 July 2002 Chicago IL

[420] G Kortum Treatise on Electrochemistry (2nd Edition) Elsevier Publishing

Company 1965

[421] A Schneuwly M Baumlrtschi V Hermann G Sartorelli R Gallay and R Koetz

ldquoBOOSTCAP Double-Layer Capacitors for Peak Power Automotive Applicationsrdquo Proceedings the Second International ADVANCED

AUTOMOTIVE BATTERY Conference (AABC) Las Vegas Nevada February

2002

226

[422] George N Hatsopoulos and Joseph H Keenan Principles of General

Thermodynamics John Wiley amp Sons Inc 1965

[423] Thomas G Burke and David A Schiller ldquoUsing PSPICE for Electrical Heat

Analysisrdquo IEEE Potentials Vol 22 No 2 pp 35-38 AprilMay 2003

[424] PSpicereg includes PSpice AD PSpice AD Basics and Pspice Reference Guide Cadence Design Systems Inc Release 923

[425] SR-12 Modular PEM GeneratorTM Operatorrsquos Manual Avista Labs July 2000

[426] MT Iqbal ldquoSimulation of a Small Wind Fuel Cell Hybrid Energy Systemrdquo

Renewable Energy Vol 28 No 4 pp 511-522 April 2003

[427] SC Singhal ldquoSolid oxide fuel cells for stationary mobile and military

applicationsrdquo Solid State Ionics Vol 152-153 pp405-410 2002

[428] SC Singhal ldquoAdvances in tubular solid oxide fuel cell technologyrdquo Solid State Ionics Vol 135 pp305-313 2000

[429] O Yamamoto ldquoSolid oxide fuel cells fundamental aspects and prospectsrdquo

Electrochimica Acta Vol 45 No (15-16) pp 2423-2435 2000

[430] K Eguchi H Kojo T Takeguchi R Kikuchi and K Sasaki ldquoFuel flexibility in power generation by solid oxide fuel cellsrdquo Solid State Ionics No 152-153 pp

411-16 Dec 2002

[431] SH Chan KA Khor and ZT Xia ldquoA complete polarization model of a solid

oxide fuel cell and its sensitivity to the change of cell component thicknessrdquo

Journal of Power Sources Vol 93 No (1-2) pp 130-140 Feb 2001

[432] P Aguiar D Chadwick and L Kershenbaum ldquoModeling of an indirect internal

reforming solid oxide fuel cellrdquo Chemical Engineering Science Vol 57

pp1665-1677 2002

[433] P Costamagna and K Honegger ldquoModeling of solid oxide heat exchanger

integrated stacks and simulation at high fuel utilizationrdquo Journal of the

Electrochemical Society Vol 145 No 11 pp 3995-4007 Nov 1998

[434] J Padulleacutes GW Ault and J R McDonald ldquoAn integrated SOFC plant dynamic

model for power system simulationrdquo J Power Sources pp495ndash500 2000

[435] DJ Hall and RG Colclaser ldquoTransient Modeling and Simulation of a Tubular

Solid Oxide Fuel Cellrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 14 No3

pp 749-753 1999

227

[436] RS Gemmen ldquoAnalysis for the effect of inverter ripple current on fuel cell

operating conditionrdquo Transactions of the ASME - Journal of Fluids Engineering

Vol 125 No 3 pp576-585 May 2003

[437] K Acharya SK Mazumder RK Burra R Williams C Haynes Proceeding

38th IAS Annual Meeting (IEEE Industry Applications Society) Vol 3 pp

2026-2032 2003

[438] S H Chan CF Low OL Ding ldquoEnergy and exergy analysis of simple solid-oxide fuel-cell power systemsrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 103 No2

pp 188-200 Jan 2002

[439] S Nagata A Momma T Kato and Y Kasuga ldquoNumerical analysis of output

characteristics of tubular SOFC with internal reformerrdquo Journal of Power Sources

Vol 101 pp60-71 2001

[440] D J Hall Transient Modeling and Simulation of a Solid Oxide Fuel Cell PhD

Dissertation School of Engineering University of Pittsburg Nov 1997

[441] N Mohan T M Undeland and W P Robbins Power Electronics ndash Converters

Applications and Design John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2003

[442] S C Singhal ldquoRecent progress in tubular solid oxide fuel cell technologyrdquo Proceedings the Fifth International Symposium on SOFC (Electrochem Soc) pp

37-50 1997

[443] E Achenbach ldquoResponse of a solid oxide fuel cell to load changerdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 57 No (1-2) pp 105-109 1995

[444] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy

Conversion Vol 20 No 2 pp442-451 June 2005

[445] Rajib Datta and V T Ranganathan ldquoVariable-Speed Wind Power Generation

Using Doubly Fed Wound Rotor Induction Machine ndash A Comparison with

Alternative Schemesrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversions vol 17 no 3 pp 414-420 Sept 2002

[446] C F Wagner ldquoSelf-excitation of induction motorsrdquo Trans Amer Inst Elect Eng

vol 58 pp 47-51 Feb 1939

[447] E D Basset and F M Potter ldquoCapacitive excitation of induction generatorsrdquo Trans

Amer Inst Elect Eng vol 54 no 5 pp 540-545 May 1935

228

[448] J M Elder J T Boys and J L Woodward ldquoSelf-excited induction machine as a

small low-cost generatorrdquo in Proc Inst Elect Eng pt C vol 131 no 2 pp 33-41

Mar 1984

[449] L Ouazene and G Mcpherson Jr ldquoAnalysis of the isolated induction generatorrdquo

IEEE Trans Power Apparatus and Systems vol PAS-102 no 8 pp2793-2798

Aug 1983

[450] C Grantham D Sutanto and B Mismail ldquoSteady-state and transient analysis of self-excited induction generatorsrdquo in Proc Inst Elect Eng pt B vol 136 no 2

pp 61-68 Mar 1989

[451] Dawit Seyoum Colin Grantham and M F Rahman ldquoThe dynamic characteristics

of an isolated self-excited induction generator driven by a wind turbinerdquo IEEE

Trans Industry Applications vol39 no 4 pp936-944 JulyAugust 2003

[452] Eduard Muljadi and C P Butterfield ldquoPitch-Controlled Variable Wind turbine

Generationrdquo IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications vol 37 no 1 pp

240-246 JanFeb 2001

[453] Siegfried Heier Grid Integration of Wind energy Conversion Systems John Wileyamp Sons 1998 ch 1-2

[454] J G Slootweg SWH de Haan H Polinder and WL Kling ldquoGeneral Model for

Representing Variable Speed Wind Turbines in Power System Dynamics

Simulationsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Systems vol 18 no 1 pp 144-151

Feb 2003

[455] Bimal K Bose Modern Power Electronics and Ac Drives Pearson Education 2003

ch 2

[456] P M Anderson and Anjan Bose ldquo Stability Simulation of Wind Turbine systemsrdquo

IEEE Trans on Power and Apparatus and Systems vol PAS-102 no 12 pp

3791-3795 Dec 1983

[457] MatLabSimulink SimPowerSystems Documentation Available httpwwwmathworkscom

[458] M H Salama and P G Holmes ldquoTransient and steady-state load performance of

stand alone self-excited induction generatorrdquo in Proc IEE-Elect Power Applicat

vol 143 no 1 pp 50-58 Jan 1996

[459] S S Murthy O P Malik and A K Tandon ldquoAnalysis of self excited induction

generatorsrdquo in Proc Inst Elect Eng pt C vol 129 no 6 pp 260-265 Nov1982

229

[460] N H Malik and A H Al-Bahrani ldquoInfluence of the terminal capacitor on the

performance characteristics of a self-excited induction generatorrdquo in Proc Inst

Elect Eng pt C vol 137 no 2 pp 168-173 Mar 1990

[461] T F Chan ldquoCapacitance requirements of self-excited induction generatorsrdquo IEEE

Trans Energy Conversion vol 8 no 2 pp 304-311 June 1993

[462] Paul C Krause Oleg Wasynczuk and Scott D Sudhoff Analysis of Electric

Machinery IEEE Press 1994 ch 3-4

[463] M Godoy Simoes and Felix A Farret Renewable Energy Systems-Design and

Analysis with Induction Generators CRC Press 2004 ch 3-6

[464] JG Slootweg ldquoWind power modeling and impact on power system dynamicsrdquo

PhD dissertation Dept Elect Eng Delft University of Technology Delft

Netherlands 2003

[465] A K Al Jabri and AI Alolah ldquoCapacitance requirements for isolated self-excited

induction generatorrdquo Proceedings IEE pt B vol 137 no 3 pp 154-159 May

1990

[466] SR Guda ldquoModeling and power management of a hybrid wind-microturbine

power generation systemrdquo MS thesis Montana State University 2005

[467] Oslash Ulleberg and S O MOslashRNER ldquoTRNSYS simulation models for solar-hydrogen

systems rdquo Solar Energy Vol 59 No 4-6 pp 271-279 1997

[468] Oslashystein Ulleberg Stand-Alone Power Systems for the Future Optimal Design

Operation amp Control of Solar-Hydrogen Energy Systems PhD Dissertation

Norwegian University of Science and Technology Trondheim 1998

[469] TU Townsend A Method for Estimating the Long-Term Performance of

Direct-Coupled Photovoltaic Systems MS thesis University Of Wisconsin ndash

Madison 1989

[470] M R Patel Wind and Solar Power Systems CRC Press LLC 1999

[471] H Dehbonei Power conditioning for distributed renewable energy generation PhD Dissertation Curtin University of Technology Australia 2003

[472] MAS Masoum H Dehbonei and EF Fuchs ldquoTheoretical and experimental

analyses of photovoltaic systems with voltage and current-based maximum

power-point trackingrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 17 No 4

pp 514 ndash 522 Dec 2002

230

[473] JHR Enslin MS Wolf DB Snyman and W Swiegers ldquoIntegrated Photovoltaic

Maximum Power Point Tracking Converterrdquo IEEE Transactions On Industrial

Electronics Vol 44 No 6 December 1997

[474] S M Alghuwainem ldquoMatching of a dc motor to a photovoltaic generator using a

step-up converter with a current-locked looprdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy

Conversion vol 9 pp 192ndash198 Mar 1994

[475] Oslash Ulleberg ldquoModeling of advanced alkaline electrolyzers a system simulation approachrdquo International Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 28 pp 21-33 2003

[476] DW Hart Introduction to Power Electronics Prentice Hall 1997

[477] RD Middlebrook ldquoSmall-signal modeling of pulse-width modulated

switched-mode power convertersrdquo Proceedings of the IEEE Vol 76 No 4 pp 343

ndash 354 April 1988

[478] H Mao Study on Three-Phase High-Input-Power-Factor PWM-Voltage-Type

Reversible Rectifiers and Their Control Strategies PhD Dissertation Zhejiang

University 2000

[479] M Tsai WI Tsai ldquoAnalysis and Design of Three-phase AC-to-DC Converters

with High Power Factor and Near-Optimum Feedforwardrdquo IEEE Transactions on

Industrial Electronics Vol 46 No 3 pp535-543 June 1999

[480] C T RimN S Choi G C Cho G H Cho ldquoA Complete DC and AC Analysis of

Three-Phase Controlled-Current PWM Rectifier Using Circuit D-Q

Transformationrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Electronics Vol 9 No 4 pp

390-396 July 1994

[481] ZM Salameh MA Casacca and WA Lynch ldquoA mathematical model for

lead-acid batteriesrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 7 No1 pp

93-98 1992

[482] Handbook of Batteries 2nd edition D Linden Ed McGraw Hill Inc New York

NY 1995

[483] John Van de Vegte Feedback Control Systems (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall 1994

231

CHAPTER 5

CONTROL OF GRID-CONNECTED

FUEL CELL POWER GENERATION SYSTEMS

Introduction

Fuel cells show great promise to be an important distributed generation (DG) source

of the future due to many advantages they have such as high efficiency zero or low

emission (of pollutant gases) and flexible modular structure Fuel cell DGs can be

strategically placed at any site in a power system (normally at the distribution level) for

grid reinforcement deferring or eliminating the need for system upgrades and improving

system integrity reliability and efficiency When connected to a utility grid important

operation and performance requirements are imposed on fuel cell DGs For example they

should be able to deliver a pre-set amount of real and reactive power to the grid or be

able to follow a time varying load profile [52] [56] [527] Therefore proper

controllers need to be designed for a fuel cell DG to make its performance characteristics

as desired

Among different types of fuel cells proton exchange membrane fuel cells (PEMFC)

solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC) and molten carbonate fuel cells (MCFC) are likely to be

used in DG applications In order to study the performance characteristics of fuel cell

DGs accurate models of fuel cells are needed [51]-[58] Moreover models for the

interfacing power electronic circuits in a fuel cell DG are also needed to design

controllers for the overall system to improve its performance and to meet certain

232

operation requirements [57]-[59]

In this chapter the control of grid-connected FC systems is discussed Both a PEMFC

and a SOFC grid connected system are investigated The PEMFC model the SOFC

model and the models for boost DCDC converters and a three-phase inverter together

with a LC filter and transmission lines reported in Chapter 4 are used in this study The

controller design methodologies for the DCDC converters and the 3-phase inverter are

also presented for the proposed fuel cell DG systems Based on the individual component

models developed and the controllers designed simulation models for both a PEMFC DG

system and a SOFC DG system have been built in MATLABSimulink using the

SimPowerSystems block-set Simulation studies are carried out to investigate the real and

reactive power controllability of the fuel cell DG systems The system performances

under load-following and severe electrical faults are also discussed in this chapter

System Description

In order to meet the system operational requirements a fuel cell DG needs to be

interfaced through a set of power electronic devices The interface is very important as it

affects the operation of the fuel cell system as well as the power grid

Various power electronic circuits have been proposed in recent work to interface

different energy sources with the utility grid [59]-[516] Pulse-width modulated (PWM)

voltage source inverters (VSI) are widely used to interconnect a fuel cell energy system

to a utility grid for real and reactive power control purposes [59] [511] [515] [516]

233

Figure 51 Block diagram of a fuel cell distributed generation system

234

In addition fuel cell systems normally need boost DCDC converters to adapt the fuel

cell output voltage to the desired inverter input voltage and smooth the fuel cell output

current [517] [518]

Figure 51 shows the schematic diagram of the fuel cell DG system proposed in this

study In this dissertation the fuel cell power plant in the figure is either PEMFC or

SOFC type The system configuration ratings and parameters are given in Table 51 The

FC power plant consists of 10 fuel cell arrays connected in parallel Each array is rated at

48kW for a total of 480kW A boost converter is used to adapt the output voltage of each

fuel cell array to the DC bus voltage In this dissertation the DC bus voltage (DCDC

converter output) is chosen as VDC = 480V which is mainly determined by the inverter

AC output voltage and the voltage drop across the LC filter The following equation

should be satisfied between the DC side and AC side voltages of the inverter [515]

2

max

2

)(3)(22

3ILVVm fLLACDCa ω+ge (51)

where VDC is the DC bus voltage VACLL is the AC side line-line RMS voltage Lf is the

filter inductance Imax is the RMS value of maximum AC load current (IAC) and ma is the

modulation index of the inverter Linear pulse-width modulation (PWM) is used for the

inverter ie ma le 10 in this study

For a boost converter the higher the duty ratio (or the larger the voltage difference

between the input and output) the lower is the efficiency [516] In this study a duty ratio

around 55 is used for the DCDC converter at the fuel cellrsquos rated operating point The

approximate desired input voltage for the DCDC converter can be obtained to be

[ ]V216)5501( =timesminus DCV According to the V-I characteristics of the PEMFC given in

235

Figure 411 when the PEMFC load current is over 23A the fuel cell is in the

concentration zone which should be avoided [519] [520] In order to leave some safe

margin the fuel cell is operated around the point where its current is 20A (rated operating

point) and its output voltage (VPEMFC) is about 27V Therefore the number of PEMFC

stacks we need to connect in series to get a voltage of 216V is

827

216===

PEMFC

FC

sV

VN (52)

The number of PEMFC series stacks needed to compose a 48kW fuel cell array is

12508

48=

times=

times=

kW

kW

PN

PN

stacks

array

p (53)

Therefore each PEMFC array is composed of 8times12 stacks with the power rating of

48kW

For a SOFC array its configuration can be determined in a similar way According to

the SOFC V-I and P-I characteristics shown in Figures 420 and 422 when its load

current is over 110 A the SOFC stack is in the concentration zone where its output

voltage will decrease sharply as load current increases this situation should also be

avoided [519] In order to leave some safe margin the fuel cell is operated around the

point where its current is 100 A (rated operating point) and its output voltage (VSOFC) is

about 55 V Therefore the number (Ns) of fuel cell stacks we need to connect in series to

get a voltage of 220 V is

455

220===

SOFC

FC

sV

VN (54)

236

TABLE 51 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS OF THE PROPOSED SYSTEM

216V480kW PEMFC Power Plant

Ten 48kW FC arrays are connected in parallel

216V48kW consisting of PEMFC Array

8 (series)times12 (parallel) 500W fuel cell stacks

216V480kW SOFC Power Plant

Ten 48kW FC arrays are connected in parallel

216V48kW consisting of SOFC Array

200V480V 50kW each

Boost DCDC Converter 10 units connected in parallel

3-phase DCAC Inverter 480V DC208V AC 500kW

LC Filter Lf = 015mH Cf = 3065uF

Vn = 208V125kV Sn = 500kW Step Up Transformer

R1=R2=0005 pu X1=X2=0025 pu

Coupling Inductor Xc = 50Ω

05km ACSR 60 Transmission Line

R = 2149 Ωkm X = 05085 Ωkm

DC Bus Voltage 480V

AC Bus Voltage 120V208V

237

The total power rating of the series connection of 4 SOFC stacks (5 kW each) is 20

kW The number (Np) of these 20 kW SOFC units that need to be connected in parallel to

compose a 40 kW fuel cell array is

254

40=

times=

times=

kW

kW

PN

PN

stacks

array

p (55)

Therefore each 40 kW SOFC array is composed of 4times2 = 8 SOFC stacks (5 kW

each)

Super-capacitors or battery banks are connected to the DC bus to provide storage

capability and fast dynamic response to load transients A 3-phase 6-switch inverter

interfaces the DC bus with a 120208V AC power system An LC filter is connected to

the output of the inverter to reduce the harmonics introduced by the inverter A

208V125kV step up transformer connects the fuel cell power system to the utility grid

through a coupling inductor and a short transmission line The coupling inductor is

needed to control the real and reactive power flow between the fuel cell DG system and

the utility grid and to limit disturbance and fault currents

The controllers for the boost DCDC converters are designed to keep the DC bus

voltage within an acceptable band (plusmn5 in this study) Therefore the input to the 3-phase

inverter can be considered as a fairly good constant voltage source The inverter

controller controls the real and reactive power flows to the utility grid P Q power flows

follow their respective reference values which can either be set as fixed values or to

follow a certain load demand

238

Controller Designs for Power Electronic Devices

It was shown in Figures 411 and 420 that the output voltage of a fuel cell is a

function of load The boost DCDC converter adapts the fuel cell output voltage to the

DC bus voltage and the voltage controller helps regulate the output voltage within a plusmn5

tolerance band under normal operation In this section conventional PI controller is used

for the boost DCDC converters In practice a load sharing controller (not discussed in

this study) can be applied on the converters connected in parallel to achieve a uniform

load distribution among them [528] Also a dq transformed two-loop current control

scheme is presented for the inverter to control the real and reactive power delivered from

the fuel cell power system to the grid Based on the models for power electronic devices

discussed in Chapter 4 the designs for the controllers of power electronic devices are

given in this section

Controller Design for the Boost DCDC Converter

The main components of the DCDC converter can be determined by the prescribed

technical specifications such as the rated and peak voltage and current input current

ripple and output voltage ripple etc using the classic boost DCDC converter design

procedure [515] [516] The component values for the 48kW DCDC converter used in

this study are listed in Table 52 For a boost DCDC converter shown in Figure 469 the

transfer function of the output voltage over duty ratio )(sTvd is obtained as

minus+minus

minus++

==dddddd

dddddd

outdd

vdCL

XD

C

sX

CL

D

RCss

sd

svsT 21

2

_ )1(

)1()

1(

1

)(~

)(~

)( (56)

239

where D is the rated duty ratio of the switch X1 is the average current of inductor Ldd and

X2 is the output voltage at the rated operation point

The transfer function of PWM generator can be expressed as [515] [516]

tri

PWMV

sT1

)( = (57)

where Vtri is the saw-tooth waveform amplitude of PWM generator

The voltage ratio of the voltage transducer in Figure 469 is set as Kd = 1480 to

normalize the output voltage The PWM controller in the figure is chosen as a PI

controller with the transfer function

s

ksksG

didp

dc

+=)( (58)

Based on the transfer function in (56) the PI current controller can be designed using

the classic Bode-plot and root-locus method [521] The overall block diagram of its

control loop is shown in Figure 52 The parameters of the PI voltage controller are also

listed in Table 52 Figure 53 shows the open loop Bode plot of the system It is noted

from the figure that the system is quite stable and has 828deg phase margin

)(~_ sv outdd)(

~sd

Figure 52 Block diagram of the control loop for the boost DCDC converter

240

TABLE 52 SYSTEM PARAMETERS OF THE BOOST DCDC CONVERTER

Ldd 12 mH

Cdd 1000 uF

DN 05833

R 4608 Ω

X1 250 A

X2 480 V

kdi 50

kdp 005

-60

-40

-20

0

20Open-Loop Bode Plot Gc(s)T(s)

GM 884 dB

Freq 364 radsec

Stable loop

Magnitude (dB)

101

102

103

104

0

90

180

270

PM 828 deg

Freq 617 radsec

Phase (deg)

Frequency (radsec)

Figure 53 Bode plot of the control loop of the boost DCDC converter

241

Controller Design for the 3-Phase VSI

In order to meet the requirements for interconnecting a fuel cell system to a utility

grid and control the real and reactive power flow between them it is necessary to shape

and control the inverter output voltage in amplitude angle and frequency [522] In this

section a PWM controller is designed for the inverter shown in Figure 475 to satisfy

voltage regulation as well as to achieve real and reactive power control

Though the state-space equation (4156) in Chapter 4 is sufficient for theoretical

analysis and design it is too complicated to be applied in the actual controller design

from the engineering point of view In order to simplify the analysis and design a control

scheme consisting of an outer voltage regulator with an inner current control loop given

in [523] is adapted for inverter control The inner current control loop is designed to

respond faster than the outer voltage control loop so that these two loops can be

considered separately [523] [524]

Current Control Loop The ramp comparison method is used to generate the six PWM

signals in this study Base on the state-space averaging technique [515] [523] the

average value of the switching functions in a switching period is

( ) 321_

== kV

id

trim

ck

avgk (59)

where ick is the modulating (control) signal and trimV _ is the amplitude of the carrier

signal

Converting the control signals from abc coordinate into the dq frame yields

242

=

3

2

1

0 c

c

c

dqabc

c

cq

cd

i

i

i

T

i

i

i

(510)

where icd and icq are the control signals in dq frame and ic0 = 0 for the balanced system

Tabcdq is the abcdq transformation matrix as given in Appendix A

For the purpose of analysis only unity power factor operation (zero value on q axis)

is discussed in the section The effect of the capacitor Cf in the low pass LC filter (see

Figure 477) on the power frequency current is very small Therefore Cf can be neglected

when designing the current loop controller [523] Based on the state-space formula [see

(4156)] in Chapter 4 the current control loop can be represented in the diagram shown in

Figure 54

sLR ss +1

Figure 54 Block diagram of the current control loop of the inverter

GACR(s) in the figure is the current controller which is chosen as a generic PI

controller

s

ksksG

cicp

ACR

+=)( (511)

KPWM is the gain of the pulse generator

243

mtri

dcPWM

V

VK

_2= (512)

In the figure sLR ss +

1 is the model of the overall equivalent admittance of the LC

filter inductor power transformer coupling inductor and transmission line and kc is

simply the current transducer ratio The parameters of the current control loop are

summarized in Table 53

The transfer function of the current control loop can be obtained as

c

cc

refsd

sdc

P

si

sisT

∆∆

== 11

_ )(

)()( (513)

where )(

11

sLRKGP

ss

PWMACRc += 11 =∆ c

and)(

11

sLRk

KG

ssc

PWMACRc +

+=∆

TABLE 53 PARAMETERS OF THE CURRENT CONTROL LOOP THE INVERTER

Vdc 480 V

Vtri_m 1 V

Rs 0006316 Ω

Ls 01982 mH

kc 1388

kci 250

kcp 25

According to the parameters listed in Table 53 the Bode plot of the current control

loop is given in Figure 55 It is noted that the system is quite stable with phase margin of

882ordm

244

The unit step response of the current control loop is shown in Figure 56 It is noted

that the overshoot is about 25 and the equivalent dominant time constant is about

045ms Therefore the overall current control loop can be approximated by a simple lag

as

s

ksT

i

cc τ+

=1

)(ˆ (514)

where τi (045ms) is the equivalent time constant of the current control loop

The unit step response of )(ˆ sTcis also shown in Figure 56 This approximated

overall transfer function will be used in the following section to design the voltage

control loop

-20

0

20

40

60

80

GM Inf

Freq NaN

Stable loop

Magnitude (dB)

Current Control Loop Bode Plot

100

101

102

103

104

-180

-135

-90

PM 882 deg

Freq 218e+003 radsec

Phase (deg)

Frequency (radsec)

Figure 55 Bode plot of the current control loop

245

0 5 10 15 200

02

04

06

08

1

Time (ms)

Unit Step Response (pu)

Tc(s)

Simple lag approximation

Figure 56 Unit step response of the current control loop and its approximation

Voltage Control Loop Base on the state-space model given in (4156) in Chapter 4

the voltage control loop can be represented by the block diagram shown in Figure 57

For the purpose of analysis only the condition where the q-axis voltage component is

zero is discussed

GAVR

(s)_

+vsd_ref

isd

Rrsquos+Lrsquo

ss

ed

_+

vSd

1kv

s

k

i

c

τ+1

isd_ref

Current

Control Loop

Figure 57 Block diagram of the voltage control loop of the inverter

In the figure the GAVR(s) is the voltage regulator which is also chosen as a PI

246

controller

s

ksksG

vivp

AVR

+=)( (515)

Since the voltage control loop is designed to respond much slower than the inner

current control loop the current control loop can be approximated as a simple lag block

given in (514) to simplify analysis while without loosing accuracy [524]

sLR ss + in Figure 57 is the overall impedance of the power transformer coupling

inductor and transmission line and kv is the voltage transducer ratio The parameters of

the voltage control loop are listed in Table 54

The transfer function of the voltage control loop can be obtained as

v

vv

refsd

sd

v

P

sv

svsT

∆== 11

_ )(

)()( (516)

where ( )

s

sLRksGP

i

sscAVRv τ+

+=

1

)(1 11 =∆ v and

)1(

)()(1

sk

sLRksG

iv

sscAVRv τ+

++=∆

TABLE 54 PARAMETERS OF THE VOLTAGE CONTROL LOOP THE INVERTER

Rrsquos 0005316 Ω

Lrsquos 00482 mH

τi 045 ms

kc 1388

kv 1698

kvi 25

kvp 02

The Bode plot of the voltage control loop is shown in Figure 58 It is noted that the

247

system is stable with phase margin 91ordm

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

GM Inf

Freq NaN

Stable loop

Magnitude (dB)

Bode Plot of the Voltage Control Loop

100

101

102

103

104

105

-180

-90

0

90

Phase (deg)

PM 91 deg

Freq 109 radsec

Frequency (radsec)

Figure 58 Bode plot of the voltage control loop

Control of Power Flow Consider a voltage source δangsV connected to a utility

grid degang0E through a coupling impedance R+jX as shown in Figure 59 The real and

reactive powers delivered to the utility grid are [525]

δangsV degang0E

Figure 59 Power flow between a voltage source and utility grid

248

)cos()cos(2

zzs

Z

E

Z

EVP θδθ minusminus= (517)

)sin()sin(2

zzs

Z

E

Z

EVQ θδθ minusminus= (518)

where 22 XRZ += and )(tan 1 RXz

minus=θ

From (517) and (518) it is clear that the real and reactive powers delivered to the

utility grid are completely determined by the amplitude and angle of the sending voltage

source ie the output voltage of the inverter On the other hand if the desired values of

real and reactive power are given the values of Vs and δ can be determined from (517)

and (518)

2

1

222

2

2

)sin(2)cos(2)(

++++= zzs QZPZEQP

E

ZV θθ (519)

+minus= minus )cos(cos 1

z

ss

zV

E

EV

ZPθθδ (520)

The corresponding dq0 component values of the voltage can be obtained through

abcdq transformation as follows

deg+ang

degminusang

ang

=

=

)120(

)120(

0 δδ

δ

s

s

s

dqabc

c

b

a

dqabcq

d

V

V

V

T

V

V

V

T

V

V

V

(521)

249

Overall Power Control System for the Inverter The overall control system block

diagram for the inverter is given in Figure 510

Figure 510 Block diagram of the overall power control system of the inverter

In Figure 510 the ldquodq Reference Signal Computationrdquo block which is based on

equations (519) and (520) calculates the magnitude and angle of the filtered output

voltages of the inverter and then converts them into dq voltage reference signals

according to (521) The ldquoabcdq Transformationrdquo block takes the current and voltage

values (in abc coordinate) from the voltage and current meters and converts them into dq

values The outer voltage controller takes the error signals between the actual output

voltage in dq frame (Vdq) and the reference voltage (Vdq(ref)) and generates the current

250

reference signals (Idq(ref)) for the current control loop The inner current controller

produces the dq control signals which are converted back into the control signals in abc

coordinates through the ldquodqabc Transformationrdquo block These control signals are used to

modulate the sinusoidal pulse width modulation (SPWM) pulse generator to produce the

proper pulses for the inverter switches (Figure 477) which control the inverter output

voltage

The controllers given in this section for power electronic converters are designed on

the basis of small-signal linearized models Conceptually there is no guarantee that the

designed controllers will work well over a large operating range because of the

nonlinearity of power electronic devices Nevertheless the majority of controllers for

power electronic devices are linear time-invariant (LTI) that are designed on the basis of

linearized models The effectiveness of LTI controllers can be checked through

simulations on switched (nonlinear) models rather than the linearized ones used for the

initial controller design [530] We have verified the validity of the proposed control

schemes over a large operating range through simulations on nonlinear converterinverter

models The simulation results will be discussed in the following section

Simulation Results

Based on the individual component models developed in Chapter 4 and the

controllers designed in this chapter simulation models for both a PEMFC DG system and

a SOFC DG system have been built in MATLABSimulink using SimPowerSystems

block-set The system was tested under several different operating conditions to

investigate its power management and load-following capabilities as well as its stability

251

during electrical faults Sample simulation results from the scenarios studied are given

below

Desired P and Q Delivered to the Grid Heavy Loading

Normally when a utility is under heavy load it needs the connected DGs to deliver

more real power to the grid The DGs may also be required to deliver reactive power to

the grid to help boost the grid voltage Simulation results for such a scenario are given in

this sub-section for both PEMFC and SOFC DGs

PEMFC DG The reference values of P and Q are set as 360kW and 323kVar with a

ramp startup with 2s for this case study The voltage of the utility grid was set to E =

098 degang0 pu Using (519) and (520) the desired magnitude and angle of the filtered

output voltage of the inverter turn out to be Vs = 105 pu δ = 82678ordm Converting the

values from the abc reference frame into dq coordinates yields Vd (ref) = 10391 pu and

Vq (ref) = 0151 pu A 3-phase AC circuit breaker connects the inverter to the utility grid at

t=008s Figure 511 shows the real and reactive power delivered from the PEMFC DG

to the grid when the DG reaches its steady-state operation from the initial startup Note

that the output steady-state values of P and Q agree with their reference values very well

The corresponding dq components of the inverter output voltage are given in Figure 512

It is noted that the dq components of the output voltage also reach their prescribed

reference values

252

0 1 2 3 4 50

1

2

3

4x 10

5

P (W)

0 1 2 3 4 5-5

0

5

10

15x 10

4

Time (s)

Q (Var)

Pref = 360kW

Qref = 323kVar

Figure 511 PEMFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under heavy loading

0 1 2 3 4 5-05

0

05

1

15

2

Time (s)

dq Values of the Inverter Output Voltage (pu)

Vd reference value = 10391

Vq reference value = 0151

Figure 512 PEMFC DG dq values of the inverter output voltage under heavy load

253

The output voltage and current responses of each fuel cell array for this case are

shown in Figure 513 Note that when the system reaches steady-state the fuel cell output

current ripple is about 10 and the fuel cell output voltage ripple is less than 33 These

relatively small variations of the current and voltage are indicative of the healthy

operation of fuel cells [526] The DC bus voltage (output voltage of the boost DCDC

converter) for this case is shown in Figure 514 Note that the DC bus voltage comes up

to its reference value (480V) though the fuel cell terminal voltage is much lower than its

no-load value under this heavy loading condition (see Figure 513) The voltage ripple at

the DC bus is about 125 which is within the acceptable range of plusmn5

0 1 2 3 4 5150

200

250

300

350

FC Output Voltage (V)

0 1 2 3 4 5-100

0

100

200

300

Time (s)

FC Output Current (A)

Figure 513 PEMFC DG Output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under

heavy load

254

0 1 2 3 4 5300

400

500

600

700

Time (s)

DC Bus Voltage (V)

Desired Voltage = 480V

Figure 514 PEMFC DG DC bus voltage waveform under heavy load

SOFC DG The reference values of P and Q (Pref and Qref in Figure 510) are set as

450 kW and 845 kVar (heavy loading) with a ramp startup in 2s for this case study The

voltage of the utility grid was set to E = 098 degang0 pu Figure 515 shows the reference

and actual values of the real and reactive power delivered from the SOFC DG to the grid

Note that the final values of P and Q (delivered to the grid by the SOFC DG) agree with

their reference values very well

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-200

0

200

400

600

P (kW)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-100

0

100

200

Time (s)

Q (kVar)

Qref = 845kVar

Pref = 450 kW

Figure 515 SOFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under heavy loading

255

0 1 2 3 4 5 6250

300

350

400

450

SOFC output voltage (V)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-100

0

100

200

Time (s)

SOFC output current (A)

Figure 516 SOFC DG Output voltage and current of each FC array under heavy load

0 1 2 3 4 5 6300

400

500

600

Time (s)

DC bus voltage (V)

VDC ref = 480V

Figure 517 SOFC DG DC bus voltage under heavy loading

The output voltage and current curves of each 40 kW SOFC array (input to each

DCDC converter) for the above heavy loading case are shown in Figure 516 Note that

when the system output power reaches its pre-set value the fuel cell output current ripple

is about 10 and the fuel cell output voltage ripple is around 3 These relatively small

variations of the current and voltage are indicative of the healthy operation of fuel cells

[531] The DC bus voltage (output voltage of the boost DCDC converter) for this case is

256

shown in Figure 517 Note that the DC bus voltage comes up to its reference value

(480V) though the fuel cell terminal voltage is much lower than its no-load value under

this heavy loading condition (see Figure 516) The voltage ripple at the DC bus is about

15 which is within the acceptable range

Desired P Delivered to the Grid Q Consumed from the Grid Light Loading

PEMFC DG Under light utility loading the power required from the fuel cell DG is

normally low and the DG may be set to consume the excessive reactive power from the

grid ie Qlt0 This scenario is examined in this sub-section The reference values of P

and Q were set at Pref=100 kW and Qref=-318 kVar with an initial step-change startup

The voltage of the utility grid is set to E = 10 degang0 pu for this case study Using

equations (519) and (520) the desired amplitude and angle of the filtered output voltage

of the inverter turn out to be Vs = 10 pu δ = 2648ordm Converting the values into dq

coordinates we get Vd(ref)= 099893 pu and Vq(ref) = 00463 pu

Figure 518 shows the real and reactive power responses of the fuel cell DG Note that

at steady-state the fuel cell power system delivers 100kW of real power to the grid and

consumes 318 kVar of reactive power from the grid (Q=-318kVar) which match the

reference values set for P and Q

257

0 05 1 15 2 25 3-5

0

5

10

15x 10

4

P (W)

0 05 1 15 2 25 3-10

-5

0

5x 10

4

Time (s)

Q (Var)

Pref = 100kW

Qref = -318kVar

Figure 518 PEMFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid light loading

0 05 1 15 2 25 3260

280

300

320

FC Output Voltage (V)

0 05 1 15 2 25 3-50

0

50

100

150

Time (s)

FC Output Current (A)

Figure 519 PEMFC DG Output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under light loading

258

Figure 520 shows the DC output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under

light loading In this case the fuel cell output current percentage ripple is bigger than that

of case A due to lighter loading However the fuel cell output voltage ripple is only

about 2 which is even less than that of case A due to a higher steady-state fuel cell

output voltage under light loading

SOFC DG Similar to the case of PEMFC DG under light loading the SOFC DG

delivers less real power to the grid (compared to heavy loading condition) and may be

set to consume the excessive reactive power from the grid ie Qlt0 The simulation

results of this scenario study are given in Figures 520 and 521 The reference values of

P and Q are set as 250kW and -531kVar with a ramp startup in 2 s for this case study

The voltage of the utility grid was set to E = 10 degang0 pu Figure 521 shows the

reference and actual values of the real and reactive power delivered from the SOFC DG

to the grid Note that the output final values of P and Q agree with their reference values

very well The corresponding fuel cell array output voltage and current are given in

Figure 521 The current ripple percentage which is about 25 of the SOFC output

current under light loading is larger than heavy loading due to the lower average value of

the load current However the fuel cell output voltage ripple (about 2) under light

loading is even smaller than heavy loading since the average value of the voltage is

higher in this case

From the above simulation results it is noted that both the PEMFC and SOFC DG

systems can be controlled to deliver the pre-set amount of real and reactive power For

the purpose of text length only the simulation results of the PEMFC DG system are

259

given in the following simulation studies

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-100

0

100

200

300P (kW)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-100

-50

0

50

Time (s)

Q (kVar)

Pref = 250 kW

Qref = -531 kVar

Figure 520 SOFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under light loading

0 1 2 3 4 5 6300

350

400

450

SOFC output voltage (V)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-50

0

50

100

Time (s)

SOFC output current (A)

Figure 521 SOFC DG Output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under light

load

260

Load-Following Analysis

Fixed Grid Power In a fuel cell DG system a certain amount of power may be

scheduled to be delivered to a load center (micro-grid) from the utility grid with the rest

to be supplied by the fuel cell system Therefore a proper load-following controller must

be designed to ensure that only scheduled power is delivered from the grid and that the

fuel cell system follows the remainder of load demand In the deregulated power market

the ancillary service costs due to load-following operations can be as high as 20 of the

total ancillary service costs [527] Figure 522 shows the system configuration for which

the load-following study was carried out for PEMFC DG Bus 1 in the figure can be

considered as a micro-grid bus to which the PEMFC DG and the power grid are

connected to supply power to the load The power delivered from the grid (PGrid) is kept

constant (PGridsched) and the PEMFC DG is required to follow load as it changes

The load-following control diagram is also shown in Figure 522 PGrid is measured

and compared with the grid scheduled power The error (∆PGrid) is then fed through the

load-following controller to generate the adjustment power reference value (∆PFCref)

which is added to the initial power reference value (0

refFCP ) to give the new power

reference value (PFCref) for the PEMFC DG system The load-following controller can be

a simple PI controller Therefore as load varies PFCref is adjusted to ensure that the fuel

cell DG will compensate the changes of PLoad It should be noted that fuel cell power

adjustment is assumed to be within the safe operating range of the fuel cell DG

In this case study PGrid is set to 100kW (1 pu) As shown in Figure 523 at the

beginning the load is 2 pu and therefore the fuel cell system delivers the remaining 1

261

pu power to the load At t=03s the load demand steps up to 3 pu and drops back to its

original value (2 pu) at t=41s It is noted from Figure 523 that the power grid responds

to the initial load changes and then the PEMFC DG picks up the load changes to keep

the grid power at its scheduled value The simulation results show that the PEMFC DG

can follow the load power changes in less than 2s

GridP∆refFCP ∆

0

refFCP

Figure 522 System for the PEMFC DG load-following study

Fixed FC Power Referring to the system shown in Figure 524 the simulation study

for the scenario that the FC power plant is scheduled to supply a fixed amount of power

to the micro-grid while the grid will pick up the load variations The power delivered

from the FC DG is set to 200 kW The load changes used for this case study are the same

as the previous case The simulation results are shown in Figure 525 It is noted that the

FC power is kept well at 200 kW When the load changes at 03 s and 41 s the grid

balances the changes almost simultaneously as shown in Figure 525

262

1 2 3 4 5 6 70

2

4Sbase = 100kVA

PLoad (pu)

1 2 3 4 5 6 70

2

4

PGrid (pu)

1 2 3 4 5 6 70

2

4

Time (s)

PFC (pu)

Figure 523 Power curves of the load-following study with fixed grid power

Figure 524 System for the PEMFC DG load-following study

263

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 71

2

3

4PLoad (pu)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 70

1

2

PGrid (pu)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 70

1

2

3

Time (s)

PFC (pu)

Sbase = 100 kVA

Figure 525 Power curves of the load-following study with fixed FC power

Fault Analysis

It is important to know whether the fuel cell DG system will remain stable under an

electrical fault In this section the stability of the PEMFC DG under electrical faults is

investigated The FC DG system shown in Figure 526 delivers 2 pu to the utility grid

before the fault A severe 3-phase fault is simulated to occur at t=07s at the low voltage

side of the step-up transformer connecting the FC DG to the grid as shown in Figure

526 The fault lasts for 5 cycles (00833s) and is cleared at t=07833s

264

Figure 526 Faulted fuel cell DG system

The power flow through the transmission line is shown in Figure 527 During the

fault the transmission line power changes direction (flowing from the grid toward the

fault) since the utility grid also supplies power to the faulted point As shown in the

figure the fuel cell system remains stable after the disturbance Though the system is

stable there is a rush of power delivered from the fuel cell power plant to the utility grid

when the fault is cleared This is due to the large phase difference between the utility grid

and the inverter output voltage when the fault is cleared A soft-starting and a

re-connection controller can be added to limit the peak power when the system recovers

from a fault

One advantage of the two-loop (voltage and current) inverter control is its capability

to limit fault currents To show this advantage the simulation with the same fault on the

system with only voltage control on the inverter was also conducted for comparison The

output power of the PEMFC DG under these two different inverter control strategies is

shown in Figure 528 It is noticed that the system does not remain stable when only

voltage control is applied for inverter control Since there is no current limit control for

this case the fuel cell output current increases sharply due to the fault and exceeds the

current corresponding to the fuel cell maximum power point As a result the fuel cell

265

output power drops sharply It can be observed from Figure 528 that the system with

two-loop inverter control comes back to the pre-fault state while the system with only

voltage control on the inverter can not recover to its original state

Similar 3-phase electrical faults were also simulated on several other points along the

transmission line in Figure 526 In these cases the FC DG remained stable under the

two-loop control scheme

05 1 15 2 25 3 35-15

-1

-05

0

05

1x 10

6

Time (s)

Transmission Line Power (W)

200kW

t=07s

t=07833s

Figure 527 Faulted PEMFC DG Power flow of the transmission line

266

05 1 15 2 25 3 350

1

2

3

4

5

6x 10

5

Time (s)

FC Output Power (W)

Two-Loop Control

Voltage Control Only

Figure 528 Faulted PEMFC DG Fuel cell output powers for the fault studies

Summary

Control of grid-connected FC DG systems are investigated in this chapter The

PEMFC and SOFC models the model for boost DCDC converters and the model for

3-phase voltage source inverters are used to develop a simulation model for a

grid-connected FC system Controller designs for the DCDC converter and the 3-phase

inverter are given using linearized small-signal converterinverter models Conventional

PI voltage feedback controllers are used for the DCDC converters to regulate the DC bus

voltage and a dq transformed two-loop current control scheme is used on the inverter to

control the real and reactive power delivered from the fuel cell system to the utility grid

A MATLABSimulink model of the proposed FC DG system was implemented using

the SimPowerSystems block-set The validity of the proposed control schemes over a

267

large operating range was verified through simulations on switched nonlinear

converterinverter models Simulation results of the case studies show that the real and

reactive power delivered from the fuel cell system to the utility grid can be controlled as

desired while the DC bus voltage is maintained well within the prescribed range The

results also show that the fuel cell system is capable of load-following and can remain

stable under the occurrence of severe electrical faults It is noticed that a two-loop

inverter control scheme has advantage over a voltage only control scheme for the inverter

on fault protection and system stability

268

REFERENCES

[51] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation

for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy

Conversion vol 20 no 2 pp442-451 June 2005

[52] C J Hatziadoniu AA Lobo F Pourboghrat and MDaneshdoost ldquoA simplified

dynamic model of grid-connected fuel-cell generatorsrdquo IEEE Transactions on

Power Delivery Vol 17 No 2 pp 467-473 April 2002

[53] M DLukas K Y Lee H Ghezel-Ayagh ldquoDevelopment of a Stack Simulation

Model for Control Study on Direct Reforming Molten Carbonate Fuel Cell Power

Plantrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol14 No 4 pp1651-1657

Dec 1999

[54] J Padulleacutes GW Ault and J R McDonald ldquoAn integrated SOFC plant dynamic

model for power system simulationrdquo J Power Sources pp495ndash500 2000

[55] K Sedghisigarchi and A Feliachi ldquoDynamic and Transient Analysis of Power

Distribution Systems with Fuel CellsmdashPart I Fuel-Cell Dynamic Modelrdquo IEEE

Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 2 pp423-428 June 2004

[56] K Sedghisigarchi and A Feliachi ldquoDynamic and Transient Analysis of Power

Distribution Systems with Fuel CellsmdashPart II Control and Stability

Enhancementrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 2

pp429-434 June 2004

[57] Z Miao M A Choudhry R L Klein and L Fan ldquoStudy of A Fuel Cell Power

Plant in Power Distribution System ndash Part I Dynamic Modelrdquo Proc IEEE PES

General Meeting June 2004 Denver CO

[58] Z Miao M A Choudhry R L Klein and L Fan ldquoStudy of A Fuel Cell Power

Plant in Power Distribution System ndash Part II Stability Controlrdquo Proceedings IEEE PES General Meeting June 2004 Denver CO

[59] D Candusso L Valero and A Walter ldquoModelling control and simulation of a fuel

cell based power supply system with energy managementrdquo Proceedings 28th

Annual Conference of the IEEE Industrial Electronics Society (IECON 2002) Vol

2 pp1294-1299 2002

[510] R Naik N Mohan M Rogers and A Bulawka ldquoA Novel Grid Interface

Optimized for Utility-scale Applications of Photovoltaic Wind-electric and

269

Fuel-cell systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery Vol 10 No 4 pp

1920-1926 Oct 1995

[511] W Shireen and MS Arefeen ldquoAn utility interactive power electronics interface

for alternaterenewable energy systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion

Vol 11 No 3 pp 643-649 Sept 1996

[512] G Spiazzi S Buso GM Martins JA Pomilio ldquoSingle phase line frequency

commutated voltage source inverter suitable for fuel cell interfacingrdquo 2002 IEEE 33rd Annual IEEE Power Electronics Specialists Conference Vol 2 pp734-739

2002

[513] K Ro and S Rahman ldquoControl of Grid-connected Fuel Cell Plants for

Enhancement of Power System Stabilityrdquo Renewable Energy Vol 28 No 3 pp

397-407 March 2003

[514] H Komurcugil and O Kukrer ldquoA novel current-control method for three-phase

PWM ACDC voltage-source convertersrdquo IEEE Transactions on Industrial

Electronics Vol 46 No 3 pp 544-553 June 1999

[515] N Mohan T M Undeland and W P Robbins Power Electronics ndash Converters

Applications and Design John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2003

[516] DW Hart Introduction to Power Electronics Prentice Hall 1997

[517] M H Todorovic L Palma P Enjeti ldquoDesign of a Wide Input Range DC-DC

Converter with a Robust Power Control Scheme Suitable for Fuel Cell Power

Conversionrdquo 19th Annual IEEE Applied Power Electronics Conference CA 2004

[518] SM N Hasan S Kim I Husain ldquoPower Electronic Interface and Motor Control for a Fuel Cell Electric Vehiclerdquo 19th Annual IEEE Applied Power Electronics

Conference CA 2004

[519] Fuel Cell Handbook (Fifth Edition) EGampG Services Parsons Inc DEO of Fossil

Energy National Energy Technology Lab Oct 2000

[520] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained John Wiley amp

Sons Ltd 2001

[521] John Van de Vegte Feedback Control Systems (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall 1994

[522] IEEE Std 1547 IEEE Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Resources with Electric Power Systems 2003

270

[523] M Tsai WI Tsai ldquoAnalysis and Design of Three-phase AC-to-DC Converters

with High Power Factor and Near-Optimum Feedforwardrdquo IEEE Transactions on

Industrial Electronics Vol 46 No 3 pp535-543 June 1999

[524] H Mao Study on Three-Phase High-Input-Power-Factor PWM-Voltage-Type

Reversible Rectifiers and Their Control Strategies PhD Dissertation (in Chinese)

Zhejiang University 2000

[525] J D Glover MS Sarma Power System Analysis and Design 3rd Edition

Wadsworth Group BrooksCole 2002

[526] RS Gemmen ldquoAnalysis for the effect of inverter ripple current on fuel cell

operating conditionrdquo Transactions of the ASME - Journal of Fluids Engineering

Vol 125 No 3 pp576-585 May 2003

[527] Y Zhu and K Tomsovic ldquoDevelopment of models for analyzing the

load-following performance of microturbines and fuel cellsrdquo Journal of Electric

Power Systems Research pp 1-11 Vol 62 2002

[528] R Wu T Kohama Y Kodera T Ninomiya and F Ihara ldquoLoad-Current-Sharing

Control for Parallel Operation of DC-to-DC Convertersrdquo IEEE PESCrsquo93 pp

101-107 June 1993 Seattle WA

[529] PC Krause O Wasynczuk and SD Sudhoff Analysis of Electric Machinery

IEEE Press 1995

[530] John G Kassakian Martin F Schlecht and George C Verghese Principles of

Power Electronics pp 280-293 Addison-Wesley Publishing Company 1991SK

[531] Mazumder K Acharya CL Haynes R Williams Jr MR von Spakovsky DJ Nelson DF Rancruel J Hartvigsen and RS Gemmen ldquoSOFC Performance and

Durability Resolution of the Effects of Power-Conditioning Systems and

Application Loadsrdquo IEEE Transactions On Power Electronics Vol 19 No 5 pp

1263-1278 September 2004

271

CHAPTER 6

CONTROL OF STAND-ALONE FUEL CELL POWER GENERATION SYSTEMS

Introduction

As discussed in the previous chapters both PEMFC and SOFC show great potential

in DG and vehicular applications They are good energy sources to provide reliable

power at steady state but they cannot respond to electrical load transients as fast as

desired This is mainly due to their slow internal electrochemical and thermodynamic

responses [61] Load transients will cause a low-reactant condition inside the fuel cells

which is considered to be harmful and will shorten their life [62] In order to overcome

this weakness fuel cells can be combined with other energy sources with fast dynamics

such as battery or super-capacitor to form a hybrid power system [63]-[66] Dynamic

behavior of a PEMFC and lead-acid battery system was investigated in [63] while no

control was discussed in the paper Fuel cells and super-capacitor banks together with

boost DCDC converters are proposed in [64] to achieve a constant output dc voltage A

fuel cell-battery hybrid system is given in [66] however the paper concentrates on the

design of a new DCDC converter for fuel cell and battery applications only

In this chapter a load transient mitigation technique is proposed for stand-alone fuel

cell-battery power generation systems This technique is used to control the system in a

way that during a load transient the fuel cell provides the steady-state load and the

battery will supply the transient load The battery voltage is controlled to remain within a

272

desired range Meanwhile the fuel cell output current ripple is also limited in a certain

low range which is also important to fuel cellrsquos healthy operation and life time [62]

[67] [68]

The dynamic models for PEMFC SOFC and lead-acid batteries discussed in Chapter

4 are used in this chapter for FC load mitigation study Based on these component

models and the proposed control technique simulation studies have been carried out for

both PEMFC and SOFC systems to verify the effectiveness of the proposed technique

System Description and Control Strategy

Figure 61 shows the schematic diagram for the proposed FC-battery power

generation system where a boost DCDC converter is used to adapt the fuel cell output

voltage to the battery voltage (220 V in this study) Load mitigation will be investigated

both for a PEMFC and a SOFC based system The models for a 500W PEMFC and a 5

kW SOFC discussed in Chapter 4 are used to model the FC unit shown in Figure 61

For the example PEMFC based system studied the fuel cell unit consists of four 500 W

PEMFC stacks connected in series to provide a 2 kW PEMFC unit For the SOFC based

system the fuel cell unit is a single 5kW SOFC stack The system load can either be DC

or AC (interfaced through an inverter)

Load Mitigation Control

Load mitigation control is achieved through a current controller for the DCDC

converter Given that fuel cells are good energy sources (for providing steady-state

power) but not good power sources for transient conditions [61] [63] the purpose of

273

the proposed control strategy is to control the fuel cell to only supply steady state power

while the battery will supply the transient power to the load The load current (Iload) is fed

back through a low-pass filter to get rid of high-frequency transients This filtered load

current signal (Iref1) plus the output signal (Iref2) from the battery chargingdischarging

controller is taken as the reference signal (Iref) to control the DCDC converter Then the

output current of the DCDC converter (idd_out) is compared with the reference signal Iref

and the error signal is processed by the current controller to control the duty ratio of the

switch in the converter

The peak-to-peak ripple of the converter input current (fuel cell output current idd_in

in Figure 61) should also be controlled within a certain range (10 in this study) for

healthy operation of the fuel cell [62] [67] [68] The main components of the DCDC

converter can be selected on the basis of technical specifications such as rated and peak

voltage and current input current ripple and output voltage ripple etc using the classic

design procedure given in [612] [614] The component values for the 5kW DCDC

converter model used in this study are listed in Table 61 The value of the coupling

inductor (Ldd_out) is selected so that the combination of this inductor with the capacitor

(Cdd) yields a low resonant frequency (lt 10Hz in this study) to smooth out the converter

output current (idd_out)

274

Figure 61 Schem

atic diagram of a FC-battery hybrid system

with load transient mitigation control

275

dd_outV∆ ref

dd_out

V

∆V

gele

Figure 62 Schematic diagram of the battery chargingdischarging controller

An approximate state-space model of the converter at the rated operating point can be

derived using the averaging technique proposed by Middlebrook and Cuacutek explained in

[612] [615] Based on the converter model a PI current controller ( skk ip + ) can be

designed using the classic Bode-plot and root-locus method [613] The parameters of the

PI current controller are also listed in Table 61 The battery chargingdischarging

controller design and the optimal choice of the filter will be discussed in the following

sub-sections

TABLE 61 PARAMETERS OF THE DCDC CONVERTER

Ldd_in 12 mH

Cdd 2500 uF

Ldd_out 120 mH

fs (Switch Frequency) 5 kHz

ki 20

kp 002

276

Battery ChargingDischarging Controller

The battery in the system of Figure 61 is designed to buffer transient power A 220V

05kWh battery model discussed in Chapter 4 is used in the study The model

parameters are listed in Table 62 For healthy operation of the battery bank its voltage is

kept within plusmn5 of its nominal value A battery chargingdischarging controller is

designed as shown in Figure 62 In this figure Vref is the battery nominal voltage (220V)

The regulation constant Kc in the figure is determined by assuming that the

chargingdischarging adjustment of 5 voltage deviation can be achieved in half hour

(1800s) That is

1800

050 b

c

CK = (61)

where Cb is the battery capacitance

TABLE 62 PARAMETERS OF THE BATTERY MODEL

Cb 300 F

Rp 25 MΩ

R2 0075 Ω

C1 500 F

R1 01 Ω

The ldquonormalizedrdquo block normalizes the filtered battery voltage deviation (∆Vdd_out)

with respect to the reference voltage (Vref) The ldquo|abs|rdquo block will give a nonnegative

output (ref

outdd

V

V _∆) regardless of whether ∆Vdd_out is positive or negative ie whether the

battery voltage is higher or lower than the reference voltage The ldquorelayrdquo block in the

277

figure is a hysteresis block set as follows it will turn on (output = 1) when the input is

larger than 5 and will continue to be on until the input to the block is less than 05

Otherwise the output of the relay block is zero The battery will be charged (discharged)

at a constant current when its voltage is lower than 95 (higher than 105) of its rated

value The charging (discharging) process will stop when the battery voltage is within

05 of its rated value Therefore as long as the battery voltage is lower than 095Vref a

positive extra reference signal

1800

0502

refb

ref

VCI = (62)

will be generated for the current controller This reference value is kept until the voltage

is higher than 0995Vref On the other hand if the battery voltage is higher than 105Vref a

negative extra current reference value (1800

050 refbVCminus ) is generated and this value will be

held until the battery voltage is lower than 1005Vref Otherwise the output of the battery

chargingdischarging controller is zero

Filter Design

The choice of the low-pass filter needed for the load transient mitigation controller is

a trade-off design between the storage capacity of the battery and the smooth response of

fuel cell to load transients Figure 63 shows an example of the responses of different

low-pass filters to a load transient The damping factors of filters are all set to 1 to avoid

any oscillation It is noted from the figure that the higher is the cut-off frequency of the

filter the shorter is the settling time of the response A filter with shorter settling time

requires smaller storage battery capacity but may cause undesired overshoot On the

278

other hand the lower is the filter cut-off frequency the longer is the rise time of the filter

response and the smoother is the fuel cell response However a larger battery capacity is

needed if a lower cut-off frequency is chosen for the filter Therefore a trade off has to be

made to choose an optimal filter In practical applications one can estimate the fastest

possible load transient based on the load information at the location where the fuel cell

will be installed Transients with frequencies higher than 1250Hz can be neglected since

they do not affect the fuel cell performance significantly [62] Then one decides what

overshoot value (current ripple) is tolerable by the fuel cell An overshoot less than 10

which normally will not cause any significant impact on the fuel cellrsquos healthy operation

[62] [67] can be considered a good value The filter can therefore be chosen for the

fastest load transient with the highest possible cut-off frequency while its output

overshoot will not exceed a prescribed value (10 suggested in this study)

0 1 2 3 4 54

6

8

10

12

14

16

Time (s)

Responses of different filters (A) Original Transient

Filter fcutoff

= 3Hz

Filter fcutoff

= 1Hz

Filter fcutoff

= 05Hz

Figure 63 Example of the responses of different filters to a load transient

279

Simulation Results

The PEMFC and SOFC models and the battery model discussed Chapter 4 were used

to develop simulation models for a stand-alone PEMFC-battery and a SOFC-battery

power generation system in MATLABSimulink using SimPowerSystems block-set Both

systems are controlled by the load transient mitigation technique proposed in the previous

section The system performance under load transients is investigated to verify that power

flow is controlled in such a way that the fuel cells only provide steady-state power while

the battery will supply transient power to the load Simulation results on

chargingdischarging performance of the battery are also given

Load Transients

For the purpose of verifying the system performance under different load transients

both DC load transients and AC load transients were tested for the PEMFC and SOFC

based power systems Since the power rating of the PEMFC system studied is different

from that of the SOFC system different (but same type of) load transients will be used

for the two systems

280

0 5 10 15 200

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Amature current of DC motor (A)

5kW220V DC motor(load for SOFC)

25HP220V DC motor(load for PEMFC)

Figure 64 Load transient of starting a 25HP and a 5kW 220V DC motor

DC Load Transients The DC load transient due to a DC motor starting is used in the

simulation study Figure 64 shows the load current transient applied to the PEMFC and

SOFC systems when a DC motor is started with full voltage in three steps of resistance

starting A 25 HP220 V DC motor load is used for the 2 kW PEMFC-battery system and

a 5 kW220 V DC motor is used for the SOFC system

AC Load Transients A general dynamic load model is used to model AC load current

transients This transient current model is defined as follows

tteIeIIti 21

210)(αα minusminus minus+= (63)

where I0 I1 and I2 are non-negative constants and 012 gtgt αα It is assumed that the

load transient starts at t=0 in the above equation and i(t) is the amplitude of load current

at 60Hz

281

The above five constant parameters can be determined by the following equations

asympminus

=minus+

=minus

=minus+

=

minusminus

infin

S

peak

TT

p

TII

ieIeII

TI

I

iIII

iI

pp

1

01

210

12

11

22

0210

0

)020ln(ln

ln

21

α

αααα

αα

(64)

where i0 and iinfin are the initial and final values of the transient load current Tp is the time

that it takes the transient current to reach its peak value (ipeak) and TS is the settling time

which takes the transient to settle to within plusmn2 of its final value Therefore by

specifying the initial value (i0) final value (iinfin) peak value of the transient (ipeak) how fast

the transient reaches its peak (Tp) and how long it takes the transient to reach steady state

(TS) we can calculate the five parameters in (64) numerically Figure 65 shows the load

transient curve used for the PEMFC system which starts at 1s The parameters of this

load transient are I0 = 1584A I1 = 792A I2 = 9504A 51 =α and 302 =α The

parameters of the AC load current transient for the SOFC system studied are I0 = 396A

I1 = 198A I2 = 2376A 51 =α and 302 =α The load transient obtained when these

are used in (63) is similar to the waveform shown in Figure 65 but with a higher

magnitude

282

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

Time (s)

AC Side Load Current (A)

Figure 65 AC load transient used on PEMFC-battery system

Load mitigation

In this sub-section simulation results are presented for load transient mitigation

studies of PEMFC and SOFC systems Throughout the studies in this part it is assumed

that the battery in the system studied is fully charged to its rated voltage 220 V before

the application of load transients

PEMFC System First the system is tested under the DC motor load transient shown

in Figure 64 The cut-off frequency of the low-pass filter in this simulation is chosen to

be 01 Hz and the damping factor is set to 1 The corresponding current reference signal

(Iref in Figure 61) shown in Figure 66 shows that the rise time of the filter response to

283

the load transient is less than 10 s and there is no overshoot The battery current (ib) and

the converter output current (idd_out) responding to the load transient current are also

shown in Figure 66 The figure shows that idd_out follows the reference signal (Iref) very

well they almost overlap each other It is noted from the figure that the battery picks up

the transient current while the converter output current rises smoothly (as designed) from

its previous steady-state to its next steady-state value The corresponding PEMFC current

and voltage responses are shown in Figure 67 It is noted that the PEMFC outputs vary

smoothly during the load transient the PEMFC is controlled to supply only the

steady-state current to the load It is also noted that the fuel cell current ripple is around

55 which is within the acceptable range (10)

For the purpose of comparison a simulation study was carried out on the PEMFC

system shown in Figure 61 with a typical voltage controller for the DCDC converter

only (ie iload and idd_out are not fed back and Ldd_out is taken out in Figure 61) The

controller is used to keep the converter output voltage constant under load variations

Figure 67 also shows the PEMFC output voltage for this case study when the DC load

transient (Figure 64) is applied to the PEMFC system It is noted that the system fails to

start the DC motor under this case hence justifying the need for the current controller

284

0 5 10 15 200

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Current (A)

Battery current (ib)

Iref

idd_out

Figure 66 Reference signal (Iref) for the current controller battery current (ib) and

converter output current (idd_out) under the load transient for PEMFC shown in Figure 64

0 5 10 15 200

5

10

15

20

Current (A)

0 5 10 15 2040

80

120

160

200

Time (s)

Voltage (V)

PEMFC Voltage

PEMFC Current

System failedto start with only a

voltage controller

Figure 67 The PEMFC output current and voltage responses to the DC load transient

shown in Figure 64

285

Figures 68 and 69 show the simulation results when an AC load transient (Figure

65) is applied to the PEMFC-battery system Figure 68 shows the reference signal (Iref)

and the battery output current The corresponding PEMFC output current and voltage are

shown in Figure 69 The fuel cell output current ripple is around 55 and the voltage

ripple is around 2 It is noted from these figures that the proposed control technique

also works well under AC load transients and the PEMFC voltage and current vary

smoothly from one steady-state value to another

0 5 10 15-10

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Current (A) Battery current (i

b)

Iref

Figure 68 PEMFC The control reference signal (Iref) and battery current (ib) under

the AC load transient shown in Figure 65

286

0 5 10 150

5

10

15

20

Current (A)

0 5 10 1580

100

120

140

160

Time (s)

Voltage (V)

PEMFC Current

PEMFC Voltage

Figure 69 The PEMFC output current and voltage responses to the AC load transient

shown in Figure 65

SOFC System Similar to the PEMFC system the simulation study on the SOFC

system under a DC load transient (Figure 64) is investigated first The cut-off frequency

of the low-pass filter is also chosen to be 01 Hz and the damping factor is set to 1 as

well Figure 610 shows the current reference signal (Iref) the battery current (ib) and the

converter output current (idd_out) responding to the load transient current The figure

shows that idd_out follows the reference signal (Iref) very well for the SOFC system The

corresponding SOFC output current and voltage are given in Figure 611 It shows that

the SOFC output voltage and current vary smoothly during the load transient The SOFC

is controlled to supply only the steady-state current to the load and its output current

ripple is less than 15 which is much lower than the pre-set value (10)

287

0 5 10 15 200

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Current (A)

Battery current (ib)

idd_out

Iref

Figure 610 Reference signal (Iref) for the current controller the battery current (ib) and

the converter output current (idd_out) under the load transient for SOFC shown in Figure 64

0 5 10 15 200

30

60

90

Current (A)

0 5 10 15 2060

80

100

120

Time (s)

Voltage (V)

SOFC Voltage

SOFC Current

Figure 611 SOFC output current and voltage responses to the DC load transient shown

in Figure 64

288

0 5 10 15 20-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

Time (s)

Current (A)

Battery current (ib)

Iref

Figure 612 Control reference signal (Iref) and battery current (ib) under the AC load

transient

0 5 10 15 200

10

20

30

40

50

60

700

Current (A)

0 5 10 15 2075

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

Time (s)

Voltage (V)SOFC Current

SOFC Voltage

Figure 613 The SOFC output current and voltage responses to the AC load transient

289

Figures 612 and 613 show the simulation results when an AC load transient (shown

in Figure 65 but with different amplitude) is applied to the SOFC system The reference

signal (Iref) and the battery output current (ib) are given in Figure 612 It is clear from this

figure that the battery responds to the transient part of the load and the reference signal

(for the DCDC converter) rises smoothly to its new steady-state value The

corresponding SOFC output current and voltage under the AC load transient are shown in

Figure 613 The SOFC output ripple is also very small in this case Figures 612 and

613 show that the proposed control technique also works well for the SOFC system

under AC load transients

Battery ChargingDischarging

When the battery voltage is out of a certain range (plusmn5 in this study) the battery

chargingdischarging controller (Figures 61 and 62) will start operating to bring the

battery voltage back within the acceptable range In practice the battery normally needs

to be charged after a load transient applied to the FC-battery system This is because the

transient power delivered from the battery to the load together with the battery

self-discharging characteristic normally causes the battery voltage to drop If the battery

voltage drops below the pre-set value (95 of battery nominal voltage) the battery

chargingdischarging controller will start operating to charge the battery Similarly the

battery chargingdischarging controller will go into discharging mode if the battery

voltage goes above its pre-set limit (105 of battery nominal voltage) In this section

simulation results are given for battery charging after the DC motor load transient

(illustrated in Figure 64) is applied to the SOFC-battery system

290

Figure 614 shows the battery voltage and the extra current reference (Iref2 Figure 61)

after the load transient is applied to the FC-battery system Before the load transient

starts the battery voltage is already close to its lower limit (209V) During the transient

the battery voltage drops below the limit which triggers the battery chargingdischarging

controller to start operating and generating a new Iref2 This extra current reference is

added to the current reference (Iref1) from the current filter to produce the new current

reference signal (Iref) for the current controller (see Figure 61)

0 2 4 6 8 10202

207

212

Voltage (V)

0 2 4 6 8 100

1

2

Time (s)

Current (A)

Iref2

Battery Voltage

95220V = 209V

Figure 614 Battery voltage and extra current reference (Iref2) curves when the battery

is being charged

Figure 615 shows the load transient current the overall current reference signal (Iref)

the filter output reference signal (Iref1) the battery current (ib) and the corresponding

converter output current (idd_out) It is clear from Figures 614 and 615 that during and

after the transient load demand the battery picks up the transient load (battery

291

discharging) and the reference currents (Iref1 and Iref) slowly increase to bring the fuel cell

current to its new steady-state value and also charge the battery (battery charging) This

smooth transition of FC current is essential for their improved reliability and durability

0 2 4 6 8 10

-5

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

Time (s)

Current (A)

Iref1

Irefi

dd_out

Load transient

ib

Battery Discharging Battery Charging

Figure 615 The load transient the overall current control reference signal (Iref) the

low-pass filter output signal (Iref1) and the corresponding converter output current (idd_out)

when the battery is being charged

292

Summary

In this chapter a load transient mitigation control strategy is proposed for fuel

cell-battery power generation systems The control strategy consists of a current

controller for the DCDC converter and a battery chargingdischarging controller to keep

the battery voltage within a desired range During load transients fuel cells are controlled

(by the proposed transient mitigation technique) to supply the steady-state power to the

load while the battery will supply the transient power to the load Simulation studies

under different load transients have been carried for both the PEMFC system and the

SOFC system Simulation results show that the fuel cell current can be controlled as

desired and the battery voltage can be held in the prescribed range The results show that

the proposed load transient mitigation technique works well for both types of fuel cell

systems (PEMFC and SOFC) studied

293

REFERENCES

[61] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation

for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy

Conversion vol 20 no 2 pp442-451 June 2005

[62] R S Gemmen ldquoAnalysis for the effect of inverter ripple current on fuel cell

operating conditionrdquo Transactions of the ASME - Journal of Fluids Engineering

Vol 125 No 3 pp576-585 May 2003

[63] J C Amphlett EH de Oliveira RF Mann PR Roberge Aida Rodrigues

ldquoDynamic Interaction of a Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cell and a Lead-acid

Batteryrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 65 pp 173-178 1997

[64] D Candusso L Valero and A Walter ldquoModelling control and simulation of a

fuel cell based power supply system with energy managementrdquo Proceedings 28th

Annual Conference of the IEEE Industrial Electronics Society (IECON 2002) Vol

2 pp1294-1299 2002

[65] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained John Wiley amp

Sons Ltd pp 362-367 2001

[66] F Z Peng H Li G Su and JS Lawler ldquoA new ZVS bidirectional DC-DC

converter for fuel cell and battery applicationrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power

Electronics Vol19 No 1 pp54-65 Jan 2004

[67] K Acharya SK Mazumder RK Burra R Williams C Haynes ldquoSystem-interaction analyses of solid-oxide fuel cell (SOFC) power-conditioning

systemrdquo Conference Record of the 2003 IEEE Industry Applications Conference

Vol 3 pp 2026-2032 2003

[68] S K Mazumder K Acharya C L Haynes R Williams Jr M R

von-Spakovsky DJ Nelson DF Rancruel J Hartvigsen and RS Gemmen ldquoSolid-oxide-fuel-cell performance and durability resolution of the effects of

power-conditioning systems and application loadsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power

Electronics Vol 19 No 5 pp1263-1278 Sept 2004

[69] C Wang and MH Nehrir ldquoA Dynamic SOFC Model for Distributed Power

Generation Applicationsrdquo Proceedings 2005 Fuel Cell Seminar Nov 14-18 2005 Palm Springs CA

294

[610] ZM Salameh MA Casacca and WA Lynch ldquoA mathematical model for

lead-acid batteriesrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 7 No1 pp

93-98 1992

[611] Handbook of Batteries 2nd edition D Linden Ed McGraw Hill Inc New York

NY 1995

[612] N Mohan T M Undeland and W P Robbins Power Electronics ndash Converters

Applications and Design John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2003

[613] John Van de Vegte Feedback Control Systems (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall 1994

[614] DW Hart Introduction to Power Electronics Prentice Hall 1997

[615] R D Middlebrook ldquoSmall-signal modeling of pulse-width modulated

switched-mode power convertersrdquo Proceedings of the IEEE Vol 76 No 4 pp

343 ndash 354 April 1988

295

CHAPTER 7

CONTROL SCHEMES AND SIMULATION

RESULTS FOR THE PROPOSED HYBRID WINDPVFC SYSTEM

Introduction

Based on the component models given in Chapter 4 a simulation system test-bed for

the proposed hybrid alternative energy system (see Chapter 3) has been developed in

MATLABSimulink Figure 71 shows the overall diagram of the simulation model in

MATLABSimulink More details about the simulation model are given in Appendix B

The system is capable of being used as a test benchmark for other hybrid energy systems

that are AC coupled The overall control strategy for power management among different

energy sources in the system is discussed in this chapter The system performance under

different operating conditions is evaluated and discussed as well

System Control Strategy

Figure 72 shows the block diagram of the overall control strategy for the hybrid

alternative energy system The WTG controlled by the pitch angle controller (see Chapter

4) and PV electricity generation unit controlled by the MPPT controller (discussed in

Chapter 4) are the main energy sources of the system The power difference between the

generation sources and the load demand is calculated as

scloadpvwindnet PPPPP minusminus+= (71)

296

where Pwind = power generated by the wind energy conversion system

Ppv = power generated by the PV energy conversion system

Pload = load demand

Psc = self consumed power for operating the system

The system self consumed power is the power consumed by the auxiliary system

components to keep it running for example the power needed for running cooling

systems the control units and the gas compressor For the purpose of simplification only

the power consumed by the compressor (Pcomp defined in Chapter 4) is considered in this

study

Overall Power Management Strategy

The governing control strategy is that At any given time any excess wind and PV

generated power (Pnet gt 0) is supplied to the electrolyzer to generate hydrogen that is

delivered to the hydrogen storage tanks through a gas compressor Therefore power

balance equation (71) can be written as

compelecloadpvwind PPPPP ++=+ Pnet gt 0 (72)

where Pelec = the power consumed by the electrolyzer to generate H2

Pcomp = the power consumed by the gas compressor

When there is a deficit in power generation (Pnet lt 0) the FC stack begins to produce

energy for the load using hydrogen from the storage tanks Therefore the power balance

equation can be written as

loadFCpvwind PPPP =++ Pnet lt 0 (73)

where PFC = the power generated by the FC stack

297

AC BUS 208 V (L-L)

0

const2

Wspeed (ms)

WTGCB Ctrl 1=ON 0=OFF

A B C

WTG 50kW at 14ms

Ploadmat

To File5

Timer

ON 3s

Timer

ON 10s

Timer

ON 03s

Timer

ON 02s

Timer

ON 01 s

Terminator4

0 Q

Enable

Pava

Pdemand

Power control signal

[Pload]

Pload

[Pdemand]

Pdemand

[Pava]

Pava

Irradiance (Wm2)

PVCB Ctrl 1=ON 0=OFF

A B C

PV Array

The total power rate is about 30kW

under 1000 Wm^2

PQ

A B C

New Dynamic Load

com

A

B

C

a

b

c

Load CBVabc

Iabc

A

B

C

a

b

c

Load

Measurement

LoadDemandData

Load

Vabc

Iabc

PQ

Instantaneous P amp Q

[Pava]

From2

[Pdemand]

From1

SolarData

From

Workspace1

WindData

From

Workspace

FCCB Ctrl 1=ON 0=OFF

Pdemand (W)

Pstorage (atm)

nH2used (mols) A B C

FC with Gas Pressure Regulation

nH2_FC

Pava (W)

Ptank (atm)

A B C

Electrolyzer and H2 storage

Demux

A B C

Battery with Inverter

400 V battery

AC voltage control is applied

Output AC is 208 V ( L-L) at 60 Hz

gt 05

Figure 71 Sim

ulation m

odel for the proposed hybrid alternative energy system

in M

ATLABSim

ulink

298

Figure 72 Block diagram of the overall control schem

e for the proposed hybrid alternative energy system

299

The power controller has been discussed in Chapter 5 (see Figure 511) The model

for the gas pressure regulator has been discussed in Chapter 4 In the following sections

the AC bus voltage regulator and the electrolyzer controller are discussed in details

AC Bus Voltage Regulator

Figure 73 shows the block diagram of the AC bus voltage regulator In the figure the

AC bus voltage is measured and transformed into dq values (Vdq) through the ldquoabcdq

Transformationrdquo block Vdq is then compared with the reference voltage dq values

(Vdq(ref)) and the voltage error signals are fed into a PI controller The controller output is

transferred back into the control signals in abc coordinates through the ldquodqabc

Transformationrdquo block These control signals are used to generate proper SPWM pulses

for the inverter switches which shape the inverter output voltage (the AC bus voltage)

Figure 73 Block diagram of the AC voltage regulator

300

Electrolyzer Controller

The block diagram of the electrolyzer controller is shown in Figure 74 As discussed

in Chapter 4 (section 44) an electrolyzer can be considered as a voltage-sensitive

nonlinear DC load For the given electrolyzer within its rating range the higher the DC

voltage applied to it the larger is the load current and the more H2 is generated The

function of the electrolyzer controller is to control the controllable ACDC rectifier to

obtain a proper output DC voltage (Vdcelec) so that the excess available power can be fully

used by the electrolyzer to generate H2 For example if more power is available then the

controller controls the rectifier to give a higher DC voltage (Vdcelec) to the electrolyzer As

a result the power consumed by the electrolyzer (Pelec) becomes greater so that it matches

the excess available power

Figure 74 Block diagram of the electrolyzer controller

301

Simulation Results under Different Scenarios

In order to run the simulation for the hybrid alternative energy system the load

demand data and the weather data (wind speed solar irradiance and air temperature) are

needed As discussed in Chapter 3 the system is designed to supply electric power for

five houses in southeastern part of Montana A typical load demand for a house in the

Pacific Northwest regions reported in [71] is used in this simulation study The total

load demand profile of five houses has already been given in Chapter 3 For the purpose

of convenience the load demand profile over 24 hours is also given in this chapter

shown in Figure 75 The weather data are obtained from the online records of the

weather station at Deer Lodge Montana affiliated to the Pacific Northwest Cooperative

Agricultural Weather Network (AgriMet) [72] The general information about the station

and the types of relevant equipment and sensors used at the station are summarized in

Table 71 [72] Simulation studies are carried out for power management during a typical

winter and summer day The load demand is kept the same for the two cases Simulation

results for the winter and summer scenarios are given and discussed in the following

sections

302

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

Time (Hour of Day)

Demand (kW)

Figure 75 Load demand profile over 24 hours for the system simulation study

TABLE 71 WEATHER STATION INFORMATION

AT DEER LODGE MONTANA AGRIMET STATION (DRLM)

General Information

Latitude 46deg 20 08

Longitude 112deg 46 00

Elevation 4680

Equipment and Sensors

Sensors Sensor Height

Pyranometer Model LI-200SB 3 meters

Wind Monitor Model 05103 2 meters

Air Temperature Thermistor Model 44030 2 meters

303

Winter Scenario

Weather Data The weather data for the winter scenario simulation were collected on

February 1 2006 The wind speed data were collected at the height of 2 m The wind

turbine hub height is The wind speed data were corrected to the turbine hub height

(assumed to be 40 meters) using the following expression [73] [74]

α

=

0

101

H

HWW ss (74)

where Ws1 = wind speed at the height of H1(ms)

Ws0 = wind speed at the height of H0 (ms)

α = wind speed correction exponent

The exponent α is taken as 013 in this study as suggested and used in [73] and [74]

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Speed (ms)

Figure 76 Wind speed data for the winter scenario simulation study

304

Figure 76 shows the corrected hourly wind speed profile over 24 hours on the day the

data were collected The hourly solar irradiance data and air temperature collected on the

same winter day are shown in Figures 77 and 78 respectively

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

100

200

300

400

500

600

Time (Hour of Day)

Irradiance (Wm2)

Figure 77 Solar irradiance data for the winter scenario simulation study

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-05

0

05

1

15

2

25

3

35

4

45

Time (Hour of Day)

Air Temperature (degC)

Figure 78 Air temperature data for the winter scenario simulation study

305

Simulation Results The system performance under the load profile given in Figure

75 and the weather data shown in Figures 76 to 78 is evaluated and discussed below

The output power from the wind energy conversion unit in the hybrid energy system

over the 24 hour simulation period is shown in Figure 79 When the wind speed is over

14 ms the output power is limited at 50 kW by pitch angle controller (see Figure 434 in

Chapter 4) The pitch angle curve over the 24 hour is given in Figure 710 It is noted

from the figure that the pitch angle is increased to limit the wind turbine output power

when wind speed is greater than 14 ms Otherwise the pitch angle is kept at 2˚ (see

Figure 432 in Chapter 4) The corresponding rotor speed of the induction generator is

given in Figure 711 It is noted that the rotor speed variation follows as the wind speed

variation

4 8 12 16 20 240

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Power (kW)

Figure 79 Wind power of the winter scenario study

306

0 4 8 12 16 20 242

25

3

35

4

45

5

55

6

Time (Hour of Day)

Pitch Angle (deg)

Figure 710 Pitch angle of the wind turbine of the winter scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 241000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

2200

2400

2600

Time (Hour of Day)

Rotor Speed (rpm)

Figure 711 Rotor speed of the induction generator of the winter scenario study

307

The output power from the PV array in the system over the 24 hour simulation period

is shown in Figure 712 As discussed in Chapter 4 the PV array output power is

controlled by the current maximum power point tracking (CMPPT see Figure 457 in

Chapter 4) technique to give the maximum power output under different solar irradiances

Figure 713 shows the current difference (Ipverr) between the actual the output current (Ipv)

of a PV module and the reference current (Imp) at the maximum power point It is noted

that the PV output current follows the reference current very well using the CMPPT

method The current error is almost zero at steady state

As shown in Figures 453 and 454 in Chapter 4 temperature plays an important role

in the PV cellrsquos performance The PV cell temperature is estimated by the PV thermal

model discussed in Chapter 4 Figure 714 shows the PV temperature response over the

simulation period Two main factors for determining the temperature are the solar

irradiance and the air temperature (surrounding temperature) as shown in Figures 77 and

78 It is noted from Figures 453 and 454 that the higher the temperature the lower is

the maximum power value This effect of temperature upon the PV performance is also

illustrated by investigating Figure 712 and 714 For the purpose of comparison the air

temperature profile is also given in Figure 714

When Pnetgt0 there is excess power available for H2 generation Figure 715 shows

the available power profile over the 24 hour simulation period The available power is

used by the electrolyzer to generate H2 through the electrolyzer controller shown in

Figure 74 Figure 716 shows the H2 generation rate over the simulation period The

corresponding DC voltage applied to the electrolyzer and the electrolyzer current are

shown in Figure 717 It is noted from Figures 715 to 717 that the more power available

308

for storage the higher is the DC input voltage to the electrolyzer and the more is the H2

generated as a result

0 4 8 12 16 20 24

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

Time (Hour of Day)

PV Power (kW)

Figure 712 PV power for the winter scenario

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-015

-01

-005

0

005

01

015

02

025

03

035

Time (Hour of Day)

Current Difference (A)

Figure 713 Current difference between the actual output current and the reference

current for the maximum power point of the winter scenario

309

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-2

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

Time (Hour of Day)

Temperature ( degC)

Overall PV CellTemperature

Air Temperature

Figure 714 The PV temperature response over the simulation period for the winter

scenario

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

Time (Hour of Day)

Power available for H2 generation (kW)

Figure 715 Power available for H2 generation of the winter scenario

310

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

01

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 generation rate (mols)

Figure 716 H2 generation rate of the winter scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

Electrolyzer Voltage (V)

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

100

200

300

400

500

600

Time (Hour of Day)

Electrolyzer Current (A)

Current

Voltage

Figure 717 Electrolyzer voltage and current for the winter scenario study

311

When Pnetlt0 the wind and PV generated power from is not sufficient to supply the

load demand Under this condition the fuel cell turns on to supply the power shortage

Figure 718 shows the power shortage which should be supplied by the FC The actual

power delivered by the FC is given in Figure 719 and the corresponding H2 consumption

rate is given in Figure 720 Note that Figures 718 719 and 720 have similar pattern as

expected

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

Power shortage (kW)

Figure 718 Power shortage over the simulation period of the winter scenario study

312

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

FC output power (kW)

Figure 719 Power supplied by the FC of the winter scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

002

004

006

008

01

012

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 consumption rate (mols)

Figure 720 H2 consumption rate of the winter scenario study

313

0 4 8 12 16 20 2462

64

66

68

70

72

74

76

78

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 storage tank pressure (atm)

Figure 721 The pressure tank over the 24 hour of the winter scenario study

The H2 storage tank pressure varies as H2 flows in and out It is apparent that the

storage tank pressure will go up when there is excess power available for H2 generation

and will decrease when the FC supplies power to load and consumes H2 Figure 721

shows the tank pressure variations over the 24 hour simulation period

As discussed in Chapter 3 the capacity of the battery in the proposed hybrid system is

much smaller than the one used in a conventional system where the battery is taken as the

main storage device Figure 722 shows the battery power profile over the 24 hour

simulation period The positive spikes indicate the battery is discharging and the negative

ones indicate the battery is being charged It is noted from the figure that the battery

power is zero almost at all time As discussed in Chapter 3 the battery only supplies the

fast transient power such as fast load transients ripples and spikes

314

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-10

-8

-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

8

10

Time (Hour of Day)

Battery power (kW)

Figure 722 The battery power over the simulation period for the winter scenario

Summer Scenario

Weather Data The weather data collected in Dear Lodge MT on June 21 2005 are

used for the summer scenario study [72] The wind speed data are corrected to the height

of 40 m shown in Figure 723 The solar irradiance and air temperature data at the same

site on the same day are shown in Figures 724 and 725 respectively

By comparing the winter solar irradiance data shown in Figure 77 and the summer

solar irradiance data given in Figure 724 it is obvious that the time frame when solar

energy is available is wider in the summer than in the winter Another apparent

difference is that the air temperature in the summer (shown in Figure 725) is of course

higher than the air temperature in the winter (shown in Figure 78)

315

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Speed (ms)

Figure 723 Corrected wind speed data for the summer scenario simulation study

0 5 10 15 20 250

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

Time (Hour of Day)

Irradiance (Wm2)

Figure 724 Irradiance data for the summer scenario simulation study

316

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

20

25

30

Time (Hour of Day)

Air Temperature (degC)

Figure 725 Air temperature data for the summer scenario simulation study

Simulation Results In this section the system performance under the load demand

profile given in Figure 75 and the weather data shown in Figures 723 to 725 is

evaluated The output power from the wind energy conversion unit in the hybrid energy

system over the 24 hour simulation period is shown in Figure 726 The corresponding

rotor speed of the induction generator is given in Figure 727

317

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

20

25

Time (Hour of Day)

WTG output power (kW)

Figure 726 Wind power generated for the summer scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 241100

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

Time (Hour of Day)

WT rotor speed (rpm)

Figure 727 Rotor speed of the induction generator for the summer scenario study

The output power from the PV array in the system over the 24 hour simulation period

is shown in Figure 728 Figure 729 shows the PV temperature response over the

simulation period For the purpose of comparison the air temperature profile is also

illustrated in the figure It is noted from Figure 729 that the PV cells cool down to about

the same temperature as air when there is no sun The cell temperature climbs up when

318

the sun comes out The temperature difference between the PV cell and air can be as high

as 25 ˚C shown in Figure 729 This effect of the temperature upon the PV performance

is also illustrated by investigating Figures 728 and 729 The higher cell temperature

causes a lower maximum power value The spikes in Figure 728 are due to the MPPT

which tries to keep the PV array operate at its maximum power points under different

temperatures and solar irradiances The time range of the spike is small (about 1 s)

0 5 10 15 20 25-5

0

5

10

15

20

25

Time (Hour of Day)

PV Power (kW)

Figure 728 PV power generated for the winter scenario study

319

0 5 10 15 20 255

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

Time (Hour of Day)

Temperature ( degC)

AirTemperature

Overall PV Cell

Temperature

Figure 729 The PV and air temperature over the simulation period for the winter

scenario study

When Pnetgt0 there is excess power available for H2 generation Figure 730 shows

the available power profile over the 24 hour simulation period Figure 731 shows the

H2 generation rate over the simulation period The corresponding DC voltage applied to

the electrolyzer and the electrolyzer current are shown in Figure 732 It is clear from

Figures 730 - 732 that the more power is available for storage the higher is the DC

input voltage applied to the electrolyzer to balance the excess power and the more H2 is

generated as a result

320

0 5 10 15 20 250

5

10

15

20

25

30

Time (Hour of Day)

Power available for H2 generation (kW)

Figure 730 Power available for H2 generation for the summer scenario study

0 5 10 15 20 250

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 generation rate (mols)

Figure 731 H2 generation rate for the summer scenario study

321

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-20

20

60

100Electrolyzer Voltage (V)

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

150

300

450

Time (Hour of Day)

Electrolyzer Current (A)

Voltage

Current

Figure 732 Electrolyzer voltage and current for the summer scenario study

When Pnetlt0 the wind and PV generated power is not sufficient to supply the load

demand Under this scenario the fuel cell turns on to supply the power shortage Figure

733 shows the power shortage which should be supplied by the FC The actual power

delivered by FC is given in Figure 734 and the corresponding H2 consumption rate is

given in Figure 735 Comparing Figures733 and 734 we can see that the power

shortage is covered by the fuel cell very well

322

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

Power Shortage (kW)

Figure 733 Power shortage over the simulation period for the summer scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

FC Output Power (kW)

Figure 734 Power supplied by the FC over the simulation period for the summer

scenario study

323

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

002

004

006

008

01

012

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 Consumption Rate (mols)

Figure 735 H2 consumption rate for the summer scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 2452

54

56

58

60

62

64

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 Storage Tank Pressure (atm)

Figure 736 The H2 tank pressure over the 24 hour for the summer scenario study

324

Figure 736 shows the tank pressure variations over the 24 hour simulation period and

Figure 737 shows the battery power profile over the simulation period The large spikes

shown in Figure 737 are due to the sudden hourly changes in the weather data and the

load demand used for the simulation study

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-4

-2

0

2

4

6

8

Time (Hour of Day)

Battery Power (kW)

Figure 737 The battery power over the simulation period for the summer scenario

Simulation studies have also been carried out using continuous weather and load

demand data The same weather and load demand data points used for the winter scenario

study are used for this scenario study However for this case study each input (load

demand wind speed solar irradiance and air temperature) is a continuous piecewise

linear function over the simulation time where two adjacent data points are connected by

a straight line The continuous load demand curve shown in Figure 75 is used for this

simulation study and Figures 738 ndash 740 show the weather data used in this case

325

0 5 10 15 20 252

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Speed (ms)

Figure 738 Wind speed data for the simulation study with continuous weather data and

load demand

0 5 10 15 20 250

100

200

300

400

500

600

Time (Hour of Day)

Irradiance (Wm2)

Figure 739 Solar irradiance data for the simulation study with continuous weather data

and load demand

326

0 5 10 15 20 25-1

0

1

2

3

4

5

Time (Hour of Day)

Air Temperature (degC)

Figure 740 Air temperature for the simulation study with continuous weather data and

load demand

Figures 741 and 742 show the continuous wind and PV generated power

respectively The spikes in the PV output power shown in Figure 742 are due to the

CMPPT control of the power electronic interfacing devices for the PV array Figures 743

and 744 show the corresponding excess power (available for H2 generation) profile and

the FC output power (power shortage) profile over the simulation period

327

0 5 10 15 20 250

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Power (kW)

Figure 741 Wind power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario

0 5 10 15 20 250

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

Time (Hour of Day)

PV Power (kW)

Figure 742 PV power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario

328

0 5 10 15 20 250

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

Time (Hour of Day)

Power available for H2 generation (kW)

Figure 743 Power available for H2 generation for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario

0 5 10 15 20 250

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

FC Output Power (kW)

Figure 744 FC output power for the continuous weather data and load demand

scenario

329

Figure 745 shows the battery power profile over the 24 hour simulation period for

the continuous weather data and load demand scenario Comparing Figure 745 with

Figures 722 and 737 it is noted that the battery spikes are much smaller in this case than

the battery spikes when the discrete hourly weather and load demand data are used

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-10

-8

-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

8

10

Time (Hour of Day)

Battery Power (kW)

Figure 745 Battery power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario

330

Summary

In this chapter the overall control and power management strategy for the proposed

hybrid energy system is presented The wind and PV generation systems are the main

power generation devices The electrolyzer acts as a dump load using any excess power

to produce H2 The FC system is the back up generation and battery picks up the fast load

transients and ripples The simulation model of the hybrid system has been developed

using MATLABSimulink Simulation studies have been used to verify the system

performance under different scenarios using practical load profile and real weather

collected at Deer Lodge MT The simulation results have been given and discussed for a

winter and a summer scenario The results show that the overall power management

strategy is effective and the power flows among the different energy sources and the load

demand is balanced successfully

331

REFERENCES

[71] J Cahill K Ritland W Kelly ldquoDescription of Electric Energy Use in Single

Family Residences in the Pacific Northwest 1986-1992rdquo Office of Energy

Resources Bonneville Power Administration December 1992 Portland OR

[72] Online httpwwwusbrgovpnagrimetwebaghrreadhtml

[73] WD Kellogg MH Nehrir G Venkataramanan V Gerez ldquoGeneration unit sizing

and cost analysis for stand-alone wind photovoltaic and hybrid windPV systemsrdquo

IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 13 No 1 pp 70 ndash 75 March 1998

[74] P Gipe Wind power renewable energy for home farm and business Chelsea

Green Publishing Company 2004

332

CHAPTER 8

OPTIMAL PLACEMENT OF DISTRIBUTED GENERATION

SOURCES IN POWER SYSTEMS

Introduction

The ever-increasing need for electrical power generation steady progress in the

power deregulation and utility restructuring and tight constraints over the construction of

new transmission lines for long distance power transmission have created increased

interest in distributed power generation Distributed generation (DG) devices can be

strategically placed in power systems for grid reinforcement reducing power losses and

on-peak operating costs improving voltage profiles and load factors deferring or

eliminating system upgrades and improving system integrity reliability and efficiency

[81]-[85]

These DG sources are normally placed close to consumption centers and are added

mostly at the distribution level They are relatively small in size (relative to the power

capacity of the system in which they are placed) and modular in structure A common

strategy to find the site of DG is to minimize the power loss of the system [82]-[85]

Another method for placing DG is to apply rules that are often used in sitting shunt

capacitors in distribution systems A ldquo23 rulerdquo is presented in [86] to place DG on a

radial feeder with uniformly distributed load where it is suggested to install DG of

approximately 23 capacity of the incoming generation at approximately 23 of the length

of line This rule is simple and easy to use but it cannot be applied directly to a feeder

333

with other types of load distribution or to a networked system References [81] [87]

present power flow algorithms to find the optimal size of DG at each load bus in a

networked system assuming that every load bus can have a DG source

In this chapter analytical approaches for optimal placement of DG with unity power

factor in power systems are presented First placement of DG in a radial feeder is

analyzed and the theoretical optimal site (bus) for adding DG is obtained for different

types of loads and DG sources Then a method is presented to find the optimal bus for

placing DG in a networked system based on bus admittance matrix generation

information and load distribution of the system The proposed methods are tested by a

series of simulations on radial feeders an IEEE 6-bus test system [81] an IEEE 30-bus

test system [811] and a subset of it to show the effectiveness of the proposed methods in

determining the optimal bus for placing DG

In practice there are more constraints on the availability of DG sources and there

may be only one or a few DGs with limited output available to be added Therefore in

this study the DG size is not considered to be optimized The procedure to determine the

optimal bus for placing DG may also need to take into account other factors such as

economic and geographic considerations These factors are not discussed in this chapter

Optimal Placement of DG on a Radial Feeder

To simplify the analysis only overhead transmission lines with uniformly distributed

parameters are considered ie R and L (series resistance and inductance) per unit length

are the same along the feeder while the shunt capacitance and susceptance of lines are

neglected The loads along the feeder are assumed to vary in discrete time duration for

334

example the feeder load distributions along the line for time durations Ti and Ti+1 are

shown in Figure 81

Figure 81 A feeder with distributed loads along the line

Theoretical Analysis

First consider a radial feeder without DG During the time duration Ti the loads are

distributed along the line with the phasor current density Id(xTi) as shown in Figure 81

The phasor feeder current at point x is

int=x

idi dxTxITxI0

)()( (81)

Assuming the impedance per unit length of the line is Z=R+jX (Ωkm) then the

incremental power loss and phasor voltage drop at point x are

RdxdxTxITxdP

x

idi sdot

= int

2

0

)()( (82)

ZdxdxTxITxdV

x

idi sdot

= int

0

)()( (83)

The total power loss along the feeder within the time duration Ti is

RdxdxTxITxdPTPl x

id

l

iiloss sdot

== int intint

0

2

00

)()()( (84)

335

The voltage drop between point x and the receiving end is

ZdxdxTxITxdVTVTVTxVx x

id

x

iiixidrop sdot==minus= int intint0 00

0 )()()()()( (85)

And the voltage at point x is

)()()()()()( 0 idropidropilidropiix TxVTlVTVTxVTVTV +minus=+= (86)

The total voltage drop across the feeder is

ZdxdxTxITxdVTVTVTlVl x

id

l

iiilidrop sdot==minus= int intint0 00

0 )()()()()( (87)

Now consider a DG is added into the feeder at the location x0 shown in Figure 81 In

general the load current density Id(xTi) will change (normally decrease) as a result of

adding DG due to improvements in the voltage profile along the line This change in

the load current density will cause the feeder current to decrease The feeder current

between the source (at x=l) and the location of DG (at x = x0) will also change as a result

of the injected current source IDG(Ti) However the change in feeder current due to the

change in the load current density is generally much smaller than the change in the feeder

current due to the injected current IDG(Ti) For the purpose of analysis the change in the

load current density resulted from the addition of DG is neglected in this study

Therefore the load current density Id(xTi) used in (1) is also used for obtaining the

feeder current after adding DG In this case the feeder current can be written as follows

leleminus

lele

=

int

int

lxxTIdxTxI

xxdxTxI

TxI

iDG

x

id

x

id

i

0

0

0

0

)()(

0)(

)( (88)

The corresponding power loss and voltage drop in the feeder are

336

RdxTIdxTxIRdxdxTxITxPl

x

x

iDGid

x x

idiloss sdot

minus+sdot

= int intint int

0

2

0

0

0

2

0

0 )()()()( (89)

lelesdot

minus

+sdot

lelesdot

=

int int

int int

int int

lxxZdxTIdxTxI

ZdxdxTxI

xxZdxdxTxI

TxV

x

x

iDG

x

id

x x

id

x x

id

idrop

0

0 0

0

0 0

0

0 0

)()(

)(

0)(

)( (810)

The average power loss in a given time period T is

i

N

i

ilossloss TTxPT

xPt

sum=

=1

00 )(1

)( (811)

where Nt is the number of time durations in the time period T

sum=

=tN

i

iTT1

(812)

Equation (86) can still be used under this situation to calculate the voltage at point x

by using Vdrop(xTi) obtained from equation (810)

Procedure to Find the Optimal Location of DG on a Radial Feeder

The goal is to add DG in a location to minimize the total average power loss and

assure that the voltages Vx along the feeder are in the acceptable range 1plusmn005 pu ie

0)(

0

0 =dx

xPd loss (813)

The solution x0 of the above equation will give the optimal site for minimizing the

power loss but it cannot guarantee that all the voltages along the feeder are in the

acceptable range If the voltage regulation cannot be satisfied at the same time the DG

337

can be placed around x0 to satisfy the voltage regulation rule while decreasing the power

loss as much as possible or the DG size can be increased The analytical procedure to

determine the optimal point to place DG on a radial feeder is given as follows

1) Find the distributed load )( id TxI along the feeder

2) Get the output current of DG )( iDG TI

3) Use equations (89) and (811) to calculate )( 0xPloss and find the solution x0 of

equation (813)

4) Use equations (86) and (810) to check whether the voltage regulation is satisfied

5) If all the voltages are in the acceptable range then the calculated x0 is the optimal spot

(xop) to add DG

6) If x0 doesnrsquot meet the voltage regulation rule then move the DG to see whether there

is a point around point x0 where all bus voltages are in the acceptable range

7) If no point on the feeder can satisfy the voltage regulation rule then increase the size

of DG and repeat steps 2) to 7)

8) Sometimes more than one DG may be needed Under this situation the feeder can be

divided into several segments and steps 1) to 7) can be applied to each segment

The flow chart of the procedure is summarized in Figure 82

338

Case Studies with Time Invariant Loads and DGs

Table 81 shows the results of analyses using the foregoing procedure to find the

optimal location for placing DG on radial feeders with three different load distributions

uniformly distributed load centrally distributed load and uniformly increasing distributed

load In the results given in Table 81 it is assumed that the DG supplies all the loads

on the feeder in each case and the distribution system supplies the system losses It is

noted from the table that the DG reduces the system power losses significantly when it is

located properly

Figure 82 Procedure for finding optimal place for a DG source in a radial feeder

339

TABLE 81 THEORETICAL ANALYSIS RESULTS OF CASE STUDIES

WITH TIME INVARIANT LOADS AND DGS

Cases

(Assuming that DG supplies

all the loads in each case)

0

lossP

(Power loss

before adding

DG)

lossP

(Power loss

after adding

DG)

Percent of

power loss

reduction

Optimal

place x0

Id

xl 0

Source

IDG

x0

Vl Vx V0

Uniformly distributed load

332RlId 1232

RlId 75 2

l

xl 0

Source

IDG

x0

Vl Vx

lxl

lx

xlI

xIxI

ld

ld

d lelt

lelt

minus=

2

20

)()(

Centrally distributed load

52

960

23RlI ld 52

320

1RlI

ld 87

2

l

Id=Ild(l-x)

xl 0

Source

IDG

x0

Vl Vx V0

Increasingly distributed load

5213330 RlIld

52015550 RlI

ld

88 )221( minus

340

The 23 rule presented in [86] works well when the load is uniformly distributed

along the feeder but it gives inaccurate results if the load configuration is different For a

uniformly distributed load if the DG supplies 23 of the total load ( 62lII ldDG = ) the

optimal site is at 30 lx = according to equation (89) This result is exactly the same as

that given in [86] However when the loads are centrally and increasingly distributed

and the DG provides 23 of the total load the optimal location for placing DG turns out to

be 6l and l)321( minus respectively which differ from what the ldquo23 rulerdquo suggests

in [86]

Case Study with Time Varying Load and DG

The same feeders as in the previous section (shown in Figure 81) but with time

varying load and DG are analyzed in this case The analysis is given for uniformly

distributed load only The analyses for other types of loads follow similarly

Assuming that DG is located at point x0 then according to equation (89) the

effective power loss is

3

)())(())(()()(

32

0

222

00

lTRIlxTRIlxTITRITxP id

iDGiDGidiloss +minusminusminus=

(814)

where lTITI iloadid )()( = and )( iload TI is the load current at the very sending end of the

feeder The average power loss in a given time period T is

i

N

i

iDG

N

i

iiDGidloss TTIT

RxTTITI

T

RxCxP

tt

sumsum==

minus+=1

20

1

2

010 )()()()( (815)

341

where i

N

i

iDGiDGid

id TlTRIlTITRIlTRI

TC

t

sum=

+minus=

1

22

32

1 )()()(3

)(1

Setting 0)(

0

0 =dx

xPd loss x0 is obtained to be

sum

sum

sum

sum

=

=

=

=

sdot==

t

t

t

t

N

i

iiDGiload

i

N

i

iDG

N

i

iiDGid

i

N

i

iDG

TTITI

TTIl

TTITI

TTI

x

1

1

2

1

1

2

0

)()(2

)(

)()(2

)(

(816)

Assuming that all bus voltages along the feeder are in the acceptable range equation

(816) can be approximated as

sum

sum

sum

sum

=

=

=

=

sdot=asymp

t

t

t

t

N

i

iiDGiload

i

N

i

iDG

N

i

iiDGid

i

N

i

iDG

TTPTP

TTPl

TTPTP

TTP

x

1

1

2

1

1

2

0

)()(2

)(

)()(2

)(

(817)

where lTPTP iloadid )()( = and )( iload TP is the total load along the feeder in the time

duration Ti

Optimal Placement of DG in Networked Systems

The theoretical analysis for placing a DG in networked systems is different and more

complicated than in a radial feeder To simplify the analysis only one DG is considered

to be added to the system

Consider the system shown in Figure 83 with a DG added to the system to reinforce

it The system has N buses and loads and the DG is located at a bus say bus j The main

external power is injected into bus 1 which is taken as slack bus The objective is to find

the bus to install the DG so that the total system power loss is minimized and the voltage

level at each bus is held in the acceptable range 1plusmn005 pu

342

DGLoad 1

Load j

Load N

Bus 1

Bus j

Bus N

Figure 83 A networked power system

Before the DG is added to the system the bus admittance matrix is

=

0

0

1

00

2

0

1

0

1

0

12

0

11

0

NN

N

NjNN

j

bus

Y

Y

YYY

YYY

Y (818)

where superscript 0 denotes the original system

Assuming that the DG is located at bus j the system admittance matrix is changed

from Ybus0 to Ybus by considering that bus 1 and bus j are connected together Actually

there is no line to connect those buses together but the imaginary line will help in finding

the optimal location to add DG Ybus is one dimension less than Ybus0 except when the DG

is located at bus 1 If the DG is at bus 1 Ybus matrix will be the same as Ybus0 To obtain

the new matrix Ybus when the DG source is connected we treat the system as connecting

343

bus 1 and j by eliminating bus j in Ybus0 [810] The new matrix is

=

minusminus

minus

minusminusminus )1)(1(

)1(1

)1(2)1(1)1(

11211

NN

N

kNNN

k

bus

Y

Y

YYY

YYY

Y (819)

where

12

1

12

2

11

0

)1(

0

)1(11

00

11

0

1

00

1111

minus==

minus=+=

minus=+=

++=

++

NkYY

NjkYYY

jkYYY

YYYY

kk

kjkk

jkkk

jjj

1)(

121

112

1)(2

0

)1)(1(

0

)1(

0

)1(

0

minuslele=

minusleleminuslele=

minusleleminuslele=

minuslele=

++

+

+

NkijYY

jkNijYY

NkjjiYY

jkiYY

kiik

kiik

kiik

ikik

The new bus impedance matrix Zbus is

==

minusminus

minus

minusminusminus

minus

)1)(1(

)1(1

)1(2)1(1)1(

11211

1

NN

N

kNNN

k

busbus

Z

Z

ZZZ

ZZZ

YZ (820)

Suppose the complex load and generated power of the original system are

][ 000

2

0

1

0

LNLiLLL SSSSS = and

][ 000

2

0

1

0

GNGiGGG SSSSS = i=12 N (821)

where 000

LiLiLi jQPS += and 000

GiGiGi jQPS +=

A new load vector SL is set up as follows

[ ]LNLiLLL SSSSS 21= (822)

where

LiLiLi jQPS += and

0=LiS for i = 1 (slack bus)

344

0

LiLi SS = for i = load buses

GiLi

GiLiGiLiLi

PP

PPjPPS

le

gt

+minus

=0

000

for i = P-V buses

Note that at the slack bus (bus 1) SL1 = 0 it is assumed that the real and reactive

power consumed by the load are supplied directly by the external generation at that bus

Also at a voltage controlled (P-V) bus QLi = 0 it is assumed that the load reactive power

can be supplied by the external power source at the P-V bus

To find the optimal point to place the DG we set up an objective function for DG at

each bus j as follows

sumsum+=

minus

=

+=N

ji

Lii

j

i

Liij SjRSjRf1

2

1

1

1

2

1 )()( j=2 hellipN (823)

where R1i(j) is the equivalent resistance between bus 1 and bus i when DG is located at

bus j jne1

gt

lt

minus+

minus+=

minusminusminus ji

ji

ZZZReal

ZZZRealjR

iii

iii

i )2(

)2()(

)1(1)1)(1(11

111

1 (824)

When the DG is located at bus 1 (j=1) the objective function will be

sum=

=N

i

Lii SRf1

2

11 (825)

Note that in this case Ybus (Zbus) will be the same as Ybus0 (Zbus

0) and R11=0

The goal is to find the optimal bus m where the objective function reaches its

minimum value

NjfMinf jm 21)( == (826)

The theoretical procedure to find the optimal bus to place DG in a networked system

345

can be summarized as follows

1) Find the matrix Ybus0 and set up the load vector SL

2) Compute Ybus and the corresponding Zbus for different DG locations

3) Calculate the equivalent resistances according to (824)

4) Use (823) and (825) to calculate objective function values for DG at different buses

and find the optimal bus m

5) If all the voltages are in the acceptable range when the DG is located at bus m then

bus m is the optimal site

6) If some bus voltages do not meet the voltage rule then move the DG around bus m to

satisfy the voltage rule

7) If there is no bus that can satisfy the voltage regulation rule try a different size DG

and repeat steps 5) and 6)

The procedure is summarized in the flow chart shown in Figure 84 and the

corresponding MATLAB code is given in Appendix C

Though the discussion here is under the assumption that only one DG source is added

to the system it can be easily extended to the systems with multiple DG sources By

connecting all the DG buses and slack bus together through imaginary lines the new Ybus

matrix and the corresponding objective function can be established by the method

presented above

Simulation Results

Several simulation studies were carried out to verify the results obtained analytically

for both radial and network-connected systems

346

Radial Feeder with Time Invariant Loads and DG

A radial feeder with a time invariant DG was simulated under uniformly distributed

centrally distributed and increasingly distributed loads The simulated system for

uniformly distributed loads is shown in Figure 85 The system architecture is the same

when the loads are centrally distributed or increasingly distributed The line parameters

DG and load sizes are listed in Table 82

Figure 84 Flow chart of The theoretical procedure to find the optimal bus to place DG

in a networked system

347

power grid

DG

External

Bus 1 Bus 2 Bus 3 Bus 4 Bus 5 Bus 6 Bus 7 Bus 8 Bus 9 Bus 10 Bus 11

050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW

Figure 85 A radial feeder with uniformly distributed loads

TABLE 82 PARAMETERS OF THE SYSTEM IN FIGURE 85

Line parameters

(AWG ACSR 10)

Line spacing = 132m (equal spacing assumed)

R = 0 538Ω XL = 04626 Ω

Bus Voltage 125kV

Line length between two neighboring buses 25km

Load at each bus (MW) Load type

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Uniformly distributed 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05

Centrally distributed 005 01 02 03 04 05 04 03 02 01 005

Increasingly distributed 005 01 015 02 025 03 035 04 045 05 055

Uniformly Centrally Increasingly DG size

(MW) 55 26 33

348

TABLE 83 SIMULATION RESULTS OF CASE STUDIES WITH

TIME INVARIANT LOADS AND DG

Total Power

Losses (kW) Line Loading Optimal Bus No

(Simulation)

Optimal Place

(Theoretical) Without DG With DG

Uniform 6 6 17785 02106

Central 6 6 02589 00275

Increasing 8 8 08099 00606

In Table 83 the optimal bus for placing DG to minimize the total system power loss

is given for each load distribution The total system power losses are given both with and

without DG It is noted that the simulation results agree well with theoretical values

While some bus voltages fall far out of the acceptable range when there is no DG in the

system all the bus voltages are within 1plusmn005 pu with the DG added

Radial Feeder with Time Varying Loads and DG

This part of the study is helpful in understanding the effect of variable power DG

(such as wind and photovoltaic (PV)) sources on distribution systems with time varying

loads In practice the site of such DG sources may be mainly determined by

meteorological and geographic factors However DG sources with predictable output

power (such as fuel cells and microturbines) can be placed at any bus in the distribution

system to achieve optimal result

The feeder shown in Figure 85 is also used to simulate the situation with time

varying uniformly distributed loads and DG A wind-turbine generator is considered as

349

the time varying DG source Actual wind data taken in a rural area in south central

Montana were used to obtain the output power of a simulated (1-MW) wind turbine as

shown in Figure 86 [85] [88] It shows the annual daily average output power of the

turbine which can be viewed as the filtered version of the turbinersquos output power The

daily average demand of a typical house in the northwestern United States shown in

Figure 87 [89] is used here as one unit of the time varying loads The loads are assumed

to be uniformly distributed along the feeder with 100 houses at each bus

0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23

Time of the day

Ou

tpu

t o

f w

ind

tu

rbin

e (

kW

)

Figure 86 Annual daily average output power profile of a 1-MW wind-DG

The simulated wind-DG was installed at different buses and the total system power

loss was obtained in each case shown in Figure 88 It is noticed from this figure that

total feeder power loss reaches a minimum value when the wind-DG is placed at bus 10

in Figure 85 The theoretical optimal position to place the wind-DG is obtained (using

equation (817) and the generation and demand data shown in Figures 86 and 87) to be

x0 asymp 014l The position with this distance from the end of feeder in Figure 85 is between

bus 9 and 10 but closer to bus 10 which is the same bus obtained from the simulation

results shown in Figure 88

350

0

05

1

15

2

25

3

35

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23

Time of day

Dem

and (kw

)

Figure 87 Daily average demand of a typical house

80

90

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

DG loaction - Bus No

To

tal

avera

ge p

ow

er

loss (

kW

)

Figure 88 Power losses of the radial feeder with the wind-DG at different buses

351

Networked Systems

The 25 kV IEEE 6-bus system shown in Figure 89 [81] which can be considered as

a sub-transmissiondistribution system was used to verify the method presented in the

previous section The parameters of this system are given in Table 84 A 5-MW DG was

added to reinforce the system Total system power loss was obtained from the results of

power flow studies when DG was placed at different buses (Figure 810) It is noted from

this figure that minimum power loss is achieved when DG is placed at bus 3 The

values of the objective function for the system were obtained by applying the proposed

analytical approach when the DG was placed at different buses These values are shown

in the bar chart of Figure 811 It is noted from this figure that the objective function is

also at its minimum when the DG is placed at bus 3 indicating that the result obtained

from the proposed analytical method is the same as the simulation result

Reference Bus

Voltage Controlled Bus

Bus 1

Bus 2Bus 3

Bus 4

Bus 5Bus 6

80 MW

10 MVR 40 MW 725 MW

20 MVR

50 MW 125 MVR

50 MW

15 MVR

Figure 89 6-bus networked power system studied

352

TABLE 84 PARAMETERS OF THE SYSTEM IN FIGURE 89 [81]

Bus No Voltage (pu) Bus Power (MVA)

1 10+j00 Slack bus

2 ― -40 -j100

3 ― -725-j200

4 ― -500-j125

5 015 =V 800

6 ― -500-j150

Line Data

From To Zserial (pu) Yshunt(pu)

1 2 02238+j05090 j00012

2 3 02238+j05090 j00012

3 4 02238+j05090 j00012

4 5 02238+j05090 j00012

5 6 02238+j05090 j00012

6 1 02276+j02961 j00025

1 5 02603+j07382 j00008

0

01

02

03

04

05

2 3 4 5 6

DG Location - Bus No

Po

wer

Lo

ss (

MW

)

Figure 810 Power losses of the system in Figure 89 with a 5MW DG

353

0

5

10

15

20

25

2 3 4 5 6

DG Location - Bus No

Valu

e o

f th

e O

bje

cti

ve F

un

cti

on

Figure 811 Values of the objective function of the system in Figure 89

The proposed method was also tested on the IEEE 30-bus test system shown in Figure

812 which can be considered as a meshed transmissionsubtransmission system [811]

The system has 30 buses (mainly 132kV and 33kV buses) and 41 lines The system bus

data is given in Table 85 A 15 MW DG (about 5 of the total system load of 283 +

j1262 MVA) is considered to be added to reinforce the system The total power loss of

the system reaches a minimum value when DG is located at bus 5 as shown in Figure

813 The optimal bus determined by the method proposed in this study is also bus 5 as

given in Figure 814

354

1

2

3

4

5

6

7 8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20 21

22

23 24

25 26

27 28

29 30

subset

100 MVA Base

Figure 812 IEEE 30-bus test system

152

154

156

158

16

162

164

166

168

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30

DG Location - Bus No

Pow

er

Losses (M

W)

Figure 813 Power losses of the IEEE 30-bus test system with a 15MW DG

355

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

550

600

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30DG Location - Bus No

Valu

e o

f o

bje

cti

ve f

un

cti

on

Figure 814 Values of the objective function of the IEEE 30-bus system

A DG source may not be connected directly to a 132kV bus (bus 5 in Figure 812) as

determined by the proposed method For this reason a subset of the 30-bus test system

with lower voltage level (33kV) as indicated in Figure 812 was also chosen to test the

proposed method The new system has 18 buses 22 lines and a total load of 1047+j508

MVA A 5MW DG (about 5 of the total load of the subset) was added to the system

Simulation results for this system are given in Figure 815 It is noted that the total system

loss reaches a minimum value when the DG is located at bus 30 The optimal bus

suggested by the proposed method is also bus 30 as shown in Figure 816

All the power flow simulation studies in this chapter were carried out using

PowerWorldreg Simulator [812]

356

11

115

12

125

13

135

10 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 29 30

DG Location - Bus No

Po

wer

Lo

sses (

MW

)

Figure 815 Power losses of the subset system in Figure 812 with a 5MW DG

50

55

60

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

10 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 29 30

DG Location - Bus No

Valu

e o

f obje

ctive function

Figure 816 Values of the objective function of the subset system in Figure 812

357

TABLE 85 BUS DATA OF THE IEEE 30-BUS TEST SYSTEM [811]

Bus No Type Load

(pu)

Rated Bus

Voltage (kV)

Bus

Voltage (pu)

1 Swing 00 132 1060

2 P-V 0217+j0127 132 1043

3 P-Q 0024+j0012 132 ―

4 P-Q 0076+j0016 132 ―

5 P-V 0942+j019 132 1010

6 P-Q 00 132 ―

7 P-Q 0228+j0109 132 ―

8 P-V 03+j03 132 1010

9 P-Q 00 690 ―

10 P-Q 0058+j002 330 ―

11 P-V 00 110 1082

12 P-Q 0112+j0075 330 ―

13 P-V 00 110 1071

14 P-Q 0062+j0016 330 ―

15 P-Q 0082+j0025 330 ―

16 P-Q 0035+j0018 330 ―

17 P-Q 009+j0058 330 ―

18 P-Q 0032+j0009 330 ―

19 P-Q 0095+j0034 330 ―

20 P-Q 0022+j0007 330 ―

21 P-Q 0175+j0112 330 ―

22 P-Q 00 330 ―

23 P-Q 0032+j0016 330 ―

24 P-Q 0087+j0067 330 ―

25 P-Q 00 330 ―

26 P-Q 0035+j0023 330 ―

27 P-Q 00 330 ―

28 P-Q 00 330 ―

29 P-Q 0024+j0009 330 ―

30 P-Q 0106+j0019 330 ―

(100 MVA Base)

358

Summary

Analytical approaches are presented in this chapter to determine the optimal location

for placing DG in both radial and networked systems to minimize power losses The

proposed approaches are not iterative algorithms like power flow programs Therefore

there is no convergence problems involved and results could be obtained very quickly A

series of simulation studies were also conducted to verify the validity of the proposed

approaches and results show that the proposed methods work well

In practice there are other constraints which may affect the DG placement

Nevertheless methodologies presented in this chapter can be effective instructive and

helpful to system designers in selecting proper sites to place DGs

359

REFERENCES

[81] Narayan S Rau Yih-heui Wan ldquoOptimum Location of Resources in Distributed

Planningrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Systems Vol 9 No 4 pp 2014-2020

November 1994

[82] Kyu-Ho Kim Yu-Jeong Lee Sang-Bong Rhee Sang-Kuen Lee and Seok-Ku You

ldquoDispersed Generator Placement using Fuzzy-GA in Distribution Systemsrdquo

Proceedings 2002 IEEE Power Engineering Society Summer Meeting Vol 3 pp

1148-1153 July 2002 Chicago IL

[83] N Hadjsaid JF Canard F Dumas ldquoDispersed Generation Impact on Distribution

Networksrdquo IEEE Computer Applications in Power Vol 12 No 2 pp 22-28

April 1999

[84] T Griffin K Tomsovic D Secrest A Law ldquoPlacement of Dispersed Generation

Systems for Reduced Lossesrdquo Proceedings the 33rd Annual Hawaii International

Conference on Systems Sciences 2000

[85] MH Nehrir C Wang and V Gerez ldquoImpact of Wind Power Distributed

Generation on Distribution Systemsrdquo Proceedings 17th International Conference

on Electricity Distribution (CIRED) May 2003 Barcelona Spain

[86] H L Willis ldquoAnalytical Methods and Rules of Thumb for Modeling

DG-Distribution Interactionrdquo Proceedings 2000 IEEE Power Engineering Society

Summer Meeting Vol 3 pp 1643-1644 July 2000 Seattle WA

[87] JO Kim SW Nam SK Park C Singh ldquoDispersed Generation Planning Using

Improved Hereford Ranch Algorithmrdquo Electric Power Systems Research Elsevier

Vol 47 No 1 pp47-55 Oct 1998

[88] W Kellogg MH Nehrir G Venkataramanan and V Gerez ldquoGeneration Unit

Sizing and Cost Analysis for Stand-Alone Wind Photovoltaic and Hybrid WindPV Systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol13 No 1 pp

70-75 March 1998

[89] J Cahill K Ritland and W Kelly Description of Electric Energy Use in Single

Family Residences in the Pacific Northwest 1986-1992 Office of Energy

Resources Bonneville Power Administration Portland OR December 1992

[810] J Duncan Glover Mulukutla S Sarma ldquoPower System Analysis and Design 3rd

Editionrdquo BrooksCole Thomson Learning Inc 2001

360

[811] R Yokoyama SH Bae T Morita and H Sasaki ldquoMultiobjective Optimal

Generation Dispatch Based on Probability Security Criteriardquo IEEE Transactions

on Power Systems pp 317-324 Vol 3 No 1 Feb 1988

[812] Online httpwwwpowerworldcom

361

CHAPTER 9

CONCLUSIONS

This dissertation is on modeling and control of a hybrid windPVFC alternative

energy system The main part of the dissertation focuses on the modeling of different

energy systems and the corresponding control scheme development Special emphasis is

put on the modeling and control of fuel cell systems

DG system modeling and control are two other aspects of the research presented in

the dissertation A hybrid alternative energy system has great potential for use as a DG

source Analytical methods for optimal placement of DG sources in power systems are

given in the dissertation

The conclusions of the research work reported in this dissertation are summarized

below

(1) Environmentally friendly and sustainable alternative energy systems will play

more important roles in the future electricity supply

(2) Dynamic models have been developed for the following fuel cells (PEMFCs and

SOFCs) variable speed wind energy conversion systems photovoltaic power generation

systems electrolyzers power electronic interfacing devices battery banks and

accessories including gas compressor high-pressure hydrogen storage tank and gas

pressure regulator These dynamic models are suitable for both detailed fast transient and

large time scale performance evaluation studies They can be used to expedite research

processes in related alternative energy areas such as system control and performance

optimization studies

362

(3) Control of grid-connected FC (PEMFC and SOFC) DG systems is investigated

Controller designs for the DCDC converter and 3-phase inverter are given using

linearized small-signal converterinverter models A dq transformed two-loop current

control scheme is used on the inverter to control the real and reactive power delivered

from the fuel cell system to the utility grid The validity of the proposed control schemes

over a large operating range was verified through simulations on switched nonlinear

converterinverter models Simulation results of the case studies show that the real and

reactive power delivered from the fuel cell system to the utility grid can be controlled as

desired while the DC bus voltage is maintained well within its prescribed range The

results also show that the fuel cell system is capable of load-following and can remain

stable under the occurrence of severe electrical faults It is noticed that a two-loop

inverter control scheme has advantage over a voltage only control scheme for the inverter

on fault protection and system stability

(4) A load transient mitigation control strategy is proposed for stand-alone fuel

cell-battery power generation systems The control strategy consists of a current

controller for the DCDC converter and a battery chargingdischarging controller to keep

the battery voltage within a desired range During load transients the fuel cell is

controlled (by the proposed transient mitigation technique) to supply the steady-state

power to the load while the battery will supply the transient power to the load Simulation

studies under different load transients have been carried for both the PEMFC system and

the SOFC system These studies show that the fuel cell current can be controlled as

desired and the battery voltage can be held in the prescribed range The results show that

the proposed load transient mitigation technique works well for both types of fuel cell

363

systems (PEMFC and SOFC) studied

(5) A hybrid windPVFC DG system is proposed in this dissertation Wind and PV

are the primary power sources of the system and the combination of FC and electrolyzer

is used as a backup and long term storage unit The different energy sources in the system

are integrated through an AC link bus The system can be used as test-bed system for

other related studies on hybrid alternative energy systems

(6) Based on the dynamic component models a simulation model for the proposed

hybrid windPVFC energy system has been developed successfully using

MATLABSimulink The overall power management strategy for coordinating the power

flows among the different energy sources is presented in the dissertation Simulation

studies have been carried out to verify the system performance under different scenarios

using practical load profile and real weather data The results show that the overall power

management strategy is effective and the power flows among the different energy sources

and the load demand is balanced successfully

(7) Analytical approaches are presented to determine the optimal location for placing

DG in both radial and networked systems to minimize power losses The proposed

approaches are not iterative algorithms like power flow programs Therefore there is no

convergence problem involved and results could be obtained very quickly A series of

simulation studies were also conducted to verify the validity of the proposed approaches

The results show that the proposed methods work well

364

APPENDICES

365

APPENDIX A

abc-dq0 TRANSFORMATION

366

abc-dq0 Transformation

The abc-dq0 transformation transfers 3-phase variables in abc stationary frame to a

rotating dq0 frame As explained in [462] the transformation can be expressed as

abcdqabcdq VTV 00 = (A1)

Where

=

0

0

V

V

V

V q

d

dq

=

c

b

a

abc

V

V

V

V

+

minus

+

minus

=

2

1

2

1

2

13

2cos

3

2cos)cos(

3

2sin

3

2sin)sin(

3

20

πθ

πθθ

πθ

πθθ

dqabcT θ(0)dξω(ξ)θ

t

0

+= int

θ is the angular position ω is the angular speed and ξ is the dummy variable of

integration For abc variables with constant frequency at 60 Hz and zero initial phase θ

can written as tπθ 120=

In (A1) V can represent voltage current flux linkage or electric charge For

balanced 3-phase AC variables in abc frame the corresponding dq0 components are DC

variables with zero value for 0 component Therefore an abc-dq transformation given in

(A2) can be used in this case

+

minus

+

minus=

3

2cos

3

2cos)cos(

3

2sin

3

2sin)sin(

3

2 π

θπ

θθ

πθ

πθθ

dqabcT (A2)

367

dq0-abc Transformation

The inverses dq0-abc transformation can be expressed as

( ) ( )

+

+

minus

minus== minus

13

π2cos

3

π2sin

13

π2cos

3

π2sin

1cossin

)( 1

00

θθ

θθ

θθ

dqabcabcdq TT (A3)

The corresponding inverses dq-abc transformation is

( ) ( )

+

+

minus

minus=

3

π2cos

3

π2sin

3

π2cos

3

π2sin

cossin

θθ

θθ

θθ

abcdqT (A4)

368

APPENDIX B

SIMULATION DIAGRAMS OF THE HYBRID ENERGY SYSTEM

369

If Wspeed lt3 ms turn the CB OFF

3 C

2 B

1 A

Vabc (pu)

Vd_ref (pu)

Vq_ref (pu)

Enable

dq voltage controller

Enable

power control

generate dq control signal

for voltage controller

3

const

[Windspeed]

Wind speed

WindSpeed

V+

V- Wind Turbine

com

A B C

a b c

WTG CB

Pwtginvmat

To File5

Timer

ON 02s

Vabc

Iabc

A B C

a b c

Three-Phase

V-I Measurement

gt=

Relational

Operator

Multiply

Vabc

A B C

a b c

Measure2

Vabc

Iabc

PQ

Instantaneous P amp Q

[Pwin_inv]

Goto

[qctrl_win_inv]

From3

[dctrl_win_inv]

From2

[Windspeed]

From1

Demux

A B C

A B C

Coupling Inductor

dq_ref (pu)

DC +

DC -

A B C

Averaged model for 3phase inverter

A B C

A B C 005km

AWG ACSR 61

2

WTGCB Ctrl

1=ON 0=OFF

1

Wspeed

(ms)

Figure B1 Sim

ulink m

odel for the wind energy conversion system

370

It is a 1612 array For each unit the power rate is 173W at 1000 Wm^2 irradiancen and 25 C cell temperature

The total power rate is about 30kW under 1000 Wm^2 and 25 C

3 C

2 B

1 A

[pvqctrl]

qctrl

[Irradiance]

irradiance

[pvdctrl]

dctrl

Vabc (pu)

Vd_ref (pu)

Vq_ref (pu)

Enable

dq

controller

-6

const2

0

const1

116

1e-5s+1

Transfer Fcn

To avoid algebraic loop1

Ppv_invmat

To File5

Upvmat

To File4

Tpvmat

To File3

Vabc

Iabc

A B C

a b c

Three-Phase

V-I Measurement

Terminator4

Saturation2

Relay1

Relay

Product3

[Ppv_inv]

Ppv_inv com

A B C

a b c

PV CB

Irradiance

Ipv (A)

Tambient (C)

Upv Tc

Pmax

PV

InOut

PI

Vabc

IabcPQ

P amp Q

Vabc

A B C

a b c

Measure

[Ipv]

Ipv (A)

-K-

Gain1

12 Gain

[Irradiance]

From7

[mpvVdc]

From6

[Irradiance]

From5

[Irradiance]

From4

[pvqctrl]

From3

[Ipv]

From29

[pvdctrl]

From2

[Pepv]

From1

AirTempData

From

Workspace1

sin(u)

Fcn1

cos(u)

Fcn

Demux

Dead Zone

A B C

A B C

Coupling

Inductor

s

-+

CVS

i+

-

CM A

DC_IN+

DC_IN-DC_OUT+

DC_OUT-

Buck DCDC

dq_ref (pu)

DC +

DC -

A B C

Averaged model for 3phase inverter

gt=10

gt= 30Wm2

gt= 300Wm^2

A B C

A B C

1200 km

AWG ACSR 61

0-026

2

PVCB Ctrl

1=ON 0=OFF

1

Irradiance (Wm^2)

Figure B2 Sim

ulink m

odel for the solar energy conversion system

371

1

nH2used (mols)

3 C

2 B

1 A

Vabc (pu)

Vd_ref (pu)

Vq_ref (pu)

Enable

dq

voltage controller

Pdemand (W)

PFC_out (W)

Enable

dctrl

qctrl

power control

generate d q control signal

for voltage controller

v+ -

Vfc

PFC_invmat

To File5

PanodeFCmat

To File4

H2usedmat

To File2

Vfcmat

To File1

com

A B C

a b c

Three-Phase Breaker

Vabc

Iabc

A B C

a b c

Three-Phase

V-I Measurement

Panode (atm) nH2

FC+ FC-

PEMFC

Stack

Vabc

A B C

a b c

Measure2

Vabc

Iabc

PQ

Instantaneous P amp Q

1

Initial value of

the output pressure

[mPFC_inv]

Goto3

[Panode_fc]

Goto1

Pref (atm)

Pstorage (atm)

qo (mols)

Po_ini (atm)

Po (atm)

Gas Pressure Actutator

[Panode_fc]

From2

[mPFC_inv]

From1

1

Enabled always

15

Desired pressure

Demux

DC_IN+

DC_IN-

DC_OUT+

DC_OUT-

DCDC Boost

A B C

A B C

Coupling

Inductor

dq_ref (pu)

DC +

DC -

A B C

Averaged model for 3phase inverter

A B C

A B C

150 km

AWG ACSR 61

3

Pstorage (atm)

2

Pdemand (W)

1

FCCB Ctrl

1=ON 0=OFF

Figure B3 Sim

ulink m

odel for the fuel cell and the gas pressure regulation system

372

1

Ptank (atm)

3C2B1A

1

unity PF

Pava

Pused

elec_rectg

power control

14400

m0

1000

const

H2genmat

To File5

Pavamat

To File3

Pcompmat

To File2

Ptankmat

To File1

Terminator

Switch

n (flow rate)

Pcomp

Polytropic Compressor

n_in

n_out

m0

P (atm)

H2 storage tank

[Pcompressor]

Goto3

[Pcompressor]

From1

[Pdcrect_elec]

From

Tambient (C)

Tcm_in(C)

H2 (mols)

Tc

DC +

DC -

Electrolyzer

50kW 40 stacks in series

Gate (0-1)

PF (01-1)

A B C

DC +

DC-

Controllable Rectifier

Simplified average model

25

Constant2

25

Constant1

2

Pava (W)

1

nH2_FC

Figure B4 Sim

ulink m

odel for the electrolyzer and the gas compression system

373

APPENDIX C

MATLAB PROGRAMS FOR DG OPTIMAL PLACEMENT

374

DG Optimal Program for the IEEE 6-Bus system

Y matrix of the system 1 2 3 4 5 6 Y = [ 278-497j+0005-1j -072+165j 0 0 -042+12j -163+212j -072+165j 145-329j -072+165j 0 0 0 0 -072+165j 145-329j -072+165j 0 0 0 0 -072+165j 145-329j -072+165j 0 -042+12j 0 0 -072+165j 187-450j+0005-1j -072+165j -163+212j 0 0 0 -072+165j 236-377j]

Assume Xd and R of the Generator is R +jX = 0005+j1 Load data in the system corresponding to different buses Demand = [0 4+10i 725+20i 5+125i 0 5+15i] MVA Demand = abs(Demand)

f(i) = Sum(LiPi^2) objective function or f(i) = Sum(LiSi^2) objective function Li is the equivalent length from the DG location to load Pi or Si i is the bus number i=12 N Target find the i which yields the minimum value of f(i) BUSNO=6 fobj = zeros(BUSNO 1) for busno=1BUSNO Z = GetEqImpedance(Y 1 busno) Req = real(Z) fobj(1) = fobj(1) + ReqDemand(busno)^2 end for dg=2BUSNO move dg to different buses Y1 = changeYmatrix(Ydg) connect the bus dg with bus 1 for busno=1BUSNO if the dg location bus no is the same as the load bus no then line

power loss can be set to 0 if busno == dg

Z = 0 elseif busno lt dg Z = GetEqImpedance(Y1 1 busno) else Z = GetEqImpedance(Y1 1 busno-1) end Req = real(Z) fobj(dg) = fobj(dg) + ReqDemand(busno)^2 end end fobj

375

DG Optimal Program for the IEEE 30-Bus system

Assume Yg =1(0005+j11) for Synchronous Generator

Yc = 1(0008+j18) for Synchronous Condenser (Refer to Glovers Book) Generating Y matrix (imported from PowerWorld) j = sqrt(-1) Yg = 1(0005+j11) Yc = 1(0008+j18) Ybus = zeros(3030) Ybus( 1 1) = 67655+ j( -212316) + Yg Ybus( 1 2) = -52246+ j( 156467) Ybus( 1 3) = -15409+ j( 56317) Ybus( 2 1) = -52246+ j( 156467) Ybus( 2 2) = 97523+ j( -306487) + Yg Ybus( 2 4) = -17055+ j( 51974) Ybus( 2 5) = -11360+ j( 47725) Ybus( 2 6) = -16861+ j( 51165) Ybus( 3 1) = -15409+ j( 56317) Ybus( 3 3) = 97363+ j( -291379) Ybus( 3 4) = -81954+ j( 235309) Ybus( 4 2) = -17055+ j( 51974) Ybus( 4 3) = -81954+ j( 235309) Ybus( 4 4) = 163141+ j( -549186) Ybus( 4 6) = -64131+ j( 223112) Ybus( 4 12) = -00000+ j( 39062) Ybus( 5 2) = -11360+ j( 47725) Ybus( 5 5) = 40900+ j( -121906) + Yc Ybus( 5 7) = -29540+ j( 74493) Ybus( 6 2) = -16861+ j( 51165) Ybus( 6 4) = -64131+ j( 223112) Ybus( 6 6) = 223416+ j( -824934) Ybus( 6 7) = -35902+ j( 110261) Ybus( 6 8) = -62893+ j( 220126) Ybus( 6 9) = -00000+ j( 48077) Ybus( 6 10) = -00000+ j( 17986) Ybus( 6 28) = -43628+ j( 154636) Ybus( 7 5) = -29540+ j( 74493) Ybus( 7 6) = -35902+ j( 110261) Ybus( 7 7) = 65442+ j( -184567) Ybus( 8 6) = -62893+ j( 220126) Ybus( 8 8) = 77333+ j( -265275) + Yc Ybus( 8 28) = -14440+ j( 45408) Ybus( 9 6) = -00000+ j( 48077) Ybus( 9 9) = 00000+ j( -187063) Ybus( 9 10) = -00000+ j( 90909) Ybus( 9 11) = -00000+ j( 48077) Ybus( 10 6) = -00000+ j( 17986) Ybus( 10 9) = -00000+ j( 90909) Ybus( 10 10) = 134621+ j( -415738)

376

Ybus( 10 17) = -39560+ j( 103174) Ybus( 10 20) = -17848+ j( 39854) Ybus( 10 21) = -51019+ j( 109807) Ybus( 10 22) = -26193+ j( 54008) Ybus( 11 9) = -00000+ j( 48077) Ybus( 11 11) = 00000+ j( -48077) + Yc Ybus( 12 4) = -00000+ j( 39062) Ybus( 12 12) = 65740+ j( -244242) Ybus( 12 13) = -00000+ j( 71429) Ybus( 12 14) = -15266+ j( 31734) Ybus( 12 15) = -30954+ j( 60973) Ybus( 12 16) = -19520+ j( 41044) Ybus( 13 12) = -00000+ j( 71429) Ybus( 13 13) = 00000+ j( -71429) + Yc Ybus( 14 12) = -15266+ j( 31734) Ybus( 14 14) = 40175+ j( -54243) Ybus( 14 15) = -24910+ j( 22509) Ybus( 15 12) = -30954+ j( 60973) Ybus( 15 14) = -24910+ j( 22509) Ybus( 15 15) = 93655+ j( -160116) Ybus( 15 18) = -18108+ j( 36874) Ybus( 15 23) = -19683+ j( 39761) Ybus( 16 12) = -19520+ j( 41044) Ybus( 16 16) = 32596+ j( -89257) Ybus( 16 17) = -13076+ j( 48213) Ybus( 17 10) = -39560+ j( 103174) Ybus( 17 16) = -13076+ j( 48213) Ybus( 17 17) = 52637+ j( -151388) Ybus( 18 15) = -18108+ j( 36874) Ybus( 18 18) = 48865+ j( -99062) Ybus( 18 19) = -30757+ j( 62188) Ybus( 19 18) = -30757+ j( 62188) Ybus( 19 19) = 89580+ j( -179835) Ybus( 19 20) = -58824+ j( 117647) Ybus( 20 10) = -17848+ j( 39854) Ybus( 20 19) = -58824+ j( 117647) Ybus( 20 20) = 76672+ j( -157501) Ybus( 21 10) = -51019+ j( 109807) Ybus( 21 21) = 218765+ j( -451084) Ybus( 21 22) = -167746+ j( 341277) Ybus( 22 10) = -26193+ j( 54008) Ybus( 22 21) = -167746+ j( 341277) Ybus( 22 22) = 219345+ j( -434829) Ybus( 22 24) = -25405+ j( 39544) Ybus( 23 15) = -19683+ j( 39761) Ybus( 23 23) = 34298+ j( -69653) Ybus( 23 24) = -14614+ j( 29892) Ybus( 24 22) = -25405+ j( 39544) Ybus( 24 23) = -14614+ j( 29892) Ybus( 24 24) = 53118+ j( -92313) Ybus( 24 25) = -13099+ j( 22876) Ybus( 25 24) = -13099+ j( 22876) Ybus( 25 25) = 44957+ j( -78650) Ybus( 25 26) = -12165+ j( 18171) Ybus( 25 27) = -19693+ j( 37602)

377

Ybus( 26 25) = -12165+ j( 18171) Ybus( 26 26) = 12165+ j( -18171) Ybus( 27 25) = -19693+ j( 37602) Ybus( 27 27) = 36523+ j( -94604) Ybus( 27 28) = -00000+ j( 25253) Ybus( 27 29) = -09955+ j( 18810) Ybus( 27 30) = -06875+ j( 12940) Ybus( 28 6) = -43628+ j( 154636) Ybus( 28 8) = -14440+ j( 45408) Ybus( 28 27) = -00000+ j( 25253) Ybus( 28 28) = 58068+ j( -225016) Ybus( 29 27) = -09955+ j( 18810) Ybus( 29 29) = 19076+ j( -36044) Ybus( 29 30) = -09121+ j( 17234) Ybus( 30 27) = -06875+ j( 12940) Ybus( 30 29) = -09121+ j( 17234) Ybus( 30 30) = 15995+ j( -30173) BUSNO=30 Load data in the system corresponding to different buses Demand = zeros(1BUSNO) MVA Demand(1)= 00 Demand(2)= 00 Demand(3)= 24 + j12 Demand(4)= 76 + j16 Demand(5)= 942 + j190 Demand(6)= 00 Demand(7)= 228 + j109 Demand(8)= 300 + j300 Demand(9)= 00 Demand(10)= 58 + j20 Demand(11)= 00 Demand(12)= 112 + j75 Demand(13)= 00 Demand(14)= 62 + j16 Demand(15)= 82 + j25 Demand(16)= 35 + j18 Demand(17)= 90 + j58 Demand(18)= 32 + j09 Demand(19)= 95 + j34 Demand(20)= 22 + j07 Demand(21)= 175 + j112 Demand(22)= 00 Demand(23)= 32 + j16 Demand(24)= 87 + j67 Demand(25)= 00 Demand(26)= 35 + j23 Demand(27)= 00 Demand(28)= 00 Demand(29)= 24 + j09 Demand(30)= 106 + j19

378

Demand = abs(Demand) MVA Demand = Demand10 f(i) = Sum(LiPi^2) objective function or f(i) = Sum(LiSi^2) objective function Li is the equivalent length from the DG loaction to load Pi or Si i is thebus number i=12 N Target find the i which yields the minimum value of f(i) BUSNO=30 fobj = zeros(BUSNO 1) for busno=1BUSNO Z = GetEqImpedance(Ybus 1 busno) Req = real(Z) fobj(1) = fobj(1) + ReqDemand(busno)^2 end for dg=2BUSNO move dg to different buses Y1 = changeYmatrix(Ybusdg) connect the bus dg with bus 1 for busno=1BUSNO if busno == dg

if the dg location bus no is the same as the load bus no then line

power loss can be set to 0 Z = 0 elseif busno lt dg Z = GetEqImpedance(Y1 1 busno) else Z = GetEqImpedance(Y1 1 busno-1) end Req = real(Z) fobj(dg) = fobj(dg) + ReqDemand(busno)^2 end end fobj

iii

STATEMENT OF PERMISSION TO USE In presenting this dissertation in partial fulfillment of the requirements for a doctoral degree at Montana State University I agree that the Library shall make it available to borrowers under rules of the Library I further agree that copying of this dissertation is allowable only for scholarly purposes consistent with ldquofair userdquo as prescribed in the US Copyright Law Requests for extensive copying or reproduction of this dissertation should be referred to ProQuest Information and Learning 300 North Zeeb Road Ann Arbor Michigan 48106 to whom I have granted ldquothe exclusive right to reproduce and distribute my dissertation in and from microform along with the non-exclusive right to reproduce and distribute my abstract in any format in whole or in partrdquo

Caisheng Wang July 2006

iv

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

I am grateful to acknowledge and thank all of those who assisted me in my graduate

program at Montana State University First I would like to thank Dr Hashem Nehrir my

academic advisor here at MSU His guidance support patience and personal time

throughout my years as a graduate student have been truly appreciated Special thanks are

given to my other graduate committee members Dr Steven Shaw Dr Don Pierre Dr

Hongwei Gao Dr Robert Gunderson and Dr Gary Bogar Special thanks also go to Dr

Hong Mao for his time and clarifying conversations on design and control of power

electronic devices Mr Sreedhar Gudarsquos help in the model developing for wind energy

conversion systems and Mr Marc Kepplerrsquos help in setting up the experimental circuit

for PEM fuel cell model validation are acknowledged Most importantly I would like to

thank my family and friends for their support throughout all the years

v

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF FIGURES xii

LIST OF TABLES xi

Abstract xii

1 INTRODUCTION 1

World Energy Demands 1

World and US Electricity Demands amp Generation 2 Conventional Thermal Electric Power Generation 6 Coal 6 Natural Gas 6 Oil 7

Nuclear Power 9 Hydroelectric Power 9

Why AlternativeRenewable Energy 10

Recent Progress in AlternativeRenewable Energy Technologies 14 Wind Energy 14 Photovoltaic Energy 16 Fuel Cells 18 Other Renewable Energy Sources 20 Distributed Generation Applications 23

Need for the Research 26

Scope of the Study 28

Organization of the Dissertation 28

REFERENCES 30

2 FUNDAMENTALS OF ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SYSTEMS 33

Energy Forms 33 Definition of Energy 33 Mechanical Energy 34 Chemical Energy 35 Electrical and Electromagnetic Energy 35 Thermal Energy 36 Nuclear Energy 37

Fundamentals of Thermodynamics 37 The First Law of Thermodynamics 37 The Heat Engine and Carnot Cycle 39 The Second Law of Thermodynamics 41

vi

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

Heat Transfer 42 Heat Transfer by Conduction 42 Heat Transfer by Convection 42 Heat Transfer by Radiation 43

Fundamentals of Electrochemical Processes 43 The Gibbs Free Energy 43 Energy Balance in Chemical Reactions 44 The Nernst Equation 47

Fundamentals of Alternative Energy Systems 48 Wind Energy System 49 Energy in Wind 49 Power Extracted from Wind 49 Tip Speed Ratio 51 Wind Energy Conversion System 52 Constant Speed and Variable Speed Wind Energy Conversion Systems 53 Wind Turbine Output Power vs Wind Speed 54

Photovoltaic Energy System 57 Fuel Cells 59 PEMFC 61 SOFC 63 MCFC 65

Electrolyzer 66

Summary 69

REFERENCES 70

3 MULTI-SOURCE ALTERNATIVE ENERGY DISTRIBUTED GENERATION SYSTEM 72

Introduction 72

AC Coupling vs DC Coupling 75

Stand-alone vs Grid-connected Systems 79

The Proposed System Configuration 79

System Unit Sizing 80

REFERENCES 85

4 COMPONENT MODELING FOR THE HYBRID ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SYSTEM 89

Dynamic Models and Model Validation for PEMFC 89 Introduction 89 Dynamic Model Development 91

vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

Gas Diffusion in the Electrodes 92 Material Conservation Equations 96 Fuel Cell Output Voltage 97 Double-Layer Charging Effect 101 Energy Balance of the Thermodynamics 102

Dynamic Model Built in MatlabSimulink 104 Equivalent Electrical Model in Pspice 105 Internal Potential E 106 Circuit for Activation Loss 107 Circuits for Ohmic and Concentration Voltage Drops 108 Equivalent Capacitor of Double-layer Charging Effect 109 Thermodynamic Block 109

Model Validation110 Experimental Setup 111 Steady-State Characteristics 113 Temperature Response115 Transient Performance116

Dynamic Models for SOFC118 Introduction118 Dynamic Model Development 119 Effective Partial Pressures 120 Material Conservation Equations 124 Fuel Cell Output Voltage 126 Energy Balance of the Thermodynamics 131 Dynamic SOFC Model Implementation 135

Model Responses under Constant Fuel Flow Operation 137 Steady-State Characteristics 137 Dynamic Response 140

Constant Fuel Utilization Operation 144 Steady-state Characteristics 145 Dynamic Responses 147

Wind Energy Conversion System 150 Introduction 150 System Configuration 151

Dynamic Model for Variable Speed Wind Turbine 152 Wind Turbine Characteristics 152 Pitch Angle Controller 155 Variable-speed Wind Turbine Model 157

Dynamic Model for SEIG 157 Steady-state Model 157 Self-excitation Process 160 Dynamic Model of SEIG in dq Representations 161

viii

Responses of the Model for the Variable Speed WECS 165 Wind Turbine Output Power Characteristic 165 Process of Self-excitation in SEIG 166 Model Responses under Wind Speed Changes 169

Solar Energy Conversion System 172 Modeling for PV CellModule 172 Light Current 173 Saturation Current 174 Calculation of α 174 Series Resistance 175 Thermal Model of PV 175

PV Model Development in MATLABSimulink 176 Model Performance 177 Temperature Effect on the Model Performance 179

Maximum Power Point Tracking Control 180 Current-Based Maximum Power Point Tracking 180 Control Scheme 182 Simulation Results 183

Electrolyzer 185 U-I Characteristic 185 Hydrogen Production Rate 186 Thermal Model 187 Electrolyzer Model Implementation in MATLABSimulink 189 Electrolyzer Model Performance 191

Power Electronic Interfacing Circuits 193 ACDC Rectifiers 193 Simplified Model for Controllable Rectifiers 197

DCDC Converters 200 Circuit Topologies 200 State-space Models Based on the State-space Averaging Technique 202 Averaged Models for DCDC Converters 205

DCAC Inverters 208 Circuit Topology 208 State-Space Model 208 dq Representation of the State-Space Model 212 Ideal Model for Three-phase VSI 214

Battery Model 217

Models for Accessories 218 Gas Compressor 218 High Pressure H2 Storage Tank 219 Gas Pressure Regulator 220

Summary 223

ix

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

REFERENCES 224

5 CONTROL OF GRID-CONNECTED FUEL CELL POWER GENERATION SYSTEMS 231

Introduction 231

System Description 232

Controller Designs for Power Electronic Devices 238 Controller Design for the Boost DCDC Converter 238 Controller Design for the 3-Phase VSI 241 Current Control Loop 241 Voltage Control Loop 245 Control of Power Flow 247 Overall Power Control System for the Inverter 249

Simulation Results 250 Desired P and Q Delivered to the Grid Heavy Loading 251 PEMFC DG 251 SOFC DG 254

Desired P Delivered to the Grid Q Consumed from the Grid Light Loading 256 PEMFC DG 256 SOFC DG 258

Load-Following Analysis 260 Fixed Grid Power 260 Fixed FC Power 261

Fault Analysis 263

Summary 266

REFERENCES 268

6 CONTROL OF STAND-ALONE FUEL CELL POWER GENERATION SYSTEMS 271

Introduction 271

System Description and Control Strategy 272 Load Mitigation Control 272 Battery ChargingDischarging Controller 276 Filter Design 277

Simulation Results 279 Load Transients 279 DC Load Transients 280 AC Load Transients 280

Load mitigation 282

x

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

PEMFC System 282 SOFC System 286

Battery ChargingDischarging 289

Summary 292

REFERENCES 293

7 CONTROL SCHEMES AND SIMULATION RESULTS FOR THE PROPOSED HYBRID WINDPVFC SYSTEM 295

Introduction 295

System Control Strategy 295 Overall Power Management Strategy 296 AC Bus Voltage Regulator 299 Electrolyzer Controller 300

Simulation Results under Different Scenarios 301 Winter Scenario 303 Weather Data 303 Simulation Results 305

Summer Scenario 314 Weather Data 314 Simulation Results 316

Summary 330

REFERENCES 331

8 OPTIMAL PLACEMENT OF DISTRIBUTED GENERATION SOURCES IN POWER SYSTEMS 332

Introduction 332

Optimal Placement of DG on a Radial Feeder 333 Theoretical Analysis 334 Procedure to Find the Optimal Location of DG on a Radial Feeder 336 Case Studies with Time Invariant Loads and DGs 338 Case Study with Time Varying Load and DG 340

Optimal Placement of DG in Networked Systems 341

Simulation Results 345 Radial Feeder with Time Invariant Loads and DG 346 Radial Feeder with Time Varying Loads and DG 348 Networked Systems 351

Summary 358

xi

TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED

REFERENCES 359

9 CONCLUSIONS 361

APPENDICES 364

APPENDIX A abc-dq0 TRANSFORMATION 365 abc-dq0 Transformation 366 dq0-abc Transformation 367

APPENDIX B SIMULATION DIAGRAMS OF THE HYBRID ENERGY SYSTEM 368

APPENDIX C MATLAB PROGRAMS FOR DG OPTIMAL PLACEMENT 373 DG Optimal Program for the IEEE 6-Bus system 374 DG Optimal Program for the IEEE 30-Bus system 375

xii

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure Page

11 World Energy Consumption 1970-2025 2

12 World and US Electricity Demands 1980-2025 4

13 World Electricity Generating Capacity 1980-2025 5

14 The world and US net electricity generation by type in 2002 5

15 Fuel shares of world electricity generation 2002-2025 8

16 US electricity generation by fuel types 8

17 World crude oil prices1978-2006 13

18 The world and the US wind power cumulative capacity 16

19 Cumulative Installed PV capacity in IEA PVPS countries 18

110 Cumulative installed FC units world-wide 1990-2005 19

21 Block diagram of an ideal heat engine 39

22 Carnot cycle (a) P-V (pressure-volume) diagram 40

(b) T-S (temperature-entropy) diagram 40

23 Theoretical rotor efficiency vs v0v ratio 51

24 Block diagram of a typical wind energy conversion system 52

25 Constant and variable speed wind energy conversion systems 55

26 Typical curves for a constant speed stall controlled (dotted)

and variable speed pitch controlled (solid) wind turbine 56

27 Schematic block diagram of a PV cell 58

28 PV Cell module and array 59

29 Schematic diagram of a PEMFC 61

210 V-I characteristic of a 500W PEMFC stack 62

211 Schematic diagram of a SOFC 63

212 V-I characteristic of a 5kW SOFC stack 64

213 Schematic diagram of a MCFC 65

214 Progress in generic performance of MCFCs on reformate gas and air 66

215 Schematic diagram of an alkaline electrolyzer 68

31 Hybrid energy system integration DC coupling 75

xiii

Figure Page

32 Hybrid energy system integration (a) PFAC coupling (b) HFAC coupling 76

33 System configuration of the proposed multi-source alternative

hybrid energy system (coupling inductors are not shown in the figure) 81

34 Hourly average demand of a typical residence

in the Pacific Northwest area 82

41 Schematic diagram of a PEMFC and voltage drops across it 93

42 Equivalent circuit of the double-layer charging effect inside a PEMFC 101

43 Diagram of building a dynamic model of PEMFC in SIMULINK 105

44 Diagram of building an electrical model of PEMFC in Pspice 106

45 Electrical circuit for internal potential E 107

46 Electrical circuit for activation loss 107

47 Electrical circuit for ohmic voltage drop 108

48 Electrical circuit for concentration voltage drop 109

49 Equivalent circuit of thermodynamic property inside PEMFC 110

410 Experimental configuration on the SR-12 PEMFC stack 112

411 V-I characteristics of SR-12 and models114

412 P-I characteristics of SR-12 and models 114

413 Temperature responses of the SR 12 stack and models 115

414 Transient responses of the models in short time range 117

415 Transient responses of the models in long time range 117

416 Schematic diagram of a solid oxide fuel cell 121

417 Equivalent electrical circuit of the double-layer charging effect inside a SOFC 130

418 Heat transfer inside a tubular solid oxide fuel cell 132

419 Diagram of building a dynamic model of SOFC in SIMULINK 137

420 V-I characteristics of the SOFC model at different temperatures 138

421 Three voltage drops at different temperatures 139

422 P-I characteristics of the SOFC model at different temperatures 140

423 Model dynamic responses with different equivalent

capacitance values for double-layer charging effect in small time scale 141

xiv

Figure Page

424 Model dynamic responses under different

operating pressures in medium time scale 142

425 Model dynamic responses under different

inlet temperatures in large time scale 143

426 Model temperature responses 144

427 Constant utilization control 145

428 V-I and P-I characteristics of the SOFC model

under constant fuel utilization and constant fuel flow operating modes 146

429 H2 input for the constant utilization and constant flow operating modes 147

430 Model dynamic responses under different operating pressures

in medium time scale with constant utilization operating mode 149

431 System block diagram of the WECS 152

432 Cp-λ characteristics at different pitch angles (θ) 154

433 Variable speed pitch controlled wind turbine operation regions 155

434 Pitch angle controller 156

435 Simulation model of the variable speed pitch-regulated wind turbine 156

436 Equivalent T circuit of self-excited induction generator with R-L Load 159

437 Determination of stable operation of SEIG 161

438 dq representation of a SEIG (All values are referred to stator) 162

439 Wind turbine output power characteristic 166

440 A successful self excitation process 167

441 Voltage fails to build up 167

442 Variation of magnetizing current Im 168

443 Variation of magnetizing inductance Lm 168

444 Wind speed variations used for simulation study 169

445 Output power of the WECS model under wind speed changes 169

446 Wind turbine rotor speed 170

447 Pitch angle controller response to the wind changes 171

448 Variation of power coefficient Cp 171

xv

Figure Page

449 One-diode equivalent circuit model for a PV cell

(a) Five parameters model (b) Simplified four parameters model 172

450 Block diagram of the PV model built in MATLABSimulink 176

451 I-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different irradiances 178

452 P-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different irradiances 178

453 I-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different temperatures 179

454 P-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different temperatures 179

455 Linear relationship between Isc and Imp under different solar irradiances 181

456 Ump vs Uoc curve under different solar irradiances 181

457 CMPPT control scheme 182

458 Imp and Ipv curves under the CMPPT control 183

459 PV output power and the maximum power curves 184

460 Block diagram of the electrolyzer model built in MATLABSimulink 189

461 U-I characteristics of the electrolyzer model under different temperatures 191

462 Temperature response of the model 192

463 Three-phase full diode bridge rectifier 194

464 Three-phase 12-diode bridge rectifier with a Y-Y and a Y-∆ transformer 195

465 A 6-pulse thyristor rectifier 197

466 Block diagram of the simplified model for 3-phase controllable rectifiers 198

467 DC output voltages of the different rectifier models 199

468 AC side phase current of the different rectifier models 199

469 Boost DCDC converter 201

470 Buck DCDC converter 201

471 Averaged model for boost DCDC converters 205

472 Simulation result of the averaged model for boost DCDC converter 206

473 Simulation result of the detailed model for boost DCDC converter 206

474 Averaged model for buck DCDC converters 207

475 Simulation result of the averaged model for buck DCDC converter 207

476 Simulation result of the detailed model for buck DCDC converter 208

xvi

Figure Page

477 3-phase DCAC voltage source inverter 209

478 Ideal model for three-phase VSI 215

479 AC phase output voltages of the ideal VSI model and the switched VSI model216

480 Output power of the ideal VSI model and the switched VSI model 216

481 Equivalent circuit model for battery reported in [481] 217

482 Simplified circuit model for lead-acid batteries 218

483 Pressured H2 storage tank 219

484 Gas pressure regulator 221

485 Performance of the model for gas pressure regulators 222

51 Block diagram of a fuel cell distributed generation system 233

52 Block diagram of the control loop for the boost DCDC converter 239

53 Bode plot of the control loop of the boost DCDC converter 240

54 Block diagram of the current control loop of the inverter 242

55 Bode plot of the current control loop 244

56 Unit step response of the current control loop and its approximation 245

57 Block diagram of the voltage control loop of the inverter 245

58 Bode plot of the voltage control loop 247

59 Power flow between a voltage source and utility grid 247

510 Block diagram of the overall power control system of the inverter 249

511 PEMFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under heavy loading 252

512 PEMFC DG dq values of the inverter output voltage under heavy load 252

513 PEMFC DG Output voltage and current of

each fuel cell array under heavy load 253

514 PEMFC DG DC bus voltage waveform under heavy load 254

515 SOFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under heavy loading 254

516 SOFC DG Output voltage and current of each FC array under heavy load 255

517 SOFC DG DC bus voltage under heavy loading 255

518 PEMFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid light loading 257

519 PEMFC DG Output voltage and current of

xvii

Figure Page

each fuel cell array under light loading 257

520 SOFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under light loading 259

521 SOFC DG Output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under light load 259

522 System for the PEMFC DG load-following study 261

523 Power curves of the load-following study with fixed grid power 262

524 System for the PEMFC DG load-following study 262

525 Power curves of the load-following study with fixed FC power 263

526 Faulted fuel cell DG system 264

527 Faulted PEMFC DG Power flow of the transmission line 265

528 Faulted PEMFC DG Fuel cell output powers for the fault studies 266

61 Schematic diagram of a FC-battery hybrid system

with load transient mitigation control 274

62 Schematic diagram of the battery chargingdischarging controller 275

63 Example of the responses of different filters to a load transient 278

64 Load transient of starting a 25HP and a 5kW 220V DC motor 280

65 AC load transient used on PEMFC-battery system 282

66 Reference signal (Iref) for the current controller battery current (ib)

and converter output current (idd_out) under the load transient for

PEMFC shown in Figure 64 284

67 The PEMFC output current and voltage responses to the

DC load transient shown in Figure 64 284

68 PEMFC The control reference signal (Iref) and battery current (ib)

under the AC load transient shown in Figure 65 285

69 The PEMFC output current and voltage responses

to the AC load transient shown in Figure 65 286

610 Reference signal (Iref) for the current controller the battery current (ib)

and the converter output current (idd_out) under the load transient

for SOFC shown in Figure 64 287

611 SOFC output current and voltage responses

xviii

Figure Page

to the DC load transient shown in Figure 64 287

612 Control reference signal (Iref) and battery current (ib)

under the AC load transient 288

613 The SOFC output current and voltage responses to the AC load transient 288

614 Battery voltage and extra current reference (Iref2) curves

when the battery is being charged 290

615 The load transient the overall current control reference signal (Iref)

the low-pass filter output signal (Iref1) and the corresponding

converter output current (idd_out) when the battery is being charged 291

71 Simulation model for the proposed

hybrid alternative energy system in MATLABSimulink 297

72 Block diagram of the overall control scheme for

the proposed hybrid alternative energy system 298

73 Block diagram of the AC voltage regulator 299

74 Block diagram of the electrolyzer controller 300

75 Load demand profile over 24 hours for the system simulation study 302

76 Wind speed data for the winter scenario simulation study 303

77 Solar irradiance data for the winter scenario simulation study 304

78 Air temperature data for the winter scenario simulation study 304

79 Wind power of the winter scenario study 305

710 Pitch angle of the wind turbine of the winter scenario study 306

711 Rotor speed of the induction generator of the winter scenario study 306

712 PV power for the winter scenario 308

713 Current difference between the actual output current and

the reference current for the maximum power point of the winter scenario 308

714 The PV temperature response over the simulation period for

the winter scenario 309

715 Power available for H2 generation of the winter scenario 309

716 H2 generation rate of the winter scenario study 310

xix

Figure Page

717 Electrolyzer voltage and current for the winter scenario study 310

718 Power shortage over the simulation period of the winter scenario study 311

719 Power supplied by the FC of the winter scenario study 312

720 H2 consumption rate of the winter scenario study 312

721 The pressure tank over the 24 hour of the winter scenario study 313

722 The battery power over the simulation period for the winter scenario 314

723 Corrected wind speed data for the summer scenario simulation study 315

724 Irradiance data for the summer scenario simulation study 315

725 Air temperature data for the summer scenario simulation study 316

726 Wind power generated for the summer scenario study 317

727 Rotor speed of the induction generator for the summer scenario study 317

728 PV power generated for the winter scenario study 318

729 The PV and air temperature over the simulation period for

the winter scenario study 319

730 Power available for H2 generation for the summer scenario study 320

731 H2 generation rate for the summer scenario study 320

732 Electrolyzer voltage and current for the summer scenario study 321

733 Power shortage over the simulation period for the summer scenario study 322

734 Power supplied by the FC over the simulation period for

the summer scenario study 322

735 H2 consumption rate for the summer scenario study 323

736 The H2 tank pressure over the 24 hour for the summer scenario study 323

737 The battery power over the simulation period for the summer scenario 324

738 Wind speed data for the simulation study with continuous

weather data and load demand 325

739 Solar irradiance data for the simulation study with

continuous weather data and load demand 325

740 Air temperature for the simulation study with

continuous weather data and load demand 326

xx

Figure Page

741 Wind power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario 327

742 PV power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario 327

743 Power available for H2 generation for the

continuous weather data and load demand scenario 328

744 FC output power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario 328

745 Battery power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario 329

81 A feeder with distributed loads along the line 334

82 Procedure for finding optimal place for a DG source in a radial feeder 338

83 A networked power system 342

84 Flow chart of The theoretical procedure to find the

optimal bus to place DG in a networked system 346

85 A radial feeder with uniformly distributed loads 347

86 Annual daily average output power profile of a 1-MW wind-DG 349

87 Daily average demand of a typical house 350

88 Power losses of the radial feeder with the wind-DG at different buses 350

89 6-bus networked power system studied 351

810 Power losses of the system in Figure 89 with a 5MW DG 352

811 Values of the objective function of the system in Figure 89 353

812 IEEE 30-bus test system 354

813 Power losses of the IEEE 30-bus test system with a 15MW DG 354

814 Values of the objective function of the IEEE 30-bus system 355

815 Power losses of the subset system in Figure 812 with a 5MW DG 356

816 Values of the objective function of the subset system in Figure 812 356

B1 Simulink model for the wind energy conversion system 369

B2 Simulink model for the solar energy conversion system 370

B3 Simulink model for the fuel cell and the gas pressure regulation system 371

B4 Simulink model for the electrolyzer and the gas compression system 372

xi

LIST OF TABLES

Table Page 11 Current Status and the DOE Targets for

PEMFC Stack in Stationary Applications 21

12 Current status and the SECA targets for 3-10 kW

SOFC module in stationary applications 22

13 Technologies for Distributed Generation Systems 25

21 Standard thermodynamic properties (enthalpy entropy and Gibbs energy) 46

31 Comparison among Different Integration Schemes 78

32 Component Parameters of the Proposed Hybrid Energy System 84

41 Analogies between Thermodynamic and Electrical Quantities 110

42 Specifications of SR-12 111

43 Electrical Model Parameter Values for SR-12 Stack 112

44 Operating Conditions for the Model Dynamic Response Studies 141

45 Parameter values for C1-C5 153

46 SEIG Model Parameters 165

47 The PV Model Parameters 177

48 The Electrolyzer Model Parameters 190

49 Constants of Beattie-Bridgeman Equation of State for H2 220

51 Configuration Parameters of the Proposed System 236

52 System Parameters of the Boost DCDC Converter 240

53 Parameters of the Current Control Loop the Inverter 243

54 Parameters of the Voltage Control Loop the Inverter 246

61 Parameters of the DCDC Converter 275

62 Parameters of the Battery Model 276

71 Weather Station information at

Deer Lodge Montana AgriMet Station (DRLM) 302

81 Theoretical Analysis Results of Case Studies

with Time Invariant Loads and DGs 339

82 Parameters of the System in Figure 85 347

xii

83 Simulation Results of Case Studies with Time Invariant Loads and DG 348

84 Parameters of the System in Figure 89 352

85 Bus Data of the IEEE 30-Bus Test System 357

xii

Abstract

Due to ever increasing energy consumption rising public awareness of environmental protection and steady progress in power deregulation alternative (ie renewable and fuel cell based) distributed generation (DG) systems have attracted increased interest Wind and photovoltaic (PV) power generation are two of the most promising renewable energy technologies Fuel cell (FC) systems also show great potential in DG applications of the future due to their fast technology development and many merits they have such as high efficiency zero or low emission (of pollutant gases) and flexible modular structure

The modeling and control of a hybrid windPVFC DG system is addressed in this

dissertation Different energy sources in the system are integrated through an AC bus Dynamic models for the main system components namely wind energy conversion system (WECS) PV energy conversion system (PVECS) fuel cell electrolyzer power electronic interfacing circuits battery hydrogen storage tank gas compressor and gas pressure regulator are developed Two types of fuel cells have been modeled in this dissertation proton exchange membrane fuel cell (PEMFC) and solid oxide fuel cell (SOFC) Power control of a grid-connected FC system as well as load mitigation control of a stand-alone FC system are investigated The pitch angle control for WECS the maximum power point tracking (MPPT) control for PVECS and the control for electrolyzer and power electronic devices are also addressed in the dissertation

Based on the dynamic component models a simulation model for the proposed hybrid

energy system has been developed using MATLABSimulink The overall power management strategy for coordinating the power flows among the different energy sources is presented in the dissertation Simulation studies have been carried out to verify the system performance under different scenarios using a practical load profile and real weather data The results show that the overall power management strategy is effective and the power flows among the different energy sources and the load demand is balanced successfully

The DGrsquos impacts on the existing power system are also investigated in this

dissertation Analytical methods for finding optimal sites to deploy DG sources in power systems are presented and verified with simulation studies

1

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

Energy is essential to everyonersquos life no matter when and where they are This is

especially true in this new century where people keep pursuing higher quality of life

Among different types of energy electric energy is one of the most important that people

need everyday In this chapter an overview is given on the world energy demand

electricity consumption and their development trend in the near future The electric power

generation technologies based on different energy sources are also reviewed in the

chapter Finally the need for this research work is addressed and the scope of the research

is also defined

World Energy Demands

The world energy consumption is expected to grow about 57 in the next two

decades [11] Figure 11 shows the strong growth of the global energy demand in the

past three decades and its projection over the next two decades The world energy

consumption by fuel type in 2002 is also shown in the figure It is clear that a large part

of the total energy is provided by fossil fuels (about 86 in 2002) The future of the

global economy growth is highly dependent on whether the ever-increasing energy

demand can be met

Fossil fuels are not evenly distributed around the world and regional or global

conflicts may arise from energy crisis if our economy is still heavily dependent on them

Moreover during the process of generating and using electrical energy with todayrsquos

2

conventional technologies the global environment has already been significantly affected

and the environment of some regions has been damaged severely Therefore it is a big

challenge for the whole world to figure out how to generate the needed amount of energy

and the types of energy sources

207243

285310

348366

412

504

553

598

645

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2002 2010 2015 2020 2025

Quadrillion Btu

History Projections Nuclear

7

Other

8

Coal

24

Oil

38

Natural

Gas

23

Figure 11 World Energy Consumption 1970-2025 [11]-[13]

World and US Electricity Demands amp Generation

The world electric energy consumption is expected to increase by more than 50 by

2025 [11]-[13] shown in Figure 12 About 24 of the world total electricity demand in

2003 is consumed by US (Figure 12) and it is anticipated to grow 44 in the first

quarter of the new century [11]-[13] Moreover the electricity demand from emerging

economic regions such as China and India is increasing even faster

3

To meet the future global electricity demand an extensive expansion of installed

generating capacity is necessary Worldwide installed electricity generating capacity is

expected to increase from 3626 GW (gigawatts) in 2003 to 5495 GW in 2025 (Figure

13) at a 22-percent average annual growth rate [11]-[14]

The percentage of US electricity generating capacity over the total world generating

capacity is declining It drops from around 25 in 2003 to about 20 in 2025 (Figure 13)

according to the estimation of Energy Information Administration (EIA) Nevertheless

the electricity generation capacity of US is still expected to grow about 38 from 2000

to 2025 [11] By comparing the electricity consumption data in Figure 12 and the

generation capacity data in Figure 13 it is noted that the US electricity consumption is

growing faster than the generation capacity If this trend is not reversed it is expected

that the US would have to import more electric power in the near future Otherwise the

reserve margin of the whole power system in the US will shrink which will

compromise system stability and power delivery reliability

Electricity can be generated in many ways from various energy sources Electric

power can be generated by conventional thermal power plants (using fossil fuels or

nuclear energy) hydropower stations and other alternative power generating units (such

as wind turbine generators photovoltaic arrays fuel cells biomass power plants

geothermal power stations etc) Fossil fuels (including coal oil and natural gas) and

nuclear energy are not renewable and their resources are limited On the other hand

renewable energy resources (wind and solar energy for example) can self-renew and

sustain for future use Figure 14 shows the world and US net electricity generation by

type in 2002 It is clear from this figure that more than 80 of the world and US

4

electricity generation are still contributed by the conventional fossil-fuel thermal power

plants and nuclear power plants [11] [14] Except for the hydroelectric power the

portion of the electricity generated from other renewablealternative sources is very small

In the following of this section an overview will be given on the current status and the

future development trend of different types of electricity generation

0

5000

10000

15000

20000

25000

30000

1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2002 2003 2010 2015 2020 2025

World

US

Billion kWh

History Projections

Figure 12 World and US Electricity Demands 1980-2025 [11]-[13]

5

0

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2003 2010 2015 2020 2025

World

US

GW

History Projections

Figure 13 World Electricity Generating Capacity 1980-2025 [11] [14]

Nuclear

17

Hydroelectric

17 Conventional

Thermal

64

Hydroelectric

7

Nuclear

20

Conventional

Thermal

71

Figure 14 The world and US net electricity generation by type in 2002 [11] [14]

6

Conventional Thermal Electric Power Generation

Conventional thermal power plants generate electric power using fossil fuels namely

coal oil and natural gas In a fossil-fired thermal power plant water passes through a

boiler heated by burning fossil fuels to produce high temperature and high pressure

steam The steam then enters a multi-stage steam turbine which operates a generator to

produce electricity

Coal Due to its low price and relative abundant reserves coal is and should

continue to be the dominant fuel for electricity generation of the world and the US

shown in Figures 15 and 16 The United States and China currently are the leaders in

terms of installed coal-fired capacity Both countries have large amount of coal reserves

Even under the pressure of Kyoto Protocol for reducing greenhouse gas and other air

pollutant emissions coal-fired electricity generation capacity is still expected to grow by

15 percent per year and coal is expected to fuel 38 (Figure 15) of the electricity

generation of the entire world by 2025 [13] However this trend could be changed if

higher pressure is applied to implement environment protection policies such as the

Kyoto Protocol and the Clean Air Act in the US

Natural Gas Natural-gas-fired power generation technology is an attractive option

for new power plants because of its fuel efficiency operating flexibility rapid

deployment and lower installation costs compared to other conventional generation

technologies Regulatory policies to reduce carbon dioxide emissions could accelerate the

switch from coal to gas However the amount of natural gas reserve is not as plentiful as

7

coal In the US the amount of dry natural gas reverses was 192513 billion cubic feet in

2004 [14] In the same year the total natural gas consumption in the US was 224303

billion cubic feet And about a quarter of this consumption was for electricity generation

If dry natural gas was the only means of reserving and the amount of reserves would not

change then that amount could only supply the US natural gas needs for less than 10

years at the consumption rate of 2004 [14]

Oil On the world average oil is not and will not be a major source for electric

power The main reason is that the major petroleum products are produced for

transportation purposes such as automobile gasoline jet fuel etc but not for electricity

generation The first problem with oil is that the whole world is short of its reserves while

the demand for oil keeps increasing The oil demand is expected to grow at about 25

per year [15] The amount of proven crude oil reserves in the world in 2005 is 1277

billion barrels1 The world oil consumption in 2002 was 782 million barrels per day [15]

If we could keep this consuming rate unchanged then the whole world oil reserves could

only sustain for less than 45 years Even if the more optimistic data 2947 billion barrels

(including reserve growth and the estimated undiscovered oil reserves) of the oil reserves

are used the world will still run out of oil in about one hundred years and forty years

under the same consumption rate Greenhouse gas and air pollutant emission is another

big problem with using oil Moreover there are many other problems associated with oil

such as high oil price and the instability of some oil production regions

1 1 barrel = 42 US gallons

8

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

2002 2010 2015 2020 2025

HydroelectricOther

Nuclear

Natural Gas

Oil

Coal

Percentage

Figure 15 Fuel shares of world electricity generation 2002-2025 [11] [12]

0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

4500

5000

1990 2000 2010

HydroelectricOther

Nuclear

Natural Gas

Oil

Coal

Billion kWh

Figure 16 US electricity generation by fuel types [14]

9

Nuclear Power

Nuclear energy is an important source for electricity generation in many countries In

2003 19 countries depended on nuclear power for at least 20 percent of their electricity

generation [16] France is the country which has the highest portion (781) of the

electricity generated by nuclear power [16] Though the percentage of nuclear electric

power over the total national electricity generation is not very high (about 20) the US

is still the worlds largest producer of electric power using nuclear fuels Higher fossil

fuel prices and the entry into force of the Kyoto Protocol could result in more electricity

generated by nuclear power In the emerging economic regions such as China and India

nuclear power capacity is expected to grow [11] However nuclear power trends can be

difficult or even be reversed due to a variety of reasons The safety of a nuclear power

plant is still the biggest concern And how to deposit nuclear wastes can always be a

discussion topic for environmentalists Moreover the nuclear fuel (Uranium) is not

renewable The US Uranium reserves are 1414 million pounds at the end of 2003 [16]

This amount of reserve can supply the US for about 270 years at the Uranium annual

consumption rate of 24072 metric tons (2002 statistical data)

Hydroelectric Power

Today hydropower is still the largest renewable source for electricity generation in

the world In 2002 more than 18 of the world electricity was supplied by renewable

sources most of which comes from hydropower shown in Figure 15 [11] [12] The

world hydroelectric capacity is expected to grow slightly due to large hydroelectric

projects in the regions with emerging economies The Three Gorges hydropower project

10

in China is now the biggest hydropower project ever carried out in the world Upon the

completion of the Three Gorges project in 2009 it will have a generating capacity of 182

GW (26 units total and 700MW for each unit) [17]

Although the hydropower is clean and renewable there are still some problems

associated with it First the big dams and reservoirs cause a lot of environmental

concerns and social disputes Second the relocation of reservoir populations can be a big

problem For example over a million people will be relocated for the Three Gorges

project [18] Moreover hydropower is not as abundant as desired In the US for

example the available hydropower sources (except in Alaska) have almost been explored

All these factors determine that hydropower can not play a major role in the future new

electricity supply in the world

Why AlternativeRenewable Energy

The term ldquoalternative energyrdquo is referred to the energy produced in an

environmentally friendly way (different from conventional means ie through fossil-fuel

power plants nuclear power plants and hydropower plants) Alternative energy

considered in this dissertation is either renewable or with high energy conversion

efficiency There is a broad range of energy sources that can be classified as alternative

energy such as solar wind hydrogen (fuel cell) biomass and geothermal energy

Nevertheless as mentioned in the previous section at the present the majority of the

world electricity is still generated by fossil fuels nuclear power and hydropower

However due to the following problemsconcerns for conventional energy technologies

the renewablealternative energy sources will play important roles in electricity

11

generation And sooner or later todayrsquos alternatives will become tomorrowrsquos main

sources for electricity

1) Conventional energy sources are not renewable As discussed in the above

section both the fossil fuels (coal and oil and natural gas) and nuclear fuels are not

renewable The reserves of these fuels will run out some day in the future A long term

energy development strategy is therefore important for sustainable and continuous

economy growth

2) Conventional generation technologies are not environmentally friendly

Although there have been substantial improvements in the technologies (such as

desulfurization) for reducing emissions conventional thermal power plants still produce a

large amount of pollutant gases such as sulfur oxide and nitrogen oxide [19] The

radioactive waste of nuclear power plants is always a big concern to the environment

The dams and reservoirs of hydropower can change the ecological systems of the original

rivers and the regions of the reservoirs substantially [110]

3) The cost of using fossil and nuclear fuels will go higher and higher Since these

fuel sources are not renewable while the world energy demand is steadily increasing it is

obvious that the price of these fuels will go higher Taking world crude oil price for

example the price has been increased by 57 in the last year [111] Compared to natural

gas and petroleum coal is cheap for electricity generation However if the cost for

reducing emissions is taken into account the actual price of generating electricity from

coal would be much higher The growing cost of using conventional technologies will

make alternative power generation more competitive and will justify the switchover from

conventional to alternative ways for electric power generation

12

4) Hydropower sources are not enough and the sites are normally far away from

load centers Hydropower is good because it is clean and renewable However as

mentioned in the previous section the total amount of hydropower that can be explored is

not enough And in many developed countries the hydropower has been almost explored

fully Moreover hydroelectric sites normally are in remote areas Long transmission lines

add more difficulties and cost in exploring hydropower since the permission of the

right-of-way for transmission lines is much more difficult to obtain than before

5) Political and social concerns on safety are pushing nuclear power away In

general government energy strategy guides the development of nuclear power There are

almost no cases that corporations or utilities make the decisions to build nuclear power

plants based on their economic considerations Accidents at the Three Mile Island nuclear

power plant in the United States in 1979 and Chernobyl in the Soviet Union in 1986 fed

people full of fears No body wants to be a neighbor of a nuclear power plant or facility

This changes the government energy policy substantially In the US there is no new

order for nuclear units in the near future [16] In Europe several countries including

Italy Austria Belgium Germany and Sweden stepped out from nuclear power even

before the Chernobyl disaster [11]

On the other hand compared with conventional electricity generation technologies

alternativerenewable power have the following advantages

1) Renewable energy resources are not only renewable but also abundant For

example according to the data of 2000 the US wind resources can produce more

electricity than the entire nation would use [112] The total solar energy from sun in a

day at the earth surface is about 1000 times more than the all fossil fuels consumption

13

[19]

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

1978

1989

1990

1991

1992

1993

1994

1995

1996

1997

1998

1999

2000

2001

2002

2003

2004

2005

2006

US $ per barrel

Figure 17 World crude oil prices1978-2006 [111]

(Note The price is based on the first week data of January in each year)

2) Fuel cell systems have high energy efficiency The efficiency of low temperature

proton exchange membrane (PEM) fuel cells is around 35-45 [113] High temperature

solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC) can have efficiency as high as 65 [114] The overall

efficiency of an SOFC based combined-cycle system can even reach 70 [114]

3) Renewable energy and fuel cell systems are environmentally friendly From these

systems there is zero or low emission (of pollutant gases) that cause acid rain urban

smog and other health problems and therefore there is no environmental cleanup or

waste disposal cost associated with them [19]

4) Different renewable energy sources can complement each other Though renewable

14

energy resources are not evenly distributed throughout the world every region has some

kinds of renewable energy resources At least sunlight reaches every corner in the world

And different energy resources (such as solar and wind energy) can complement each

other This is important to improve energy security for a nation like the US which is

currently dependent on the foreign energy sources

5) These renewablealternative power generation systems normally have modular

structure and can be installed close to load centers as distributed generation sources

(except large wind and PV farms) Therefore no high voltage transmission lines are

needed for them to supply electricity

In general due to the ever increasing energy consumption the rising public

awareness for environmental protection the exhausting density of fossil-fuel and the

intensive political and social concerns upon the nuclear power safety alternative (ie

renewable and fuel cell based) power generation systems have attracted increased

interest

Recent Progress in AlternativeRenewable Energy Technologies

In the following section the recent progress in wind power solar power fuel cells

and other renewable energy technologies will be reviewed An overview on their

applications as distributed generation will also be given

Wind Energy

Wind energy is one of worlds fastest-growing energy technologies Both the global

and US wind energy experienced a record year in 2005 According to the figures

15

released by the Global Wind Energy Council (GWEC) in 2005 there was a 434

increase in annual additions to the global market and a 5642 increase in the annual

addition to the US wind power generation capacity Last year was just one of the record

years In the past 11 years the global wind energy capacity has increased more than 17

times mdash from 35 GW in 1994 to almost 60 GW by the end of 2005 (Figure 18) In the

United States wind power capacity has increased more than 3 times in only 5 years (from

2554 MW in 2000 to 9149 MW by the end of 2005) also shown in Figure 18 The future

prospects of the global wind industry are also very promising even based on a

conservative projection that the total global wind power installed could reach 160 GW by

2012 A spread of new countries across the world will participate in the global wind

energy market in the next ten years [115]

The phenomenal worldwide growth of the wind industry during the past decade can

be attributed to supportive government policies and the fast development in innovative

cost-reducing technologies In the US the work conducted under the Wind Energy

Programrsquos Next Generation Wind Turbine (1994 ndash 2003) and WindPACT (1999 ndash 2004)

projects under the Department of Energy (DOE) resulted in innovative designs high

power ratings and increased efficiencies [116] All these technological advances have

led to dramatic reductions in cost of electricity (COE) mdash from $08kWh in the

early1980s to about $004kWh today for utility-scale (normally gt= 750kW) turbines

[116] [19] Although this drop in COE has been impressive more research work is still

needed to make wind power more competitive Development in aerodynamic efficiency

structural strength of wind turbine blades larger turbine blades and higher towers

variable speed generators and power controllers will help to reduce the COE further The

16

DOE goal is to reduce the COE produced by land-based utility-scale turbines located in

Class 4 wind resource areas (areas with 58 ms wind speed at a10-m height) to

$003kWh by 2012 [116]

0

10000

20000

30000

40000

50000

60000

1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005

World

US

MW

Figure 18 The world and the US wind power cumulative capacity [115] [116]

Photovoltaic Energy

Solar energy basically is the ultimate source for all kinds of energy resources on the

earth with only a few exceptions such as geothermal energy There are normally two

ways to generate electricity from sunlight through photovoltaic (PV) and solar thermal

systems In this section and this dissertation only photovoltaic energy and system will be

discussed

Just like the growth of wind energy PV energy is another fast growing renewable

energy technology Though the absolute size of global solar power generation capacity is

17

much smaller than wind power it has been increased even faster than wind power during

the past dozen years (from 1992-2004) [117] In terms of the market for PV power

applications in the IEA-PVPS2 (International Energy Agency ndash Photovoltaic Power

Systems Programme) countries the total installed PV capacity has been increased more

than 23 times ndash from the 110 MW in 1992 to 2596 MW in 2004 (Figure 19) [117]

Due to improvements in semiconductor materials device designs and product quality

and the expansion of production capacity capital costs for PV panels have been

decreased significantly from more than $50W in the early of 1980s [19] to about 35$ to

45$ per watt in 2004 [117] The cost of electricity produced by PV systems continues to

drop It has declined from $090kWh in 1980 to about 020$kWh today [19] In the

US the DOE goal is to reduce the COE of PV to $006kWh by 2020 [119] However

PV energy is still usually more expensive than energy from the local utility Currently the

initial investment of a PV system is also higher than that of an engine generator

Nevertheless there are many applications for which a PV system is the most

cost-effective long-term option especially in remote areas such as power for remote

telecommunications remote lighting and signs remote homes and recreational vehicles

2 There are 19 countries participating in the IEA PVPS program They are Australia Austria Canada Denmark France Germany Israel Italy Japan Korea Mexico the Netherlands Norway Portugal Spain Sweden Switzerland UK and USA Over 90 of the world total PV capacity is installed in the IEA-PVPS countries The top three PV countries Japan Germany and the US are all the members of the organization

18

0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

1992 1994 1996 1998 2000 2002 2004

MW

Figure 19 Cumulative Installed PV capacity in IEA PVPS countries [117]

Fuel Cells

Fuel cells (FCs) are static energy conversion devices that convert the chemical energy

of fuel directly into DC electrical energy Fuel cells have a wide variety of potential

applications including micro-power auxiliary power transportation power stationary

power for buildings and other distributed generation applications and central power

Since entering the new century fuel cell technologies have experienced exponential

growth shown in Figure 110 [120] The total number of fuel cell applications reached

14500 in 2005 [120] Government policies public opinion and technology advance in

fuel cells all contributed to this phenomenal growth

19

Figure 110 Cumulative installed FC units world-wide 1990-2005 [120]

Among different types of fuel cells polymer electrolyte membrane fuel cells

(PEMFC) and solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC) both show great potentials in transportation

and DG applications3 [113] [120] Compared with conventional power plants these

fuel cell DG systems have many advantages such as high efficiency zero or low emission

(of pollutant gases) and flexible modular structure Fuel cell DGs can be strategically

placed at any site in a power system (normally at the distribution level) for grid

reinforcement deferring or eliminating the need for system upgrades and improving

system integrity reliability and efficiency Moreover as a byproduct high-temperature

fuel cells also generate heat that makes them suitable for residential commercial or

industrial applications where electricity and heat are needed simultaneously [113]

[121]

3 Vehicle application is still the main market for PEMFC though it also has high potential for stationary power generation For SOFCs stationary power generation is their main application But they do have a foothold in the transport market as well with new planar design

20

The DOE recently updated its ldquoHydrogen Fuel Cells and Infrastructure Technologies

Programrsquos Multi-Year Research Development and Demonstration Planrdquo written in 2003

[122] In the Plan it lays out industry targets for key fuel cell performance indices such

as cost durability and power density In 1999 the Solid State Energy Conversion

Alliance (SECA) was founded for bringing together government industry and the

scientific community to promote the development of SOFC Through these years

collaborative work among the government industry national labs and universities great

advances in fuel cell technologies have been achieved in many aspects These address

FCs a bright future although extensive work is still needed to be done before they can

really play main roles in energy market Table 11 gives the current status and the DOE

goals for PEMFC [122] [123] Table 12 summaries the current development stage of

SOFC and SECA targets [124]-[126] It is noted from the two tables that the possibility

of reaching the ultimate DOE and SECA goals is high

Other Renewable Energy Sources

In addition to PV and wind energy there are many other renewable energy resources

such as biomass geothermal energy solar thermal energy and tidal power These energy

resources can all be utilized to generate electricity Among them biomass and geothermal

energy technologies have the leading generation capacity in the US [19]

21

TABLE 11 CURRENT STATUS AND THE DOE TARGETS A FOR

PEMFC STACK B IN STATIONARY APPLICATIONS

Characteristics Units Current Status

2010 Goal

Stack power density WL 1330 2000

Stack specific power Wkg 1260 2000

Stack efficiency 25 of rated power 65 65

Stack efficiency rated power 55 55

Precious metal loading gkW 13 03

Cost $kWe 75 30

Durability with cycling hours 2200 C 5000

Transient response (time for 10 to 90 of rated power)

sec 1 1

Cold startup time to 90 of rated power ndash20 ordmC ambient temperature

sec 100 C 30

Survivability ordmC -40 -40

A Based on the technical targets reported in [122] for 80-kWe (net) transportation

fuel cell stacks operating on direct Hydrogen

B Excludes hydrogen storage and fuel cell ancillaries thermal water air

management systems

C Based on the performance data reported by Ballard in 2005 [123]

Biomass can be burned directly co-fired with coal or gasified first and then used to

generate electricity It can also be used to generate bio-fuels such as ethanol Most of

todayrsquos US biomass power plants use direct-combustion method In 2004 the total

22

generation capacity of biomass reached 9709 MW about 1 of the total US electric

capacity [127]

TABLE 12 CURRENT STATUS AND THE SECA TARGETS FOR

3-10 KW SOFC MODULE IN STATIONARY APPLICATIONS

Phase I A Current Status II

III (By 2010)

Cost 800$kW 724$kW B $400kW

Efficiency 35-55 41 b 40-60 40-60

Steady State

Test Hours 1500 1500 1500 1500

Availability 80 90 B 85 95

Power Degradation per 500 hours

le2 13 C le1 le01

Transient Test

Cycles 10 na 50 100

Power Degradation after Cycle Test

le1 na le05 le01

Power Density 03Wcm2 0575Wcm2 D 06Wcm2 06Wcm2

Operating Temperature

800 ordmC 700-750 ordmC C 700 ordmC 700 ordmC

Evaluate the potential to achieve $400kW [124]

A The goals of Phase I have been achieved GE is the first of six SECA industry

teams to complete phase I of the program [125]

B Based on the data reported by GE

C Based on the data reported by FuelCell Energy [126]

D Based on the data reported by Delphi [125]

23

Geothermal energy can be converted into electricity by three technologies dry steam

flush and binary cycle The most common type of geothermal plants is flush power plant

while the world largest geothermal plant is of the dry steam type [128] The dry stream

geothermal power plant at The Geysers in California is the largest geothermal power

plant in the world with a capacity of 2000 MW [19] However due to the limited

amount of available geothermal heat resources one will not expect to see any

considerable growth in this area Actually the geothermal generation capacity in the US

declined from 2793MW in 2000 to 2133 MW in 2004 [127] Nevertheless it can be an

important energy source in remote areas where geothermal resources are available and

abundant

Distributed Generation Applications

The ever-increasing need for electrical power generation steady progress in the

power deregulation and utility restructuring and tight constraints over the construction of

new transmission lines for long distance power transmission have created increased

interest in distributed power generation DG sources are normally placed close to

consumption centers and are added mostly at the distribution level They are relatively

small in size (relative to the power capacity of the system in which they are placed and

normally less than 10 MW) and modular in structure These DG devices can be

strategically placed in power systems for grid reinforcement reducing power losses and

on-peak operating costs improving voltage profiles and load factors deferring or

eliminating the need for system upgrades and improving system integrity reliability and

efficiency [133]

24

The technology advances in renewable energy sources fuel cells and small generation

techniques provide a diverse portfolio for DG applications Table 13 shows the candidate

technologies for DG systems The DOE proposed a strategic plan for distributed energy

sources in 2000 [129] The energy market with DG sources in 2020 was envisioned in

the plan as ldquoThe United States will have the cleanest and most efficient and reliable

energy system in the world by maximizing the use of affordable distributed energy

resourcesrdquo [129] To achieve this ultimate goal the DOE also set sub-goals for DG

development The long-term goal by 2020 is ldquoto make the nationrsquos energy generation and

delivery system the cleanest and most efficient reliable and affordable in the world by

maximizing the use of cost efficient distributed energy resourcesrdquo The mid-term by 2010

is to reduce costs to increase the efficiency and reliability of distributed generation

technologies and to add 20 of new electric capacity By the end of 1999 about 22GW

distributed energy systems with 18 GW backup units were installed across the US [131]

According to EIA US generation capacity history and forecast data 198 GW of new

capacity is needed during the period between 2000 and 2010 [14] Based on the

mid-term goal 20 (396 GW) of the new addition should come from DG systems This

means about 44 annual growth rate in DG capacity

25

TABLE 13 TECHNOLOGIES FOR DISTRIBUTED GENERATION SYSTEMS [130]

Technology Size Fuel Electrical Efficiency

( LHV)

Combustion Turbine Combined Cycle

50-500 MW Natural gas liquid

fuels 50-60

Industrial Combustion Turbine

1-50 MW Natural gas liquid

fuels 25-40

Internal Combustion Turbine(Reciprocating

Engine)

1kW ndash 10 MW

Natural gas diesel oil propane gasoline etc

25-38

Mircroturbine 27-400 kW Landfill gas

propane natural gas and other fuels

22-30

Stirling Engine 11-50kW Any 18-25

Fuel Cells 1kW Natural gas H2

other H2-rich fuels 35-60

Photovoltaic 1W ndash 10MW Renewable 5-15 A

Wind Turbine 02kW ndash 5MW

Renewable lt 40

Biomass B Several kW ndash 20 MW

Renewable ~ 20

A PV cell energy conversion efficiency

B Based on the data reported in [19]

26

Need for the Research

The ever increasing energy consumption rapid progress in wind PV and fuel cell

power generation technologies and the rising public awareness for environmental

protection have turned alternative energy and distributed generation as promising

research areas Due to natural intermittent properties of wind and solar irradiation

stand-alone windPV renewable energy systems normally require energy storage devices

or some other generation sources to form a hybrid system Because some of renewable

energy sources can complement each other (section 13) multi-source alternative energy

systems (with proper control) have great potential to provide higher quality and more

reliable power to customers than a system based on a single resource However the

issues on optimal system configuration proper power electronic interfaces and power

management among different energy sources are not resolved yet Therefore more

research work is needed on new alternative energy systems and their corresponding

control strategies

Fuel cells are good energy sources to provide reliable power at steady state but they

cannot respond to electrical load transients as fast as desired This problem is mainly due

to their slow internal electrochemical and thermodynamic responses [132] The transient

properties of fuel cells need to be studied and analyzed under different situations such as

electrical faults on the fuel cell terminals motor starting and electric vehicle starting and

acceleration Therefore dynamic fuel cell models are needed to study those transient

phenomena and to develop controllers to solve or mitigate the problem

27

Fuel cells normally work along with power electronic devices One problem is that

there is not adequate information exchange between fuel cell manufacturers and power

electronic interface designers Without adequate knowledge about the area of each other

the fuel cell manufacturers normally model the power electronic interface as an

equivalent impedance while the power electronic circuit designers take the fuel cell as a

constant voltage source with some series resistance These inaccurate approaches may

cause undesired results when fuel cells and their power electronic interfaces are

connected together It is important and necessary to get a better understanding of the

impact of power electronic interface on fuel cellrsquos performance and of the fuel cellrsquos

impact on power electronic interfacing circuits Dynamic model development for fuel

cells using electrical circuits can be a solution so that the researchers in both areas can

understand each other Moreover it will provide a more efficient way to integrate the fuel

cells and power electronic devices together

Distributed generation devices can pose both positive and negative impacts on the

existing power systems [133] These new issues have led DG operation to be an

important research area Research on optimal placement (including size) of DGs can help

obtain maximum potential benefits from DGs

28

Scope of the Study

Although there are many types of alternativerenewable resources the alternative

sources in this dissertation are confined to wind PV and fuel cells for the research on the

proposed hybrid alternative energy systems The main focus is given to modeling

validation and control for fuel cells and fuel cell based stand-alone and grid-connected

systems Two types of fuel cells will be modeled and used in the dissertation PEMFC

and SOFC The ultimate goal of this dissertation is to model a multi-source alternative

DG system consisting of wind turbine(s) PV arrays fuel cells and electrolyzers and to

manage the power flows among the different energy resources in the system The optimal

placement of DG sources in power systems is also investigated on system operation level

Organization of the Dissertation

After the introduction conducted and the reason for the research explained in this

chapter Chapter 2 reviews the fundamentals of electrochemistry thermodynamics power

electronics and the alternative energy technologies including wind PV and fuel cells

Chapter 3 introduces hybrid energy systems gives possible ways of system integration

and presents a proposed hybrid windPVFC energy system Chapter 4 describes the

models for the components in the proposed system discussed in Chapter 3 Power

electronic interfacing circuits with appropriate controllers are discussed in Chapter 4 as

well

29

Chapters 5 and 6 focus on control for fuel cell based systems Control for

grid-connected fuel cell systems is discussed in Chapter 5 In Chapter 6 load mitigation

control for stand-alone fuel cell systems is investigated

The overall control scheme development for the proposed multi-source alternative

system is given in Chapter 7 Simulation results under different scenarios are given and

discussed in the chapter The optimal placement of DG sources in power systems (both

radial feeders and networked systems) is investigated in Chapter 8

30

REFERENCES

[11] International Energy Outlook 2005 Energy Information Administration (EIA) httpwwweiadoegoviea

[12] International Energy Annual 2003 EIA httpwwweiadoegoviea

[13] System for the Analysis of Global Energy Markets 2005 EIA httpwwweiadoegoviea

[14] Annual Energy Outlook 2006 (Early Release) EIA httpwwweiadoegov

[15] World Oil Market International Energy outlook - International Petroleum (Oil) Reserves and Resources EIA httpwwweiadoegoviea

[16] US Nuclear Generation of Electricity EIA httpwwweiadoegoviea

[17] Online http www3ggovcn

[18] Million Relocates of Unprecedented Scale httpwww3ggovcnshuniuymgc200305170065htm

[19] SR Bull ldquoRenewable Energy Today and Tomorrowrdquo Proceedings of IEEE Vol 89 No 8 pp1216-1221 August 2001

[110] FA Farret and MG Simotildees Integration of Alternative Sources of Energy John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2006

[111] World Crude Oil Prices EIA httptontoeiadoegovdnavpetpet_pri_wco_k_whtm

[112] M R Patel Wind and Solar Power Systems CRC Press LLC 1999

[113] Fuel Cell Handbook (Sixth Edition) EGampG Services Inc Science Applications International Corporation DOE Office of Fossil Energy National Energy Technology Lab Nov 2002

[114] O Yamamoto ldquoSolid oxide fuel cells fundamental aspects and prospectsrdquo Electrochimica Acta Vol 45 No (15-16) pp 2423-2435 2000

[115] Global Power Source Global Wind Energy Council httpwwwgwecnet

[116] Wind Power Today ndash Federal Wind Program Highlights NREL DOEGO-102005-2115 April 2005

31

[117] Trends in photovoltaic applications Survey report of selected IEA countries between 1992 and 2004 International Energy Agency Photovoltaics Power Systems Programme (IEA PVPS) September 2005

[118] Online httpwwwnrelgovanalysisnewsletters2006_januaryhtml

[119] National Status Report 2004 ndashUSA IEA-PVPS httpwwwoja-servicesnliea-pvpsnsr04usa2htm

[120] Fuel Cell Today 2005 Worldwide Survey httpwwwfuelcelltodaycom

[121] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained 2nd Edition John Wiley amp Sons Ltd 2003

[122] The Hydrogen Fuel Cells amp Infrastructure Technologies Program Multi-Year Research Development and Demonstration Plan February 2005 Version

[123] Technology Road Map ndashBallard Power Systems Inc httpwwwballardcombe_informedfuel_cell_technologyroadmap

[124] SECA Program Plan DOE Office of Fossil Energy The DOE National Energy Technology Laboratory (NETL) and the Pacific Northwest National Laboratory Jan 2002

[125] Significant Milestone Achieved in SECA Fuel Cell Development Program httpwwwnetldoegovpublicationsTechNewstn_ge_secahtml Jan 2006

[126] Thermally Integrated High Power Density SOFC Generator FuelCell Energy Inc FY 2004 Progress Report

[127] Renewables and Alternate Fuels Energy Information Administration (EIA) httpwwweiadoegovfuelrenewablehtml

[128] Online httpwwweereenergygovgeothermalpowerplantshtmlflashsteam

[129] Strategic Plan for Distributed Energy Resources mdash Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy US Department of Energy September 2000

[130] DER Technologies Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) October 2002

[131] Establishing a Goal for Distributed Energy Resources Distributed Energy Resources The Power to Choose on November 28 2001 by Paul Lemar httpwwwdistributed-generationcomLibrarypaul_lemarpdf

[132] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion vol 20 no 2 pp442-451 June 2005

32

[133] C Wang and MH Nehrir ldquoAnalytical Approaches for Optimal Placement of Distributed Generation Sources in Power Systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Systems vol 19 no 4 pp 2068-2076 Nov 2004

33

CHAPTER 2

FUNDAMENTALS OF ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SYSTEMS

This chapter reviews the fundamental concepts and principles of energy systems and

energy conversion The overview of the fundamentals of electrochemistry

thermodynamics and alternative energy systems is a good introduction for understanding

and modeling of the proposed multi-source alternative energy system discussed in the

following chapters

Energy Forms

Definition of Energy

Energy is defined as the amount of work a physical system is capable of doing

Energy is a fundamental quantity that every physical system possesses In a broad sense

energy can neither be created nor consumed or destroyed However it may be converted

or transferred from one form to other Generally speaking there are two fundamental

types of energy transitional energy and stored energy [21] Transitional energy is energy

in motion also called kinetic energy such as mechanical kinetic energy Stored energy is

energy that exists as mass position in a force field (such as gravity and electromagnetic

fields) etc which is also called potential energy More specifically energy can exist in

the following five basic forms

(1) Mechanical energy

(2) Chemical energy

(3) Electrical and electromagnetic energy

34

(4) Thermal energy

(5) Nuclear energy

Mechanical Energy

Mechanical energy is the type of energy associated with moving objects or objects

that have potential to move themselves or others It can be defined as work used to raise a

weight [21] The mechanical kinetic energy of a translating object (Emt) with a mass m at

speed v is

2

2

1mvEmt = (21)

For a rotating body with moment of inertia (rotational inertia) I at angular speed ω its

kinetic mechanical energy (Emr) is defined as

2

2

1ωIEmr = (22)

Mechanical potential energy is the energy that a given system possesses as a result of

its status in a mechanical force field [21] For example in a gravity field g the potential

mechanical energy of a body with mass m at height h is given as

mghEmpg = (23)

As another example the potential energy of an elastic spring with the spring constant

k at the displacement x is

2

2

1kxEmps = (24)

35

Chemical Energy

Chemical energy is the energy held in the chemical bonds between atoms and

molecules [22] Every bond has a certain amount of energy Chemical energy exists as a

stored energy form which can be converted to other energy forms through reactions First

energy is required to break the bonds - called endothermic Then energy will be released

(called exothermic) when these broken bonds combine together to create more stable

molecules If the total energy released is more than the energy taken in then the whole

reaction is called exothermic Otherwise the reaction is called endothermic The burning

of fossil fuels (combustion) is one of the most important exothermic reactions for

producing energy Photosynthesis is a good example for endothermic reaction since

plants use energy from sun to make the reaction happen

Electrical and Electromagnetic Energy

Electrical and electromagnetic energy is the energy associated with electrical

magnetic andor electromagnetic fields It is normally expressed in terms of electrical

andor electromagnetic parameters For example the electro-static energy stored in a

capacitor is

C

qEC

2

2

1= (25)

where C is the capacitance of the capacitor and q is the total charge stored

The magnetic energy stored in an inductor with inductance L at current i is

2

2

1LiEm = (26)

36

Another expression used to represent magnetic energy is [23]

int=V

m dVHE 2

2

1micro (27)

where micro is the material permeability H is the magnetic field intensity and V is the object

volume under consideration This expression is especially useful in calculating hysteresis

losses inside power transformers

Radiation energy is one of the forms of electromagnetic energy The radiation energy

only exists in transitional form and it is given by [21]

fhER sdot= (28)

where h is the Planckrsquos constant (6626times10-34 Js) and f is the frequency of the radiation

Thermal Energy

From a macroscopic observation thermal energy or heat can be defined as energy

transferred between two systems due to temperature difference [24] From a micro-level

point of view thermal energy is associated with atomic and molecular vibration [21] All

other forms of energy can be converted into thermal energy while the opposite conversion

is limited by the second law of thermodynamics (which will be explained briefly in

section 22) Based on this fact thermal energy can be considered the most basic form of

energy [21]

37

Nuclear Energy

Nuclear energy is a topic irrelevant to this dissertation But for the completion of the

discussion on energy forms a very brief overview on nuclear energy is also included here

Similar to chemical energy nuclear energy is also a type of stored energy The energy

will be released as a result of nuclear reaction (normally fission reaction) to produce a

more stable configuration Take the uranium-235 nucleus as an example When it

captures a neutron it will split into two lighter atoms and throws off two or three new

neutrons The new atoms then emit gamma radiation as they settle into their new more

stable states An incredible amount of energy is released in the form of heat and gamma

radiation during the above process The mass of fission products and the neutrons

together is less than the original U-235 atom mass The mass defect is governed by the

famous Einsteinrsquos mass-energy equation [21]

E = mc2 (29)

where m is the material mass and c is the speed of light in vacuum (asymp2998times108 ms)

Fundamentals of Thermodynamics

Thermodynamic analysis of energy conversion processes is important for modeling

and control of hybrid energy systems Therefore in this section a brief overview of the

fundamental concepts and principles of thermodynamics is given

The First Law of Thermodynamics

According to the first law of thermodynamics the energy of a system is conserved

Energy here is in the form of either of heat or work This law describes that energy can

38

neither be created or destroyed but it can be converted from one type to another The

change in the system energy dE is contributed by the heat entering (dQ) the system and

the work done by the system (dW) to the outside [25] [26]

dWdQdE minus= (210)

Note that the work in the above equation is the work leaving the system The system

here is an idealized object which is used to limit our study scope A system can be

isolated from ldquoeverything elserdquo in the sense that changes in everything else need not

affect its state [25] The external ldquoeverything elserdquo is considered to be the environment

of the system Of particular interest is one type of system called a simple system that is

not affected by capillarity distortion of solid phase external force fields (electromagnetic

and gravitational) or internal adiabatic walls [25] For a simple system the total system

energy is equal to the total system internal energy denoted by symbol U [25] In this

dissertation we only consider simple systems

E = U (211)

For a control volume or open system (any prescribed and identifiable volume in

space) usually there is expansion when heat is absorbed by the system at constant

pressure Part of the heat goes into internal energy and causes temperature to rise And the

rest of the heat is used to expand against the pressure P A property of the system called

enthalpy (H) is used to represent the system state under certain condition

H = U +PV (212)

where V is the system volume Enthalpy is a state parameter which is independent of

which way the system reaches that condition Equation (211) now can be represented as

39

dWdQdH minus= (213)

The Heat Engine and Carnot Cycle

The heat engine is designed to convert heat to work Figure 21 shows the block

diagram of an idealized heat engine If we want the heat engine to work continuously

then the system (the working substance in the figure) is subjected to a cyclic process A

cyclic process is one in which the system returns to its original state after a cycle For a

practical heat engine there are many processes undergoing And it is also complicated

and difficult to analyze all of them In 1842 a French scientist named Sadi Carnot

presented a way to analyze cyclic thermal processes and discovered the maximum

possible heat efficiency of a heat engine

Figure 21 Block diagram of an ideal heat engine

The Carnot cycle is shown in Figure 22 The cycle consists of two isothermal

processes and two adiabatic processes Figure 22 (a) shows the P-V diagram of the

40

Carnot cycle [26] The heat Q1 enters the system at T1 and Q2 leaves system at T2 Since

this process is cyclic the system energy remains the same after any cycle According to

the First Law of Thermodynamics (Equation 210) it can be shown that

S∆

(a) (b)

Figure 22 Carnot cycle (a) P-V (pressure-volume) diagram (b) T-S (temperature-entropy) diagram

21 QQW minus= (214)

W is the work done by the system to the outside which can also be represented by the

area abcd in Figure 22 (a) For the Carnot cycle it has been proved that

2

2

1

1

T

Q

T

Q= (215)

The efficiency of the system then is

1

2

1

21

1

1T

T

Q

QQ

Q

Wc minus=

minus==η (216)

It is clear from (216) that in order to get a higher efficiency the temperature

difference should be larger

Another contribution from Carnot is that QT can be a state property of the system by

41

showing the equivalence of Q1T1 and Q2T2 [see (215)] Based on Carnotrsquos idea

Clausius developed the concept of entropy and presented the Second Law of

Thermodynamics

The Second Law of Thermodynamics

The concept is introduced to indicate to what extent of disorder a system is at If the

system is undergoing an infinitesimal reversible process with dQ heat entering the system

at temperature T then the infinitesimal change in its entropy is defined as [25]-[28]

revT

dQdS = (217)

A reversible process is a process that can be reversed without leaving any traces to its

environment If a cyclic process only consists of reversible processes then there is no

entropy change (∆S = 0) after a cycle On the other hand if the cycle contains an

irreversible process then a change of entropy will be generated Entropy is an important

system property It is also very useful in describing a thermodynamic process Figure 22

(b) shows the T-S diagram of a Carnot Cycle The area abcd also represents the work

done to the system environment

The Second Law of Thermodynamics is described by the Clausius inequality [25]

[28] For any cyclic process we have

int le 0T

dQ (218)

The equality sign only applies to a reversible cyclic process The above inequality can

be expressed in an infinitesimal form as

42

T

dQdS ge (219)

The equality sign applies to a reversible cyclic process and the inequality sign applies

to an irreversible process That is to say for any irreversible process it occurs in a

direction to which the change of entropy is greater than dQT This means that heat

cannot be transferred from a low temperature to a higher temperature without a need of

work from outside The Second Law also reveals that no real heat engine efficiency can

reach 100 due to the increase of entropy For an isolated system the change of entropy

will always be greater than or equal to zero

Heat Transfer

In this section the equations governing different ways of heat transfer are reviewed

Heat Transfer by Conduction For isotropic solids (whose properties and

constitution in the neighborhood of any two points are the same at any direction) heat

transfer by conduction is governed by Fourier heat-conduction equation [24]

d

TTkAQcond

12 minus= (220)

where Qcond is the heat transferred A is the face area of the element normal to the heat

flow k is the effective thermal conductivity d is the distance between the two points of

interest and (T2-T1) is the temperature difference

Heat Transfer by Convection Heat transfer by convection is the heat exchange

between a flowing fluid (natural or forced) and a solid surface The convective heat

transfer is given as [24]

43

)( sfconv TThAQ minus= (221)

where h is the effective convection heat transfer coefficient A is the solid area contacting

the fluid Tf is the bulk temperature of the fluid and Ts is the temperature of the solid This

equation is also called Newtonrsquos law of cooling

Heat Transfer by Radiation Based on (28) the radiation heat exchange rate

between two objects at different temperatures is [24]

)( 4

2

4

1 TTAQrad minus= εσamp (222)

where Qrad is the radiation heat (J) ε is the effective emissivity of the system σ is

Stefan-Boltzmann Constant (56703times10-8 Wmiddotm-2middotK-4)

Fundamentals of Electrochemical Processes

The Gibbs Free Energy

The Gibbs Free Energy also called the Gibbs Energy or ldquofree enthalpyrdquo is defined as

[25] [28]

G = H-TS = U + PV -TS (223)

Chemical reactions proceed towards the direction that minimizes the Gibbs Energy

Differentiating the above equation we can obtain

)()( SdTTdSVdPPdVdUSdTTdSdHdG +minus++=+minus= (224)

dG is negative as a chemical reaction approaches its equilibrium point and it will be

zero at the equilibrium point According to the First Law of Thermodynamics (210) for

a simple system the above equation can be rewritten as

)()( SdTTdSVdPPdVdWdQSdTTdSdHdG +minus++minus=+minus= (225)

44

If the system is restricted to performing only expansion-type of work (dW = PdV) and

the process is reversible (dQ = TdS) then four terms on the right side of (225) will be

cancelled out resulting in

SdTVdPdG minus= (226)

At a given temperature T Gibbs energy under any pressure can be calculated based

on the above equation for that given temperature

)ln()()(0

0

P

PnRTTGTG += (227)

where )(0 TG is the standard (P0 = 1 atm) Gibbs energy at temperature T

For an electrochemical reaction the maximum work (electricity) is determined by the

change in the Gibbs Energy as the reactants change to products It can be shown that the

maximum work is equal to the change in the Gibbs energy [28]

GWe ∆minus= (228)

Energy Balance in Chemical Reactions

In a chemical reaction the change in enthalpy due to the reaction is [28]

sumsum minus=minus=∆Rj

RjRj

Pi

PiPiRP HNHNHHH (229)

where HP is the total enthalpy of the products and HR is the total enthalpy of the reactants

NPi is the amount of moles of the ith species in the products and NRj is the amount of

moles of the jth species in the reactants Accordingly HPi (HRj) is the molar enthalpy of

the corresponding species which can be represented as

PifPi HHHH )( 00 minus+= (230)

45

where 0

fH is the standard molar enthalpy of formation (Jmol) and (H-H0) is the sensible

enthalpy due to the temperature difference

The change of entropy due to the reaction is [28]

sumsum minus=minus=∆Rj

RjRj

Pi

PiPiRP SNSNSSS (231)

where SP is the total entropy of the products and SR is the total entropy of the reactants

SPi (SRj) is the molar entropy of the corresponding species

The change of the Gibbs free energy due to the reaction then can be obtained from

(223) as

STHGGG RP ∆minus∆=∆minus∆=∆ (232)

Two example reactions [(233) and (234)] are given to show how to calculate the

change of Gibbs energy in a reaction The enthalpy and entropy values for water

hydrogen and oxygen are given in Table 21 The reactions are assumed to happen under

standard conditions (1 atm and 25 ˚C)

)(2

1222 gOHOH =+ (233)

)(2

1222 lOHOH =+ (234)

where subscript ldquogrdquo represents that the reaction product is in gas form and subscript

ldquolrdquo is used to indicate that the reaction product is in liquid form

46

TABLE 21 STANDARD THERMODYNAMIC PROPERTIES

(ENTHALPY ENTROPY AND GIBBS ENERGY) [29]

Name Hf (kJmol) S (JmolK)

H2O(g) -2418 1887

H2O(l) -2858 699

H2 0 1306

O2 0 205

For the reaction given in (233) we have

8241)008241( minus=minusminusminus=minus=∆ RP HHH (kJmol)

444)2055061307188( minus=timesminusminus=minus=∆ RP SSS (JmolK)

Therefore the change in the Gibbs energy of the reaction given in (233) is

=timesminustimesminusminus=∆minus∆=∆ minus )10444(2988241 3STHG -22857 kJmol

For the reaction given in (234) we have

8285)008285( minus=minusminusminus=minus=∆ RP HHH (kJmol)

2163)205506130969( minus=timesminusminus=minus=∆ RP SSS (JmolK)

Therefore the change in the Gibbs energy of the reaction given in (234) is

=timesminustimesminusminus=∆minus∆=∆ minus )102163(2988285 3STHG -23716 kJmol

From the above examples we can see that more work can be done if the product

(H2O) is in liquid form

47

The Nernst Equation

Consider an electrochemical reaction under constant temperature and pressure that the

reactants X and Y form products M and N given by (235)

dNcMbYaX +hArr+ (235)

where a b c and d are stoichiometric coefficients

According to (232) the change of the Gibbs energy of the reaction is [28]

YXNMRP bGaGdGcGGGG minusminus+=minus=∆

In terms of the change of the standard Gibbs energy G∆ can also be expressed as

[see (227)]

+∆=∆

b

Y

a

X

d

N

c

M

PP

PPRTGG ln0 (236)

where 00000

YXNM bGaGdGcGG minusminus+=∆

In an electrochemical reaction the work can be considered as the electrical energy

delivered by the reaction The electrochemical work is

FEnW ee = (237)

where ne is number of participating electrons F is Faraday constant (96487 Cmol) and E

is the voltage difference across the electrodes

According to (228) the change in Gibbs energy is the negative value of the work

done by the reaction

FEnWG ee minus=minus=∆ (238)

Under standard condition the above equation turns out to be

48

000 FEnWG ee minus=minus=∆ (239)

where E0 is the standard reference potential

From (238) we can calculate the electrode voltage E as

minus

∆minus=

∆minus=

b

Y

a

X

d

N

C

M

eee PP

PP

Fn

RT

Fn

G

Fn

GE ln

0

(240)

Writing the above in terms of standard reference potential E0 we get the well-known

electrochemical formula Nernst equation [28] [210]

+=

minus=

d

N

C

M

b

Y

a

X

e

b

Y

a

X

d

N

C

M

e PP

PP

Fn

RTE

PP

PP

Fn

RTEE lnln 00

(241)

For a fuel cell with an overall reaction as given by (233) then the voltage across the

fuel cell electrodes (or the internal potential of the fuel cell) is

+=

OH

OH

P

PP

F

RTEE

2

50

220 ln2

(242)

If the product (H2O) is in liquid form given by (234) then the fuel cell internal

potential is

( )5022

0 ln2

OH PPF

RTEE += (243)

Fundamentals of Alternative Energy Systems

In this section the fundamentals of wind energy generation system PV cells fuel

cells and electrolyzers are reviewed

49

Wind Energy System

Energy in Wind Wind energy systems harness the kinetic energy of wind and

convert it into electrical energy or use it to do other work such as pump water grind

grains etc The kinetic energy of air of mass m moving at speed v can be expressed as

[211]

2

2

1mvEk = (244)

During a time period t the mass (m) of air passing through a given area A at speed v

is

Avtm ρ= (245)

where ρ is the density of air (kgm3)

Based on the above two equations the wind power is

3

2

1AvP ρ= (246)

The specific power or power density of a wind site is given as

3

2

1v

A

PPden ρ== (247)

It is noted that the specific power of a wind site is proportional to the cube of the

wind speed

Power Extracted from Wind The actual power extracted by the rotor blades from

wind is the difference between the upstream and the down stream wind powers

)(2

1 2

0

2 vvkP m minus= (248)

50

where v is the upstream wind velocity at the entrance of the rotor blades v0 is the

downstream wind velocity at the exit of the rotor blades km is the mass flow rate which

can be expressed as

2

0vvAkm

+= ρ (249)

where A is the area swept by the rotor blades

From (248) and (249) the mechanical power extracted by the rotor is given by

)(22

1 2

0

20 vvvv

AP minus

+= ρ (250)

Let

minusminus

+=

2

00 1112

1

v

v

v

vC p and rearrange the terms in (250) we have

pCAvP 3

2

1ρ= (251)

Cp is called the power coefficient of the rotor or the rotor efficiency It is the fraction

of the upstream wind power which is captured by the rotor blades and has a theoretical

maximum value of 059 shown in Figure 23 In practical designs maximum achievable

Cp is between 04 and 05 for high-speed two-blade turbines and between 02 and 04 for

low-speed turbines with more blades [211]

It is noted from (251) that the output power of a turbine is determined by the

effective area of the rotor blades (A) wind speed (v) and wind flow conditions at the

rotor (Cp) Thus the output power of the turbine can be varied by changing the effective

area andor by changing the flow conditions at the rotor system Control of these

quantities forms the basis of control of wind energy systems

51

0 02 04 06 08 10

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

v0 v

Cp

Figure 23 Theoretical rotor efficiency vs v0v ratio

Tip Speed Ratio The tip speed ratio λ (TSR) defined as the ratio of the linear speed

at the tip of the blade to the free stream wind speed is given as follows [211]

v

Rωλ = (252)

where R is the rotor blade radius and ω is the rotor angular speed

TSR is related to the wind turbine operating point for extracting maximum power

The maximum rotor efficiency Cp is achieved at a particular TSR which is specific to the

aerodynamic design of a given wind turbine For variable TSR turbines the rotor speed

will change as wind speed changes to keep TSR at some optimum level Variable TSR

turbines can produce more power than fixed TSR turbines [212]

52

Wind Energy Conversion System The block diagram of a typical wind energy

conversion system is shown in Figure 24

Figure 24 Block diagram of a typical wind energy conversion system

The principle components of a modern wind turbine are the tower the yaw the rotor

and the nacelle which accommodates the gear box and the generator The tower holds the

53

main part of the wind turbine and keeps the rotating blades at a height to capture

sufficient wind power The yaw mechanism is used to turn the wind turbine rotor blades

against the wind Wind turbine captures the windrsquos kinetic energy in the rotor consisting

of two or more blades The gearbox transforms the slower rotational speeds of the wind

turbine to higher rotational speeds on the electrical generator side Electrical generator

will generate electricity when its shaft is driven by the wind turbine whose output is

maintained as per specifications by employing suitable control and supervising

techniques In addition to monitoring the output these control systems also include

protection equipment to protect the overall system [211]

Two distinctly different design configurations are available for a wind turbine the

horizontal axis configuration and the vertical axis configuration The vertical axis

machine has the shape like an egg beater (also called the Darrieus rotor after its inventor)

However most modern turbines use horizontal axis design [211]

Constant Speed and Variable Speed Wind Energy Conversion Systems (WECS)

Generally there are two types of wind energy conversion systems constant speed and

variable speed systems shown in Figure 25 [212] In Figure 25 (a) the generator

normally is a squirrel cage induction generator which is connected to a utility grid or load

directly Since the generator is directly coupled the wind turbine rotates at a constant

speed governed by the frequency of the utility grid (50 or 60 Hz) and the number of poles

of the generator The other two wind power generation systems shown in Figure 25 (b)

and (c) are variable speed systems In Figure 25 (b) the generator is a doubly-fed

induction generator (wound rotor) The rotor of the generator is fed by a back-to-back

54

converter voltage source converter The stator of the generator is directly connected to

load or grid Through proper control on the converter for the rotor the mechanical speed

of the rotor can be variable while the frequency of output AC from the stator can be kept

constant Figure 25 (c) shows a variable speed system which is completely decoupled

from load or grid through a power electronic interfacing circuit The generator can either

be a synchronous generator (with excitation winding or permanent magnet) or an

induction generator In this dissertation a variable speed WECS similar to the one shown

in Figure 25 (c) is used for the hybrid energy system study The generator used in the

study is a self-excited induction generator

Wind Turbine Output Power vs Wind Speed A typical power vs wind speed curve

is shown in Figure 26 [212] [215] When the wind speed is less than the cut-in speed

(normally 3-5 ms) [212] there is no power output Between the cut-in speed and the

rated or nominal wind speed (normally 11-16 ms) [212] the wind turbine output power

is directly related to the cubic of wind speed as given in (251) When the wind speed is

over the nominal value the output power needs to be limited to a certain value so that the

generator and the corresponding power electronic devices (if any) will not be damaged

In other words when the wind speed is greater than the rated value the power coefficient

Cp needs to be reduced [see (251)] When the wind speed is higher than the cut-out speed

(normally 17-30 ms) [212] the system will be taken out of operation for protection of

its components

55

Figure 25 Constant and variable speed wind energy conversion systems [212]

56

Figure 26 Typical curves for a constant speed stall controlled (dotted) and variable speed pitch controlled (solid) wind turbine [212] [215]

There are several ways to control the wind turbine output power The two common

ways to achieve this goal are stall control and pitch control [211]-[215]

For a stall controlled wind turbine there is no active control applied to it The output

power is regulated through a specifically designed rotor blades The design ensures that

when the wind speed is too high it creates turbulences on the side of the rotor blades The

turbulences will decrease the aerodynamic efficiency of the wind turbine as a result

Pitch control is an active method which is used to reduce the aerodynamic efficiency

by changing pitch angle (turning the rotor blades out of wind) of the rotor blades It

should be noted that the pitch angle can change at a finite rate which may be quite low

due to the size of the rotor blades The maximum rate of change of the pitch angle is in

the order of 3 to 10 degreessecond [215]

It is noted from Figure 26 that a variable speed system normally has lower cut-in

speed The rated speed is also normally lower than a constant speed system For wind

57

speeds between the cut-in and the nominal speed there will be 20-30 increase in the

energy capture with variable speed compared to the fixed-speed operation[211]-[215]

shown in Figure 26 For a pitch controlled wind system the power for wind speeds over

the nominal value can be held constant precisely On the other hand for a stall controlled

constant speed system the output power will reach its peak value somewhat higher than

its rated value and then decreases as wind speed grows

Photovoltaic Energy System

Terminology

Solar radiation Also called insolation consists of the radiation that comes directly

from the sun (beam radiation) as well as the radiation that comes indirectly (diffusion and

albedo radiation) [216]

Solar constant The solar radiation that falls on a unit area above the atmosphere at a

vertical angle is called solar constant It has a value of 1367 Wmsup2 [216]

Air mass A convenient lumped parameter used for the amount of sunlight absorbed in

the atmosphere The amount of beam solar radiation absorbed in the atmosphere in a

direct vertical path to sea level is designated as one air mass (AM1) In general air mass

is proportional to the secant of the zenith angle [216]

Irradiance A measure of power density of sunlight it has a unit of Wm2

Irradiation A measure of energy density (Jm2) it is the integral of irradiance over

time

Photovoltaic effect is a basic physical process through which solar energy is

converted into electrical energy directly The physics of a PV cell or solar cell is similar

58

to the classical p-n junction diode shown in Figure 27 [211] At night a PV cell can

basically be considered as a diode When the cell is illuminated the energy of photons is

transferred to the semiconductor material resulting in the creation of electron-hole pairs

The electric field created by the p-n junction causes the photon-generated electron-hole

pairs to separate The electrons are accelerated to n-region (N-type material) and the

holes are dragged into p-region (P-type material) shown in Figure 27 The electrons

from n-region flow through the external circuit and provide the electrical power to the

load at the same time

Figure 27 Schematic block diagram of a PV cell

The PV cell shown in Figure 27 is the basic component of a PV energy system Since

a typical PV cell produces less than 2 W at approximately 05 V DC it is necessary to

connect PV cells in series-parallel configurations to produce desired power and voltage

ratings Figure 28 shows how single PV cells are grouped to form modules and how

modules are connected to build arrays There is no fixed definition on the size of a

module and neither for an array A module may have a power output from a few watts to

59

hundreds of watts And the power rating of an array can vary from hundreds of watts to

megawatts [211] [216]

Figure 28 PV Cell module and array

Fuel Cells

Fuel cells (FCs) are static energy conversion devices that convert the chemical energy

of fuel directly into DC electrical energy [217]-[218] The basic physical structure of a

fuel cell consists of two porous electrodes (anode and cathode) and an electrolyte layer in

the middle Figure 29 shows a schematic diagram of a polymer electrolyte membrane

fuel cell (PEMFC) The electrolyte layer is a good conductor for ions (positive or

negative charged) but not for electrons The electrolyte can either be solid such as

PEMFC and solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC) or liquid such as molten carbonate fuel cells

(MCFC) The type and chemical properties of the electrolyte used in fuel cells are very

60

important to their operating characteristics such as their operating temperatures

The polarity of an ion and its transport direction can differ for different fuel cells

determining the site of water production and removal If the working ion is positive like

in a PEMFC shown in Figure 29 then water is produced at the cathode On the other

hand if the working ion is negative like SOFC and MCFC shown in Figures 211 and

213 water is formed at the anode In both cases electrons have to pass through an

external circuit and produce electric current

In a typical fuel cell fuel is fed continuously to the anode and oxidant is fed

continuously to the cathode The electrochemical reactions take place at the electrodes to

convert chemical energy into electricity Note that anode is the electrode from which

electrons leave (negative) and cathode is the electrode to which the electrons are coming

(positive) The most common used fuel for fuel cells is hydrogen and the oxidant is

usually oxygen or air Nevertheless theoretically any substance capable of chemical

oxidation that can be supplied continuously (as a fluid) can be used as fuel at the anode of

a fuel cell Similarly the oxidant can be any fluid that can be reduced at a sufficient rate

[219]

Among different types of fuel cells SOFC PEMFC and MCFC are most likely to be

used for distributed generation (DG) applications [217]-[218] [220]-[224] Compared

with conventional power plants these FCDG systems have many advantages such as high

efficiency zero or low emission (of pollutant gases) and flexible modular structure In the

following an overview is given on the operating principles of the above three types of

fuel cells Though MCFC is out of the scope of this dissertation it is also included here

as a potential candidate for fuel cell DG applications

61

PEMFC PEMFC has a sandwich like structure as shown in Figure 29 [217]

[218] [220] Between two porous electrodes is a Teflon-like membrane which is an

excellent conductor of protons and an insulator of electrons [217] [218] The hydrogen

molecules are broken into electrons and hydrogen protons at the anode with the help of

platinum catalyst The hydrogen protons pass through the membrane (electrolyte) reach

the cathode surface and combine with the electrons which travel from anode to cathode

through the external load to produce water The reactions at the anode and cathode side

and the overall reaction are given in Figure 29

Gas

Flow

Channel Anode

Electron

Flow

Cathode

Membrane

Catalyst

Layers

H2

H2O

O24H+

Load

4e- 4e-

Gas

Flow

Channel

2H2+ O

2 = 2H

2O

Current

Flow

Figure 29 Schematic diagram of a PEMFC

One of the advantages of the PEMFC is its high power density and high efficiency

(40-45) This makes the technology competitive in transportation and stationary

applications Another benefit is its lower operating temperature (between 60degC and 80degC)

62

and because of this the PEMFC has a quick start which is beneficial in automotive

applications where quick start is necessary

5 10 15 20 2522

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

Load Current (A)

PEMFC Output Voltage (V)

ActivationRegion

Ohmic Region

Concentration Region

Figure 210 V-I characteristic of a 500W PEMFC stack [220]

Figure 210 shows the output voltage vs load current (V-I) characteristic curve of a

500W PEMFC stack [220] This characteristic curve which is typical of other fuel cells

can be divided into three regions The voltage drop across the fuel cell associated with

low currents is due to the activation loss inside the fuel cell the voltage drop in the

middle of the curve (which is approximately linear) is due to the ohmic loss in the fuel

cell stack and as a result of the concentration loss the output voltage at the end of the

curve will drop sharply as the load current increases [217] [218]

63

SOFC SOFC is a high temperature fuel cell technology with a promising future

Based on a negative-ion conductive electrolyte SOFCs operate between 600 C and 1000

C and convert chemical energy into electricity at high efficiency which can reach up to

65 [221] The overall efficiency of an integrated SOFC-combustion turbine system can

even reach 70 [221] Despite slow start-up and more thermal stresses due to the high

operating temperature SOFC allows for internal reforming of gaseous fuel inside the fuel

cell which gives multi-fuel capability to SOFCs [217] [218] Moreover their solid

nature simplifies system designs where the corrosion and management problems related

to liquid electrolyte are eliminated [217] These merits give SOFC a bright future to be

used in stationary applications Figure 211 shows a block diagram of a SOFC The

reactions at the anode and cathode are also given in the figure

Figure 211 Schematic diagram of a SOFC

64

The steady-state terminal V-I curves of a 5kW SOFC model (which will be discussed

in detail in Chapter 4) at different temperatures which are typical of SOFCs are shown

in Figure 212 [223] The activation voltage drop dominates the voltage drop in the

low-current region As load current increases the ohmic voltage drop increases fast and

becomes the main contribution to the SOFC voltage drop When load current exceeds a

certain value fuel cell output voltage will drop sharply due to the concentration voltage

drop inside SOFC Figure 212 also shows the effect of temperature on SOFC V-I

characteristic curve SOFC output voltage is higher at lower temperature in the low

current zone while the voltage is higher at higher temperature in the high current region

0 50 100 1500

20

40

60

80

100

120

Load current (A)

SOFC output voltage (V)

1073K

1173K

1273K

Figure 212 V-I characteristic of a 5kW SOFC stack [223]

65

MCFC MCFCs use a molten mixture of alkali metal carbonate as their electrolyte

[217] [218] At high temperatures (600oC ndash 700 oC) the salt mixture is in liquid phase

and is an excellent conductor of minus23CO ions At the cathode the oxygen and carbon oxide

combine with the electrons flowing through the external circuit to produce carbonate ions

( minus23CO ) At the anode minus2

3CO ions are deoxidized by hydrogen and electrons are released

at the same time These electrons will have to go through the external circuit and then

reach the cathode surface Figure 213 shows the schematic diagram of a MCFC The

reactions at the anode and cathode side are given in the figure -

2 3

-

22

2CO

4e

2CO

O

=+

+

-

2

-2 3

24e

2CO

2CO

2H+

=+

Figure 213 Schematic diagram of a MCFC

Figure 214 shows the V-I performance progress for MCFCs from 1967 to 2002

[217] During the 1980s the performance of MCFC stacks made dramatic

improvements It is noted from this figure that MCFCs normally operate in the range of

100-200 mAcm2 at 750-850 mV for a single cell [217] MCFs have achieved

66

efficiencies in the range of 50-60 before heat recovery and with heat recovery their

efficiency could exceed 70 [224]

Figure 214 Progress in generic performance of MCFCs on reformate gas and air

Electrolyzer

An electrolyzer is a device that produces hydrogen and oxygen from water Water

electrolysis can be considered a reverse process of a hydrogen fueled fuel cell Opposite

to the electrochemical reaction occurring in fuel cell an electrolyzer converts the DC

electrical energy into chemical energy stored in hydrogen

Water electrolysis is a long-established process which started in the early part of

nineteen century [225] Nicholson and Carlisle English chemists first discovered the

phenomenon of electrolytic decomposition in acid water in 1800 However alkaline

medium is preferred in todayrsquos industrial electrolysis plants Currently there are three

principal types of electrolyzer available in the market alkaline PEM and solid oxide

67

The alkaline and PEM electrolyzers are well established devices with thousands of units

in operation while the solid-oxide electrolyzer is as yet unproven [226] Alkaline water

electrolysis is the dominating technology today In this section the principle of alkaline

water electrolysis is reviewed

An alkaline electrolyzer uses potassium hydroxide (KOH) as electrolyte solution for

transferring hydroxyl ions Figure 215 shows the schematic diagram of an alkaline

electrolyzer At the cathode two water molecules are reduced electrochemically (by the

two electrons from the cathode) to one molecule of H2 and two hydroxyl ions (OH-) The

reaction at the cathode can be expressed as

minusminus +uarrrarr+ OHHeOH 222 22 (253)

Under the external electric field the hydroxyl ions are forced to move towards the

anode through the porous diaphragm At the anode the two molecule hydroxyl ions

losing two electrons to the anode are discharged into 12 molecule of O2 and one

molecule of water The chemical reaction at the cathode is

minusminus ++uarrrarr eOHOOH 22

12 22 (254)

By combining the above two equations the overall chemical reaction inside an

electrolyzer is

uarr+uarrrarr 2222

1OHOH (255)

68

Figure 215 Schematic diagram of an alkaline electrolyzer

The current density of alkaline electrolyzers is normally less than 04 Acm2 The

energy conversion efficiencies can range from 60-90 Without auxiliary purification

equipment purities of 998 for H2 can be achieved Alkaline electrolysis technology

can be implemented at a variety of scales from less than 1 kW to large industrial

electrolyzer plant over 100 MW as long as there is a proper DC electricity supply [227]

69

Summary

In this chapter the fundamental concepts and principles of energy systems and energy

conversion are reviewed The chapter begins with the introduction of the basic energy

forms and then reviews the fundamentals of thermodynamics and electrochemistry The

First and Second Law of Thermodynamics the maximum conversion efficiency of a

conventional heat engine heat transfer the concepts of enthalpy entropy and the Gibbs

energy and the well-known Nernst equation are briefly explained The fundamentals of

wind energy conversion systems photovoltaic systems fuel cells and electrolyzers are

also reviewed The principles reviewed in this chapter are the fundamentals needed for

modeling the proposed multi-source alternative energy system discussed in the following

chapters

70

REFERENCES

[21] Archie W Culp Jr Principles of Energy Conversion McGraw-Hill Book Company 1979

[22] Steven S Zumdahl Chemical Principles 2nd Edition DC Heath and Company Toronto 1995

[23] FT Ulaby Fundamentals of Applied Electromagnetics Prentice-Hall Inc 1999

[24] ERG Eckert and R M Drake Jr Analysis of Heat and Mass Transfer McGraw-Hill Book Company 1972

[25] George N Hatsopoulos and Joseph H Keenan Principles of General

Thermodynamics John Wiley amp Sons Inc 1965

[26] E L Harder Fundamentals of Energy Production John Wiley amp Sons 1982

[27] FA Farret and MG Simotildees Integration of Alternative Sources of Energy John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2006

[28] G Hoogers Fuel Cell Technology Handbook CRC Press LLC 2003

[29] JANAF Thermochemical Tables 2nd Edition NSRDS-NBS 37 1971

[210] G Kortum Treatise on Electrochemistry (2nd Edition) Elsevier Publishing Company 1965

[211] M R Patel Wind and Solar Power Systems CRC Press LLC 1999

[212] JG Slootweg ldquoWind power modeling and impact on power system dynamicsrdquo PhD dissertation Dept Elect Eng Delft University of Technology Delft Netherlands 2003

[213] JF Manwell JG McGowan and AL Rogers Wind energy Explained ndash Theory

Design and Application John Wileyamp Sons 2002

[214] Tony Burton David sharpe Nick Jenkins and Ervin Bossanyi Wind Energy

Handbook John Wileyamp Sons 2001

[215] SR Guda ldquoModeling and power management of a hybrid wind-microturbine power generation systemrdquo MS thesis Montana State University 2005

71

[216] R Messenger and J Ventre Photovoltaic Systems Engineering CRC Press LLC 2000

[217] Fuel Cell Handbook (Sixth Edition) EGampG Services Inc Science Applications International Corporation DOE Office of Fossil Energy National Energy Technology Lab Nov 2002

[218] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained 2nd Edition John Wiley amp Sons Ltd 2003

[219] AJ Appleby FR Foulkes Fuel Cell Handbook Van Nostrand Reinhold New York NY 1989

[220] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 20 No 2 pp442-451 June 2005

[221] O Yamamoto ldquoSolid oxide fuel cells fundamental aspects and prospectsrdquo Electrochimica Acta Vol 45 No (15-16) pp 2423-2435 2000

[222] J Padulleacutes GW Ault and J R McDonald ldquoAn integrated SOFC plant dynamic model for power system simulationrdquo J Power Sources pp495ndash500 2000

[223] C Wang and MH Nehrir ldquoA Dynamic SOFC Model for Distributed Power Generation Applicationsrdquo Proceedings 2005 Fuel Cell Seminar Palm Springs CA Nov 14-18 2005

[224] MD Lukas KY Lee H Ghezel-Ayagh ldquoAn Explicit Dynamic Model for Direct Reforming Carbonate Fuel Cell Stackrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 16 No 3 pp 289-295 Sept 2000

[225] W Kreuter and H Hofmann ldquoElectrolysis The Important Energy Transformer in a World of Sustainable Energyrdquo Int J Hydrogen Energy Vol 23 No8 pp 661-666 1998

[226] M Newborough ldquoA Report on Electrolysers Future Markets and the Prospects for ITM Power Ltdrsquos Electrolyser Technologyrdquo Online http wwwh2fccomNewsletter

[227] AFG Smith and M Newborough ldquoLow-Cost Polymer Electrolysers and Electrolyser Implementation Scenarios for Carbon Abatementrdquo Report to the Carbon Trust and ITM-Power PLC Nov 2004

72

CHAPTER 3

MULTI-SOURCE ALTERNATIVE ENERGY

DISTRIBUTED GENERATION SYSTEM

Introduction

The ever increasing energy consumption the soaring cost and the exhaustible nature

of fossil fuel and the worsening global environment have created booming interest in

green (renewable energy source or fuel cell based) power generation systems Compared

to the conventional centralized power plants these systems are sustainable smaller in

size and (some) can be installed closer to load centers The power is delivered to

customers by many distributed generation (DG) systems other than the conventional way

that power is transmitted from centralized power plants to load centers over transmission

lines and then through distribution systems Due to steady progress in power deregulation

and utility restructuring and tight constraints imposed on the construction of new

transmission lines for long distance power transmission DG applications are expected to

increase in the future

Wind and solar power generation are two of the most promising renewable power

generation technologies The growth of wind and photovoltaic (PV) power generation

systems has exceeded the most optimistic estimation Fuel cells also show great potential

to be green power sources of the future because of many merits they have (such as high

efficiency zero or low emission of pollutant gases and flexible modular structure) and

73

the rapid progress in fuel cell technologies However none of these technologies is

perfect now Wind and solar power are highly dependent on climate while fuel cells need

hydrogen-rich fuel and the cost for fuel cells is still very high at current stage

Nevertheless because different renewable energy sources can complement each other

multi-source hybrid alternative energy systems (with proper control) have great potential

to provide higher quality and more reliable power to customers than a system based on a

single resource And because of this hybrid energy systems have caught worldwide

research attention [31]-[334]

There are many combinations of different alternative energy sources and storage

devices to build a hybrid system The following lists some of the stand-alone or

grid-connected hybrid systems that have been reported in the literature

1) WindPVFCelectrolyzerbattery system [31]-[33]

2) Micro-turbineFC system [34]-[35]

3) Microturbinewind system [36]

4) Gas-turbineFC system [37]-[39]

5) DieselFC system [310]-[311]

6) PVbattery [312]

7) PVFCelectrolyzer [313]-[315]

8) PVFCelectrolyzerbattery system [316]-[318]

9) FCbattery or super-capacitor system [319]-[320]

10) WindFC system [321]

11) Winddiesel system [322]

12) WindPVbattery system [323]-[325]

74

13) PVdiesel system [326]

14) DieselwindPV system [327]

15) PVFC Super-conducting Magnetic Energy Storage (SMES) system [328]

From the above listed hybrid energy systems it is noted that the main renewable

energy sources are wind and photovoltaic power Due to natural intermittent properties of

wind and photovoltaic power stand-alone wind andor PV renewable energy systems

normally require energy storage devices or some other generation sources to form a

hybrid system The storage device can be a battery bank super-capacitor bank SMES or

a FC-electrolyzer system

In this study a multi-source hybrid alternative distributed generation system

consisting of wind PV fuel cell electrolyzer and battery is proposed Wind and

photovoltaic are the primary power sources of the system to take full advantage of

renewable energy around us The FCelectrolyzer combination is used as a backup and

long term storage system For a stand-alone application a battery is also used in the

system as short term energy storage to supply fast transient and ripple power In the

proposed system the different energy sources are integrated through an AC link bus

(discussed later in this chapter) An overall power management controller is designed for

the system to coordinate the power flows among the different energy sources The details

of the system configuration are discussed in this chapter The system component

modeling will be discussed in Chapter 4 The system control scheme and simulation

results under different scenarios will be given in Chapter 7

75

Figure 31 Hybrid energy system integration DC coupling

AC Coupling vs DC Coupling

There are several ways to integrate different alternative energy sources to form a

hybrid system The methods can be generally classified into two categories DC coupling

and AC coupling AC coupling can be classified further into power frequency AC (PFAC)

coupling and high frequency AC (HFAC) coupling In a DC coupling configuration

shown in Figure 31 different alternative energy sources are connected to a DC bus

through appropriate power electronic interfacing circuits Then the DC energy is

converted into 60 Hz (or 50 Hz) AC through a DCAC converter (inverter) which can be

bi-directional

76

(a)

(b) Figure 32 Hybrid energy system integration (a) PFAC coupling (b) HFAC coupling

77

In a PFAC coupling scheme shown in Figure 32 (a) different energy sources are

integrated through proper power electronic interfacing circuits to a power frequency AC

bus Coupling inductors may also be needed to achieve desired power flow management

In a HFAC link scheme shown in Figure 32 (b) different alternative energy sources are

coupled to a HFAC bus HFAC loads are connected directly to the HFAC bus The HFAC

can also be converted into PFAC through an ACAC converter so that regular AC loads

can be connected to the PFAC bus HFAC link is originally developed for supplying

power to HFAC loads This configuration has been used mostly in applications with

HFAC (eg 400 Hz) loads such as airplanes vessels submarines and space station

applications [329]

Different coupling schemes find their own appropriate applications DC coupling is

the simplest and the oldest type of integration PFAC link is more modular than DC

scheme and is ready for grid connection HFAC coupling is more complicated and is

more suitable for the applications with HFAC loads Table 31 summaries the advantages

and disadvantages of each coupling scheme

78

TABLE 31 COMPARISON AMONG DIFFERENT INTEGRATION SCHEMES

Coupling Scheme

Advantage Disadvantage

DC [31]-[32] [312]

[329]-[330]

1 Synchronism not needed 2 Suitable for long distance

transmission it has less transmission losses

3 Single-wired connection

1 Concerns on the voltage compatibility

2 Corrosion concerns with the DC electrodes

3 Non-standard connection requires high costs in installing and maintenance

4 If the DCAC inverter is out of service the whole system fails to supply AC power

PFAC [329]

[331]-[332]

1 High reliability If one of the energy sources is out of service it can be isolated from the system easily

2 Ready for grid connection 3 Standard interfacing and

modular structure 3 Easy multi-voltage and

multi-terminal matching 4 Well established scale economy

1 Synchronism required 2 The need for power factor and harmonic distortion correction

3 Not suitable for long distance transmission

HFAC [329]

[333]-[334]

1 Higher order harmonics can be easily filtered out

2 Suitable for applications with HFAC loads with improved efficiency

3 Size of high frequency transformers harmonic filters and other passive components are smaller

1 Complex control 2 Higher component and maintenance costs due to high frequency

3 The dependence on future advances of power electronics

4 Concerns about electromagnetic compatibility

5 Extremely limited capability of long distance transmission

79

Stand-alone vs Grid-connected Systems

A hybrid alternative energy system can either be stand-alone or grid-connected if

utility grid is available For a stand-alone application the system needs to have sufficient

storage capacity to handle the power variations from the alternative energy sources

involved A system of this type can be considered as a micro-grid which has its own

generation sources and loads [335] For a grid-connected application the alternative

energy sources in the micro-grid can supply power both to the local loads and the utility

grid In addition to real power these DG sources can also be used to give reactive power

and voltage support to the utility grid The capacity of the storage device for these

systems can be smaller if they are grid-connected since the grid can be used as system

backup However when connected to a utility grid important operation and performance

requirements such as voltage frequency and harmonic regulations are imposed on the

system [336] Both grid-connected and stand-alone applications will be discussed in the

later chapters The optimal placement of DG sources in power systems will also be

discussed in Chapter 8

The Proposed System Configuration

Figure 33 shows the system configuration for the proposed hybrid alternative energy

system In the system the renewable wind and solar power are taken as the primary

source while fuel cellelectrolyzer combination is used as a backup and storage system

This system can be considered as a complete ldquogreenrdquo power generation system because

the main energy sources and storage system are all environmentally friendly and it can be

80

stand-alone or grid-connected When there is excess wind andor solar generation

available the electrolyzer turns on to begin producing hydrogen which is delivered to the

hydrogen storage tanks If the H2 storage tanks become full the excess power will be

diverted to other dump loads which are not shown in Figure 33 When there is a deficit

in power generation the fuel cell stack will begin to produce energy using hydrogen from

the reservoir tanks or in case they are empty from the backup H2 tanks A battery bank is

used to supply transient power to fast load transients ripples and spikes in stand-alone

applications For grid-connected applications the battery bank can be taken out from the

system the utility grid will take care of transient power Different energy sources are

connected to a 60 Hz AC bus through appropriate power electronic interfacing circuits

The system can be easily expended ie other energy sources can be integrated into the

system when they are available as shown in Figure 33 The main system components

and their sizes are discussed in the following section

System Unit Sizing

The unit sizing procedure discussed in this section is assumed for a stand-alone

hybrid system with the proposed structure (Figure 33) for residential electricity supply in

southwestern part of Montana The hybrid system is designed to supply power for five

homes A typical load demand for each home reported in [337] in the Pacific Northwest

regions is used in this simulation study The total load demand of the five homes is shown

in Figure 34 A 50 kW wind turbine is assumed to be available already for the hybrid

system The following unit sizing procedure is used to determine the size of PV arrays

fuel cells the electrolyzer and the battery

81

Figure 33 System configuration of the proposed multi-source alternative hybrid energy system (coupling inductors are not shown in the figure)

82

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

Time (Hour of Day)

Demand (kW)

Figure 34 Hourly average demand of a typical residence in the Pacific Northwest area

Before the discussion of unit sizing the following concept is applied for indicating

the overall efficiency and availability of a renewable energy source

Capacity factor of a renewable energy kcf is defined as

Actual average output power over a period of time T kcf =

Nominal power rating of the renewable energy source (31)

For the wind and solar data reported in [33] [324] the capacity factor of the wind

turbine (kcf_wtg) and the PV (kcf_pv) array used in the proposed hybrid system for the

southwestern part of Montana are taken as 13 and 10 respectively

The purpose of unit sizing is to minimize the difference between the generated power

( genP ) from the renewable energy source and the demand (demP ) over a period of time T T

is taken as one year in this study

83

demratedpvpveffratedwtgwtgeffdemgen PPkPkPPP minustimes+times=minus=∆ __ (32)

where Pwtgrated is the power rating of the wind turbine generator and Pwtgpv is the power

rating the PV array

To balance the generation and the demand the rated power for the PV arrays is

( )pveffratedwtgwtgeffdemratedpv kPkPP __ timesminus= (33)

From Figure 34 the average load demand is 976 kW Then according to (33) the

size of the PV array is calculated to be 326 kW

The FCelectrolyzer combination is taken as the storage for the system The fuel cell

needs to supply the peak load demand when there is no wind and solar power Therefore

the size of fuel cell is 146 kW (Figure 34) To leave some safe margin an 18 kW fuel

cell stack array is used

The electrolyzer should be able to handle the excess power from the wind and solar

power source The maximum possible excess power is

(Pgen - Pdem)max = 766 kW (34)

However the possibility that both the wind and solar power reach their maximum

points while the load demand is at its lowest value is very small According to the data

reported in [330] the excess available power normally is less than half of the maximum

possible value And electrolyzer is also very expensive Therefore a 50 kW electrolyzer

[over 60 of the maximum available given in (34)] is used in this study

Battery capacity can be determined based on the transient power at the load site In

this study a 10 kWh battery bank is used

The details of the system component parameters are listed in Table 32

84

TABLE 32 COMPONENT PARAMETERS OF THE PROPOSED HYBRID ENERGY SYSTEM

Wind turbine

Rated power 50 kW

Cut in speed (Cut out speed) 3 ms (25 ms)

Rated speed 14 ms

Blade diameter 15 m

Gear box ratio 75

Induction generator

Rated power 50 kW

Rated voltage 670 V

Rated frequency 60 Hz

PV array

Module unit 153 cells 173 W 1 kWm2 25 ˚C

Module number 16times12 = 192

Power rating 192times173 asymp 33 kW

Fuel cell array

PEMFC stack 500 W

PEMFC array 6times6 = 36

PEMFC array power rating 36times05 = 18 kW

Or SOFC stack 5 kW

SOFC array 2times2 = 4

SOFC array power rating 4times5 kW = 20 kW

Electrolyzer

Rated power 50 kW

Number of cells 40 (in series)

Operating voltage 60 - 80 V

Battery

Capacity 10 kWh

Rated voltage 400 V

85

REFERENCES

[31] K Agbossou M Kolhe J Hamelin and TK Bose ldquoPerformance of a stand-alone renewable energy system based on energy storage as hydrogenrdquo IEEE

Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 3 pp 633 ndash 640 Sept 2004

[32] K Agbossou R Chahine J Hamelin FLaurencelle A Anourar J-M St-Arnaud and TK Bose ldquoRenewable energy systems based on hydrogen for remote applicationsrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 96 pp168-172 2001

[33] DB Nelson MH Nehrir and C Wang ldquoUnit Sizing and Cost Analysis of Stand-Alone Hybrid WinPVFuel Cell Systemsrdquo Renewable Energy (accepted)

[34] R Lasseter ldquoDynamic models for micro-turbines and fuel cellsrdquo Proceedings 2001 PES Summer Meeting Vol 2 pp 761-766 2001

[35] Y Zhu and K Tomsovic ldquoDevelopment of models for analyzing the load-following performance of microturbines and fuel cellsrdquo Journal of Electric Power Systems Research pp 1-11 Vol 62 2002

[36] SR Guda C Wang and MH Nehrir ldquoModeling of Microturbine Power Generation Systemsrdquo Journal of Power Components amp Systems (accepted)

[37] K Sedghisigarchi and A Feliachi ldquoDynamic and Transient Analysis of Power Distribution Systems with Fuel CellsmdashPart I Fuel-Cell Dynamic Modelrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 2 pp423-428 June 2004

[38] K Sedghisigarchi and A Feliachi ldquoDynamic and Transient Analysis of Power Distribution Systems with Fuel CellsmdashPart II Control and Stability Enhancementrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 2 pp429-434 June 2004

[39] SH Chan HK Ho and Y Tian ldquoMulti-level modeling of SOFC-gas turbine hybrid systemrdquo International Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 28 No 8 pp 889-900 Aug 2003

[310] Z Miao M A Choudhry R L Klein and L Fan ldquoStudy of A Fuel Cell Power Plant in Power Distribution System ndash Part I Dynamic Modelrdquo Proceedings IEEE PES General Meeting June 2004 Denver CO

[311] Z Miao M A Choudhry R L Klein and L Fan ldquoStudy of A Fuel Cell Power Plant in Power Distribution System ndash Part II Stability Controlrdquo Proceedings IEEE PES General Meeting June 2004 Denver CO

86

[312] H Dehbonei ldquoPower conditioning for distributed renewable energy generationrdquo PhD Dissertation Curtin University of Technology Perth Western Australia 2003

[313] P A Lehman CE Chamberlin G Pauletto MA Rocheleau ldquoOperating Experience with a photovoltaic-hydrogen energy systemrdquo Proceedings

Hydrogenrsquo94 The 10th World Hydrogen Energy Conference Cocoa Beach FL June 1994

[314] A Arkin and J J Duffy ldquoModeling of PV Electrolyzer and Gas Storage in a Stand-Alone Solar-Fuel Cell Systemrdquo Proceedings the 2001 National Solar Energy Conference Annual Meeting American Solar Energy Society 2001

[315] L A Torres F J Rodriguez and PJ Sebastian ldquoSimulation of a solar-hydrogen-fuel cell system results for different locations in Mexicordquo International Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 23 No 11 pp 1005-1010 Nov 1998

[316] S R Vosen and JO Keller ldquoHybrid energy storage systems for stand-alone electric power systems optimization of system performance and cost through control strategiesrdquo International Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 24 No 12 pp 1139-56 Dec 1999

[317] Th F El-Shatter M N Eskandar and MT El-Hagry ldquoHybrid PVfuel cell system design and simulationrdquo Renewable Energy Vol 27 No 3 pp479-485 Nov 2002

[318] Oslash Ulleberg and S O MOslashRNER ldquoTRNSYS simulation models for solar-hydrogen systems rdquo Solar Energy Vol 59 No 4-6 pp 271-279 1997

[319] J C Amphlett EH de Oliveira RF Mann PR Roberge and Aida Rodrigues ldquoDynamic Interaction of a Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cell and a Lead-acid Batteryrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 65 pp 173-178 1997

[320] D Candusso L Valero and A Walter ldquoModelling control and simulation of a fuel cell based power supply system with energy managementrdquo Proceedings 28th Annual Conference of the IEEE Industrial Electronics Society (IECON 2002) Vol 2 pp1294-1299 2002

[321] M T Iqbal ldquoModeling and control of a wind fuel cell hybrid energy systemrdquo Renewable Energy Vol 28 No 2 pp 223-237 Feb 2003

[322] H Sharma S Islam and T Pryor ldquoDynamic modeling and simulation of a hybrid wind diesel remote area power systemrdquo International Journal of Renewable Energy Engineering Vol 2 No1 April 2000

87

[323] R Chedid H Akiki and S Rahman ldquoA decision support technique for the design of hybrid solar-wind power systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 13 No 1 pp 76-83 March 1998

[324] W D Kellogg M H Nehrir G Venkataramanan and V Gerez ldquoGeneration unit sizing and cost analysis for stand-alone wind photovoltaic and hybrid windPV systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 13 No 1 pp 70-75 March 1998

[325] F Giraud and Z M Salameh ldquoSteady-state performance of a grid-connected rooftop hybrid wind-photovoltaic power system with battery storagerdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 16 No 1 pp 1 ndash 7 March 2001

[326] E S Abdin A M Osheiba and MM Khater ldquoModeling and optimal controllers design for a stand-alone photovoltaic-diesel generating unitrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 14 No 3 pp 560-565 Sept 1999

[327] F Bonanno A Consoli A Raciti B Morgana and U Nocera ldquoTransient analysis of integrated diesel-wind-photovoltaic generation systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 14 No 2 pp 232-238 June 1999

[328] T Monai I Takano H Nishikawa and Sawada ldquoResponse characteristics and operating methods of new type dispersed power supply system using photovoltaic fuel cell and SMESrdquo 2002 IEEE PES Summer Meeting Vol 2 pp 874-879 2002

[329] F A Farret and M G Simotildees Integration of Alternative Sources of Energy John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2006

[330] Oslashystein Ulleberg ldquoStand-Alone Power Systems for the Future Optimal Design Operation amp Control of Solar-Hydrogen Energy Systemsrdquo PhD Dissertation Norwegian University of Science and Technology Trondheim 1998

[331] P Strauss A Engler ldquoAC coupled PV hybrid systems and microgrids-state of the art and future trendsrdquo Proceedings 3rd World Conference on Photovoltaic Energy Conversion Vol 3 No 12-16 pp 2129 ndash 2134 May 2003

[332] G Hegde P Pullammanappallil C Nayar ldquoModular AC coupled hybrid power systems for the emerging GHG mitigation products marketrdquo Proceedings Conference on Convergent Technologies for Asia-Pacific Region Vol 3 No15-17 pp 971 ndash 975 Oct 2003

[333] SK Sul I Alan and TA Lipo ldquoPerformance testing of a high frequency link converter for space station power distribution systemrdquo Proceedings the 24th Intersociety Energy Conversion Engineering Conference (IECEC-89) Vol 1 No 6-11 pp 617 ndash 623 Aug 1989

88

[334] H J Cha and P N Enjeti ldquoA three-phase ACAC high-frequency link matrix converter for VSCF applicationsrdquo Proceedings IEEE 34th Annual Power Electronics Specialist Conference 2003 (PESC 03) Vol 4 No 15-19 pp 1971 ndash 1976 June 2003

[335] R H Lasseter ldquoMicroGridsrdquo Proceedings 2002 IEEE PES Winter Meeting Vol 1 pp 305-308 2002

[336] IEEE Std 1547 IEEE Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Resources with Electric Power Systems 2003

[337] J Cahill K Ritland W Kelly ldquoDescription of Electric Energy Use in Single Family Residences in the Pacific Northwest 1986-1992rdquo Office of Energy Resources Bonneville Power Administration December 1992 Portland OR

89

CHAPTER 4

COMPONENT MODELING FOR THE HYBRID

ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SYSTEM

In this chapter the models for the main components of the proposed hybrid

alternative energy system given in Chapter 3 are developed Namely they are fuel cells

wind energy conversion system PV energy conversion system electrolyzer battery

power electronic interfacing circuits and accessory devices

Two types of fuel cells are modeled and their applications are discussed in this

dissertation They are low temperature proton exchange membrane fuel cell (PEMFC)

and high temperature solid oxide fuel cell (SOFC)

Dynamic Models and Model Validation for PEMFC

Introduction

PEMFCs show great promise for use as distributed generation (DG) sources

Compared with other DG technologies such as wind and photovoltaic (PV) generation

PEMFCs have the advantage that they can be placed at any site in a distribution system

without geographic limitations to achieve optimal performance Electric vehicles are

another major application of PEMFCs The increased desire for vehicles with less

emission has made PEMFCs attractive for vehicular applications since they emit

essentially no pollutants and have high power density and quick start

PEMFCs are good energy sources to provide reliable power at steady state but they

90

cannot respond to electrical load transients as fast as desired This is mainly due to their

slow internal electrochemical and thermodynamic responses The transient properties of

PEMFCs need to be studied and analyzed under different situations such as electrical

faults on the fuel cell terminals motor starting and electric vehicle starting and

acceleration

Some work has been reported in the literature on steady state fuel cell modeling eg

[41]ndash[47] as well as dynamic modeling [48]ndash[411] These studies are mostly based on

empirical equations andor electrochemical reactions inside the fuel cell In recent years

attempts have been made to study dynamic modeling of fuel cells with emphasis on the

electrical terminal characteristics eg [412]ndash[416] A detailed explanation of the

electrochemical properties of fuel cells and a simple equivalent electrical circuit

including a capacitor due to the double-layer charging effect inside fuel cells are reported

in [417]

In this dissertation dynamic models are presented for PEMFCs using electrical

circuits First through mechanistic analysis the equivalent internal voltage source and

equivalent resistors for activation loss ohmic voltage drop and concentration voltage

drop are given Then the double-layer charging effect is considered by adding an

equivalent capacitor to the circuit The thermodynamic characteristic inside the fuel cell

is also integrated into the model according to the energy balance equation A dynamic

model is built in MATLABSIMULINKreg and an electrical model is developed in Pspicereg

using equivalent electrical components from an electrical engineerrsquos point of view

Simulation results are given and validated with experimental data both for steady-state

and transient responses of PEMFCs The models show great potential to be useful in

91

other related studies such as real-time control of fuel cells and hybrid alternative energy

systems

Dynamic Model Development

In this section a mathematical approach is presented for building a dynamic model for

a PEMFC stack To simplify the analysis the following assumptions are made [41]

[45] [48] [417] [418]

(1) One-dimensional treatment

(2) Ideal and uniformly distributed gases

(3) Constant pressures in the fuel cell gas flow channels

(4) The fuel is humidified H2 and the oxidant is humidified air Assume the effective

anode water vapor pressure is 50 of the saturated vapor pressure while the

effective cathode water pressure is 100

(5) The fuel cell works under 100 ˚C and the reaction product is in liquid phase

(6) Thermodynamic properties are evaluated at the average stack temperature

temperature variations across the stack are neglected and the overall specific heat

capacity of the stack is assumed to be a constant

(7) Parameters for individual cells can be lumped together to represent a fuel cell

stack

A schematic diagram of a PEMFC and its internal voltage drops are shown in Figure

41

92

Gas Diffusion in the Electrodes In order to calculate the fuel cell output voltage

the effective partial pressures of H2 and O2 need to be determined In a gas mixture

consisting of N species the diffusion of component i through the porous electrodes can

be described by the Stefan-Maxwell formulation [41] [45]

sum=

minus=nabla

N

j ji

ijji

iD

NxNx

P

RTx

1

(41)

where xi (xj) = Mole fractions of species i (j)

Dij = effective binary diffusivity of i-j pair (m2s)

Ni(Nj) = Superficial gas flux of species i (j) [mol(m2middots)]

R = gas constant 83143 J(molmiddotK)

T = gas temperature (K)

P = overall pressure of the gas mixture (Pa)

93

Gas

Flow

Channel

Anode

Electrode

Cathode

Electrode

Membrane

Catalyst

Layers

H2O

H2

H2O

O2

N2

CO2

H+

0x

Vout

E

aohmV

membraneohmV

actV

concV

cohmV

Load

e- e-

Gas

Flow

Channel

Figure 41 Schematic diagram of a PEMFC and voltage drops across it

In the anode channel the gas stream is a mixture of H2 and H2O(g) The molar flux of

water (in gas phase) normal to anode surface OHN 2 can be set to zero according to

assumptions (1) ndash (3)

In the one-dimensional transport process along the x axis shown in Figure 41 the

diffusion of water can be simplified as

=

minus=

22

22

22

22222

HOH

HOH

aHOH

OHHHOH

a

OH

D

Nx

P

RT

D

NxNx

P

RT

dx

dx (42)

where Pa = overall gas pressure at the anode (Pa)

The molar flux of H2 can be determined by Faradayrsquos Law [41] [420]

94

F

IN den

H2

2 = (43)

where Iden = current density (Am2)

F = Faraday constant (96487 Cmol)

By combining (42) and (43) and integrating the expression with respect to x from the

anode channel to the catalyst surface it gives

=

22

2

22

expHOHa

adench

OHOHDFP

lRTIxx (44)

where la = distance from anode surface to the reaction site (m)

Superscript denotes the effective value

Superscript ldquochrdquo denotes the conditions at the anode or cathode channel

Since 1

2

2 =+ HOH xx the effective partial pressure of H2 is

)1(

2

2

2

2 OH

OH

OHH x

x

pp minus= (45)

According to assumption (4)

2OHp at the anode is sat

OHp 250 Therefore

2Hp is

given as [41]

minus

= 1

2exp

150

22

2

2

2

HOHa

adench

OH

sat

OHH

DFP

lRTIx

pp (46)

Superscript ldquosatrdquo denotes the condition of saturation

The gases flowing in the cathode channel are O2 N2 H2O(g) and CO2 Using (41) the

diffusion of H2O(g) at the cathode side can be obtained from

95

minus=

minus=

22

22

22

22222

OOH

OOH

cOOH

OOHOHO

c

OH

D

Nx

P

RT

D

NxNx

P

RT

dx

dx (47)

where Pc = overall gas pressure at the cathode (Pa)

Similar to the analysis for anode the effective molar fraction of water at the cathode

catalyst interface can be found as

=

22

2

24

expOOHc

cdench

OHOHDFP

lRTIxx (48)

where lc = distance from cathode surface to the reaction site (m)

Through similar analytical procedures [equations (47)-(48)] the effective molar

fraction of N2 and CO2 can also be determined

=

22

2

24

expONc

cdench

NNDFP

lRTIxx (49)

=

22

2

24

expOCOc

cdench

COCODFP

lRTIxx (410)

The effective molar fraction of O2 is

2

2

2

2 1 CONOHO xxxx minusminusminus= (411)

And the corresponding effective partial pressure of O2 is

)1(

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2 CONOH

OH

OH

O

OH

OH

O xxxx

px

x

pp minusminusminus== (412)

According to assumption (4)

2OHp at the cathode equals sat

OHp 2 and the above

equation can be rewritten as

minus

minusminus= 1

1

2

2

22

2

OH

CONsat

OHOx

xxpp (413)

96

2Hp and

2Op calculated from (46) and (413) will be used in the Nernst equation to

find the fuel cell output voltage In the following subsection material balance equations

will be developed which will also be used to determine the fuel cell output voltage

Material Conservation Equations The instantaneous change in the effective partial

pressures of hydrogen and oxygen can be determined through the ideal gas equations as

follows [422]

F

iM

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

VnetHoutHinH

Ha

22222

2 minus=minusminus= (414)

where Va = volume of anode channel (m3)

MH2 = H2 mole flow rate (mols)

i = fuel cell current (A)

Subscripts ldquoinrdquo ldquooutrdquo and ldquonetrdquo denote the values related to input output and

net

F

iM

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

VnetOoutOinO

Oc

44222

2 minus=minusminus= (415)

where Vc = volume of cathode channel (m3)

MO2 = O2 mole flow rate (mols)

At steady-state all partial pressures are considered to be kept constant ie

0

2

2 ==dt

dp

dt

dp OH (416)

Therefore the net mole flow rates of H2 and O2 at steady-state are

F

IMM netOnetH

22 22 == (417)

Under transient state there are delays between the change in the load current and the

97

flow of fuel and oxidant The following relationships are used to represent these delay

effects

netO

netO

c

netH

netH

a

MF

i

dt

dM

MF

i

dt

dM

2

2

2

2

4

2

minus=

minus=

τ

τ (418)

where τa = fuel flow delay (s)

τc = oxidant flow delay (s)

Fuel Cell Output Voltage The overall reaction in a PEMFC can be simply written

as

)(2222

1lOHOH =+ (419)

According to assumption (5) the corresponding Nernst equation used to calculate the

reversible potential is [420]

[ ]50

2

20 )(ln2

OHcellcell ppF

RTEE sdot+= (420)

where Ecell = reversible potential of each cell (V)

E0cell is the reference potential which is a function of temperature and can be

expressed as follows [41]

)298(00 minusminus= TkEE E

o

cellcell (421)

where o

cellE 0= standard reference potential at standard state 298 K and 1atm pressure

To simplify the analysis a voltage Edcell is considered to be subtracted from the right

side of (420) for the overall effect of the fuel and oxidant delay The steady-state value

of Edcell is zero but it will show the influence of the fuel and oxidant delays on the fuel

98

cell output voltage during load transients It can be written as

[ ])exp()()( eecelld ttitiE τλ minusotimesminus= (422)

where λe = constant factor in calculating Ed (Ω)

τe = overall flow delay (s)

where ldquootimesrdquo is the convolution operator Converting (422) to the Laplace domain we get

1)()( +

=s

ssIsE

e

eecelld τ

τλ (423)

Equation (423) is used for developing models both in SIMULINK and Pspice The

internal potential Ecell in (420) now becomes

[ ] celldOHcellcell EppF

RTEE

50

2

20 )(ln2

minussdot+= (424)

Ecell calculated from (424) is actually the open-circuit voltage of the fuel cell

However under normal operating conditions the fuel cell output voltage is less than Ecell

Activation loss ohmic resistance voltage drop and concentration overpotential are

voltage drops across the fuel cell as shown in Figure 41 [418] Therefore

cellconccellohmcellactcellcell VVVEV minusminusminus= (425)

where Vcell = output voltage of a single cell (V)

Vactcell = activation voltage drop of a single cell (V)

Vohmcell = ohmic voltage drop of a single cell (V)

Vconccell = concentration voltage drop of a single cell (V)

Applying assumption 7) the output voltage of the fuel cell stack can be obtained as

concohmactcellcellout VVVEVNV minusminusminus== (426)

where Vout = output voltage of the fuel cell stack (V)

99

Ncell = number of cells in the stack (V)

Vact = overall activation voltage drop (V)

Vohm = overall ohmic voltage drop (V)

Vconc = overall concentration voltage drop (V)

To calculate the fuel cell output voltage the following estimations are used

1) Activation Voltage Drop Tafel equation given below is used to calculate the

activation voltage drop in a fuel cell [418]

[ ])ln()ln(0

IbaTI

I

zF

RTVact +sdot==

α (427)

On the other hand an empirical equation for Vact is given in [41] where a constant

(η0) is added to (427) as follows

210 )ln()298( actactact VVIbTaTV +=sdot+sdotminus+=η (428)

where η0 a b = empirical constants terms

Vact1=(η0+(T-298)middota) is the voltage drop affected only by the fuel cell internal

temperature while Vact2=(Tmiddotbmiddotln(I)) is both current and temperature dependent

The equivalent resistance of activation corresponding to Vact2 is defined as

I

IbT

I

VR actact

)ln(2 sdot== (429)

2) Ohmic Voltage Drop The ohmic resistance of a PEMFC consists of the resistance

of polymer membrane the conducting resistance between the membrane and electrodes

and the resistances of electrodes The overall ohmic voltage drop can be expressed as

ohmcohmmembraneohmaohmohm IRVVVV =++= (430)

ohmR is also a function of current and temperature [41]

100

TkIkRR RTRIohmohm minus+= 0 (431)

where Rohm0 = constant part of the Rohm

kRI = empirical constant in calculating Rohmic (ΩA)

kRT = empirical constant in calculating Rohmic (ΩK)

The values of kRI and kRT used in the simulation study are given in Table 43

3) Concentration Voltage Drop During the reaction process concentration gradients

can be formed due to mass diffusions from the flow channels to the reaction sites

(catalyst surfaces) At high current densities slow transportation of reactants (products)

to (from) the reaction sites is the main reason for the concentration voltage drop [418]

Any water film covering the catalyst surfaces at the anode and cathode can be another

contributor to this voltage drop [41] The concentration overpotential in the fuel cell is

defined as [418]

B

Sconc

C

C

zF

RTV lnminus= (432)

where CS is the surface concentration and CB is the bulk concentration

According to Fickrsquos first law and Faradayrsquos law [420] the above equation can be

rewritten as

)1ln(limit

concI

I

zF

RTV minusminus= (433)

where Ilimi = limitation current (A)

z = number of electrons participating

The equivalent resistance for the concentration loss is

101

)1ln(limit

concconc

I

I

zFI

RT

I

VR minusminus== (434)

Double-Layer Charging Effect In a PEMFC the two electrodes are separated by a

solid membrane (Figure 41) which only allows the H+ ions to pass but blocks the

electron flow [417] [418] The electrons will flow from the anode through the external

load and gather at the surface of the cathode to which the protons of hydrogen will be

attracted at the same time Thus two charged layers of opposite polarity are formed

across the boundary between the porous cathode and the membrane [417] [421] The

layers known as electrochemical double-layer can store electrical energy and behave

like a super-capacitor The equivalent circuit of fuel cell considering this effect is given

in Figure 42 which is similar to the circuit reported in [417] But the values of Ract [see

(429)] and the voltage source are different from what are defined in [417] Ract in [417]

is defined as VactI and the value of voltage source used in [417] is E

Figure 42 Equivalent circuit of the double-layer charging effect inside a PEMFC

In the above circuit C is the equivalent capacitor due to double-layer charging effect

Since the electrodes of a PEMFC are porous the capacitance C is very large and can be

in the order of several Farads [417] [426] Ract and Rconc are equivalent resistances of

102

activation and concentration voltage drops which can be calculated according to (429)

and (434) The voltage across C is

))(( concactC

C RRdt

dVCIV +minus= (435)

The double-layer charging effect is integrated into the modeling by using VC instead

of Vact2 and Vconc to calculate Vout The fuel cell output voltage now turns out to be

ohmCactout VVVEV minusminusminus= 1 (436)

Energy Balance of the Thermodynamics The net heat generated by the chemical

reaction inside the fuel cell which causes its temperature to rise or fall can be written as

losslatentsenselecchemnet qqqqq ampampampampamp minusminusminus= + (437)

where qnet = net heat energy (J)

qchem = Chemical or heat energy (J)

qelec = Electrical energy (J)

qloss = Heat loss (J)

The available power released due to chemical reaction is calculated by

Hnq consumedHchem ∆sdot= 2ampamp (438)

where ∆H = the enthalpy change of the chemical reaction inside the fuel cell

consumedHn 2

amp = H2 consumption rate (mols)

The maximum available amount of electrical energy is [418] [420]

[ ]50

2

20 )(ln OH ppRTGSTHG sdotminus∆=∆minus∆=∆ (439)

where ∆G = Gibbs free energy (Jmol)

103

∆G0 = Gibbs free energy at standard condition4 (Jmol)

∆S = entropy change (JmolmiddotK-1)

The electrical output power is computed as

IVq outelec sdot=amp (440)

The sensible and latent heat absorbed during the process can be estimated by the

following equation [48] [422]

( )( )

VgeneratedOH

lOHroomgeneratedOH

OroominOoutO

HroominHoutHlatentsens

Hn

CTTn

CTnTn

CTnTnq

sdot+

sdotminussdot+

sdotsdotminussdot+

sdotsdotminussdot=+

2

22

222

222

)(

amp

amp

ampamp

ampampamp

(441)

where qsens+latent = sensible and latent heat (J)

inamp = flow rate of species i (mols)

Ci = specific heat capacity of species i [J(molmiddotK)]

HV = Vaporization heat of water (Jmol)

Troom = room temperature (K)

The heat loss which is mainly transferred by air convection can be estimated by the

following formula [422]

cellcellroomcellloss ANTThq )( minus=amp (442)

where hcell = convective heat transfer coefficient [W(m2middotK)] It can be obtained through

experiments [48]

At steady state netqamp = 0 and the fuel cell operates at a constant temperature During

transitions the temperature of fuel cell will rise or drop according to the following

4 1atm 298K

104

equation [422]

netFCFC qdt

dTCM amp= (443)

where MFC is the total mass of the fuel cell stack and CFC is the overall specific heat

capacity of the stack

Dynamic Model Built in MatlabSimulink

A dynamic model for the PEMFC has been developed in MATLABSIMULINK

based on the electrochemical and thermodynamic characteristics of the fuel cell discussed

in the previous section The fuel cell output voltage which is a function of temperature

and load current can be obtained from the model Figure 43 shows the block diagram

based on which the MATLABSIMULINK model has been developed In this figure the

input quantities are anode and cathode pressures initial temperature of the fuel cell and

room temperature At any given load current and time the internal temperature T is

determined and both the load current and temperature are fed back to different blocks

which take part in the calculation of the fuel cell output voltage

105

Mass DiffusionEquations

Thermodynamic Equations

Nernst EquationActivation

Loss CalculationOhmic VoltageDrop Calculation

ConcentrationLoss Calculation

Double-layer Charging Effect

x

Vout

Pa

PcTroom

I

T

Load

Input Output Feedback

- -

+Tinitial

Material Conservation(Fuel amp Oxdiant Delay)

x+-

Figure 43 Diagram of building a dynamic model of PEMFC in SIMULINK

In this block diagram mass diffusion equations (41)-(413) are used to calculate the

effective partial pressures of H2 and O2 Then the Nernst equation (420) and the overall

fuel and oxidant delay effect given by (422) are employed to determine the internal

potential (E) of the fuel cell The ohmic voltage drop equations (430)-(431) activation

voltage drop equations (427)-(429) and concentration voltage drop equations

(433)-(434) together with the double-layer charging effect equation (435) are applied to

determine the terminal (output) voltage of the fuel cell Thermodynamic effects are also

considered via energy balance equations (437)-(443)

Equivalent Electrical Model in Pspice

In practice fuel cells normally work together with other electrical devices such as

power electronic converters Pspice is a valuable simulation tool used to model and

investigate the behavior of electrical devices and circuits An electrical equivalent model

of fuel cell built in Pspice can be used with electrical models of other components to

106

study the performance characteristics of the fuel cell power generation unit A block

diagram to build such model for PEMFC is given in Figure 44 which is also based on

the characteristics discussed previously The development of electrical circuit model for

different blocks in Figure 44 is discussed below

Internal Potential E According to (420)-(426) the internal potential E is a

function of load current and temperature An electrical circuit for the internal potential

block is given in Figure 45 The current and temperature controlled voltage source f1(IT)

in the figure represents the current and temperature dependent part of (420) Note that

the effective partial pressures (

2Hp and

2Op ) given in (420) are current dependent The

current controlled voltage source f2(I) stands for Edcell in (422)

[ ] )298()(ln2

)( 50

2

21 minus+sdotminus= TkNppF

RTNTIf EcellOH

cell (444)

celldcellENIf 2 )( = (445)

C

I

InternalPotential E

Activation Concentration

ThermodynamicBlockTroom

Tinitial

T

TT

Ohmic

T

T

Vout

Figure 44 Diagram of building an electrical model of PEMFC in Pspice

107

f1(IT)

oE0

f2(I)

E

I

Figure 45 Electrical circuit for internal potential E

Circuit for Activation Loss From (428) the activation voltage drop can be divided

into two parts Vact1 and Vact2 Vact1 can be modeled by a constant voltage source in series

with a temperature controlled voltage source Vact2 can be represented by a temperature

and current dependent resistor Ract This resistor is assumed to be composed of a

constant-value resistor (Ract0) a current-dependent resistor (Ract1) and a

temperature-dependent resistor (Ract2) A current-dependent resistor can be easily built in

Pspice by using the polynomial current controlled voltage source model ldquoHPOLYrdquo A

temperature-dependent resistor can be built by Analog Behavioral Models (ABMs) in

Pspice [424] The electrical circuit for activation voltage drop is given in Figure 46 In

this figure with reference to (428) we can write

Ract0

f3(T)

Ract1

Ract2

I

Vact1

Vact2

Vact

Figure 46 Electrical circuit for activation loss

108

aTTf sdotminus= )298()(3 (446)

210 actactactact RRRR ++= (447)

Circuits for Ohmic and Concentration Voltage Drops According to (431) and

(434) both Rohm and Rconc are current and temperature dependent resistors Therefore

they can be modeled in Pspice the same way Ract is modeled Figure 47 shows the

equivalent circuit for ohmic voltage drop

210 ohmohmohmohm RRRR ++= (448)

Rohm0 is the constant part of Rohm With reference to (431) Rohm1=kRImiddotI is the

current-dependent part of Rohm and Rohm2 =-kRTmiddotT is its temperature-dependent part

Rohm0

Rohm1

Rohm2 I

Vohm

Figure 47 Electrical circuit for ohmic voltage drop

The electrical circuit model for concentration voltage drop is shown in Figure 48

210 concconcconcconc RRRR ++= (449)

where Rconc0 is the constant part of Rconc and Rconc1 Rconc2 are its current-dependent

and temperature-dependent parts

109

Rconc0

Rconc1

Rconc2 I

Vconc

Figure 48 Electrical circuit for concentration voltage drop

Equivalent Capacitor of Double-layer Charging Effect In Figure 44 C is the

equivalent capacitance of double-layer charging effect discussed in the previous section

This capacitance can be estimated through the measurement of the dynamic response of a

real fuel cell stack [417] Figure 42 shows how this capacitance is added into the circuit

Thermodynamic Block The analogies between the thermodynamic and electrical

quantities given in Table 41 are employed to develop the electrical circuit model for the

thermodynamic block shown in Figure 44 [423] The thermodynamic property inside the

fuel cell (437)-(443) can therefore be simulated by the circuit shown in Figure 49 The

power consumed by activation ohmic and concentration losses is considered as the heat

source which causes the fuel cell temperature to rise

IVEq outin sdotminus= )(amp (450)

The thermal resistance due to air convection is

)(1 cellcellcellT ANhR sdotsdot= (451)

In Figure 49 the constant voltage source ET represents the environmental

temperature and the voltage across the capacitance (Ch) is the overall temperature of the

fuel cell stack T

110

Environmental

Temperature

RT = Thermal Resistance

Ch = Heat Capacity

RT2 R

T2

Ch

inqamp

T

ET

Figure 49 Equivalent circuit of thermodynamic property inside PEMFC

TABLE 41 ANALOGIES BETWEEN THERMODYNAMIC AND ELECTRICAL QUANTITIES

Electrical Potential U (V) Temperature T(K)

Electrical Current I (A) Heat Flow Rate Ph (W)

Electrical Resistance R (Ohm) Thermal Resistance θ (KW)

Electrical Capacitance C (F) Heat Capacity Ch (JK)

URI = TθPh =

dt

dUCI =

dt

dTCP hh =

Model Validation

By applying the equations and the equivalent electrical circuits discussed in the

previous sections dynamic models for an Avista Labs (Relion now) SR-12 PEMFC stack

were built both in MATLABSIMULINK and Pspice environments The specifications of

SR-12 fuel cell stack are given in Table 42 [425] The electrical model parameter values

used in the simulation studies are listed in Table 43

111

TABLE 42 SPECIFICATIONS OF SR-12

Description Value

Capacity 500W

Number of cells 48

Operating environmental temperature 5degC to 35degC

Operating pressures PH2 asymp 15atm

Pcathode asymp 10atm

Unit Dimensions (WtimesDtimesH) 565times615times345 cm

Weight 44kg

The 9995 pure hydrogen flows at manifold pressure of about 7psi The

environmental air is driven by the SR-12rsquos internal fan to pass through the cathode to

provide oxygen

Experimental Setup To validate the models built in SIMULINK and Pspice real

input and output data were measured on the 500W SR-12 Avista Labs (Relion now)

PEMFC The block diagram of the experimental setup is shown in Figure 410 The

Chroma 63112 programmable electronic load was used as a current load Current signals

were measured by LEM LA100-P current transducers the output voltage was measured

by a LEM LV25-P voltage transducer and the temperature was measured by a k-type

thermocouple together with an analog connector The current voltage and temperature

data were all acquired by a 12-bit Advantech data acquisition card in a PC

112

TABLE 43 ELECTRICAL MODEL PARAMETER VALUES FOR SR-12 STACK

oE0 (V) 589 Ch (F) 22000

kE (VK) 000085 RT (Ω) 00347

τe (s) 800 C (F) 01F (48F for each cell)

λe (Ω) 000333 Rohm0 (Ω) 02793

η0 (V) 20145 Rohm1 (Ω) 0001872timesI

a (VK) -01373 Rohm2 (Ω) -00023712times(T-298)

Ract0 (Ω) 12581 Rconc0 (Ω) 0080312

Ract2 (Ω) 000112times(T-298) Rconc2 (Ω) 00002747times (T-298)

Ract1 (Ω) III

II

311600454501043

10223211067771

233

4456

minus+timesminus

times+timesminusminus

minusminus

Rconc1 (Ω) III

III

010542000555400100890

106437810457831022115

23

455668

minus+minus

times+timesminustimes minusminusminus

Chroma 63112

Programmable

Electronic Load

LEM LV25-P

Voltage

Transducer

LEM LA100-P

Current Transducer

Omega SMCJ

Thermocouple-to-

Analog Connector

PC with an Advantech PCI-1710

12-Bit Data Acquisition Card

K-Type

Thermocouple

SR-12

Internal

Circuit

SR-12

PEMFC

Stack

Istack

Iterminal

Figure 410 Experimental configuration on the SR-12 PEMFC stack

113

Steady-State Characteristics The steady state characteristics of SR-12 were

obtained by increasing the load current from 11A to 205A in steps of 02A every 40

seconds Both the stack current and terminal current (Figure 410) were measured but

only the stack current is used to validate the models since it is the current directly from

the fuel cell stack The experimental average value of V-I curve of the fuel cell is shown

in Figure 411 The steady-state responses of the models in SIMULINK and Pspice are

also given in Figure 411 in order to compare them with the experimental data Both the

SIMULINK and Pspice model responses agree very well with the real data from the fuel

cell stack The voltage drop at the beginning and end of the curves shown in Figure 411

are due to activation and concentration losses respectively The voltage drop in the

middle of the curves (which is approximately linear) is due to the ohmic loss in the fuel

cell stack [418]

Figure 412 shows the power vs current (P-I) curves of the PEMFC stack obtained

from the experimental data and the models The model responses also match well with

experimental data in this case Note that peak output power occurs near the fuel cell rated

output beyond which the fuel cell goes into the concentration zone In this region the

fuel cell output power will decrease with increasing load current due to a sharp decrease

in its terminal voltage

114

5 10 15 20 2522

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

Load Current (A)

PEMFC Output Voltage (V)

Average Value of the Measured DataResponse of the Model in SIMULINKResponse of the Model in Pspice

Upper range of the measured data

Lower range of the measured data

Figure 411 V-I characteristics of SR-12 and models

0 5 10 15 20 250

100

200

300

400

500

600

Load Current (A)

PEMFC Output Power (W)

Average Value of Measured DataModel in SIMULINKModel in Pspice

Lower range of the measured data

Upper range of the measured data

Figure 412 P-I characteristics of SR-12 and models

115

Temperature Response The temperature response of the PEMFC stack shown in

Figure 413 was measured under the same ramp load current as given in the previous

sub-section The temperature was measured as the current increased from 11A to 205A

with a slew rate of 5mAs The temperature response of the SIMULINK and Pspice

models are also given in Figure 413 for comparison with the measured values Although

there are some differences between the model responses and the measured data the

models can predict the temperature response of the fuel cell stack within 35K in the

worst case

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000306

308

310

312

314

316

318

320

Time (s)

Temperature Responses (K)

Measured Data

Model in SIMULINK

Model in Pspice

Figure 413 Temperature responses of the SR 12 stack and models

116

Transient Performance The dynamic property of PEMFC depends mainly on the

following three aspects double-layer charging effects fuel and oxidant flow delays and

thermodynamic characteristics inside the fuel cells Although the capacitance (C) due to

the double-layer charging effect is large (in the order of several Farads for each cell) the

time constant τ=(Ract+Rconc)middotC is normally small (less than 1 second) because (Ract+Rconc)

is small (less than 005Ω for the single cell used in this study) when the fuel cell works in

the linear zone Therefore capacitor C will affect the transient response of PEMFC in the

short time range The transient responses of the models to a fast step load change are

given in Figure 414 It is noted that when the load current steps up the voltage drops

simultaneously to some value due to the voltage drop across Rohm and then it decays

exponentially to its steady-state value due to the capacitance (C)

On the other hand the fuel and oxidant flows cannot follow the load current changes

instantaneously The delays can be in the range from several tens of seconds to several

hundreds of seconds Also the temperature of fuel cell stack cannot change

instantaneously The thermodynamic time constant of a PEMFC can be in the order of

minutes Thus the fuel and oxidant flow delays and the thermodynamic characteristics

will normally dominate the transient responses in the long time operation The

corresponding SIMULINK and Pspice model responses are given in Figure 415 From

this figure it is noticed that the voltage drops below its steady-state value when the load

steps up and then recovers back to its steady-state value in a relatively long time range (in

the order of about hundred seconds to several minutes) As shown in Figures 414 and

415 simulation results agree well with the measured data

117

209 2095 210 2105 211 2115 212 212526

28

30

32

34

36

38

Time (s)

Dynamic Responses in Short Time Range (V)

Measured DataModel in SIMULINKModel in Pspice

Model in Simulink

Model in Pspice

Measured Data

Figure 414 Transient responses of the models in short time range

400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 200026

28

30

32

34

36

38

Time (s)

PEMFC Dynamic Response (V)

Measured DataModel in SIMULINK

Model in Pspice

Measured Data Model in Pspice

Model in SIMULINK

Figure 415 Transient responses of the models in long time range

118

Dynamic Models for SOFC

Introduction

Solid oxide fuel cells are advanced electrochemical energy conversion devices

operating at a high temperature converting the chemical energy of fuel into electric

energy at high efficiency They have many advantages over conventional power plants

and show great promise in stationary power generation applications [427] [428] The

energy conversion efficiency of a SOFC stack can reach up to 65 and its overall

efficiency when used in combined heat and power (CHP) applications ie as an

integrated SOFC-combustion turbine system can even reach 70 [429] Despite slow

start-up and thermal stresses due to the high operating temperature SOFC allows for

internal reforming of gaseous fuel inside the fuel cell which gives its multi-fuel

capability [418] [430]

SOFC modeling is of interest for its performance prediction and controller design

Many SOFC models have been developed some are highly theoretical and are based on

empirical equations eg [431]-[433] and some are more application oriented

[434]-[437] Increased interest in SOFC power plant design and control has led to a

need for appropriate application oriented SOFC models An integrated SOFC plant

dynamic model for power system simulation (PSS) software was presented in [434]

Three operation limits of SOFC power plants were addressed in that paper in order to

achieve a safe and durable cell operation However the thermodynamic properties of

SOFCs were not discussed in the paper A transient model of a tubular SOFC consisting

of an electrochemical model and a thermal model was given in [435] However the

119

dynamic response of the model due to load variations was only investigated in large

(minute) time scale

In this section a dynamic model of a tubular SOFC stack is presented based on its

thermodynamic and electrochemical properties and on the mass and energy conservation

laws with emphasis on the fuel cell electrical (terminal) characteristics The SOFC model

implemented in MATLABSimulinkreg mainly consists of an electrochemical sub-model

and a thermodynamic sub-model The double-layer charging effect [439] is also taken

into account in the model The model responses are studied under both constant fuel flow

and constant fuel utilization operating modes The effect of temperature on the

steady-state V-I (output voltage vs current) and P-I (output power vs current)

characteristics are also studied The dynamic responses of the model are given and

discussed in different time scales ie from small time scale (10-3-10

-1 s) to large time

scale (102-10

3s) The temperature response of the model is given as well The SOFC

model has been used to study the SOFC overloading capability and to investigate the

performance of a SOFC distributed generation system which is reported in Chapters 5

and 6 The model shows the potential to be useful in SOFC related studies such as

real-time control of SOFC and its distributed generation applications

Dynamic Model Development

In this section a mathematical approach is presented for building a dynamic model for

a tubular SOFC fuel cell stack To simplify the analysis the following assumptions are

made

(1) One-dimensional treatment

120

(2) O= conducting electrolytes and ideal gases

(3) H2 fuel and large stoichiometric quantity of O2 at cathode

(4) H2 and O2 partial pressure are uniformly decreased along the anode channel while

the water vapor partial pressure is uniformly increased for normal operations

(5) Lumped thermal capacitance is used in the thermodynamic analysis and the

effective temperature of flowing gases in gas channels (anode and cathode

channels) is represented by its arithmetical mean value ( ) 2out

gas

in

gas

ch

gas TTT +=

(6) The combustion zone is not modeled in this SOFC thermal model The fuel and

air are assumed to be pre-heated

(7) Parameters for individual cells can be lumped together to represent a fuel cell

stack

A schematic diagram of a SOFC is shown in Figure 416 Two porous electrodes

(anode and cathode) are separated by a solid ceramic electrolyte This electrolyte material

(normally dense yttria-stabilized zirconia) is an excellent conductor for negatively

charged ions (such as O=) at high temperatures [418] At the cathode oxygen molecules

accept electrons from the external circuit and change to oxygen ions These negative ions

pass across the electrolyte and combine with hydrogen at the anode to produce water

For the details of principle of operation of SOFC the reader is referred to [418]

[427]-[429]

Effective Partial Pressures In this part expressions for H2 O2 and H2O partial

pressures at anode and cathode channels and their effective values at actual reaction sites

are derived in terms of the fuel cell operating parameters (eg fuel cell temperature fuel

121

and oxidant flow rates and anode and cathode inlet pressures) and the physical and

electrochemical parameters of the fuel cell These partial pressure values will be used to

calculate the fuel cell output voltage

Figure 416 Schematic diagram of a solid oxide fuel cell

As shown in Figure 416 when load current is being drawn H2 and O2 will diffuse

through the porous electrodes to reach the reaction sites and the reactant H2O will diffuse

from the reaction sites to the anode channel As a result H2 H2O and O2 partial pressure

gradients will be formed along the anode and cathode channels when the fuel cell is

under load Assuming uniform variation of gas partial pressures [assumption (4)] the

arithmetic mean values are used to present the overall effective gas partial pressures in

the channels

2

22

2

out

H

in

Hch

H

ppp

+= (452a)

122

2

22

2

out

OH

in

OHch

OH

ppp

+= (452b)

2

22

2

out

O

in

Och

O

ppp

+= (453)

The effective partial pressures of H2 and O2 at the actual reaction sites will be less

than those in the gas flow channels due to mass diffusion In contrast the vapor partial

pressure at reaction sites is higher than that in the anode flow channel In order to

calculate the fuel cell output voltage the effective partial pressures of H2 H2O and O2 at

the reaction sites need to be determined In a gas mixture consisting of N species the

diffusion of component i through the porous electrodes can be described by the

Stefan-Maxwell formulation [41]

sum=

minus=nabla

N

j ji

ijji

iD

NxNx

P

RTx

1

(454)

where xi (xj) = Mole fractions of species i (j)

Dij = effective binary diffusivity of i-j pair (m2s)

Ni(Nj) = Superficial gas flux of species i (j) [mol(m2middots)]

R = gas constant 83143 J(molmiddotK)

T = gas temperature (K)

P = overall pressure of the gas mixture (Pa)

In the anode channel the gas stream is a mixture of H2 and H2O In the

one-dimensional transport process along the x axis shown in Figure 416 the diffusion of

H2 can be simplified as

123

minus=

OHH

HOHOHH

ch

a

H

D

NxNx

P

RT

dx

dx

22

22222

(455)

The molar flux of H2 and H2O can be determined by Faradayrsquos Law [420]

F

iNN den

OHH222

=minus= (456)

Note that 122=+ OHH xx then (455) can be written as

F

i

D

RT

dx

dpden

OHH

H

222

2

minus= (457)

Similarly we can get the one-dimensional Stefan-Maxwell diffusion equation for

H2O

F

i

D

RT

dx

dpden

OHH

OH

222

2

= (458)

Integrating equations (457) and (458) with respect to x from the anode channel

surface to the actual reaction site will yield

den

OHH

ach

HH iFD

RTlpp

22

22

2minus= (459)

den

OHH

ach

OHOH iFD

RTlpp

22

22

2+= (460)

In the cathode channel the oxidant is air that mainly consists of O2 and N2 that is

122asymp+ NO xx Applying the same procedure as above the one-dimensional

Stefan-Maxwell diffusion equation for O2 can be expressed as

minus=

22

22222

NO

ONNO

ch

c

O

D

NxNx

P

RT

dx

dx (461)

124

Since nitrogen does not take part in the chemical reaction the net nitrogen molar flux

normal to the cathode surface can be set to zero

02=NN (462)

The molar flux of O2 is determined by Faradayrsquos Law

F

iN den

O42

= (463)

Equation (461) can now be rewritten as

)1(4 2

22

2

minus= O

NO

ch

c

denOx

DFP

RTi

dx

dx (464)

Similar to the analysis for the anode the effective partial pressure of oxygen at the

reaction site can be found as

( )

minusminus=

22

22

4exp

NO

ch

c

cdench

O

ch

c

ch

cODFP

lRTipPPp (465)

2Hp

2OHp and

2Op calculated from (459) (460) and (465) will be used in the

Nernst equation to find the fuel cell output voltage In the following subsection material

balance equations which will be also used to determine the fuel cell output voltage will

be developed

Material Conservation Equations The instantaneous change of the effective partial

pressures of hydrogen and water vapor in the anode gas flow channel can be determined

through the ideal gas equations as follows [422]

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

V out

H

in

H

ch

Ha

222

2 minusminus= (466a)

125

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

V out

OH

in

OH

ch

OHa

222

2 +minus= (466b)

F

iMM

dt

dp

RT

V out

O

in

O

ch

Oc

422

2 minusminus= (467)

Based on assumption (3) mass flow rate for H2 H2O and O2 at the inlet and outlet of

the flow channels can be expressed as

sdot=sdot=

sdot=sdot=

ch

a

out

H

a

out

Ha

out

H

ch

a

in

H

a

in

Ha

in

H

P

pMxMM

P

pMxMM

2

22

2

22

(468a)

sdot=sdot=

sdot=sdot=

ch

a

out

OH

a

out

OHa

out

OH

ch

a

in

OH

a

in

OHa

in

OH

P

pMxMM

P

pMxMM

2

22

2

22

(468b)

sdot=sdot=

sdot=sdot=

ch

c

out

O

c

out

Oc

out

O

ch

c

in

O

c

in

Oc

in

O

P

pMxMM

P

pMxMM

2

22

2

22

(469)

Rewriting (466) and (467) will give

iFV

RTp

PV

RTMp

PV

RTM

dt

dp

a

ch

Hch

aa

ain

Hch

aa

a

ch

H

2

2222

2 minusminus= (470a)

iFV

RTp

PV

RTMp

PV

RTM

dt

dp

a

ch

OHch

aa

ain

OHch

aa

a

ch

OH

2

2222

2 +minus= (470b)

iFV

RTp

PV

RTMp

PV

RTM

dt

dp

c

ch

Och

cc

cin

Och

cc

c

ch

O

4

2222

2 minusminus= (471)

Putting the above equations into Laplacersquos form we obtain

126

minus+

+= )(

4)0()(

)1(

1)(

222sI

FM

PPsP

ssP

a

ch

ach

Ha

in

H

a

ch

H ττ

(472a)

++

+= )(

4)0()(

)1(

1)(

222sI

FM

PPsP

ssP

a

ch

ach

OHa

in

OH

a

ch

OH ττ

(472b)

minus+

+= )(

8)0()(

)1(

1)(

222sI

FM

PPsP

ssP

ch

cch

Oc

in

O

c

ch

O ττ

(473)

where the time constant RTM

PV

a

ch

aaa

2=τ and

RTM

PV

c

ch

ccc

2=τ

The physical meaning of the time constant τa is that it will take τa seconds to fill a

tank of volume Va2 at pressure ch

aP if the mass flow rate is Ma Similar physical

meaning holds for τc

Fuel Cell Output Voltage The overall reaction in a solid oxide fuel cell is [418]

)(222 22 gOHOH =+ (474)

where subscript ldquogrdquo indicates the product H2O is in gas form The corresponding Nernst

equation used to calculate the reversible potential is [418] [420]

sdot+=

2

2

0)(

)(ln

42

22

ch

OH

ch

O

ch

H

cellcellp

pp

F

RTEE (475)

E0cell is a function of temperature and can be expressed as [418]

)298(00 minusminus= TkEE E

o

cellcell (476)

where o

cellE 0 is the standard reference potential at standard state 298 K and 1atm

pressure

Ecell calculated from (475) is actually the open-circuit voltage of the fuel cell

127

However when the fuel cell is under load its output voltage is less than Ecell due to

activation loss ohmic resistance voltage drop and concentration overpotential [418]

[431] The output voltage of a cell can therefore be written as

cellconccellohmcellactcellcell VVVEV minusminusminus= (477)

Applying assumption (7) the output voltage of the fuel cell stack can be obtained as

concohmactcellcellout VVVEVNV minusminusminus== (478)

To calculate the fuel cell output voltage the above three voltage drops will be

calculated first

1) Activation Voltage Drop Action voltage loss is caused by an activation energy

barrier that must be overcome before the chemical reaction occurs The Butler-Volmer

equation is normally used to calculate the activation voltage drop [431]

minusminusminus

=RT

zFV

RT

zFVii actact )1(expexp0 ββ (479)

where i0 = apparent exchange current (A)

β = electron transfer coefficient

i0 is the apparent exchange current which is mainly a function of temperature [438]

[439]

)exp( 210 TkTki aa minussdotsdot= (480)

where ka1 ka2 are empirical constants

Under high activation condition the first term in (479) is much higher than the

second term and the well-known Tafel equation can be obtained from (479) by

neglecting its second term [418] thus

128

=

0

lni

i

Fz

RTV cellact β

(481)

Equation (481) will yield an unreasonable value for Vact when i = 0 According to

[438] the value of β is about 05 for fuel cell applications and (479) can be written as

= minus

0

1

2

sinh2

i

i

zF

RTV cellact (482)

The equivalent activation resistance can then be defined as

== minus

0

1

2

sinh2

i

i

zFi

RT

i

VR

cellact

cellact (483)

According to (482) the activation voltage drop will be zero when load current is

zero The ohmic and concentration voltage drops (discussed in the next two sub-sections)

are also zero when the fuel cell is not loaded (i=0) However even the open-circuit

voltage of a SOFC is known to be less than the theoretical value given by (75) [417]

Similar to the computation of activation voltage of a proton exchange membrane fuel cell

[41] a constant and a temperature-dependent term can also be added to (482) for

activation voltage drop computation of SOFC as follows

cellactcellactcellactcellact VViRTV 1010 +=++= ξξ (484)

where ξ0 = constant term of activation voltage drop (V)

ξ1 = temperature coefficient of second term in activation voltage drop (VK)

TV cellact 100 ξξ += is the part of activation drop affected only by the fuel cell internal

temperature while cellactcellact iRV 1 = is both current and temperature dependent

2) Ohmic Voltage Drop The ohmic resistance of a SOFC consists mainly of the

resistance of the electrolyte electrodes and interconnection between fuel cells In this

129

model only ohmic losses of electrolyte and interconnection are included while the

resistance of electrodes is neglected The overall ohmic voltage drop can be expressed as

cellohmintercohmelecytohmcellohm iRVVV =+= (485)

cellohmR normally decrease as temperature increases it can be expressed as [438]

interc

cell

intercintercelecyt

cell

elecytelecyt

cellohmA

Tba

A

TbaR δδ

)exp()exp( += (486)

3) Concentration Voltage Drop During the reaction process concentration gradients

can be formed due to mass diffusion from the flow channels to the reaction sites (catalyst

surfaces) The effective partial pressures of hydrogen and oxygen at the reaction site are

less than those in the electrode channels while the effective partial pressure of water at

the reaction site is higher than that in the anode channel At high current densities slow

transportation of reactants (products) to (from) the reaction site is the main reason for the

concentration voltage drop [417] [418] The concentration overpotential in the fuel cell

can be obtained as

cconcaconc

OH

OH

ch

OH

ch

O

ch

H

cellconc

VV

p

pp

p

pp

F

RTV

2

2

2

2

)(

)(ln

)(

)(ln

42

22

2

22

+=

sdotminus

sdot=

(487)

minus

+=

)2()(1

)2()(1ln

2222

222

ch

HHOHdena

ch

OHHOHdena

aconcpFDiRTl

pFDiRTl

F

RTV (488)

minusminusminus=

22

2

2

4

exp)(1

ln4 NO

ch

c

cdench

O

ch

c

ch

cch

O

cconcDFp

lRTippp

pF

RTV (489)

The equivalent resistance for the concentration voltage drop can be calculated as

130

i

VR

cellconc

cellconc

= (490)

4) Double-layer charging effect In a SOFC the two electrodes are separated by the

electrolyte (Figure 416) and two boundary layers are formed eg anode-electrolyte layer

and electrolyte-cathode layer These layers can be charged by polarization effect known

as electrochemical double-layer charging effect [417] during normal fuel cell operation

The layers can store electrical energy and behave like a super-capacitor The model for

SOFC considering this effect can be described by the equivalent circuit shown in Figure

417 [417] [444]

Figure 417 Equivalent electrical circuit of the double-layer charging effect inside a

SOFC

In the above circuit Rohmcell Ractcell and Rconccell are equivalent resistances of ohmic

voltage drop activation and concentration voltage drops which can be calculated

according to (486) (483) and (490) respectively C is the equivalent capacitance of the

double-layer charging effect Since the electrodes of a SOFC are porous the value of C is

large and can be in the order of several Farads [417] The voltage across C is

))((

cellconccellact

cellC

cellC RRdt

dVCiV +minus= (491)

131

The double-layer charging effect is integrated into the modeling by using VCcell

instead of Vact1cell and Vconccell to calculate Vcell The fuel cell output voltage now turns

out to be

cellohmcellactcellCcellcell VVVEV 0 minusminusminus= (492)

Then (492) and (478) can be used to calculate the output voltage Vout of a SOFC

stack

Energy Balance of the Thermodynamics The cross section profile and heat transfer

inside a tubular SOFC are shown in Figure 418 [418] [440] One advantage of this

tubular structure is that it eliminates the seal problems between cells since the support

tube of each cell is closed at one end [418] The air is fed through a central air supply

tube (AST) and forced to flow back past the interior of the cell (cathode surface) to the

open end The fuel gas flows past the exterior of the cell (anode surface) and in parallel

direction to the air [418]

The thermal analysis for fuel reformer and combustor are not included in this model

Heat exchanges between cells are also not considered in this model by assuming that

temperature differences between adjacent cells can be neglected Heat transport inside the

fuel cell occurs mainly by means of radiation convection and mass flow

The heat generated by the chemical reaction inside the fuel cell can be written as

elecchemgen qqq ampampamp minus= (493)

The available power released due to chemical reaction is calculated by

Hnq consumedHchem ∆sdot= 2ampamp (494)

where ∆H is the enthalpy change of the chemical reaction inside the fuel cell

132

The real electrical output power is

iVq outelec sdot=amp (495)

Air Air Supply Tube

Fuel Cell

Fuel Cell

Fuel

Fuel

qgen

qconvinner

qconvann

qflowairAST

qflowairann q

rad

qfuel conv q

fuel flow

qconvouter

Figure 418 Heat transfer inside a tubular solid oxide fuel cell

The thermodynamic and energy balance analysis for different parts inside the cell are

discussed below [422] [440]

1) Cell Tube

elecchemgencellin qqqq ampampampamp minus== (496a)

fuelflowfuelconvannairflowannconvradcellout qqqqqq ampampampampampamp ++++= (496b)

dt

dTCmqqq cell

cellcellcelloutcellincellnet =minus= ampampamp (496c)

)( 44

ASTcellouterASTASTrad TTAq minus= σεamp (496d)

)( annaircellinnercellcellannconv TTAhq minus=amp (496e)

( )annairoutannairinairairmwairannairflow TTCMMq minus=amp (496f)

133

)( fuelcelloutercellcellfuelconv TTAhq minus=amp (496g)

OHflowHflowfuelflow qqq22

ampampamp += (496h)

22222 ))(( HmwH

in

fuel

out

fuel

out

H

in

HHflow MCTTMMq minus+=amp (496i)

OHmwOH

in

fuel

out

fuel

out

OH

in

OHOHflow MCTTMMq22222 ))(( minus+=amp (496j)

2) Fuel

fuelflowfuelconvfuelin qqq ampampamp += (497a)

fuelflowfuelout qq ampamp = (497b)

dt

dTCmqqq

fuel

fuelfuelfueloutfuelinfuelnet =minus= ampampamp (497c)

3) Air between Cell and Air Supply Tube (AST)

annairflowanncellconvannairin qqq ampampamp += (498a)

annairflowannairout qq ampamp = (498b)

dt

dTCmqqq

annair

airannairannairoutannairinannairnet

=minus= ampampamp (498c)

4) Air Supply Tube

outerASTconvradASTin qqq ampampamp += (499a)

ASTairflowinnerASTconvASTout qqq ampampamp += (499b)

dt

dTmCqqq AST

ASTASTASToutASTinASTnet =minus= ampampamp (499c)

)( ASTcellairouterASTouterASTouterASTconv TTAhq minus=amp (499d)

134

)( ASTairASTinnerASTinnerASTinnerASTconv TTAhq minus=amp (499e)

( )ASTairoutASTairinairairASTflowair TTCMq minus=amp (499f)

5) Air in AST

ASTairflowinnerASTconvASToutASTairin qqqq ampampampamp +== (4100a)

ASTairflowASTairout qq ampamp = (4100b)

dt

dTmCqqq

ASTair

ASTairairASTairoutASTairinASTairnet

=minus= ampampamp (4100c)

The symbols in the above equations (493-4100) are defined as

m = mass (kg)

Ci = specific heat capacity of species i [J(molmiddotK) or J(kgmiddotK)]

h = heat transfer coefficient [W(m2middotK)]

A = area (m2)

Mi = mole flow rate of species i (mols)

Mmw i = molecular weight of species i (kgmol)

ε = emissivity

σ = Stefan-Boltzmann constant 56696times10-8 Wm-2K-4

The superscripts and subscripts in the above equations are defined as

air Conditions for air

ann Annulus of cell

AST Air supply tube

cell Conditions for a single cell

135

ch Conditions at the anode or cathode channel

chem Chemical

conv Convective

conc Concentration

consumed Material consumed in chemical reaction

gen Material (energy) generated in chemical reaction

flow Flow heat exchange

Fuel Conditions for fuel

H2 Hydrogen

H2O Water

in Conditions of inputinlet

innerouter Innerouter conditions

mw Molecular weight (kgmol)

net Net values

O2 Oxygen

out Output

rad Radiation

Effective value

The thermal model of SOFC will be developed according to (493)-(4100)

Dynamic SOFC Model Implementation A dynamic model for a 5kW SOFC has

been developed in MATLABSimulink based on the electrochemical and thermodynamic

136

characteristics of the fuel cell discussed in the previous section The output voltage of the

fuel cell depends on conditions including fuel composition fuel flow oxidant flow

anode and cathode pressures cell temperature load current and the electrical and thermal

properties of the cell materials Figure 419 shows the block diagram based on which the

model has been developed In this figure the input quantities are anode and cathode

pressures (Pa and Pc) H2 flow rate (MH2) H2O flow rate (MH2O) air flow rate (Mair)

and initial temperature of the fuel cell and air (Tfuelinlet and Tairinlet) At any given load

current and time the cell temperature Tcell is determined and both the load current and

temperature are fed back to different blocks which take part in the calculation of the fuel

cell output voltage

In this block diagram material conservation equations (466)-(473) are used to

calculate the partial pressures of H2 H2O and O2 in flow channels Then the Nernst

equation (475) is employed to determine the internal potential (E) of the fuel cell

Diffusion equations (454)-(465) and the material conservation equations will give the

concentration loss of the cell The ohmic voltage drop is determined by (485) and

activation voltage is computed from (484) Eventually the terminal (output) voltage of

the fuel cell is determined by (478) and (492) and the double-layer charging effect

(491) The thermal model is developed via energy balance equations (493)-(4100)

137

Model Responses under Constant Fuel Flow Operation

Both the steady-state and dynamic responses of the SOFC model under constant flow

operating mode are given in this section The thermodynamic response of the model and

the impact of the operating temperature are also given The dynamic responses of the

model are investigated in different time scales

ch

gasP

gasP

Figure 419 Diagram of building a dynamic model of SOFC in SIMULINK

Steady-State Characteristics The steady-state terminal voltage vs current (V-I)

curves of the SOFC model at different temperatures are shown in Figure 420 These

curves are similar to the real test data reported in [418] [442] The activation voltage

drop dominates the voltage drop in the low-current region As load current increases the

ohmic voltage drop increases fast and becomes the main contribution to the SOFC

voltage drop When the load current exceeds a certain value (140A for this SOFC model)

the fuel cell output voltage will drop sharply due to large ohmic and concentration

voltage drops inside SOFC The variations of the above three voltage drops vs load

138

current at three different temperatures are shown in Figure 421

Figure 420 shows the effect of temperature on the SOFC V-I characteristic curve

The SOFC output voltage is higher at lower temperature in the low current zone while the

voltage is higher at higher temperature in the high current region These simulation

results showing the effect of temperature on SOFC performance are also similar to the

test data given in [418] and [442] The negative temperature coefficient of the

open-circuit internal potential E0cell defined by (476) and the temperature-dependent

activation voltage drop and ohmic voltage drop (shown in Figure 421) are the main

reasons for this kind of temperature dependent performance of the SOFC model As

shown in Figure 421 both the activation and ohmic voltage drops decrease as the fuel

cell temperature increases

0 50 100 1500

20

40

60

80

100

120

Load current (A)

SOFC output voltage (V)

1073K

1173K

1273K

Figure 420 V-I characteristics of the SOFC model at different temperatures

The corresponding output power vs current (P-I) curves of the model at different

139

temperatures are shown in Figure 422 At higher load currents (I gt 40 A) higher output

power can be achieved at higher operating temperatures Under each operating

temperature there is a critical load current point (Icrit) where the model output power

reaches its maximum value For example Icrit is 95 A at 1073 K 110 A at 1173 K and

120 A at 1273 K Beyond these points an increase in the load current will reduce the

output power due to large ohmic and concentration voltage drops

0 50 100 1500

10

20

30

40

50

Load current (A)

Voltage drops (V)

Figure 421 Three voltage drops at different temperatures

140

0 50 100 1500

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Load current (A)

SOFC output power (kW)

Pa = 3atm Pc = 3atm Fuel 90H

2+10H

2O

Constant Flow (0096mols) Oxidant Air(6 Stoichs O

2)

1073K

1173K

1273K

Figure 422 P-I characteristics of the SOFC model at different temperatures

Dynamic Response The dynamic response of the SOFC model is mainly dominated

by the double-layer charging effect the time constants τa and τc [defined in (472) and

(473)] and the thermodynamic property of the fuel cell Although the capacitance (C) of

the double-layer charging effect is large (in the order of several Farads) the time constant

τdlc=(Ractcell+Rconccell)C is normally small (in the order of around 10-2 s) because

(Ractcell+Rconccell) is small (less than 20 mΩ for a single cell used in this study) when the

fuel cell works in the linear zone Therefore capacitor C will only affect the model

dynamic response in small time scale ie 10-3-10

-1 s The operating conditions of the

SOFC model for this simulation study are listed in Table 44 Figure 423 shows the

model dynamic responses in this small time scale under step current changes The load

current steps up from 0 A to 80 A at 01s and then steps down to 30 A at 02 s The lower

part of the figure shows the corresponding SOFC output voltage responses with different

141

capacitance values for the double-layer charging effect When the load current steps up

(down) the fuel cell output voltage drops down (rises up) immediately due to the ohmic

voltage drop Then the voltage drops (rises) ldquosmoothlyrdquo to its final value It is noted that

the larger is the capacitance C the slower the output voltage reaches its final value

because the larger is the effective time constant τdlc

0 005 01 015 02 025 030

50

100

Load current (A)

0 005 01 015 02 025 0360

70

80

90

100

110

Time (s)

SOFC output voltage (V)

C=4F

C=15F

C=04F

Fuel 90 H2 + 10 H

2O

Constant flow 0096 molsOxidant Air (6 Stoichs O

2)

Figure 423 Model dynamic responses with different equivalent capacitance values for

double-layer charging effect in small time scale

TABLE 44 OPERATING CONDITIONS FOR THE MODEL DYNAMIC RESPONSE STUDIES

Temperature (K) 1173

Anode input pressure (atm) 3

Cathode input pressure (atm) 3

Anode H2 flow rate (mols) 00864

Anode H2O flow rate (mols) 00096

Oxidant Air (6 stoichs O2)

142

Time constants τa and τc are in the order of 10-1-10

0 s for the model parameters used

in this dissertation They mainly affect the model dynamic responses in the time scale

10-1 to 10

1 s Figure 424 shows the model dynamic responses in this medium time scale

under the same type of step current changes as shown in Figure 423 The load current

steps up from 0 A to 80 A at 1s and then steps down to 30 A at 11s The operating

conditions of the model are the same as given in Table 44 except for the operating

pressures Figure 424 shows the SOFC output voltage responses under different

operating pressures (Pa = Pc = P) Higher operating pressure gives higher output voltage

and also increases time constants τa and τc [see (472) and (473)] shown in the figure

0 5 10 15 200

50

100

Load current (A)

0 5 10 15 2060

70

80

90

100

110

Time (s)

SOFC output voltage (V)

P=1atm

P=3atmP=9atm

Fuel 90 H2 + 10 H

2O

Constant flow 0096 molsOxidant Air (6 Stoichs O

2)

Figure 424 Model dynamic responses under different operating pressures in medium

time scale

The equivalent thermodynamic time constant of a SOFC can be in the order of tens of

minutes [440] [443] Thus for large time scale (102-10

3 s) the thermodynamic

characteristic will dominate the model dynamic responses Figure 425 shows the

143

transient response of the SOFC model under load changes The model was subjected to a

step change in the load current from zero to 100 A at 10 min and then the current drops

back to 30 A at 120 min The operating conditions are also the same as given in Table 44

except for the varying fuel cell operating temperatures The fuel and air inlet

temperatures are given in the figure When the load current steps up the SOFC output

voltage drops sharply and then rises to its final value When the load current steps down

the output voltage jumps up and then drops slowly towards its final value as shown in

Figure 425

0 50 100 150 200 2500

50

100

Load current (A)

0 50 100 150 200 25020

40

60

80

100

120

SOFC output voltage (V)

Time (Minute)

Figure 425 Model dynamic responses under different inlet temperatures in large time

scale

The corresponding temperature responses of the SOFC model are shown in Figure

426 From this figure the equivalent overall thermodynamic time constant of the model

is around 15 minutes

144

0 50 100 150 200 250950

1000

1050

1100

1150

1200

1250

1300

Time (Minute)

SOFC temperature (K)

Tinlet = 1073K

Tinlet = 1173K

Tinlet = 973K

Figure 426 Model temperature responses

Constant Fuel Utilization Operation

In the previous sections only constant flow operation for the SOFC model was

discussed The fuel cell can also be operated in constant fuel utilization mode in which

the utilization factor will be kept constant The utilization factor is defined as [418]

inHinH

consumedH

M

Fi

M

Mu

22

2 2== (4101)

The direct way to achieve constant utilization operation is to feed back the load

current with a proportional gain )2(1 uF times as shown in Figure 427 to control fuel flow

to the fuel processor As a result the input H2 will change as load varies to keep the fuel

utilization constant As shown in Figure 427 the fuel processor is modeled by a simple

delay transfer function )1(1 +sfτ τf is set to 5s in this dissertation

145

)(1 sf +τ

)2(1 uF times

Figure 427 Constant utilization control

In this section the fuel cellrsquos steady state characteristics and dynamic responses under

constant fuel utilization mode will be discussed The results will also be compared with

those obtained under constant flow operating mode The utilization factor is set for 085

(85 fuel utilization) for this study and other operating conditions are the same as listed

in Table 44 except the fuel and water flow rates that will change as the load current

changes

Steady-state Characteristics Figure 428 shows a comparison between the V-I

characteristic of the SOFC model with constant fuel utilization and constant fuel flow

operating modes The operating conditions for the constant flow operating mode are

listed in Table 44 For this specific study the output voltage under constant flow

operating mode is higher than that under constant utilization mode at the same load

current The voltage difference between the two operating modes keeps getting smaller as

the load current increases The reason for this is that the utilization factor of the constant

flow operation will be getting closer to the utilization factor (085) of the constant

utilization operation as load current increases The corresponding P-I curves also given

in Figure 428 show that the SOFC can provide more power under constant flow

146

operation

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 1600

20

40

60

80

100

120SOFC output voltage (V)

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 1600

1

2

3

4

5

6

Load current (A)

SOFC output power (kW)

Constant Flow

Constant Utilization

Pa = 3atm Pc = 3atmFuel 90H

2+10H

2O

T = 1173K

Figure 428 V-I and P-I characteristics of the SOFC model under constant fuel utilization

and constant fuel flow operating modes

Figure 429 shows the curves of input fuel versus load current for both operation

modes It shows that the constant flow operation mode requires more fuel input

especially at light loading But the unused H2 is not just wasted it can be used for other

purposes [440] or recycled to use again

147

20 40 60 80 100 120 1400

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

Load current (A)

Input H2 flow rate (mols)

Constant Flow

Constant Utilization

Figure 429 H2 input for the constant utilization and constant flow operating modes

Dynamic Responses Dynamic response of the SOFC model in small time scale is

dominated by the double-layer charging effect and in large time scale is mainly

determined by the thermodynamic properties of the fuel cell Both the double-layer

charging effect and the thermodynamic characteristics of the fuel cell are determined by

the fuel cellrsquos physical and electrochemical properties These properties are normally not

affected by whether the SOFC is operating under constant fuel flow mode or constant

fuel utilization mode However the dynamic response in medium time scale will be

affected by the operating mode since the fuel flow rate will change as load varies under

constant utilization operating mode This load-dependent fuel flow rate will give a

load-dependent time constant τa as well Therefore only the dynamic response in this

time scale will be discussed for the constant utilization operating mode

148

Figure 430 shows the model dynamic responses in the medium time scale under

similar step current changes used in the constant fuel flow operating mode The load

current steps up from 0 A to 80 A at 1s and then steps down to 30 A at 31 s The lower

part of Figure 430 shows the corresponding SOFC output voltage responses under

different operating pressures Similar to what is shown in Figure 424 for constant fuel

flow operating mode a higher operating pressure results in a higher output voltage and

larger time constants τa and τc [see (472) and (473)] In this case the dynamic responses

are not determined only by τa and τc but also by the dynamics of the fuel processor The

output voltage curves (Figure 430) show the typical characteristic of a second order

system while the dynamic responses in medium time scale for the constant flow operating

mode (Figure 424) exhibit the characteristic of a first order system Figure 230 shows

that the SOFC output voltage drops as the load current steps up undershoots and then

rises back to its final value While the load current steps down the voltage rises up

overshoots and then drops back to its final value We note that the fuel cell fails to start

up at 1 atm operating pressure due to the delay in the fuel processor which causes

insufficient fuel supply

The selection of a SOFC operating mode depends on the actual desired performance

requirements and is beyond the scope of this dissertation Only the constant fuel flow

operating mode will be studied in the following chapters

149

0 10 20 30 40 50 600

50

100

Load current (A)

0 10 20 30 40 50 6020

40

60

80

100

120

Time (s)

SOFC output voltage (V)

1atm

3atm

9atm

Fuel 90 H2 + 10 H

2O

T = 1173 KConstant utilizationOxidant Air (6 Stoichs O

2)

Starting failure at 1atm

Figure 430 Model dynamic responses under different operating pressures in medium

time scale with constant utilization operating mode

150

Wind Energy Conversion System

Introduction

Among the renewable energy technologies for electricity production wind energy

technology is the most mature and promising one The use of wind energy conversion

systems (WECS) is increasing world-wide (see Chapter 1) Moreover the economic

aspects of wind energy technology are promising enough to justify their use in stand

alone applications as well as grid connected operations

As wind velocity in an area changes continuously the energy available from it varies

continuously This necessitates a need for dynamic models of all systems involved which

are responsive to the changes in the wind to have a better understanding of the overall

system

Induction machines (usually squirrel cage rotor type) are often used for wind power

generation because of their ruggedness and low cost [445] However they are used

mostly in grid-connected operation because of their excitation requirement Induction

machines can be used in stand-alone applications provided that enough reactive

excitation is provided to them for self-excitation [446] [447] Induction generators can

cope with a small increase in the speed from rated value because due to saturation the

rate of increase of generated voltage is not linear with speed Furthermore self excited

induction generator (SEIG) has a self-protection mechanism because its output voltage

collapses when overloaded [448]-[451]

In this section modeling of variable speed wind energy conversion systems is

discussed A description of the proposed wind energy conversion system is presented and

151

dynamic models for both the SEIG and wind turbine are developed In addition the

effects of saturation characteristic on the SEIG are presented The developed models are

simulated in MATLABSimulink [457] Different wind and load conditions are applied

to the WECS model for validation purposes

System Configuration The configuration of the WECS system (Figure 431)

studied in this dissertation is similar to the system shown in Figure 25 (c) A SEIG

driven by a pitch controlled variable speed wind turbine acting as the prime mover is

used to generate electricity The output AC voltage (with variable frequency) of the SEIG

is rectified into DC and then a DCAC inverter is used to convert the DC into 60 Hz AC

For stand-alone operation an excitation compensating capacitor bank is necessary to start

the induction generator For grid-connected application the compensating capacitor bank

can be eliminated from the system However for a weak-grid the reactive power

consumed by the induction generator will deteriorate the situation It is better to have a

generation system with self starting capability Therefore for the wind energy system

studied in this dissertation an excitation capacitor bank is always added regardless of the

system being stand-alone or grid-connected

In this section only the modeling of the components inside the rectangle in Figure 4

31 is discussed The design and modeling of power electronic circuits are discussed later

in this chapter It is noted from the figure that there are two main components inside the

rectangle the wind turbine together with the gear box and the SEIG

152

Figure 431 System block diagram of the WECS

Dynamic Model for Variable Speed Wind Turbine

The following sections explain the modeling and the control principles of the variable

speed pitch controlled wind turbine

Wind Turbine Characteristics The power Pwind (in watts) extracted from the wind is

given in equation 251 It is rewritten here as

)(2

1 3 θλρ pwind CAvP = (4102)

where ρ is the air density in kgm3 A is the area swept by the rotor blades in m

2 v is

the wind velocity in ms Cp is called the power coefficient or the rotor efficiency and is

function of tip speed ratio (TSR or λ see equation 252) and pitch angle (θ) [464]

The maximum rotor efficiency Cp is achieved at a particular TSR which is specific to

the aerodynamic design of a given turbine The rotor must turn at high speed at high

wind and at low speed at low wind to keep TSR constant at the optimum level at all

153

times For operation over a wide range of wind speeds wind turbines with high tip speed

ratios are preferred [453]

In the case of the variable speed pitch-regulated wind turbines considered in this

dissertation the pitch angle controller plays an important role Groups of λCpminus curves

with pitch angle as the parameter obtained by measurement or by computation can be

represented as a nonlinear function [455] [456] [466] The following function is used

( ) )exp( 54321 CCCCCC p minusminusminus= θ (4103)

where θ is the pitch angle

Proper adjustment of the coefficients C1-C5 would result in a close simulation of a

specific turbine under consideration The values for C1-C5 used in this study are listed in

Table 45 The Cp-λ characteristic curves at different pitch angles are plotted in Figure

432 From the set of curves in Figure 432 we can observe that when pitch angle is equal

to 2 degrees the tip speed ratio has a wide range and a maximum Cp value of 035

suitable for wind turbines designed to operate over a wide range of wind speeds With an

increase in the pitch angle the range of TSR and the maximum value of power coefficient

decrease considerably

TABLE 45 PARAMETER VALUES FOR C1-C5

C1 05

C2 116kθ

C3 04

C4 5

C5 21kθ

154

kθ in Table 45 used to calculate C2 and C5 is determined by λ and θ as [455] [456]

[466]

1

3 1

0350

080

1minus

+

minus+

=θθλθk (4104)

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 200

005

01

015

02

025

03

035

04

045

05

TSR λ

Cp

0 deg

1 deg

2 deg

3 deg

4 deg5 deg

10 deg

15 deg

20 deg

30 deg

Figure 432 Cp-λ characteristics at different pitch angles (θ)

For variable speed pitch-regulated wind turbines two variables have direct effect on

their operation namely rotor speed and blade pitch angle [452]-[454] Power

optimization strategy is employed when wind speed is below the turbine rated wind

speed to optimize the energy capture by maintaining the optimum TSR Power limitation

strategy is used above the rated wind speed of the turbine to limit the output power to the

rated power This is achieved by employing a pitch angle controller which changes the

blade pitch to reduce the aerodynamic efficiency thereby reducing the wind turbine

power to acceptable levels as discussed in Chapter 2 The different regions of the

155

above-mentioned control strategies of a variable speed wind turbine system are as shown

in the Figure 433

Figure 433 Variable speed pitch controlled wind turbine operation regions

Pitch Angle Controller The pitch angle controller used in this study employs PI

controllers as shown in Figure 434 [452] [456] [466] These controllers control the

wind flow around the wind turbine blade thereby controlling the toque exerted on the

turbine shaft If the wind speed is less than the rated wind speed the pitch angle is kept

constant at an optimum value If the wind speed exceeds the rated wind speed the

controller calculates the power error (between the reference power and the output power

of the wind turbine) and the frequency error (between the measured stator electrical

frequency of the SEIG and the rated frequency) The output of the controllers gives the

required pitch angle (Figure 434) In this figure the Pitch Angle Rate Limiter block

limits the rate of change of pitch angle as most modern wind turbines consist of huge

rotor blades The maximum rate of change of the pitch angle is usually in the order of 3o

to 10osecond

156

Figure 434 Pitch angle controller

turbineω

λminuspC

genω

ratedω

Figure 435 Simulation model of the variable speed pitch-regulated wind turbine

157

Variable-speed Wind Turbine Model The dynamic model of the variable speed

wind turbine are developed in MATLABSimulink Figure 435 shows the block diagram

of the wind turbine model

The inputs for the wind turbine model are wind speed air density radius of the wind

turbine mechanical speed of the rotor referred to the wind turbine side and power

reference for the pitch angle controller The output is the drive torque Tdrive which drives

the electrical generator The wind turbine calculates the tip speed ratio from the input

values and estimates the value of the power coefficient from the performance curves The

pitch angle controller maintains the value of the blade pitch at optimum value until the

power output of the wind turbine exceeds the reference power input

Dynamic Model for SEIG

There are two fundamental circuit models employed for examining the characteristics

of a SEIG One is the per-phase equivalent circuit which includes the loop-impedance

method adapted by Murthy et al [459] and Malik and Al-Bahrani [460] and the nodal

admittance method proposed by Ouazene and Mcpherson [449] and Chan [461] These

methods are suitable for studying the machinersquos steady-state characteristics Another

method is the dq-axis model based on the generalized machine theory proposed by Elder

et al [448] and Grantham et al [450] and is employed to analyze both the machinersquos

transient as well as steady-state

Steady-state Model Steady-state analysis of induction generators is of interest both

from the design and operational points of view By knowing the parameters of the

158

machine it is possible to determine its performance at a given speed capacitance and

load conditions

Loop impedance and nodal admittance methods used for the analysis of SEIG are

both based on per-phase steady-state equivalent circuit of the induction machine (Figure

436) modified for the self-excitation case They make use of the principle of

conservation of active and reactive powers by writing proper loop equations [459]

[460] [465] or nodal equations [449] [461] for the equivalent circuit These methods

are very effective in calculating the minimum value of capacitance needed for

guaranteeing self-excitation of the induction generator For stable operation excitation

capacitance must be slightly higher than the minimum value Also there is a speed

threshold the cutoff speed of the machine below which no excitation is possible In the

following paragraph a brief description of the loop impedance method is given for better

understanding

The per-unit (pu) per-phase steady-state circuit of a self-excited induction generator

under lagging (RL) load is shown in Figure 436 [459] [449] In the analysis of SEIG

the following assumptions were made [459]

1 Only the magnetizing reactance Xm is assumed to be affected by magnetic

saturation and all other parameters of the equivalent circuit are assumed to be constant

Self-excitation results in the saturation of the main flux and the value of Xm reflects the

magnitude of the main flux Leakage flux passes mainly in the air and thus these fluxes

are not affected to any large extent by saturation of the main flux

159

2 Per unit values of the stator and rotor leakage reactance (referred to stator side)

are assumed to be equal (Xls = Xlr = Xl) This assumption is normally valid in induction

machine analysis

3 Core loss in the machine is neglected

Figure 436 Equivalent T circuit of self-excited induction generator with R-L Load

In the figure the symbols are

Rs Rr R pu per-phase stator rotor (referred to stator) and load resistance

respectively

Xl X Xm pu per-phase statorrotor leakage load and magnetizing reactances (at

base frequency) respectively

Xc pu per-phase capacitive reactance (at base frequency) of the terminal excitation

capacitor

f v pu frequency and speed respectively

Vg V0 pu per-phase air gap and output voltages respectively

For the circuit shown in Figure 436 the loop equation for the current can be written

as

160

I Z = 0 (4105)

where Z is the net loop impedance given by

+

minus+++

+

minus= jX

f

R

f

jXjX

f

RjXjX

vf

RZ c

l

s

ml

r

2 (4106)

For equation (4105) to hold true for any current I the loop impedance (Z) should be

zero This implies that both the real and imaginary parts of Z are zero These two

equations can be solved simultaneously for any two unknowns such as f and Xc

Self-excitation Process The process of self-excitation in induction machines has

been known for several decades [446] [447] When capacitors are connected across the

stator terminals of an induction machine driven by an external prime mover voltage will

be induced at its terminals The induced electromotive force (EMF) and current in the

stator windings will continue to rise until the steady state condition influenced by the

magnetic saturation of the machine is reached At this operating point the voltage will be

stabilized at a given value and frequency In order for self-excitation to occur for a

particular capacitance value there is a corresponding minimum speed [447] [458]

Therefore in stand-alone mode of operation it is necessary for the induction generator to

be operated in the saturation region This guarantees one and only one intersection

between the magnetization curve and the capacitor reactance line as well as output

voltage stability under load as seen in Figure 437 [445] [455]

Under no load the capacitor current cgc XVI = must be equal to the magnetizing

current mgm XVI = when the stator impedance (Rs + jXl) is neglected and the rotor

circuit can be considered as open circuit as shown in Figure 437 The stator phase

161

voltage Vg (Vg = V0 in this case) is a function of magnetizing current Im linearly rising

until the saturation point of the magnetic core is reached With the value of self exciting

capacitance equal to C the output frequency of the self-excited generator is

)π(21 mCXf =

ω

minus

C

1tan 1

Figure 437 Determination of stable operation of SEIG

Dynamic Model of SEIG in dq Representations The process of self-excitation is a

transient phenomenon and is better understood if analyzed using a transient model To

arrive at a transient model of an induction generator an abc-dq0 transformation is used

The dq axis model based on the generalized machine theory proposed by Elder

[448] Salama [458] and Grantham [450] is employed to analyze the machinersquos

transient state as well as steady state To arrive at a transient model of an induction

generator abc-dq0 transformation [462] has been used in this analysis

Figure 438 shows the dq axis equivalent circuit of a self excited induction generator

shown in Figure 436 in stationary reference frame [451] [458] [462]

162

drrλω

+

qsVmL

sr lrL + minus

qrrλωminus

+

minus

dsV mL

srlsL lrL

+ minus

minus

rr

rr

lsL

cqVLZ

cdVLZdsλ

drλ

qrλqsλ

+

minus

minus

+

Figure 438 dq representation of a SEIG (All values are referred to stator)

In the figure rω is the electrical angular velocity of the rotor s(r) subscript denotes

parameters and variables associated with stator (rotor) respectively Vcq (Vqs) and Vcd

(Vds) are q and d axis voltages respectively and iqs (ids) is the q (d) axis component of

stator current Iqr (idr) is the q (d) axis component of rotor current Lls Llr and Lm are stator

leakage rotor leakage and magnetizing inductances of the stator qsλ and dsλ are q and

d axis components of stator flux linkages qrλ and drλ are q and d axis components of

rotor flux linkages

From Figure 438 the equation for no-load operation of SEIG can be written as

shown below

163

+

+

minus+minus

++

++

=

d

q

cdo

cqo

dr

qr

ds

qs

rrrrmmr

rrrrmrm

mss

mss

K

K

V

V

i

i

i

i

pLrLωpLLω

LωpLrLωpL

pL0pC1pLr0

0pL0pC1pLr

0

0

0

0

(4107)

where p = ddt Kd (Kq) is a constant representing initial induced voltage along the d (q)

axis due to the remaining magnetic flux in the core Vcqo and Vcdo are initial q and d

component voltages across the capacitor and Ls=Lls+Lm Lr=Llr+Lm

Equation (4107) can be modified to obtain four first order differential equations as

BAIpI += (4108)

The mechanical system is described by

generdrive TpωP

2JT minus+

= (4109)

where

minusminusminus

minus

minus

minusminusminus

=

rsrrssmmrs

rrsrsmrssm

rmrrmssr

2

m

rrmrmr

2

msr

rLLωLrLLωL

LωLrLLωLrL

rLLωLrLωL

LωLrLωLrL

L

1A

minus

minus

minus

minus

=

dscdm

qscqm

cdrdm

cqrqm

KLVL

KLVL

VLKL

VLKL

L

1B

=

dr

qr

ds

qs

i

i

i

i

I 2

mrs LLLL minus= 0

0

1cq

t

qscq VdtiC

V += int and 0

0

1cd

t

dscd VdtiC

V += int

J - Inertia of the rotor in (Kgm2)

Tdrive ndash wind turbine torque in (Nm)

Te_gen ndash electromagnetic torque by the generator in (Nm)

P ndash number of poles

164

The simulation of the SEIG can be carried out by solving (4108) Since the

magnetization inductance Lm is nonlinear in nature an internal iteration has to be done at

each integration step Given the initial condition from the previous step the

magnetization current can be calculated as shown below [450]

22 )()( qrqsdrdsm iiiiI +++= (4110)

The variation of magnetizing inductance as a function of magnetizing current used in

this study is given by

Lm = 05times[0025+02974timesexp(-004878timesIm)] (4111)

Any combination of R L and C can be added in parallel with the self-excitation

capacitance to act as load For example if resistance R is added in parallel with the

self-excitation capacitance then the term 1pC in the matrix (see 4107) becomes

R(1+RpC) The load can be connected across the capacitors once the voltage reaches a

steady-state value [450] [451] If there is an inductive load connected across the

excitation capacitor it influences the effective value of excitation capacitance such that it

results in an increase in the slope of the straight line of the capacitive reactance (Figure

437) reducing the terminal voltage This phenomenon is more pronounced when the

load inductance gets higher in value A capacitor for individual compensation can be

connected across the terminal of the load in such a way that it follows the load

conditions [463]

Ratings of the induction machine simulated are given in Table 32 (Chapter 3) The

detailed parameters used in modeling the SEIG are given in Table 46 The parameters

are obtained from [462] based on the same pu values of a 500 hp 2300 V induction

165

machine

TABLE 46 SEIG MODEL PARAMETERS

rs 0164 Ω

rr 0117 Ω

Xls 0754 Ω

Xlr 0754 Ω

Lm See (4111)

J 1106 kgm2

C 240 microF

P (Number of poles) 4

All reactances are based on 60 Hz

Responses of the Model for the Variable Speed WECS

The model of a 50 kW variable speed wind energy conversion system consisting of a

pitch-regulated wind turbine and self excited induction generator is developed in

MATLABSimulink environment using SimPowersystems block-set In this sub-section

the model responses under different scenarios are discussed

Wind Turbine Output Power Characteristic Figure 439 shows the wind turbine

output power of the simulated model for different wind velocities It can be observed that

the output power is kept constant at higher wind velocities even though the wind turbine

has the potential to produce more power This is done to protect the electrical system and

to prevent the over speeding of the rotor

166

0 5 10 15 20 250

10

20

30

40

50

Wind Speed (ms)

Output Power (kW)

Figure 439 Wind turbine output power characteristic

Process of Self-excitation in SEIG The process of self-excitation can occur only if

there is some residual magnetism For numerical method of integration residual

magnetism cannot be zero at the beginning of the simulation Therefore non-zero initial

values are set for Kq [andor Kd see equation (4107)] and the rotor speed

The process of voltage build up continues starting with the help of the residual

magnetism until the iron circuit saturates and therefore the voltage stabilizes In other

terms the effect of this saturation is to modify the magnetization inductance Lm such that

it reaches a saturated value the transient then neither increases nor decreases and

becomes a steady state quantity giving continuous self-excitation The energy for the

above process is provided by the kinetic energy of the wind turbine rotor [450] Figure

440 shows the process of a successful self excitation in an induction machine under no

load condition with wind speed at 10ms The value of the excitation capacitor is given in

the figure An unsuccessful self excitation process under the same condition (except a

167

smaller capacitor bank) is shown in Figure 441

0 05 1 15 2 25 3-600

-400

-200

0

200

400

600

Time (s)

Terminal Voltage (V)

C = 240 microF

Figure 440 A successful self excitation process

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

Time (s)

Terminal Voltage (V)

C = 10 microF

Figure 441 Voltage fails to build up

168

Figures 442 and 443 show the variations in magnetizing current and magnetizing

inductance vs time for successful voltage build up of the SEIG From Figures 440 442

and 443 it can be observed that the phase voltage slowly starts building up and reaches a

steady state value as the magnetization current starts from zero and reaches a steady state

value Also we see that the self excitation follows the process of magnetic saturation of

the core and the stable output value is reached only when the machine core is saturated

0 05 1 15 2 25 30

10

20

30

40

50

Time (s)

Magnetizing Current Im (A)

Figure 442 Variation of magnetizing current Im

0 05 1 15 2 25 30

005

01

015

02

Time (s)

Magnetizing Inductance Lm (H)

Figure 443 Variation of magnetizing inductance Lm

169

Model Responses under Wind Speed Changes In this section the responses of the

model for the variable speed WECS to wind speed variations are given and discussed

The wind speed changes are shown in Figure 444 The wind speed used in simulation

steps up from 10 ms to 16 ms at t = 30 s and changes from 16 ms to 8 ms at 60 s

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

Time (s)

Wind Speed (ms)

Figure 444 Wind speed variations used for simulation study

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 800

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Wind Power (kW)

Wind speed 10 ms

Wind speed 16 ms

Wind speed 8 ms

Figure 445 Output power of the WECS model under wind speed changes

170

Figure 445 shows the output power of the WECS The WECS starts to supply power

at 3 s It is noted from the figure that the output power is 162 kW at 10 ms wind speed

50 kW at 16 ms and 486 kW at 8 ms respectively This matches the system output

power characteristic shown in Figure 439

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 801200

1400

1600

1800

2000

2200

2400

2600

Time (s)

Rotor Speed (rpm)

Wind speed 10 ms

Wind speed 16 ms

Wind speed 8 ms

Figure 446 Wind turbine rotor speed

Figure 446 shows the wind turbine rotor speed under the wind speed changes The

rotor speed is a slightly under 1800 rpm (rated speed) when there is no load When the

load is connected at 3 s the speed drops to about 1430 rpm When the wind speed is

increased to 16 ms at 30 s there is a fast increase in rotor speed as shown in Figure

446 Then the pitch controller starts operating to bring the rotor speed down to 1890 rpm

which is the upper limit (+5) of the frequency regulation band in the pitch controller

(see Figure 434) The rotor speed drops to 1257 rpm as the wind speed drops to 8 ms at

60 s

171

Figure 447 shows how the pitch angle changes during the wind speed variation Note

that the pitch angle keeps at the optimum value (2˚ in this study) when the wind speed is

below the nominal value (14 ms) When the wind speed exceeds 14 ms (at 30 s) the

pitch controller begins to work and increases the pitch angle to about 615˚ to keep the

output power constant (at 50 kW) The corresponding Cp is shown in Figure 448

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 802

3

4

5

6

7

Time (s)

Pitch Angle (Degree)

Figure 447 Pitch angle controller response to the wind changes

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 800

01

02

03

04

Time (s)

Cp

Figure 448 Variation of power coefficient Cp

172

Solar Energy Conversion System

The principle of operation of a PV cell is discussed in Chapter 2 In this section

model development of a PV module is given in details The PV model developed for this

study is based on the research work reported in [467]-[470]

Modeling for PV CellModule

The most commonly used model for a PV cell is the one-diode equivalent circuit as

shown in Figure 449 [467]-[470] Since the shunt resistance Rsh is large it normally can

be neglected The five parameters model shown in Figure 449 (a) can therefore be

simplified into that shown in Figure 449 (b) This simplified equivalent circuit model is

used in this study

Figure 449 One-diode equivalent circuit model for a PV cell (a) Five parameters

model (b) Simplified four parameters model

The relationship between the output voltage V and the load current I can be expressed

as

minus

+minus=minus= 1exp0 α

s

LDL

IRUIIIII (4112)

173

where IL = light current (A)

I0 = saturation current (A)

I = load current (A)

U = output voltage (V)

Rs = series resistance (Ω)

α = thermal voltage timing completion factor (V)

There are four parameters (IL I0 Rs and α) that need to be determined before the I-U

relationship can be obtained That is why the model is called a four-parameter model

Both the equivalent circuit shown in Figure 449 (b) and the equation (4112) look simple

However the actual model is more complicated than it looks because the above four

parameters are functions of temperature load current andor solar irradiance In the

remainder of this section procedures are given for determining the four parameters

Light Current IL According to [468] and [469] IL can be calculated as

( )[ ]refccSCIrefL

ref

L TTIΦ

ΦI minus+= micro (4113)

where Φ = irradiance (Wm2)

Φref = reference irradiance (1000 Wm2 is used in this study)

ILref = light current at the reference condition (1000Wm2 and 25 ˚C)

Tc = PV cell temperature (˚C)

Tcref = reference temperature (25 ˚C is used in this study)

microISC = temperature coefficient of the short-circuit current (A˚C)

Both ILref and microISC can be obtained from manufacturer data sheet [469]

174

Saturation Current I0 The saturation current can be expressed in terms of its value

at the reference condition as [468]-[469]

+

+minus

+

+=

273

2731exp

273

273

3

00

c

refc

ref

sgap

c

refc

refT

T

q

Ne

T

TII

α (4114)

where I0ref = saturation current at the reference condition (A)

egap = band gap of the material (117 eV for Si materials)

Ns = number of cells in series of a PV module

q = charge of an electron (160217733times10-19 C)

αref = the value of α at the reference condition

I0ref can be calculated as

minus=

ref

refoc

refLref

UII

α

0 exp (4115)

where Uocref = the open circuit voltage of the PV module at reference condition (V)

The value of Uocref is provided by manufacturers The value calculation for α is

discussed in the next section

Calculation of α According to [469] the value of αref can be calculated as

minus+

minus

minus=

refsc

refmp

refmprefsc

refsc

refocrefmp

ref

I

I

II

I

UU

1ln

2α (4116)

where Umpref = maximum power point voltage at the reference condition (V)

Impref = maximum power point current at the reference condition (A)

Iscref = short circuit current at the reference condition (A)

175

α is a function of temperature which as expressed as

ref

refc

c

T

Tαα

273

273

+

+= (4117)

Series Resistance Rs Some manufacturers provide the value of Rs If not provided

the following equation can be used to estimate its value [469]

refmp

refmprefoc

refsc

refmp

ref

sI

UUI

I

R

1ln minus+

minus

=

α

(4118)

Rs is taken as a constant in the model of this study

Thermal Model of PV From equations (4113) to (4118) it can be noted that the

temperature plays an important role in the PV performance Therefore it is necessary to

have a thermal model for a PV cellmodule In this study a lumped thermal model is

developed for the PV module based on [468] The temperature of the PV module varies

with surrounding temperature irradiance and its output current and voltage and can be

written as

( )aclossPVin

c

PV TTkA

IUΦk

dt

dTC minusminus

timesminus= (4119)

where CPV = the overall heat capacity per unit area of the PV cellmodule [J(˚Cmiddotm2)]

kinPV = transmittance-absorption product of PV cells

kloss = overall heat loss coefficient [W(˚Cmiddotm2)]

Ta = ambient temperature (˚C)

A = effective area of the PV cellmodule (m2)

176

PV Model Development in MATLABSimulink

Based on the mathematical equations discussed before a dynamic model for a PV

module consisting of 153 cells in series has been developed using MATLABSimulink

Figure 450 shows the block diagram of the PV model The input quantities (solar

irradiance Φ and the ambient temperature Ta) together with manufacturer data are used to

calculate the four parameters (4113 -4118) Then based on equation 4112 the output

voltage is obtained numerically The thermal model is used to estimate the PV cell

temperature The two output quantities (PV output voltage U and the PV cell temperature

Tc) and the load current I are fed back to participate in the calculations The model

parameters used in the simulation are given in Table 47 which is based on the values

reported in [468]-[469]

Φ

Figure 450 Block diagram of the PV model built in MATLABSimulink

177

TABLE 47 THE PV MODEL PARAMETERS

ILref (ISCref) 2664 A

αref 5472 V

Rs 1324 Ω

Uocref 8772 V

Umpref 70731 V

Impref 2448 A

Φref 1000 Wm2

Tcref 25 ˚C

CPV 5times104 J(˚Cmiddotm

2)

A 15 m2

kinPV 09

kloss 30 W(˚Cmiddotm2)

Model Performance The model I-U characteristic curves under different irradiances

are given in Figure 451 at 25 ˚C It is noted from the figure that the higher is the

irradiance the larger are the short-circuit current (Isc) and the open-circuit voltage (Uoc)

And obviously the larger will be the maximum power (Pmp) shown in Figure 452 The

maximum power point short-circuit current and open-circuit voltage are also illustrated

in the figures

178

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1000

05

1

15

2

25

3

Output Voltage (V)

Current (A)

Tc = 25 degC 1000 Wm2

800 Wm2

600 Wm2

400 Wm2

200 Wm2

Uoc

Isc

Figure 451 I-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different irradiances

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 900

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

Output Voltage

Output Power (W)

1000 Wm2

800 Wm2

600 Wm2

400 Wm2

200 Wm2

Tc = 25 degC

Pmp

Ump

MaximumPowerPoint

Figure 452 P-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different irradiances

179

Temperature Effect on the Model Performance The effect of the temperature on the

PV model performance is illustrated in Figures 453 and 454 From these two figures it

is noted that the lower the temperature the higher is the maximum power and the larger

the open circuit voltage On the other hand a lower temperature gives a slightly lower

short circuit current

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1000

05

1

15

2

25

3

Output Voltage (V)

Current (A)

Tc = 50 degC

Φ = 1000 Wm20 degC

25 degC

Figure 453 I-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different temperatures

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1000

50

100

150

200

Output Voltage

Output Power (W)

Φ = 1000 Wm2

Tc = 50 degC

0 degC

25 degC

Figure 454 P-U characteristic curves of the PV model under different temperatures

180

Maximum Power Point Tracking Control

Though the capital cost for installing a PV array is decreasing due to recent

technology development (see Chapter 1) the initial investment on a PV system is still

very high compared to conventional electricity generation techniques Therefore it is

very natural to desire to draw as much power as possible from a PV array which has

already been installed Maximum power point tracking (MPPT) is one of the techniques

to obtain maximum power from a PV system

Several different MPPT techniques have been proposed in the literature The

techniques summarized in [472] can be classified as (1) Look-up table methods (2)

Perturbation and observation methods and (3) Model-based computational methods Two

major techniques in the ldquoModel-based computational methodsrdquo category are

voltage-based MPPT (VMPPT) and current-based MPPT (CMPPT) techniques Both the

CMPPT and VMPPT methods have been investigated in [472] for matching resistive

loads and DC motor loads A CMPPT method was reported in [473] for matching a DC

motor load In this study a CMPPT method is proposed to obtain maximum power for the

PV array proposed in the AC-coupled hybrid system (see Figure 33 in Chapter 3)

Current-Based Maximum Power Point Tracking The main idea behind the

current-based MPPT is that the current at the maximum power point Imp has a strong

linear relationship with the short circuit current Isc Isc can either be measured on line

under different operation conditions or computed from a validated model Figure 455

shows the curve of Imp vs Isc It can be noted that Imp has a very good linear dependence

on Isc which can be expressed as

181

Imp = kcmppttimesIsc (4120)

where kcmppt is the current factor CMPPT control

0 05 1 15 2 25 3 35 40

05

1

15

2

25

3

35

Short Circuit Current Isc (A)

Imp (A)

Model response

Curve fitting

y = 09245x

Tc = 25 degC

Figure 455 Linear relationship between Isc and Imp under different solar irradiances

75 80 85 9060

62

64

66

68

70

72

Open Circuit Voltage Uoc (V)

Ump (V)

Model response

Curve fittingTc = 25 degC

y = 06659x+ 119

Figure 456 Ump vs Uoc curve under different solar irradiances

182

The VMPPT control is based on the similar idea Figure 456 shows the relationship

between the voltage at the maximum power point Ump and the open circuit voltage Uoc

By comparing Figure 455 and Figure 456 we can see that Figure 455 shows a stronger

linear relationship This is why the CMPPT is used in this study

Control Scheme The control scheme of the CMPPT for the PV system in the

proposed hybrid system is shown Figure 457 The value of Imp calculated form (4120) is

used as the reference signal to control the buck DCDC converter so that the output

current of the PV system matches Imp This reference value is also used to control the

inverter so that the maximum available of power is delivered to the AC bus shown in

Figure 457

Figure 457 CMPPT control scheme

The details on how to control the power electronic devices will be discussed later in

this chapter

183

Simulation Results Simulation studies have been carried out to verify the proposed

CMPPT method For the purpose of simulation the solar irradiance is kept constant at a

value at 600Wm2 for t lt 40 s At t = 40 s the irradiance changes from 600 Wm

2 to 1000

Wm2 shown in Figure 458 This figure also shows the PV output current Ipv and the

reference Imp which is calculated based on (4120) The error between these two currents

is also illustrated in the figure Note that the proposed CMPPT controller works well to

match the PV output current with Imp The corresponding PV output power and the

calculated maximum power curves of the PV system are shown in Figure 459 The figure

also shows that the maximum power point is tracked well with the proposed CMPPT

method

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 800

05

1

15

2

25

Time (s)

Current (A)

Ta = 25 degC

Φ = 600 Wm2

Φ = 1000 Wm2

PV output current Ipv

The error between Ipv and Imp

Imp

Figure 458 Imp and Ipv curves under the CMPPT control

184

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 8060

80

100

120

140

160

180

Time (s)

Power (W)

Ta = 25 degC

Φ = 600 Wm2

Φ = 1000 Wm2

Output Power

Maximum power

Figure 459 PV output power and the maximum power curves

185

Electrolyzer

The fundamentals of operation of electrolyzer have been discussed in Chapter 2

From electrical circuit aspect an electrolyzer can be considered as a voltage-sensitive

nonlinear DC load For a given electrolyzer within its rating range the higher DC

voltage applied the larger is the load current That is by applying a higher DC voltage

we can get more H2 generated Of course more electrical power is consumed at the same

time The model for an electrolyzer stack developed in this study is based on the

empirical I-U equations reported in [468] and [475] described below

U-I Characteristic

The U-I characteristic of an electrolyzer cell can be expressed as [468] [475]

+

+++

++= 1

ln

2

32121

IA

TkTkkkI

A

TrrUU TTT

elecrevcellelec (4121)

where Ueleccell = is the cell terminal voltage (V)

Urev = reversible cell voltage (V)

r1 r2 = parameters for ohmic resistance (Ωmiddotm2 Ωmiddotm

2˚C)

kelec kT1 kT2 kT3 = parameters for overvoltage (V m2A m

2middot˚CA m

2middot˚C

2A)

A = area of cell electrode (m2)

I = electrolyzer current (A)

T = cell temperature (˚C)

The reversible voltage Urev is determined by the Gibbs free energy change of the

electrochemical process as

186

F

GU rev

2

∆minus= (4122)

It is a function of temperature which can be expressed by an empirical equation as

)25(0 minusminus= TkUU revrevrev (4123)

where 0

revU = reversible cell voltage at standard condition (V)

krev = empirical temperature coefficient of reversible voltage (V˚C)

For an electrolyzer stack consisting of nc cells in series the terminal voltage of the

stack can be expressed as

celleleccelec UnU = (4124)

where nc = number of cells in series

Hydrogen Production Rate

According to Faradayrsquo Law [417] [420] the ideal hydrogen production rate of an

electrolyzer stack is given by

F

Inn cH

22 =amp (4125)

where 2Hnamp = hydrogen production rate (mols)

However the actual hydrogen rate is always lower than the above theoretical

maximum value due to parasitic current losses The actual hydrogen production rate can

be obtained as

F

Inn c

FH2

2 η=amp (4126)

where ηF = current efficiency or Faraday efficiency

The current efficiency (ηF) will increase as the current density grows because the

187

percentage of the parasitic current over the total current decreases A higher temperature

will result in a lower resistance value which leads to higher parasitic current and a lower

current efficiency [475] However in high current density regions the effect of

temperature upon current efficiency is small and can be neglected [468] Hence in this

study ηF is considered as function of current density only An empirical formula for ηF is

given in [475] as

( )( ) 22

1

2

f

f

F kAIk

AI

+=η (4127)

where kf1 kf2 = parameters in current efficiency calculation

Thermal Model

The operating temperature of an electrolyzer stack affects its performance

significantly [see (4121)] Therefore it is necessary to have a thermal model for an

electrolyzer stack In this study a lumped thermal model is developed based on the

findings reported in [468] and [475]

coollossgenelec QQQdt

dTC ampampamp minusminus= (4128)

where T = overall electrolyzer temperature (˚C)

Celec = overall heat capacity of the electrolyzer stack (J˚C)

genQamp is the heat power generated inside the electrolyzer stack It can be written as

( )IUUnQ thcelleleccgen minus= amp (4129)

where Uth is the thermal voltage which is expressed as

188

F

STU

F

STG

F

HU revth

222

∆minus=

∆+∆minus=

∆minus= (4130)

lossQamp is the heat power loss It can be determined by

elecT

a

lossR

TTQ

minus=amp (4131)

where Ta = ambient temperature (˚C)

RTelec = equivalent thermal resistance (˚CW)

coolQamp the heat power loss due to cooling can be written as

( )icmocmcmcool TTCQ minus=amp (4132)

where Ccm = overall heat capacity of the flowing cooling medium per second (W˚C)

Tcmo Tcmi = outlet and inlet temperature of the cooling medium (˚C)

Water is used as the cooling medium for the eletrolyzer stack used in this study Tcmo

can be estimated as [468]

minusminusminus+=

cm

HX

icmicmocmC

kTTTT exp1)( (4133)

where kHX = effective heat exchange coefficient for the cooling process It can be

obtained by the following empirical equation [468] [475]

Ihhk convcondHX sdot+= (4134)

where hcond = coefficient related to conductive heat exchange (W˚C)

hconv = coefficient related to convective heat exchange [W(˚CmiddotA)]

189

Electrolyzer Model Implementation in MATLABSimulink

Based on the mathematical equations discussed previously a dynamic model for an

electrolyzer stack consisting of 40 cells in series (50 kW stack) has been developed in

MATLABSimulink Figure 460 shows the block diagram of the electrolyzer model The

input quantities are the applied DC voltage Uelec ambient temperature Ta inlet

temperature of the cooling water Tcm i and the cooling water flow rate ncm The two

output quantities are the hydrogen production rate 2Hnamp and the stack temperature T The

U-I characteristic block [(4121) - (4124)] calculates the electrolyzer current and the

electrolyzer temperature is estimated by the thermal model block (4128-4134) Based on

the calculated electrolyzer current I the current efficiency block (4126-4127) gives the

hydrogen production rate The model parameters are given in Table 48 which is based

on the values reported in [468] and [475]

2Hnamp

Figure 460 Block diagram of the electrolyzer model built in MATLABSimulink

190

TABLE 48 THE ELECTROLYZER MODEL PARAMETERS

r1 805times10-5 Ωmiddotm

2

r2 -25times10-7 Ωmiddotm

2˚C

kelec 0185 V

t1 -1002 m2A

t2 8424 m2middot˚CA

nc 40

krev 193times10-3 V˚C

Celec 6252times105 J˚C

RTelec 0167 ˚CW

A 025 m2

kf1 25times104 Am

2

kf2 096

hcond 70 W˚C

hconv 002 W(˚CmiddotA)

ncm 600 kgh

Ccm (Based on the value of ncm) 69767 W˚C

191

Electrolyzer Model Performance

The U-I characteristics of the electrolyzer model under different cell temperatures are

given in Figure 461 At the same current the higher the operating temperature the lower

the terminal voltage is needed Figure 462 shows the model temperature responses The

ambient temperature and the inlet temperature of the cooling water are set to 25 ˚C for the

simulation study The applied DC voltage starts at 70 V and steps up to 80 V at hour 5

The stack temperature increases from 25 ˚C to 2537 ˚C and stays at that temperature as

long as the applied voltage is 70 V The temperature increases slowly (in approximately 5

hours) to about 302 ˚C when the output voltage jumps to 80 V

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 50060

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

Current (A)

Voltage (V)

T = 25 degC

T = 50 degC

T = 80 degC

Figure 461 U-I characteristics of the electrolyzer model under different temperatures

192

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1065

70

75

80

85

Time (hour)

Voltage (V)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1025

30

35

Stack Temperature (degC)

Voltage

Temperature

Ta = Tcmi = 25 degC

Figure 462 Temperature response of the model

193

Power Electronic Interfacing Circuits

Power electronic (PE) interfacing circuits also called power conditioning circuits are

necessary for a hybrid energy system like the one proposed in Chapter 3 (see Figure 33)

In this section the electrical circuit diagrams state-space models and effective

average-models (for long-time simulation studies) for the main PE interfacing circuits in

the proposed hybrid energy system are discussed They are ACDC rectifiers DCDC

converters DCAC inverters

A detailed model for a PE device together with the control switching signals will

dramatically decrease the simulation speed using MATLABSimulink The detailed

models for PE devices such as those given in the SimPowerSystems block-set are not

suitable for long time simulation studies Effective average-models for PE devices will be

developed in this section which help improve the simulation speed significantly and at

the same time keep the desirable accuracy

ACDC Rectifiers

Circuit Topologies Basically there are two types of ACDC rectifiers

controllableuncontrollable rectifiers Uncontrollable rectifiers are normally referred to

diode (or diode bridge) rectifiers Figure 463 shows a typical three-phase full diode

bridge rectifier [441]

194

Figure 463 Three-phase full diode bridge rectifier

If Ls = 0 in the above figure the average value of the output DC voltage Vdc is given

as [441]

LLdc VV 23

π= (4135)

where VLL is the AC source line-line RMS voltage

The quality of the output DC voltage is fairly good The voltage ripple is within plusmn 5

However the input AC current ia for example is distorted The AC side inductor Ls can

be increased to reduce the current distortion But this will cause extra voltage drop across

the inductor Another way is to use a Y-Y and a Y-∆ connection transformer to form a

12-diode bridge rectifier as shown in Figure 464 There is a 30˚ phase shift between the

two transformer outputs which reduces the transition period from 60˚ to 30˚ in one (360˚)

period The average value of the DC output voltage now is

195

LLdc VV 26

π= (4136)

where VLL is the line-line RMS voltage of the transformersrsquo output

The output DC voltage ripple now is reduced to within plusmn 115 and the harmonics of

the AC side current are much reduced The total harmonic distortion (THD) of a 12-pulse

rectifier is typically 12 with the 11th and 13th harmonics dominant while the THD of a

6-pulse rectifier is about 30 with the 5th and 7th harmonics dominant [441] [476]

Figure 464 Three-phase 12-diode bridge rectifier with a Y-Y and a Y-∆ transformer

Based on the same principle a 24-diode rectifier can be built using zig-zag

transformer group [476] But it is not used commonly in low power rating applications

Controllable rectifiers are normally firing angle controlled thyristor rectifiers and

pulse width modulated (PWM) rectifiers A PWM rectifier has the same circuit topology

as a PWM inverter which will be discussed later in this section It is just the same circuit

196

working at a different operation modes inverter mode vs rectifier mode Therefore only

the thyristor rectifier is discussed here

A thyristor can work just like a diode with the exception that it starts to conduct

when it is not only forward biased but also its gate receives a positive current pulse and

it continues to be conducting as long as it is still forward biased Thyristors can be used in

Figure 463 and 474 to replace the diodes Figure 465 shows a 6-pulse thyristor rectifier

The output DC voltage can be regulated by controlling the firing angles of thyristors The

firing angle α shown in Figure 465 is the angular delay between the time when a

thyristor is forward biased and the time when a positive current pulse is applied to its gate

For a 6-pulse thyristor rectifier the output DC voltage is [441]

)cos(23

απ LLdc VV = (4137)

where α = firing angle

If cos(α) is taken as the control variable it is noted from the above equation that the

output voltage of a thyristor rectifier is proportional to the control input

197

α

Figure 465 A 6-pulse thyristor rectifier

Simplified Model for Controllable Rectifiers Figure 466 shows the block diagram

of the simplified ideal model for controllable three phase rectifiers This model is

developed for long time simulation studies The ldquoline-line voltage peak valuerdquo block

calculates the peak value of the AC line-line voltage LLV2 The input quantity g which

can be considered as cos(α) is the control variable to regulate the output DC voltage The

output DC voltage is calculated based on (4137) For 6-pulse rectifiers gain kdc is 3π

Then the signal Edc is fed to control a controlled voltage source which actually is the DC

output of the model The series resistor Rs is used to model the power and voltage losses

within a real rectifier The ldquoP Q Calculationrdquo block calculates the amount of the real and

reactive power consumed at the AC side based on the DC side real power and the input

198

quantity power angle θ shown in Figure 466 The ldquodynamic loadrdquo block is a built-in

model in Simulink which consumes the real and reactive power assigned by its P amp Q

inputs

Figure 466 Block diagram of the simplified model for 3-phase controllable rectifiers

Figures 467 and 468 compare the voltage and current responses of the simplified

ideal rectifier model with the detailed rectifier models a 6-pulse model and a 12-pulse

model with the same AC source and the same DC load Figure 467 shows that the

average output DC voltage of the ideal model is slightly higher than those of the detailed

rectifier models Figure 468 shows the AC side phase current of the different models It

is noted that the AC current is distorted for the 6-pulse rectifier model However the

harmonic is much reduced for the 12-pulse rectifier model and the response of this

rectifier model is very close to that of the ideal rectifier model The simplified ideal

199

controllable rectifier model shown in Figure 466 is used in the proposed hybrid energy

system It can improve the simulation speed and at the same time keep the desired

accuracy

032 033 034 035 036265

270

275

Time (s)

Output DC Voltage (V) Ideal rectifier model

6-pulse thyristorrectifier model

12-pulse thyristorrectifier model

Figure 467 DC output voltages of the different rectifier models

032 033 034 035 036

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

30

Time (s)

AC side phase current (A)

Idealrectifiermodel

6-pulsethyristorrectifiermodel

12-pulsethyristorrectifiermodel

Figure 468 AC side phase current of the different rectifier models

200

DCDC Converters

There are many types of DCDC converters In this section only typical boost

converters and buck converters are discussed

Circuit Topologies Figure 469 shows the circuit diagram of a boost DCDC

converter (inside the rectangle) The output voltage regulation feedback is also given in

the figure At steady-state the average value of the output voltage is given as

)1(

_

_d

VV

indd

outdd minus= (4138)

where d is the duty ratio of the switching pulse

Since 10 ltle d the output voltage is always higher than the input voltage5 That is

why the circuit (in Figure 469) is called a boost DCDC converter The controller for the

converter is to regulate the DC bus voltage within a desirable range The output voltage is

measured and compared with the reference value The error signal is processed through

the PWM controller which can be a simple PI controller The output of the controller is

used to generate a PWM pulse with the right duty ratio so that the output voltage follows

the reference value

5 When d=1 the input is short circuited and the circuit will not work This situation should be avoided d

normally is less than 085 [476]

201

Figure 469 Boost DCDC converter

Figure 470 Buck DCDC converter

A buck DCDC converter is shown in Figure 470 At steady-state the average value

of the output voltage is given as

202

inddoutdd dVV __ = (4139)

Since 10 lele d the output voltage of a buck converter is always lower than its input

voltage In contrast to a boost converter a buck converter is a step-down DCDC

converter Its output voltage can also be regulated by controlling the duty ratio (d) of the

switching signals The voltage regulation feedback loop is also shown in Figure 470

State-space Models Based on the State-space Averaging Technique In order to

apply classical control analysis and design methods (such as Nyquist criterion Bode plots

and root loci analysis) in converter controls state-space small-signal models for the

above boost and buck converters are needed and are discussed in this section These

models are based on the state-space averaging technique developed by Middlebrook Cuacutek

and their colleagues [477]

1) State-space model for boost DCDC converters

In Figure 469 take ddLix =1 and Cddvx =2 as state variables Let xXx ~+=

dDd~

+= inddinddindd vVv ___~+= and outddoutddoutdd vVv ___

~+= ldquo~rdquo here is used to

denote small perturbation signals and state variable X denotes the system operating point

When the switch Sdd is on and diode Ddd is off the state-space representation of the

main circuit can be written as

xCv

vBxAx

T

outdd

indd

1_

_11

=

+=amp (4140)

where

minus=

ddRC

A 10

00

1

=

0

11

ddLB and ]10[1 =TC

203

When switch Sdd is off and diode Ddd is on the state-space equation of the circuit

turns out to be

xCv

vBxAx

T

outdd

indd

2_

_22

=

+=amp (4141)

where

minus

minus

=

dddd

dd

RCC

LA

11

10

2

=

0

12

ddLB and ]10[2 =TC

Therefore the average state-space model of the main circuit at the operating point is

xCv

BvAxx

T

outdd

indd

=

+=

_

_amp

(4142)

where

minusminus

minusminus

=

dddd

dd

RCC

d

L

d

A11

)1(0

===

0

121

LBBB and ]10[21 === TTT CCC

Then the small signal model for the boost DCDC converter can be obtained as

xCv

vBdBxAx

T

outdd

inddvdd

~~

~~~~

_

_

=

++=amp (4143)

where

minusminus

minusminus

=

dddd

ddd

RCC

D

L

D

A11

)1(0

minus=

dd

dd

dCX

LXB

1

2

=

0

1 dd

v

LB X1 and X2 are the steady

state values of x1 and x2 respectively

Using Eq (4143) and only considering the perturbation of duty ratio d~ ( inddv _~ =0)

204

the transfer function )(

~)(~

)(_

sd

svsT

outdd

vd = is obtained as

[ ]

minus+minus

minus++

=minus= minus

dddddd

dddddd

dd

T

vdCL

XD

C

sX

CL

D

RCss

BASICsT 21

2

1 )1(

)1()

1(

1)( (4144)

2) State-Space model for buck DCDC converters

Similar to the procedure discussed in the previous part a small-signal state-space

model of a buck converter can be obtained which has been reported in [441] and [476]

as

xCv

dBxAx

T

boutdd

bb

=

+=

_

amp

(4145)

where

=

Cdd

ddL

v

ix

minus

minus=

dddd

ddb

RCC

LA

11

10

=

0

_

dd

indd

b L

V

B ]10[=T

bC

The small signal model can be obtained as

xCv

dBxAx

T

boutdd

bb

~~

~~~~

_ =

+=amp (4146)

where

=

Cdd

ddL

v

ix ~

~~ and

=

0

~ _ ddindd

b

LVB

Similarly the transfer function for the output voltage over duty ratio can be obtained

++

==

dddddd

dddd

inddoutdd

p

CLRC

ssCL

V

sd

svsT

1)(~

)(~

)(2

__ (4147)

205

Averaged Models for DCDC Converters Averaged models for boost and buck

DCDC converters suitable for long time simulation studies are given in this part These

models simulate the DCDC converter transient behavior in large scale rather than the

detailed cycle-to-cycle variations of values of voltages and currents The models

discussed here are based on the models reported in [476]

1) Averaged model for boost DCDC converters

Lddid times

outddVd _times

Figure 471 Averaged model for boost DCDC converters

Comparing the circuit diagram of boost converter in Figure 469 and its averaged

model shown in Figure 471 we can see that the power electronic switch and diode are

replaced by the combination of controlled current and voltage sources in the averaged

model This gives the same performance as the detailed circuit model at large time scale

Figures 472 and 473 show the simulation results of the averaged model and the detailed

circuit model under a load change It is noted from these two figures that the averaged

model can simulate the converter behavior precisely at large time scale with reasonable

accuracy

206

008 009 01 011 012 013 014 015 016120

140

160

180

200

220

240Output Voltage (V)

008 009 01 011 012 013 014 015 016150

200

250

300

350

400

450

Time (s)

Inductor Current (A)

Output Voltage

Inductor Current

Figure 472 Simulation result of the averaged model for boost DCDC converter

008 009 01 011 012 013 014 015 016120

140

160

180

200

220

240

Output Voltage (V)

008 009 01 011 012 013 014 015 016150

200

250

300

350

400

450

Time (s)

Inductor Current (A)

Inductor Current

Output Voltage

Figure 473 Simulation result of the detailed model for boost DCDC converter

207

2) Averaged model for buck DCDC converters

Lddid times

inddVd _times

Figure 474 Averaged model for buck DCDC converters

Figure 474 shows the averaged model for buck converters Simulation results shown

in Figures 475 and 476 illustrate the effectiveness of the averaged model for buck

DCDC converters

008 009 01 011 012 013 01430

40

50

60

Output Voltage (V)

008 009 01 011 012 013 0140

40

80

120

Time (s)

Inductor Current (A)

Inductor Current

Output Voltage

Figure 475 Simulation result of the averaged model for buck DCDC converter

208

008 009 01 011 012 013 01430

40

50

60Output Voltage (V)

008 009 01 011 012 013 0140

40

80

120

Time (s)

Inductor Current (A)

Output Voltage

Inductor Current

Figure 476 Simulation result of the detailed model for buck DCDC converter

DCAC Inverters

Circuit Topology A 3-phase 6-switch DCAC PWM voltage source inverter is used

to convert the power from DC to AC Figure 477 shows the main circuit of a 3-phase

voltage source inverter (VSI) which is connected to the AC bus or utility grid through

LC filters and coupling inductors

State-Space Model For deducing convenience the neutral point N of the AC

system is chosen as the common potential reference point For the purpose of simplicity

only the inverter under balanced loads and without a neutral line (used in this dissertation)

is discussed Define the following switching functions

209

minus=

minus

+

OFFS

ONSd

a

a

1

1

1

minus=

minus

+

OFFS

ONSd

b

b

1

1

2 (4148)

minus=

minus

+

OFFS

ONSd

c

c

1

1

3

Figure 477 3-phase DCAC voltage source inverter

van vbn and vcn (the inverter output voltages between each phase and its imaginary

neutral point n) can be expressed as

=

=

=

dccn

dcbn

dcan

Vd

v

Vd

v

Vd

v

2

2

2

3

2

1

(4149)

where Vdc is the DC bus voltage

The output phase potentials of the inverter va vb and vc can be obtained as

210

+=

+=

+=

ncnc

nbnb

nana

vvv

vvv

vvv

(4150)

where vn is the voltage between the point n and the common reference neutral point N

Since 0=++ fcfbfa iii and 0=++ CBA eee vn is obtained as [478]-[479]

sum=

minus=3

1

6 k

k

dc

n dV

v (4151)

For the circuit shown in Figure 477 the following dynamic equations can be

obtained

++=

++=

++=

scfcf

fc

fc

sbfbf

fb

fb

safaf

fa

fa

viRdt

diLv

viRdt

diLv

viRdt

diLv

(4152)

minus+

minus+=

minus+

minus+=

minus+

minus+=

dt

vvdC

dt

vvdCii

dt

vvdC

dt

vvdCii

dt

vvdC

dt

vvdCii

sbscf

sascfscfc

scsbf

sasbfsbfb

scsaf

sbsafsafa

)()(

)()(

)()(

(4153)

minus=+

minus=+

minus=+

Cscsc

sscs

Bsbsb

ssbs

Asa

sa

ssas

evdt

diLiR

evdt

diLiR

evdt

diLiR

(4154)

Writing the above equations into the state-space form

abcabcabcabcabc UBXAX +=amp (4155)

211

where [ ]Tscsbsascsbsafcfbfaabc iiivvviiiX = [ ]TCBAdcabc eeeVU =

minus

minus

minus

minus

minus

minus

minusminus

minusminus

minusminus

=

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

ff

ff

ff

ff

f

ff

f

ff

f

abc

L

R

L

L

R

L

L

R

L

CC

CC

CC

LL

R

LL

R

LL

R

A

001

00000

0001

0000

00001

000

3

100000

3

100

03

100000

3

10

003

100000

3

1

0001

0000

00001

000

000001

00

and

minus

minus

minus

minus

minus

minus

=

sum

sum

sum

=

=

=

s

s

s

f

k

k

f

k

k

f

k

k

abc

L

L

L

Ldd

Ldd

Ldd

B

1000

01

00

001

0

0000

0000

0000

0006

1

2

0006

1

2

0006

1

2

3

1

3

3

1

2

3

1

1

212

dq Representation of the State-Space Model The dq transformation transfers a

stationary 3-coordinate (abc) system to a rotating 2-coordinate (dq) system The dq

signals can be used to achieve zero tracking error control [478] Due to this merit the dq

transformation has been widely used in PWM converter and rotating machine control

[462] [478] [480]

Using the dq transformation explained in [462] (see Appendix A) the system

state-space equation given in (4155) can be represented in the rotating dq frame as

dqdqdqdqdq UBXAX +=amp (4156)

where

[ ]Tsqsdsqsddqdddq iivviiX = [ ]Tqddcdq eeVU =

=

dc

db

da

dqabc

dq

dd

i

i

i

Ti

i

=

sc

sb

sa

dqabc

sq

sd

v

v

v

Tv

v and

=

C

B

A

dqabc

q

d

e

e

e

Te

e

minusminus

minus

minusminus

minus

minusminusminus

minusminus

=

s

s

s

s

s

s

ff

ff

ff

f

ff

f

dq

L

R

L

L

R

L

CC

CC

LL

R

LL

R

A

ω

ω

ω

ω

ω

ω

1000

01

00

3

100

3

10

03

100

3

1

001

0

0001

minus

minus

=

100

010

000

000

00)(

00)(

3

2

12

3

2

11

f

f

dq

L

dddtf

L

dddtf

B

f1 and f2 are obtained as

213

minus++

minusminus+

minus

=

sum

sumsum

=

==

3

1

3

3

1

2

3

1

1

3

2

11

3

1)

3

2sin(

3

1)

3

2sin(

3

1)sin(

3

1

)(

k

k

k

k

k

k

ddt

ddtddt

dddtf

πω

πωω

minus++

minusminus+

minus

=

sum

sumsum

=

==

3

1

3

3

1

2

3

1

1

3

2

12

3

1)

3

2cos(

3

1)

3

2cos(

3

1)cos(

3

1

)(

k

k

k

k

k

k

ddt

ddtddt

dddtf

πω

πωω

Tabcdq is the abcdq transformation matrix The methodology for developing the

abcdq transformation is explained in [462] (see Appendix A)

214

Ideal Model for Three-phase VSI Figure 478 shows the ideal model for a

three-phase VSI It is not a detailed model with all the power electronic switches and

switching signals it is an idealized model used for long time simulation studies The load

current of the input DC voltage source (Idc) is determined by the power consumed at the

AC side The other three input quantities are the desired output AC frequency f AC

voltage amplitude index (similar to the modulation index in a real VSI control) m and the

initial phase of the three-phase AC output voltages 0φ The ldquoabc signal formationrdquo block

gives the base signals for the three phases va(t) vb(t) and vc(t)

++=

++=

+=

)342sin()(

)322sin()(

)2sin()(

0

0

0

φππφππ

φπ

ftmtv

ftmtv

ftmtv

c

b

a

(4157)

The output voltage values Va(t) Vb(t) and Vc(t) are calculated by multiplying the

base signal values by the possible peak of the output AC which is 05Vdc For example

Va(t) = 05Vdctimesva(t) Then Va(t) Vb(t) and Vc(t) are used to control the three controlled

voltage sources which are the AC output voltages of the inverter model The AC power

is calculated through the ldquoPower Calculationrdquo block as

)()()()()()( tVtItVtItVtIP ccbbaaac times+times+times= (4158)

For the purpose of comparison a 208 V three-phase VSI is simulated to supply 100

kW to a load both by the ideal model shown in Figure 478 and the switched model given

in Figure 477 Figure 479 shows the output AC phase voltage of the two models It is

noted that though there are harmonics in voltage from the switched model its output

voltage waveform is very close to the output from the ideal model when a properly

215

designed filter is applied to the system Figure 480 shows the output power to the load

from the two models We can see that the ideal model output is ideal delivering a

constant power of 100 kW On the other hand a more practical and detailed output power

curve (with ripples) is obtained from the switched model Nevertheless the ideal model is

capable of simulating a VSI with good accuracy at large time scale

Figure 478 Ideal model for three-phase VSI

216

16 161 162 163 164

-150

-100

-50

0

50

100

150

Time (s)

AC phase voltage (V)

Figure 479 AC phase output voltages of the ideal VSI model and the switched VSI

model

16 162 164 166 168 170

50

100

150

200

Time (s)

Output Power (kW)

Switched Model

Ideal Model

Figure 480 Output power of the ideal VSI model and the switched VSI model

217

Battery Model

A validated electrical circuit model for lead-acid batteries shown in Figure 481 was

reported in [481] The diodes in the model are all ideal and just used to select different

resistances for charging and discharging states The model parameters (capacitances and

resistances) defined in Figure 481 are functions of battery current temperature and state

of charge (SOC) [481] [482] However within the voltage range (100plusmn5) there is not

a big difference between the charge and discharge resistances [481] For the purpose of

analysis these component values in the model are considered constant within the100plusmn5

voltage range in this study Then the model shown in Figure 481 can be simplified into

the circuit model given in Figure 482

Cb= battery capacitance Rp= self-discharge resistance or insulation resistance

R2c= internal resistance for charge R2d= internal resistance for discharge

R1c= overvoltage resistance for charge R1d= overvoltage resistance for discharge

C1= overvoltage capacitance

Figure 481 Equivalent circuit model for battery reported in [481]

218

Figure 482 Simplified circuit model for lead-acid batteries

Models for Accessories

Gas Compressor

A gas compressor can be modeled by considering the compression process as a

two-stage polytropic compression which can be described as [422]

CVP m

ii = (4159)

where Pi Vi = the pressure and voltage at stage i (1 2)

m = polytropic exponent

C = constant

Based on the above equation the power needed to compress a gas at pressure P1 to

pressure P2 with the flow rate gasnamp can be obtained as

comp

m

m

x

gascompP

P

m

mRTnP

η1

11

2

1

2

minus

minus=

minus

amp (4160)

where Pcomp = power consumed (W)

gasnamp = gas flow rate (mols)

219

R = gas constant 83144 J(molmiddotK)

T = gas temperature (K)

P2 = exit pressure (Pa)

21PPPx = intermediate pressure (Pa)

P1 = inlet pressure (Pa)

ηcomp = overall efficiency of the compressor

High Pressure H2 Storage Tank

For H2 in the high pressure storage tank shown in Figure 483 the ideal gas equation

does not accurately describe the relation between P V and T a modified equation of state

should be used The Beattie-Bridgeman equation has been successful in fitting the

measured values of pressure volume and temperature in a high-pressure gas storage tank

with good accuracy [422] This modified state equation can be written as

innamp outnamp

Figure 483 Pressured H2 storage tank

2

2

0

032

21

11V

nV

anA

V

bnB

n

V

VT

cn

V

RTnP

minusminus

minus+

minus= (4161)

where P = pressure of hydrogen in the tank (atm)

V = Volume of the tank (liter)

220

T = temperature of H2 (K)

n = number of moles of H2 in the tank

R = Gas constant 008206 atmmiddotliter(molmiddotK)

A0 B0 a b c are constants for certain type of gas Their values for H2 are given

in Table 49

The change of mole number of gas (H2) in the tank is governed by

outin nndt

dnampamp minus= (4162)

TABLE 49 CONSTANTS OF BEATTIE-BRIDGEMAN EQUATION OF STATE FOR H2 [422]

A0 01975 atmmiddotliter2mol

2

B0 002096 litermol

a -000506 litermol

b -004359 litermol

c 00504times104 litermiddotK3mol

Gas Pressure Regulator

Figure 484 shows a schematic diagram of a commonly used gas pressure regulator

[483] Its function is to keep the output pressure Po constant at a desired value (Pref)

under changes of the gas flow rates qo The pressure regulation is achieved by the

deformation of the diaphragm Suppose there is a reduction in Po which will reduce the

pressure against the bottom of the diaphragm This causes the spring force to push

downward to increase the valve opening in the direction axis x Therefore the valve flow

221

is increased and as a result the output pressure Po is raised back toward the reference

value The system can be modeled by the following equations [483]

( )( )oicxi PPkxkq minus+= (4163)

where qi = input flow rate (mols)

kx kc = constants used in calculating fluid resistanceadmittance [mol(Pamiddotsmiddotm)

mol(Pamiddots)]

Figure 484 Gas pressure regulator

The net flow entering the volume below the diaphragm is

( )( ) ooicxoinet qPPkxkqqq minusminus+=minus= (4164)

Normally the diaphragm deformation is small hence the volume V can be considered

constant The dynamic state equation can be written as

ognet PCq amp= (4165)

where Cg = VRT The output pressure Po can be expressed as

A

xkPP s

refo minus= (4166)

where ks = spring constant (Nm)

A = diaphragm area (m2)

Figure 485 shows the model performance under output flow variations and the

222

variations in reference pressure The model is adjusted to keep the output pressure at the

reference value at the flow rate of 01 mols The reference pressure steps up from 2 atm

to 3 atm at 10 s The figure shows that the output pressure follows the reference value

very well It is noted from the figure that the output pressure drops a little bit (from 2 atm

to about 198 atm) when the output flow rate jumps up to 02 mols at 2 s The output

pressure comes back to its preset value (2 atm) when the output flow rate drops back to

01 mols at 6 s

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 1615

2

25

3

35

Pressure (atm)

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 160

01

02

Time (s)

Flow rate (mols)

Output flow rate qo

Output pressure Po

Pref

Figure 485 Performance of the model for gas pressure regulators

223

Summary

In this chapter the model development for the components of the proposed hybrid

alternative energy system is discussed These components are fuel cells (PEMFCs and

SOFCs) variable speed wind energy conversion unit solar power generation unit

electrolyzers power electronic interfacing devices battery bank and accessories

including gas compressor high-pressure H2 storage tank and gas pressure regulator

Performance evaluation of these models is also discussed in this chapter The models will

be used in Chapters 5 and 6 to investigate grid-connected and stand-alone fuel cell power

generation systems and in Chapter 7 for the study of hybrid energy systems

224

REFERENCES

[41] J C Amphlett R M Baumert R F Mann B A Peppley and P R Roberge

ldquoPerformance Modeling of the Ballard Mark IV Solid Polymer Electrolyte Fuel

Cell I Mechanistic Model Developmentrdquo Journal of the Electrochemical Society

Vol 142 No 1 pp 1-8 Jan 1995

[42] J C Amphlett R M Baumert R F Mann B A Peppley and P R Roberge

ldquoPerformance Modeling of the Ballard Mark IV Solid Polymer Electrolyte Fuel

Cell II Empirical Model Developmentrdquo Journal of the Electrochemical Society

Vol 142 No 1 pp 9-15 Jan 1995

[43] R Cownden M Nahon M A Rosen ldquoModeling and Analysis of a Solid Polymer

Fuel Cell System for Transportation Applicationsrdquo International Journal of

Hydrogen Energy Vol 26 No 6 pp 615-623 June 2001

[44] Charles E Chamberlin ldquoModeling of Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cell

Performance with an Empirical Equationrdquo Journal of the Electrochemical Society

Vol 142 No 8 pp 2670-2674 August 1995

[45] Andrew Rowe Xianguo Li ldquoMathematical Modeling of Proton Exchange

Membrane Fuel Cellsrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 102 No 1-2 pp82-96

Dec 2001

[46] D Bevers M Woumlhr ldquoSimulation of a Polymer Electrolyte Fuel Cell Electroderdquo

Journal of Applied Electrochemistry Vol27 No 11 pp 1254-1264 Nov 1997

[47] G Maggio V Recupero L Pino ldquoModeling Polymer Electrolyte Fuel Cells An

Innovative Approachrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 101 No 2 pp275-286 Oct

2001

[48] J C Amphlett R F Mann B A Peppley P R Roberge and A Rodrigues ldquoA

Model Predicting Transient Responses of Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cellsrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 61 No 1-2 pp 183-188 July-Aug 1996

[49] J Hamelin K Agbossou A Laperriegravere F Laurencelle and T K Bose ldquoDynamic

Behavior of a PEM Fuel Cell Stack for Stationary Applicationsrdquo International

Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 26 No 6 pp 625-629 June 2001

[410] M Woumlhr K Bolwin W Schnurnberger M Fischer W Neubrand and G

Eigenberger ldquoDynamic Modeling and Simulation of a Polymer Membrane Fuel

Cell Including Mass Transport Limitationrdquo International Journal of Hydrogen

Energy Vol 23 No 3 pp 213-218 March 1998

225

[411] Hubertus PLH van Bussel Frans GH Koene and Ronald KAM Mallant

ldquoDynamic Model of Solid Polymer Fuel Cell Water Managementrdquo Journal of

Power Sources Vol 71 No 1-2 pp 218-222 March 1998

[412] M Wang M H Nehrir ldquoFuel Cell Modeling and Fuzzy Logic-Based Voltage

Controlrdquo International Journal of Renewable Energy Engineering Vol 3 No 2

August 2001

[413] Michael D Lukas Kwang Y Lee Hossein Ghezel-Ayagh ldquoPerformance Implications of Rapid Load Changes in Carbonate Fuel Cell Systemsrdquo

Proceedings 2001 IEEE Power Engineering Society Winter Meeting Vol 3 pp

979-984 2001

[414] Robert Lasseter ldquoDynamic Models for Micro-turbines and Fuel Cellsrdquo

Proceedings 2001 IEEE Power Engineering Society Summer Meeting Vol 2 pp 761-766 2001

[415] Padmanabhan Srinivasan Ali Feliachi John Ed Sneckenberger ldquoProton Exchange

Membrane Fuel Cell Dynamic Model for Distributed Generation Control

Purposesrdquo Proceedings 34th North American Power Symposium pp 393-398

Oct 2002 Tempe Arizona

[416] Pariz Famouri and Randall S Gemmen ldquoElectrochemical Circuit Model of a PEM

Fuel Cellrdquo Proceedings 2003 IEEE Power Engineering Society Summer Meeting

0-7803-7990-X03 July 2003 Toronto Canada

[417] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained John Wiley amp

Sons Ltd 2001

[418] Fuel Cell Handbook (Sixth Edition) EGampG Services Inc Science Applications

International Corporation DOE Office of Fossil Energy National Energy

Technology Lab Nov 2002

[419] JA Smith MH Nehrir V Gerez and SR Shaw ldquoA Broad Look at the Workings

Types and Applications of Fuel Cellsrdquo Proceedings 2002 IEEE Power

Engineering Society Summer Meeting Vol 1 pp 70-75 July 2002 Chicago IL

[420] G Kortum Treatise on Electrochemistry (2nd Edition) Elsevier Publishing

Company 1965

[421] A Schneuwly M Baumlrtschi V Hermann G Sartorelli R Gallay and R Koetz

ldquoBOOSTCAP Double-Layer Capacitors for Peak Power Automotive Applicationsrdquo Proceedings the Second International ADVANCED

AUTOMOTIVE BATTERY Conference (AABC) Las Vegas Nevada February

2002

226

[422] George N Hatsopoulos and Joseph H Keenan Principles of General

Thermodynamics John Wiley amp Sons Inc 1965

[423] Thomas G Burke and David A Schiller ldquoUsing PSPICE for Electrical Heat

Analysisrdquo IEEE Potentials Vol 22 No 2 pp 35-38 AprilMay 2003

[424] PSpicereg includes PSpice AD PSpice AD Basics and Pspice Reference Guide Cadence Design Systems Inc Release 923

[425] SR-12 Modular PEM GeneratorTM Operatorrsquos Manual Avista Labs July 2000

[426] MT Iqbal ldquoSimulation of a Small Wind Fuel Cell Hybrid Energy Systemrdquo

Renewable Energy Vol 28 No 4 pp 511-522 April 2003

[427] SC Singhal ldquoSolid oxide fuel cells for stationary mobile and military

applicationsrdquo Solid State Ionics Vol 152-153 pp405-410 2002

[428] SC Singhal ldquoAdvances in tubular solid oxide fuel cell technologyrdquo Solid State Ionics Vol 135 pp305-313 2000

[429] O Yamamoto ldquoSolid oxide fuel cells fundamental aspects and prospectsrdquo

Electrochimica Acta Vol 45 No (15-16) pp 2423-2435 2000

[430] K Eguchi H Kojo T Takeguchi R Kikuchi and K Sasaki ldquoFuel flexibility in power generation by solid oxide fuel cellsrdquo Solid State Ionics No 152-153 pp

411-16 Dec 2002

[431] SH Chan KA Khor and ZT Xia ldquoA complete polarization model of a solid

oxide fuel cell and its sensitivity to the change of cell component thicknessrdquo

Journal of Power Sources Vol 93 No (1-2) pp 130-140 Feb 2001

[432] P Aguiar D Chadwick and L Kershenbaum ldquoModeling of an indirect internal

reforming solid oxide fuel cellrdquo Chemical Engineering Science Vol 57

pp1665-1677 2002

[433] P Costamagna and K Honegger ldquoModeling of solid oxide heat exchanger

integrated stacks and simulation at high fuel utilizationrdquo Journal of the

Electrochemical Society Vol 145 No 11 pp 3995-4007 Nov 1998

[434] J Padulleacutes GW Ault and J R McDonald ldquoAn integrated SOFC plant dynamic

model for power system simulationrdquo J Power Sources pp495ndash500 2000

[435] DJ Hall and RG Colclaser ldquoTransient Modeling and Simulation of a Tubular

Solid Oxide Fuel Cellrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 14 No3

pp 749-753 1999

227

[436] RS Gemmen ldquoAnalysis for the effect of inverter ripple current on fuel cell

operating conditionrdquo Transactions of the ASME - Journal of Fluids Engineering

Vol 125 No 3 pp576-585 May 2003

[437] K Acharya SK Mazumder RK Burra R Williams C Haynes Proceeding

38th IAS Annual Meeting (IEEE Industry Applications Society) Vol 3 pp

2026-2032 2003

[438] S H Chan CF Low OL Ding ldquoEnergy and exergy analysis of simple solid-oxide fuel-cell power systemsrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 103 No2

pp 188-200 Jan 2002

[439] S Nagata A Momma T Kato and Y Kasuga ldquoNumerical analysis of output

characteristics of tubular SOFC with internal reformerrdquo Journal of Power Sources

Vol 101 pp60-71 2001

[440] D J Hall Transient Modeling and Simulation of a Solid Oxide Fuel Cell PhD

Dissertation School of Engineering University of Pittsburg Nov 1997

[441] N Mohan T M Undeland and W P Robbins Power Electronics ndash Converters

Applications and Design John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2003

[442] S C Singhal ldquoRecent progress in tubular solid oxide fuel cell technologyrdquo Proceedings the Fifth International Symposium on SOFC (Electrochem Soc) pp

37-50 1997

[443] E Achenbach ldquoResponse of a solid oxide fuel cell to load changerdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 57 No (1-2) pp 105-109 1995

[444] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy

Conversion Vol 20 No 2 pp442-451 June 2005

[445] Rajib Datta and V T Ranganathan ldquoVariable-Speed Wind Power Generation

Using Doubly Fed Wound Rotor Induction Machine ndash A Comparison with

Alternative Schemesrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversions vol 17 no 3 pp 414-420 Sept 2002

[446] C F Wagner ldquoSelf-excitation of induction motorsrdquo Trans Amer Inst Elect Eng

vol 58 pp 47-51 Feb 1939

[447] E D Basset and F M Potter ldquoCapacitive excitation of induction generatorsrdquo Trans

Amer Inst Elect Eng vol 54 no 5 pp 540-545 May 1935

228

[448] J M Elder J T Boys and J L Woodward ldquoSelf-excited induction machine as a

small low-cost generatorrdquo in Proc Inst Elect Eng pt C vol 131 no 2 pp 33-41

Mar 1984

[449] L Ouazene and G Mcpherson Jr ldquoAnalysis of the isolated induction generatorrdquo

IEEE Trans Power Apparatus and Systems vol PAS-102 no 8 pp2793-2798

Aug 1983

[450] C Grantham D Sutanto and B Mismail ldquoSteady-state and transient analysis of self-excited induction generatorsrdquo in Proc Inst Elect Eng pt B vol 136 no 2

pp 61-68 Mar 1989

[451] Dawit Seyoum Colin Grantham and M F Rahman ldquoThe dynamic characteristics

of an isolated self-excited induction generator driven by a wind turbinerdquo IEEE

Trans Industry Applications vol39 no 4 pp936-944 JulyAugust 2003

[452] Eduard Muljadi and C P Butterfield ldquoPitch-Controlled Variable Wind turbine

Generationrdquo IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications vol 37 no 1 pp

240-246 JanFeb 2001

[453] Siegfried Heier Grid Integration of Wind energy Conversion Systems John Wileyamp Sons 1998 ch 1-2

[454] J G Slootweg SWH de Haan H Polinder and WL Kling ldquoGeneral Model for

Representing Variable Speed Wind Turbines in Power System Dynamics

Simulationsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Systems vol 18 no 1 pp 144-151

Feb 2003

[455] Bimal K Bose Modern Power Electronics and Ac Drives Pearson Education 2003

ch 2

[456] P M Anderson and Anjan Bose ldquo Stability Simulation of Wind Turbine systemsrdquo

IEEE Trans on Power and Apparatus and Systems vol PAS-102 no 12 pp

3791-3795 Dec 1983

[457] MatLabSimulink SimPowerSystems Documentation Available httpwwwmathworkscom

[458] M H Salama and P G Holmes ldquoTransient and steady-state load performance of

stand alone self-excited induction generatorrdquo in Proc IEE-Elect Power Applicat

vol 143 no 1 pp 50-58 Jan 1996

[459] S S Murthy O P Malik and A K Tandon ldquoAnalysis of self excited induction

generatorsrdquo in Proc Inst Elect Eng pt C vol 129 no 6 pp 260-265 Nov1982

229

[460] N H Malik and A H Al-Bahrani ldquoInfluence of the terminal capacitor on the

performance characteristics of a self-excited induction generatorrdquo in Proc Inst

Elect Eng pt C vol 137 no 2 pp 168-173 Mar 1990

[461] T F Chan ldquoCapacitance requirements of self-excited induction generatorsrdquo IEEE

Trans Energy Conversion vol 8 no 2 pp 304-311 June 1993

[462] Paul C Krause Oleg Wasynczuk and Scott D Sudhoff Analysis of Electric

Machinery IEEE Press 1994 ch 3-4

[463] M Godoy Simoes and Felix A Farret Renewable Energy Systems-Design and

Analysis with Induction Generators CRC Press 2004 ch 3-6

[464] JG Slootweg ldquoWind power modeling and impact on power system dynamicsrdquo

PhD dissertation Dept Elect Eng Delft University of Technology Delft

Netherlands 2003

[465] A K Al Jabri and AI Alolah ldquoCapacitance requirements for isolated self-excited

induction generatorrdquo Proceedings IEE pt B vol 137 no 3 pp 154-159 May

1990

[466] SR Guda ldquoModeling and power management of a hybrid wind-microturbine

power generation systemrdquo MS thesis Montana State University 2005

[467] Oslash Ulleberg and S O MOslashRNER ldquoTRNSYS simulation models for solar-hydrogen

systems rdquo Solar Energy Vol 59 No 4-6 pp 271-279 1997

[468] Oslashystein Ulleberg Stand-Alone Power Systems for the Future Optimal Design

Operation amp Control of Solar-Hydrogen Energy Systems PhD Dissertation

Norwegian University of Science and Technology Trondheim 1998

[469] TU Townsend A Method for Estimating the Long-Term Performance of

Direct-Coupled Photovoltaic Systems MS thesis University Of Wisconsin ndash

Madison 1989

[470] M R Patel Wind and Solar Power Systems CRC Press LLC 1999

[471] H Dehbonei Power conditioning for distributed renewable energy generation PhD Dissertation Curtin University of Technology Australia 2003

[472] MAS Masoum H Dehbonei and EF Fuchs ldquoTheoretical and experimental

analyses of photovoltaic systems with voltage and current-based maximum

power-point trackingrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 17 No 4

pp 514 ndash 522 Dec 2002

230

[473] JHR Enslin MS Wolf DB Snyman and W Swiegers ldquoIntegrated Photovoltaic

Maximum Power Point Tracking Converterrdquo IEEE Transactions On Industrial

Electronics Vol 44 No 6 December 1997

[474] S M Alghuwainem ldquoMatching of a dc motor to a photovoltaic generator using a

step-up converter with a current-locked looprdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy

Conversion vol 9 pp 192ndash198 Mar 1994

[475] Oslash Ulleberg ldquoModeling of advanced alkaline electrolyzers a system simulation approachrdquo International Journal of Hydrogen Energy Vol 28 pp 21-33 2003

[476] DW Hart Introduction to Power Electronics Prentice Hall 1997

[477] RD Middlebrook ldquoSmall-signal modeling of pulse-width modulated

switched-mode power convertersrdquo Proceedings of the IEEE Vol 76 No 4 pp 343

ndash 354 April 1988

[478] H Mao Study on Three-Phase High-Input-Power-Factor PWM-Voltage-Type

Reversible Rectifiers and Their Control Strategies PhD Dissertation Zhejiang

University 2000

[479] M Tsai WI Tsai ldquoAnalysis and Design of Three-phase AC-to-DC Converters

with High Power Factor and Near-Optimum Feedforwardrdquo IEEE Transactions on

Industrial Electronics Vol 46 No 3 pp535-543 June 1999

[480] C T RimN S Choi G C Cho G H Cho ldquoA Complete DC and AC Analysis of

Three-Phase Controlled-Current PWM Rectifier Using Circuit D-Q

Transformationrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Electronics Vol 9 No 4 pp

390-396 July 1994

[481] ZM Salameh MA Casacca and WA Lynch ldquoA mathematical model for

lead-acid batteriesrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 7 No1 pp

93-98 1992

[482] Handbook of Batteries 2nd edition D Linden Ed McGraw Hill Inc New York

NY 1995

[483] John Van de Vegte Feedback Control Systems (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall 1994

231

CHAPTER 5

CONTROL OF GRID-CONNECTED

FUEL CELL POWER GENERATION SYSTEMS

Introduction

Fuel cells show great promise to be an important distributed generation (DG) source

of the future due to many advantages they have such as high efficiency zero or low

emission (of pollutant gases) and flexible modular structure Fuel cell DGs can be

strategically placed at any site in a power system (normally at the distribution level) for

grid reinforcement deferring or eliminating the need for system upgrades and improving

system integrity reliability and efficiency When connected to a utility grid important

operation and performance requirements are imposed on fuel cell DGs For example they

should be able to deliver a pre-set amount of real and reactive power to the grid or be

able to follow a time varying load profile [52] [56] [527] Therefore proper

controllers need to be designed for a fuel cell DG to make its performance characteristics

as desired

Among different types of fuel cells proton exchange membrane fuel cells (PEMFC)

solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC) and molten carbonate fuel cells (MCFC) are likely to be

used in DG applications In order to study the performance characteristics of fuel cell

DGs accurate models of fuel cells are needed [51]-[58] Moreover models for the

interfacing power electronic circuits in a fuel cell DG are also needed to design

controllers for the overall system to improve its performance and to meet certain

232

operation requirements [57]-[59]

In this chapter the control of grid-connected FC systems is discussed Both a PEMFC

and a SOFC grid connected system are investigated The PEMFC model the SOFC

model and the models for boost DCDC converters and a three-phase inverter together

with a LC filter and transmission lines reported in Chapter 4 are used in this study The

controller design methodologies for the DCDC converters and the 3-phase inverter are

also presented for the proposed fuel cell DG systems Based on the individual component

models developed and the controllers designed simulation models for both a PEMFC DG

system and a SOFC DG system have been built in MATLABSimulink using the

SimPowerSystems block-set Simulation studies are carried out to investigate the real and

reactive power controllability of the fuel cell DG systems The system performances

under load-following and severe electrical faults are also discussed in this chapter

System Description

In order to meet the system operational requirements a fuel cell DG needs to be

interfaced through a set of power electronic devices The interface is very important as it

affects the operation of the fuel cell system as well as the power grid

Various power electronic circuits have been proposed in recent work to interface

different energy sources with the utility grid [59]-[516] Pulse-width modulated (PWM)

voltage source inverters (VSI) are widely used to interconnect a fuel cell energy system

to a utility grid for real and reactive power control purposes [59] [511] [515] [516]

233

Figure 51 Block diagram of a fuel cell distributed generation system

234

In addition fuel cell systems normally need boost DCDC converters to adapt the fuel

cell output voltage to the desired inverter input voltage and smooth the fuel cell output

current [517] [518]

Figure 51 shows the schematic diagram of the fuel cell DG system proposed in this

study In this dissertation the fuel cell power plant in the figure is either PEMFC or

SOFC type The system configuration ratings and parameters are given in Table 51 The

FC power plant consists of 10 fuel cell arrays connected in parallel Each array is rated at

48kW for a total of 480kW A boost converter is used to adapt the output voltage of each

fuel cell array to the DC bus voltage In this dissertation the DC bus voltage (DCDC

converter output) is chosen as VDC = 480V which is mainly determined by the inverter

AC output voltage and the voltage drop across the LC filter The following equation

should be satisfied between the DC side and AC side voltages of the inverter [515]

2

max

2

)(3)(22

3ILVVm fLLACDCa ω+ge (51)

where VDC is the DC bus voltage VACLL is the AC side line-line RMS voltage Lf is the

filter inductance Imax is the RMS value of maximum AC load current (IAC) and ma is the

modulation index of the inverter Linear pulse-width modulation (PWM) is used for the

inverter ie ma le 10 in this study

For a boost converter the higher the duty ratio (or the larger the voltage difference

between the input and output) the lower is the efficiency [516] In this study a duty ratio

around 55 is used for the DCDC converter at the fuel cellrsquos rated operating point The

approximate desired input voltage for the DCDC converter can be obtained to be

[ ]V216)5501( =timesminus DCV According to the V-I characteristics of the PEMFC given in

235

Figure 411 when the PEMFC load current is over 23A the fuel cell is in the

concentration zone which should be avoided [519] [520] In order to leave some safe

margin the fuel cell is operated around the point where its current is 20A (rated operating

point) and its output voltage (VPEMFC) is about 27V Therefore the number of PEMFC

stacks we need to connect in series to get a voltage of 216V is

827

216===

PEMFC

FC

sV

VN (52)

The number of PEMFC series stacks needed to compose a 48kW fuel cell array is

12508

48=

times=

times=

kW

kW

PN

PN

stacks

array

p (53)

Therefore each PEMFC array is composed of 8times12 stacks with the power rating of

48kW

For a SOFC array its configuration can be determined in a similar way According to

the SOFC V-I and P-I characteristics shown in Figures 420 and 422 when its load

current is over 110 A the SOFC stack is in the concentration zone where its output

voltage will decrease sharply as load current increases this situation should also be

avoided [519] In order to leave some safe margin the fuel cell is operated around the

point where its current is 100 A (rated operating point) and its output voltage (VSOFC) is

about 55 V Therefore the number (Ns) of fuel cell stacks we need to connect in series to

get a voltage of 220 V is

455

220===

SOFC

FC

sV

VN (54)

236

TABLE 51 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS OF THE PROPOSED SYSTEM

216V480kW PEMFC Power Plant

Ten 48kW FC arrays are connected in parallel

216V48kW consisting of PEMFC Array

8 (series)times12 (parallel) 500W fuel cell stacks

216V480kW SOFC Power Plant

Ten 48kW FC arrays are connected in parallel

216V48kW consisting of SOFC Array

200V480V 50kW each

Boost DCDC Converter 10 units connected in parallel

3-phase DCAC Inverter 480V DC208V AC 500kW

LC Filter Lf = 015mH Cf = 3065uF

Vn = 208V125kV Sn = 500kW Step Up Transformer

R1=R2=0005 pu X1=X2=0025 pu

Coupling Inductor Xc = 50Ω

05km ACSR 60 Transmission Line

R = 2149 Ωkm X = 05085 Ωkm

DC Bus Voltage 480V

AC Bus Voltage 120V208V

237

The total power rating of the series connection of 4 SOFC stacks (5 kW each) is 20

kW The number (Np) of these 20 kW SOFC units that need to be connected in parallel to

compose a 40 kW fuel cell array is

254

40=

times=

times=

kW

kW

PN

PN

stacks

array

p (55)

Therefore each 40 kW SOFC array is composed of 4times2 = 8 SOFC stacks (5 kW

each)

Super-capacitors or battery banks are connected to the DC bus to provide storage

capability and fast dynamic response to load transients A 3-phase 6-switch inverter

interfaces the DC bus with a 120208V AC power system An LC filter is connected to

the output of the inverter to reduce the harmonics introduced by the inverter A

208V125kV step up transformer connects the fuel cell power system to the utility grid

through a coupling inductor and a short transmission line The coupling inductor is

needed to control the real and reactive power flow between the fuel cell DG system and

the utility grid and to limit disturbance and fault currents

The controllers for the boost DCDC converters are designed to keep the DC bus

voltage within an acceptable band (plusmn5 in this study) Therefore the input to the 3-phase

inverter can be considered as a fairly good constant voltage source The inverter

controller controls the real and reactive power flows to the utility grid P Q power flows

follow their respective reference values which can either be set as fixed values or to

follow a certain load demand

238

Controller Designs for Power Electronic Devices

It was shown in Figures 411 and 420 that the output voltage of a fuel cell is a

function of load The boost DCDC converter adapts the fuel cell output voltage to the

DC bus voltage and the voltage controller helps regulate the output voltage within a plusmn5

tolerance band under normal operation In this section conventional PI controller is used

for the boost DCDC converters In practice a load sharing controller (not discussed in

this study) can be applied on the converters connected in parallel to achieve a uniform

load distribution among them [528] Also a dq transformed two-loop current control

scheme is presented for the inverter to control the real and reactive power delivered from

the fuel cell power system to the grid Based on the models for power electronic devices

discussed in Chapter 4 the designs for the controllers of power electronic devices are

given in this section

Controller Design for the Boost DCDC Converter

The main components of the DCDC converter can be determined by the prescribed

technical specifications such as the rated and peak voltage and current input current

ripple and output voltage ripple etc using the classic boost DCDC converter design

procedure [515] [516] The component values for the 48kW DCDC converter used in

this study are listed in Table 52 For a boost DCDC converter shown in Figure 469 the

transfer function of the output voltage over duty ratio )(sTvd is obtained as

minus+minus

minus++

==dddddd

dddddd

outdd

vdCL

XD

C

sX

CL

D

RCss

sd

svsT 21

2

_ )1(

)1()

1(

1

)(~

)(~

)( (56)

239

where D is the rated duty ratio of the switch X1 is the average current of inductor Ldd and

X2 is the output voltage at the rated operation point

The transfer function of PWM generator can be expressed as [515] [516]

tri

PWMV

sT1

)( = (57)

where Vtri is the saw-tooth waveform amplitude of PWM generator

The voltage ratio of the voltage transducer in Figure 469 is set as Kd = 1480 to

normalize the output voltage The PWM controller in the figure is chosen as a PI

controller with the transfer function

s

ksksG

didp

dc

+=)( (58)

Based on the transfer function in (56) the PI current controller can be designed using

the classic Bode-plot and root-locus method [521] The overall block diagram of its

control loop is shown in Figure 52 The parameters of the PI voltage controller are also

listed in Table 52 Figure 53 shows the open loop Bode plot of the system It is noted

from the figure that the system is quite stable and has 828deg phase margin

)(~_ sv outdd)(

~sd

Figure 52 Block diagram of the control loop for the boost DCDC converter

240

TABLE 52 SYSTEM PARAMETERS OF THE BOOST DCDC CONVERTER

Ldd 12 mH

Cdd 1000 uF

DN 05833

R 4608 Ω

X1 250 A

X2 480 V

kdi 50

kdp 005

-60

-40

-20

0

20Open-Loop Bode Plot Gc(s)T(s)

GM 884 dB

Freq 364 radsec

Stable loop

Magnitude (dB)

101

102

103

104

0

90

180

270

PM 828 deg

Freq 617 radsec

Phase (deg)

Frequency (radsec)

Figure 53 Bode plot of the control loop of the boost DCDC converter

241

Controller Design for the 3-Phase VSI

In order to meet the requirements for interconnecting a fuel cell system to a utility

grid and control the real and reactive power flow between them it is necessary to shape

and control the inverter output voltage in amplitude angle and frequency [522] In this

section a PWM controller is designed for the inverter shown in Figure 475 to satisfy

voltage regulation as well as to achieve real and reactive power control

Though the state-space equation (4156) in Chapter 4 is sufficient for theoretical

analysis and design it is too complicated to be applied in the actual controller design

from the engineering point of view In order to simplify the analysis and design a control

scheme consisting of an outer voltage regulator with an inner current control loop given

in [523] is adapted for inverter control The inner current control loop is designed to

respond faster than the outer voltage control loop so that these two loops can be

considered separately [523] [524]

Current Control Loop The ramp comparison method is used to generate the six PWM

signals in this study Base on the state-space averaging technique [515] [523] the

average value of the switching functions in a switching period is

( ) 321_

== kV

id

trim

ck

avgk (59)

where ick is the modulating (control) signal and trimV _ is the amplitude of the carrier

signal

Converting the control signals from abc coordinate into the dq frame yields

242

=

3

2

1

0 c

c

c

dqabc

c

cq

cd

i

i

i

T

i

i

i

(510)

where icd and icq are the control signals in dq frame and ic0 = 0 for the balanced system

Tabcdq is the abcdq transformation matrix as given in Appendix A

For the purpose of analysis only unity power factor operation (zero value on q axis)

is discussed in the section The effect of the capacitor Cf in the low pass LC filter (see

Figure 477) on the power frequency current is very small Therefore Cf can be neglected

when designing the current loop controller [523] Based on the state-space formula [see

(4156)] in Chapter 4 the current control loop can be represented in the diagram shown in

Figure 54

sLR ss +1

Figure 54 Block diagram of the current control loop of the inverter

GACR(s) in the figure is the current controller which is chosen as a generic PI

controller

s

ksksG

cicp

ACR

+=)( (511)

KPWM is the gain of the pulse generator

243

mtri

dcPWM

V

VK

_2= (512)

In the figure sLR ss +

1 is the model of the overall equivalent admittance of the LC

filter inductor power transformer coupling inductor and transmission line and kc is

simply the current transducer ratio The parameters of the current control loop are

summarized in Table 53

The transfer function of the current control loop can be obtained as

c

cc

refsd

sdc

P

si

sisT

∆∆

== 11

_ )(

)()( (513)

where )(

11

sLRKGP

ss

PWMACRc += 11 =∆ c

and)(

11

sLRk

KG

ssc

PWMACRc +

+=∆

TABLE 53 PARAMETERS OF THE CURRENT CONTROL LOOP THE INVERTER

Vdc 480 V

Vtri_m 1 V

Rs 0006316 Ω

Ls 01982 mH

kc 1388

kci 250

kcp 25

According to the parameters listed in Table 53 the Bode plot of the current control

loop is given in Figure 55 It is noted that the system is quite stable with phase margin of

882ordm

244

The unit step response of the current control loop is shown in Figure 56 It is noted

that the overshoot is about 25 and the equivalent dominant time constant is about

045ms Therefore the overall current control loop can be approximated by a simple lag

as

s

ksT

i

cc τ+

=1

)(ˆ (514)

where τi (045ms) is the equivalent time constant of the current control loop

The unit step response of )(ˆ sTcis also shown in Figure 56 This approximated

overall transfer function will be used in the following section to design the voltage

control loop

-20

0

20

40

60

80

GM Inf

Freq NaN

Stable loop

Magnitude (dB)

Current Control Loop Bode Plot

100

101

102

103

104

-180

-135

-90

PM 882 deg

Freq 218e+003 radsec

Phase (deg)

Frequency (radsec)

Figure 55 Bode plot of the current control loop

245

0 5 10 15 200

02

04

06

08

1

Time (ms)

Unit Step Response (pu)

Tc(s)

Simple lag approximation

Figure 56 Unit step response of the current control loop and its approximation

Voltage Control Loop Base on the state-space model given in (4156) in Chapter 4

the voltage control loop can be represented by the block diagram shown in Figure 57

For the purpose of analysis only the condition where the q-axis voltage component is

zero is discussed

GAVR

(s)_

+vsd_ref

isd

Rrsquos+Lrsquo

ss

ed

_+

vSd

1kv

s

k

i

c

τ+1

isd_ref

Current

Control Loop

Figure 57 Block diagram of the voltage control loop of the inverter

In the figure the GAVR(s) is the voltage regulator which is also chosen as a PI

246

controller

s

ksksG

vivp

AVR

+=)( (515)

Since the voltage control loop is designed to respond much slower than the inner

current control loop the current control loop can be approximated as a simple lag block

given in (514) to simplify analysis while without loosing accuracy [524]

sLR ss + in Figure 57 is the overall impedance of the power transformer coupling

inductor and transmission line and kv is the voltage transducer ratio The parameters of

the voltage control loop are listed in Table 54

The transfer function of the voltage control loop can be obtained as

v

vv

refsd

sd

v

P

sv

svsT

∆== 11

_ )(

)()( (516)

where ( )

s

sLRksGP

i

sscAVRv τ+

+=

1

)(1 11 =∆ v and

)1(

)()(1

sk

sLRksG

iv

sscAVRv τ+

++=∆

TABLE 54 PARAMETERS OF THE VOLTAGE CONTROL LOOP THE INVERTER

Rrsquos 0005316 Ω

Lrsquos 00482 mH

τi 045 ms

kc 1388

kv 1698

kvi 25

kvp 02

The Bode plot of the voltage control loop is shown in Figure 58 It is noted that the

247

system is stable with phase margin 91ordm

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

GM Inf

Freq NaN

Stable loop

Magnitude (dB)

Bode Plot of the Voltage Control Loop

100

101

102

103

104

105

-180

-90

0

90

Phase (deg)

PM 91 deg

Freq 109 radsec

Frequency (radsec)

Figure 58 Bode plot of the voltage control loop

Control of Power Flow Consider a voltage source δangsV connected to a utility

grid degang0E through a coupling impedance R+jX as shown in Figure 59 The real and

reactive powers delivered to the utility grid are [525]

δangsV degang0E

Figure 59 Power flow between a voltage source and utility grid

248

)cos()cos(2

zzs

Z

E

Z

EVP θδθ minusminus= (517)

)sin()sin(2

zzs

Z

E

Z

EVQ θδθ minusminus= (518)

where 22 XRZ += and )(tan 1 RXz

minus=θ

From (517) and (518) it is clear that the real and reactive powers delivered to the

utility grid are completely determined by the amplitude and angle of the sending voltage

source ie the output voltage of the inverter On the other hand if the desired values of

real and reactive power are given the values of Vs and δ can be determined from (517)

and (518)

2

1

222

2

2

)sin(2)cos(2)(

++++= zzs QZPZEQP

E

ZV θθ (519)

+minus= minus )cos(cos 1

z

ss

zV

E

EV

ZPθθδ (520)

The corresponding dq0 component values of the voltage can be obtained through

abcdq transformation as follows

deg+ang

degminusang

ang

=

=

)120(

)120(

0 δδ

δ

s

s

s

dqabc

c

b

a

dqabcq

d

V

V

V

T

V

V

V

T

V

V

V

(521)

249

Overall Power Control System for the Inverter The overall control system block

diagram for the inverter is given in Figure 510

Figure 510 Block diagram of the overall power control system of the inverter

In Figure 510 the ldquodq Reference Signal Computationrdquo block which is based on

equations (519) and (520) calculates the magnitude and angle of the filtered output

voltages of the inverter and then converts them into dq voltage reference signals

according to (521) The ldquoabcdq Transformationrdquo block takes the current and voltage

values (in abc coordinate) from the voltage and current meters and converts them into dq

values The outer voltage controller takes the error signals between the actual output

voltage in dq frame (Vdq) and the reference voltage (Vdq(ref)) and generates the current

250

reference signals (Idq(ref)) for the current control loop The inner current controller

produces the dq control signals which are converted back into the control signals in abc

coordinates through the ldquodqabc Transformationrdquo block These control signals are used to

modulate the sinusoidal pulse width modulation (SPWM) pulse generator to produce the

proper pulses for the inverter switches (Figure 477) which control the inverter output

voltage

The controllers given in this section for power electronic converters are designed on

the basis of small-signal linearized models Conceptually there is no guarantee that the

designed controllers will work well over a large operating range because of the

nonlinearity of power electronic devices Nevertheless the majority of controllers for

power electronic devices are linear time-invariant (LTI) that are designed on the basis of

linearized models The effectiveness of LTI controllers can be checked through

simulations on switched (nonlinear) models rather than the linearized ones used for the

initial controller design [530] We have verified the validity of the proposed control

schemes over a large operating range through simulations on nonlinear converterinverter

models The simulation results will be discussed in the following section

Simulation Results

Based on the individual component models developed in Chapter 4 and the

controllers designed in this chapter simulation models for both a PEMFC DG system and

a SOFC DG system have been built in MATLABSimulink using SimPowerSystems

block-set The system was tested under several different operating conditions to

investigate its power management and load-following capabilities as well as its stability

251

during electrical faults Sample simulation results from the scenarios studied are given

below

Desired P and Q Delivered to the Grid Heavy Loading

Normally when a utility is under heavy load it needs the connected DGs to deliver

more real power to the grid The DGs may also be required to deliver reactive power to

the grid to help boost the grid voltage Simulation results for such a scenario are given in

this sub-section for both PEMFC and SOFC DGs

PEMFC DG The reference values of P and Q are set as 360kW and 323kVar with a

ramp startup with 2s for this case study The voltage of the utility grid was set to E =

098 degang0 pu Using (519) and (520) the desired magnitude and angle of the filtered

output voltage of the inverter turn out to be Vs = 105 pu δ = 82678ordm Converting the

values from the abc reference frame into dq coordinates yields Vd (ref) = 10391 pu and

Vq (ref) = 0151 pu A 3-phase AC circuit breaker connects the inverter to the utility grid at

t=008s Figure 511 shows the real and reactive power delivered from the PEMFC DG

to the grid when the DG reaches its steady-state operation from the initial startup Note

that the output steady-state values of P and Q agree with their reference values very well

The corresponding dq components of the inverter output voltage are given in Figure 512

It is noted that the dq components of the output voltage also reach their prescribed

reference values

252

0 1 2 3 4 50

1

2

3

4x 10

5

P (W)

0 1 2 3 4 5-5

0

5

10

15x 10

4

Time (s)

Q (Var)

Pref = 360kW

Qref = 323kVar

Figure 511 PEMFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under heavy loading

0 1 2 3 4 5-05

0

05

1

15

2

Time (s)

dq Values of the Inverter Output Voltage (pu)

Vd reference value = 10391

Vq reference value = 0151

Figure 512 PEMFC DG dq values of the inverter output voltage under heavy load

253

The output voltage and current responses of each fuel cell array for this case are

shown in Figure 513 Note that when the system reaches steady-state the fuel cell output

current ripple is about 10 and the fuel cell output voltage ripple is less than 33 These

relatively small variations of the current and voltage are indicative of the healthy

operation of fuel cells [526] The DC bus voltage (output voltage of the boost DCDC

converter) for this case is shown in Figure 514 Note that the DC bus voltage comes up

to its reference value (480V) though the fuel cell terminal voltage is much lower than its

no-load value under this heavy loading condition (see Figure 513) The voltage ripple at

the DC bus is about 125 which is within the acceptable range of plusmn5

0 1 2 3 4 5150

200

250

300

350

FC Output Voltage (V)

0 1 2 3 4 5-100

0

100

200

300

Time (s)

FC Output Current (A)

Figure 513 PEMFC DG Output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under

heavy load

254

0 1 2 3 4 5300

400

500

600

700

Time (s)

DC Bus Voltage (V)

Desired Voltage = 480V

Figure 514 PEMFC DG DC bus voltage waveform under heavy load

SOFC DG The reference values of P and Q (Pref and Qref in Figure 510) are set as

450 kW and 845 kVar (heavy loading) with a ramp startup in 2s for this case study The

voltage of the utility grid was set to E = 098 degang0 pu Figure 515 shows the reference

and actual values of the real and reactive power delivered from the SOFC DG to the grid

Note that the final values of P and Q (delivered to the grid by the SOFC DG) agree with

their reference values very well

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-200

0

200

400

600

P (kW)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-100

0

100

200

Time (s)

Q (kVar)

Qref = 845kVar

Pref = 450 kW

Figure 515 SOFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under heavy loading

255

0 1 2 3 4 5 6250

300

350

400

450

SOFC output voltage (V)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-100

0

100

200

Time (s)

SOFC output current (A)

Figure 516 SOFC DG Output voltage and current of each FC array under heavy load

0 1 2 3 4 5 6300

400

500

600

Time (s)

DC bus voltage (V)

VDC ref = 480V

Figure 517 SOFC DG DC bus voltage under heavy loading

The output voltage and current curves of each 40 kW SOFC array (input to each

DCDC converter) for the above heavy loading case are shown in Figure 516 Note that

when the system output power reaches its pre-set value the fuel cell output current ripple

is about 10 and the fuel cell output voltage ripple is around 3 These relatively small

variations of the current and voltage are indicative of the healthy operation of fuel cells

[531] The DC bus voltage (output voltage of the boost DCDC converter) for this case is

256

shown in Figure 517 Note that the DC bus voltage comes up to its reference value

(480V) though the fuel cell terminal voltage is much lower than its no-load value under

this heavy loading condition (see Figure 516) The voltage ripple at the DC bus is about

15 which is within the acceptable range

Desired P Delivered to the Grid Q Consumed from the Grid Light Loading

PEMFC DG Under light utility loading the power required from the fuel cell DG is

normally low and the DG may be set to consume the excessive reactive power from the

grid ie Qlt0 This scenario is examined in this sub-section The reference values of P

and Q were set at Pref=100 kW and Qref=-318 kVar with an initial step-change startup

The voltage of the utility grid is set to E = 10 degang0 pu for this case study Using

equations (519) and (520) the desired amplitude and angle of the filtered output voltage

of the inverter turn out to be Vs = 10 pu δ = 2648ordm Converting the values into dq

coordinates we get Vd(ref)= 099893 pu and Vq(ref) = 00463 pu

Figure 518 shows the real and reactive power responses of the fuel cell DG Note that

at steady-state the fuel cell power system delivers 100kW of real power to the grid and

consumes 318 kVar of reactive power from the grid (Q=-318kVar) which match the

reference values set for P and Q

257

0 05 1 15 2 25 3-5

0

5

10

15x 10

4

P (W)

0 05 1 15 2 25 3-10

-5

0

5x 10

4

Time (s)

Q (Var)

Pref = 100kW

Qref = -318kVar

Figure 518 PEMFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid light loading

0 05 1 15 2 25 3260

280

300

320

FC Output Voltage (V)

0 05 1 15 2 25 3-50

0

50

100

150

Time (s)

FC Output Current (A)

Figure 519 PEMFC DG Output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under light loading

258

Figure 520 shows the DC output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under

light loading In this case the fuel cell output current percentage ripple is bigger than that

of case A due to lighter loading However the fuel cell output voltage ripple is only

about 2 which is even less than that of case A due to a higher steady-state fuel cell

output voltage under light loading

SOFC DG Similar to the case of PEMFC DG under light loading the SOFC DG

delivers less real power to the grid (compared to heavy loading condition) and may be

set to consume the excessive reactive power from the grid ie Qlt0 The simulation

results of this scenario study are given in Figures 520 and 521 The reference values of

P and Q are set as 250kW and -531kVar with a ramp startup in 2 s for this case study

The voltage of the utility grid was set to E = 10 degang0 pu Figure 521 shows the

reference and actual values of the real and reactive power delivered from the SOFC DG

to the grid Note that the output final values of P and Q agree with their reference values

very well The corresponding fuel cell array output voltage and current are given in

Figure 521 The current ripple percentage which is about 25 of the SOFC output

current under light loading is larger than heavy loading due to the lower average value of

the load current However the fuel cell output voltage ripple (about 2) under light

loading is even smaller than heavy loading since the average value of the voltage is

higher in this case

From the above simulation results it is noted that both the PEMFC and SOFC DG

systems can be controlled to deliver the pre-set amount of real and reactive power For

the purpose of text length only the simulation results of the PEMFC DG system are

259

given in the following simulation studies

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-100

0

100

200

300P (kW)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-100

-50

0

50

Time (s)

Q (kVar)

Pref = 250 kW

Qref = -531 kVar

Figure 520 SOFC DG P and Q delivered to the grid under light loading

0 1 2 3 4 5 6300

350

400

450

SOFC output voltage (V)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-50

0

50

100

Time (s)

SOFC output current (A)

Figure 521 SOFC DG Output voltage and current of each fuel cell array under light

load

260

Load-Following Analysis

Fixed Grid Power In a fuel cell DG system a certain amount of power may be

scheduled to be delivered to a load center (micro-grid) from the utility grid with the rest

to be supplied by the fuel cell system Therefore a proper load-following controller must

be designed to ensure that only scheduled power is delivered from the grid and that the

fuel cell system follows the remainder of load demand In the deregulated power market

the ancillary service costs due to load-following operations can be as high as 20 of the

total ancillary service costs [527] Figure 522 shows the system configuration for which

the load-following study was carried out for PEMFC DG Bus 1 in the figure can be

considered as a micro-grid bus to which the PEMFC DG and the power grid are

connected to supply power to the load The power delivered from the grid (PGrid) is kept

constant (PGridsched) and the PEMFC DG is required to follow load as it changes

The load-following control diagram is also shown in Figure 522 PGrid is measured

and compared with the grid scheduled power The error (∆PGrid) is then fed through the

load-following controller to generate the adjustment power reference value (∆PFCref)

which is added to the initial power reference value (0

refFCP ) to give the new power

reference value (PFCref) for the PEMFC DG system The load-following controller can be

a simple PI controller Therefore as load varies PFCref is adjusted to ensure that the fuel

cell DG will compensate the changes of PLoad It should be noted that fuel cell power

adjustment is assumed to be within the safe operating range of the fuel cell DG

In this case study PGrid is set to 100kW (1 pu) As shown in Figure 523 at the

beginning the load is 2 pu and therefore the fuel cell system delivers the remaining 1

261

pu power to the load At t=03s the load demand steps up to 3 pu and drops back to its

original value (2 pu) at t=41s It is noted from Figure 523 that the power grid responds

to the initial load changes and then the PEMFC DG picks up the load changes to keep

the grid power at its scheduled value The simulation results show that the PEMFC DG

can follow the load power changes in less than 2s

GridP∆refFCP ∆

0

refFCP

Figure 522 System for the PEMFC DG load-following study

Fixed FC Power Referring to the system shown in Figure 524 the simulation study

for the scenario that the FC power plant is scheduled to supply a fixed amount of power

to the micro-grid while the grid will pick up the load variations The power delivered

from the FC DG is set to 200 kW The load changes used for this case study are the same

as the previous case The simulation results are shown in Figure 525 It is noted that the

FC power is kept well at 200 kW When the load changes at 03 s and 41 s the grid

balances the changes almost simultaneously as shown in Figure 525

262

1 2 3 4 5 6 70

2

4Sbase = 100kVA

PLoad (pu)

1 2 3 4 5 6 70

2

4

PGrid (pu)

1 2 3 4 5 6 70

2

4

Time (s)

PFC (pu)

Figure 523 Power curves of the load-following study with fixed grid power

Figure 524 System for the PEMFC DG load-following study

263

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 71

2

3

4PLoad (pu)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 70

1

2

PGrid (pu)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 70

1

2

3

Time (s)

PFC (pu)

Sbase = 100 kVA

Figure 525 Power curves of the load-following study with fixed FC power

Fault Analysis

It is important to know whether the fuel cell DG system will remain stable under an

electrical fault In this section the stability of the PEMFC DG under electrical faults is

investigated The FC DG system shown in Figure 526 delivers 2 pu to the utility grid

before the fault A severe 3-phase fault is simulated to occur at t=07s at the low voltage

side of the step-up transformer connecting the FC DG to the grid as shown in Figure

526 The fault lasts for 5 cycles (00833s) and is cleared at t=07833s

264

Figure 526 Faulted fuel cell DG system

The power flow through the transmission line is shown in Figure 527 During the

fault the transmission line power changes direction (flowing from the grid toward the

fault) since the utility grid also supplies power to the faulted point As shown in the

figure the fuel cell system remains stable after the disturbance Though the system is

stable there is a rush of power delivered from the fuel cell power plant to the utility grid

when the fault is cleared This is due to the large phase difference between the utility grid

and the inverter output voltage when the fault is cleared A soft-starting and a

re-connection controller can be added to limit the peak power when the system recovers

from a fault

One advantage of the two-loop (voltage and current) inverter control is its capability

to limit fault currents To show this advantage the simulation with the same fault on the

system with only voltage control on the inverter was also conducted for comparison The

output power of the PEMFC DG under these two different inverter control strategies is

shown in Figure 528 It is noticed that the system does not remain stable when only

voltage control is applied for inverter control Since there is no current limit control for

this case the fuel cell output current increases sharply due to the fault and exceeds the

current corresponding to the fuel cell maximum power point As a result the fuel cell

265

output power drops sharply It can be observed from Figure 528 that the system with

two-loop inverter control comes back to the pre-fault state while the system with only

voltage control on the inverter can not recover to its original state

Similar 3-phase electrical faults were also simulated on several other points along the

transmission line in Figure 526 In these cases the FC DG remained stable under the

two-loop control scheme

05 1 15 2 25 3 35-15

-1

-05

0

05

1x 10

6

Time (s)

Transmission Line Power (W)

200kW

t=07s

t=07833s

Figure 527 Faulted PEMFC DG Power flow of the transmission line

266

05 1 15 2 25 3 350

1

2

3

4

5

6x 10

5

Time (s)

FC Output Power (W)

Two-Loop Control

Voltage Control Only

Figure 528 Faulted PEMFC DG Fuel cell output powers for the fault studies

Summary

Control of grid-connected FC DG systems are investigated in this chapter The

PEMFC and SOFC models the model for boost DCDC converters and the model for

3-phase voltage source inverters are used to develop a simulation model for a

grid-connected FC system Controller designs for the DCDC converter and the 3-phase

inverter are given using linearized small-signal converterinverter models Conventional

PI voltage feedback controllers are used for the DCDC converters to regulate the DC bus

voltage and a dq transformed two-loop current control scheme is used on the inverter to

control the real and reactive power delivered from the fuel cell system to the utility grid

A MATLABSimulink model of the proposed FC DG system was implemented using

the SimPowerSystems block-set The validity of the proposed control schemes over a

267

large operating range was verified through simulations on switched nonlinear

converterinverter models Simulation results of the case studies show that the real and

reactive power delivered from the fuel cell system to the utility grid can be controlled as

desired while the DC bus voltage is maintained well within the prescribed range The

results also show that the fuel cell system is capable of load-following and can remain

stable under the occurrence of severe electrical faults It is noticed that a two-loop

inverter control scheme has advantage over a voltage only control scheme for the inverter

on fault protection and system stability

268

REFERENCES

[51] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation

for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy

Conversion vol 20 no 2 pp442-451 June 2005

[52] C J Hatziadoniu AA Lobo F Pourboghrat and MDaneshdoost ldquoA simplified

dynamic model of grid-connected fuel-cell generatorsrdquo IEEE Transactions on

Power Delivery Vol 17 No 2 pp 467-473 April 2002

[53] M DLukas K Y Lee H Ghezel-Ayagh ldquoDevelopment of a Stack Simulation

Model for Control Study on Direct Reforming Molten Carbonate Fuel Cell Power

Plantrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol14 No 4 pp1651-1657

Dec 1999

[54] J Padulleacutes GW Ault and J R McDonald ldquoAn integrated SOFC plant dynamic

model for power system simulationrdquo J Power Sources pp495ndash500 2000

[55] K Sedghisigarchi and A Feliachi ldquoDynamic and Transient Analysis of Power

Distribution Systems with Fuel CellsmdashPart I Fuel-Cell Dynamic Modelrdquo IEEE

Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 2 pp423-428 June 2004

[56] K Sedghisigarchi and A Feliachi ldquoDynamic and Transient Analysis of Power

Distribution Systems with Fuel CellsmdashPart II Control and Stability

Enhancementrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 19 No 2

pp429-434 June 2004

[57] Z Miao M A Choudhry R L Klein and L Fan ldquoStudy of A Fuel Cell Power

Plant in Power Distribution System ndash Part I Dynamic Modelrdquo Proc IEEE PES

General Meeting June 2004 Denver CO

[58] Z Miao M A Choudhry R L Klein and L Fan ldquoStudy of A Fuel Cell Power

Plant in Power Distribution System ndash Part II Stability Controlrdquo Proceedings IEEE PES General Meeting June 2004 Denver CO

[59] D Candusso L Valero and A Walter ldquoModelling control and simulation of a fuel

cell based power supply system with energy managementrdquo Proceedings 28th

Annual Conference of the IEEE Industrial Electronics Society (IECON 2002) Vol

2 pp1294-1299 2002

[510] R Naik N Mohan M Rogers and A Bulawka ldquoA Novel Grid Interface

Optimized for Utility-scale Applications of Photovoltaic Wind-electric and

269

Fuel-cell systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery Vol 10 No 4 pp

1920-1926 Oct 1995

[511] W Shireen and MS Arefeen ldquoAn utility interactive power electronics interface

for alternaterenewable energy systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion

Vol 11 No 3 pp 643-649 Sept 1996

[512] G Spiazzi S Buso GM Martins JA Pomilio ldquoSingle phase line frequency

commutated voltage source inverter suitable for fuel cell interfacingrdquo 2002 IEEE 33rd Annual IEEE Power Electronics Specialists Conference Vol 2 pp734-739

2002

[513] K Ro and S Rahman ldquoControl of Grid-connected Fuel Cell Plants for

Enhancement of Power System Stabilityrdquo Renewable Energy Vol 28 No 3 pp

397-407 March 2003

[514] H Komurcugil and O Kukrer ldquoA novel current-control method for three-phase

PWM ACDC voltage-source convertersrdquo IEEE Transactions on Industrial

Electronics Vol 46 No 3 pp 544-553 June 1999

[515] N Mohan T M Undeland and W P Robbins Power Electronics ndash Converters

Applications and Design John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2003

[516] DW Hart Introduction to Power Electronics Prentice Hall 1997

[517] M H Todorovic L Palma P Enjeti ldquoDesign of a Wide Input Range DC-DC

Converter with a Robust Power Control Scheme Suitable for Fuel Cell Power

Conversionrdquo 19th Annual IEEE Applied Power Electronics Conference CA 2004

[518] SM N Hasan S Kim I Husain ldquoPower Electronic Interface and Motor Control for a Fuel Cell Electric Vehiclerdquo 19th Annual IEEE Applied Power Electronics

Conference CA 2004

[519] Fuel Cell Handbook (Fifth Edition) EGampG Services Parsons Inc DEO of Fossil

Energy National Energy Technology Lab Oct 2000

[520] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained John Wiley amp

Sons Ltd 2001

[521] John Van de Vegte Feedback Control Systems (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall 1994

[522] IEEE Std 1547 IEEE Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Resources with Electric Power Systems 2003

270

[523] M Tsai WI Tsai ldquoAnalysis and Design of Three-phase AC-to-DC Converters

with High Power Factor and Near-Optimum Feedforwardrdquo IEEE Transactions on

Industrial Electronics Vol 46 No 3 pp535-543 June 1999

[524] H Mao Study on Three-Phase High-Input-Power-Factor PWM-Voltage-Type

Reversible Rectifiers and Their Control Strategies PhD Dissertation (in Chinese)

Zhejiang University 2000

[525] J D Glover MS Sarma Power System Analysis and Design 3rd Edition

Wadsworth Group BrooksCole 2002

[526] RS Gemmen ldquoAnalysis for the effect of inverter ripple current on fuel cell

operating conditionrdquo Transactions of the ASME - Journal of Fluids Engineering

Vol 125 No 3 pp576-585 May 2003

[527] Y Zhu and K Tomsovic ldquoDevelopment of models for analyzing the

load-following performance of microturbines and fuel cellsrdquo Journal of Electric

Power Systems Research pp 1-11 Vol 62 2002

[528] R Wu T Kohama Y Kodera T Ninomiya and F Ihara ldquoLoad-Current-Sharing

Control for Parallel Operation of DC-to-DC Convertersrdquo IEEE PESCrsquo93 pp

101-107 June 1993 Seattle WA

[529] PC Krause O Wasynczuk and SD Sudhoff Analysis of Electric Machinery

IEEE Press 1995

[530] John G Kassakian Martin F Schlecht and George C Verghese Principles of

Power Electronics pp 280-293 Addison-Wesley Publishing Company 1991SK

[531] Mazumder K Acharya CL Haynes R Williams Jr MR von Spakovsky DJ Nelson DF Rancruel J Hartvigsen and RS Gemmen ldquoSOFC Performance and

Durability Resolution of the Effects of Power-Conditioning Systems and

Application Loadsrdquo IEEE Transactions On Power Electronics Vol 19 No 5 pp

1263-1278 September 2004

271

CHAPTER 6

CONTROL OF STAND-ALONE FUEL CELL POWER GENERATION SYSTEMS

Introduction

As discussed in the previous chapters both PEMFC and SOFC show great potential

in DG and vehicular applications They are good energy sources to provide reliable

power at steady state but they cannot respond to electrical load transients as fast as

desired This is mainly due to their slow internal electrochemical and thermodynamic

responses [61] Load transients will cause a low-reactant condition inside the fuel cells

which is considered to be harmful and will shorten their life [62] In order to overcome

this weakness fuel cells can be combined with other energy sources with fast dynamics

such as battery or super-capacitor to form a hybrid power system [63]-[66] Dynamic

behavior of a PEMFC and lead-acid battery system was investigated in [63] while no

control was discussed in the paper Fuel cells and super-capacitor banks together with

boost DCDC converters are proposed in [64] to achieve a constant output dc voltage A

fuel cell-battery hybrid system is given in [66] however the paper concentrates on the

design of a new DCDC converter for fuel cell and battery applications only

In this chapter a load transient mitigation technique is proposed for stand-alone fuel

cell-battery power generation systems This technique is used to control the system in a

way that during a load transient the fuel cell provides the steady-state load and the

battery will supply the transient load The battery voltage is controlled to remain within a

272

desired range Meanwhile the fuel cell output current ripple is also limited in a certain

low range which is also important to fuel cellrsquos healthy operation and life time [62]

[67] [68]

The dynamic models for PEMFC SOFC and lead-acid batteries discussed in Chapter

4 are used in this chapter for FC load mitigation study Based on these component

models and the proposed control technique simulation studies have been carried out for

both PEMFC and SOFC systems to verify the effectiveness of the proposed technique

System Description and Control Strategy

Figure 61 shows the schematic diagram for the proposed FC-battery power

generation system where a boost DCDC converter is used to adapt the fuel cell output

voltage to the battery voltage (220 V in this study) Load mitigation will be investigated

both for a PEMFC and a SOFC based system The models for a 500W PEMFC and a 5

kW SOFC discussed in Chapter 4 are used to model the FC unit shown in Figure 61

For the example PEMFC based system studied the fuel cell unit consists of four 500 W

PEMFC stacks connected in series to provide a 2 kW PEMFC unit For the SOFC based

system the fuel cell unit is a single 5kW SOFC stack The system load can either be DC

or AC (interfaced through an inverter)

Load Mitigation Control

Load mitigation control is achieved through a current controller for the DCDC

converter Given that fuel cells are good energy sources (for providing steady-state

power) but not good power sources for transient conditions [61] [63] the purpose of

273

the proposed control strategy is to control the fuel cell to only supply steady state power

while the battery will supply the transient power to the load The load current (Iload) is fed

back through a low-pass filter to get rid of high-frequency transients This filtered load

current signal (Iref1) plus the output signal (Iref2) from the battery chargingdischarging

controller is taken as the reference signal (Iref) to control the DCDC converter Then the

output current of the DCDC converter (idd_out) is compared with the reference signal Iref

and the error signal is processed by the current controller to control the duty ratio of the

switch in the converter

The peak-to-peak ripple of the converter input current (fuel cell output current idd_in

in Figure 61) should also be controlled within a certain range (10 in this study) for

healthy operation of the fuel cell [62] [67] [68] The main components of the DCDC

converter can be selected on the basis of technical specifications such as rated and peak

voltage and current input current ripple and output voltage ripple etc using the classic

design procedure given in [612] [614] The component values for the 5kW DCDC

converter model used in this study are listed in Table 61 The value of the coupling

inductor (Ldd_out) is selected so that the combination of this inductor with the capacitor

(Cdd) yields a low resonant frequency (lt 10Hz in this study) to smooth out the converter

output current (idd_out)

274

Figure 61 Schem

atic diagram of a FC-battery hybrid system

with load transient mitigation control

275

dd_outV∆ ref

dd_out

V

∆V

gele

Figure 62 Schematic diagram of the battery chargingdischarging controller

An approximate state-space model of the converter at the rated operating point can be

derived using the averaging technique proposed by Middlebrook and Cuacutek explained in

[612] [615] Based on the converter model a PI current controller ( skk ip + ) can be

designed using the classic Bode-plot and root-locus method [613] The parameters of the

PI current controller are also listed in Table 61 The battery chargingdischarging

controller design and the optimal choice of the filter will be discussed in the following

sub-sections

TABLE 61 PARAMETERS OF THE DCDC CONVERTER

Ldd_in 12 mH

Cdd 2500 uF

Ldd_out 120 mH

fs (Switch Frequency) 5 kHz

ki 20

kp 002

276

Battery ChargingDischarging Controller

The battery in the system of Figure 61 is designed to buffer transient power A 220V

05kWh battery model discussed in Chapter 4 is used in the study The model

parameters are listed in Table 62 For healthy operation of the battery bank its voltage is

kept within plusmn5 of its nominal value A battery chargingdischarging controller is

designed as shown in Figure 62 In this figure Vref is the battery nominal voltage (220V)

The regulation constant Kc in the figure is determined by assuming that the

chargingdischarging adjustment of 5 voltage deviation can be achieved in half hour

(1800s) That is

1800

050 b

c

CK = (61)

where Cb is the battery capacitance

TABLE 62 PARAMETERS OF THE BATTERY MODEL

Cb 300 F

Rp 25 MΩ

R2 0075 Ω

C1 500 F

R1 01 Ω

The ldquonormalizedrdquo block normalizes the filtered battery voltage deviation (∆Vdd_out)

with respect to the reference voltage (Vref) The ldquo|abs|rdquo block will give a nonnegative

output (ref

outdd

V

V _∆) regardless of whether ∆Vdd_out is positive or negative ie whether the

battery voltage is higher or lower than the reference voltage The ldquorelayrdquo block in the

277

figure is a hysteresis block set as follows it will turn on (output = 1) when the input is

larger than 5 and will continue to be on until the input to the block is less than 05

Otherwise the output of the relay block is zero The battery will be charged (discharged)

at a constant current when its voltage is lower than 95 (higher than 105) of its rated

value The charging (discharging) process will stop when the battery voltage is within

05 of its rated value Therefore as long as the battery voltage is lower than 095Vref a

positive extra reference signal

1800

0502

refb

ref

VCI = (62)

will be generated for the current controller This reference value is kept until the voltage

is higher than 0995Vref On the other hand if the battery voltage is higher than 105Vref a

negative extra current reference value (1800

050 refbVCminus ) is generated and this value will be

held until the battery voltage is lower than 1005Vref Otherwise the output of the battery

chargingdischarging controller is zero

Filter Design

The choice of the low-pass filter needed for the load transient mitigation controller is

a trade-off design between the storage capacity of the battery and the smooth response of

fuel cell to load transients Figure 63 shows an example of the responses of different

low-pass filters to a load transient The damping factors of filters are all set to 1 to avoid

any oscillation It is noted from the figure that the higher is the cut-off frequency of the

filter the shorter is the settling time of the response A filter with shorter settling time

requires smaller storage battery capacity but may cause undesired overshoot On the

278

other hand the lower is the filter cut-off frequency the longer is the rise time of the filter

response and the smoother is the fuel cell response However a larger battery capacity is

needed if a lower cut-off frequency is chosen for the filter Therefore a trade off has to be

made to choose an optimal filter In practical applications one can estimate the fastest

possible load transient based on the load information at the location where the fuel cell

will be installed Transients with frequencies higher than 1250Hz can be neglected since

they do not affect the fuel cell performance significantly [62] Then one decides what

overshoot value (current ripple) is tolerable by the fuel cell An overshoot less than 10

which normally will not cause any significant impact on the fuel cellrsquos healthy operation

[62] [67] can be considered a good value The filter can therefore be chosen for the

fastest load transient with the highest possible cut-off frequency while its output

overshoot will not exceed a prescribed value (10 suggested in this study)

0 1 2 3 4 54

6

8

10

12

14

16

Time (s)

Responses of different filters (A) Original Transient

Filter fcutoff

= 3Hz

Filter fcutoff

= 1Hz

Filter fcutoff

= 05Hz

Figure 63 Example of the responses of different filters to a load transient

279

Simulation Results

The PEMFC and SOFC models and the battery model discussed Chapter 4 were used

to develop simulation models for a stand-alone PEMFC-battery and a SOFC-battery

power generation system in MATLABSimulink using SimPowerSystems block-set Both

systems are controlled by the load transient mitigation technique proposed in the previous

section The system performance under load transients is investigated to verify that power

flow is controlled in such a way that the fuel cells only provide steady-state power while

the battery will supply transient power to the load Simulation results on

chargingdischarging performance of the battery are also given

Load Transients

For the purpose of verifying the system performance under different load transients

both DC load transients and AC load transients were tested for the PEMFC and SOFC

based power systems Since the power rating of the PEMFC system studied is different

from that of the SOFC system different (but same type of) load transients will be used

for the two systems

280

0 5 10 15 200

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Amature current of DC motor (A)

5kW220V DC motor(load for SOFC)

25HP220V DC motor(load for PEMFC)

Figure 64 Load transient of starting a 25HP and a 5kW 220V DC motor

DC Load Transients The DC load transient due to a DC motor starting is used in the

simulation study Figure 64 shows the load current transient applied to the PEMFC and

SOFC systems when a DC motor is started with full voltage in three steps of resistance

starting A 25 HP220 V DC motor load is used for the 2 kW PEMFC-battery system and

a 5 kW220 V DC motor is used for the SOFC system

AC Load Transients A general dynamic load model is used to model AC load current

transients This transient current model is defined as follows

tteIeIIti 21

210)(αα minusminus minus+= (63)

where I0 I1 and I2 are non-negative constants and 012 gtgt αα It is assumed that the

load transient starts at t=0 in the above equation and i(t) is the amplitude of load current

at 60Hz

281

The above five constant parameters can be determined by the following equations

asympminus

=minus+

=minus

=minus+

=

minusminus

infin

S

peak

TT

p

TII

ieIeII

TI

I

iIII

iI

pp

1

01

210

12

11

22

0210

0

)020ln(ln

ln

21

α

αααα

αα

(64)

where i0 and iinfin are the initial and final values of the transient load current Tp is the time

that it takes the transient current to reach its peak value (ipeak) and TS is the settling time

which takes the transient to settle to within plusmn2 of its final value Therefore by

specifying the initial value (i0) final value (iinfin) peak value of the transient (ipeak) how fast

the transient reaches its peak (Tp) and how long it takes the transient to reach steady state

(TS) we can calculate the five parameters in (64) numerically Figure 65 shows the load

transient curve used for the PEMFC system which starts at 1s The parameters of this

load transient are I0 = 1584A I1 = 792A I2 = 9504A 51 =α and 302 =α The

parameters of the AC load current transient for the SOFC system studied are I0 = 396A

I1 = 198A I2 = 2376A 51 =α and 302 =α The load transient obtained when these

are used in (63) is similar to the waveform shown in Figure 65 but with a higher

magnitude

282

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

Time (s)

AC Side Load Current (A)

Figure 65 AC load transient used on PEMFC-battery system

Load mitigation

In this sub-section simulation results are presented for load transient mitigation

studies of PEMFC and SOFC systems Throughout the studies in this part it is assumed

that the battery in the system studied is fully charged to its rated voltage 220 V before

the application of load transients

PEMFC System First the system is tested under the DC motor load transient shown

in Figure 64 The cut-off frequency of the low-pass filter in this simulation is chosen to

be 01 Hz and the damping factor is set to 1 The corresponding current reference signal

(Iref in Figure 61) shown in Figure 66 shows that the rise time of the filter response to

283

the load transient is less than 10 s and there is no overshoot The battery current (ib) and

the converter output current (idd_out) responding to the load transient current are also

shown in Figure 66 The figure shows that idd_out follows the reference signal (Iref) very

well they almost overlap each other It is noted from the figure that the battery picks up

the transient current while the converter output current rises smoothly (as designed) from

its previous steady-state to its next steady-state value The corresponding PEMFC current

and voltage responses are shown in Figure 67 It is noted that the PEMFC outputs vary

smoothly during the load transient the PEMFC is controlled to supply only the

steady-state current to the load It is also noted that the fuel cell current ripple is around

55 which is within the acceptable range (10)

For the purpose of comparison a simulation study was carried out on the PEMFC

system shown in Figure 61 with a typical voltage controller for the DCDC converter

only (ie iload and idd_out are not fed back and Ldd_out is taken out in Figure 61) The

controller is used to keep the converter output voltage constant under load variations

Figure 67 also shows the PEMFC output voltage for this case study when the DC load

transient (Figure 64) is applied to the PEMFC system It is noted that the system fails to

start the DC motor under this case hence justifying the need for the current controller

284

0 5 10 15 200

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Current (A)

Battery current (ib)

Iref

idd_out

Figure 66 Reference signal (Iref) for the current controller battery current (ib) and

converter output current (idd_out) under the load transient for PEMFC shown in Figure 64

0 5 10 15 200

5

10

15

20

Current (A)

0 5 10 15 2040

80

120

160

200

Time (s)

Voltage (V)

PEMFC Voltage

PEMFC Current

System failedto start with only a

voltage controller

Figure 67 The PEMFC output current and voltage responses to the DC load transient

shown in Figure 64

285

Figures 68 and 69 show the simulation results when an AC load transient (Figure

65) is applied to the PEMFC-battery system Figure 68 shows the reference signal (Iref)

and the battery output current The corresponding PEMFC output current and voltage are

shown in Figure 69 The fuel cell output current ripple is around 55 and the voltage

ripple is around 2 It is noted from these figures that the proposed control technique

also works well under AC load transients and the PEMFC voltage and current vary

smoothly from one steady-state value to another

0 5 10 15-10

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Current (A) Battery current (i

b)

Iref

Figure 68 PEMFC The control reference signal (Iref) and battery current (ib) under

the AC load transient shown in Figure 65

286

0 5 10 150

5

10

15

20

Current (A)

0 5 10 1580

100

120

140

160

Time (s)

Voltage (V)

PEMFC Current

PEMFC Voltage

Figure 69 The PEMFC output current and voltage responses to the AC load transient

shown in Figure 65

SOFC System Similar to the PEMFC system the simulation study on the SOFC

system under a DC load transient (Figure 64) is investigated first The cut-off frequency

of the low-pass filter is also chosen to be 01 Hz and the damping factor is set to 1 as

well Figure 610 shows the current reference signal (Iref) the battery current (ib) and the

converter output current (idd_out) responding to the load transient current The figure

shows that idd_out follows the reference signal (Iref) very well for the SOFC system The

corresponding SOFC output current and voltage are given in Figure 611 It shows that

the SOFC output voltage and current vary smoothly during the load transient The SOFC

is controlled to supply only the steady-state current to the load and its output current

ripple is less than 15 which is much lower than the pre-set value (10)

287

0 5 10 15 200

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (s)

Current (A)

Battery current (ib)

idd_out

Iref

Figure 610 Reference signal (Iref) for the current controller the battery current (ib) and

the converter output current (idd_out) under the load transient for SOFC shown in Figure 64

0 5 10 15 200

30

60

90

Current (A)

0 5 10 15 2060

80

100

120

Time (s)

Voltage (V)

SOFC Voltage

SOFC Current

Figure 611 SOFC output current and voltage responses to the DC load transient shown

in Figure 64

288

0 5 10 15 20-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

Time (s)

Current (A)

Battery current (ib)

Iref

Figure 612 Control reference signal (Iref) and battery current (ib) under the AC load

transient

0 5 10 15 200

10

20

30

40

50

60

700

Current (A)

0 5 10 15 2075

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

Time (s)

Voltage (V)SOFC Current

SOFC Voltage

Figure 613 The SOFC output current and voltage responses to the AC load transient

289

Figures 612 and 613 show the simulation results when an AC load transient (shown

in Figure 65 but with different amplitude) is applied to the SOFC system The reference

signal (Iref) and the battery output current (ib) are given in Figure 612 It is clear from this

figure that the battery responds to the transient part of the load and the reference signal

(for the DCDC converter) rises smoothly to its new steady-state value The

corresponding SOFC output current and voltage under the AC load transient are shown in

Figure 613 The SOFC output ripple is also very small in this case Figures 612 and

613 show that the proposed control technique also works well for the SOFC system

under AC load transients

Battery ChargingDischarging

When the battery voltage is out of a certain range (plusmn5 in this study) the battery

chargingdischarging controller (Figures 61 and 62) will start operating to bring the

battery voltage back within the acceptable range In practice the battery normally needs

to be charged after a load transient applied to the FC-battery system This is because the

transient power delivered from the battery to the load together with the battery

self-discharging characteristic normally causes the battery voltage to drop If the battery

voltage drops below the pre-set value (95 of battery nominal voltage) the battery

chargingdischarging controller will start operating to charge the battery Similarly the

battery chargingdischarging controller will go into discharging mode if the battery

voltage goes above its pre-set limit (105 of battery nominal voltage) In this section

simulation results are given for battery charging after the DC motor load transient

(illustrated in Figure 64) is applied to the SOFC-battery system

290

Figure 614 shows the battery voltage and the extra current reference (Iref2 Figure 61)

after the load transient is applied to the FC-battery system Before the load transient

starts the battery voltage is already close to its lower limit (209V) During the transient

the battery voltage drops below the limit which triggers the battery chargingdischarging

controller to start operating and generating a new Iref2 This extra current reference is

added to the current reference (Iref1) from the current filter to produce the new current

reference signal (Iref) for the current controller (see Figure 61)

0 2 4 6 8 10202

207

212

Voltage (V)

0 2 4 6 8 100

1

2

Time (s)

Current (A)

Iref2

Battery Voltage

95220V = 209V

Figure 614 Battery voltage and extra current reference (Iref2) curves when the battery

is being charged

Figure 615 shows the load transient current the overall current reference signal (Iref)

the filter output reference signal (Iref1) the battery current (ib) and the corresponding

converter output current (idd_out) It is clear from Figures 614 and 615 that during and

after the transient load demand the battery picks up the transient load (battery

291

discharging) and the reference currents (Iref1 and Iref) slowly increase to bring the fuel cell

current to its new steady-state value and also charge the battery (battery charging) This

smooth transition of FC current is essential for their improved reliability and durability

0 2 4 6 8 10

-5

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

Time (s)

Current (A)

Iref1

Irefi

dd_out

Load transient

ib

Battery Discharging Battery Charging

Figure 615 The load transient the overall current control reference signal (Iref) the

low-pass filter output signal (Iref1) and the corresponding converter output current (idd_out)

when the battery is being charged

292

Summary

In this chapter a load transient mitigation control strategy is proposed for fuel

cell-battery power generation systems The control strategy consists of a current

controller for the DCDC converter and a battery chargingdischarging controller to keep

the battery voltage within a desired range During load transients fuel cells are controlled

(by the proposed transient mitigation technique) to supply the steady-state power to the

load while the battery will supply the transient power to the load Simulation studies

under different load transients have been carried for both the PEMFC system and the

SOFC system Simulation results show that the fuel cell current can be controlled as

desired and the battery voltage can be held in the prescribed range The results show that

the proposed load transient mitigation technique works well for both types of fuel cell

systems (PEMFC and SOFC) studied

293

REFERENCES

[61] C Wang MH Nehrir and SR Shaw ldquoDynamic Models and Model Validation

for PEM Fuel Cells Using Electrical Circuitsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy

Conversion vol 20 no 2 pp442-451 June 2005

[62] R S Gemmen ldquoAnalysis for the effect of inverter ripple current on fuel cell

operating conditionrdquo Transactions of the ASME - Journal of Fluids Engineering

Vol 125 No 3 pp576-585 May 2003

[63] J C Amphlett EH de Oliveira RF Mann PR Roberge Aida Rodrigues

ldquoDynamic Interaction of a Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cell and a Lead-acid

Batteryrdquo Journal of Power Sources Vol 65 pp 173-178 1997

[64] D Candusso L Valero and A Walter ldquoModelling control and simulation of a

fuel cell based power supply system with energy managementrdquo Proceedings 28th

Annual Conference of the IEEE Industrial Electronics Society (IECON 2002) Vol

2 pp1294-1299 2002

[65] James Larminie and Andrew Dicks Fuel Cell Systems Explained John Wiley amp

Sons Ltd pp 362-367 2001

[66] F Z Peng H Li G Su and JS Lawler ldquoA new ZVS bidirectional DC-DC

converter for fuel cell and battery applicationrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power

Electronics Vol19 No 1 pp54-65 Jan 2004

[67] K Acharya SK Mazumder RK Burra R Williams C Haynes ldquoSystem-interaction analyses of solid-oxide fuel cell (SOFC) power-conditioning

systemrdquo Conference Record of the 2003 IEEE Industry Applications Conference

Vol 3 pp 2026-2032 2003

[68] S K Mazumder K Acharya C L Haynes R Williams Jr M R

von-Spakovsky DJ Nelson DF Rancruel J Hartvigsen and RS Gemmen ldquoSolid-oxide-fuel-cell performance and durability resolution of the effects of

power-conditioning systems and application loadsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power

Electronics Vol 19 No 5 pp1263-1278 Sept 2004

[69] C Wang and MH Nehrir ldquoA Dynamic SOFC Model for Distributed Power

Generation Applicationsrdquo Proceedings 2005 Fuel Cell Seminar Nov 14-18 2005 Palm Springs CA

294

[610] ZM Salameh MA Casacca and WA Lynch ldquoA mathematical model for

lead-acid batteriesrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 7 No1 pp

93-98 1992

[611] Handbook of Batteries 2nd edition D Linden Ed McGraw Hill Inc New York

NY 1995

[612] N Mohan T M Undeland and W P Robbins Power Electronics ndash Converters

Applications and Design John Wiley amp Sons Inc 2003

[613] John Van de Vegte Feedback Control Systems (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall 1994

[614] DW Hart Introduction to Power Electronics Prentice Hall 1997

[615] R D Middlebrook ldquoSmall-signal modeling of pulse-width modulated

switched-mode power convertersrdquo Proceedings of the IEEE Vol 76 No 4 pp

343 ndash 354 April 1988

295

CHAPTER 7

CONTROL SCHEMES AND SIMULATION

RESULTS FOR THE PROPOSED HYBRID WINDPVFC SYSTEM

Introduction

Based on the component models given in Chapter 4 a simulation system test-bed for

the proposed hybrid alternative energy system (see Chapter 3) has been developed in

MATLABSimulink Figure 71 shows the overall diagram of the simulation model in

MATLABSimulink More details about the simulation model are given in Appendix B

The system is capable of being used as a test benchmark for other hybrid energy systems

that are AC coupled The overall control strategy for power management among different

energy sources in the system is discussed in this chapter The system performance under

different operating conditions is evaluated and discussed as well

System Control Strategy

Figure 72 shows the block diagram of the overall control strategy for the hybrid

alternative energy system The WTG controlled by the pitch angle controller (see Chapter

4) and PV electricity generation unit controlled by the MPPT controller (discussed in

Chapter 4) are the main energy sources of the system The power difference between the

generation sources and the load demand is calculated as

scloadpvwindnet PPPPP minusminus+= (71)

296

where Pwind = power generated by the wind energy conversion system

Ppv = power generated by the PV energy conversion system

Pload = load demand

Psc = self consumed power for operating the system

The system self consumed power is the power consumed by the auxiliary system

components to keep it running for example the power needed for running cooling

systems the control units and the gas compressor For the purpose of simplification only

the power consumed by the compressor (Pcomp defined in Chapter 4) is considered in this

study

Overall Power Management Strategy

The governing control strategy is that At any given time any excess wind and PV

generated power (Pnet gt 0) is supplied to the electrolyzer to generate hydrogen that is

delivered to the hydrogen storage tanks through a gas compressor Therefore power

balance equation (71) can be written as

compelecloadpvwind PPPPP ++=+ Pnet gt 0 (72)

where Pelec = the power consumed by the electrolyzer to generate H2

Pcomp = the power consumed by the gas compressor

When there is a deficit in power generation (Pnet lt 0) the FC stack begins to produce

energy for the load using hydrogen from the storage tanks Therefore the power balance

equation can be written as

loadFCpvwind PPPP =++ Pnet lt 0 (73)

where PFC = the power generated by the FC stack

297

AC BUS 208 V (L-L)

0

const2

Wspeed (ms)

WTGCB Ctrl 1=ON 0=OFF

A B C

WTG 50kW at 14ms

Ploadmat

To File5

Timer

ON 3s

Timer

ON 10s

Timer

ON 03s

Timer

ON 02s

Timer

ON 01 s

Terminator4

0 Q

Enable

Pava

Pdemand

Power control signal

[Pload]

Pload

[Pdemand]

Pdemand

[Pava]

Pava

Irradiance (Wm2)

PVCB Ctrl 1=ON 0=OFF

A B C

PV Array

The total power rate is about 30kW

under 1000 Wm^2

PQ

A B C

New Dynamic Load

com

A

B

C

a

b

c

Load CBVabc

Iabc

A

B

C

a

b

c

Load

Measurement

LoadDemandData

Load

Vabc

Iabc

PQ

Instantaneous P amp Q

[Pava]

From2

[Pdemand]

From1

SolarData

From

Workspace1

WindData

From

Workspace

FCCB Ctrl 1=ON 0=OFF

Pdemand (W)

Pstorage (atm)

nH2used (mols) A B C

FC with Gas Pressure Regulation

nH2_FC

Pava (W)

Ptank (atm)

A B C

Electrolyzer and H2 storage

Demux

A B C

Battery with Inverter

400 V battery

AC voltage control is applied

Output AC is 208 V ( L-L) at 60 Hz

gt 05

Figure 71 Sim

ulation m

odel for the proposed hybrid alternative energy system

in M

ATLABSim

ulink

298

Figure 72 Block diagram of the overall control schem

e for the proposed hybrid alternative energy system

299

The power controller has been discussed in Chapter 5 (see Figure 511) The model

for the gas pressure regulator has been discussed in Chapter 4 In the following sections

the AC bus voltage regulator and the electrolyzer controller are discussed in details

AC Bus Voltage Regulator

Figure 73 shows the block diagram of the AC bus voltage regulator In the figure the

AC bus voltage is measured and transformed into dq values (Vdq) through the ldquoabcdq

Transformationrdquo block Vdq is then compared with the reference voltage dq values

(Vdq(ref)) and the voltage error signals are fed into a PI controller The controller output is

transferred back into the control signals in abc coordinates through the ldquodqabc

Transformationrdquo block These control signals are used to generate proper SPWM pulses

for the inverter switches which shape the inverter output voltage (the AC bus voltage)

Figure 73 Block diagram of the AC voltage regulator

300

Electrolyzer Controller

The block diagram of the electrolyzer controller is shown in Figure 74 As discussed

in Chapter 4 (section 44) an electrolyzer can be considered as a voltage-sensitive

nonlinear DC load For the given electrolyzer within its rating range the higher the DC

voltage applied to it the larger is the load current and the more H2 is generated The

function of the electrolyzer controller is to control the controllable ACDC rectifier to

obtain a proper output DC voltage (Vdcelec) so that the excess available power can be fully

used by the electrolyzer to generate H2 For example if more power is available then the

controller controls the rectifier to give a higher DC voltage (Vdcelec) to the electrolyzer As

a result the power consumed by the electrolyzer (Pelec) becomes greater so that it matches

the excess available power

Figure 74 Block diagram of the electrolyzer controller

301

Simulation Results under Different Scenarios

In order to run the simulation for the hybrid alternative energy system the load

demand data and the weather data (wind speed solar irradiance and air temperature) are

needed As discussed in Chapter 3 the system is designed to supply electric power for

five houses in southeastern part of Montana A typical load demand for a house in the

Pacific Northwest regions reported in [71] is used in this simulation study The total

load demand profile of five houses has already been given in Chapter 3 For the purpose

of convenience the load demand profile over 24 hours is also given in this chapter

shown in Figure 75 The weather data are obtained from the online records of the

weather station at Deer Lodge Montana affiliated to the Pacific Northwest Cooperative

Agricultural Weather Network (AgriMet) [72] The general information about the station

and the types of relevant equipment and sensors used at the station are summarized in

Table 71 [72] Simulation studies are carried out for power management during a typical

winter and summer day The load demand is kept the same for the two cases Simulation

results for the winter and summer scenarios are given and discussed in the following

sections

302

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

Time (Hour of Day)

Demand (kW)

Figure 75 Load demand profile over 24 hours for the system simulation study

TABLE 71 WEATHER STATION INFORMATION

AT DEER LODGE MONTANA AGRIMET STATION (DRLM)

General Information

Latitude 46deg 20 08

Longitude 112deg 46 00

Elevation 4680

Equipment and Sensors

Sensors Sensor Height

Pyranometer Model LI-200SB 3 meters

Wind Monitor Model 05103 2 meters

Air Temperature Thermistor Model 44030 2 meters

303

Winter Scenario

Weather Data The weather data for the winter scenario simulation were collected on

February 1 2006 The wind speed data were collected at the height of 2 m The wind

turbine hub height is The wind speed data were corrected to the turbine hub height

(assumed to be 40 meters) using the following expression [73] [74]

α

=

0

101

H

HWW ss (74)

where Ws1 = wind speed at the height of H1(ms)

Ws0 = wind speed at the height of H0 (ms)

α = wind speed correction exponent

The exponent α is taken as 013 in this study as suggested and used in [73] and [74]

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Speed (ms)

Figure 76 Wind speed data for the winter scenario simulation study

304

Figure 76 shows the corrected hourly wind speed profile over 24 hours on the day the

data were collected The hourly solar irradiance data and air temperature collected on the

same winter day are shown in Figures 77 and 78 respectively

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

100

200

300

400

500

600

Time (Hour of Day)

Irradiance (Wm2)

Figure 77 Solar irradiance data for the winter scenario simulation study

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-05

0

05

1

15

2

25

3

35

4

45

Time (Hour of Day)

Air Temperature (degC)

Figure 78 Air temperature data for the winter scenario simulation study

305

Simulation Results The system performance under the load profile given in Figure

75 and the weather data shown in Figures 76 to 78 is evaluated and discussed below

The output power from the wind energy conversion unit in the hybrid energy system

over the 24 hour simulation period is shown in Figure 79 When the wind speed is over

14 ms the output power is limited at 50 kW by pitch angle controller (see Figure 434 in

Chapter 4) The pitch angle curve over the 24 hour is given in Figure 710 It is noted

from the figure that the pitch angle is increased to limit the wind turbine output power

when wind speed is greater than 14 ms Otherwise the pitch angle is kept at 2˚ (see

Figure 432 in Chapter 4) The corresponding rotor speed of the induction generator is

given in Figure 711 It is noted that the rotor speed variation follows as the wind speed

variation

4 8 12 16 20 240

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Power (kW)

Figure 79 Wind power of the winter scenario study

306

0 4 8 12 16 20 242

25

3

35

4

45

5

55

6

Time (Hour of Day)

Pitch Angle (deg)

Figure 710 Pitch angle of the wind turbine of the winter scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 241000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

2200

2400

2600

Time (Hour of Day)

Rotor Speed (rpm)

Figure 711 Rotor speed of the induction generator of the winter scenario study

307

The output power from the PV array in the system over the 24 hour simulation period

is shown in Figure 712 As discussed in Chapter 4 the PV array output power is

controlled by the current maximum power point tracking (CMPPT see Figure 457 in

Chapter 4) technique to give the maximum power output under different solar irradiances

Figure 713 shows the current difference (Ipverr) between the actual the output current (Ipv)

of a PV module and the reference current (Imp) at the maximum power point It is noted

that the PV output current follows the reference current very well using the CMPPT

method The current error is almost zero at steady state

As shown in Figures 453 and 454 in Chapter 4 temperature plays an important role

in the PV cellrsquos performance The PV cell temperature is estimated by the PV thermal

model discussed in Chapter 4 Figure 714 shows the PV temperature response over the

simulation period Two main factors for determining the temperature are the solar

irradiance and the air temperature (surrounding temperature) as shown in Figures 77 and

78 It is noted from Figures 453 and 454 that the higher the temperature the lower is

the maximum power value This effect of temperature upon the PV performance is also

illustrated by investigating Figure 712 and 714 For the purpose of comparison the air

temperature profile is also given in Figure 714

When Pnetgt0 there is excess power available for H2 generation Figure 715 shows

the available power profile over the 24 hour simulation period The available power is

used by the electrolyzer to generate H2 through the electrolyzer controller shown in

Figure 74 Figure 716 shows the H2 generation rate over the simulation period The

corresponding DC voltage applied to the electrolyzer and the electrolyzer current are

shown in Figure 717 It is noted from Figures 715 to 717 that the more power available

308

for storage the higher is the DC input voltage to the electrolyzer and the more is the H2

generated as a result

0 4 8 12 16 20 24

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

Time (Hour of Day)

PV Power (kW)

Figure 712 PV power for the winter scenario

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-015

-01

-005

0

005

01

015

02

025

03

035

Time (Hour of Day)

Current Difference (A)

Figure 713 Current difference between the actual output current and the reference

current for the maximum power point of the winter scenario

309

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-2

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

Time (Hour of Day)

Temperature ( degC)

Overall PV CellTemperature

Air Temperature

Figure 714 The PV temperature response over the simulation period for the winter

scenario

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

Time (Hour of Day)

Power available for H2 generation (kW)

Figure 715 Power available for H2 generation of the winter scenario

310

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

01

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 generation rate (mols)

Figure 716 H2 generation rate of the winter scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

Electrolyzer Voltage (V)

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

100

200

300

400

500

600

Time (Hour of Day)

Electrolyzer Current (A)

Current

Voltage

Figure 717 Electrolyzer voltage and current for the winter scenario study

311

When Pnetlt0 the wind and PV generated power from is not sufficient to supply the

load demand Under this condition the fuel cell turns on to supply the power shortage

Figure 718 shows the power shortage which should be supplied by the FC The actual

power delivered by the FC is given in Figure 719 and the corresponding H2 consumption

rate is given in Figure 720 Note that Figures 718 719 and 720 have similar pattern as

expected

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

Power shortage (kW)

Figure 718 Power shortage over the simulation period of the winter scenario study

312

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

FC output power (kW)

Figure 719 Power supplied by the FC of the winter scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

002

004

006

008

01

012

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 consumption rate (mols)

Figure 720 H2 consumption rate of the winter scenario study

313

0 4 8 12 16 20 2462

64

66

68

70

72

74

76

78

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 storage tank pressure (atm)

Figure 721 The pressure tank over the 24 hour of the winter scenario study

The H2 storage tank pressure varies as H2 flows in and out It is apparent that the

storage tank pressure will go up when there is excess power available for H2 generation

and will decrease when the FC supplies power to load and consumes H2 Figure 721

shows the tank pressure variations over the 24 hour simulation period

As discussed in Chapter 3 the capacity of the battery in the proposed hybrid system is

much smaller than the one used in a conventional system where the battery is taken as the

main storage device Figure 722 shows the battery power profile over the 24 hour

simulation period The positive spikes indicate the battery is discharging and the negative

ones indicate the battery is being charged It is noted from the figure that the battery

power is zero almost at all time As discussed in Chapter 3 the battery only supplies the

fast transient power such as fast load transients ripples and spikes

314

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-10

-8

-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

8

10

Time (Hour of Day)

Battery power (kW)

Figure 722 The battery power over the simulation period for the winter scenario

Summer Scenario

Weather Data The weather data collected in Dear Lodge MT on June 21 2005 are

used for the summer scenario study [72] The wind speed data are corrected to the height

of 40 m shown in Figure 723 The solar irradiance and air temperature data at the same

site on the same day are shown in Figures 724 and 725 respectively

By comparing the winter solar irradiance data shown in Figure 77 and the summer

solar irradiance data given in Figure 724 it is obvious that the time frame when solar

energy is available is wider in the summer than in the winter Another apparent

difference is that the air temperature in the summer (shown in Figure 725) is of course

higher than the air temperature in the winter (shown in Figure 78)

315

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Speed (ms)

Figure 723 Corrected wind speed data for the summer scenario simulation study

0 5 10 15 20 250

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

Time (Hour of Day)

Irradiance (Wm2)

Figure 724 Irradiance data for the summer scenario simulation study

316

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

20

25

30

Time (Hour of Day)

Air Temperature (degC)

Figure 725 Air temperature data for the summer scenario simulation study

Simulation Results In this section the system performance under the load demand

profile given in Figure 75 and the weather data shown in Figures 723 to 725 is

evaluated The output power from the wind energy conversion unit in the hybrid energy

system over the 24 hour simulation period is shown in Figure 726 The corresponding

rotor speed of the induction generator is given in Figure 727

317

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

5

10

15

20

25

Time (Hour of Day)

WTG output power (kW)

Figure 726 Wind power generated for the summer scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 241100

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

Time (Hour of Day)

WT rotor speed (rpm)

Figure 727 Rotor speed of the induction generator for the summer scenario study

The output power from the PV array in the system over the 24 hour simulation period

is shown in Figure 728 Figure 729 shows the PV temperature response over the

simulation period For the purpose of comparison the air temperature profile is also

illustrated in the figure It is noted from Figure 729 that the PV cells cool down to about

the same temperature as air when there is no sun The cell temperature climbs up when

318

the sun comes out The temperature difference between the PV cell and air can be as high

as 25 ˚C shown in Figure 729 This effect of the temperature upon the PV performance

is also illustrated by investigating Figures 728 and 729 The higher cell temperature

causes a lower maximum power value The spikes in Figure 728 are due to the MPPT

which tries to keep the PV array operate at its maximum power points under different

temperatures and solar irradiances The time range of the spike is small (about 1 s)

0 5 10 15 20 25-5

0

5

10

15

20

25

Time (Hour of Day)

PV Power (kW)

Figure 728 PV power generated for the winter scenario study

319

0 5 10 15 20 255

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

Time (Hour of Day)

Temperature ( degC)

AirTemperature

Overall PV Cell

Temperature

Figure 729 The PV and air temperature over the simulation period for the winter

scenario study

When Pnetgt0 there is excess power available for H2 generation Figure 730 shows

the available power profile over the 24 hour simulation period Figure 731 shows the

H2 generation rate over the simulation period The corresponding DC voltage applied to

the electrolyzer and the electrolyzer current are shown in Figure 732 It is clear from

Figures 730 - 732 that the more power is available for storage the higher is the DC

input voltage applied to the electrolyzer to balance the excess power and the more H2 is

generated as a result

320

0 5 10 15 20 250

5

10

15

20

25

30

Time (Hour of Day)

Power available for H2 generation (kW)

Figure 730 Power available for H2 generation for the summer scenario study

0 5 10 15 20 250

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 generation rate (mols)

Figure 731 H2 generation rate for the summer scenario study

321

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-20

20

60

100Electrolyzer Voltage (V)

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

150

300

450

Time (Hour of Day)

Electrolyzer Current (A)

Voltage

Current

Figure 732 Electrolyzer voltage and current for the summer scenario study

When Pnetlt0 the wind and PV generated power is not sufficient to supply the load

demand Under this scenario the fuel cell turns on to supply the power shortage Figure

733 shows the power shortage which should be supplied by the FC The actual power

delivered by FC is given in Figure 734 and the corresponding H2 consumption rate is

given in Figure 735 Comparing Figures733 and 734 we can see that the power

shortage is covered by the fuel cell very well

322

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

Power Shortage (kW)

Figure 733 Power shortage over the simulation period for the summer scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

FC Output Power (kW)

Figure 734 Power supplied by the FC over the simulation period for the summer

scenario study

323

0 4 8 12 16 20 240

002

004

006

008

01

012

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 Consumption Rate (mols)

Figure 735 H2 consumption rate for the summer scenario study

0 4 8 12 16 20 2452

54

56

58

60

62

64

Time (Hour of Day)

H2 Storage Tank Pressure (atm)

Figure 736 The H2 tank pressure over the 24 hour for the summer scenario study

324

Figure 736 shows the tank pressure variations over the 24 hour simulation period and

Figure 737 shows the battery power profile over the simulation period The large spikes

shown in Figure 737 are due to the sudden hourly changes in the weather data and the

load demand used for the simulation study

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-4

-2

0

2

4

6

8

Time (Hour of Day)

Battery Power (kW)

Figure 737 The battery power over the simulation period for the summer scenario

Simulation studies have also been carried out using continuous weather and load

demand data The same weather and load demand data points used for the winter scenario

study are used for this scenario study However for this case study each input (load

demand wind speed solar irradiance and air temperature) is a continuous piecewise

linear function over the simulation time where two adjacent data points are connected by

a straight line The continuous load demand curve shown in Figure 75 is used for this

simulation study and Figures 738 ndash 740 show the weather data used in this case

325

0 5 10 15 20 252

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Speed (ms)

Figure 738 Wind speed data for the simulation study with continuous weather data and

load demand

0 5 10 15 20 250

100

200

300

400

500

600

Time (Hour of Day)

Irradiance (Wm2)

Figure 739 Solar irradiance data for the simulation study with continuous weather data

and load demand

326

0 5 10 15 20 25-1

0

1

2

3

4

5

Time (Hour of Day)

Air Temperature (degC)

Figure 740 Air temperature for the simulation study with continuous weather data and

load demand

Figures 741 and 742 show the continuous wind and PV generated power

respectively The spikes in the PV output power shown in Figure 742 are due to the

CMPPT control of the power electronic interfacing devices for the PV array Figures 743

and 744 show the corresponding excess power (available for H2 generation) profile and

the FC output power (power shortage) profile over the simulation period

327

0 5 10 15 20 250

10

20

30

40

50

60

Time (Hour of Day)

Wind Power (kW)

Figure 741 Wind power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario

0 5 10 15 20 250

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

Time (Hour of Day)

PV Power (kW)

Figure 742 PV power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario

328

0 5 10 15 20 250

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

Time (Hour of Day)

Power available for H2 generation (kW)

Figure 743 Power available for H2 generation for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario

0 5 10 15 20 250

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Time (Hour of Day)

FC Output Power (kW)

Figure 744 FC output power for the continuous weather data and load demand

scenario

329

Figure 745 shows the battery power profile over the 24 hour simulation period for

the continuous weather data and load demand scenario Comparing Figure 745 with

Figures 722 and 737 it is noted that the battery spikes are much smaller in this case than

the battery spikes when the discrete hourly weather and load demand data are used

0 4 8 12 16 20 24-10

-8

-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

8

10

Time (Hour of Day)

Battery Power (kW)

Figure 745 Battery power for the continuous weather data and load demand scenario

330

Summary

In this chapter the overall control and power management strategy for the proposed

hybrid energy system is presented The wind and PV generation systems are the main

power generation devices The electrolyzer acts as a dump load using any excess power

to produce H2 The FC system is the back up generation and battery picks up the fast load

transients and ripples The simulation model of the hybrid system has been developed

using MATLABSimulink Simulation studies have been used to verify the system

performance under different scenarios using practical load profile and real weather

collected at Deer Lodge MT The simulation results have been given and discussed for a

winter and a summer scenario The results show that the overall power management

strategy is effective and the power flows among the different energy sources and the load

demand is balanced successfully

331

REFERENCES

[71] J Cahill K Ritland W Kelly ldquoDescription of Electric Energy Use in Single

Family Residences in the Pacific Northwest 1986-1992rdquo Office of Energy

Resources Bonneville Power Administration December 1992 Portland OR

[72] Online httpwwwusbrgovpnagrimetwebaghrreadhtml

[73] WD Kellogg MH Nehrir G Venkataramanan V Gerez ldquoGeneration unit sizing

and cost analysis for stand-alone wind photovoltaic and hybrid windPV systemsrdquo

IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol 13 No 1 pp 70 ndash 75 March 1998

[74] P Gipe Wind power renewable energy for home farm and business Chelsea

Green Publishing Company 2004

332

CHAPTER 8

OPTIMAL PLACEMENT OF DISTRIBUTED GENERATION

SOURCES IN POWER SYSTEMS

Introduction

The ever-increasing need for electrical power generation steady progress in the

power deregulation and utility restructuring and tight constraints over the construction of

new transmission lines for long distance power transmission have created increased

interest in distributed power generation Distributed generation (DG) devices can be

strategically placed in power systems for grid reinforcement reducing power losses and

on-peak operating costs improving voltage profiles and load factors deferring or

eliminating system upgrades and improving system integrity reliability and efficiency

[81]-[85]

These DG sources are normally placed close to consumption centers and are added

mostly at the distribution level They are relatively small in size (relative to the power

capacity of the system in which they are placed) and modular in structure A common

strategy to find the site of DG is to minimize the power loss of the system [82]-[85]

Another method for placing DG is to apply rules that are often used in sitting shunt

capacitors in distribution systems A ldquo23 rulerdquo is presented in [86] to place DG on a

radial feeder with uniformly distributed load where it is suggested to install DG of

approximately 23 capacity of the incoming generation at approximately 23 of the length

of line This rule is simple and easy to use but it cannot be applied directly to a feeder

333

with other types of load distribution or to a networked system References [81] [87]

present power flow algorithms to find the optimal size of DG at each load bus in a

networked system assuming that every load bus can have a DG source

In this chapter analytical approaches for optimal placement of DG with unity power

factor in power systems are presented First placement of DG in a radial feeder is

analyzed and the theoretical optimal site (bus) for adding DG is obtained for different

types of loads and DG sources Then a method is presented to find the optimal bus for

placing DG in a networked system based on bus admittance matrix generation

information and load distribution of the system The proposed methods are tested by a

series of simulations on radial feeders an IEEE 6-bus test system [81] an IEEE 30-bus

test system [811] and a subset of it to show the effectiveness of the proposed methods in

determining the optimal bus for placing DG

In practice there are more constraints on the availability of DG sources and there

may be only one or a few DGs with limited output available to be added Therefore in

this study the DG size is not considered to be optimized The procedure to determine the

optimal bus for placing DG may also need to take into account other factors such as

economic and geographic considerations These factors are not discussed in this chapter

Optimal Placement of DG on a Radial Feeder

To simplify the analysis only overhead transmission lines with uniformly distributed

parameters are considered ie R and L (series resistance and inductance) per unit length

are the same along the feeder while the shunt capacitance and susceptance of lines are

neglected The loads along the feeder are assumed to vary in discrete time duration for

334

example the feeder load distributions along the line for time durations Ti and Ti+1 are

shown in Figure 81

Figure 81 A feeder with distributed loads along the line

Theoretical Analysis

First consider a radial feeder without DG During the time duration Ti the loads are

distributed along the line with the phasor current density Id(xTi) as shown in Figure 81

The phasor feeder current at point x is

int=x

idi dxTxITxI0

)()( (81)

Assuming the impedance per unit length of the line is Z=R+jX (Ωkm) then the

incremental power loss and phasor voltage drop at point x are

RdxdxTxITxdP

x

idi sdot

= int

2

0

)()( (82)

ZdxdxTxITxdV

x

idi sdot

= int

0

)()( (83)

The total power loss along the feeder within the time duration Ti is

RdxdxTxITxdPTPl x

id

l

iiloss sdot

== int intint

0

2

00

)()()( (84)

335

The voltage drop between point x and the receiving end is

ZdxdxTxITxdVTVTVTxVx x

id

x

iiixidrop sdot==minus= int intint0 00

0 )()()()()( (85)

And the voltage at point x is

)()()()()()( 0 idropidropilidropiix TxVTlVTVTxVTVTV +minus=+= (86)

The total voltage drop across the feeder is

ZdxdxTxITxdVTVTVTlVl x

id

l

iiilidrop sdot==minus= int intint0 00

0 )()()()()( (87)

Now consider a DG is added into the feeder at the location x0 shown in Figure 81 In

general the load current density Id(xTi) will change (normally decrease) as a result of

adding DG due to improvements in the voltage profile along the line This change in

the load current density will cause the feeder current to decrease The feeder current

between the source (at x=l) and the location of DG (at x = x0) will also change as a result

of the injected current source IDG(Ti) However the change in feeder current due to the

change in the load current density is generally much smaller than the change in the feeder

current due to the injected current IDG(Ti) For the purpose of analysis the change in the

load current density resulted from the addition of DG is neglected in this study

Therefore the load current density Id(xTi) used in (1) is also used for obtaining the

feeder current after adding DG In this case the feeder current can be written as follows

leleminus

lele

=

int

int

lxxTIdxTxI

xxdxTxI

TxI

iDG

x

id

x

id

i

0

0

0

0

)()(

0)(

)( (88)

The corresponding power loss and voltage drop in the feeder are

336

RdxTIdxTxIRdxdxTxITxPl

x

x

iDGid

x x

idiloss sdot

minus+sdot

= int intint int

0

2

0

0

0

2

0

0 )()()()( (89)

lelesdot

minus

+sdot

lelesdot

=

int int

int int

int int

lxxZdxTIdxTxI

ZdxdxTxI

xxZdxdxTxI

TxV

x

x

iDG

x

id

x x

id

x x

id

idrop

0

0 0

0

0 0

0

0 0

)()(

)(

0)(

)( (810)

The average power loss in a given time period T is

i

N

i

ilossloss TTxPT

xPt

sum=

=1

00 )(1

)( (811)

where Nt is the number of time durations in the time period T

sum=

=tN

i

iTT1

(812)

Equation (86) can still be used under this situation to calculate the voltage at point x

by using Vdrop(xTi) obtained from equation (810)

Procedure to Find the Optimal Location of DG on a Radial Feeder

The goal is to add DG in a location to minimize the total average power loss and

assure that the voltages Vx along the feeder are in the acceptable range 1plusmn005 pu ie

0)(

0

0 =dx

xPd loss (813)

The solution x0 of the above equation will give the optimal site for minimizing the

power loss but it cannot guarantee that all the voltages along the feeder are in the

acceptable range If the voltage regulation cannot be satisfied at the same time the DG

337

can be placed around x0 to satisfy the voltage regulation rule while decreasing the power

loss as much as possible or the DG size can be increased The analytical procedure to

determine the optimal point to place DG on a radial feeder is given as follows

1) Find the distributed load )( id TxI along the feeder

2) Get the output current of DG )( iDG TI

3) Use equations (89) and (811) to calculate )( 0xPloss and find the solution x0 of

equation (813)

4) Use equations (86) and (810) to check whether the voltage regulation is satisfied

5) If all the voltages are in the acceptable range then the calculated x0 is the optimal spot

(xop) to add DG

6) If x0 doesnrsquot meet the voltage regulation rule then move the DG to see whether there

is a point around point x0 where all bus voltages are in the acceptable range

7) If no point on the feeder can satisfy the voltage regulation rule then increase the size

of DG and repeat steps 2) to 7)

8) Sometimes more than one DG may be needed Under this situation the feeder can be

divided into several segments and steps 1) to 7) can be applied to each segment

The flow chart of the procedure is summarized in Figure 82

338

Case Studies with Time Invariant Loads and DGs

Table 81 shows the results of analyses using the foregoing procedure to find the

optimal location for placing DG on radial feeders with three different load distributions

uniformly distributed load centrally distributed load and uniformly increasing distributed

load In the results given in Table 81 it is assumed that the DG supplies all the loads

on the feeder in each case and the distribution system supplies the system losses It is

noted from the table that the DG reduces the system power losses significantly when it is

located properly

Figure 82 Procedure for finding optimal place for a DG source in a radial feeder

339

TABLE 81 THEORETICAL ANALYSIS RESULTS OF CASE STUDIES

WITH TIME INVARIANT LOADS AND DGS

Cases

(Assuming that DG supplies

all the loads in each case)

0

lossP

(Power loss

before adding

DG)

lossP

(Power loss

after adding

DG)

Percent of

power loss

reduction

Optimal

place x0

Id

xl 0

Source

IDG

x0

Vl Vx V0

Uniformly distributed load

332RlId 1232

RlId 75 2

l

xl 0

Source

IDG

x0

Vl Vx

lxl

lx

xlI

xIxI

ld

ld

d lelt

lelt

minus=

2

20

)()(

Centrally distributed load

52

960

23RlI ld 52

320

1RlI

ld 87

2

l

Id=Ild(l-x)

xl 0

Source

IDG

x0

Vl Vx V0

Increasingly distributed load

5213330 RlIld

52015550 RlI

ld

88 )221( minus

340

The 23 rule presented in [86] works well when the load is uniformly distributed

along the feeder but it gives inaccurate results if the load configuration is different For a

uniformly distributed load if the DG supplies 23 of the total load ( 62lII ldDG = ) the

optimal site is at 30 lx = according to equation (89) This result is exactly the same as

that given in [86] However when the loads are centrally and increasingly distributed

and the DG provides 23 of the total load the optimal location for placing DG turns out to

be 6l and l)321( minus respectively which differ from what the ldquo23 rulerdquo suggests

in [86]

Case Study with Time Varying Load and DG

The same feeders as in the previous section (shown in Figure 81) but with time

varying load and DG are analyzed in this case The analysis is given for uniformly

distributed load only The analyses for other types of loads follow similarly

Assuming that DG is located at point x0 then according to equation (89) the

effective power loss is

3

)())(())(()()(

32

0

222

00

lTRIlxTRIlxTITRITxP id

iDGiDGidiloss +minusminusminus=

(814)

where lTITI iloadid )()( = and )( iload TI is the load current at the very sending end of the

feeder The average power loss in a given time period T is

i

N

i

iDG

N

i

iiDGidloss TTIT

RxTTITI

T

RxCxP

tt

sumsum==

minus+=1

20

1

2

010 )()()()( (815)

341

where i

N

i

iDGiDGid

id TlTRIlTITRIlTRI

TC

t

sum=

+minus=

1

22

32

1 )()()(3

)(1

Setting 0)(

0

0 =dx

xPd loss x0 is obtained to be

sum

sum

sum

sum

=

=

=

=

sdot==

t

t

t

t

N

i

iiDGiload

i

N

i

iDG

N

i

iiDGid

i

N

i

iDG

TTITI

TTIl

TTITI

TTI

x

1

1

2

1

1

2

0

)()(2

)(

)()(2

)(

(816)

Assuming that all bus voltages along the feeder are in the acceptable range equation

(816) can be approximated as

sum

sum

sum

sum

=

=

=

=

sdot=asymp

t

t

t

t

N

i

iiDGiload

i

N

i

iDG

N

i

iiDGid

i

N

i

iDG

TTPTP

TTPl

TTPTP

TTP

x

1

1

2

1

1

2

0

)()(2

)(

)()(2

)(

(817)

where lTPTP iloadid )()( = and )( iload TP is the total load along the feeder in the time

duration Ti

Optimal Placement of DG in Networked Systems

The theoretical analysis for placing a DG in networked systems is different and more

complicated than in a radial feeder To simplify the analysis only one DG is considered

to be added to the system

Consider the system shown in Figure 83 with a DG added to the system to reinforce

it The system has N buses and loads and the DG is located at a bus say bus j The main

external power is injected into bus 1 which is taken as slack bus The objective is to find

the bus to install the DG so that the total system power loss is minimized and the voltage

level at each bus is held in the acceptable range 1plusmn005 pu

342

DGLoad 1

Load j

Load N

Bus 1

Bus j

Bus N

Figure 83 A networked power system

Before the DG is added to the system the bus admittance matrix is

=

0

0

1

00

2

0

1

0

1

0

12

0

11

0

NN

N

NjNN

j

bus

Y

Y

YYY

YYY

Y (818)

where superscript 0 denotes the original system

Assuming that the DG is located at bus j the system admittance matrix is changed

from Ybus0 to Ybus by considering that bus 1 and bus j are connected together Actually

there is no line to connect those buses together but the imaginary line will help in finding

the optimal location to add DG Ybus is one dimension less than Ybus0 except when the DG

is located at bus 1 If the DG is at bus 1 Ybus matrix will be the same as Ybus0 To obtain

the new matrix Ybus when the DG source is connected we treat the system as connecting

343

bus 1 and j by eliminating bus j in Ybus0 [810] The new matrix is

=

minusminus

minus

minusminusminus )1)(1(

)1(1

)1(2)1(1)1(

11211

NN

N

kNNN

k

bus

Y

Y

YYY

YYY

Y (819)

where

12

1

12

2

11

0

)1(

0

)1(11

00

11

0

1

00

1111

minus==

minus=+=

minus=+=

++=

++

NkYY

NjkYYY

jkYYY

YYYY

kk

kjkk

jkkk

jjj

1)(

121

112

1)(2

0

)1)(1(

0

)1(

0

)1(

0

minuslele=

minusleleminuslele=

minusleleminuslele=

minuslele=

++

+

+

NkijYY

jkNijYY

NkjjiYY

jkiYY

kiik

kiik

kiik

ikik

The new bus impedance matrix Zbus is

==

minusminus

minus

minusminusminus

minus

)1)(1(

)1(1

)1(2)1(1)1(

11211

1

NN

N

kNNN

k

busbus

Z

Z

ZZZ

ZZZ

YZ (820)

Suppose the complex load and generated power of the original system are

][ 000

2

0

1

0

LNLiLLL SSSSS = and

][ 000

2

0

1

0

GNGiGGG SSSSS = i=12 N (821)

where 000

LiLiLi jQPS += and 000

GiGiGi jQPS +=

A new load vector SL is set up as follows

[ ]LNLiLLL SSSSS 21= (822)

where

LiLiLi jQPS += and

0=LiS for i = 1 (slack bus)

344

0

LiLi SS = for i = load buses

GiLi

GiLiGiLiLi

PP

PPjPPS

le

gt

+minus

=0

000

for i = P-V buses

Note that at the slack bus (bus 1) SL1 = 0 it is assumed that the real and reactive

power consumed by the load are supplied directly by the external generation at that bus

Also at a voltage controlled (P-V) bus QLi = 0 it is assumed that the load reactive power

can be supplied by the external power source at the P-V bus

To find the optimal point to place the DG we set up an objective function for DG at

each bus j as follows

sumsum+=

minus

=

+=N

ji

Lii

j

i

Liij SjRSjRf1

2

1

1

1

2

1 )()( j=2 hellipN (823)

where R1i(j) is the equivalent resistance between bus 1 and bus i when DG is located at

bus j jne1

gt

lt

minus+

minus+=

minusminusminus ji

ji

ZZZReal

ZZZRealjR

iii

iii

i )2(

)2()(

)1(1)1)(1(11

111

1 (824)

When the DG is located at bus 1 (j=1) the objective function will be

sum=

=N

i

Lii SRf1

2

11 (825)

Note that in this case Ybus (Zbus) will be the same as Ybus0 (Zbus

0) and R11=0

The goal is to find the optimal bus m where the objective function reaches its

minimum value

NjfMinf jm 21)( == (826)

The theoretical procedure to find the optimal bus to place DG in a networked system

345

can be summarized as follows

1) Find the matrix Ybus0 and set up the load vector SL

2) Compute Ybus and the corresponding Zbus for different DG locations

3) Calculate the equivalent resistances according to (824)

4) Use (823) and (825) to calculate objective function values for DG at different buses

and find the optimal bus m

5) If all the voltages are in the acceptable range when the DG is located at bus m then

bus m is the optimal site

6) If some bus voltages do not meet the voltage rule then move the DG around bus m to

satisfy the voltage rule

7) If there is no bus that can satisfy the voltage regulation rule try a different size DG

and repeat steps 5) and 6)

The procedure is summarized in the flow chart shown in Figure 84 and the

corresponding MATLAB code is given in Appendix C

Though the discussion here is under the assumption that only one DG source is added

to the system it can be easily extended to the systems with multiple DG sources By

connecting all the DG buses and slack bus together through imaginary lines the new Ybus

matrix and the corresponding objective function can be established by the method

presented above

Simulation Results

Several simulation studies were carried out to verify the results obtained analytically

for both radial and network-connected systems

346

Radial Feeder with Time Invariant Loads and DG

A radial feeder with a time invariant DG was simulated under uniformly distributed

centrally distributed and increasingly distributed loads The simulated system for

uniformly distributed loads is shown in Figure 85 The system architecture is the same

when the loads are centrally distributed or increasingly distributed The line parameters

DG and load sizes are listed in Table 82

Figure 84 Flow chart of The theoretical procedure to find the optimal bus to place DG

in a networked system

347

power grid

DG

External

Bus 1 Bus 2 Bus 3 Bus 4 Bus 5 Bus 6 Bus 7 Bus 8 Bus 9 Bus 10 Bus 11

050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW 050 MW

Figure 85 A radial feeder with uniformly distributed loads

TABLE 82 PARAMETERS OF THE SYSTEM IN FIGURE 85

Line parameters

(AWG ACSR 10)

Line spacing = 132m (equal spacing assumed)

R = 0 538Ω XL = 04626 Ω

Bus Voltage 125kV

Line length between two neighboring buses 25km

Load at each bus (MW) Load type

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Uniformly distributed 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05

Centrally distributed 005 01 02 03 04 05 04 03 02 01 005

Increasingly distributed 005 01 015 02 025 03 035 04 045 05 055

Uniformly Centrally Increasingly DG size

(MW) 55 26 33

348

TABLE 83 SIMULATION RESULTS OF CASE STUDIES WITH

TIME INVARIANT LOADS AND DG

Total Power

Losses (kW) Line Loading Optimal Bus No

(Simulation)

Optimal Place

(Theoretical) Without DG With DG

Uniform 6 6 17785 02106

Central 6 6 02589 00275

Increasing 8 8 08099 00606

In Table 83 the optimal bus for placing DG to minimize the total system power loss

is given for each load distribution The total system power losses are given both with and

without DG It is noted that the simulation results agree well with theoretical values

While some bus voltages fall far out of the acceptable range when there is no DG in the

system all the bus voltages are within 1plusmn005 pu with the DG added

Radial Feeder with Time Varying Loads and DG

This part of the study is helpful in understanding the effect of variable power DG

(such as wind and photovoltaic (PV)) sources on distribution systems with time varying

loads In practice the site of such DG sources may be mainly determined by

meteorological and geographic factors However DG sources with predictable output

power (such as fuel cells and microturbines) can be placed at any bus in the distribution

system to achieve optimal result

The feeder shown in Figure 85 is also used to simulate the situation with time

varying uniformly distributed loads and DG A wind-turbine generator is considered as

349

the time varying DG source Actual wind data taken in a rural area in south central

Montana were used to obtain the output power of a simulated (1-MW) wind turbine as

shown in Figure 86 [85] [88] It shows the annual daily average output power of the

turbine which can be viewed as the filtered version of the turbinersquos output power The

daily average demand of a typical house in the northwestern United States shown in

Figure 87 [89] is used here as one unit of the time varying loads The loads are assumed

to be uniformly distributed along the feeder with 100 houses at each bus

0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23

Time of the day

Ou

tpu

t o

f w

ind

tu

rbin

e (

kW

)

Figure 86 Annual daily average output power profile of a 1-MW wind-DG

The simulated wind-DG was installed at different buses and the total system power

loss was obtained in each case shown in Figure 88 It is noticed from this figure that

total feeder power loss reaches a minimum value when the wind-DG is placed at bus 10

in Figure 85 The theoretical optimal position to place the wind-DG is obtained (using

equation (817) and the generation and demand data shown in Figures 86 and 87) to be

x0 asymp 014l The position with this distance from the end of feeder in Figure 85 is between

bus 9 and 10 but closer to bus 10 which is the same bus obtained from the simulation

results shown in Figure 88

350

0

05

1

15

2

25

3

35

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23

Time of day

Dem

and (kw

)

Figure 87 Daily average demand of a typical house

80

90

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

DG loaction - Bus No

To

tal

avera

ge p

ow

er

loss (

kW

)

Figure 88 Power losses of the radial feeder with the wind-DG at different buses

351

Networked Systems

The 25 kV IEEE 6-bus system shown in Figure 89 [81] which can be considered as

a sub-transmissiondistribution system was used to verify the method presented in the

previous section The parameters of this system are given in Table 84 A 5-MW DG was

added to reinforce the system Total system power loss was obtained from the results of

power flow studies when DG was placed at different buses (Figure 810) It is noted from

this figure that minimum power loss is achieved when DG is placed at bus 3 The

values of the objective function for the system were obtained by applying the proposed

analytical approach when the DG was placed at different buses These values are shown

in the bar chart of Figure 811 It is noted from this figure that the objective function is

also at its minimum when the DG is placed at bus 3 indicating that the result obtained

from the proposed analytical method is the same as the simulation result

Reference Bus

Voltage Controlled Bus

Bus 1

Bus 2Bus 3

Bus 4

Bus 5Bus 6

80 MW

10 MVR 40 MW 725 MW

20 MVR

50 MW 125 MVR

50 MW

15 MVR

Figure 89 6-bus networked power system studied

352

TABLE 84 PARAMETERS OF THE SYSTEM IN FIGURE 89 [81]

Bus No Voltage (pu) Bus Power (MVA)

1 10+j00 Slack bus

2 ― -40 -j100

3 ― -725-j200

4 ― -500-j125

5 015 =V 800

6 ― -500-j150

Line Data

From To Zserial (pu) Yshunt(pu)

1 2 02238+j05090 j00012

2 3 02238+j05090 j00012

3 4 02238+j05090 j00012

4 5 02238+j05090 j00012

5 6 02238+j05090 j00012

6 1 02276+j02961 j00025

1 5 02603+j07382 j00008

0

01

02

03

04

05

2 3 4 5 6

DG Location - Bus No

Po

wer

Lo

ss (

MW

)

Figure 810 Power losses of the system in Figure 89 with a 5MW DG

353

0

5

10

15

20

25

2 3 4 5 6

DG Location - Bus No

Valu

e o

f th

e O

bje

cti

ve F

un

cti

on

Figure 811 Values of the objective function of the system in Figure 89

The proposed method was also tested on the IEEE 30-bus test system shown in Figure

812 which can be considered as a meshed transmissionsubtransmission system [811]

The system has 30 buses (mainly 132kV and 33kV buses) and 41 lines The system bus

data is given in Table 85 A 15 MW DG (about 5 of the total system load of 283 +

j1262 MVA) is considered to be added to reinforce the system The total power loss of

the system reaches a minimum value when DG is located at bus 5 as shown in Figure

813 The optimal bus determined by the method proposed in this study is also bus 5 as

given in Figure 814

354

1

2

3

4

5

6

7 8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20 21

22

23 24

25 26

27 28

29 30

subset

100 MVA Base

Figure 812 IEEE 30-bus test system

152

154

156

158

16

162

164

166

168

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30

DG Location - Bus No

Pow

er

Losses (M

W)

Figure 813 Power losses of the IEEE 30-bus test system with a 15MW DG

355

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

550

600

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30DG Location - Bus No

Valu

e o

f o

bje

cti

ve f

un

cti

on

Figure 814 Values of the objective function of the IEEE 30-bus system

A DG source may not be connected directly to a 132kV bus (bus 5 in Figure 812) as

determined by the proposed method For this reason a subset of the 30-bus test system

with lower voltage level (33kV) as indicated in Figure 812 was also chosen to test the

proposed method The new system has 18 buses 22 lines and a total load of 1047+j508

MVA A 5MW DG (about 5 of the total load of the subset) was added to the system

Simulation results for this system are given in Figure 815 It is noted that the total system

loss reaches a minimum value when the DG is located at bus 30 The optimal bus

suggested by the proposed method is also bus 30 as shown in Figure 816

All the power flow simulation studies in this chapter were carried out using

PowerWorldreg Simulator [812]

356

11

115

12

125

13

135

10 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 29 30

DG Location - Bus No

Po

wer

Lo

sses (

MW

)

Figure 815 Power losses of the subset system in Figure 812 with a 5MW DG

50

55

60

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

10 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 29 30

DG Location - Bus No

Valu

e o

f obje

ctive function

Figure 816 Values of the objective function of the subset system in Figure 812

357

TABLE 85 BUS DATA OF THE IEEE 30-BUS TEST SYSTEM [811]

Bus No Type Load

(pu)

Rated Bus

Voltage (kV)

Bus

Voltage (pu)

1 Swing 00 132 1060

2 P-V 0217+j0127 132 1043

3 P-Q 0024+j0012 132 ―

4 P-Q 0076+j0016 132 ―

5 P-V 0942+j019 132 1010

6 P-Q 00 132 ―

7 P-Q 0228+j0109 132 ―

8 P-V 03+j03 132 1010

9 P-Q 00 690 ―

10 P-Q 0058+j002 330 ―

11 P-V 00 110 1082

12 P-Q 0112+j0075 330 ―

13 P-V 00 110 1071

14 P-Q 0062+j0016 330 ―

15 P-Q 0082+j0025 330 ―

16 P-Q 0035+j0018 330 ―

17 P-Q 009+j0058 330 ―

18 P-Q 0032+j0009 330 ―

19 P-Q 0095+j0034 330 ―

20 P-Q 0022+j0007 330 ―

21 P-Q 0175+j0112 330 ―

22 P-Q 00 330 ―

23 P-Q 0032+j0016 330 ―

24 P-Q 0087+j0067 330 ―

25 P-Q 00 330 ―

26 P-Q 0035+j0023 330 ―

27 P-Q 00 330 ―

28 P-Q 00 330 ―

29 P-Q 0024+j0009 330 ―

30 P-Q 0106+j0019 330 ―

(100 MVA Base)

358

Summary

Analytical approaches are presented in this chapter to determine the optimal location

for placing DG in both radial and networked systems to minimize power losses The

proposed approaches are not iterative algorithms like power flow programs Therefore

there is no convergence problems involved and results could be obtained very quickly A

series of simulation studies were also conducted to verify the validity of the proposed

approaches and results show that the proposed methods work well

In practice there are other constraints which may affect the DG placement

Nevertheless methodologies presented in this chapter can be effective instructive and

helpful to system designers in selecting proper sites to place DGs

359

REFERENCES

[81] Narayan S Rau Yih-heui Wan ldquoOptimum Location of Resources in Distributed

Planningrdquo IEEE Transactions on Power Systems Vol 9 No 4 pp 2014-2020

November 1994

[82] Kyu-Ho Kim Yu-Jeong Lee Sang-Bong Rhee Sang-Kuen Lee and Seok-Ku You

ldquoDispersed Generator Placement using Fuzzy-GA in Distribution Systemsrdquo

Proceedings 2002 IEEE Power Engineering Society Summer Meeting Vol 3 pp

1148-1153 July 2002 Chicago IL

[83] N Hadjsaid JF Canard F Dumas ldquoDispersed Generation Impact on Distribution

Networksrdquo IEEE Computer Applications in Power Vol 12 No 2 pp 22-28

April 1999

[84] T Griffin K Tomsovic D Secrest A Law ldquoPlacement of Dispersed Generation

Systems for Reduced Lossesrdquo Proceedings the 33rd Annual Hawaii International

Conference on Systems Sciences 2000

[85] MH Nehrir C Wang and V Gerez ldquoImpact of Wind Power Distributed

Generation on Distribution Systemsrdquo Proceedings 17th International Conference

on Electricity Distribution (CIRED) May 2003 Barcelona Spain

[86] H L Willis ldquoAnalytical Methods and Rules of Thumb for Modeling

DG-Distribution Interactionrdquo Proceedings 2000 IEEE Power Engineering Society

Summer Meeting Vol 3 pp 1643-1644 July 2000 Seattle WA

[87] JO Kim SW Nam SK Park C Singh ldquoDispersed Generation Planning Using

Improved Hereford Ranch Algorithmrdquo Electric Power Systems Research Elsevier

Vol 47 No 1 pp47-55 Oct 1998

[88] W Kellogg MH Nehrir G Venkataramanan and V Gerez ldquoGeneration Unit

Sizing and Cost Analysis for Stand-Alone Wind Photovoltaic and Hybrid WindPV Systemsrdquo IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion Vol13 No 1 pp

70-75 March 1998

[89] J Cahill K Ritland and W Kelly Description of Electric Energy Use in Single

Family Residences in the Pacific Northwest 1986-1992 Office of Energy

Resources Bonneville Power Administration Portland OR December 1992

[810] J Duncan Glover Mulukutla S Sarma ldquoPower System Analysis and Design 3rd

Editionrdquo BrooksCole Thomson Learning Inc 2001

360

[811] R Yokoyama SH Bae T Morita and H Sasaki ldquoMultiobjective Optimal

Generation Dispatch Based on Probability Security Criteriardquo IEEE Transactions

on Power Systems pp 317-324 Vol 3 No 1 Feb 1988

[812] Online httpwwwpowerworldcom

361

CHAPTER 9

CONCLUSIONS

This dissertation is on modeling and control of a hybrid windPVFC alternative

energy system The main part of the dissertation focuses on the modeling of different

energy systems and the corresponding control scheme development Special emphasis is

put on the modeling and control of fuel cell systems

DG system modeling and control are two other aspects of the research presented in

the dissertation A hybrid alternative energy system has great potential for use as a DG

source Analytical methods for optimal placement of DG sources in power systems are

given in the dissertation

The conclusions of the research work reported in this dissertation are summarized

below

(1) Environmentally friendly and sustainable alternative energy systems will play

more important roles in the future electricity supply

(2) Dynamic models have been developed for the following fuel cells (PEMFCs and

SOFCs) variable speed wind energy conversion systems photovoltaic power generation

systems electrolyzers power electronic interfacing devices battery banks and

accessories including gas compressor high-pressure hydrogen storage tank and gas

pressure regulator These dynamic models are suitable for both detailed fast transient and

large time scale performance evaluation studies They can be used to expedite research

processes in related alternative energy areas such as system control and performance

optimization studies

362

(3) Control of grid-connected FC (PEMFC and SOFC) DG systems is investigated

Controller designs for the DCDC converter and 3-phase inverter are given using

linearized small-signal converterinverter models A dq transformed two-loop current

control scheme is used on the inverter to control the real and reactive power delivered

from the fuel cell system to the utility grid The validity of the proposed control schemes

over a large operating range was verified through simulations on switched nonlinear

converterinverter models Simulation results of the case studies show that the real and

reactive power delivered from the fuel cell system to the utility grid can be controlled as

desired while the DC bus voltage is maintained well within its prescribed range The

results also show that the fuel cell system is capable of load-following and can remain

stable under the occurrence of severe electrical faults It is noticed that a two-loop

inverter control scheme has advantage over a voltage only control scheme for the inverter

on fault protection and system stability

(4) A load transient mitigation control strategy is proposed for stand-alone fuel

cell-battery power generation systems The control strategy consists of a current

controller for the DCDC converter and a battery chargingdischarging controller to keep

the battery voltage within a desired range During load transients the fuel cell is

controlled (by the proposed transient mitigation technique) to supply the steady-state

power to the load while the battery will supply the transient power to the load Simulation

studies under different load transients have been carried for both the PEMFC system and

the SOFC system These studies show that the fuel cell current can be controlled as

desired and the battery voltage can be held in the prescribed range The results show that

the proposed load transient mitigation technique works well for both types of fuel cell

363

systems (PEMFC and SOFC) studied

(5) A hybrid windPVFC DG system is proposed in this dissertation Wind and PV

are the primary power sources of the system and the combination of FC and electrolyzer

is used as a backup and long term storage unit The different energy sources in the system

are integrated through an AC link bus The system can be used as test-bed system for

other related studies on hybrid alternative energy systems

(6) Based on the dynamic component models a simulation model for the proposed

hybrid windPVFC energy system has been developed successfully using

MATLABSimulink The overall power management strategy for coordinating the power

flows among the different energy sources is presented in the dissertation Simulation

studies have been carried out to verify the system performance under different scenarios

using practical load profile and real weather data The results show that the overall power

management strategy is effective and the power flows among the different energy sources

and the load demand is balanced successfully

(7) Analytical approaches are presented to determine the optimal location for placing

DG in both radial and networked systems to minimize power losses The proposed

approaches are not iterative algorithms like power flow programs Therefore there is no

convergence problem involved and results could be obtained very quickly A series of

simulation studies were also conducted to verify the validity of the proposed approaches

The results show that the proposed methods work well

364

APPENDICES

365

APPENDIX A

abc-dq0 TRANSFORMATION

366

abc-dq0 Transformation

The abc-dq0 transformation transfers 3-phase variables in abc stationary frame to a

rotating dq0 frame As explained in [462] the transformation can be expressed as

abcdqabcdq VTV 00 = (A1)

Where

=

0

0

V

V

V

V q

d

dq

=

c

b

a

abc

V

V

V

V

+

minus

+

minus

=

2

1

2

1

2

13

2cos

3

2cos)cos(

3

2sin

3

2sin)sin(

3

20

πθ

πθθ

πθ

πθθ

dqabcT θ(0)dξω(ξ)θ

t

0

+= int

θ is the angular position ω is the angular speed and ξ is the dummy variable of

integration For abc variables with constant frequency at 60 Hz and zero initial phase θ

can written as tπθ 120=

In (A1) V can represent voltage current flux linkage or electric charge For

balanced 3-phase AC variables in abc frame the corresponding dq0 components are DC

variables with zero value for 0 component Therefore an abc-dq transformation given in

(A2) can be used in this case

+

minus

+

minus=

3

2cos

3

2cos)cos(

3

2sin

3

2sin)sin(

3

2 π

θπ

θθ

πθ

πθθ

dqabcT (A2)

367

dq0-abc Transformation

The inverses dq0-abc transformation can be expressed as

( ) ( )

+

+

minus

minus== minus

13

π2cos

3

π2sin

13

π2cos

3

π2sin

1cossin

)( 1

00

θθ

θθ

θθ

dqabcabcdq TT (A3)

The corresponding inverses dq-abc transformation is

( ) ( )

+

+

minus

minus=

3

π2cos

3

π2sin

3

π2cos

3

π2sin

cossin

θθ

θθ

θθ

abcdqT (A4)

368

APPENDIX B

SIMULATION DIAGRAMS OF THE HYBRID ENERGY SYSTEM

369

If Wspeed lt3 ms turn the CB OFF

3 C

2 B

1 A

Vabc (pu)

Vd_ref (pu)

Vq_ref (pu)

Enable

dq voltage controller

Enable

power control

generate dq control signal

for voltage controller

3

const

[Windspeed]

Wind speed

WindSpeed

V+

V- Wind Turbine

com

A B C

a b c

WTG CB

Pwtginvmat

To File5

Timer

ON 02s

Vabc

Iabc

A B C

a b c

Three-Phase

V-I Measurement

gt=

Relational

Operator

Multiply

Vabc

A B C

a b c

Measure2

Vabc

Iabc

PQ

Instantaneous P amp Q

[Pwin_inv]

Goto

[qctrl_win_inv]

From3

[dctrl_win_inv]

From2

[Windspeed]

From1

Demux

A B C

A B C

Coupling Inductor

dq_ref (pu)

DC +

DC -

A B C

Averaged model for 3phase inverter

A B C

A B C 005km

AWG ACSR 61

2

WTGCB Ctrl

1=ON 0=OFF

1

Wspeed

(ms)

Figure B1 Sim

ulink m

odel for the wind energy conversion system

370

It is a 1612 array For each unit the power rate is 173W at 1000 Wm^2 irradiancen and 25 C cell temperature

The total power rate is about 30kW under 1000 Wm^2 and 25 C

3 C

2 B

1 A

[pvqctrl]

qctrl

[Irradiance]

irradiance

[pvdctrl]

dctrl

Vabc (pu)

Vd_ref (pu)

Vq_ref (pu)

Enable

dq

controller

-6

const2

0

const1

116

1e-5s+1

Transfer Fcn

To avoid algebraic loop1

Ppv_invmat

To File5

Upvmat

To File4

Tpvmat

To File3

Vabc

Iabc

A B C

a b c

Three-Phase

V-I Measurement

Terminator4

Saturation2

Relay1

Relay

Product3

[Ppv_inv]

Ppv_inv com

A B C

a b c

PV CB

Irradiance

Ipv (A)

Tambient (C)

Upv Tc

Pmax

PV

InOut

PI

Vabc

IabcPQ

P amp Q

Vabc

A B C

a b c

Measure

[Ipv]

Ipv (A)

-K-

Gain1

12 Gain

[Irradiance]

From7

[mpvVdc]

From6

[Irradiance]

From5

[Irradiance]

From4

[pvqctrl]

From3

[Ipv]

From29

[pvdctrl]

From2

[Pepv]

From1

AirTempData

From

Workspace1

sin(u)

Fcn1

cos(u)

Fcn

Demux

Dead Zone

A B C

A B C

Coupling

Inductor

s

-+

CVS

i+

-

CM A

DC_IN+

DC_IN-DC_OUT+

DC_OUT-

Buck DCDC

dq_ref (pu)

DC +

DC -

A B C

Averaged model for 3phase inverter

gt=10

gt= 30Wm2

gt= 300Wm^2

A B C

A B C

1200 km

AWG ACSR 61

0-026

2

PVCB Ctrl

1=ON 0=OFF

1

Irradiance (Wm^2)

Figure B2 Sim

ulink m

odel for the solar energy conversion system

371

1

nH2used (mols)

3 C

2 B

1 A

Vabc (pu)

Vd_ref (pu)

Vq_ref (pu)

Enable

dq

voltage controller

Pdemand (W)

PFC_out (W)

Enable

dctrl

qctrl

power control

generate d q control signal

for voltage controller

v+ -

Vfc

PFC_invmat

To File5

PanodeFCmat

To File4

H2usedmat

To File2

Vfcmat

To File1

com

A B C

a b c

Three-Phase Breaker

Vabc

Iabc

A B C

a b c

Three-Phase

V-I Measurement

Panode (atm) nH2

FC+ FC-

PEMFC

Stack

Vabc

A B C

a b c

Measure2

Vabc

Iabc

PQ

Instantaneous P amp Q

1

Initial value of

the output pressure

[mPFC_inv]

Goto3

[Panode_fc]

Goto1

Pref (atm)

Pstorage (atm)

qo (mols)

Po_ini (atm)

Po (atm)

Gas Pressure Actutator

[Panode_fc]

From2

[mPFC_inv]

From1

1

Enabled always

15

Desired pressure

Demux

DC_IN+

DC_IN-

DC_OUT+

DC_OUT-

DCDC Boost

A B C

A B C

Coupling

Inductor

dq_ref (pu)

DC +

DC -

A B C

Averaged model for 3phase inverter

A B C

A B C

150 km

AWG ACSR 61

3

Pstorage (atm)

2

Pdemand (W)

1

FCCB Ctrl

1=ON 0=OFF

Figure B3 Sim

ulink m

odel for the fuel cell and the gas pressure regulation system

372

1

Ptank (atm)

3C2B1A

1

unity PF

Pava

Pused

elec_rectg

power control

14400

m0

1000

const

H2genmat

To File5

Pavamat

To File3

Pcompmat

To File2

Ptankmat

To File1

Terminator

Switch

n (flow rate)

Pcomp

Polytropic Compressor

n_in

n_out

m0

P (atm)

H2 storage tank

[Pcompressor]

Goto3

[Pcompressor]

From1

[Pdcrect_elec]

From

Tambient (C)

Tcm_in(C)

H2 (mols)

Tc

DC +

DC -

Electrolyzer

50kW 40 stacks in series

Gate (0-1)

PF (01-1)

A B C

DC +

DC-

Controllable Rectifier

Simplified average model

25

Constant2

25

Constant1

2

Pava (W)

1

nH2_FC

Figure B4 Sim

ulink m

odel for the electrolyzer and the gas compression system

373

APPENDIX C

MATLAB PROGRAMS FOR DG OPTIMAL PLACEMENT

374

DG Optimal Program for the IEEE 6-Bus system

Y matrix of the system 1 2 3 4 5 6 Y = [ 278-497j+0005-1j -072+165j 0 0 -042+12j -163+212j -072+165j 145-329j -072+165j 0 0 0 0 -072+165j 145-329j -072+165j 0 0 0 0 -072+165j 145-329j -072+165j 0 -042+12j 0 0 -072+165j 187-450j+0005-1j -072+165j -163+212j 0 0 0 -072+165j 236-377j]

Assume Xd and R of the Generator is R +jX = 0005+j1 Load data in the system corresponding to different buses Demand = [0 4+10i 725+20i 5+125i 0 5+15i] MVA Demand = abs(Demand)

f(i) = Sum(LiPi^2) objective function or f(i) = Sum(LiSi^2) objective function Li is the equivalent length from the DG location to load Pi or Si i is the bus number i=12 N Target find the i which yields the minimum value of f(i) BUSNO=6 fobj = zeros(BUSNO 1) for busno=1BUSNO Z = GetEqImpedance(Y 1 busno) Req = real(Z) fobj(1) = fobj(1) + ReqDemand(busno)^2 end for dg=2BUSNO move dg to different buses Y1 = changeYmatrix(Ydg) connect the bus dg with bus 1 for busno=1BUSNO if the dg location bus no is the same as the load bus no then line

power loss can be set to 0 if busno == dg

Z = 0 elseif busno lt dg Z = GetEqImpedance(Y1 1 busno) else Z = GetEqImpedance(Y1 1 busno-1) end Req = real(Z) fobj(dg) = fobj(dg) + ReqDemand(busno)^2 end end fobj

375

DG Optimal Program for the IEEE 30-Bus system

Assume Yg =1(0005+j11) for Synchronous Generator

Yc = 1(0008+j18) for Synchronous Condenser (Refer to Glovers Book) Generating Y matrix (imported from PowerWorld) j = sqrt(-1) Yg = 1(0005+j11) Yc = 1(0008+j18) Ybus = zeros(3030) Ybus( 1 1) = 67655+ j( -212316) + Yg Ybus( 1 2) = -52246+ j( 156467) Ybus( 1 3) = -15409+ j( 56317) Ybus( 2 1) = -52246+ j( 156467) Ybus( 2 2) = 97523+ j( -306487) + Yg Ybus( 2 4) = -17055+ j( 51974) Ybus( 2 5) = -11360+ j( 47725) Ybus( 2 6) = -16861+ j( 51165) Ybus( 3 1) = -15409+ j( 56317) Ybus( 3 3) = 97363+ j( -291379) Ybus( 3 4) = -81954+ j( 235309) Ybus( 4 2) = -17055+ j( 51974) Ybus( 4 3) = -81954+ j( 235309) Ybus( 4 4) = 163141+ j( -549186) Ybus( 4 6) = -64131+ j( 223112) Ybus( 4 12) = -00000+ j( 39062) Ybus( 5 2) = -11360+ j( 47725) Ybus( 5 5) = 40900+ j( -121906) + Yc Ybus( 5 7) = -29540+ j( 74493) Ybus( 6 2) = -16861+ j( 51165) Ybus( 6 4) = -64131+ j( 223112) Ybus( 6 6) = 223416+ j( -824934) Ybus( 6 7) = -35902+ j( 110261) Ybus( 6 8) = -62893+ j( 220126) Ybus( 6 9) = -00000+ j( 48077) Ybus( 6 10) = -00000+ j( 17986) Ybus( 6 28) = -43628+ j( 154636) Ybus( 7 5) = -29540+ j( 74493) Ybus( 7 6) = -35902+ j( 110261) Ybus( 7 7) = 65442+ j( -184567) Ybus( 8 6) = -62893+ j( 220126) Ybus( 8 8) = 77333+ j( -265275) + Yc Ybus( 8 28) = -14440+ j( 45408) Ybus( 9 6) = -00000+ j( 48077) Ybus( 9 9) = 00000+ j( -187063) Ybus( 9 10) = -00000+ j( 90909) Ybus( 9 11) = -00000+ j( 48077) Ybus( 10 6) = -00000+ j( 17986) Ybus( 10 9) = -00000+ j( 90909) Ybus( 10 10) = 134621+ j( -415738)

376

Ybus( 10 17) = -39560+ j( 103174) Ybus( 10 20) = -17848+ j( 39854) Ybus( 10 21) = -51019+ j( 109807) Ybus( 10 22) = -26193+ j( 54008) Ybus( 11 9) = -00000+ j( 48077) Ybus( 11 11) = 00000+ j( -48077) + Yc Ybus( 12 4) = -00000+ j( 39062) Ybus( 12 12) = 65740+ j( -244242) Ybus( 12 13) = -00000+ j( 71429) Ybus( 12 14) = -15266+ j( 31734) Ybus( 12 15) = -30954+ j( 60973) Ybus( 12 16) = -19520+ j( 41044) Ybus( 13 12) = -00000+ j( 71429) Ybus( 13 13) = 00000+ j( -71429) + Yc Ybus( 14 12) = -15266+ j( 31734) Ybus( 14 14) = 40175+ j( -54243) Ybus( 14 15) = -24910+ j( 22509) Ybus( 15 12) = -30954+ j( 60973) Ybus( 15 14) = -24910+ j( 22509) Ybus( 15 15) = 93655+ j( -160116) Ybus( 15 18) = -18108+ j( 36874) Ybus( 15 23) = -19683+ j( 39761) Ybus( 16 12) = -19520+ j( 41044) Ybus( 16 16) = 32596+ j( -89257) Ybus( 16 17) = -13076+ j( 48213) Ybus( 17 10) = -39560+ j( 103174) Ybus( 17 16) = -13076+ j( 48213) Ybus( 17 17) = 52637+ j( -151388) Ybus( 18 15) = -18108+ j( 36874) Ybus( 18 18) = 48865+ j( -99062) Ybus( 18 19) = -30757+ j( 62188) Ybus( 19 18) = -30757+ j( 62188) Ybus( 19 19) = 89580+ j( -179835) Ybus( 19 20) = -58824+ j( 117647) Ybus( 20 10) = -17848+ j( 39854) Ybus( 20 19) = -58824+ j( 117647) Ybus( 20 20) = 76672+ j( -157501) Ybus( 21 10) = -51019+ j( 109807) Ybus( 21 21) = 218765+ j( -451084) Ybus( 21 22) = -167746+ j( 341277) Ybus( 22 10) = -26193+ j( 54008) Ybus( 22 21) = -167746+ j( 341277) Ybus( 22 22) = 219345+ j( -434829) Ybus( 22 24) = -25405+ j( 39544) Ybus( 23 15) = -19683+ j( 39761) Ybus( 23 23) = 34298+ j( -69653) Ybus( 23 24) = -14614+ j( 29892) Ybus( 24 22) = -25405+ j( 39544) Ybus( 24 23) = -14614+ j( 29892) Ybus( 24 24) = 53118+ j( -92313) Ybus( 24 25) = -13099+ j( 22876) Ybus( 25 24) = -13099+ j( 22876) Ybus( 25 25) = 44957+ j( -78650) Ybus( 25 26) = -12165+ j( 18171) Ybus( 25 27) = -19693+ j( 37602)

377

Ybus( 26 25) = -12165+ j( 18171) Ybus( 26 26) = 12165+ j( -18171) Ybus( 27 25) = -19693+ j( 37602) Ybus( 27 27) = 36523+ j( -94604) Ybus( 27 28) = -00000+ j( 25253) Ybus( 27 29) = -09955+ j( 18810) Ybus( 27 30) = -06875+ j( 12940) Ybus( 28 6) = -43628+ j( 154636) Ybus( 28 8) = -14440+ j( 45408) Ybus( 28 27) = -00000+ j( 25253) Ybus( 28 28) = 58068+ j( -225016) Ybus( 29 27) = -09955+ j( 18810) Ybus( 29 29) = 19076+ j( -36044) Ybus( 29 30) = -09121+ j( 17234) Ybus( 30 27) = -06875+ j( 12940) Ybus( 30 29) = -09121+ j( 17234) Ybus( 30 30) = 15995+ j( -30173) BUSNO=30 Load data in the system corresponding to different buses Demand = zeros(1BUSNO) MVA Demand(1)= 00 Demand(2)= 00 Demand(3)= 24 + j12 Demand(4)= 76 + j16 Demand(5)= 942 + j190 Demand(6)= 00 Demand(7)= 228 + j109 Demand(8)= 300 + j300 Demand(9)= 00 Demand(10)= 58 + j20 Demand(11)= 00 Demand(12)= 112 + j75 Demand(13)= 00 Demand(14)= 62 + j16 Demand(15)= 82 + j25 Demand(16)= 35 + j18 Demand(17)= 90 + j58 Demand(18)= 32 + j09 Demand(19)= 95 + j34 Demand(20)= 22 + j07 Demand(21)= 175 + j112 Demand(22)= 00 Demand(23)= 32 + j16 Demand(24)= 87 + j67 Demand(25)= 00 Demand(26)= 35 + j23 Demand(27)= 00 Demand(28)= 00 Demand(29)= 24 + j09 Demand(30)= 106 + j19

378

Demand = abs(Demand) MVA Demand = Demand10 f(i) = Sum(LiPi^2) objective function or f(i) = Sum(LiSi^2) objective function Li is the equivalent length from the DG loaction to load Pi or Si i is thebus number i=12 N Target find the i which yields the minimum value of f(i) BUSNO=30 fobj = zeros(BUSNO 1) for busno=1BUSNO Z = GetEqImpedance(Ybus 1 busno) Req = real(Z) fobj(1) = fobj(1) + ReqDemand(busno)^2 end for dg=2BUSNO move dg to different buses Y1 = changeYmatrix(Ybusdg) connect the bus dg with bus 1 for busno=1BUSNO if busno == dg

if the dg location bus no is the same as the load bus no then line

power loss can be set to 0 Z = 0 elseif busno lt dg Z = GetEqImpedance(Y1 1 busno) else Z = GetEqImpedance(Y1 1 busno-1) end Req = real(Z) fobj(dg) = fobj(dg) + ReqDemand(busno)^2 end end fobj